1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1998,
3 @c 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006
4 @c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
7 @c makeinfo ignores cmds prev to setfilename, so its arg cannot make use
8 @c of @set vars. However, you can override filename with makeinfo -o.
13 @settitle Debugging with @value{GDBN}
14 @setchapternewpage odd
25 @c readline appendices use @vindex, @findex and @ftable,
26 @c annotate.texi and gdbmi use @findex.
30 @c !!set GDB manual's edition---not the same as GDB version!
31 @c This is updated by GNU Press.
34 @c !!set GDB edit command default editor
37 @c THIS MANUAL REQUIRES TEXINFO 4.0 OR LATER.
39 @c This is a dir.info fragment to support semi-automated addition of
40 @c manuals to an info tree.
41 @dircategory Software development
43 * Gdb: (gdb). The GNU debugger.
47 This file documents the @sc{gnu} debugger @value{GDBN}.
50 This is the @value{EDITION} Edition, of @cite{Debugging with
51 @value{GDBN}: the @sc{gnu} Source-Level Debugger} for @value{GDBN}
52 Version @value{GDBVN}.
54 Copyright (C) 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1998,@*
55 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006@*
56 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
58 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
59 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
60 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the
61 Invariant Sections being ``Free Software'' and ``Free Software Needs
62 Free Documentation'', with the Front-Cover Texts being ``A GNU Manual,''
63 and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below.
65 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You are free to copy and modify
66 this GNU Manual. Buying copies from GNU Press supports the FSF in
67 developing GNU and promoting software freedom.''
71 @title Debugging with @value{GDBN}
72 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Source-Level Debugger
74 @subtitle @value{EDITION} Edition, for @value{GDBN} version @value{GDBVN}
75 @author Richard Stallman, Roland Pesch, Stan Shebs, et al.
79 \hfill (Send bugs and comments on @value{GDBN} to bug-gdb\@gnu.org.)\par
80 \hfill {\it Debugging with @value{GDBN}}\par
81 \hfill \TeX{}info \texinfoversion\par
85 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
86 Copyright @copyright{} 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
87 1996, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2006
88 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
90 Published by the Free Software Foundation @*
91 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor,
92 Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA@*
95 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
96 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
97 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the
98 Invariant Sections being ``Free Software'' and ``Free Software Needs
99 Free Documentation'', with the Front-Cover Texts being ``A GNU Manual,''
100 and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below.
102 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You are free to copy and modify
103 this GNU Manual. Buying copies from GNU Press supports the FSF in
104 developing GNU and promoting software freedom.''
106 This edition of the GDB manual is dedicated to the memory of Fred
107 Fish. Fred was a long-standing contributor to GDB and to Free
108 software in general. We will miss him.
113 @node Top, Summary, (dir), (dir)
115 @top Debugging with @value{GDBN}
117 This file describes @value{GDBN}, the @sc{gnu} symbolic debugger.
119 This is the @value{EDITION} Edition, for @value{GDBN} Version
122 Copyright (C) 1988-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
124 This edition of the GDB manual is dedicated to the memory of Fred
125 Fish. Fred was a long-standing contributor to GDB and to Free
126 software in general. We will miss him.
129 * Summary:: Summary of @value{GDBN}
130 * Sample Session:: A sample @value{GDBN} session
132 * Invocation:: Getting in and out of @value{GDBN}
133 * Commands:: @value{GDBN} commands
134 * Running:: Running programs under @value{GDBN}
135 * Stopping:: Stopping and continuing
136 * Stack:: Examining the stack
137 * Source:: Examining source files
138 * Data:: Examining data
139 * Macros:: Preprocessor Macros
140 * Tracepoints:: Debugging remote targets non-intrusively
141 * Overlays:: Debugging programs that use overlays
143 * Languages:: Using @value{GDBN} with different languages
145 * Symbols:: Examining the symbol table
146 * Altering:: Altering execution
147 * GDB Files:: @value{GDBN} files
148 * Targets:: Specifying a debugging target
149 * Remote Debugging:: Debugging remote programs
150 * Configurations:: Configuration-specific information
151 * Controlling GDB:: Controlling @value{GDBN}
152 * Sequences:: Canned sequences of commands
153 * Interpreters:: Command Interpreters
154 * TUI:: @value{GDBN} Text User Interface
155 * Emacs:: Using @value{GDBN} under @sc{gnu} Emacs
156 * GDB/MI:: @value{GDBN}'s Machine Interface.
157 * Annotations:: @value{GDBN}'s annotation interface.
159 * GDB Bugs:: Reporting bugs in @value{GDBN}
161 * Command Line Editing:: Command Line Editing
162 * Using History Interactively:: Using History Interactively
163 * Formatting Documentation:: How to format and print @value{GDBN} documentation
164 * Installing GDB:: Installing GDB
165 * Maintenance Commands:: Maintenance Commands
166 * Remote Protocol:: GDB Remote Serial Protocol
167 * Agent Expressions:: The GDB Agent Expression Mechanism
168 * Target Descriptions:: How targets can describe themselves to
170 * Copying:: GNU General Public License says
171 how you can copy and share GDB
172 * GNU Free Documentation License:: The license for this documentation
181 @unnumbered Summary of @value{GDBN}
183 The purpose of a debugger such as @value{GDBN} is to allow you to see what is
184 going on ``inside'' another program while it executes---or what another
185 program was doing at the moment it crashed.
187 @value{GDBN} can do four main kinds of things (plus other things in support of
188 these) to help you catch bugs in the act:
192 Start your program, specifying anything that might affect its behavior.
195 Make your program stop on specified conditions.
198 Examine what has happened, when your program has stopped.
201 Change things in your program, so you can experiment with correcting the
202 effects of one bug and go on to learn about another.
205 You can use @value{GDBN} to debug programs written in C and C@t{++}.
206 For more information, see @ref{Supported Languages,,Supported Languages}.
207 For more information, see @ref{C,,C and C++}.
210 Support for Modula-2 is partial. For information on Modula-2, see
211 @ref{Modula-2,,Modula-2}.
214 Debugging Pascal programs which use sets, subranges, file variables, or
215 nested functions does not currently work. @value{GDBN} does not support
216 entering expressions, printing values, or similar features using Pascal
220 @value{GDBN} can be used to debug programs written in Fortran, although
221 it may be necessary to refer to some variables with a trailing
224 @value{GDBN} can be used to debug programs written in Objective-C,
225 using either the Apple/NeXT or the GNU Objective-C runtime.
228 * Free Software:: Freely redistributable software
229 * Contributors:: Contributors to GDB
233 @unnumberedsec Free Software
235 @value{GDBN} is @dfn{free software}, protected by the @sc{gnu}
236 General Public License
237 (GPL). The GPL gives you the freedom to copy or adapt a licensed
238 program---but every person getting a copy also gets with it the
239 freedom to modify that copy (which means that they must get access to
240 the source code), and the freedom to distribute further copies.
241 Typical software companies use copyrights to limit your freedoms; the
242 Free Software Foundation uses the GPL to preserve these freedoms.
244 Fundamentally, the General Public License is a license which says that
245 you have these freedoms and that you cannot take these freedoms away
248 @unnumberedsec Free Software Needs Free Documentation
250 The biggest deficiency in the free software community today is not in
251 the software---it is the lack of good free documentation that we can
252 include with the free software. Many of our most important
253 programs do not come with free reference manuals and free introductory
254 texts. Documentation is an essential part of any software package;
255 when an important free software package does not come with a free
256 manual and a free tutorial, that is a major gap. We have many such
259 Consider Perl, for instance. The tutorial manuals that people
260 normally use are non-free. How did this come about? Because the
261 authors of those manuals published them with restrictive terms---no
262 copying, no modification, source files not available---which exclude
263 them from the free software world.
265 That wasn't the first time this sort of thing happened, and it was far
266 from the last. Many times we have heard a GNU user eagerly describe a
267 manual that he is writing, his intended contribution to the community,
268 only to learn that he had ruined everything by signing a publication
269 contract to make it non-free.
271 Free documentation, like free software, is a matter of freedom, not
272 price. The problem with the non-free manual is not that publishers
273 charge a price for printed copies---that in itself is fine. (The Free
274 Software Foundation sells printed copies of manuals, too.) The
275 problem is the restrictions on the use of the manual. Free manuals
276 are available in source code form, and give you permission to copy and
277 modify. Non-free manuals do not allow this.
279 The criteria of freedom for a free manual are roughly the same as for
280 free software. Redistribution (including the normal kinds of
281 commercial redistribution) must be permitted, so that the manual can
282 accompany every copy of the program, both on-line and on paper.
284 Permission for modification of the technical content is crucial too.
285 When people modify the software, adding or changing features, if they
286 are conscientious they will change the manual too---so they can
287 provide accurate and clear documentation for the modified program. A
288 manual that leaves you no choice but to write a new manual to document
289 a changed version of the program is not really available to our
292 Some kinds of limits on the way modification is handled are
293 acceptable. For example, requirements to preserve the original
294 author's copyright notice, the distribution terms, or the list of
295 authors, are ok. It is also no problem to require modified versions
296 to include notice that they were modified. Even entire sections that
297 may not be deleted or changed are acceptable, as long as they deal
298 with nontechnical topics (like this one). These kinds of restrictions
299 are acceptable because they don't obstruct the community's normal use
302 However, it must be possible to modify all the @emph{technical}
303 content of the manual, and then distribute the result in all the usual
304 media, through all the usual channels. Otherwise, the restrictions
305 obstruct the use of the manual, it is not free, and we need another
306 manual to replace it.
308 Please spread the word about this issue. Our community continues to
309 lose manuals to proprietary publishing. If we spread the word that
310 free software needs free reference manuals and free tutorials, perhaps
311 the next person who wants to contribute by writing documentation will
312 realize, before it is too late, that only free manuals contribute to
313 the free software community.
315 If you are writing documentation, please insist on publishing it under
316 the GNU Free Documentation License or another free documentation
317 license. Remember that this decision requires your approval---you
318 don't have to let the publisher decide. Some commercial publishers
319 will use a free license if you insist, but they will not propose the
320 option; it is up to you to raise the issue and say firmly that this is
321 what you want. If the publisher you are dealing with refuses, please
322 try other publishers. If you're not sure whether a proposed license
323 is free, write to @email{licensing@@gnu.org}.
325 You can encourage commercial publishers to sell more free, copylefted
326 manuals and tutorials by buying them, and particularly by buying
327 copies from the publishers that paid for their writing or for major
328 improvements. Meanwhile, try to avoid buying non-free documentation
329 at all. Check the distribution terms of a manual before you buy it,
330 and insist that whoever seeks your business must respect your freedom.
331 Check the history of the book, and try to reward the publishers that
332 have paid or pay the authors to work on it.
334 The Free Software Foundation maintains a list of free documentation
335 published by other publishers, at
336 @url{http://www.fsf.org/doc/other-free-books.html}.
339 @unnumberedsec Contributors to @value{GDBN}
341 Richard Stallman was the original author of @value{GDBN}, and of many
342 other @sc{gnu} programs. Many others have contributed to its
343 development. This section attempts to credit major contributors. One
344 of the virtues of free software is that everyone is free to contribute
345 to it; with regret, we cannot actually acknowledge everyone here. The
346 file @file{ChangeLog} in the @value{GDBN} distribution approximates a
347 blow-by-blow account.
349 Changes much prior to version 2.0 are lost in the mists of time.
352 @emph{Plea:} Additions to this section are particularly welcome. If you
353 or your friends (or enemies, to be evenhanded) have been unfairly
354 omitted from this list, we would like to add your names!
357 So that they may not regard their many labors as thankless, we
358 particularly thank those who shepherded @value{GDBN} through major
360 Andrew Cagney (releases 6.3, 6.2, 6.1, 6.0, 5.3, 5.2, 5.1 and 5.0);
361 Jim Blandy (release 4.18);
362 Jason Molenda (release 4.17);
363 Stan Shebs (release 4.14);
364 Fred Fish (releases 4.16, 4.15, 4.13, 4.12, 4.11, 4.10, and 4.9);
365 Stu Grossman and John Gilmore (releases 4.8, 4.7, 4.6, 4.5, and 4.4);
366 John Gilmore (releases 4.3, 4.2, 4.1, 4.0, and 3.9);
367 Jim Kingdon (releases 3.5, 3.4, and 3.3);
368 and Randy Smith (releases 3.2, 3.1, and 3.0).
370 Richard Stallman, assisted at various times by Peter TerMaat, Chris
371 Hanson, and Richard Mlynarik, handled releases through 2.8.
373 Michael Tiemann is the author of most of the @sc{gnu} C@t{++} support
374 in @value{GDBN}, with significant additional contributions from Per
375 Bothner and Daniel Berlin. James Clark wrote the @sc{gnu} C@t{++}
376 demangler. Early work on C@t{++} was by Peter TerMaat (who also did
377 much general update work leading to release 3.0).
379 @value{GDBN} uses the BFD subroutine library to examine multiple
380 object-file formats; BFD was a joint project of David V.
381 Henkel-Wallace, Rich Pixley, Steve Chamberlain, and John Gilmore.
383 David Johnson wrote the original COFF support; Pace Willison did
384 the original support for encapsulated COFF.
386 Brent Benson of Harris Computer Systems contributed DWARF 2 support.
388 Adam de Boor and Bradley Davis contributed the ISI Optimum V support.
389 Per Bothner, Noboyuki Hikichi, and Alessandro Forin contributed MIPS
391 Jean-Daniel Fekete contributed Sun 386i support.
392 Chris Hanson improved the HP9000 support.
393 Noboyuki Hikichi and Tomoyuki Hasei contributed Sony/News OS 3 support.
394 David Johnson contributed Encore Umax support.
395 Jyrki Kuoppala contributed Altos 3068 support.
396 Jeff Law contributed HP PA and SOM support.
397 Keith Packard contributed NS32K support.
398 Doug Rabson contributed Acorn Risc Machine support.
399 Bob Rusk contributed Harris Nighthawk CX-UX support.
400 Chris Smith contributed Convex support (and Fortran debugging).
401 Jonathan Stone contributed Pyramid support.
402 Michael Tiemann contributed SPARC support.
403 Tim Tucker contributed support for the Gould NP1 and Gould Powernode.
404 Pace Willison contributed Intel 386 support.
405 Jay Vosburgh contributed Symmetry support.
406 Marko Mlinar contributed OpenRISC 1000 support.
408 Andreas Schwab contributed M68K @sc{gnu}/Linux support.
410 Rich Schaefer and Peter Schauer helped with support of SunOS shared
413 Jay Fenlason and Roland McGrath ensured that @value{GDBN} and GAS agree
414 about several machine instruction sets.
416 Patrick Duval, Ted Goldstein, Vikram Koka and Glenn Engel helped develop
417 remote debugging. Intel Corporation, Wind River Systems, AMD, and ARM
418 contributed remote debugging modules for the i960, VxWorks, A29K UDI,
419 and RDI targets, respectively.
421 Brian Fox is the author of the readline libraries providing
422 command-line editing and command history.
424 Andrew Beers of SUNY Buffalo wrote the language-switching code, the
425 Modula-2 support, and contributed the Languages chapter of this manual.
427 Fred Fish wrote most of the support for Unix System Vr4.
428 He also enhanced the command-completion support to cover C@t{++} overloaded
431 Hitachi America (now Renesas America), Ltd. sponsored the support for
432 H8/300, H8/500, and Super-H processors.
434 NEC sponsored the support for the v850, Vr4xxx, and Vr5xxx processors.
436 Mitsubishi (now Renesas) sponsored the support for D10V, D30V, and M32R/D
439 Toshiba sponsored the support for the TX39 Mips processor.
441 Matsushita sponsored the support for the MN10200 and MN10300 processors.
443 Fujitsu sponsored the support for SPARClite and FR30 processors.
445 Kung Hsu, Jeff Law, and Rick Sladkey added support for hardware
448 Michael Snyder added support for tracepoints.
450 Stu Grossman wrote gdbserver.
452 Jim Kingdon, Peter Schauer, Ian Taylor, and Stu Grossman made
453 nearly innumerable bug fixes and cleanups throughout @value{GDBN}.
455 The following people at the Hewlett-Packard Company contributed
456 support for the PA-RISC 2.0 architecture, HP-UX 10.20, 10.30, and 11.0
457 (narrow mode), HP's implementation of kernel threads, HP's aC@t{++}
458 compiler, and the Text User Interface (nee Terminal User Interface):
459 Ben Krepp, Richard Title, John Bishop, Susan Macchia, Kathy Mann,
460 Satish Pai, India Paul, Steve Rehrauer, and Elena Zannoni. Kim Haase
461 provided HP-specific information in this manual.
463 DJ Delorie ported @value{GDBN} to MS-DOS, for the DJGPP project.
464 Robert Hoehne made significant contributions to the DJGPP port.
466 Cygnus Solutions has sponsored @value{GDBN} maintenance and much of its
467 development since 1991. Cygnus engineers who have worked on @value{GDBN}
468 fulltime include Mark Alexander, Jim Blandy, Per Bothner, Kevin
469 Buettner, Edith Epstein, Chris Faylor, Fred Fish, Martin Hunt, Jim
470 Ingham, John Gilmore, Stu Grossman, Kung Hsu, Jim Kingdon, John Metzler,
471 Fernando Nasser, Geoffrey Noer, Dawn Perchik, Rich Pixley, Zdenek
472 Radouch, Keith Seitz, Stan Shebs, David Taylor, and Elena Zannoni. In
473 addition, Dave Brolley, Ian Carmichael, Steve Chamberlain, Nick Clifton,
474 JT Conklin, Stan Cox, DJ Delorie, Ulrich Drepper, Frank Eigler, Doug
475 Evans, Sean Fagan, David Henkel-Wallace, Richard Henderson, Jeff
476 Holcomb, Jeff Law, Jim Lemke, Tom Lord, Bob Manson, Michael Meissner,
477 Jason Merrill, Catherine Moore, Drew Moseley, Ken Raeburn, Gavin
478 Romig-Koch, Rob Savoye, Jamie Smith, Mike Stump, Ian Taylor, Angela
479 Thomas, Michael Tiemann, Tom Tromey, Ron Unrau, Jim Wilson, and David
480 Zuhn have made contributions both large and small.
482 Andrew Cagney, Fernando Nasser, and Elena Zannoni, while working for
483 Cygnus Solutions, implemented the original @sc{gdb/mi} interface.
485 Jim Blandy added support for preprocessor macros, while working for Red
488 Andrew Cagney designed @value{GDBN}'s architecture vector. Many
489 people including Andrew Cagney, Stephane Carrez, Randolph Chung, Nick
490 Duffek, Richard Henderson, Mark Kettenis, Grace Sainsbury, Kei
491 Sakamoto, Yoshinori Sato, Michael Snyder, Andreas Schwab, Jason
492 Thorpe, Corinna Vinschen, Ulrich Weigand, and Elena Zannoni, helped
493 with the migration of old architectures to this new framework.
495 Andrew Cagney completely re-designed and re-implemented @value{GDBN}'s
496 unwinder framework, this consisting of a fresh new design featuring
497 frame IDs, independent frame sniffers, and the sentinel frame. Mark
498 Kettenis implemented the @sc{dwarf 2} unwinder, Jeff Johnston the
499 libunwind unwinder, and Andrew Cagney the dummy, sentinel, tramp, and
500 trad unwinders. The architecture-specific changes, each involving a
501 complete rewrite of the architecture's frame code, were carried out by
502 Jim Blandy, Joel Brobecker, Kevin Buettner, Andrew Cagney, Stephane
503 Carrez, Randolph Chung, Orjan Friberg, Richard Henderson, Daniel
504 Jacobowitz, Jeff Johnston, Mark Kettenis, Theodore A. Roth, Kei
505 Sakamoto, Yoshinori Sato, Michael Snyder, Corinna Vinschen, and Ulrich
508 Christian Zankel, Ross Morley, Bob Wilson, and Maxim Grigoriev from
509 Tensilica, Inc.@: contributed support for Xtensa processors. Others
510 who have worked on the Xtensa port of @value{GDBN} in the past include
511 Steve Tjiang, John Newlin, and Scott Foehner.
514 @chapter A Sample @value{GDBN} Session
516 You can use this manual at your leisure to read all about @value{GDBN}.
517 However, a handful of commands are enough to get started using the
518 debugger. This chapter illustrates those commands.
521 In this sample session, we emphasize user input like this: @b{input},
522 to make it easier to pick out from the surrounding output.
525 @c FIXME: this example may not be appropriate for some configs, where
526 @c FIXME...primary interest is in remote use.
528 One of the preliminary versions of @sc{gnu} @code{m4} (a generic macro
529 processor) exhibits the following bug: sometimes, when we change its
530 quote strings from the default, the commands used to capture one macro
531 definition within another stop working. In the following short @code{m4}
532 session, we define a macro @code{foo} which expands to @code{0000}; we
533 then use the @code{m4} built-in @code{defn} to define @code{bar} as the
534 same thing. However, when we change the open quote string to
535 @code{<QUOTE>} and the close quote string to @code{<UNQUOTE>}, the same
536 procedure fails to define a new synonym @code{baz}:
545 @b{define(bar,defn(`foo'))}
549 @b{changequote(<QUOTE>,<UNQUOTE>)}
551 @b{define(baz,defn(<QUOTE>foo<UNQUOTE>))}
554 m4: End of input: 0: fatal error: EOF in string
558 Let us use @value{GDBN} to try to see what is going on.
561 $ @b{@value{GDBP} m4}
562 @c FIXME: this falsifies the exact text played out, to permit smallbook
563 @c FIXME... format to come out better.
564 @value{GDBN} is free software and you are welcome to distribute copies
565 of it under certain conditions; type "show copying" to see
567 There is absolutely no warranty for @value{GDBN}; type "show warranty"
570 @value{GDBN} @value{GDBVN}, Copyright 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc...
575 @value{GDBN} reads only enough symbol data to know where to find the
576 rest when needed; as a result, the first prompt comes up very quickly.
577 We now tell @value{GDBN} to use a narrower display width than usual, so
578 that examples fit in this manual.
581 (@value{GDBP}) @b{set width 70}
585 We need to see how the @code{m4} built-in @code{changequote} works.
586 Having looked at the source, we know the relevant subroutine is
587 @code{m4_changequote}, so we set a breakpoint there with the @value{GDBN}
588 @code{break} command.
591 (@value{GDBP}) @b{break m4_changequote}
592 Breakpoint 1 at 0x62f4: file builtin.c, line 879.
596 Using the @code{run} command, we start @code{m4} running under @value{GDBN}
597 control; as long as control does not reach the @code{m4_changequote}
598 subroutine, the program runs as usual:
601 (@value{GDBP}) @b{run}
602 Starting program: /work/Editorial/gdb/gnu/m4/m4
610 To trigger the breakpoint, we call @code{changequote}. @value{GDBN}
611 suspends execution of @code{m4}, displaying information about the
612 context where it stops.
615 @b{changequote(<QUOTE>,<UNQUOTE>)}
617 Breakpoint 1, m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
619 879 if (bad_argc(TOKEN_DATA_TEXT(argv[0]),argc,1,3))
623 Now we use the command @code{n} (@code{next}) to advance execution to
624 the next line of the current function.
628 882 set_quotes((argc >= 2) ? TOKEN_DATA_TEXT(argv[1])\
633 @code{set_quotes} looks like a promising subroutine. We can go into it
634 by using the command @code{s} (@code{step}) instead of @code{next}.
635 @code{step} goes to the next line to be executed in @emph{any}
636 subroutine, so it steps into @code{set_quotes}.
640 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<QUOTE>", rq=0x34c88 "<UNQUOTE>")
642 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
646 The display that shows the subroutine where @code{m4} is now
647 suspended (and its arguments) is called a stack frame display. It
648 shows a summary of the stack. We can use the @code{backtrace}
649 command (which can also be spelled @code{bt}), to see where we are
650 in the stack as a whole: the @code{backtrace} command displays a
651 stack frame for each active subroutine.
654 (@value{GDBP}) @b{bt}
655 #0 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<QUOTE>", rq=0x34c88 "<UNQUOTE>")
657 #1 0x6344 in m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
659 #2 0x8174 in expand_macro (sym=0x33320) at macro.c:242
660 #3 0x7a88 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=209696, td=0xf7fffa30)
662 #4 0x79dc in expand_input () at macro.c:40
663 #5 0x2930 in main (argc=0, argv=0xf7fffb20) at m4.c:195
667 We step through a few more lines to see what happens. The first two
668 times, we can use @samp{s}; the next two times we use @code{n} to avoid
669 falling into the @code{xstrdup} subroutine.
673 0x3b5c 532 if (rquote != def_rquote)
675 0x3b80 535 lquote = (lq == nil || *lq == '\0') ? \
676 def_lquote : xstrdup(lq);
678 536 rquote = (rq == nil || *rq == '\0') ? def_rquote\
681 538 len_lquote = strlen(rquote);
685 The last line displayed looks a little odd; we can examine the variables
686 @code{lquote} and @code{rquote} to see if they are in fact the new left
687 and right quotes we specified. We use the command @code{p}
688 (@code{print}) to see their values.
691 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p lquote}
692 $1 = 0x35d40 "<QUOTE>"
693 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p rquote}
694 $2 = 0x35d50 "<UNQUOTE>"
698 @code{lquote} and @code{rquote} are indeed the new left and right quotes.
699 To look at some context, we can display ten lines of source
700 surrounding the current line with the @code{l} (@code{list}) command.
706 535 lquote = (lq == nil || *lq == '\0') ? def_lquote\
708 536 rquote = (rq == nil || *rq == '\0') ? def_rquote\
711 538 len_lquote = strlen(rquote);
712 539 len_rquote = strlen(lquote);
719 Let us step past the two lines that set @code{len_lquote} and
720 @code{len_rquote}, and then examine the values of those variables.
724 539 len_rquote = strlen(lquote);
727 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_lquote}
729 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_rquote}
734 That certainly looks wrong, assuming @code{len_lquote} and
735 @code{len_rquote} are meant to be the lengths of @code{lquote} and
736 @code{rquote} respectively. We can set them to better values using
737 the @code{p} command, since it can print the value of
738 any expression---and that expression can include subroutine calls and
742 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_lquote=strlen(lquote)}
744 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_rquote=strlen(rquote)}
749 Is that enough to fix the problem of using the new quotes with the
750 @code{m4} built-in @code{defn}? We can allow @code{m4} to continue
751 executing with the @code{c} (@code{continue}) command, and then try the
752 example that caused trouble initially:
758 @b{define(baz,defn(<QUOTE>foo<UNQUOTE>))}
765 Success! The new quotes now work just as well as the default ones. The
766 problem seems to have been just the two typos defining the wrong
767 lengths. We allow @code{m4} exit by giving it an EOF as input:
771 Program exited normally.
775 The message @samp{Program exited normally.} is from @value{GDBN}; it
776 indicates @code{m4} has finished executing. We can end our @value{GDBN}
777 session with the @value{GDBN} @code{quit} command.
780 (@value{GDBP}) @b{quit}
784 @chapter Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}
786 This chapter discusses how to start @value{GDBN}, and how to get out of it.
790 type @samp{@value{GDBP}} to start @value{GDBN}.
792 type @kbd{quit} or @kbd{Ctrl-d} to exit.
796 * Invoking GDB:: How to start @value{GDBN}
797 * Quitting GDB:: How to quit @value{GDBN}
798 * Shell Commands:: How to use shell commands inside @value{GDBN}
799 * Logging Output:: How to log @value{GDBN}'s output to a file
803 @section Invoking @value{GDBN}
805 Invoke @value{GDBN} by running the program @code{@value{GDBP}}. Once started,
806 @value{GDBN} reads commands from the terminal until you tell it to exit.
808 You can also run @code{@value{GDBP}} with a variety of arguments and options,
809 to specify more of your debugging environment at the outset.
811 The command-line options described here are designed
812 to cover a variety of situations; in some environments, some of these
813 options may effectively be unavailable.
815 The most usual way to start @value{GDBN} is with one argument,
816 specifying an executable program:
819 @value{GDBP} @var{program}
823 You can also start with both an executable program and a core file
827 @value{GDBP} @var{program} @var{core}
830 You can, instead, specify a process ID as a second argument, if you want
831 to debug a running process:
834 @value{GDBP} @var{program} 1234
838 would attach @value{GDBN} to process @code{1234} (unless you also have a file
839 named @file{1234}; @value{GDBN} does check for a core file first).
841 Taking advantage of the second command-line argument requires a fairly
842 complete operating system; when you use @value{GDBN} as a remote
843 debugger attached to a bare board, there may not be any notion of
844 ``process'', and there is often no way to get a core dump. @value{GDBN}
845 will warn you if it is unable to attach or to read core dumps.
847 You can optionally have @code{@value{GDBP}} pass any arguments after the
848 executable file to the inferior using @code{--args}. This option stops
851 @value{GDBP} --args gcc -O2 -c foo.c
853 This will cause @code{@value{GDBP}} to debug @code{gcc}, and to set
854 @code{gcc}'s command-line arguments (@pxref{Arguments}) to @samp{-O2 -c foo.c}.
856 You can run @code{@value{GDBP}} without printing the front material, which describes
857 @value{GDBN}'s non-warranty, by specifying @code{-silent}:
864 You can further control how @value{GDBN} starts up by using command-line
865 options. @value{GDBN} itself can remind you of the options available.
875 to display all available options and briefly describe their use
876 (@samp{@value{GDBP} -h} is a shorter equivalent).
878 All options and command line arguments you give are processed
879 in sequential order. The order makes a difference when the
880 @samp{-x} option is used.
884 * File Options:: Choosing files
885 * Mode Options:: Choosing modes
886 * Startup:: What @value{GDBN} does during startup
890 @subsection Choosing Files
892 When @value{GDBN} starts, it reads any arguments other than options as
893 specifying an executable file and core file (or process ID). This is
894 the same as if the arguments were specified by the @samp{-se} and
895 @samp{-c} (or @samp{-p}) options respectively. (@value{GDBN} reads the
896 first argument that does not have an associated option flag as
897 equivalent to the @samp{-se} option followed by that argument; and the
898 second argument that does not have an associated option flag, if any, as
899 equivalent to the @samp{-c}/@samp{-p} option followed by that argument.)
900 If the second argument begins with a decimal digit, @value{GDBN} will
901 first attempt to attach to it as a process, and if that fails, attempt
902 to open it as a corefile. If you have a corefile whose name begins with
903 a digit, you can prevent @value{GDBN} from treating it as a pid by
904 prefixing it with @file{./}, e.g.@: @file{./12345}.
906 If @value{GDBN} has not been configured to included core file support,
907 such as for most embedded targets, then it will complain about a second
908 argument and ignore it.
910 Many options have both long and short forms; both are shown in the
911 following list. @value{GDBN} also recognizes the long forms if you truncate
912 them, so long as enough of the option is present to be unambiguous.
913 (If you prefer, you can flag option arguments with @samp{--} rather
914 than @samp{-}, though we illustrate the more usual convention.)
916 @c NOTE: the @cindex entries here use double dashes ON PURPOSE. This
917 @c way, both those who look for -foo and --foo in the index, will find
921 @item -symbols @var{file}
923 @cindex @code{--symbols}
925 Read symbol table from file @var{file}.
927 @item -exec @var{file}
929 @cindex @code{--exec}
931 Use file @var{file} as the executable file to execute when appropriate,
932 and for examining pure data in conjunction with a core dump.
936 Read symbol table from file @var{file} and use it as the executable
939 @item -core @var{file}
941 @cindex @code{--core}
943 Use file @var{file} as a core dump to examine.
945 @item -c @var{number}
946 @item -pid @var{number}
947 @itemx -p @var{number}
950 Connect to process ID @var{number}, as with the @code{attach} command.
951 If there is no such process, @value{GDBN} will attempt to open a core
952 file named @var{number}.
954 @item -command @var{file}
956 @cindex @code{--command}
958 Execute @value{GDBN} commands from file @var{file}. @xref{Command
959 Files,, Command files}.
961 @item -eval-command @var{command}
962 @itemx -ex @var{command}
963 @cindex @code{--eval-command}
965 Execute a single @value{GDBN} command.
967 This option may be used multiple times to call multiple commands. It may
968 also be interleaved with @samp{-command} as required.
971 @value{GDBP} -ex 'target sim' -ex 'load' \
972 -x setbreakpoints -ex 'run' a.out
975 @item -directory @var{directory}
976 @itemx -d @var{directory}
977 @cindex @code{--directory}
979 Add @var{directory} to the path to search for source and script files.
983 @cindex @code{--readnow}
985 Read each symbol file's entire symbol table immediately, rather than
986 the default, which is to read it incrementally as it is needed.
987 This makes startup slower, but makes future operations faster.
992 @subsection Choosing Modes
994 You can run @value{GDBN} in various alternative modes---for example, in
995 batch mode or quiet mode.
1002 Do not execute commands found in any initialization files. Normally,
1003 @value{GDBN} executes the commands in these files after all the command
1004 options and arguments have been processed. @xref{Command Files,,Command
1010 @cindex @code{--quiet}
1011 @cindex @code{--silent}
1013 ``Quiet''. Do not print the introductory and copyright messages. These
1014 messages are also suppressed in batch mode.
1017 @cindex @code{--batch}
1018 Run in batch mode. Exit with status @code{0} after processing all the
1019 command files specified with @samp{-x} (and all commands from
1020 initialization files, if not inhibited with @samp{-n}). Exit with
1021 nonzero status if an error occurs in executing the @value{GDBN} commands
1022 in the command files.
1024 Batch mode may be useful for running @value{GDBN} as a filter, for
1025 example to download and run a program on another computer; in order to
1026 make this more useful, the message
1029 Program exited normally.
1033 (which is ordinarily issued whenever a program running under
1034 @value{GDBN} control terminates) is not issued when running in batch
1038 @cindex @code{--batch-silent}
1039 Run in batch mode exactly like @samp{-batch}, but totally silently. All
1040 @value{GDBN} output to @code{stdout} is prevented (@code{stderr} is
1041 unaffected). This is much quieter than @samp{-silent} and would be useless
1042 for an interactive session.
1044 This is particularly useful when using targets that give @samp{Loading section}
1045 messages, for example.
1047 Note that targets that give their output via @value{GDBN}, as opposed to
1048 writing directly to @code{stdout}, will also be made silent.
1050 @item -return-child-result
1051 @cindex @code{--return-child-result}
1052 The return code from @value{GDBN} will be the return code from the child
1053 process (the process being debugged), with the following exceptions:
1057 @value{GDBN} exits abnormally. E.g., due to an incorrect argument or an
1058 internal error. In this case the exit code is the same as it would have been
1059 without @samp{-return-child-result}.
1061 The user quits with an explicit value. E.g., @samp{quit 1}.
1063 The child process never runs, or is not allowed to terminate, in which case
1064 the exit code will be -1.
1067 This option is useful in conjunction with @samp{-batch} or @samp{-batch-silent},
1068 when @value{GDBN} is being used as a remote program loader or simulator
1073 @cindex @code{--nowindows}
1075 ``No windows''. If @value{GDBN} comes with a graphical user interface
1076 (GUI) built in, then this option tells @value{GDBN} to only use the command-line
1077 interface. If no GUI is available, this option has no effect.
1081 @cindex @code{--windows}
1083 If @value{GDBN} includes a GUI, then this option requires it to be
1086 @item -cd @var{directory}
1088 Run @value{GDBN} using @var{directory} as its working directory,
1089 instead of the current directory.
1093 @cindex @code{--fullname}
1095 @sc{gnu} Emacs sets this option when it runs @value{GDBN} as a
1096 subprocess. It tells @value{GDBN} to output the full file name and line
1097 number in a standard, recognizable fashion each time a stack frame is
1098 displayed (which includes each time your program stops). This
1099 recognizable format looks like two @samp{\032} characters, followed by
1100 the file name, line number and character position separated by colons,
1101 and a newline. The Emacs-to-@value{GDBN} interface program uses the two
1102 @samp{\032} characters as a signal to display the source code for the
1106 @cindex @code{--epoch}
1107 The Epoch Emacs-@value{GDBN} interface sets this option when it runs
1108 @value{GDBN} as a subprocess. It tells @value{GDBN} to modify its print
1109 routines so as to allow Epoch to display values of expressions in a
1112 @item -annotate @var{level}
1113 @cindex @code{--annotate}
1114 This option sets the @dfn{annotation level} inside @value{GDBN}. Its
1115 effect is identical to using @samp{set annotate @var{level}}
1116 (@pxref{Annotations}). The annotation @var{level} controls how much
1117 information @value{GDBN} prints together with its prompt, values of
1118 expressions, source lines, and other types of output. Level 0 is the
1119 normal, level 1 is for use when @value{GDBN} is run as a subprocess of
1120 @sc{gnu} Emacs, level 3 is the maximum annotation suitable for programs
1121 that control @value{GDBN}, and level 2 has been deprecated.
1123 The annotation mechanism has largely been superseded by @sc{gdb/mi}
1127 @cindex @code{--args}
1128 Change interpretation of command line so that arguments following the
1129 executable file are passed as command line arguments to the inferior.
1130 This option stops option processing.
1132 @item -baud @var{bps}
1134 @cindex @code{--baud}
1136 Set the line speed (baud rate or bits per second) of any serial
1137 interface used by @value{GDBN} for remote debugging.
1139 @item -l @var{timeout}
1141 Set the timeout (in seconds) of any communication used by @value{GDBN}
1142 for remote debugging.
1144 @item -tty @var{device}
1145 @itemx -t @var{device}
1146 @cindex @code{--tty}
1148 Run using @var{device} for your program's standard input and output.
1149 @c FIXME: kingdon thinks there is more to -tty. Investigate.
1151 @c resolve the situation of these eventually
1153 @cindex @code{--tui}
1154 Activate the @dfn{Text User Interface} when starting. The Text User
1155 Interface manages several text windows on the terminal, showing
1156 source, assembly, registers and @value{GDBN} command outputs
1157 (@pxref{TUI, ,@value{GDBN} Text User Interface}). Alternatively, the
1158 Text User Interface can be enabled by invoking the program
1159 @samp{@value{GDBTUI}}. Do not use this option if you run @value{GDBN} from
1160 Emacs (@pxref{Emacs, ,Using @value{GDBN} under @sc{gnu} Emacs}).
1163 @c @cindex @code{--xdb}
1164 @c Run in XDB compatibility mode, allowing the use of certain XDB commands.
1165 @c For information, see the file @file{xdb_trans.html}, which is usually
1166 @c installed in the directory @code{/opt/langtools/wdb/doc} on HP-UX
1169 @item -interpreter @var{interp}
1170 @cindex @code{--interpreter}
1171 Use the interpreter @var{interp} for interface with the controlling
1172 program or device. This option is meant to be set by programs which
1173 communicate with @value{GDBN} using it as a back end.
1174 @xref{Interpreters, , Command Interpreters}.
1176 @samp{--interpreter=mi} (or @samp{--interpreter=mi2}) causes
1177 @value{GDBN} to use the @dfn{@sc{gdb/mi} interface} (@pxref{GDB/MI, ,
1178 The @sc{gdb/mi} Interface}) included since @value{GDBN} version 6.0. The
1179 previous @sc{gdb/mi} interface, included in @value{GDBN} version 5.3 and
1180 selected with @samp{--interpreter=mi1}, is deprecated. Earlier
1181 @sc{gdb/mi} interfaces are no longer supported.
1184 @cindex @code{--write}
1185 Open the executable and core files for both reading and writing. This
1186 is equivalent to the @samp{set write on} command inside @value{GDBN}
1190 @cindex @code{--statistics}
1191 This option causes @value{GDBN} to print statistics about time and
1192 memory usage after it completes each command and returns to the prompt.
1195 @cindex @code{--version}
1196 This option causes @value{GDBN} to print its version number and
1197 no-warranty blurb, and exit.
1202 @subsection What @value{GDBN} Does During Startup
1203 @cindex @value{GDBN} startup
1205 Here's the description of what @value{GDBN} does during session startup:
1209 Sets up the command interpreter as specified by the command line
1210 (@pxref{Mode Options, interpreter}).
1214 Reads the @dfn{init file} (if any) in your home directory@footnote{On
1215 DOS/Windows systems, the home directory is the one pointed to by the
1216 @code{HOME} environment variable.} and executes all the commands in
1220 Processes command line options and operands.
1223 Reads and executes the commands from init file (if any) in the current
1224 working directory. This is only done if the current directory is
1225 different from your home directory. Thus, you can have more than one
1226 init file, one generic in your home directory, and another, specific
1227 to the program you are debugging, in the directory where you invoke
1231 Reads command files specified by the @samp{-x} option. @xref{Command
1232 Files}, for more details about @value{GDBN} command files.
1235 Reads the command history recorded in the @dfn{history file}.
1236 @xref{Command History}, for more details about the command history and the
1237 files where @value{GDBN} records it.
1240 Init files use the same syntax as @dfn{command files} (@pxref{Command
1241 Files}) and are processed by @value{GDBN} in the same way. The init
1242 file in your home directory can set options (such as @samp{set
1243 complaints}) that affect subsequent processing of command line options
1244 and operands. Init files are not executed if you use the @samp{-nx}
1245 option (@pxref{Mode Options, ,Choosing Modes}).
1247 @cindex init file name
1248 @cindex @file{.gdbinit}
1249 @cindex @file{gdb.ini}
1250 The @value{GDBN} init files are normally called @file{.gdbinit}.
1251 The DJGPP port of @value{GDBN} uses the name @file{gdb.ini}, due to
1252 the limitations of file names imposed by DOS filesystems. The Windows
1253 ports of @value{GDBN} use the standard name, but if they find a
1254 @file{gdb.ini} file, they warn you about that and suggest to rename
1255 the file to the standard name.
1259 @section Quitting @value{GDBN}
1260 @cindex exiting @value{GDBN}
1261 @cindex leaving @value{GDBN}
1264 @kindex quit @r{[}@var{expression}@r{]}
1265 @kindex q @r{(@code{quit})}
1266 @item quit @r{[}@var{expression}@r{]}
1268 To exit @value{GDBN}, use the @code{quit} command (abbreviated
1269 @code{q}), or type an end-of-file character (usually @kbd{Ctrl-d}). If you
1270 do not supply @var{expression}, @value{GDBN} will terminate normally;
1271 otherwise it will terminate using the result of @var{expression} as the
1276 An interrupt (often @kbd{Ctrl-c}) does not exit from @value{GDBN}, but rather
1277 terminates the action of any @value{GDBN} command that is in progress and
1278 returns to @value{GDBN} command level. It is safe to type the interrupt
1279 character at any time because @value{GDBN} does not allow it to take effect
1280 until a time when it is safe.
1282 If you have been using @value{GDBN} to control an attached process or
1283 device, you can release it with the @code{detach} command
1284 (@pxref{Attach, ,Debugging an Already-running Process}).
1286 @node Shell Commands
1287 @section Shell Commands
1289 If you need to execute occasional shell commands during your
1290 debugging session, there is no need to leave or suspend @value{GDBN}; you can
1291 just use the @code{shell} command.
1295 @cindex shell escape
1296 @item shell @var{command string}
1297 Invoke a standard shell to execute @var{command string}.
1298 If it exists, the environment variable @code{SHELL} determines which
1299 shell to run. Otherwise @value{GDBN} uses the default shell
1300 (@file{/bin/sh} on Unix systems, @file{COMMAND.COM} on MS-DOS, etc.).
1303 The utility @code{make} is often needed in development environments.
1304 You do not have to use the @code{shell} command for this purpose in
1309 @cindex calling make
1310 @item make @var{make-args}
1311 Execute the @code{make} program with the specified
1312 arguments. This is equivalent to @samp{shell make @var{make-args}}.
1315 @node Logging Output
1316 @section Logging Output
1317 @cindex logging @value{GDBN} output
1318 @cindex save @value{GDBN} output to a file
1320 You may want to save the output of @value{GDBN} commands to a file.
1321 There are several commands to control @value{GDBN}'s logging.
1325 @item set logging on
1327 @item set logging off
1329 @cindex logging file name
1330 @item set logging file @var{file}
1331 Change the name of the current logfile. The default logfile is @file{gdb.txt}.
1332 @item set logging overwrite [on|off]
1333 By default, @value{GDBN} will append to the logfile. Set @code{overwrite} if
1334 you want @code{set logging on} to overwrite the logfile instead.
1335 @item set logging redirect [on|off]
1336 By default, @value{GDBN} output will go to both the terminal and the logfile.
1337 Set @code{redirect} if you want output to go only to the log file.
1338 @kindex show logging
1340 Show the current values of the logging settings.
1344 @chapter @value{GDBN} Commands
1346 You can abbreviate a @value{GDBN} command to the first few letters of the command
1347 name, if that abbreviation is unambiguous; and you can repeat certain
1348 @value{GDBN} commands by typing just @key{RET}. You can also use the @key{TAB}
1349 key to get @value{GDBN} to fill out the rest of a word in a command (or to
1350 show you the alternatives available, if there is more than one possibility).
1353 * Command Syntax:: How to give commands to @value{GDBN}
1354 * Completion:: Command completion
1355 * Help:: How to ask @value{GDBN} for help
1358 @node Command Syntax
1359 @section Command Syntax
1361 A @value{GDBN} command is a single line of input. There is no limit on
1362 how long it can be. It starts with a command name, which is followed by
1363 arguments whose meaning depends on the command name. For example, the
1364 command @code{step} accepts an argument which is the number of times to
1365 step, as in @samp{step 5}. You can also use the @code{step} command
1366 with no arguments. Some commands do not allow any arguments.
1368 @cindex abbreviation
1369 @value{GDBN} command names may always be truncated if that abbreviation is
1370 unambiguous. Other possible command abbreviations are listed in the
1371 documentation for individual commands. In some cases, even ambiguous
1372 abbreviations are allowed; for example, @code{s} is specially defined as
1373 equivalent to @code{step} even though there are other commands whose
1374 names start with @code{s}. You can test abbreviations by using them as
1375 arguments to the @code{help} command.
1377 @cindex repeating commands
1378 @kindex RET @r{(repeat last command)}
1379 A blank line as input to @value{GDBN} (typing just @key{RET}) means to
1380 repeat the previous command. Certain commands (for example, @code{run})
1381 will not repeat this way; these are commands whose unintentional
1382 repetition might cause trouble and which you are unlikely to want to
1383 repeat. User-defined commands can disable this feature; see
1384 @ref{Define, dont-repeat}.
1386 The @code{list} and @code{x} commands, when you repeat them with
1387 @key{RET}, construct new arguments rather than repeating
1388 exactly as typed. This permits easy scanning of source or memory.
1390 @value{GDBN} can also use @key{RET} in another way: to partition lengthy
1391 output, in a way similar to the common utility @code{more}
1392 (@pxref{Screen Size,,Screen Size}). Since it is easy to press one
1393 @key{RET} too many in this situation, @value{GDBN} disables command
1394 repetition after any command that generates this sort of display.
1396 @kindex # @r{(a comment)}
1398 Any text from a @kbd{#} to the end of the line is a comment; it does
1399 nothing. This is useful mainly in command files (@pxref{Command
1400 Files,,Command Files}).
1402 @cindex repeating command sequences
1403 @kindex Ctrl-o @r{(operate-and-get-next)}
1404 The @kbd{Ctrl-o} binding is useful for repeating a complex sequence of
1405 commands. This command accepts the current line, like @key{RET}, and
1406 then fetches the next line relative to the current line from the history
1410 @section Command Completion
1413 @cindex word completion
1414 @value{GDBN} can fill in the rest of a word in a command for you, if there is
1415 only one possibility; it can also show you what the valid possibilities
1416 are for the next word in a command, at any time. This works for @value{GDBN}
1417 commands, @value{GDBN} subcommands, and the names of symbols in your program.
1419 Press the @key{TAB} key whenever you want @value{GDBN} to fill out the rest
1420 of a word. If there is only one possibility, @value{GDBN} fills in the
1421 word, and waits for you to finish the command (or press @key{RET} to
1422 enter it). For example, if you type
1424 @c FIXME "@key" does not distinguish its argument sufficiently to permit
1425 @c complete accuracy in these examples; space introduced for clarity.
1426 @c If texinfo enhancements make it unnecessary, it would be nice to
1427 @c replace " @key" by "@key" in the following...
1429 (@value{GDBP}) info bre @key{TAB}
1433 @value{GDBN} fills in the rest of the word @samp{breakpoints}, since that is
1434 the only @code{info} subcommand beginning with @samp{bre}:
1437 (@value{GDBP}) info breakpoints
1441 You can either press @key{RET} at this point, to run the @code{info
1442 breakpoints} command, or backspace and enter something else, if
1443 @samp{breakpoints} does not look like the command you expected. (If you
1444 were sure you wanted @code{info breakpoints} in the first place, you
1445 might as well just type @key{RET} immediately after @samp{info bre},
1446 to exploit command abbreviations rather than command completion).
1448 If there is more than one possibility for the next word when you press
1449 @key{TAB}, @value{GDBN} sounds a bell. You can either supply more
1450 characters and try again, or just press @key{TAB} a second time;
1451 @value{GDBN} displays all the possible completions for that word. For
1452 example, you might want to set a breakpoint on a subroutine whose name
1453 begins with @samp{make_}, but when you type @kbd{b make_@key{TAB}} @value{GDBN}
1454 just sounds the bell. Typing @key{TAB} again displays all the
1455 function names in your program that begin with those characters, for
1459 (@value{GDBP}) b make_ @key{TAB}
1460 @exdent @value{GDBN} sounds bell; press @key{TAB} again, to see:
1461 make_a_section_from_file make_environ
1462 make_abs_section make_function_type
1463 make_blockvector make_pointer_type
1464 make_cleanup make_reference_type
1465 make_command make_symbol_completion_list
1466 (@value{GDBP}) b make_
1470 After displaying the available possibilities, @value{GDBN} copies your
1471 partial input (@samp{b make_} in the example) so you can finish the
1474 If you just want to see the list of alternatives in the first place, you
1475 can press @kbd{M-?} rather than pressing @key{TAB} twice. @kbd{M-?}
1476 means @kbd{@key{META} ?}. You can type this either by holding down a
1477 key designated as the @key{META} shift on your keyboard (if there is
1478 one) while typing @kbd{?}, or as @key{ESC} followed by @kbd{?}.
1480 @cindex quotes in commands
1481 @cindex completion of quoted strings
1482 Sometimes the string you need, while logically a ``word'', may contain
1483 parentheses or other characters that @value{GDBN} normally excludes from
1484 its notion of a word. To permit word completion to work in this
1485 situation, you may enclose words in @code{'} (single quote marks) in
1486 @value{GDBN} commands.
1488 The most likely situation where you might need this is in typing the
1489 name of a C@t{++} function. This is because C@t{++} allows function
1490 overloading (multiple definitions of the same function, distinguished
1491 by argument type). For example, when you want to set a breakpoint you
1492 may need to distinguish whether you mean the version of @code{name}
1493 that takes an @code{int} parameter, @code{name(int)}, or the version
1494 that takes a @code{float} parameter, @code{name(float)}. To use the
1495 word-completion facilities in this situation, type a single quote
1496 @code{'} at the beginning of the function name. This alerts
1497 @value{GDBN} that it may need to consider more information than usual
1498 when you press @key{TAB} or @kbd{M-?} to request word completion:
1501 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble( @kbd{M-?}
1502 bubble(double,double) bubble(int,int)
1503 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble(
1506 In some cases, @value{GDBN} can tell that completing a name requires using
1507 quotes. When this happens, @value{GDBN} inserts the quote for you (while
1508 completing as much as it can) if you do not type the quote in the first
1512 (@value{GDBP}) b bub @key{TAB}
1513 @exdent @value{GDBN} alters your input line to the following, and rings a bell:
1514 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble(
1518 In general, @value{GDBN} can tell that a quote is needed (and inserts it) if
1519 you have not yet started typing the argument list when you ask for
1520 completion on an overloaded symbol.
1522 For more information about overloaded functions, see @ref{C Plus Plus
1523 Expressions, ,C@t{++} Expressions}. You can use the command @code{set
1524 overload-resolution off} to disable overload resolution;
1525 see @ref{Debugging C Plus Plus, ,@value{GDBN} Features for C@t{++}}.
1529 @section Getting Help
1530 @cindex online documentation
1533 You can always ask @value{GDBN} itself for information on its commands,
1534 using the command @code{help}.
1537 @kindex h @r{(@code{help})}
1540 You can use @code{help} (abbreviated @code{h}) with no arguments to
1541 display a short list of named classes of commands:
1545 List of classes of commands:
1547 aliases -- Aliases of other commands
1548 breakpoints -- Making program stop at certain points
1549 data -- Examining data
1550 files -- Specifying and examining files
1551 internals -- Maintenance commands
1552 obscure -- Obscure features
1553 running -- Running the program
1554 stack -- Examining the stack
1555 status -- Status inquiries
1556 support -- Support facilities
1557 tracepoints -- Tracing of program execution without
1558 stopping the program
1559 user-defined -- User-defined commands
1561 Type "help" followed by a class name for a list of
1562 commands in that class.
1563 Type "help" followed by command name for full
1565 Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
1568 @c the above line break eliminates huge line overfull...
1570 @item help @var{class}
1571 Using one of the general help classes as an argument, you can get a
1572 list of the individual commands in that class. For example, here is the
1573 help display for the class @code{status}:
1576 (@value{GDBP}) help status
1581 @c Line break in "show" line falsifies real output, but needed
1582 @c to fit in smallbook page size.
1583 info -- Generic command for showing things
1584 about the program being debugged
1585 show -- Generic command for showing things
1588 Type "help" followed by command name for full
1590 Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
1594 @item help @var{command}
1595 With a command name as @code{help} argument, @value{GDBN} displays a
1596 short paragraph on how to use that command.
1599 @item apropos @var{args}
1600 The @code{apropos} command searches through all of the @value{GDBN}
1601 commands, and their documentation, for the regular expression specified in
1602 @var{args}. It prints out all matches found. For example:
1613 set symbol-reloading -- Set dynamic symbol table reloading
1614 multiple times in one run
1615 show symbol-reloading -- Show dynamic symbol table reloading
1616 multiple times in one run
1621 @item complete @var{args}
1622 The @code{complete @var{args}} command lists all the possible completions
1623 for the beginning of a command. Use @var{args} to specify the beginning of the
1624 command you want completed. For example:
1630 @noindent results in:
1641 @noindent This is intended for use by @sc{gnu} Emacs.
1644 In addition to @code{help}, you can use the @value{GDBN} commands @code{info}
1645 and @code{show} to inquire about the state of your program, or the state
1646 of @value{GDBN} itself. Each command supports many topics of inquiry; this
1647 manual introduces each of them in the appropriate context. The listings
1648 under @code{info} and under @code{show} in the Index point to
1649 all the sub-commands. @xref{Index}.
1654 @kindex i @r{(@code{info})}
1656 This command (abbreviated @code{i}) is for describing the state of your
1657 program. For example, you can list the arguments given to your program
1658 with @code{info args}, list the registers currently in use with @code{info
1659 registers}, or list the breakpoints you have set with @code{info breakpoints}.
1660 You can get a complete list of the @code{info} sub-commands with
1661 @w{@code{help info}}.
1665 You can assign the result of an expression to an environment variable with
1666 @code{set}. For example, you can set the @value{GDBN} prompt to a $-sign with
1667 @code{set prompt $}.
1671 In contrast to @code{info}, @code{show} is for describing the state of
1672 @value{GDBN} itself.
1673 You can change most of the things you can @code{show}, by using the
1674 related command @code{set}; for example, you can control what number
1675 system is used for displays with @code{set radix}, or simply inquire
1676 which is currently in use with @code{show radix}.
1679 To display all the settable parameters and their current
1680 values, you can use @code{show} with no arguments; you may also use
1681 @code{info set}. Both commands produce the same display.
1682 @c FIXME: "info set" violates the rule that "info" is for state of
1683 @c FIXME...program. Ck w/ GNU: "info set" to be called something else,
1684 @c FIXME...or change desc of rule---eg "state of prog and debugging session"?
1688 Here are three miscellaneous @code{show} subcommands, all of which are
1689 exceptional in lacking corresponding @code{set} commands:
1692 @kindex show version
1693 @cindex @value{GDBN} version number
1695 Show what version of @value{GDBN} is running. You should include this
1696 information in @value{GDBN} bug-reports. If multiple versions of
1697 @value{GDBN} are in use at your site, you may need to determine which
1698 version of @value{GDBN} you are running; as @value{GDBN} evolves, new
1699 commands are introduced, and old ones may wither away. Also, many
1700 system vendors ship variant versions of @value{GDBN}, and there are
1701 variant versions of @value{GDBN} in @sc{gnu}/Linux distributions as well.
1702 The version number is the same as the one announced when you start
1705 @kindex show copying
1706 @kindex info copying
1707 @cindex display @value{GDBN} copyright
1710 Display information about permission for copying @value{GDBN}.
1712 @kindex show warranty
1713 @kindex info warranty
1715 @itemx info warranty
1716 Display the @sc{gnu} ``NO WARRANTY'' statement, or a warranty,
1717 if your version of @value{GDBN} comes with one.
1722 @chapter Running Programs Under @value{GDBN}
1724 When you run a program under @value{GDBN}, you must first generate
1725 debugging information when you compile it.
1727 You may start @value{GDBN} with its arguments, if any, in an environment
1728 of your choice. If you are doing native debugging, you may redirect
1729 your program's input and output, debug an already running process, or
1730 kill a child process.
1733 * Compilation:: Compiling for debugging
1734 * Starting:: Starting your program
1735 * Arguments:: Your program's arguments
1736 * Environment:: Your program's environment
1738 * Working Directory:: Your program's working directory
1739 * Input/Output:: Your program's input and output
1740 * Attach:: Debugging an already-running process
1741 * Kill Process:: Killing the child process
1743 * Threads:: Debugging programs with multiple threads
1744 * Processes:: Debugging programs with multiple processes
1745 * Checkpoint/Restart:: Setting a @emph{bookmark} to return to later
1749 @section Compiling for Debugging
1751 In order to debug a program effectively, you need to generate
1752 debugging information when you compile it. This debugging information
1753 is stored in the object file; it describes the data type of each
1754 variable or function and the correspondence between source line numbers
1755 and addresses in the executable code.
1757 To request debugging information, specify the @samp{-g} option when you run
1760 Programs that are to be shipped to your customers are compiled with
1761 optimizations, using the @samp{-O} compiler option. However, many
1762 compilers are unable to handle the @samp{-g} and @samp{-O} options
1763 together. Using those compilers, you cannot generate optimized
1764 executables containing debugging information.
1766 @value{NGCC}, the @sc{gnu} C/C@t{++} compiler, supports @samp{-g} with or
1767 without @samp{-O}, making it possible to debug optimized code. We
1768 recommend that you @emph{always} use @samp{-g} whenever you compile a
1769 program. You may think your program is correct, but there is no sense
1770 in pushing your luck.
1772 @cindex optimized code, debugging
1773 @cindex debugging optimized code
1774 When you debug a program compiled with @samp{-g -O}, remember that the
1775 optimizer is rearranging your code; the debugger shows you what is
1776 really there. Do not be too surprised when the execution path does not
1777 exactly match your source file! An extreme example: if you define a
1778 variable, but never use it, @value{GDBN} never sees that
1779 variable---because the compiler optimizes it out of existence.
1781 Some things do not work as well with @samp{-g -O} as with just
1782 @samp{-g}, particularly on machines with instruction scheduling. If in
1783 doubt, recompile with @samp{-g} alone, and if this fixes the problem,
1784 please report it to us as a bug (including a test case!).
1785 @xref{Variables}, for more information about debugging optimized code.
1787 Older versions of the @sc{gnu} C compiler permitted a variant option
1788 @w{@samp{-gg}} for debugging information. @value{GDBN} no longer supports this
1789 format; if your @sc{gnu} C compiler has this option, do not use it.
1791 @value{GDBN} knows about preprocessor macros and can show you their
1792 expansion (@pxref{Macros}). Most compilers do not include information
1793 about preprocessor macros in the debugging information if you specify
1794 the @option{-g} flag alone, because this information is rather large.
1795 Version 3.1 and later of @value{NGCC}, the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
1796 provides macro information if you specify the options
1797 @option{-gdwarf-2} and @option{-g3}; the former option requests
1798 debugging information in the Dwarf 2 format, and the latter requests
1799 ``extra information''. In the future, we hope to find more compact
1800 ways to represent macro information, so that it can be included with
1805 @section Starting your Program
1811 @kindex r @r{(@code{run})}
1814 Use the @code{run} command to start your program under @value{GDBN}.
1815 You must first specify the program name (except on VxWorks) with an
1816 argument to @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Invocation, ,Getting In and Out of
1817 @value{GDBN}}), or by using the @code{file} or @code{exec-file} command
1818 (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to Specify Files}).
1822 If you are running your program in an execution environment that
1823 supports processes, @code{run} creates an inferior process and makes
1824 that process run your program. (In environments without processes,
1825 @code{run} jumps to the start of your program.)
1827 The execution of a program is affected by certain information it
1828 receives from its superior. @value{GDBN} provides ways to specify this
1829 information, which you must do @emph{before} starting your program. (You
1830 can change it after starting your program, but such changes only affect
1831 your program the next time you start it.) This information may be
1832 divided into four categories:
1835 @item The @emph{arguments.}
1836 Specify the arguments to give your program as the arguments of the
1837 @code{run} command. If a shell is available on your target, the shell
1838 is used to pass the arguments, so that you may use normal conventions
1839 (such as wildcard expansion or variable substitution) in describing
1841 In Unix systems, you can control which shell is used with the
1842 @code{SHELL} environment variable.
1843 @xref{Arguments, ,Your Program's Arguments}.
1845 @item The @emph{environment.}
1846 Your program normally inherits its environment from @value{GDBN}, but you can
1847 use the @value{GDBN} commands @code{set environment} and @code{unset
1848 environment} to change parts of the environment that affect
1849 your program. @xref{Environment, ,Your Program's Environment}.
1851 @item The @emph{working directory.}
1852 Your program inherits its working directory from @value{GDBN}. You can set
1853 the @value{GDBN} working directory with the @code{cd} command in @value{GDBN}.
1854 @xref{Working Directory, ,Your Program's Working Directory}.
1856 @item The @emph{standard input and output.}
1857 Your program normally uses the same device for standard input and
1858 standard output as @value{GDBN} is using. You can redirect input and output
1859 in the @code{run} command line, or you can use the @code{tty} command to
1860 set a different device for your program.
1861 @xref{Input/Output, ,Your Program's Input and Output}.
1864 @emph{Warning:} While input and output redirection work, you cannot use
1865 pipes to pass the output of the program you are debugging to another
1866 program; if you attempt this, @value{GDBN} is likely to wind up debugging the
1870 When you issue the @code{run} command, your program begins to execute
1871 immediately. @xref{Stopping, ,Stopping and Continuing}, for discussion
1872 of how to arrange for your program to stop. Once your program has
1873 stopped, you may call functions in your program, using the @code{print}
1874 or @code{call} commands. @xref{Data, ,Examining Data}.
1876 If the modification time of your symbol file has changed since the last
1877 time @value{GDBN} read its symbols, @value{GDBN} discards its symbol
1878 table, and reads it again. When it does this, @value{GDBN} tries to retain
1879 your current breakpoints.
1884 @cindex run to main procedure
1885 The name of the main procedure can vary from language to language.
1886 With C or C@t{++}, the main procedure name is always @code{main}, but
1887 other languages such as Ada do not require a specific name for their
1888 main procedure. The debugger provides a convenient way to start the
1889 execution of the program and to stop at the beginning of the main
1890 procedure, depending on the language used.
1892 The @samp{start} command does the equivalent of setting a temporary
1893 breakpoint at the beginning of the main procedure and then invoking
1894 the @samp{run} command.
1896 @cindex elaboration phase
1897 Some programs contain an @dfn{elaboration} phase where some startup code is
1898 executed before the main procedure is called. This depends on the
1899 languages used to write your program. In C@t{++}, for instance,
1900 constructors for static and global objects are executed before
1901 @code{main} is called. It is therefore possible that the debugger stops
1902 before reaching the main procedure. However, the temporary breakpoint
1903 will remain to halt execution.
1905 Specify the arguments to give to your program as arguments to the
1906 @samp{start} command. These arguments will be given verbatim to the
1907 underlying @samp{run} command. Note that the same arguments will be
1908 reused if no argument is provided during subsequent calls to
1909 @samp{start} or @samp{run}.
1911 It is sometimes necessary to debug the program during elaboration. In
1912 these cases, using the @code{start} command would stop the execution of
1913 your program too late, as the program would have already completed the
1914 elaboration phase. Under these circumstances, insert breakpoints in your
1915 elaboration code before running your program.
1919 @section Your Program's Arguments
1921 @cindex arguments (to your program)
1922 The arguments to your program can be specified by the arguments of the
1924 They are passed to a shell, which expands wildcard characters and
1925 performs redirection of I/O, and thence to your program. Your
1926 @code{SHELL} environment variable (if it exists) specifies what shell
1927 @value{GDBN} uses. If you do not define @code{SHELL}, @value{GDBN} uses
1928 the default shell (@file{/bin/sh} on Unix).
1930 On non-Unix systems, the program is usually invoked directly by
1931 @value{GDBN}, which emulates I/O redirection via the appropriate system
1932 calls, and the wildcard characters are expanded by the startup code of
1933 the program, not by the shell.
1935 @code{run} with no arguments uses the same arguments used by the previous
1936 @code{run}, or those set by the @code{set args} command.
1941 Specify the arguments to be used the next time your program is run. If
1942 @code{set args} has no arguments, @code{run} executes your program
1943 with no arguments. Once you have run your program with arguments,
1944 using @code{set args} before the next @code{run} is the only way to run
1945 it again without arguments.
1949 Show the arguments to give your program when it is started.
1953 @section Your Program's Environment
1955 @cindex environment (of your program)
1956 The @dfn{environment} consists of a set of environment variables and
1957 their values. Environment variables conventionally record such things as
1958 your user name, your home directory, your terminal type, and your search
1959 path for programs to run. Usually you set up environment variables with
1960 the shell and they are inherited by all the other programs you run. When
1961 debugging, it can be useful to try running your program with a modified
1962 environment without having to start @value{GDBN} over again.
1966 @item path @var{directory}
1967 Add @var{directory} to the front of the @code{PATH} environment variable
1968 (the search path for executables) that will be passed to your program.
1969 The value of @code{PATH} used by @value{GDBN} does not change.
1970 You may specify several directory names, separated by whitespace or by a
1971 system-dependent separator character (@samp{:} on Unix, @samp{;} on
1972 MS-DOS and MS-Windows). If @var{directory} is already in the path, it
1973 is moved to the front, so it is searched sooner.
1975 You can use the string @samp{$cwd} to refer to whatever is the current
1976 working directory at the time @value{GDBN} searches the path. If you
1977 use @samp{.} instead, it refers to the directory where you executed the
1978 @code{path} command. @value{GDBN} replaces @samp{.} in the
1979 @var{directory} argument (with the current path) before adding
1980 @var{directory} to the search path.
1981 @c 'path' is explicitly nonrepeatable, but RMS points out it is silly to
1982 @c document that, since repeating it would be a no-op.
1986 Display the list of search paths for executables (the @code{PATH}
1987 environment variable).
1989 @kindex show environment
1990 @item show environment @r{[}@var{varname}@r{]}
1991 Print the value of environment variable @var{varname} to be given to
1992 your program when it starts. If you do not supply @var{varname},
1993 print the names and values of all environment variables to be given to
1994 your program. You can abbreviate @code{environment} as @code{env}.
1996 @kindex set environment
1997 @item set environment @var{varname} @r{[}=@var{value}@r{]}
1998 Set environment variable @var{varname} to @var{value}. The value
1999 changes for your program only, not for @value{GDBN} itself. @var{value} may
2000 be any string; the values of environment variables are just strings, and
2001 any interpretation is supplied by your program itself. The @var{value}
2002 parameter is optional; if it is eliminated, the variable is set to a
2004 @c "any string" here does not include leading, trailing
2005 @c blanks. Gnu asks: does anyone care?
2007 For example, this command:
2014 tells the debugged program, when subsequently run, that its user is named
2015 @samp{foo}. (The spaces around @samp{=} are used for clarity here; they
2016 are not actually required.)
2018 @kindex unset environment
2019 @item unset environment @var{varname}
2020 Remove variable @var{varname} from the environment to be passed to your
2021 program. This is different from @samp{set env @var{varname} =};
2022 @code{unset environment} removes the variable from the environment,
2023 rather than assigning it an empty value.
2026 @emph{Warning:} On Unix systems, @value{GDBN} runs your program using
2028 by your @code{SHELL} environment variable if it exists (or
2029 @code{/bin/sh} if not). If your @code{SHELL} variable names a shell
2030 that runs an initialization file---such as @file{.cshrc} for C-shell, or
2031 @file{.bashrc} for BASH---any variables you set in that file affect
2032 your program. You may wish to move setting of environment variables to
2033 files that are only run when you sign on, such as @file{.login} or
2036 @node Working Directory
2037 @section Your Program's Working Directory
2039 @cindex working directory (of your program)
2040 Each time you start your program with @code{run}, it inherits its
2041 working directory from the current working directory of @value{GDBN}.
2042 The @value{GDBN} working directory is initially whatever it inherited
2043 from its parent process (typically the shell), but you can specify a new
2044 working directory in @value{GDBN} with the @code{cd} command.
2046 The @value{GDBN} working directory also serves as a default for the commands
2047 that specify files for @value{GDBN} to operate on. @xref{Files, ,Commands to
2052 @cindex change working directory
2053 @item cd @var{directory}
2054 Set the @value{GDBN} working directory to @var{directory}.
2058 Print the @value{GDBN} working directory.
2061 It is generally impossible to find the current working directory of
2062 the process being debugged (since a program can change its directory
2063 during its run). If you work on a system where @value{GDBN} is
2064 configured with the @file{/proc} support, you can use the @code{info
2065 proc} command (@pxref{SVR4 Process Information}) to find out the
2066 current working directory of the debuggee.
2069 @section Your Program's Input and Output
2074 By default, the program you run under @value{GDBN} does input and output to
2075 the same terminal that @value{GDBN} uses. @value{GDBN} switches the terminal
2076 to its own terminal modes to interact with you, but it records the terminal
2077 modes your program was using and switches back to them when you continue
2078 running your program.
2081 @kindex info terminal
2083 Displays information recorded by @value{GDBN} about the terminal modes your
2087 You can redirect your program's input and/or output using shell
2088 redirection with the @code{run} command. For example,
2095 starts your program, diverting its output to the file @file{outfile}.
2098 @cindex controlling terminal
2099 Another way to specify where your program should do input and output is
2100 with the @code{tty} command. This command accepts a file name as
2101 argument, and causes this file to be the default for future @code{run}
2102 commands. It also resets the controlling terminal for the child
2103 process, for future @code{run} commands. For example,
2110 directs that processes started with subsequent @code{run} commands
2111 default to do input and output on the terminal @file{/dev/ttyb} and have
2112 that as their controlling terminal.
2114 An explicit redirection in @code{run} overrides the @code{tty} command's
2115 effect on the input/output device, but not its effect on the controlling
2118 When you use the @code{tty} command or redirect input in the @code{run}
2119 command, only the input @emph{for your program} is affected. The input
2120 for @value{GDBN} still comes from your terminal. @code{tty} is an alias
2121 for @code{set inferior-tty}.
2123 @cindex inferior tty
2124 @cindex set inferior controlling terminal
2125 You can use the @code{show inferior-tty} command to tell @value{GDBN} to
2126 display the name of the terminal that will be used for future runs of your
2130 @item set inferior-tty /dev/ttyb
2131 @kindex set inferior-tty
2132 Set the tty for the program being debugged to /dev/ttyb.
2134 @item show inferior-tty
2135 @kindex show inferior-tty
2136 Show the current tty for the program being debugged.
2140 @section Debugging an Already-running Process
2145 @item attach @var{process-id}
2146 This command attaches to a running process---one that was started
2147 outside @value{GDBN}. (@code{info files} shows your active
2148 targets.) The command takes as argument a process ID. The usual way to
2149 find out the @var{process-id} of a Unix process is with the @code{ps} utility,
2150 or with the @samp{jobs -l} shell command.
2152 @code{attach} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} a second time after
2153 executing the command.
2156 To use @code{attach}, your program must be running in an environment
2157 which supports processes; for example, @code{attach} does not work for
2158 programs on bare-board targets that lack an operating system. You must
2159 also have permission to send the process a signal.
2161 When you use @code{attach}, the debugger finds the program running in
2162 the process first by looking in the current working directory, then (if
2163 the program is not found) by using the source file search path
2164 (@pxref{Source Path, ,Specifying Source Directories}). You can also use
2165 the @code{file} command to load the program. @xref{Files, ,Commands to
2168 The first thing @value{GDBN} does after arranging to debug the specified
2169 process is to stop it. You can examine and modify an attached process
2170 with all the @value{GDBN} commands that are ordinarily available when
2171 you start processes with @code{run}. You can insert breakpoints; you
2172 can step and continue; you can modify storage. If you would rather the
2173 process continue running, you may use the @code{continue} command after
2174 attaching @value{GDBN} to the process.
2179 When you have finished debugging the attached process, you can use the
2180 @code{detach} command to release it from @value{GDBN} control. Detaching
2181 the process continues its execution. After the @code{detach} command,
2182 that process and @value{GDBN} become completely independent once more, and you
2183 are ready to @code{attach} another process or start one with @code{run}.
2184 @code{detach} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after
2185 executing the command.
2188 If you exit @value{GDBN} while you have an attached process, you detach
2189 that process. If you use the @code{run} command, you kill that process.
2190 By default, @value{GDBN} asks for confirmation if you try to do either of these
2191 things; you can control whether or not you need to confirm by using the
2192 @code{set confirm} command (@pxref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional Warnings and
2196 @section Killing the Child Process
2201 Kill the child process in which your program is running under @value{GDBN}.
2204 This command is useful if you wish to debug a core dump instead of a
2205 running process. @value{GDBN} ignores any core dump file while your program
2208 On some operating systems, a program cannot be executed outside @value{GDBN}
2209 while you have breakpoints set on it inside @value{GDBN}. You can use the
2210 @code{kill} command in this situation to permit running your program
2211 outside the debugger.
2213 The @code{kill} command is also useful if you wish to recompile and
2214 relink your program, since on many systems it is impossible to modify an
2215 executable file while it is running in a process. In this case, when you
2216 next type @code{run}, @value{GDBN} notices that the file has changed, and
2217 reads the symbol table again (while trying to preserve your current
2218 breakpoint settings).
2221 @section Debugging Programs with Multiple Threads
2223 @cindex threads of execution
2224 @cindex multiple threads
2225 @cindex switching threads
2226 In some operating systems, such as HP-UX and Solaris, a single program
2227 may have more than one @dfn{thread} of execution. The precise semantics
2228 of threads differ from one operating system to another, but in general
2229 the threads of a single program are akin to multiple processes---except
2230 that they share one address space (that is, they can all examine and
2231 modify the same variables). On the other hand, each thread has its own
2232 registers and execution stack, and perhaps private memory.
2234 @value{GDBN} provides these facilities for debugging multi-thread
2238 @item automatic notification of new threads
2239 @item @samp{thread @var{threadno}}, a command to switch among threads
2240 @item @samp{info threads}, a command to inquire about existing threads
2241 @item @samp{thread apply [@var{threadno}] [@var{all}] @var{args}},
2242 a command to apply a command to a list of threads
2243 @item thread-specific breakpoints
2247 @emph{Warning:} These facilities are not yet available on every
2248 @value{GDBN} configuration where the operating system supports threads.
2249 If your @value{GDBN} does not support threads, these commands have no
2250 effect. For example, a system without thread support shows no output
2251 from @samp{info threads}, and always rejects the @code{thread} command,
2255 (@value{GDBP}) info threads
2256 (@value{GDBP}) thread 1
2257 Thread ID 1 not known. Use the "info threads" command to
2258 see the IDs of currently known threads.
2260 @c FIXME to implementors: how hard would it be to say "sorry, this GDB
2261 @c doesn't support threads"?
2264 @cindex focus of debugging
2265 @cindex current thread
2266 The @value{GDBN} thread debugging facility allows you to observe all
2267 threads while your program runs---but whenever @value{GDBN} takes
2268 control, one thread in particular is always the focus of debugging.
2269 This thread is called the @dfn{current thread}. Debugging commands show
2270 program information from the perspective of the current thread.
2272 @cindex @code{New} @var{systag} message
2273 @cindex thread identifier (system)
2274 @c FIXME-implementors!! It would be more helpful if the [New...] message
2275 @c included GDB's numeric thread handle, so you could just go to that
2276 @c thread without first checking `info threads'.
2277 Whenever @value{GDBN} detects a new thread in your program, it displays
2278 the target system's identification for the thread with a message in the
2279 form @samp{[New @var{systag}]}. @var{systag} is a thread identifier
2280 whose form varies depending on the particular system. For example, on
2281 @sc{gnu}/Linux, you might see
2284 [New Thread 46912507313328 (LWP 25582)]
2288 when @value{GDBN} notices a new thread. In contrast, on an SGI system,
2289 the @var{systag} is simply something like @samp{process 368}, with no
2292 @c FIXME!! (1) Does the [New...] message appear even for the very first
2293 @c thread of a program, or does it only appear for the
2294 @c second---i.e.@: when it becomes obvious we have a multithread
2296 @c (2) *Is* there necessarily a first thread always? Or do some
2297 @c multithread systems permit starting a program with multiple
2298 @c threads ab initio?
2300 @cindex thread number
2301 @cindex thread identifier (GDB)
2302 For debugging purposes, @value{GDBN} associates its own thread
2303 number---always a single integer---with each thread in your program.
2306 @kindex info threads
2308 Display a summary of all threads currently in your
2309 program. @value{GDBN} displays for each thread (in this order):
2313 the thread number assigned by @value{GDBN}
2316 the target system's thread identifier (@var{systag})
2319 the current stack frame summary for that thread
2323 An asterisk @samp{*} to the left of the @value{GDBN} thread number
2324 indicates the current thread.
2328 @c end table here to get a little more width for example
2331 (@value{GDBP}) info threads
2332 3 process 35 thread 27 0x34e5 in sigpause ()
2333 2 process 35 thread 23 0x34e5 in sigpause ()
2334 * 1 process 35 thread 13 main (argc=1, argv=0x7ffffff8)
2340 @cindex debugging multithreaded programs (on HP-UX)
2341 @cindex thread identifier (GDB), on HP-UX
2342 For debugging purposes, @value{GDBN} associates its own thread
2343 number---a small integer assigned in thread-creation order---with each
2344 thread in your program.
2346 @cindex @code{New} @var{systag} message, on HP-UX
2347 @cindex thread identifier (system), on HP-UX
2348 @c FIXME-implementors!! It would be more helpful if the [New...] message
2349 @c included GDB's numeric thread handle, so you could just go to that
2350 @c thread without first checking `info threads'.
2351 Whenever @value{GDBN} detects a new thread in your program, it displays
2352 both @value{GDBN}'s thread number and the target system's identification for the thread with a message in the
2353 form @samp{[New @var{systag}]}. @var{systag} is a thread identifier
2354 whose form varies depending on the particular system. For example, on
2358 [New thread 2 (system thread 26594)]
2362 when @value{GDBN} notices a new thread.
2365 @kindex info threads (HP-UX)
2367 Display a summary of all threads currently in your
2368 program. @value{GDBN} displays for each thread (in this order):
2371 @item the thread number assigned by @value{GDBN}
2373 @item the target system's thread identifier (@var{systag})
2375 @item the current stack frame summary for that thread
2379 An asterisk @samp{*} to the left of the @value{GDBN} thread number
2380 indicates the current thread.
2384 @c end table here to get a little more width for example
2387 (@value{GDBP}) info threads
2388 * 3 system thread 26607 worker (wptr=0x7b09c318 "@@") \@*
2390 2 system thread 26606 0x7b0030d8 in __ksleep () \@*
2391 from /usr/lib/libc.2
2392 1 system thread 27905 0x7b003498 in _brk () \@*
2393 from /usr/lib/libc.2
2396 On Solaris, you can display more information about user threads with a
2397 Solaris-specific command:
2400 @item maint info sol-threads
2401 @kindex maint info sol-threads
2402 @cindex thread info (Solaris)
2403 Display info on Solaris user threads.
2407 @kindex thread @var{threadno}
2408 @item thread @var{threadno}
2409 Make thread number @var{threadno} the current thread. The command
2410 argument @var{threadno} is the internal @value{GDBN} thread number, as
2411 shown in the first field of the @samp{info threads} display.
2412 @value{GDBN} responds by displaying the system identifier of the thread
2413 you selected, and its current stack frame summary:
2416 @c FIXME!! This example made up; find a @value{GDBN} w/threads and get real one
2417 (@value{GDBP}) thread 2
2418 [Switching to process 35 thread 23]
2419 0x34e5 in sigpause ()
2423 As with the @samp{[New @dots{}]} message, the form of the text after
2424 @samp{Switching to} depends on your system's conventions for identifying
2427 @kindex thread apply
2428 @cindex apply command to several threads
2429 @item thread apply [@var{threadno}] [@var{all}] @var{command}
2430 The @code{thread apply} command allows you to apply the named
2431 @var{command} to one or more threads. Specify the numbers of the
2432 threads that you want affected with the command argument
2433 @var{threadno}. It can be a single thread number, one of the numbers
2434 shown in the first field of the @samp{info threads} display; or it
2435 could be a range of thread numbers, as in @code{2-4}. To apply a
2436 command to all threads, type @kbd{thread apply all @var{command}}.
2439 @cindex automatic thread selection
2440 @cindex switching threads automatically
2441 @cindex threads, automatic switching
2442 Whenever @value{GDBN} stops your program, due to a breakpoint or a
2443 signal, it automatically selects the thread where that breakpoint or
2444 signal happened. @value{GDBN} alerts you to the context switch with a
2445 message of the form @samp{[Switching to @var{systag}]} to identify the
2448 @xref{Thread Stops,,Stopping and Starting Multi-thread Programs}, for
2449 more information about how @value{GDBN} behaves when you stop and start
2450 programs with multiple threads.
2452 @xref{Set Watchpoints,,Setting Watchpoints}, for information about
2453 watchpoints in programs with multiple threads.
2456 @section Debugging Programs with Multiple Processes
2458 @cindex fork, debugging programs which call
2459 @cindex multiple processes
2460 @cindex processes, multiple
2461 On most systems, @value{GDBN} has no special support for debugging
2462 programs which create additional processes using the @code{fork}
2463 function. When a program forks, @value{GDBN} will continue to debug the
2464 parent process and the child process will run unimpeded. If you have
2465 set a breakpoint in any code which the child then executes, the child
2466 will get a @code{SIGTRAP} signal which (unless it catches the signal)
2467 will cause it to terminate.
2469 However, if you want to debug the child process there is a workaround
2470 which isn't too painful. Put a call to @code{sleep} in the code which
2471 the child process executes after the fork. It may be useful to sleep
2472 only if a certain environment variable is set, or a certain file exists,
2473 so that the delay need not occur when you don't want to run @value{GDBN}
2474 on the child. While the child is sleeping, use the @code{ps} program to
2475 get its process ID. Then tell @value{GDBN} (a new invocation of
2476 @value{GDBN} if you are also debugging the parent process) to attach to
2477 the child process (@pxref{Attach}). From that point on you can debug
2478 the child process just like any other process which you attached to.
2480 On some systems, @value{GDBN} provides support for debugging programs that
2481 create additional processes using the @code{fork} or @code{vfork} functions.
2482 Currently, the only platforms with this feature are HP-UX (11.x and later
2483 only?) and GNU/Linux (kernel version 2.5.60 and later).
2485 By default, when a program forks, @value{GDBN} will continue to debug
2486 the parent process and the child process will run unimpeded.
2488 If you want to follow the child process instead of the parent process,
2489 use the command @w{@code{set follow-fork-mode}}.
2492 @kindex set follow-fork-mode
2493 @item set follow-fork-mode @var{mode}
2494 Set the debugger response to a program call of @code{fork} or
2495 @code{vfork}. A call to @code{fork} or @code{vfork} creates a new
2496 process. The @var{mode} argument can be:
2500 The original process is debugged after a fork. The child process runs
2501 unimpeded. This is the default.
2504 The new process is debugged after a fork. The parent process runs
2509 @kindex show follow-fork-mode
2510 @item show follow-fork-mode
2511 Display the current debugger response to a @code{fork} or @code{vfork} call.
2514 @cindex debugging multiple processes
2515 On Linux, if you want to debug both the parent and child processes, use the
2516 command @w{@code{set detach-on-fork}}.
2519 @kindex set detach-on-fork
2520 @item set detach-on-fork @var{mode}
2521 Tells gdb whether to detach one of the processes after a fork, or
2522 retain debugger control over them both.
2526 The child process (or parent process, depending on the value of
2527 @code{follow-fork-mode}) will be detached and allowed to run
2528 independently. This is the default.
2531 Both processes will be held under the control of @value{GDBN}.
2532 One process (child or parent, depending on the value of
2533 @code{follow-fork-mode}) is debugged as usual, while the other
2538 @kindex show detach-on-follow
2539 @item show detach-on-follow
2540 Show whether detach-on-follow mode is on/off.
2543 If you choose to set @var{detach-on-follow} mode off, then
2544 @value{GDBN} will retain control of all forked processes (including
2545 nested forks). You can list the forked processes under the control of
2546 @value{GDBN} by using the @w{@code{info forks}} command, and switch
2547 from one fork to another by using the @w{@code{fork}} command.
2552 Print a list of all forked processes under the control of @value{GDBN}.
2553 The listing will include a fork id, a process id, and the current
2554 position (program counter) of the process.
2557 @kindex fork @var{fork-id}
2558 @item fork @var{fork-id}
2559 Make fork number @var{fork-id} the current process. The argument
2560 @var{fork-id} is the internal fork number assigned by @value{GDBN},
2561 as shown in the first field of the @samp{info forks} display.
2565 To quit debugging one of the forked processes, you can either detach
2566 from it by using the @w{@code{detach fork}} command (allowing it to
2567 run independently), or delete (and kill) it using the
2568 @w{@code{delete fork}} command.
2571 @kindex detach fork @var{fork-id}
2572 @item detach fork @var{fork-id}
2573 Detach from the process identified by @value{GDBN} fork number
2574 @var{fork-id}, and remove it from the fork list. The process will be
2575 allowed to run independently.
2577 @kindex delete fork @var{fork-id}
2578 @item delete fork @var{fork-id}
2579 Kill the process identified by @value{GDBN} fork number @var{fork-id},
2580 and remove it from the fork list.
2584 If you ask to debug a child process and a @code{vfork} is followed by an
2585 @code{exec}, @value{GDBN} executes the new target up to the first
2586 breakpoint in the new target. If you have a breakpoint set on
2587 @code{main} in your original program, the breakpoint will also be set on
2588 the child process's @code{main}.
2590 When a child process is spawned by @code{vfork}, you cannot debug the
2591 child or parent until an @code{exec} call completes.
2593 If you issue a @code{run} command to @value{GDBN} after an @code{exec}
2594 call executes, the new target restarts. To restart the parent process,
2595 use the @code{file} command with the parent executable name as its
2598 You can use the @code{catch} command to make @value{GDBN} stop whenever
2599 a @code{fork}, @code{vfork}, or @code{exec} call is made. @xref{Set
2600 Catchpoints, ,Setting Catchpoints}.
2602 @node Checkpoint/Restart
2603 @section Setting a @emph{Bookmark} to Return to Later
2608 @cindex snapshot of a process
2609 @cindex rewind program state
2611 On certain operating systems@footnote{Currently, only
2612 @sc{gnu}/Linux.}, @value{GDBN} is able to save a @dfn{snapshot} of a
2613 program's state, called a @dfn{checkpoint}, and come back to it
2616 Returning to a checkpoint effectively undoes everything that has
2617 happened in the program since the @code{checkpoint} was saved. This
2618 includes changes in memory, registers, and even (within some limits)
2619 system state. Effectively, it is like going back in time to the
2620 moment when the checkpoint was saved.
2622 Thus, if you're stepping thru a program and you think you're
2623 getting close to the point where things go wrong, you can save
2624 a checkpoint. Then, if you accidentally go too far and miss
2625 the critical statement, instead of having to restart your program
2626 from the beginning, you can just go back to the checkpoint and
2627 start again from there.
2629 This can be especially useful if it takes a lot of time or
2630 steps to reach the point where you think the bug occurs.
2632 To use the @code{checkpoint}/@code{restart} method of debugging:
2637 Save a snapshot of the debugged program's current execution state.
2638 The @code{checkpoint} command takes no arguments, but each checkpoint
2639 is assigned a small integer id, similar to a breakpoint id.
2641 @kindex info checkpoints
2642 @item info checkpoints
2643 List the checkpoints that have been saved in the current debugging
2644 session. For each checkpoint, the following information will be
2651 @item Source line, or label
2654 @kindex restart @var{checkpoint-id}
2655 @item restart @var{checkpoint-id}
2656 Restore the program state that was saved as checkpoint number
2657 @var{checkpoint-id}. All program variables, registers, stack frames
2658 etc.@: will be returned to the values that they had when the checkpoint
2659 was saved. In essence, gdb will ``wind back the clock'' to the point
2660 in time when the checkpoint was saved.
2662 Note that breakpoints, @value{GDBN} variables, command history etc.
2663 are not affected by restoring a checkpoint. In general, a checkpoint
2664 only restores things that reside in the program being debugged, not in
2667 @kindex delete checkpoint @var{checkpoint-id}
2668 @item delete checkpoint @var{checkpoint-id}
2669 Delete the previously-saved checkpoint identified by @var{checkpoint-id}.
2673 Returning to a previously saved checkpoint will restore the user state
2674 of the program being debugged, plus a significant subset of the system
2675 (OS) state, including file pointers. It won't ``un-write'' data from
2676 a file, but it will rewind the file pointer to the previous location,
2677 so that the previously written data can be overwritten. For files
2678 opened in read mode, the pointer will also be restored so that the
2679 previously read data can be read again.
2681 Of course, characters that have been sent to a printer (or other
2682 external device) cannot be ``snatched back'', and characters received
2683 from eg.@: a serial device can be removed from internal program buffers,
2684 but they cannot be ``pushed back'' into the serial pipeline, ready to
2685 be received again. Similarly, the actual contents of files that have
2686 been changed cannot be restored (at this time).
2688 However, within those constraints, you actually can ``rewind'' your
2689 program to a previously saved point in time, and begin debugging it
2690 again --- and you can change the course of events so as to debug a
2691 different execution path this time.
2693 @cindex checkpoints and process id
2694 Finally, there is one bit of internal program state that will be
2695 different when you return to a checkpoint --- the program's process
2696 id. Each checkpoint will have a unique process id (or @var{pid}),
2697 and each will be different from the program's original @var{pid}.
2698 If your program has saved a local copy of its process id, this could
2699 potentially pose a problem.
2701 @subsection A Non-obvious Benefit of Using Checkpoints
2703 On some systems such as @sc{gnu}/Linux, address space randomization
2704 is performed on new processes for security reasons. This makes it
2705 difficult or impossible to set a breakpoint, or watchpoint, on an
2706 absolute address if you have to restart the program, since the
2707 absolute location of a symbol will change from one execution to the
2710 A checkpoint, however, is an @emph{identical} copy of a process.
2711 Therefore if you create a checkpoint at (eg.@:) the start of main,
2712 and simply return to that checkpoint instead of restarting the
2713 process, you can avoid the effects of address randomization and
2714 your symbols will all stay in the same place.
2717 @chapter Stopping and Continuing
2719 The principal purposes of using a debugger are so that you can stop your
2720 program before it terminates; or so that, if your program runs into
2721 trouble, you can investigate and find out why.
2723 Inside @value{GDBN}, your program may stop for any of several reasons,
2724 such as a signal, a breakpoint, or reaching a new line after a
2725 @value{GDBN} command such as @code{step}. You may then examine and
2726 change variables, set new breakpoints or remove old ones, and then
2727 continue execution. Usually, the messages shown by @value{GDBN} provide
2728 ample explanation of the status of your program---but you can also
2729 explicitly request this information at any time.
2732 @kindex info program
2734 Display information about the status of your program: whether it is
2735 running or not, what process it is, and why it stopped.
2739 * Breakpoints:: Breakpoints, watchpoints, and catchpoints
2740 * Continuing and Stepping:: Resuming execution
2742 * Thread Stops:: Stopping and starting multi-thread programs
2746 @section Breakpoints, Watchpoints, and Catchpoints
2749 A @dfn{breakpoint} makes your program stop whenever a certain point in
2750 the program is reached. For each breakpoint, you can add conditions to
2751 control in finer detail whether your program stops. You can set
2752 breakpoints with the @code{break} command and its variants (@pxref{Set
2753 Breaks, ,Setting Breakpoints}), to specify the place where your program
2754 should stop by line number, function name or exact address in the
2757 On some systems, you can set breakpoints in shared libraries before
2758 the executable is run. There is a minor limitation on HP-UX systems:
2759 you must wait until the executable is run in order to set breakpoints
2760 in shared library routines that are not called directly by the program
2761 (for example, routines that are arguments in a @code{pthread_create}
2765 @cindex data breakpoints
2766 @cindex memory tracing
2767 @cindex breakpoint on memory address
2768 @cindex breakpoint on variable modification
2769 A @dfn{watchpoint} is a special breakpoint that stops your program
2770 when the value of an expression changes. The expression may be a value
2771 of a variable, or it could involve values of one or more variables
2772 combined by operators, such as @samp{a + b}. This is sometimes called
2773 @dfn{data breakpoints}. You must use a different command to set
2774 watchpoints (@pxref{Set Watchpoints, ,Setting Watchpoints}), but aside
2775 from that, you can manage a watchpoint like any other breakpoint: you
2776 enable, disable, and delete both breakpoints and watchpoints using the
2779 You can arrange to have values from your program displayed automatically
2780 whenever @value{GDBN} stops at a breakpoint. @xref{Auto Display,,
2784 @cindex breakpoint on events
2785 A @dfn{catchpoint} is another special breakpoint that stops your program
2786 when a certain kind of event occurs, such as the throwing of a C@t{++}
2787 exception or the loading of a library. As with watchpoints, you use a
2788 different command to set a catchpoint (@pxref{Set Catchpoints, ,Setting
2789 Catchpoints}), but aside from that, you can manage a catchpoint like any
2790 other breakpoint. (To stop when your program receives a signal, use the
2791 @code{handle} command; see @ref{Signals, ,Signals}.)
2793 @cindex breakpoint numbers
2794 @cindex numbers for breakpoints
2795 @value{GDBN} assigns a number to each breakpoint, watchpoint, or
2796 catchpoint when you create it; these numbers are successive integers
2797 starting with one. In many of the commands for controlling various
2798 features of breakpoints you use the breakpoint number to say which
2799 breakpoint you want to change. Each breakpoint may be @dfn{enabled} or
2800 @dfn{disabled}; if disabled, it has no effect on your program until you
2803 @cindex breakpoint ranges
2804 @cindex ranges of breakpoints
2805 Some @value{GDBN} commands accept a range of breakpoints on which to
2806 operate. A breakpoint range is either a single breakpoint number, like
2807 @samp{5}, or two such numbers, in increasing order, separated by a
2808 hyphen, like @samp{5-7}. When a breakpoint range is given to a command,
2809 all breakpoints in that range are operated on.
2812 * Set Breaks:: Setting breakpoints
2813 * Set Watchpoints:: Setting watchpoints
2814 * Set Catchpoints:: Setting catchpoints
2815 * Delete Breaks:: Deleting breakpoints
2816 * Disabling:: Disabling breakpoints
2817 * Conditions:: Break conditions
2818 * Break Commands:: Breakpoint command lists
2819 * Breakpoint Menus:: Breakpoint menus
2820 * Error in Breakpoints:: ``Cannot insert breakpoints''
2821 * Breakpoint-related Warnings:: ``Breakpoint address adjusted...''
2825 @subsection Setting Breakpoints
2827 @c FIXME LMB what does GDB do if no code on line of breakpt?
2828 @c consider in particular declaration with/without initialization.
2830 @c FIXME 2 is there stuff on this already? break at fun start, already init?
2833 @kindex b @r{(@code{break})}
2834 @vindex $bpnum@r{, convenience variable}
2835 @cindex latest breakpoint
2836 Breakpoints are set with the @code{break} command (abbreviated
2837 @code{b}). The debugger convenience variable @samp{$bpnum} records the
2838 number of the breakpoint you've set most recently; see @ref{Convenience
2839 Vars,, Convenience Variables}, for a discussion of what you can do with
2840 convenience variables.
2842 You have several ways to say where the breakpoint should go.
2845 @item break @var{function}
2846 Set a breakpoint at entry to function @var{function}.
2847 When using source languages that permit overloading of symbols, such as
2848 C@t{++}, @var{function} may refer to more than one possible place to break.
2849 @xref{Breakpoint Menus,,Breakpoint Menus}, for a discussion of that situation.
2851 @item break +@var{offset}
2852 @itemx break -@var{offset}
2853 Set a breakpoint some number of lines forward or back from the position
2854 at which execution stopped in the currently selected @dfn{stack frame}.
2855 (@xref{Frames, ,Frames}, for a description of stack frames.)
2857 @item break @var{linenum}
2858 Set a breakpoint at line @var{linenum} in the current source file.
2859 The current source file is the last file whose source text was printed.
2860 The breakpoint will stop your program just before it executes any of the
2863 @item break @var{filename}:@var{linenum}
2864 Set a breakpoint at line @var{linenum} in source file @var{filename}.
2866 @item break @var{filename}:@var{function}
2867 Set a breakpoint at entry to function @var{function} found in file
2868 @var{filename}. Specifying a file name as well as a function name is
2869 superfluous except when multiple files contain similarly named
2872 @item break *@var{address}
2873 Set a breakpoint at address @var{address}. You can use this to set
2874 breakpoints in parts of your program which do not have debugging
2875 information or source files.
2878 When called without any arguments, @code{break} sets a breakpoint at
2879 the next instruction to be executed in the selected stack frame
2880 (@pxref{Stack, ,Examining the Stack}). In any selected frame but the
2881 innermost, this makes your program stop as soon as control
2882 returns to that frame. This is similar to the effect of a
2883 @code{finish} command in the frame inside the selected frame---except
2884 that @code{finish} does not leave an active breakpoint. If you use
2885 @code{break} without an argument in the innermost frame, @value{GDBN} stops
2886 the next time it reaches the current location; this may be useful
2889 @value{GDBN} normally ignores breakpoints when it resumes execution, until at
2890 least one instruction has been executed. If it did not do this, you
2891 would be unable to proceed past a breakpoint without first disabling the
2892 breakpoint. This rule applies whether or not the breakpoint already
2893 existed when your program stopped.
2895 @item break @dots{} if @var{cond}
2896 Set a breakpoint with condition @var{cond}; evaluate the expression
2897 @var{cond} each time the breakpoint is reached, and stop only if the
2898 value is nonzero---that is, if @var{cond} evaluates as true.
2899 @samp{@dots{}} stands for one of the possible arguments described
2900 above (or no argument) specifying where to break. @xref{Conditions,
2901 ,Break Conditions}, for more information on breakpoint conditions.
2904 @item tbreak @var{args}
2905 Set a breakpoint enabled only for one stop. @var{args} are the
2906 same as for the @code{break} command, and the breakpoint is set in the same
2907 way, but the breakpoint is automatically deleted after the first time your
2908 program stops there. @xref{Disabling, ,Disabling Breakpoints}.
2911 @cindex hardware breakpoints
2912 @item hbreak @var{args}
2913 Set a hardware-assisted breakpoint. @var{args} are the same as for the
2914 @code{break} command and the breakpoint is set in the same way, but the
2915 breakpoint requires hardware support and some target hardware may not
2916 have this support. The main purpose of this is EPROM/ROM code
2917 debugging, so you can set a breakpoint at an instruction without
2918 changing the instruction. This can be used with the new trap-generation
2919 provided by SPARClite DSU and most x86-based targets. These targets
2920 will generate traps when a program accesses some data or instruction
2921 address that is assigned to the debug registers. However the hardware
2922 breakpoint registers can take a limited number of breakpoints. For
2923 example, on the DSU, only two data breakpoints can be set at a time, and
2924 @value{GDBN} will reject this command if more than two are used. Delete
2925 or disable unused hardware breakpoints before setting new ones
2926 (@pxref{Disabling, ,Disabling Breakpoints}).
2927 @xref{Conditions, ,Break Conditions}.
2928 For remote targets, you can restrict the number of hardware
2929 breakpoints @value{GDBN} will use, see @ref{set remote
2930 hardware-breakpoint-limit}.
2934 @item thbreak @var{args}
2935 Set a hardware-assisted breakpoint enabled only for one stop. @var{args}
2936 are the same as for the @code{hbreak} command and the breakpoint is set in
2937 the same way. However, like the @code{tbreak} command,
2938 the breakpoint is automatically deleted after the
2939 first time your program stops there. Also, like the @code{hbreak}
2940 command, the breakpoint requires hardware support and some target hardware
2941 may not have this support. @xref{Disabling, ,Disabling Breakpoints}.
2942 See also @ref{Conditions, ,Break Conditions}.
2945 @cindex regular expression
2946 @cindex breakpoints in functions matching a regexp
2947 @cindex set breakpoints in many functions
2948 @item rbreak @var{regex}
2949 Set breakpoints on all functions matching the regular expression
2950 @var{regex}. This command sets an unconditional breakpoint on all
2951 matches, printing a list of all breakpoints it set. Once these
2952 breakpoints are set, they are treated just like the breakpoints set with
2953 the @code{break} command. You can delete them, disable them, or make
2954 them conditional the same way as any other breakpoint.
2956 The syntax of the regular expression is the standard one used with tools
2957 like @file{grep}. Note that this is different from the syntax used by
2958 shells, so for instance @code{foo*} matches all functions that include
2959 an @code{fo} followed by zero or more @code{o}s. There is an implicit
2960 @code{.*} leading and trailing the regular expression you supply, so to
2961 match only functions that begin with @code{foo}, use @code{^foo}.
2963 @cindex non-member C@t{++} functions, set breakpoint in
2964 When debugging C@t{++} programs, @code{rbreak} is useful for setting
2965 breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any special
2968 @cindex set breakpoints on all functions
2969 The @code{rbreak} command can be used to set breakpoints in
2970 @strong{all} the functions in a program, like this:
2973 (@value{GDBP}) rbreak .
2976 @kindex info breakpoints
2977 @cindex @code{$_} and @code{info breakpoints}
2978 @item info breakpoints @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2979 @itemx info break @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2980 @itemx info watchpoints @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2981 Print a table of all breakpoints, watchpoints, and catchpoints set and
2982 not deleted. Optional argument @var{n} means print information only
2983 about the specified breakpoint (or watchpoint or catchpoint). For
2984 each breakpoint, following columns are printed:
2987 @item Breakpoint Numbers
2989 Breakpoint, watchpoint, or catchpoint.
2991 Whether the breakpoint is marked to be disabled or deleted when hit.
2992 @item Enabled or Disabled
2993 Enabled breakpoints are marked with @samp{y}. @samp{n} marks breakpoints
2994 that are not enabled. An optional @samp{(p)} suffix marks pending
2995 breakpoints --- breakpoints for which address is either not yet
2996 resolved, pending load of a shared library, or for which address was
2997 in a shared library that was since unloaded. Such breakpoint won't
2998 fire until a shared library that has the symbol or line referred by
2999 breakpoint is loaded. See below for details.
3001 Where the breakpoint is in your program, as a memory address. For a
3002 pending breakpoint whose address is not yet known, this field will
3003 contain @samp{<PENDING>}. A breakpoint with several locations will
3004 have @samp{<MULTIPLE>} in this field --- see below for details.
3006 Where the breakpoint is in the source for your program, as a file and
3007 line number. For a pending breakpoint, the original string passed to
3008 the breakpoint command will be listed as it cannot be resolved until
3009 the appropriate shared library is loaded in the future.
3013 If a breakpoint is conditional, @code{info break} shows the condition on
3014 the line following the affected breakpoint; breakpoint commands, if any,
3015 are listed after that. A pending breakpoint is allowed to have a condition
3016 specified for it. The condition is not parsed for validity until a shared
3017 library is loaded that allows the pending breakpoint to resolve to a
3021 @code{info break} with a breakpoint
3022 number @var{n} as argument lists only that breakpoint. The
3023 convenience variable @code{$_} and the default examining-address for
3024 the @code{x} command are set to the address of the last breakpoint
3025 listed (@pxref{Memory, ,Examining Memory}).
3028 @code{info break} displays a count of the number of times the breakpoint
3029 has been hit. This is especially useful in conjunction with the
3030 @code{ignore} command. You can ignore a large number of breakpoint
3031 hits, look at the breakpoint info to see how many times the breakpoint
3032 was hit, and then run again, ignoring one less than that number. This
3033 will get you quickly to the last hit of that breakpoint.
3036 @value{GDBN} allows you to set any number of breakpoints at the same place in
3037 your program. There is nothing silly or meaningless about this. When
3038 the breakpoints are conditional, this is even useful
3039 (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break Conditions}).
3041 It is possible that a breakpoint corresponds to several locations
3042 in your program. Examples of this situation are:
3047 For a C@t{++} constructor, the @value{NGCC} compiler generates several
3048 instances of the function body, used in different cases.
3051 For a C@t{++} template function, a given line in the function can
3052 correspond to any number of instantiations.
3055 For an inlined function, a given source line can correspond to
3056 several places where that function is inlined.
3060 In all those cases, @value{GDBN} will insert a breakpoint at all
3061 the relevant locations.
3063 A breakpoint with multiple locations is displayed in the
3064 breakpoint table using several rows --- one header row, followed
3065 by one row for each breakpoint location. The header row
3066 has @samp{<MULTIPLE>} in the address column. The rows for
3067 individual locations contain the actual addresses for locations,
3068 and say what functions those locations are in. The number
3069 column for a location has number in the format
3070 @var{breakpoint-number}.@var{location-number}.
3074 Num Type Disp Enb Address What
3075 1 breakpoint keep y <MULTIPLE>
3077 breakpoint already hit 1 time
3078 1.1 y 0x080486a2 in void foo<int>() at t.cc:8
3079 1.2 y 0x080486ca in void foo<double>() at t.cc:8
3082 Each location can be individually enabled or disabled by passing
3083 @var{breakpoint-number}.@var{location-number} as argument to the
3084 @code{enable} and @code{disable} commands.
3086 @cindex pending breakpoints
3087 It's quite common to have a breakpoint inside a shared library.
3088 The shared library may be loaded and unloaded explicitly,
3089 and possibly repeatedly, as the program is executed. To support
3090 this use case, @value{GDBN} updates breakpoint locations whenever
3091 any shared library is loaded or unloaded. Typically, you would
3092 set a breakpoint in a shared library at the beginning of your
3093 debugging session, when the library is not loaded, and when the
3094 symbols from the library are not available. When you try to set
3095 breakpoint, @value{GDBN} will ask you if you want to set
3096 a so called @dfn{pending breakpoint} --- breakpoint whose address
3097 is not yet resolved.
3099 After the program is run, whenever a new shared library is loaded,
3100 @value{GDBN} reevaluates all the breakpoints. When a newly loaded
3101 shared library contains the symbol or line referred to by some
3102 pending breakpoint, that breakpoint is resolved and becomes an
3103 ordinary breakpoint. When a library is unloaded, all breakpoints
3104 that refer to its symbols or source lines become pending again.
3106 This logic works for breakpoints with multiple locations, too. For
3107 example, if you have a breakpoint in a C@t{++} template function, and
3108 a newly loaded shared library has an instantiation of that template,
3109 a new location is added to the list of locations for the breakpoint.
3111 Except for having unresolved address, pending breakpoints do not
3112 differ from regular breakpoints. You can set conditions or commands,
3113 enable and disable them and perform other breakpoint operations.
3115 @value{GDBN} provides some additional commands for controlling what
3116 happens when the @samp{break} command cannot resolve breakpoint
3117 address specification to an address:
3119 @kindex set breakpoint pending
3120 @kindex show breakpoint pending
3122 @item set breakpoint pending auto
3123 This is the default behavior. When @value{GDBN} cannot find the breakpoint
3124 location, it queries you whether a pending breakpoint should be created.
3126 @item set breakpoint pending on
3127 This indicates that an unrecognized breakpoint location should automatically
3128 result in a pending breakpoint being created.
3130 @item set breakpoint pending off
3131 This indicates that pending breakpoints are not to be created. Any
3132 unrecognized breakpoint location results in an error. This setting does
3133 not affect any pending breakpoints previously created.
3135 @item show breakpoint pending
3136 Show the current behavior setting for creating pending breakpoints.
3139 The settings above only affect the @code{break} command and its
3140 variants. Once breakpoint is set, it will be automatically updated
3141 as shared libraries are loaded and unloaded.
3143 @cindex automatic hardware breakpoints
3144 For some targets, @value{GDBN} can automatically decide if hardware or
3145 software breakpoints should be used, depending on whether the
3146 breakpoint address is read-only or read-write. This applies to
3147 breakpoints set with the @code{break} command as well as to internal
3148 breakpoints set by commands like @code{next} and @code{finish}. For
3149 breakpoints set with @code{hbreak}, @value{GDBN} will always use hardware
3152 You can control this automatic behaviour with the following commands::
3154 @kindex set breakpoint auto-hw
3155 @kindex show breakpoint auto-hw
3157 @item set breakpoint auto-hw on
3158 This is the default behavior. When @value{GDBN} sets a breakpoint, it
3159 will try to use the target memory map to decide if software or hardware
3160 breakpoint must be used.
3162 @item set breakpoint auto-hw off
3163 This indicates @value{GDBN} should not automatically select breakpoint
3164 type. If the target provides a memory map, @value{GDBN} will warn when
3165 trying to set software breakpoint at a read-only address.
3169 @cindex negative breakpoint numbers
3170 @cindex internal @value{GDBN} breakpoints
3171 @value{GDBN} itself sometimes sets breakpoints in your program for
3172 special purposes, such as proper handling of @code{longjmp} (in C
3173 programs). These internal breakpoints are assigned negative numbers,
3174 starting with @code{-1}; @samp{info breakpoints} does not display them.
3175 You can see these breakpoints with the @value{GDBN} maintenance command
3176 @samp{maint info breakpoints} (@pxref{maint info breakpoints}).
3179 @node Set Watchpoints
3180 @subsection Setting Watchpoints
3182 @cindex setting watchpoints
3183 You can use a watchpoint to stop execution whenever the value of an
3184 expression changes, without having to predict a particular place where
3185 this may happen. (This is sometimes called a @dfn{data breakpoint}.)
3186 The expression may be as simple as the value of a single variable, or
3187 as complex as many variables combined by operators. Examples include:
3191 A reference to the value of a single variable.
3194 An address cast to an appropriate data type. For example,
3195 @samp{*(int *)0x12345678} will watch a 4-byte region at the specified
3196 address (assuming an @code{int} occupies 4 bytes).
3199 An arbitrarily complex expression, such as @samp{a*b + c/d}. The
3200 expression can use any operators valid in the program's native
3201 language (@pxref{Languages}).
3204 @cindex software watchpoints
3205 @cindex hardware watchpoints
3206 Depending on your system, watchpoints may be implemented in software or
3207 hardware. @value{GDBN} does software watchpointing by single-stepping your
3208 program and testing the variable's value each time, which is hundreds of
3209 times slower than normal execution. (But this may still be worth it, to
3210 catch errors where you have no clue what part of your program is the
3213 On some systems, such as HP-UX, @sc{gnu}/Linux and most other
3214 x86-based targets, @value{GDBN} includes support for hardware
3215 watchpoints, which do not slow down the running of your program.
3219 @item watch @var{expr}
3220 Set a watchpoint for an expression. @value{GDBN} will break when the
3221 expression @var{expr} is written into by the program and its value
3222 changes. The simplest (and the most popular) use of this command is
3223 to watch the value of a single variable:
3226 (@value{GDBP}) watch foo
3230 @item rwatch @var{expr}
3231 Set a watchpoint that will break when the value of @var{expr} is read
3235 @item awatch @var{expr}
3236 Set a watchpoint that will break when @var{expr} is either read from
3237 or written into by the program.
3239 @kindex info watchpoints @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
3240 @item info watchpoints
3241 This command prints a list of watchpoints, breakpoints, and catchpoints;
3242 it is the same as @code{info break} (@pxref{Set Breaks}).
3245 @value{GDBN} sets a @dfn{hardware watchpoint} if possible. Hardware
3246 watchpoints execute very quickly, and the debugger reports a change in
3247 value at the exact instruction where the change occurs. If @value{GDBN}
3248 cannot set a hardware watchpoint, it sets a software watchpoint, which
3249 executes more slowly and reports the change in value at the next
3250 @emph{statement}, not the instruction, after the change occurs.
3252 @cindex use only software watchpoints
3253 You can force @value{GDBN} to use only software watchpoints with the
3254 @kbd{set can-use-hw-watchpoints 0} command. With this variable set to
3255 zero, @value{GDBN} will never try to use hardware watchpoints, even if
3256 the underlying system supports them. (Note that hardware-assisted
3257 watchpoints that were set @emph{before} setting
3258 @code{can-use-hw-watchpoints} to zero will still use the hardware
3259 mechanism of watching expression values.)
3262 @item set can-use-hw-watchpoints
3263 @kindex set can-use-hw-watchpoints
3264 Set whether or not to use hardware watchpoints.
3266 @item show can-use-hw-watchpoints
3267 @kindex show can-use-hw-watchpoints
3268 Show the current mode of using hardware watchpoints.
3271 For remote targets, you can restrict the number of hardware
3272 watchpoints @value{GDBN} will use, see @ref{set remote
3273 hardware-breakpoint-limit}.
3275 When you issue the @code{watch} command, @value{GDBN} reports
3278 Hardware watchpoint @var{num}: @var{expr}
3282 if it was able to set a hardware watchpoint.
3284 Currently, the @code{awatch} and @code{rwatch} commands can only set
3285 hardware watchpoints, because accesses to data that don't change the
3286 value of the watched expression cannot be detected without examining
3287 every instruction as it is being executed, and @value{GDBN} does not do
3288 that currently. If @value{GDBN} finds that it is unable to set a
3289 hardware breakpoint with the @code{awatch} or @code{rwatch} command, it
3290 will print a message like this:
3293 Expression cannot be implemented with read/access watchpoint.
3296 Sometimes, @value{GDBN} cannot set a hardware watchpoint because the
3297 data type of the watched expression is wider than what a hardware
3298 watchpoint on the target machine can handle. For example, some systems
3299 can only watch regions that are up to 4 bytes wide; on such systems you
3300 cannot set hardware watchpoints for an expression that yields a
3301 double-precision floating-point number (which is typically 8 bytes
3302 wide). As a work-around, it might be possible to break the large region
3303 into a series of smaller ones and watch them with separate watchpoints.
3305 If you set too many hardware watchpoints, @value{GDBN} might be unable
3306 to insert all of them when you resume the execution of your program.
3307 Since the precise number of active watchpoints is unknown until such
3308 time as the program is about to be resumed, @value{GDBN} might not be
3309 able to warn you about this when you set the watchpoints, and the
3310 warning will be printed only when the program is resumed:
3313 Hardware watchpoint @var{num}: Could not insert watchpoint
3317 If this happens, delete or disable some of the watchpoints.
3319 Watching complex expressions that reference many variables can also
3320 exhaust the resources available for hardware-assisted watchpoints.
3321 That's because @value{GDBN} needs to watch every variable in the
3322 expression with separately allocated resources.
3324 The SPARClite DSU will generate traps when a program accesses some data
3325 or instruction address that is assigned to the debug registers. For the
3326 data addresses, DSU facilitates the @code{watch} command. However the
3327 hardware breakpoint registers can only take two data watchpoints, and
3328 both watchpoints must be the same kind. For example, you can set two
3329 watchpoints with @code{watch} commands, two with @code{rwatch} commands,
3330 @strong{or} two with @code{awatch} commands, but you cannot set one
3331 watchpoint with one command and the other with a different command.
3332 @value{GDBN} will reject the command if you try to mix watchpoints.
3333 Delete or disable unused watchpoint commands before setting new ones.
3335 If you call a function interactively using @code{print} or @code{call},
3336 any watchpoints you have set will be inactive until @value{GDBN} reaches another
3337 kind of breakpoint or the call completes.
3339 @value{GDBN} automatically deletes watchpoints that watch local
3340 (automatic) variables, or expressions that involve such variables, when
3341 they go out of scope, that is, when the execution leaves the block in
3342 which these variables were defined. In particular, when the program
3343 being debugged terminates, @emph{all} local variables go out of scope,
3344 and so only watchpoints that watch global variables remain set. If you
3345 rerun the program, you will need to set all such watchpoints again. One
3346 way of doing that would be to set a code breakpoint at the entry to the
3347 @code{main} function and when it breaks, set all the watchpoints.
3350 @cindex watchpoints and threads
3351 @cindex threads and watchpoints
3352 @emph{Warning:} In multi-thread programs, watchpoints have only limited
3353 usefulness. With the current watchpoint implementation, @value{GDBN}
3354 can only watch the value of an expression @emph{in a single thread}. If
3355 you are confident that the expression can only change due to the current
3356 thread's activity (and if you are also confident that no other thread
3357 can become current), then you can use watchpoints as usual. However,
3358 @value{GDBN} may not notice when a non-current thread's activity changes
3361 @c FIXME: this is almost identical to the previous paragraph.
3362 @emph{HP-UX Warning:} In multi-thread programs, software watchpoints
3363 have only limited usefulness. If @value{GDBN} creates a software
3364 watchpoint, it can only watch the value of an expression @emph{in a
3365 single thread}. If you are confident that the expression can only
3366 change due to the current thread's activity (and if you are also
3367 confident that no other thread can become current), then you can use
3368 software watchpoints as usual. However, @value{GDBN} may not notice
3369 when a non-current thread's activity changes the expression. (Hardware
3370 watchpoints, in contrast, watch an expression in all threads.)
3373 @xref{set remote hardware-watchpoint-limit}.
3375 @node Set Catchpoints
3376 @subsection Setting Catchpoints
3377 @cindex catchpoints, setting
3378 @cindex exception handlers
3379 @cindex event handling
3381 You can use @dfn{catchpoints} to cause the debugger to stop for certain
3382 kinds of program events, such as C@t{++} exceptions or the loading of a
3383 shared library. Use the @code{catch} command to set a catchpoint.
3387 @item catch @var{event}
3388 Stop when @var{event} occurs. @var{event} can be any of the following:
3391 @cindex stop on C@t{++} exceptions
3392 The throwing of a C@t{++} exception.
3395 The catching of a C@t{++} exception.
3398 @cindex Ada exception catching
3399 @cindex catch Ada exceptions
3400 An Ada exception being raised. If an exception name is specified
3401 at the end of the command (eg @code{catch exception Program_Error}),
3402 the debugger will stop only when this specific exception is raised.
3403 Otherwise, the debugger stops execution when any Ada exception is raised.
3405 @item exception unhandled
3406 An exception that was raised but is not handled by the program.
3409 A failed Ada assertion.
3412 @cindex break on fork/exec
3413 A call to @code{exec}. This is currently only available for HP-UX.
3416 A call to @code{fork}. This is currently only available for HP-UX.
3419 A call to @code{vfork}. This is currently only available for HP-UX.
3422 @itemx load @var{libname}
3423 @cindex break on load/unload of shared library
3424 The dynamic loading of any shared library, or the loading of the library
3425 @var{libname}. This is currently only available for HP-UX.
3428 @itemx unload @var{libname}
3429 The unloading of any dynamically loaded shared library, or the unloading
3430 of the library @var{libname}. This is currently only available for HP-UX.
3433 @item tcatch @var{event}
3434 Set a catchpoint that is enabled only for one stop. The catchpoint is
3435 automatically deleted after the first time the event is caught.
3439 Use the @code{info break} command to list the current catchpoints.
3441 There are currently some limitations to C@t{++} exception handling
3442 (@code{catch throw} and @code{catch catch}) in @value{GDBN}:
3446 If you call a function interactively, @value{GDBN} normally returns
3447 control to you when the function has finished executing. If the call
3448 raises an exception, however, the call may bypass the mechanism that
3449 returns control to you and cause your program either to abort or to
3450 simply continue running until it hits a breakpoint, catches a signal
3451 that @value{GDBN} is listening for, or exits. This is the case even if
3452 you set a catchpoint for the exception; catchpoints on exceptions are
3453 disabled within interactive calls.
3456 You cannot raise an exception interactively.
3459 You cannot install an exception handler interactively.
3462 @cindex raise exceptions
3463 Sometimes @code{catch} is not the best way to debug exception handling:
3464 if you need to know exactly where an exception is raised, it is better to
3465 stop @emph{before} the exception handler is called, since that way you
3466 can see the stack before any unwinding takes place. If you set a
3467 breakpoint in an exception handler instead, it may not be easy to find
3468 out where the exception was raised.
3470 To stop just before an exception handler is called, you need some
3471 knowledge of the implementation. In the case of @sc{gnu} C@t{++}, exceptions are
3472 raised by calling a library function named @code{__raise_exception}
3473 which has the following ANSI C interface:
3476 /* @var{addr} is where the exception identifier is stored.
3477 @var{id} is the exception identifier. */
3478 void __raise_exception (void **addr, void *id);
3482 To make the debugger catch all exceptions before any stack
3483 unwinding takes place, set a breakpoint on @code{__raise_exception}
3484 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints; Watchpoints; and Exceptions}).
3486 With a conditional breakpoint (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break Conditions})
3487 that depends on the value of @var{id}, you can stop your program when
3488 a specific exception is raised. You can use multiple conditional
3489 breakpoints to stop your program when any of a number of exceptions are
3494 @subsection Deleting Breakpoints
3496 @cindex clearing breakpoints, watchpoints, catchpoints
3497 @cindex deleting breakpoints, watchpoints, catchpoints
3498 It is often necessary to eliminate a breakpoint, watchpoint, or
3499 catchpoint once it has done its job and you no longer want your program
3500 to stop there. This is called @dfn{deleting} the breakpoint. A
3501 breakpoint that has been deleted no longer exists; it is forgotten.
3503 With the @code{clear} command you can delete breakpoints according to
3504 where they are in your program. With the @code{delete} command you can
3505 delete individual breakpoints, watchpoints, or catchpoints by specifying
3506 their breakpoint numbers.
3508 It is not necessary to delete a breakpoint to proceed past it. @value{GDBN}
3509 automatically ignores breakpoints on the first instruction to be executed
3510 when you continue execution without changing the execution address.
3515 Delete any breakpoints at the next instruction to be executed in the
3516 selected stack frame (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a Frame}). When
3517 the innermost frame is selected, this is a good way to delete a
3518 breakpoint where your program just stopped.
3520 @item clear @var{function}
3521 @itemx clear @var{filename}:@var{function}
3522 Delete any breakpoints set at entry to the named @var{function}.
3524 @item clear @var{linenum}
3525 @itemx clear @var{filename}:@var{linenum}
3526 Delete any breakpoints set at or within the code of the specified
3527 @var{linenum} of the specified @var{filename}.
3529 @cindex delete breakpoints
3531 @kindex d @r{(@code{delete})}
3532 @item delete @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{range}@dots{}@r{]}
3533 Delete the breakpoints, watchpoints, or catchpoints of the breakpoint
3534 ranges specified as arguments. If no argument is specified, delete all
3535 breakpoints (@value{GDBN} asks confirmation, unless you have @code{set
3536 confirm off}). You can abbreviate this command as @code{d}.
3540 @subsection Disabling Breakpoints
3542 @cindex enable/disable a breakpoint
3543 Rather than deleting a breakpoint, watchpoint, or catchpoint, you might
3544 prefer to @dfn{disable} it. This makes the breakpoint inoperative as if
3545 it had been deleted, but remembers the information on the breakpoint so
3546 that you can @dfn{enable} it again later.
3548 You disable and enable breakpoints, watchpoints, and catchpoints with
3549 the @code{enable} and @code{disable} commands, optionally specifying one
3550 or more breakpoint numbers as arguments. Use @code{info break} or
3551 @code{info watch} to print a list of breakpoints, watchpoints, and
3552 catchpoints if you do not know which numbers to use.
3554 A breakpoint, watchpoint, or catchpoint can have any of four different
3555 states of enablement:
3559 Enabled. The breakpoint stops your program. A breakpoint set
3560 with the @code{break} command starts out in this state.
3562 Disabled. The breakpoint has no effect on your program.
3564 Enabled once. The breakpoint stops your program, but then becomes
3567 Enabled for deletion. The breakpoint stops your program, but
3568 immediately after it does so it is deleted permanently. A breakpoint
3569 set with the @code{tbreak} command starts out in this state.
3572 You can use the following commands to enable or disable breakpoints,
3573 watchpoints, and catchpoints:
3577 @kindex dis @r{(@code{disable})}
3578 @item disable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{range}@dots{}@r{]}
3579 Disable the specified breakpoints---or all breakpoints, if none are
3580 listed. A disabled breakpoint has no effect but is not forgotten. All
3581 options such as ignore-counts, conditions and commands are remembered in
3582 case the breakpoint is enabled again later. You may abbreviate
3583 @code{disable} as @code{dis}.
3586 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{range}@dots{}@r{]}
3587 Enable the specified breakpoints (or all defined breakpoints). They
3588 become effective once again in stopping your program.
3590 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} once @var{range}@dots{}
3591 Enable the specified breakpoints temporarily. @value{GDBN} disables any
3592 of these breakpoints immediately after stopping your program.
3594 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} delete @var{range}@dots{}
3595 Enable the specified breakpoints to work once, then die. @value{GDBN}
3596 deletes any of these breakpoints as soon as your program stops there.
3597 Breakpoints set by the @code{tbreak} command start out in this state.
3600 @c FIXME: I think the following ``Except for [...] @code{tbreak}'' is
3601 @c confusing: tbreak is also initially enabled.
3602 Except for a breakpoint set with @code{tbreak} (@pxref{Set Breaks,
3603 ,Setting Breakpoints}), breakpoints that you set are initially enabled;
3604 subsequently, they become disabled or enabled only when you use one of
3605 the commands above. (The command @code{until} can set and delete a
3606 breakpoint of its own, but it does not change the state of your other
3607 breakpoints; see @ref{Continuing and Stepping, ,Continuing and
3611 @subsection Break Conditions
3612 @cindex conditional breakpoints
3613 @cindex breakpoint conditions
3615 @c FIXME what is scope of break condition expr? Context where wanted?
3616 @c in particular for a watchpoint?
3617 The simplest sort of breakpoint breaks every time your program reaches a
3618 specified place. You can also specify a @dfn{condition} for a
3619 breakpoint. A condition is just a Boolean expression in your
3620 programming language (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}). A breakpoint with
3621 a condition evaluates the expression each time your program reaches it,
3622 and your program stops only if the condition is @emph{true}.
3624 This is the converse of using assertions for program validation; in that
3625 situation, you want to stop when the assertion is violated---that is,
3626 when the condition is false. In C, if you want to test an assertion expressed
3627 by the condition @var{assert}, you should set the condition
3628 @samp{! @var{assert}} on the appropriate breakpoint.
3630 Conditions are also accepted for watchpoints; you may not need them,
3631 since a watchpoint is inspecting the value of an expression anyhow---but
3632 it might be simpler, say, to just set a watchpoint on a variable name,
3633 and specify a condition that tests whether the new value is an interesting
3636 Break conditions can have side effects, and may even call functions in
3637 your program. This can be useful, for example, to activate functions
3638 that log program progress, or to use your own print functions to
3639 format special data structures. The effects are completely predictable
3640 unless there is another enabled breakpoint at the same address. (In
3641 that case, @value{GDBN} might see the other breakpoint first and stop your
3642 program without checking the condition of this one.) Note that
3643 breakpoint commands are usually more convenient and flexible than break
3645 purpose of performing side effects when a breakpoint is reached
3646 (@pxref{Break Commands, ,Breakpoint Command Lists}).
3648 Break conditions can be specified when a breakpoint is set, by using
3649 @samp{if} in the arguments to the @code{break} command. @xref{Set
3650 Breaks, ,Setting Breakpoints}. They can also be changed at any time
3651 with the @code{condition} command.
3653 You can also use the @code{if} keyword with the @code{watch} command.
3654 The @code{catch} command does not recognize the @code{if} keyword;
3655 @code{condition} is the only way to impose a further condition on a
3660 @item condition @var{bnum} @var{expression}
3661 Specify @var{expression} as the break condition for breakpoint,
3662 watchpoint, or catchpoint number @var{bnum}. After you set a condition,
3663 breakpoint @var{bnum} stops your program only if the value of
3664 @var{expression} is true (nonzero, in C). When you use
3665 @code{condition}, @value{GDBN} checks @var{expression} immediately for
3666 syntactic correctness, and to determine whether symbols in it have
3667 referents in the context of your breakpoint. If @var{expression} uses
3668 symbols not referenced in the context of the breakpoint, @value{GDBN}
3669 prints an error message:
3672 No symbol "foo" in current context.
3677 not actually evaluate @var{expression} at the time the @code{condition}
3678 command (or a command that sets a breakpoint with a condition, like
3679 @code{break if @dots{}}) is given, however. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
3681 @item condition @var{bnum}
3682 Remove the condition from breakpoint number @var{bnum}. It becomes
3683 an ordinary unconditional breakpoint.
3686 @cindex ignore count (of breakpoint)
3687 A special case of a breakpoint condition is to stop only when the
3688 breakpoint has been reached a certain number of times. This is so
3689 useful that there is a special way to do it, using the @dfn{ignore
3690 count} of the breakpoint. Every breakpoint has an ignore count, which
3691 is an integer. Most of the time, the ignore count is zero, and
3692 therefore has no effect. But if your program reaches a breakpoint whose
3693 ignore count is positive, then instead of stopping, it just decrements
3694 the ignore count by one and continues. As a result, if the ignore count
3695 value is @var{n}, the breakpoint does not stop the next @var{n} times
3696 your program reaches it.
3700 @item ignore @var{bnum} @var{count}
3701 Set the ignore count of breakpoint number @var{bnum} to @var{count}.
3702 The next @var{count} times the breakpoint is reached, your program's
3703 execution does not stop; other than to decrement the ignore count, @value{GDBN}
3706 To make the breakpoint stop the next time it is reached, specify
3709 When you use @code{continue} to resume execution of your program from a
3710 breakpoint, you can specify an ignore count directly as an argument to
3711 @code{continue}, rather than using @code{ignore}. @xref{Continuing and
3712 Stepping,,Continuing and Stepping}.
3714 If a breakpoint has a positive ignore count and a condition, the
3715 condition is not checked. Once the ignore count reaches zero,
3716 @value{GDBN} resumes checking the condition.
3718 You could achieve the effect of the ignore count with a condition such
3719 as @w{@samp{$foo-- <= 0}} using a debugger convenience variable that
3720 is decremented each time. @xref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
3724 Ignore counts apply to breakpoints, watchpoints, and catchpoints.
3727 @node Break Commands
3728 @subsection Breakpoint Command Lists
3730 @cindex breakpoint commands
3731 You can give any breakpoint (or watchpoint or catchpoint) a series of
3732 commands to execute when your program stops due to that breakpoint. For
3733 example, you might want to print the values of certain expressions, or
3734 enable other breakpoints.
3738 @kindex end@r{ (breakpoint commands)}
3739 @item commands @r{[}@var{bnum}@r{]}
3740 @itemx @dots{} @var{command-list} @dots{}
3742 Specify a list of commands for breakpoint number @var{bnum}. The commands
3743 themselves appear on the following lines. Type a line containing just
3744 @code{end} to terminate the commands.
3746 To remove all commands from a breakpoint, type @code{commands} and
3747 follow it immediately with @code{end}; that is, give no commands.
3749 With no @var{bnum} argument, @code{commands} refers to the last
3750 breakpoint, watchpoint, or catchpoint set (not to the breakpoint most
3751 recently encountered).
3754 Pressing @key{RET} as a means of repeating the last @value{GDBN} command is
3755 disabled within a @var{command-list}.
3757 You can use breakpoint commands to start your program up again. Simply
3758 use the @code{continue} command, or @code{step}, or any other command
3759 that resumes execution.
3761 Any other commands in the command list, after a command that resumes
3762 execution, are ignored. This is because any time you resume execution
3763 (even with a simple @code{next} or @code{step}), you may encounter
3764 another breakpoint---which could have its own command list, leading to
3765 ambiguities about which list to execute.
3768 If the first command you specify in a command list is @code{silent}, the
3769 usual message about stopping at a breakpoint is not printed. This may
3770 be desirable for breakpoints that are to print a specific message and
3771 then continue. If none of the remaining commands print anything, you
3772 see no sign that the breakpoint was reached. @code{silent} is
3773 meaningful only at the beginning of a breakpoint command list.
3775 The commands @code{echo}, @code{output}, and @code{printf} allow you to
3776 print precisely controlled output, and are often useful in silent
3777 breakpoints. @xref{Output, ,Commands for Controlled Output}.
3779 For example, here is how you could use breakpoint commands to print the
3780 value of @code{x} at entry to @code{foo} whenever @code{x} is positive.
3786 printf "x is %d\n",x
3791 One application for breakpoint commands is to compensate for one bug so
3792 you can test for another. Put a breakpoint just after the erroneous line
3793 of code, give it a condition to detect the case in which something
3794 erroneous has been done, and give it commands to assign correct values
3795 to any variables that need them. End with the @code{continue} command
3796 so that your program does not stop, and start with the @code{silent}
3797 command so that no output is produced. Here is an example:
3808 @node Breakpoint Menus
3809 @subsection Breakpoint Menus
3811 @cindex symbol overloading
3813 Some programming languages (notably C@t{++} and Objective-C) permit a
3814 single function name
3815 to be defined several times, for application in different contexts.
3816 This is called @dfn{overloading}. When a function name is overloaded,
3817 @samp{break @var{function}} is not enough to tell @value{GDBN} where you want
3818 a breakpoint. If you realize this is a problem, you can use
3819 something like @samp{break @var{function}(@var{types})} to specify which
3820 particular version of the function you want. Otherwise, @value{GDBN} offers
3821 you a menu of numbered choices for different possible breakpoints, and
3822 waits for your selection with the prompt @samp{>}. The first two
3823 options are always @samp{[0] cancel} and @samp{[1] all}. Typing @kbd{1}
3824 sets a breakpoint at each definition of @var{function}, and typing
3825 @kbd{0} aborts the @code{break} command without setting any new
3828 For example, the following session excerpt shows an attempt to set a
3829 breakpoint at the overloaded symbol @code{String::after}.
3830 We choose three particular definitions of that function name:
3832 @c FIXME! This is likely to change to show arg type lists, at least
3835 (@value{GDBP}) b String::after
3838 [2] file:String.cc; line number:867
3839 [3] file:String.cc; line number:860
3840 [4] file:String.cc; line number:875
3841 [5] file:String.cc; line number:853
3842 [6] file:String.cc; line number:846
3843 [7] file:String.cc; line number:735
3845 Breakpoint 1 at 0xb26c: file String.cc, line 867.
3846 Breakpoint 2 at 0xb344: file String.cc, line 875.
3847 Breakpoint 3 at 0xafcc: file String.cc, line 846.
3848 Multiple breakpoints were set.
3849 Use the "delete" command to delete unwanted
3855 @c @ifclear BARETARGET
3856 @node Error in Breakpoints
3857 @subsection ``Cannot insert breakpoints''
3859 @c FIXME!! 14/6/95 Is there a real example of this? Let's use it.
3861 Under some operating systems, breakpoints cannot be used in a program if
3862 any other process is running that program. In this situation,
3863 attempting to run or continue a program with a breakpoint causes
3864 @value{GDBN} to print an error message:
3867 Cannot insert breakpoints.
3868 The same program may be running in another process.
3871 When this happens, you have three ways to proceed:
3875 Remove or disable the breakpoints, then continue.
3878 Suspend @value{GDBN}, and copy the file containing your program to a new
3879 name. Resume @value{GDBN} and use the @code{exec-file} command to specify
3880 that @value{GDBN} should run your program under that name.
3881 Then start your program again.
3884 Relink your program so that the text segment is nonsharable, using the
3885 linker option @samp{-N}. The operating system limitation may not apply
3886 to nonsharable executables.
3890 A similar message can be printed if you request too many active
3891 hardware-assisted breakpoints and watchpoints:
3893 @c FIXME: the precise wording of this message may change; the relevant
3894 @c source change is not committed yet (Sep 3, 1999).
3896 Stopped; cannot insert breakpoints.
3897 You may have requested too many hardware breakpoints and watchpoints.
3901 This message is printed when you attempt to resume the program, since
3902 only then @value{GDBN} knows exactly how many hardware breakpoints and
3903 watchpoints it needs to insert.
3905 When this message is printed, you need to disable or remove some of the
3906 hardware-assisted breakpoints and watchpoints, and then continue.
3908 @node Breakpoint-related Warnings
3909 @subsection ``Breakpoint address adjusted...''
3910 @cindex breakpoint address adjusted
3912 Some processor architectures place constraints on the addresses at
3913 which breakpoints may be placed. For architectures thus constrained,
3914 @value{GDBN} will attempt to adjust the breakpoint's address to comply
3915 with the constraints dictated by the architecture.
3917 One example of such an architecture is the Fujitsu FR-V. The FR-V is
3918 a VLIW architecture in which a number of RISC-like instructions may be
3919 bundled together for parallel execution. The FR-V architecture
3920 constrains the location of a breakpoint instruction within such a
3921 bundle to the instruction with the lowest address. @value{GDBN}
3922 honors this constraint by adjusting a breakpoint's address to the
3923 first in the bundle.
3925 It is not uncommon for optimized code to have bundles which contain
3926 instructions from different source statements, thus it may happen that
3927 a breakpoint's address will be adjusted from one source statement to
3928 another. Since this adjustment may significantly alter @value{GDBN}'s
3929 breakpoint related behavior from what the user expects, a warning is
3930 printed when the breakpoint is first set and also when the breakpoint
3933 A warning like the one below is printed when setting a breakpoint
3934 that's been subject to address adjustment:
3937 warning: Breakpoint address adjusted from 0x00010414 to 0x00010410.
3940 Such warnings are printed both for user settable and @value{GDBN}'s
3941 internal breakpoints. If you see one of these warnings, you should
3942 verify that a breakpoint set at the adjusted address will have the
3943 desired affect. If not, the breakpoint in question may be removed and
3944 other breakpoints may be set which will have the desired behavior.
3945 E.g., it may be sufficient to place the breakpoint at a later
3946 instruction. A conditional breakpoint may also be useful in some
3947 cases to prevent the breakpoint from triggering too often.
3949 @value{GDBN} will also issue a warning when stopping at one of these
3950 adjusted breakpoints:
3953 warning: Breakpoint 1 address previously adjusted from 0x00010414
3957 When this warning is encountered, it may be too late to take remedial
3958 action except in cases where the breakpoint is hit earlier or more
3959 frequently than expected.
3961 @node Continuing and Stepping
3962 @section Continuing and Stepping
3966 @cindex resuming execution
3967 @dfn{Continuing} means resuming program execution until your program
3968 completes normally. In contrast, @dfn{stepping} means executing just
3969 one more ``step'' of your program, where ``step'' may mean either one
3970 line of source code, or one machine instruction (depending on what
3971 particular command you use). Either when continuing or when stepping,
3972 your program may stop even sooner, due to a breakpoint or a signal. (If
3973 it stops due to a signal, you may want to use @code{handle}, or use
3974 @samp{signal 0} to resume execution. @xref{Signals, ,Signals}.)
3978 @kindex c @r{(@code{continue})}
3979 @kindex fg @r{(resume foreground execution)}
3980 @item continue @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
3981 @itemx c @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
3982 @itemx fg @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
3983 Resume program execution, at the address where your program last stopped;
3984 any breakpoints set at that address are bypassed. The optional argument
3985 @var{ignore-count} allows you to specify a further number of times to
3986 ignore a breakpoint at this location; its effect is like that of
3987 @code{ignore} (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break Conditions}).
3989 The argument @var{ignore-count} is meaningful only when your program
3990 stopped due to a breakpoint. At other times, the argument to
3991 @code{continue} is ignored.
3993 The synonyms @code{c} and @code{fg} (for @dfn{foreground}, as the
3994 debugged program is deemed to be the foreground program) are provided
3995 purely for convenience, and have exactly the same behavior as
3999 To resume execution at a different place, you can use @code{return}
4000 (@pxref{Returning, ,Returning from a Function}) to go back to the
4001 calling function; or @code{jump} (@pxref{Jumping, ,Continuing at a
4002 Different Address}) to go to an arbitrary location in your program.
4004 A typical technique for using stepping is to set a breakpoint
4005 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints; Watchpoints; and Catchpoints}) at the
4006 beginning of the function or the section of your program where a problem
4007 is believed to lie, run your program until it stops at that breakpoint,
4008 and then step through the suspect area, examining the variables that are
4009 interesting, until you see the problem happen.
4013 @kindex s @r{(@code{step})}
4015 Continue running your program until control reaches a different source
4016 line, then stop it and return control to @value{GDBN}. This command is
4017 abbreviated @code{s}.
4020 @c "without debugging information" is imprecise; actually "without line
4021 @c numbers in the debugging information". (gcc -g1 has debugging info but
4022 @c not line numbers). But it seems complex to try to make that
4023 @c distinction here.
4024 @emph{Warning:} If you use the @code{step} command while control is
4025 within a function that was compiled without debugging information,
4026 execution proceeds until control reaches a function that does have
4027 debugging information. Likewise, it will not step into a function which
4028 is compiled without debugging information. To step through functions
4029 without debugging information, use the @code{stepi} command, described
4033 The @code{step} command only stops at the first instruction of a source
4034 line. This prevents the multiple stops that could otherwise occur in
4035 @code{switch} statements, @code{for} loops, etc. @code{step} continues
4036 to stop if a function that has debugging information is called within
4037 the line. In other words, @code{step} @emph{steps inside} any functions
4038 called within the line.
4040 Also, the @code{step} command only enters a function if there is line
4041 number information for the function. Otherwise it acts like the
4042 @code{next} command. This avoids problems when using @code{cc -gl}
4043 on MIPS machines. Previously, @code{step} entered subroutines if there
4044 was any debugging information about the routine.
4046 @item step @var{count}
4047 Continue running as in @code{step}, but do so @var{count} times. If a
4048 breakpoint is reached, or a signal not related to stepping occurs before
4049 @var{count} steps, stepping stops right away.
4052 @kindex n @r{(@code{next})}
4053 @item next @r{[}@var{count}@r{]}
4054 Continue to the next source line in the current (innermost) stack frame.
4055 This is similar to @code{step}, but function calls that appear within
4056 the line of code are executed without stopping. Execution stops when
4057 control reaches a different line of code at the original stack level
4058 that was executing when you gave the @code{next} command. This command
4059 is abbreviated @code{n}.
4061 An argument @var{count} is a repeat count, as for @code{step}.
4064 @c FIX ME!! Do we delete this, or is there a way it fits in with
4065 @c the following paragraph? --- Vctoria
4067 @c @code{next} within a function that lacks debugging information acts like
4068 @c @code{step}, but any function calls appearing within the code of the
4069 @c function are executed without stopping.
4071 The @code{next} command only stops at the first instruction of a
4072 source line. This prevents multiple stops that could otherwise occur in
4073 @code{switch} statements, @code{for} loops, etc.
4075 @kindex set step-mode
4077 @cindex functions without line info, and stepping
4078 @cindex stepping into functions with no line info
4079 @itemx set step-mode on
4080 The @code{set step-mode on} command causes the @code{step} command to
4081 stop at the first instruction of a function which contains no debug line
4082 information rather than stepping over it.
4084 This is useful in cases where you may be interested in inspecting the
4085 machine instructions of a function which has no symbolic info and do not
4086 want @value{GDBN} to automatically skip over this function.
4088 @item set step-mode off
4089 Causes the @code{step} command to step over any functions which contains no
4090 debug information. This is the default.
4092 @item show step-mode
4093 Show whether @value{GDBN} will stop in or step over functions without
4094 source line debug information.
4098 Continue running until just after function in the selected stack frame
4099 returns. Print the returned value (if any).
4101 Contrast this with the @code{return} command (@pxref{Returning,
4102 ,Returning from a Function}).
4105 @kindex u @r{(@code{until})}
4106 @cindex run until specified location
4109 Continue running until a source line past the current line, in the
4110 current stack frame, is reached. This command is used to avoid single
4111 stepping through a loop more than once. It is like the @code{next}
4112 command, except that when @code{until} encounters a jump, it
4113 automatically continues execution until the program counter is greater
4114 than the address of the jump.
4116 This means that when you reach the end of a loop after single stepping
4117 though it, @code{until} makes your program continue execution until it
4118 exits the loop. In contrast, a @code{next} command at the end of a loop
4119 simply steps back to the beginning of the loop, which forces you to step
4120 through the next iteration.
4122 @code{until} always stops your program if it attempts to exit the current
4125 @code{until} may produce somewhat counterintuitive results if the order
4126 of machine code does not match the order of the source lines. For
4127 example, in the following excerpt from a debugging session, the @code{f}
4128 (@code{frame}) command shows that execution is stopped at line
4129 @code{206}; yet when we use @code{until}, we get to line @code{195}:
4133 #0 main (argc=4, argv=0xf7fffae8) at m4.c:206
4135 (@value{GDBP}) until
4136 195 for ( ; argc > 0; NEXTARG) @{
4139 This happened because, for execution efficiency, the compiler had
4140 generated code for the loop closure test at the end, rather than the
4141 start, of the loop---even though the test in a C @code{for}-loop is
4142 written before the body of the loop. The @code{until} command appeared
4143 to step back to the beginning of the loop when it advanced to this
4144 expression; however, it has not really gone to an earlier
4145 statement---not in terms of the actual machine code.
4147 @code{until} with no argument works by means of single
4148 instruction stepping, and hence is slower than @code{until} with an
4151 @item until @var{location}
4152 @itemx u @var{location}
4153 Continue running your program until either the specified location is
4154 reached, or the current stack frame returns. @var{location} is any of
4155 the forms of argument acceptable to @code{break} (@pxref{Set Breaks,
4156 ,Setting Breakpoints}). This form of the command uses breakpoints, and
4157 hence is quicker than @code{until} without an argument. The specified
4158 location is actually reached only if it is in the current frame. This
4159 implies that @code{until} can be used to skip over recursive function
4160 invocations. For instance in the code below, if the current location is
4161 line @code{96}, issuing @code{until 99} will execute the program up to
4162 line @code{99} in the same invocation of factorial, i.e., after the inner
4163 invocations have returned.
4166 94 int factorial (int value)
4168 96 if (value > 1) @{
4169 97 value *= factorial (value - 1);
4176 @kindex advance @var{location}
4177 @itemx advance @var{location}
4178 Continue running the program up to the given @var{location}. An argument is
4179 required, which should be of the same form as arguments for the @code{break}
4180 command. Execution will also stop upon exit from the current stack
4181 frame. This command is similar to @code{until}, but @code{advance} will
4182 not skip over recursive function calls, and the target location doesn't
4183 have to be in the same frame as the current one.
4187 @kindex si @r{(@code{stepi})}
4189 @itemx stepi @var{arg}
4191 Execute one machine instruction, then stop and return to the debugger.
4193 It is often useful to do @samp{display/i $pc} when stepping by machine
4194 instructions. This makes @value{GDBN} automatically display the next
4195 instruction to be executed, each time your program stops. @xref{Auto
4196 Display,, Automatic Display}.
4198 An argument is a repeat count, as in @code{step}.
4202 @kindex ni @r{(@code{nexti})}
4204 @itemx nexti @var{arg}
4206 Execute one machine instruction, but if it is a function call,
4207 proceed until the function returns.
4209 An argument is a repeat count, as in @code{next}.
4216 A signal is an asynchronous event that can happen in a program. The
4217 operating system defines the possible kinds of signals, and gives each
4218 kind a name and a number. For example, in Unix @code{SIGINT} is the
4219 signal a program gets when you type an interrupt character (often @kbd{Ctrl-c});
4220 @code{SIGSEGV} is the signal a program gets from referencing a place in
4221 memory far away from all the areas in use; @code{SIGALRM} occurs when
4222 the alarm clock timer goes off (which happens only if your program has
4223 requested an alarm).
4225 @cindex fatal signals
4226 Some signals, including @code{SIGALRM}, are a normal part of the
4227 functioning of your program. Others, such as @code{SIGSEGV}, indicate
4228 errors; these signals are @dfn{fatal} (they kill your program immediately) if the
4229 program has not specified in advance some other way to handle the signal.
4230 @code{SIGINT} does not indicate an error in your program, but it is normally
4231 fatal so it can carry out the purpose of the interrupt: to kill the program.
4233 @value{GDBN} has the ability to detect any occurrence of a signal in your
4234 program. You can tell @value{GDBN} in advance what to do for each kind of
4237 @cindex handling signals
4238 Normally, @value{GDBN} is set up to let the non-erroneous signals like
4239 @code{SIGALRM} be silently passed to your program
4240 (so as not to interfere with their role in the program's functioning)
4241 but to stop your program immediately whenever an error signal happens.
4242 You can change these settings with the @code{handle} command.
4245 @kindex info signals
4249 Print a table of all the kinds of signals and how @value{GDBN} has been told to
4250 handle each one. You can use this to see the signal numbers of all
4251 the defined types of signals.
4253 @item info signals @var{sig}
4254 Similar, but print information only about the specified signal number.
4256 @code{info handle} is an alias for @code{info signals}.
4259 @item handle @var{signal} @r{[}@var{keywords}@dots{}@r{]}
4260 Change the way @value{GDBN} handles signal @var{signal}. @var{signal}
4261 can be the number of a signal or its name (with or without the
4262 @samp{SIG} at the beginning); a list of signal numbers of the form
4263 @samp{@var{low}-@var{high}}; or the word @samp{all}, meaning all the
4264 known signals. Optional arguments @var{keywords}, described below,
4265 say what change to make.
4269 The keywords allowed by the @code{handle} command can be abbreviated.
4270 Their full names are:
4274 @value{GDBN} should not stop your program when this signal happens. It may
4275 still print a message telling you that the signal has come in.
4278 @value{GDBN} should stop your program when this signal happens. This implies
4279 the @code{print} keyword as well.
4282 @value{GDBN} should print a message when this signal happens.
4285 @value{GDBN} should not mention the occurrence of the signal at all. This
4286 implies the @code{nostop} keyword as well.
4290 @value{GDBN} should allow your program to see this signal; your program
4291 can handle the signal, or else it may terminate if the signal is fatal
4292 and not handled. @code{pass} and @code{noignore} are synonyms.
4296 @value{GDBN} should not allow your program to see this signal.
4297 @code{nopass} and @code{ignore} are synonyms.
4301 When a signal stops your program, the signal is not visible to the
4303 continue. Your program sees the signal then, if @code{pass} is in
4304 effect for the signal in question @emph{at that time}. In other words,
4305 after @value{GDBN} reports a signal, you can use the @code{handle}
4306 command with @code{pass} or @code{nopass} to control whether your
4307 program sees that signal when you continue.
4309 The default is set to @code{nostop}, @code{noprint}, @code{pass} for
4310 non-erroneous signals such as @code{SIGALRM}, @code{SIGWINCH} and
4311 @code{SIGCHLD}, and to @code{stop}, @code{print}, @code{pass} for the
4314 You can also use the @code{signal} command to prevent your program from
4315 seeing a signal, or cause it to see a signal it normally would not see,
4316 or to give it any signal at any time. For example, if your program stopped
4317 due to some sort of memory reference error, you might store correct
4318 values into the erroneous variables and continue, hoping to see more
4319 execution; but your program would probably terminate immediately as
4320 a result of the fatal signal once it saw the signal. To prevent this,
4321 you can continue with @samp{signal 0}. @xref{Signaling, ,Giving your
4325 @section Stopping and Starting Multi-thread Programs
4327 When your program has multiple threads (@pxref{Threads,, Debugging
4328 Programs with Multiple Threads}), you can choose whether to set
4329 breakpoints on all threads, or on a particular thread.
4332 @cindex breakpoints and threads
4333 @cindex thread breakpoints
4334 @kindex break @dots{} thread @var{threadno}
4335 @item break @var{linespec} thread @var{threadno}
4336 @itemx break @var{linespec} thread @var{threadno} if @dots{}
4337 @var{linespec} specifies source lines; there are several ways of
4338 writing them, but the effect is always to specify some source line.
4340 Use the qualifier @samp{thread @var{threadno}} with a breakpoint command
4341 to specify that you only want @value{GDBN} to stop the program when a
4342 particular thread reaches this breakpoint. @var{threadno} is one of the
4343 numeric thread identifiers assigned by @value{GDBN}, shown in the first
4344 column of the @samp{info threads} display.
4346 If you do not specify @samp{thread @var{threadno}} when you set a
4347 breakpoint, the breakpoint applies to @emph{all} threads of your
4350 You can use the @code{thread} qualifier on conditional breakpoints as
4351 well; in this case, place @samp{thread @var{threadno}} before the
4352 breakpoint condition, like this:
4355 (@value{GDBP}) break frik.c:13 thread 28 if bartab > lim
4360 @cindex stopped threads
4361 @cindex threads, stopped
4362 Whenever your program stops under @value{GDBN} for any reason,
4363 @emph{all} threads of execution stop, not just the current thread. This
4364 allows you to examine the overall state of the program, including
4365 switching between threads, without worrying that things may change
4368 @cindex thread breakpoints and system calls
4369 @cindex system calls and thread breakpoints
4370 @cindex premature return from system calls
4371 There is an unfortunate side effect. If one thread stops for a
4372 breakpoint, or for some other reason, and another thread is blocked in a
4373 system call, then the system call may return prematurely. This is a
4374 consequence of the interaction between multiple threads and the signals
4375 that @value{GDBN} uses to implement breakpoints and other events that
4378 To handle this problem, your program should check the return value of
4379 each system call and react appropriately. This is good programming
4382 For example, do not write code like this:
4388 The call to @code{sleep} will return early if a different thread stops
4389 at a breakpoint or for some other reason.
4391 Instead, write this:
4396 unslept = sleep (unslept);
4399 A system call is allowed to return early, so the system is still
4400 conforming to its specification. But @value{GDBN} does cause your
4401 multi-threaded program to behave differently than it would without
4404 Also, @value{GDBN} uses internal breakpoints in the thread library to
4405 monitor certain events such as thread creation and thread destruction.
4406 When such an event happens, a system call in another thread may return
4407 prematurely, even though your program does not appear to stop.
4409 @cindex continuing threads
4410 @cindex threads, continuing
4411 Conversely, whenever you restart the program, @emph{all} threads start
4412 executing. @emph{This is true even when single-stepping} with commands
4413 like @code{step} or @code{next}.
4415 In particular, @value{GDBN} cannot single-step all threads in lockstep.
4416 Since thread scheduling is up to your debugging target's operating
4417 system (not controlled by @value{GDBN}), other threads may
4418 execute more than one statement while the current thread completes a
4419 single step. Moreover, in general other threads stop in the middle of a
4420 statement, rather than at a clean statement boundary, when the program
4423 You might even find your program stopped in another thread after
4424 continuing or even single-stepping. This happens whenever some other
4425 thread runs into a breakpoint, a signal, or an exception before the
4426 first thread completes whatever you requested.
4428 On some OSes, you can lock the OS scheduler and thus allow only a single
4432 @item set scheduler-locking @var{mode}
4433 @cindex scheduler locking mode
4434 @cindex lock scheduler
4435 Set the scheduler locking mode. If it is @code{off}, then there is no
4436 locking and any thread may run at any time. If @code{on}, then only the
4437 current thread may run when the inferior is resumed. The @code{step}
4438 mode optimizes for single-stepping. It stops other threads from
4439 ``seizing the prompt'' by preempting the current thread while you are
4440 stepping. Other threads will only rarely (or never) get a chance to run
4441 when you step. They are more likely to run when you @samp{next} over a
4442 function call, and they are completely free to run when you use commands
4443 like @samp{continue}, @samp{until}, or @samp{finish}. However, unless another
4444 thread hits a breakpoint during its timeslice, they will never steal the
4445 @value{GDBN} prompt away from the thread that you are debugging.
4447 @item show scheduler-locking
4448 Display the current scheduler locking mode.
4453 @chapter Examining the Stack
4455 When your program has stopped, the first thing you need to know is where it
4456 stopped and how it got there.
4459 Each time your program performs a function call, information about the call
4461 That information includes the location of the call in your program,
4462 the arguments of the call,
4463 and the local variables of the function being called.
4464 The information is saved in a block of data called a @dfn{stack frame}.
4465 The stack frames are allocated in a region of memory called the @dfn{call
4468 When your program stops, the @value{GDBN} commands for examining the
4469 stack allow you to see all of this information.
4471 @cindex selected frame
4472 One of the stack frames is @dfn{selected} by @value{GDBN} and many
4473 @value{GDBN} commands refer implicitly to the selected frame. In
4474 particular, whenever you ask @value{GDBN} for the value of a variable in
4475 your program, the value is found in the selected frame. There are
4476 special @value{GDBN} commands to select whichever frame you are
4477 interested in. @xref{Selection, ,Selecting a Frame}.
4479 When your program stops, @value{GDBN} automatically selects the
4480 currently executing frame and describes it briefly, similar to the
4481 @code{frame} command (@pxref{Frame Info, ,Information about a Frame}).
4484 * Frames:: Stack frames
4485 * Backtrace:: Backtraces
4486 * Selection:: Selecting a frame
4487 * Frame Info:: Information on a frame
4492 @section Stack Frames
4494 @cindex frame, definition
4496 The call stack is divided up into contiguous pieces called @dfn{stack
4497 frames}, or @dfn{frames} for short; each frame is the data associated
4498 with one call to one function. The frame contains the arguments given
4499 to the function, the function's local variables, and the address at
4500 which the function is executing.
4502 @cindex initial frame
4503 @cindex outermost frame
4504 @cindex innermost frame
4505 When your program is started, the stack has only one frame, that of the
4506 function @code{main}. This is called the @dfn{initial} frame or the
4507 @dfn{outermost} frame. Each time a function is called, a new frame is
4508 made. Each time a function returns, the frame for that function invocation
4509 is eliminated. If a function is recursive, there can be many frames for
4510 the same function. The frame for the function in which execution is
4511 actually occurring is called the @dfn{innermost} frame. This is the most
4512 recently created of all the stack frames that still exist.
4514 @cindex frame pointer
4515 Inside your program, stack frames are identified by their addresses. A
4516 stack frame consists of many bytes, each of which has its own address; each
4517 kind of computer has a convention for choosing one byte whose
4518 address serves as the address of the frame. Usually this address is kept
4519 in a register called the @dfn{frame pointer register}
4520 (@pxref{Registers, $fp}) while execution is going on in that frame.
4522 @cindex frame number
4523 @value{GDBN} assigns numbers to all existing stack frames, starting with
4524 zero for the innermost frame, one for the frame that called it,
4525 and so on upward. These numbers do not really exist in your program;
4526 they are assigned by @value{GDBN} to give you a way of designating stack
4527 frames in @value{GDBN} commands.
4529 @c The -fomit-frame-pointer below perennially causes hbox overflow
4530 @c underflow problems.
4531 @cindex frameless execution
4532 Some compilers provide a way to compile functions so that they operate
4533 without stack frames. (For example, the @value{NGCC} option
4535 @samp{-fomit-frame-pointer}
4537 generates functions without a frame.)
4538 This is occasionally done with heavily used library functions to save
4539 the frame setup time. @value{GDBN} has limited facilities for dealing
4540 with these function invocations. If the innermost function invocation
4541 has no stack frame, @value{GDBN} nevertheless regards it as though
4542 it had a separate frame, which is numbered zero as usual, allowing
4543 correct tracing of the function call chain. However, @value{GDBN} has
4544 no provision for frameless functions elsewhere in the stack.
4547 @kindex frame@r{, command}
4548 @cindex current stack frame
4549 @item frame @var{args}
4550 The @code{frame} command allows you to move from one stack frame to another,
4551 and to print the stack frame you select. @var{args} may be either the
4552 address of the frame or the stack frame number. Without an argument,
4553 @code{frame} prints the current stack frame.
4555 @kindex select-frame
4556 @cindex selecting frame silently
4558 The @code{select-frame} command allows you to move from one stack frame
4559 to another without printing the frame. This is the silent version of
4567 @cindex call stack traces
4568 A backtrace is a summary of how your program got where it is. It shows one
4569 line per frame, for many frames, starting with the currently executing
4570 frame (frame zero), followed by its caller (frame one), and on up the
4575 @kindex bt @r{(@code{backtrace})}
4578 Print a backtrace of the entire stack: one line per frame for all
4579 frames in the stack.
4581 You can stop the backtrace at any time by typing the system interrupt
4582 character, normally @kbd{Ctrl-c}.
4584 @item backtrace @var{n}
4586 Similar, but print only the innermost @var{n} frames.
4588 @item backtrace -@var{n}
4590 Similar, but print only the outermost @var{n} frames.
4592 @item backtrace full
4594 @itemx bt full @var{n}
4595 @itemx bt full -@var{n}
4596 Print the values of the local variables also. @var{n} specifies the
4597 number of frames to print, as described above.
4602 The names @code{where} and @code{info stack} (abbreviated @code{info s})
4603 are additional aliases for @code{backtrace}.
4605 @cindex multiple threads, backtrace
4606 In a multi-threaded program, @value{GDBN} by default shows the
4607 backtrace only for the current thread. To display the backtrace for
4608 several or all of the threads, use the command @code{thread apply}
4609 (@pxref{Threads, thread apply}). For example, if you type @kbd{thread
4610 apply all backtrace}, @value{GDBN} will display the backtrace for all
4611 the threads; this is handy when you debug a core dump of a
4612 multi-threaded program.
4614 Each line in the backtrace shows the frame number and the function name.
4615 The program counter value is also shown---unless you use @code{set
4616 print address off}. The backtrace also shows the source file name and
4617 line number, as well as the arguments to the function. The program
4618 counter value is omitted if it is at the beginning of the code for that
4621 Here is an example of a backtrace. It was made with the command
4622 @samp{bt 3}, so it shows the innermost three frames.
4626 #0 m4_traceon (obs=0x24eb0, argc=1, argv=0x2b8c8)
4628 #1 0x6e38 in expand_macro (sym=0x2b600) at macro.c:242
4629 #2 0x6840 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=177664, td=0xf7fffb08)
4631 (More stack frames follow...)
4636 The display for frame zero does not begin with a program counter
4637 value, indicating that your program has stopped at the beginning of the
4638 code for line @code{993} of @code{builtin.c}.
4640 @cindex value optimized out, in backtrace
4641 @cindex function call arguments, optimized out
4642 If your program was compiled with optimizations, some compilers will
4643 optimize away arguments passed to functions if those arguments are
4644 never used after the call. Such optimizations generate code that
4645 passes arguments through registers, but doesn't store those arguments
4646 in the stack frame. @value{GDBN} has no way of displaying such
4647 arguments in stack frames other than the innermost one. Here's what
4648 such a backtrace might look like:
4652 #0 m4_traceon (obs=0x24eb0, argc=1, argv=0x2b8c8)
4654 #1 0x6e38 in expand_macro (sym=<value optimized out>) at macro.c:242
4655 #2 0x6840 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=<value optimized out>, td=0xf7fffb08)
4657 (More stack frames follow...)
4662 The values of arguments that were not saved in their stack frames are
4663 shown as @samp{<value optimized out>}.
4665 If you need to display the values of such optimized-out arguments,
4666 either deduce that from other variables whose values depend on the one
4667 you are interested in, or recompile without optimizations.
4669 @cindex backtrace beyond @code{main} function
4670 @cindex program entry point
4671 @cindex startup code, and backtrace
4672 Most programs have a standard user entry point---a place where system
4673 libraries and startup code transition into user code. For C this is
4674 @code{main}@footnote{
4675 Note that embedded programs (the so-called ``free-standing''
4676 environment) are not required to have a @code{main} function as the
4677 entry point. They could even have multiple entry points.}.
4678 When @value{GDBN} finds the entry function in a backtrace
4679 it will terminate the backtrace, to avoid tracing into highly
4680 system-specific (and generally uninteresting) code.
4682 If you need to examine the startup code, or limit the number of levels
4683 in a backtrace, you can change this behavior:
4686 @item set backtrace past-main
4687 @itemx set backtrace past-main on
4688 @kindex set backtrace
4689 Backtraces will continue past the user entry point.
4691 @item set backtrace past-main off
4692 Backtraces will stop when they encounter the user entry point. This is the
4695 @item show backtrace past-main
4696 @kindex show backtrace
4697 Display the current user entry point backtrace policy.
4699 @item set backtrace past-entry
4700 @itemx set backtrace past-entry on
4701 Backtraces will continue past the internal entry point of an application.
4702 This entry point is encoded by the linker when the application is built,
4703 and is likely before the user entry point @code{main} (or equivalent) is called.
4705 @item set backtrace past-entry off
4706 Backtraces will stop when they encounter the internal entry point of an
4707 application. This is the default.
4709 @item show backtrace past-entry
4710 Display the current internal entry point backtrace policy.
4712 @item set backtrace limit @var{n}
4713 @itemx set backtrace limit 0
4714 @cindex backtrace limit
4715 Limit the backtrace to @var{n} levels. A value of zero means
4718 @item show backtrace limit
4719 Display the current limit on backtrace levels.
4723 @section Selecting a Frame
4725 Most commands for examining the stack and other data in your program work on
4726 whichever stack frame is selected at the moment. Here are the commands for
4727 selecting a stack frame; all of them finish by printing a brief description
4728 of the stack frame just selected.
4731 @kindex frame@r{, selecting}
4732 @kindex f @r{(@code{frame})}
4735 Select frame number @var{n}. Recall that frame zero is the innermost
4736 (currently executing) frame, frame one is the frame that called the
4737 innermost one, and so on. The highest-numbered frame is the one for
4740 @item frame @var{addr}
4742 Select the frame at address @var{addr}. This is useful mainly if the
4743 chaining of stack frames has been damaged by a bug, making it
4744 impossible for @value{GDBN} to assign numbers properly to all frames. In
4745 addition, this can be useful when your program has multiple stacks and
4746 switches between them.
4748 On the SPARC architecture, @code{frame} needs two addresses to
4749 select an arbitrary frame: a frame pointer and a stack pointer.
4751 On the MIPS and Alpha architecture, it needs two addresses: a stack
4752 pointer and a program counter.
4754 On the 29k architecture, it needs three addresses: a register stack
4755 pointer, a program counter, and a memory stack pointer.
4759 Move @var{n} frames up the stack. For positive numbers @var{n}, this
4760 advances toward the outermost frame, to higher frame numbers, to frames
4761 that have existed longer. @var{n} defaults to one.
4764 @kindex do @r{(@code{down})}
4766 Move @var{n} frames down the stack. For positive numbers @var{n}, this
4767 advances toward the innermost frame, to lower frame numbers, to frames
4768 that were created more recently. @var{n} defaults to one. You may
4769 abbreviate @code{down} as @code{do}.
4772 All of these commands end by printing two lines of output describing the
4773 frame. The first line shows the frame number, the function name, the
4774 arguments, and the source file and line number of execution in that
4775 frame. The second line shows the text of that source line.
4783 #1 0x22f0 in main (argc=1, argv=0xf7fffbf4, env=0xf7fffbfc)
4785 10 read_input_file (argv[i]);
4789 After such a printout, the @code{list} command with no arguments
4790 prints ten lines centered on the point of execution in the frame.
4791 You can also edit the program at the point of execution with your favorite
4792 editing program by typing @code{edit}.
4793 @xref{List, ,Printing Source Lines},
4797 @kindex down-silently
4799 @item up-silently @var{n}
4800 @itemx down-silently @var{n}
4801 These two commands are variants of @code{up} and @code{down},
4802 respectively; they differ in that they do their work silently, without
4803 causing display of the new frame. They are intended primarily for use
4804 in @value{GDBN} command scripts, where the output might be unnecessary and
4809 @section Information About a Frame
4811 There are several other commands to print information about the selected
4817 When used without any argument, this command does not change which
4818 frame is selected, but prints a brief description of the currently
4819 selected stack frame. It can be abbreviated @code{f}. With an
4820 argument, this command is used to select a stack frame.
4821 @xref{Selection, ,Selecting a Frame}.
4824 @kindex info f @r{(@code{info frame})}
4827 This command prints a verbose description of the selected stack frame,
4832 the address of the frame
4834 the address of the next frame down (called by this frame)
4836 the address of the next frame up (caller of this frame)
4838 the language in which the source code corresponding to this frame is written
4840 the address of the frame's arguments
4842 the address of the frame's local variables
4844 the program counter saved in it (the address of execution in the caller frame)
4846 which registers were saved in the frame
4849 @noindent The verbose description is useful when
4850 something has gone wrong that has made the stack format fail to fit
4851 the usual conventions.
4853 @item info frame @var{addr}
4854 @itemx info f @var{addr}
4855 Print a verbose description of the frame at address @var{addr}, without
4856 selecting that frame. The selected frame remains unchanged by this
4857 command. This requires the same kind of address (more than one for some
4858 architectures) that you specify in the @code{frame} command.
4859 @xref{Selection, ,Selecting a Frame}.
4863 Print the arguments of the selected frame, each on a separate line.
4867 Print the local variables of the selected frame, each on a separate
4868 line. These are all variables (declared either static or automatic)
4869 accessible at the point of execution of the selected frame.
4872 @cindex catch exceptions, list active handlers
4873 @cindex exception handlers, how to list
4875 Print a list of all the exception handlers that are active in the
4876 current stack frame at the current point of execution. To see other
4877 exception handlers, visit the associated frame (using the @code{up},
4878 @code{down}, or @code{frame} commands); then type @code{info catch}.
4879 @xref{Set Catchpoints, , Setting Catchpoints}.
4885 @chapter Examining Source Files
4887 @value{GDBN} can print parts of your program's source, since the debugging
4888 information recorded in the program tells @value{GDBN} what source files were
4889 used to build it. When your program stops, @value{GDBN} spontaneously prints
4890 the line where it stopped. Likewise, when you select a stack frame
4891 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a Frame}), @value{GDBN} prints the line where
4892 execution in that frame has stopped. You can print other portions of
4893 source files by explicit command.
4895 If you use @value{GDBN} through its @sc{gnu} Emacs interface, you may
4896 prefer to use Emacs facilities to view source; see @ref{Emacs, ,Using
4897 @value{GDBN} under @sc{gnu} Emacs}.
4900 * List:: Printing source lines
4901 * Edit:: Editing source files
4902 * Search:: Searching source files
4903 * Source Path:: Specifying source directories
4904 * Machine Code:: Source and machine code
4908 @section Printing Source Lines
4911 @kindex l @r{(@code{list})}
4912 To print lines from a source file, use the @code{list} command
4913 (abbreviated @code{l}). By default, ten lines are printed.
4914 There are several ways to specify what part of the file you want to print.
4916 Here are the forms of the @code{list} command most commonly used:
4919 @item list @var{linenum}
4920 Print lines centered around line number @var{linenum} in the
4921 current source file.
4923 @item list @var{function}
4924 Print lines centered around the beginning of function
4928 Print more lines. If the last lines printed were printed with a
4929 @code{list} command, this prints lines following the last lines
4930 printed; however, if the last line printed was a solitary line printed
4931 as part of displaying a stack frame (@pxref{Stack, ,Examining the
4932 Stack}), this prints lines centered around that line.
4935 Print lines just before the lines last printed.
4938 @cindex @code{list}, how many lines to display
4939 By default, @value{GDBN} prints ten source lines with any of these forms of
4940 the @code{list} command. You can change this using @code{set listsize}:
4943 @kindex set listsize
4944 @item set listsize @var{count}
4945 Make the @code{list} command display @var{count} source lines (unless
4946 the @code{list} argument explicitly specifies some other number).
4948 @kindex show listsize
4950 Display the number of lines that @code{list} prints.
4953 Repeating a @code{list} command with @key{RET} discards the argument,
4954 so it is equivalent to typing just @code{list}. This is more useful
4955 than listing the same lines again. An exception is made for an
4956 argument of @samp{-}; that argument is preserved in repetition so that
4957 each repetition moves up in the source file.
4960 In general, the @code{list} command expects you to supply zero, one or two
4961 @dfn{linespecs}. Linespecs specify source lines; there are several ways
4962 of writing them, but the effect is always to specify some source line.
4963 Here is a complete description of the possible arguments for @code{list}:
4966 @item list @var{linespec}
4967 Print lines centered around the line specified by @var{linespec}.
4969 @item list @var{first},@var{last}
4970 Print lines from @var{first} to @var{last}. Both arguments are
4973 @item list ,@var{last}
4974 Print lines ending with @var{last}.
4976 @item list @var{first},
4977 Print lines starting with @var{first}.
4980 Print lines just after the lines last printed.
4983 Print lines just before the lines last printed.
4986 As described in the preceding table.
4989 Here are the ways of specifying a single source line---all the
4994 Specifies line @var{number} of the current source file.
4995 When a @code{list} command has two linespecs, this refers to
4996 the same source file as the first linespec.
4999 Specifies the line @var{offset} lines after the last line printed.
5000 When used as the second linespec in a @code{list} command that has
5001 two, this specifies the line @var{offset} lines down from the
5005 Specifies the line @var{offset} lines before the last line printed.
5007 @item @var{filename}:@var{number}
5008 Specifies line @var{number} in the source file @var{filename}.
5010 @item @var{function}
5011 Specifies the line that begins the body of the function @var{function}.
5012 For example: in C, this is the line with the open brace.
5014 @item @var{filename}:@var{function}
5015 Specifies the line of the open-brace that begins the body of the
5016 function @var{function} in the file @var{filename}. You only need the
5017 file name with a function name to avoid ambiguity when there are
5018 identically named functions in different source files.
5020 @item *@var{address}
5021 Specifies the line containing the program address @var{address}.
5022 @var{address} may be any expression.
5026 @section Editing Source Files
5027 @cindex editing source files
5030 @kindex e @r{(@code{edit})}
5031 To edit the lines in a source file, use the @code{edit} command.
5032 The editing program of your choice
5033 is invoked with the current line set to
5034 the active line in the program.
5035 Alternatively, there are several ways to specify what part of the file you
5036 want to print if you want to see other parts of the program.
5038 Here are the forms of the @code{edit} command most commonly used:
5042 Edit the current source file at the active line number in the program.
5044 @item edit @var{number}
5045 Edit the current source file with @var{number} as the active line number.
5047 @item edit @var{function}
5048 Edit the file containing @var{function} at the beginning of its definition.
5050 @item edit @var{filename}:@var{number}
5051 Specifies line @var{number} in the source file @var{filename}.
5053 @item edit @var{filename}:@var{function}
5054 Specifies the line that begins the body of the
5055 function @var{function} in the file @var{filename}. You only need the
5056 file name with a function name to avoid ambiguity when there are
5057 identically named functions in different source files.
5059 @item edit *@var{address}
5060 Specifies the line containing the program address @var{address}.
5061 @var{address} may be any expression.
5064 @subsection Choosing your Editor
5065 You can customize @value{GDBN} to use any editor you want
5067 The only restriction is that your editor (say @code{ex}), recognizes the
5068 following command-line syntax:
5070 ex +@var{number} file
5072 The optional numeric value +@var{number} specifies the number of the line in
5073 the file where to start editing.}.
5074 By default, it is @file{@value{EDITOR}}, but you can change this
5075 by setting the environment variable @code{EDITOR} before using
5076 @value{GDBN}. For example, to configure @value{GDBN} to use the
5077 @code{vi} editor, you could use these commands with the @code{sh} shell:
5083 or in the @code{csh} shell,
5085 setenv EDITOR /usr/bin/vi
5090 @section Searching Source Files
5091 @cindex searching source files
5093 There are two commands for searching through the current source file for a
5098 @kindex forward-search
5099 @item forward-search @var{regexp}
5100 @itemx search @var{regexp}
5101 The command @samp{forward-search @var{regexp}} checks each line,
5102 starting with the one following the last line listed, for a match for
5103 @var{regexp}. It lists the line that is found. You can use the
5104 synonym @samp{search @var{regexp}} or abbreviate the command name as
5107 @kindex reverse-search
5108 @item reverse-search @var{regexp}
5109 The command @samp{reverse-search @var{regexp}} checks each line, starting
5110 with the one before the last line listed and going backward, for a match
5111 for @var{regexp}. It lists the line that is found. You can abbreviate
5112 this command as @code{rev}.
5116 @section Specifying Source Directories
5119 @cindex directories for source files
5120 Executable programs sometimes do not record the directories of the source
5121 files from which they were compiled, just the names. Even when they do,
5122 the directories could be moved between the compilation and your debugging
5123 session. @value{GDBN} has a list of directories to search for source files;
5124 this is called the @dfn{source path}. Each time @value{GDBN} wants a source file,
5125 it tries all the directories in the list, in the order they are present
5126 in the list, until it finds a file with the desired name.
5128 For example, suppose an executable references the file
5129 @file{/usr/src/foo-1.0/lib/foo.c}, and our source path is
5130 @file{/mnt/cross}. The file is first looked up literally; if this
5131 fails, @file{/mnt/cross/usr/src/foo-1.0/lib/foo.c} is tried; if this
5132 fails, @file{/mnt/cross/foo.c} is opened; if this fails, an error
5133 message is printed. @value{GDBN} does not look up the parts of the
5134 source file name, such as @file{/mnt/cross/src/foo-1.0/lib/foo.c}.
5135 Likewise, the subdirectories of the source path are not searched: if
5136 the source path is @file{/mnt/cross}, and the binary refers to
5137 @file{foo.c}, @value{GDBN} would not find it under
5138 @file{/mnt/cross/usr/src/foo-1.0/lib}.
5140 Plain file names, relative file names with leading directories, file
5141 names containing dots, etc.@: are all treated as described above; for
5142 instance, if the source path is @file{/mnt/cross}, and the source file
5143 is recorded as @file{../lib/foo.c}, @value{GDBN} would first try
5144 @file{../lib/foo.c}, then @file{/mnt/cross/../lib/foo.c}, and after
5145 that---@file{/mnt/cross/foo.c}.
5147 Note that the executable search path is @emph{not} used to locate the
5150 Whenever you reset or rearrange the source path, @value{GDBN} clears out
5151 any information it has cached about where source files are found and where
5152 each line is in the file.
5156 When you start @value{GDBN}, its source path includes only @samp{cdir}
5157 and @samp{cwd}, in that order.
5158 To add other directories, use the @code{directory} command.
5160 The search path is used to find both program source files and @value{GDBN}
5161 script files (read using the @samp{-command} option and @samp{source} command).
5163 In addition to the source path, @value{GDBN} provides a set of commands
5164 that manage a list of source path substitution rules. A @dfn{substitution
5165 rule} specifies how to rewrite source directories stored in the program's
5166 debug information in case the sources were moved to a different
5167 directory between compilation and debugging. A rule is made of
5168 two strings, the first specifying what needs to be rewritten in
5169 the path, and the second specifying how it should be rewritten.
5170 In @ref{set substitute-path}, we name these two parts @var{from} and
5171 @var{to} respectively. @value{GDBN} does a simple string replacement
5172 of @var{from} with @var{to} at the start of the directory part of the
5173 source file name, and uses that result instead of the original file
5174 name to look up the sources.
5176 Using the previous example, suppose the @file{foo-1.0} tree has been
5177 moved from @file{/usr/src} to @file{/mnt/cross}, then you can tell
5178 @value{GDBN} to replace @file{/usr/src} in all source path names with
5179 @file{/mnt/cross}. The first lookup will then be
5180 @file{/mnt/cross/foo-1.0/lib/foo.c} in place of the original location
5181 of @file{/usr/src/foo-1.0/lib/foo.c}. To define a source path
5182 substitution rule, use the @code{set substitute-path} command
5183 (@pxref{set substitute-path}).
5185 To avoid unexpected substitution results, a rule is applied only if the
5186 @var{from} part of the directory name ends at a directory separator.
5187 For instance, a rule substituting @file{/usr/source} into
5188 @file{/mnt/cross} will be applied to @file{/usr/source/foo-1.0} but
5189 not to @file{/usr/sourceware/foo-2.0}. And because the substitution
5190 is applied only at the beginning of the directory name, this rule will
5191 not be applied to @file{/root/usr/source/baz.c} either.
5193 In many cases, you can achieve the same result using the @code{directory}
5194 command. However, @code{set substitute-path} can be more efficient in
5195 the case where the sources are organized in a complex tree with multiple
5196 subdirectories. With the @code{directory} command, you need to add each
5197 subdirectory of your project. If you moved the entire tree while
5198 preserving its internal organization, then @code{set substitute-path}
5199 allows you to direct the debugger to all the sources with one single
5202 @code{set substitute-path} is also more than just a shortcut command.
5203 The source path is only used if the file at the original location no
5204 longer exists. On the other hand, @code{set substitute-path} modifies
5205 the debugger behavior to look at the rewritten location instead. So, if
5206 for any reason a source file that is not relevant to your executable is
5207 located at the original location, a substitution rule is the only
5208 method available to point @value{GDBN} at the new location.
5211 @item directory @var{dirname} @dots{}
5212 @item dir @var{dirname} @dots{}
5213 Add directory @var{dirname} to the front of the source path. Several
5214 directory names may be given to this command, separated by @samp{:}
5215 (@samp{;} on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, where @samp{:} usually appears as
5216 part of absolute file names) or
5217 whitespace. You may specify a directory that is already in the source
5218 path; this moves it forward, so @value{GDBN} searches it sooner.
5222 @vindex $cdir@r{, convenience variable}
5223 @vindex $cwd@r{, convenience variable}
5224 @cindex compilation directory
5225 @cindex current directory
5226 @cindex working directory
5227 @cindex directory, current
5228 @cindex directory, compilation
5229 You can use the string @samp{$cdir} to refer to the compilation
5230 directory (if one is recorded), and @samp{$cwd} to refer to the current
5231 working directory. @samp{$cwd} is not the same as @samp{.}---the former
5232 tracks the current working directory as it changes during your @value{GDBN}
5233 session, while the latter is immediately expanded to the current
5234 directory at the time you add an entry to the source path.
5237 Reset the source path to its default value (@samp{$cdir:$cwd} on Unix systems). This requires confirmation.
5239 @c RET-repeat for @code{directory} is explicitly disabled, but since
5240 @c repeating it would be a no-op we do not say that. (thanks to RMS)
5242 @item show directories
5243 @kindex show directories
5244 Print the source path: show which directories it contains.
5246 @anchor{set substitute-path}
5247 @item set substitute-path @var{from} @var{to}
5248 @kindex set substitute-path
5249 Define a source path substitution rule, and add it at the end of the
5250 current list of existing substitution rules. If a rule with the same
5251 @var{from} was already defined, then the old rule is also deleted.
5253 For example, if the file @file{/foo/bar/baz.c} was moved to
5254 @file{/mnt/cross/baz.c}, then the command
5257 (@value{GDBP}) set substitute-path /usr/src /mnt/cross
5261 will tell @value{GDBN} to replace @samp{/usr/src} with
5262 @samp{/mnt/cross}, which will allow @value{GDBN} to find the file
5263 @file{baz.c} even though it was moved.
5265 In the case when more than one substitution rule have been defined,
5266 the rules are evaluated one by one in the order where they have been
5267 defined. The first one matching, if any, is selected to perform
5270 For instance, if we had entered the following commands:
5273 (@value{GDBP}) set substitute-path /usr/src/include /mnt/include
5274 (@value{GDBP}) set substitute-path /usr/src /mnt/src
5278 @value{GDBN} would then rewrite @file{/usr/src/include/defs.h} into
5279 @file{/mnt/include/defs.h} by using the first rule. However, it would
5280 use the second rule to rewrite @file{/usr/src/lib/foo.c} into
5281 @file{/mnt/src/lib/foo.c}.
5284 @item unset substitute-path [path]
5285 @kindex unset substitute-path
5286 If a path is specified, search the current list of substitution rules
5287 for a rule that would rewrite that path. Delete that rule if found.
5288 A warning is emitted by the debugger if no rule could be found.
5290 If no path is specified, then all substitution rules are deleted.
5292 @item show substitute-path [path]
5293 @kindex show substitute-path
5294 If a path is specified, then print the source path substitution rule
5295 which would rewrite that path, if any.
5297 If no path is specified, then print all existing source path substitution
5302 If your source path is cluttered with directories that are no longer of
5303 interest, @value{GDBN} may sometimes cause confusion by finding the wrong
5304 versions of source. You can correct the situation as follows:
5308 Use @code{directory} with no argument to reset the source path to its default value.
5311 Use @code{directory} with suitable arguments to reinstall the
5312 directories you want in the source path. You can add all the
5313 directories in one command.
5317 @section Source and Machine Code
5318 @cindex source line and its code address
5320 You can use the command @code{info line} to map source lines to program
5321 addresses (and vice versa), and the command @code{disassemble} to display
5322 a range of addresses as machine instructions. When run under @sc{gnu} Emacs
5323 mode, the @code{info line} command causes the arrow to point to the
5324 line specified. Also, @code{info line} prints addresses in symbolic form as
5329 @item info line @var{linespec}
5330 Print the starting and ending addresses of the compiled code for
5331 source line @var{linespec}. You can specify source lines in any of
5332 the ways understood by the @code{list} command (@pxref{List, ,Printing
5336 For example, we can use @code{info line} to discover the location of
5337 the object code for the first line of function
5338 @code{m4_changequote}:
5340 @c FIXME: I think this example should also show the addresses in
5341 @c symbolic form, as they usually would be displayed.
5343 (@value{GDBP}) info line m4_changequote
5344 Line 895 of "builtin.c" starts at pc 0x634c and ends at 0x6350.
5348 @cindex code address and its source line
5349 We can also inquire (using @code{*@var{addr}} as the form for
5350 @var{linespec}) what source line covers a particular address:
5352 (@value{GDBP}) info line *0x63ff
5353 Line 926 of "builtin.c" starts at pc 0x63e4 and ends at 0x6404.
5356 @cindex @code{$_} and @code{info line}
5357 @cindex @code{x} command, default address
5358 @kindex x@r{(examine), and} info line
5359 After @code{info line}, the default address for the @code{x} command
5360 is changed to the starting address of the line, so that @samp{x/i} is
5361 sufficient to begin examining the machine code (@pxref{Memory,
5362 ,Examining Memory}). Also, this address is saved as the value of the
5363 convenience variable @code{$_} (@pxref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
5368 @cindex assembly instructions
5369 @cindex instructions, assembly
5370 @cindex machine instructions
5371 @cindex listing machine instructions
5373 This specialized command dumps a range of memory as machine
5374 instructions. The default memory range is the function surrounding the
5375 program counter of the selected frame. A single argument to this
5376 command is a program counter value; @value{GDBN} dumps the function
5377 surrounding this value. Two arguments specify a range of addresses
5378 (first inclusive, second exclusive) to dump.
5381 The following example shows the disassembly of a range of addresses of
5382 HP PA-RISC 2.0 code:
5385 (@value{GDBP}) disas 0x32c4 0x32e4
5386 Dump of assembler code from 0x32c4 to 0x32e4:
5387 0x32c4 <main+204>: addil 0,dp
5388 0x32c8 <main+208>: ldw 0x22c(sr0,r1),r26
5389 0x32cc <main+212>: ldil 0x3000,r31
5390 0x32d0 <main+216>: ble 0x3f8(sr4,r31)
5391 0x32d4 <main+220>: ldo 0(r31),rp
5392 0x32d8 <main+224>: addil -0x800,dp
5393 0x32dc <main+228>: ldo 0x588(r1),r26
5394 0x32e0 <main+232>: ldil 0x3000,r31
5395 End of assembler dump.
5398 Some architectures have more than one commonly-used set of instruction
5399 mnemonics or other syntax.
5401 For programs that were dynamically linked and use shared libraries,
5402 instructions that call functions or branch to locations in the shared
5403 libraries might show a seemingly bogus location---it's actually a
5404 location of the relocation table. On some architectures, @value{GDBN}
5405 might be able to resolve these to actual function names.
5408 @kindex set disassembly-flavor
5409 @cindex Intel disassembly flavor
5410 @cindex AT&T disassembly flavor
5411 @item set disassembly-flavor @var{instruction-set}
5412 Select the instruction set to use when disassembling the
5413 program via the @code{disassemble} or @code{x/i} commands.
5415 Currently this command is only defined for the Intel x86 family. You
5416 can set @var{instruction-set} to either @code{intel} or @code{att}.
5417 The default is @code{att}, the AT&T flavor used by default by Unix
5418 assemblers for x86-based targets.
5420 @kindex show disassembly-flavor
5421 @item show disassembly-flavor
5422 Show the current setting of the disassembly flavor.
5427 @chapter Examining Data
5429 @cindex printing data
5430 @cindex examining data
5433 @c "inspect" is not quite a synonym if you are using Epoch, which we do not
5434 @c document because it is nonstandard... Under Epoch it displays in a
5435 @c different window or something like that.
5436 The usual way to examine data in your program is with the @code{print}
5437 command (abbreviated @code{p}), or its synonym @code{inspect}. It
5438 evaluates and prints the value of an expression of the language your
5439 program is written in (@pxref{Languages, ,Using @value{GDBN} with
5440 Different Languages}).
5443 @item print @var{expr}
5444 @itemx print /@var{f} @var{expr}
5445 @var{expr} is an expression (in the source language). By default the
5446 value of @var{expr} is printed in a format appropriate to its data type;
5447 you can choose a different format by specifying @samp{/@var{f}}, where
5448 @var{f} is a letter specifying the format; see @ref{Output Formats,,Output
5452 @itemx print /@var{f}
5453 @cindex reprint the last value
5454 If you omit @var{expr}, @value{GDBN} displays the last value again (from the
5455 @dfn{value history}; @pxref{Value History, ,Value History}). This allows you to
5456 conveniently inspect the same value in an alternative format.
5459 A more low-level way of examining data is with the @code{x} command.
5460 It examines data in memory at a specified address and prints it in a
5461 specified format. @xref{Memory, ,Examining Memory}.
5463 If you are interested in information about types, or about how the
5464 fields of a struct or a class are declared, use the @code{ptype @var{exp}}
5465 command rather than @code{print}. @xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol
5469 * Expressions:: Expressions
5470 * Variables:: Program variables
5471 * Arrays:: Artificial arrays
5472 * Output Formats:: Output formats
5473 * Memory:: Examining memory
5474 * Auto Display:: Automatic display
5475 * Print Settings:: Print settings
5476 * Value History:: Value history
5477 * Convenience Vars:: Convenience variables
5478 * Registers:: Registers
5479 * Floating Point Hardware:: Floating point hardware
5480 * Vector Unit:: Vector Unit
5481 * OS Information:: Auxiliary data provided by operating system
5482 * Memory Region Attributes:: Memory region attributes
5483 * Dump/Restore Files:: Copy between memory and a file
5484 * Core File Generation:: Cause a program dump its core
5485 * Character Sets:: Debugging programs that use a different
5486 character set than GDB does
5487 * Caching Remote Data:: Data caching for remote targets
5491 @section Expressions
5494 @code{print} and many other @value{GDBN} commands accept an expression and
5495 compute its value. Any kind of constant, variable or operator defined
5496 by the programming language you are using is valid in an expression in
5497 @value{GDBN}. This includes conditional expressions, function calls,
5498 casts, and string constants. It also includes preprocessor macros, if
5499 you compiled your program to include this information; see
5502 @cindex arrays in expressions
5503 @value{GDBN} supports array constants in expressions input by
5504 the user. The syntax is @{@var{element}, @var{element}@dots{}@}. For example,
5505 you can use the command @code{print @{1, 2, 3@}} to build up an array in
5506 memory that is @code{malloc}ed in the target program.
5508 Because C is so widespread, most of the expressions shown in examples in
5509 this manual are in C. @xref{Languages, , Using @value{GDBN} with Different
5510 Languages}, for information on how to use expressions in other
5513 In this section, we discuss operators that you can use in @value{GDBN}
5514 expressions regardless of your programming language.
5516 @cindex casts, in expressions
5517 Casts are supported in all languages, not just in C, because it is so
5518 useful to cast a number into a pointer in order to examine a structure
5519 at that address in memory.
5520 @c FIXME: casts supported---Mod2 true?
5522 @value{GDBN} supports these operators, in addition to those common
5523 to programming languages:
5527 @samp{@@} is a binary operator for treating parts of memory as arrays.
5528 @xref{Arrays, ,Artificial Arrays}, for more information.
5531 @samp{::} allows you to specify a variable in terms of the file or
5532 function where it is defined. @xref{Variables, ,Program Variables}.
5534 @cindex @{@var{type}@}
5535 @cindex type casting memory
5536 @cindex memory, viewing as typed object
5537 @cindex casts, to view memory
5538 @item @{@var{type}@} @var{addr}
5539 Refers to an object of type @var{type} stored at address @var{addr} in
5540 memory. @var{addr} may be any expression whose value is an integer or
5541 pointer (but parentheses are required around binary operators, just as in
5542 a cast). This construct is allowed regardless of what kind of data is
5543 normally supposed to reside at @var{addr}.
5547 @section Program Variables
5549 The most common kind of expression to use is the name of a variable
5552 Variables in expressions are understood in the selected stack frame
5553 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a Frame}); they must be either:
5557 global (or file-static)
5564 visible according to the scope rules of the
5565 programming language from the point of execution in that frame
5568 @noindent This means that in the function
5583 you can examine and use the variable @code{a} whenever your program is
5584 executing within the function @code{foo}, but you can only use or
5585 examine the variable @code{b} while your program is executing inside
5586 the block where @code{b} is declared.
5588 @cindex variable name conflict
5589 There is an exception: you can refer to a variable or function whose
5590 scope is a single source file even if the current execution point is not
5591 in this file. But it is possible to have more than one such variable or
5592 function with the same name (in different source files). If that
5593 happens, referring to that name has unpredictable effects. If you wish,
5594 you can specify a static variable in a particular function or file,
5595 using the colon-colon (@code{::}) notation:
5597 @cindex colon-colon, context for variables/functions
5599 @c info cannot cope with a :: index entry, but why deprive hard copy readers?
5600 @cindex @code{::}, context for variables/functions
5603 @var{file}::@var{variable}
5604 @var{function}::@var{variable}
5608 Here @var{file} or @var{function} is the name of the context for the
5609 static @var{variable}. In the case of file names, you can use quotes to
5610 make sure @value{GDBN} parses the file name as a single word---for example,
5611 to print a global value of @code{x} defined in @file{f2.c}:
5614 (@value{GDBP}) p 'f2.c'::x
5617 @cindex C@t{++} scope resolution
5618 This use of @samp{::} is very rarely in conflict with the very similar
5619 use of the same notation in C@t{++}. @value{GDBN} also supports use of the C@t{++}
5620 scope resolution operator in @value{GDBN} expressions.
5621 @c FIXME: Um, so what happens in one of those rare cases where it's in
5624 @cindex wrong values
5625 @cindex variable values, wrong
5626 @cindex function entry/exit, wrong values of variables
5627 @cindex optimized code, wrong values of variables
5629 @emph{Warning:} Occasionally, a local variable may appear to have the
5630 wrong value at certain points in a function---just after entry to a new
5631 scope, and just before exit.
5633 You may see this problem when you are stepping by machine instructions.
5634 This is because, on most machines, it takes more than one instruction to
5635 set up a stack frame (including local variable definitions); if you are
5636 stepping by machine instructions, variables may appear to have the wrong
5637 values until the stack frame is completely built. On exit, it usually
5638 also takes more than one machine instruction to destroy a stack frame;
5639 after you begin stepping through that group of instructions, local
5640 variable definitions may be gone.
5642 This may also happen when the compiler does significant optimizations.
5643 To be sure of always seeing accurate values, turn off all optimization
5646 @cindex ``No symbol "foo" in current context''
5647 Another possible effect of compiler optimizations is to optimize
5648 unused variables out of existence, or assign variables to registers (as
5649 opposed to memory addresses). Depending on the support for such cases
5650 offered by the debug info format used by the compiler, @value{GDBN}
5651 might not be able to display values for such local variables. If that
5652 happens, @value{GDBN} will print a message like this:
5655 No symbol "foo" in current context.
5658 To solve such problems, either recompile without optimizations, or use a
5659 different debug info format, if the compiler supports several such
5660 formats. For example, @value{NGCC}, the @sc{gnu} C/C@t{++} compiler,
5661 usually supports the @option{-gstabs+} option. @option{-gstabs+}
5662 produces debug info in a format that is superior to formats such as
5663 COFF. You may be able to use DWARF 2 (@option{-gdwarf-2}), which is also
5664 an effective form for debug info. @xref{Debugging Options,,Options
5665 for Debugging Your Program or GCC, gcc.info, Using the @sc{gnu}
5666 Compiler Collection (GCC)}.
5667 @xref{C, ,C and C@t{++}}, for more information about debug info formats
5668 that are best suited to C@t{++} programs.
5670 If you ask to print an object whose contents are unknown to
5671 @value{GDBN}, e.g., because its data type is not completely specified
5672 by the debug information, @value{GDBN} will say @samp{<incomplete
5673 type>}. @xref{Symbols, incomplete type}, for more about this.
5675 Strings are identified as arrays of @code{char} values without specified
5676 signedness. Arrays of either @code{signed char} or @code{unsigned char} get
5677 printed as arrays of 1 byte sized integers. @code{-fsigned-char} or
5678 @code{-funsigned-char} @value{NGCC} options have no effect as @value{GDBN}
5679 defines literal string type @code{"char"} as @code{char} without a sign.
5684 signed char var1[] = "A";
5687 You get during debugging
5692 $2 = @{65 'A', 0 '\0'@}
5696 @section Artificial Arrays
5698 @cindex artificial array
5700 @kindex @@@r{, referencing memory as an array}
5701 It is often useful to print out several successive objects of the
5702 same type in memory; a section of an array, or an array of
5703 dynamically determined size for which only a pointer exists in the
5706 You can do this by referring to a contiguous span of memory as an
5707 @dfn{artificial array}, using the binary operator @samp{@@}. The left
5708 operand of @samp{@@} should be the first element of the desired array
5709 and be an individual object. The right operand should be the desired length
5710 of the array. The result is an array value whose elements are all of
5711 the type of the left argument. The first element is actually the left
5712 argument; the second element comes from bytes of memory immediately
5713 following those that hold the first element, and so on. Here is an
5714 example. If a program says
5717 int *array = (int *) malloc (len * sizeof (int));
5721 you can print the contents of @code{array} with
5727 The left operand of @samp{@@} must reside in memory. Array values made
5728 with @samp{@@} in this way behave just like other arrays in terms of
5729 subscripting, and are coerced to pointers when used in expressions.
5730 Artificial arrays most often appear in expressions via the value history
5731 (@pxref{Value History, ,Value History}), after printing one out.
5733 Another way to create an artificial array is to use a cast.
5734 This re-interprets a value as if it were an array.
5735 The value need not be in memory:
5737 (@value{GDBP}) p/x (short[2])0x12345678
5738 $1 = @{0x1234, 0x5678@}
5741 As a convenience, if you leave the array length out (as in
5742 @samp{(@var{type}[])@var{value}}) @value{GDBN} calculates the size to fill
5743 the value (as @samp{sizeof(@var{value})/sizeof(@var{type})}:
5745 (@value{GDBP}) p/x (short[])0x12345678
5746 $2 = @{0x1234, 0x5678@}
5749 Sometimes the artificial array mechanism is not quite enough; in
5750 moderately complex data structures, the elements of interest may not
5751 actually be adjacent---for example, if you are interested in the values
5752 of pointers in an array. One useful work-around in this situation is
5753 to use a convenience variable (@pxref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
5754 Variables}) as a counter in an expression that prints the first
5755 interesting value, and then repeat that expression via @key{RET}. For
5756 instance, suppose you have an array @code{dtab} of pointers to
5757 structures, and you are interested in the values of a field @code{fv}
5758 in each structure. Here is an example of what you might type:
5768 @node Output Formats
5769 @section Output Formats
5771 @cindex formatted output
5772 @cindex output formats
5773 By default, @value{GDBN} prints a value according to its data type. Sometimes
5774 this is not what you want. For example, you might want to print a number
5775 in hex, or a pointer in decimal. Or you might want to view data in memory
5776 at a certain address as a character string or as an instruction. To do
5777 these things, specify an @dfn{output format} when you print a value.
5779 The simplest use of output formats is to say how to print a value
5780 already computed. This is done by starting the arguments of the
5781 @code{print} command with a slash and a format letter. The format
5782 letters supported are:
5786 Regard the bits of the value as an integer, and print the integer in
5790 Print as integer in signed decimal.
5793 Print as integer in unsigned decimal.
5796 Print as integer in octal.
5799 Print as integer in binary. The letter @samp{t} stands for ``two''.
5800 @footnote{@samp{b} cannot be used because these format letters are also
5801 used with the @code{x} command, where @samp{b} stands for ``byte'';
5802 see @ref{Memory,,Examining Memory}.}
5805 @cindex unknown address, locating
5806 @cindex locate address
5807 Print as an address, both absolute in hexadecimal and as an offset from
5808 the nearest preceding symbol. You can use this format used to discover
5809 where (in what function) an unknown address is located:
5812 (@value{GDBP}) p/a 0x54320
5813 $3 = 0x54320 <_initialize_vx+396>
5817 The command @code{info symbol 0x54320} yields similar results.
5818 @xref{Symbols, info symbol}.
5821 Regard as an integer and print it as a character constant. This
5822 prints both the numerical value and its character representation. The
5823 character representation is replaced with the octal escape @samp{\nnn}
5824 for characters outside the 7-bit @sc{ascii} range.
5826 Without this format, @value{GDBN} displays @code{char},
5827 @w{@code{unsigned char}}, and @w{@code{signed char}} data as character
5828 constants. Single-byte members of vectors are displayed as integer
5832 Regard the bits of the value as a floating point number and print
5833 using typical floating point syntax.
5836 @cindex printing strings
5837 @cindex printing byte arrays
5838 Regard as a string, if possible. With this format, pointers to single-byte
5839 data are displayed as null-terminated strings and arrays of single-byte data
5840 are displayed as fixed-length strings. Other values are displayed in their
5843 Without this format, @value{GDBN} displays pointers to and arrays of
5844 @code{char}, @w{@code{unsigned char}}, and @w{@code{signed char}} as
5845 strings. Single-byte members of a vector are displayed as an integer
5849 For example, to print the program counter in hex (@pxref{Registers}), type
5856 Note that no space is required before the slash; this is because command
5857 names in @value{GDBN} cannot contain a slash.
5859 To reprint the last value in the value history with a different format,
5860 you can use the @code{print} command with just a format and no
5861 expression. For example, @samp{p/x} reprints the last value in hex.
5864 @section Examining Memory
5866 You can use the command @code{x} (for ``examine'') to examine memory in
5867 any of several formats, independently of your program's data types.
5869 @cindex examining memory
5871 @kindex x @r{(examine memory)}
5872 @item x/@var{nfu} @var{addr}
5875 Use the @code{x} command to examine memory.
5878 @var{n}, @var{f}, and @var{u} are all optional parameters that specify how
5879 much memory to display and how to format it; @var{addr} is an
5880 expression giving the address where you want to start displaying memory.
5881 If you use defaults for @var{nfu}, you need not type the slash @samp{/}.
5882 Several commands set convenient defaults for @var{addr}.
5885 @item @var{n}, the repeat count
5886 The repeat count is a decimal integer; the default is 1. It specifies
5887 how much memory (counting by units @var{u}) to display.
5888 @c This really is **decimal**; unaffected by 'set radix' as of GDB
5891 @item @var{f}, the display format
5892 The display format is one of the formats used by @code{print}
5893 (@samp{x}, @samp{d}, @samp{u}, @samp{o}, @samp{t}, @samp{a}, @samp{c},
5894 @samp{f}, @samp{s}), and in addition @samp{i} (for machine instructions).
5895 The default is @samp{x} (hexadecimal) initially. The default changes
5896 each time you use either @code{x} or @code{print}.
5898 @item @var{u}, the unit size
5899 The unit size is any of
5905 Halfwords (two bytes).
5907 Words (four bytes). This is the initial default.
5909 Giant words (eight bytes).
5912 Each time you specify a unit size with @code{x}, that size becomes the
5913 default unit the next time you use @code{x}. (For the @samp{s} and
5914 @samp{i} formats, the unit size is ignored and is normally not written.)
5916 @item @var{addr}, starting display address
5917 @var{addr} is the address where you want @value{GDBN} to begin displaying
5918 memory. The expression need not have a pointer value (though it may);
5919 it is always interpreted as an integer address of a byte of memory.
5920 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}, for more information on expressions. The default for
5921 @var{addr} is usually just after the last address examined---but several
5922 other commands also set the default address: @code{info breakpoints} (to
5923 the address of the last breakpoint listed), @code{info line} (to the
5924 starting address of a line), and @code{print} (if you use it to display
5925 a value from memory).
5928 For example, @samp{x/3uh 0x54320} is a request to display three halfwords
5929 (@code{h}) of memory, formatted as unsigned decimal integers (@samp{u}),
5930 starting at address @code{0x54320}. @samp{x/4xw $sp} prints the four
5931 words (@samp{w}) of memory above the stack pointer (here, @samp{$sp};
5932 @pxref{Registers, ,Registers}) in hexadecimal (@samp{x}).
5934 Since the letters indicating unit sizes are all distinct from the
5935 letters specifying output formats, you do not have to remember whether
5936 unit size or format comes first; either order works. The output
5937 specifications @samp{4xw} and @samp{4wx} mean exactly the same thing.
5938 (However, the count @var{n} must come first; @samp{wx4} does not work.)
5940 Even though the unit size @var{u} is ignored for the formats @samp{s}
5941 and @samp{i}, you might still want to use a count @var{n}; for example,
5942 @samp{3i} specifies that you want to see three machine instructions,
5943 including any operands. For convenience, especially when used with
5944 the @code{display} command, the @samp{i} format also prints branch delay
5945 slot instructions, if any, beyond the count specified, which immediately
5946 follow the last instruction that is within the count. The command
5947 @code{disassemble} gives an alternative way of inspecting machine
5948 instructions; see @ref{Machine Code,,Source and Machine Code}.
5950 All the defaults for the arguments to @code{x} are designed to make it
5951 easy to continue scanning memory with minimal specifications each time
5952 you use @code{x}. For example, after you have inspected three machine
5953 instructions with @samp{x/3i @var{addr}}, you can inspect the next seven
5954 with just @samp{x/7}. If you use @key{RET} to repeat the @code{x} command,
5955 the repeat count @var{n} is used again; the other arguments default as
5956 for successive uses of @code{x}.
5958 @cindex @code{$_}, @code{$__}, and value history
5959 The addresses and contents printed by the @code{x} command are not saved
5960 in the value history because there is often too much of them and they
5961 would get in the way. Instead, @value{GDBN} makes these values available for
5962 subsequent use in expressions as values of the convenience variables
5963 @code{$_} and @code{$__}. After an @code{x} command, the last address
5964 examined is available for use in expressions in the convenience variable
5965 @code{$_}. The contents of that address, as examined, are available in
5966 the convenience variable @code{$__}.
5968 If the @code{x} command has a repeat count, the address and contents saved
5969 are from the last memory unit printed; this is not the same as the last
5970 address printed if several units were printed on the last line of output.
5972 @cindex remote memory comparison
5973 @cindex verify remote memory image
5974 When you are debugging a program running on a remote target machine
5975 (@pxref{Remote Debugging}), you may wish to verify the program's image in the
5976 remote machine's memory against the executable file you downloaded to
5977 the target. The @code{compare-sections} command is provided for such
5981 @kindex compare-sections
5982 @item compare-sections @r{[}@var{section-name}@r{]}
5983 Compare the data of a loadable section @var{section-name} in the
5984 executable file of the program being debugged with the same section in
5985 the remote machine's memory, and report any mismatches. With no
5986 arguments, compares all loadable sections. This command's
5987 availability depends on the target's support for the @code{"qCRC"}
5992 @section Automatic Display
5993 @cindex automatic display
5994 @cindex display of expressions
5996 If you find that you want to print the value of an expression frequently
5997 (to see how it changes), you might want to add it to the @dfn{automatic
5998 display list} so that @value{GDBN} prints its value each time your program stops.
5999 Each expression added to the list is given a number to identify it;
6000 to remove an expression from the list, you specify that number.
6001 The automatic display looks like this:
6005 3: bar[5] = (struct hack *) 0x3804
6009 This display shows item numbers, expressions and their current values. As with
6010 displays you request manually using @code{x} or @code{print}, you can
6011 specify the output format you prefer; in fact, @code{display} decides
6012 whether to use @code{print} or @code{x} depending your format
6013 specification---it uses @code{x} if you specify either the @samp{i}
6014 or @samp{s} format, or a unit size; otherwise it uses @code{print}.
6018 @item display @var{expr}
6019 Add the expression @var{expr} to the list of expressions to display
6020 each time your program stops. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
6022 @code{display} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after using it.
6024 @item display/@var{fmt} @var{expr}
6025 For @var{fmt} specifying only a display format and not a size or
6026 count, add the expression @var{expr} to the auto-display list but
6027 arrange to display it each time in the specified format @var{fmt}.
6028 @xref{Output Formats,,Output Formats}.
6030 @item display/@var{fmt} @var{addr}
6031 For @var{fmt} @samp{i} or @samp{s}, or including a unit-size or a
6032 number of units, add the expression @var{addr} as a memory address to
6033 be examined each time your program stops. Examining means in effect
6034 doing @samp{x/@var{fmt} @var{addr}}. @xref{Memory, ,Examining Memory}.
6037 For example, @samp{display/i $pc} can be helpful, to see the machine
6038 instruction about to be executed each time execution stops (@samp{$pc}
6039 is a common name for the program counter; @pxref{Registers, ,Registers}).
6042 @kindex delete display
6044 @item undisplay @var{dnums}@dots{}
6045 @itemx delete display @var{dnums}@dots{}
6046 Remove item numbers @var{dnums} from the list of expressions to display.
6048 @code{undisplay} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} after using it.
6049 (Otherwise you would just get the error @samp{No display number @dots{}}.)
6051 @kindex disable display
6052 @item disable display @var{dnums}@dots{}
6053 Disable the display of item numbers @var{dnums}. A disabled display
6054 item is not printed automatically, but is not forgotten. It may be
6055 enabled again later.
6057 @kindex enable display
6058 @item enable display @var{dnums}@dots{}
6059 Enable display of item numbers @var{dnums}. It becomes effective once
6060 again in auto display of its expression, until you specify otherwise.
6063 Display the current values of the expressions on the list, just as is
6064 done when your program stops.
6066 @kindex info display
6068 Print the list of expressions previously set up to display
6069 automatically, each one with its item number, but without showing the
6070 values. This includes disabled expressions, which are marked as such.
6071 It also includes expressions which would not be displayed right now
6072 because they refer to automatic variables not currently available.
6075 @cindex display disabled out of scope
6076 If a display expression refers to local variables, then it does not make
6077 sense outside the lexical context for which it was set up. Such an
6078 expression is disabled when execution enters a context where one of its
6079 variables is not defined. For example, if you give the command
6080 @code{display last_char} while inside a function with an argument
6081 @code{last_char}, @value{GDBN} displays this argument while your program
6082 continues to stop inside that function. When it stops elsewhere---where
6083 there is no variable @code{last_char}---the display is disabled
6084 automatically. The next time your program stops where @code{last_char}
6085 is meaningful, you can enable the display expression once again.
6087 @node Print Settings
6088 @section Print Settings
6090 @cindex format options
6091 @cindex print settings
6092 @value{GDBN} provides the following ways to control how arrays, structures,
6093 and symbols are printed.
6096 These settings are useful for debugging programs in any language:
6100 @item set print address
6101 @itemx set print address on
6102 @cindex print/don't print memory addresses
6103 @value{GDBN} prints memory addresses showing the location of stack
6104 traces, structure values, pointer values, breakpoints, and so forth,
6105 even when it also displays the contents of those addresses. The default
6106 is @code{on}. For example, this is what a stack frame display looks like with
6107 @code{set print address on}:
6112 #0 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<<", rq=0x34c88 ">>")
6114 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
6118 @item set print address off
6119 Do not print addresses when displaying their contents. For example,
6120 this is the same stack frame displayed with @code{set print address off}:
6124 (@value{GDBP}) set print addr off
6126 #0 set_quotes (lq="<<", rq=">>") at input.c:530
6127 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
6131 You can use @samp{set print address off} to eliminate all machine
6132 dependent displays from the @value{GDBN} interface. For example, with
6133 @code{print address off}, you should get the same text for backtraces on
6134 all machines---whether or not they involve pointer arguments.
6137 @item show print address
6138 Show whether or not addresses are to be printed.
6141 When @value{GDBN} prints a symbolic address, it normally prints the
6142 closest earlier symbol plus an offset. If that symbol does not uniquely
6143 identify the address (for example, it is a name whose scope is a single
6144 source file), you may need to clarify. One way to do this is with
6145 @code{info line}, for example @samp{info line *0x4537}. Alternately,
6146 you can set @value{GDBN} to print the source file and line number when
6147 it prints a symbolic address:
6150 @item set print symbol-filename on
6151 @cindex source file and line of a symbol
6152 @cindex symbol, source file and line
6153 Tell @value{GDBN} to print the source file name and line number of a
6154 symbol in the symbolic form of an address.
6156 @item set print symbol-filename off
6157 Do not print source file name and line number of a symbol. This is the
6160 @item show print symbol-filename
6161 Show whether or not @value{GDBN} will print the source file name and
6162 line number of a symbol in the symbolic form of an address.
6165 Another situation where it is helpful to show symbol filenames and line
6166 numbers is when disassembling code; @value{GDBN} shows you the line
6167 number and source file that corresponds to each instruction.
6169 Also, you may wish to see the symbolic form only if the address being
6170 printed is reasonably close to the closest earlier symbol:
6173 @item set print max-symbolic-offset @var{max-offset}
6174 @cindex maximum value for offset of closest symbol
6175 Tell @value{GDBN} to only display the symbolic form of an address if the
6176 offset between the closest earlier symbol and the address is less than
6177 @var{max-offset}. The default is 0, which tells @value{GDBN}
6178 to always print the symbolic form of an address if any symbol precedes it.
6180 @item show print max-symbolic-offset
6181 Ask how large the maximum offset is that @value{GDBN} prints in a
6185 @cindex wild pointer, interpreting
6186 @cindex pointer, finding referent
6187 If you have a pointer and you are not sure where it points, try
6188 @samp{set print symbol-filename on}. Then you can determine the name
6189 and source file location of the variable where it points, using
6190 @samp{p/a @var{pointer}}. This interprets the address in symbolic form.
6191 For example, here @value{GDBN} shows that a variable @code{ptt} points
6192 at another variable @code{t}, defined in @file{hi2.c}:
6195 (@value{GDBP}) set print symbol-filename on
6196 (@value{GDBP}) p/a ptt
6197 $4 = 0xe008 <t in hi2.c>
6201 @emph{Warning:} For pointers that point to a local variable, @samp{p/a}
6202 does not show the symbol name and filename of the referent, even with
6203 the appropriate @code{set print} options turned on.
6206 Other settings control how different kinds of objects are printed:
6209 @item set print array
6210 @itemx set print array on
6211 @cindex pretty print arrays
6212 Pretty print arrays. This format is more convenient to read,
6213 but uses more space. The default is off.
6215 @item set print array off
6216 Return to compressed format for arrays.
6218 @item show print array
6219 Show whether compressed or pretty format is selected for displaying
6222 @cindex print array indexes
6223 @item set print array-indexes
6224 @itemx set print array-indexes on
6225 Print the index of each element when displaying arrays. May be more
6226 convenient to locate a given element in the array or quickly find the
6227 index of a given element in that printed array. The default is off.
6229 @item set print array-indexes off
6230 Stop printing element indexes when displaying arrays.
6232 @item show print array-indexes
6233 Show whether the index of each element is printed when displaying
6236 @item set print elements @var{number-of-elements}
6237 @cindex number of array elements to print
6238 @cindex limit on number of printed array elements
6239 Set a limit on how many elements of an array @value{GDBN} will print.
6240 If @value{GDBN} is printing a large array, it stops printing after it has
6241 printed the number of elements set by the @code{set print elements} command.
6242 This limit also applies to the display of strings.
6243 When @value{GDBN} starts, this limit is set to 200.
6244 Setting @var{number-of-elements} to zero means that the printing is unlimited.
6246 @item show print elements
6247 Display the number of elements of a large array that @value{GDBN} will print.
6248 If the number is 0, then the printing is unlimited.
6250 @item set print repeats
6251 @cindex repeated array elements
6252 Set the threshold for suppressing display of repeated array
6253 elements. When the number of consecutive identical elements of an
6254 array exceeds the threshold, @value{GDBN} prints the string
6255 @code{"<repeats @var{n} times>"}, where @var{n} is the number of
6256 identical repetitions, instead of displaying the identical elements
6257 themselves. Setting the threshold to zero will cause all elements to
6258 be individually printed. The default threshold is 10.
6260 @item show print repeats
6261 Display the current threshold for printing repeated identical
6264 @item set print null-stop
6265 @cindex @sc{null} elements in arrays
6266 Cause @value{GDBN} to stop printing the characters of an array when the first
6267 @sc{null} is encountered. This is useful when large arrays actually
6268 contain only short strings.
6271 @item show print null-stop
6272 Show whether @value{GDBN} stops printing an array on the first
6273 @sc{null} character.
6275 @item set print pretty on
6276 @cindex print structures in indented form
6277 @cindex indentation in structure display
6278 Cause @value{GDBN} to print structures in an indented format with one member
6279 per line, like this:
6294 @item set print pretty off
6295 Cause @value{GDBN} to print structures in a compact format, like this:
6299 $1 = @{next = 0x0, flags = @{sweet = 1, sour = 1@}, \
6300 meat = 0x54 "Pork"@}
6305 This is the default format.
6307 @item show print pretty
6308 Show which format @value{GDBN} is using to print structures.
6310 @item set print sevenbit-strings on
6311 @cindex eight-bit characters in strings
6312 @cindex octal escapes in strings
6313 Print using only seven-bit characters; if this option is set,
6314 @value{GDBN} displays any eight-bit characters (in strings or
6315 character values) using the notation @code{\}@var{nnn}. This setting is
6316 best if you are working in English (@sc{ascii}) and you use the
6317 high-order bit of characters as a marker or ``meta'' bit.
6319 @item set print sevenbit-strings off
6320 Print full eight-bit characters. This allows the use of more
6321 international character sets, and is the default.
6323 @item show print sevenbit-strings
6324 Show whether or not @value{GDBN} is printing only seven-bit characters.
6326 @item set print union on
6327 @cindex unions in structures, printing
6328 Tell @value{GDBN} to print unions which are contained in structures
6329 and other unions. This is the default setting.
6331 @item set print union off
6332 Tell @value{GDBN} not to print unions which are contained in
6333 structures and other unions. @value{GDBN} will print @code{"@{...@}"}
6336 @item show print union
6337 Ask @value{GDBN} whether or not it will print unions which are contained in
6338 structures and other unions.
6340 For example, given the declarations
6343 typedef enum @{Tree, Bug@} Species;
6344 typedef enum @{Big_tree, Acorn, Seedling@} Tree_forms;
6345 typedef enum @{Caterpillar, Cocoon, Butterfly@}
6356 struct thing foo = @{Tree, @{Acorn@}@};
6360 with @code{set print union on} in effect @samp{p foo} would print
6363 $1 = @{it = Tree, form = @{tree = Acorn, bug = Cocoon@}@}
6367 and with @code{set print union off} in effect it would print
6370 $1 = @{it = Tree, form = @{...@}@}
6374 @code{set print union} affects programs written in C-like languages
6380 These settings are of interest when debugging C@t{++} programs:
6383 @cindex demangling C@t{++} names
6384 @item set print demangle
6385 @itemx set print demangle on
6386 Print C@t{++} names in their source form rather than in the encoded
6387 (``mangled'') form passed to the assembler and linker for type-safe
6388 linkage. The default is on.
6390 @item show print demangle
6391 Show whether C@t{++} names are printed in mangled or demangled form.
6393 @item set print asm-demangle
6394 @itemx set print asm-demangle on
6395 Print C@t{++} names in their source form rather than their mangled form, even
6396 in assembler code printouts such as instruction disassemblies.
6399 @item show print asm-demangle
6400 Show whether C@t{++} names in assembly listings are printed in mangled
6403 @cindex C@t{++} symbol decoding style
6404 @cindex symbol decoding style, C@t{++}
6405 @kindex set demangle-style
6406 @item set demangle-style @var{style}
6407 Choose among several encoding schemes used by different compilers to
6408 represent C@t{++} names. The choices for @var{style} are currently:
6412 Allow @value{GDBN} to choose a decoding style by inspecting your program.
6415 Decode based on the @sc{gnu} C@t{++} compiler (@code{g++}) encoding algorithm.
6416 This is the default.
6419 Decode based on the HP ANSI C@t{++} (@code{aCC}) encoding algorithm.
6422 Decode based on the Lucid C@t{++} compiler (@code{lcc}) encoding algorithm.
6425 Decode using the algorithm in the @cite{C@t{++} Annotated Reference Manual}.
6426 @strong{Warning:} this setting alone is not sufficient to allow
6427 debugging @code{cfront}-generated executables. @value{GDBN} would
6428 require further enhancement to permit that.
6431 If you omit @var{style}, you will see a list of possible formats.
6433 @item show demangle-style
6434 Display the encoding style currently in use for decoding C@t{++} symbols.
6436 @item set print object
6437 @itemx set print object on
6438 @cindex derived type of an object, printing
6439 @cindex display derived types
6440 When displaying a pointer to an object, identify the @emph{actual}
6441 (derived) type of the object rather than the @emph{declared} type, using
6442 the virtual function table.
6444 @item set print object off
6445 Display only the declared type of objects, without reference to the
6446 virtual function table. This is the default setting.
6448 @item show print object
6449 Show whether actual, or declared, object types are displayed.
6451 @item set print static-members
6452 @itemx set print static-members on
6453 @cindex static members of C@t{++} objects
6454 Print static members when displaying a C@t{++} object. The default is on.
6456 @item set print static-members off
6457 Do not print static members when displaying a C@t{++} object.
6459 @item show print static-members
6460 Show whether C@t{++} static members are printed or not.
6462 @item set print pascal_static-members
6463 @itemx set print pascal_static-members on
6464 @cindex static members of Pascal objects
6465 @cindex Pascal objects, static members display
6466 Print static members when displaying a Pascal object. The default is on.
6468 @item set print pascal_static-members off
6469 Do not print static members when displaying a Pascal object.
6471 @item show print pascal_static-members
6472 Show whether Pascal static members are printed or not.
6474 @c These don't work with HP ANSI C++ yet.
6475 @item set print vtbl
6476 @itemx set print vtbl on
6477 @cindex pretty print C@t{++} virtual function tables
6478 @cindex virtual functions (C@t{++}) display
6479 @cindex VTBL display
6480 Pretty print C@t{++} virtual function tables. The default is off.
6481 (The @code{vtbl} commands do not work on programs compiled with the HP
6482 ANSI C@t{++} compiler (@code{aCC}).)
6484 @item set print vtbl off
6485 Do not pretty print C@t{++} virtual function tables.
6487 @item show print vtbl
6488 Show whether C@t{++} virtual function tables are pretty printed, or not.
6492 @section Value History
6494 @cindex value history
6495 @cindex history of values printed by @value{GDBN}
6496 Values printed by the @code{print} command are saved in the @value{GDBN}
6497 @dfn{value history}. This allows you to refer to them in other expressions.
6498 Values are kept until the symbol table is re-read or discarded
6499 (for example with the @code{file} or @code{symbol-file} commands).
6500 When the symbol table changes, the value history is discarded,
6501 since the values may contain pointers back to the types defined in the
6506 @cindex history number
6507 The values printed are given @dfn{history numbers} by which you can
6508 refer to them. These are successive integers starting with one.
6509 @code{print} shows you the history number assigned to a value by
6510 printing @samp{$@var{num} = } before the value; here @var{num} is the
6513 To refer to any previous value, use @samp{$} followed by the value's
6514 history number. The way @code{print} labels its output is designed to
6515 remind you of this. Just @code{$} refers to the most recent value in
6516 the history, and @code{$$} refers to the value before that.
6517 @code{$$@var{n}} refers to the @var{n}th value from the end; @code{$$2}
6518 is the value just prior to @code{$$}, @code{$$1} is equivalent to
6519 @code{$$}, and @code{$$0} is equivalent to @code{$}.
6521 For example, suppose you have just printed a pointer to a structure and
6522 want to see the contents of the structure. It suffices to type
6528 If you have a chain of structures where the component @code{next} points
6529 to the next one, you can print the contents of the next one with this:
6536 You can print successive links in the chain by repeating this
6537 command---which you can do by just typing @key{RET}.
6539 Note that the history records values, not expressions. If the value of
6540 @code{x} is 4 and you type these commands:
6548 then the value recorded in the value history by the @code{print} command
6549 remains 4 even though the value of @code{x} has changed.
6554 Print the last ten values in the value history, with their item numbers.
6555 This is like @samp{p@ $$9} repeated ten times, except that @code{show
6556 values} does not change the history.
6558 @item show values @var{n}
6559 Print ten history values centered on history item number @var{n}.
6562 Print ten history values just after the values last printed. If no more
6563 values are available, @code{show values +} produces no display.
6566 Pressing @key{RET} to repeat @code{show values @var{n}} has exactly the
6567 same effect as @samp{show values +}.
6569 @node Convenience Vars
6570 @section Convenience Variables
6572 @cindex convenience variables
6573 @cindex user-defined variables
6574 @value{GDBN} provides @dfn{convenience variables} that you can use within
6575 @value{GDBN} to hold on to a value and refer to it later. These variables
6576 exist entirely within @value{GDBN}; they are not part of your program, and
6577 setting a convenience variable has no direct effect on further execution
6578 of your program. That is why you can use them freely.
6580 Convenience variables are prefixed with @samp{$}. Any name preceded by
6581 @samp{$} can be used for a convenience variable, unless it is one of
6582 the predefined machine-specific register names (@pxref{Registers, ,Registers}).
6583 (Value history references, in contrast, are @emph{numbers} preceded
6584 by @samp{$}. @xref{Value History, ,Value History}.)
6586 You can save a value in a convenience variable with an assignment
6587 expression, just as you would set a variable in your program.
6591 set $foo = *object_ptr
6595 would save in @code{$foo} the value contained in the object pointed to by
6598 Using a convenience variable for the first time creates it, but its
6599 value is @code{void} until you assign a new value. You can alter the
6600 value with another assignment at any time.
6602 Convenience variables have no fixed types. You can assign a convenience
6603 variable any type of value, including structures and arrays, even if
6604 that variable already has a value of a different type. The convenience
6605 variable, when used as an expression, has the type of its current value.
6608 @kindex show convenience
6609 @cindex show all user variables
6610 @item show convenience
6611 Print a list of convenience variables used so far, and their values.
6612 Abbreviated @code{show conv}.
6614 @kindex init-if-undefined
6615 @cindex convenience variables, initializing
6616 @item init-if-undefined $@var{variable} = @var{expression}
6617 Set a convenience variable if it has not already been set. This is useful
6618 for user-defined commands that keep some state. It is similar, in concept,
6619 to using local static variables with initializers in C (except that
6620 convenience variables are global). It can also be used to allow users to
6621 override default values used in a command script.
6623 If the variable is already defined then the expression is not evaluated so
6624 any side-effects do not occur.
6627 One of the ways to use a convenience variable is as a counter to be
6628 incremented or a pointer to be advanced. For example, to print
6629 a field from successive elements of an array of structures:
6633 print bar[$i++]->contents
6637 Repeat that command by typing @key{RET}.
6639 Some convenience variables are created automatically by @value{GDBN} and given
6640 values likely to be useful.
6643 @vindex $_@r{, convenience variable}
6645 The variable @code{$_} is automatically set by the @code{x} command to
6646 the last address examined (@pxref{Memory, ,Examining Memory}). Other
6647 commands which provide a default address for @code{x} to examine also
6648 set @code{$_} to that address; these commands include @code{info line}
6649 and @code{info breakpoint}. The type of @code{$_} is @code{void *}
6650 except when set by the @code{x} command, in which case it is a pointer
6651 to the type of @code{$__}.
6653 @vindex $__@r{, convenience variable}
6655 The variable @code{$__} is automatically set by the @code{x} command
6656 to the value found in the last address examined. Its type is chosen
6657 to match the format in which the data was printed.
6660 @vindex $_exitcode@r{, convenience variable}
6661 The variable @code{$_exitcode} is automatically set to the exit code when
6662 the program being debugged terminates.
6665 On HP-UX systems, if you refer to a function or variable name that
6666 begins with a dollar sign, @value{GDBN} searches for a user or system
6667 name first, before it searches for a convenience variable.
6673 You can refer to machine register contents, in expressions, as variables
6674 with names starting with @samp{$}. The names of registers are different
6675 for each machine; use @code{info registers} to see the names used on
6679 @kindex info registers
6680 @item info registers
6681 Print the names and values of all registers except floating-point
6682 and vector registers (in the selected stack frame).
6684 @kindex info all-registers
6685 @cindex floating point registers
6686 @item info all-registers
6687 Print the names and values of all registers, including floating-point
6688 and vector registers (in the selected stack frame).
6690 @item info registers @var{regname} @dots{}
6691 Print the @dfn{relativized} value of each specified register @var{regname}.
6692 As discussed in detail below, register values are normally relative to
6693 the selected stack frame. @var{regname} may be any register name valid on
6694 the machine you are using, with or without the initial @samp{$}.
6697 @cindex stack pointer register
6698 @cindex program counter register
6699 @cindex process status register
6700 @cindex frame pointer register
6701 @cindex standard registers
6702 @value{GDBN} has four ``standard'' register names that are available (in
6703 expressions) on most machines---whenever they do not conflict with an
6704 architecture's canonical mnemonics for registers. The register names
6705 @code{$pc} and @code{$sp} are used for the program counter register and
6706 the stack pointer. @code{$fp} is used for a register that contains a
6707 pointer to the current stack frame, and @code{$ps} is used for a
6708 register that contains the processor status. For example,
6709 you could print the program counter in hex with
6716 or print the instruction to be executed next with
6723 or add four to the stack pointer@footnote{This is a way of removing
6724 one word from the stack, on machines where stacks grow downward in
6725 memory (most machines, nowadays). This assumes that the innermost
6726 stack frame is selected; setting @code{$sp} is not allowed when other
6727 stack frames are selected. To pop entire frames off the stack,
6728 regardless of machine architecture, use @code{return};
6729 see @ref{Returning, ,Returning from a Function}.} with
6735 Whenever possible, these four standard register names are available on
6736 your machine even though the machine has different canonical mnemonics,
6737 so long as there is no conflict. The @code{info registers} command
6738 shows the canonical names. For example, on the SPARC, @code{info
6739 registers} displays the processor status register as @code{$psr} but you
6740 can also refer to it as @code{$ps}; and on x86-based machines @code{$ps}
6741 is an alias for the @sc{eflags} register.
6743 @value{GDBN} always considers the contents of an ordinary register as an
6744 integer when the register is examined in this way. Some machines have
6745 special registers which can hold nothing but floating point; these
6746 registers are considered to have floating point values. There is no way
6747 to refer to the contents of an ordinary register as floating point value
6748 (although you can @emph{print} it as a floating point value with
6749 @samp{print/f $@var{regname}}).
6751 Some registers have distinct ``raw'' and ``virtual'' data formats. This
6752 means that the data format in which the register contents are saved by
6753 the operating system is not the same one that your program normally
6754 sees. For example, the registers of the 68881 floating point
6755 coprocessor are always saved in ``extended'' (raw) format, but all C
6756 programs expect to work with ``double'' (virtual) format. In such
6757 cases, @value{GDBN} normally works with the virtual format only (the format
6758 that makes sense for your program), but the @code{info registers} command
6759 prints the data in both formats.
6761 @cindex SSE registers (x86)
6762 @cindex MMX registers (x86)
6763 Some machines have special registers whose contents can be interpreted
6764 in several different ways. For example, modern x86-based machines
6765 have SSE and MMX registers that can hold several values packed
6766 together in several different formats. @value{GDBN} refers to such
6767 registers in @code{struct} notation:
6770 (@value{GDBP}) print $xmm1
6772 v4_float = @{0, 3.43859137e-038, 1.54142831e-044, 1.821688e-044@},
6773 v2_double = @{9.92129282474342e-303, 2.7585945287983262e-313@},
6774 v16_int8 = "\000\000\000\000\3706;\001\v\000\000\000\r\000\000",
6775 v8_int16 = @{0, 0, 14072, 315, 11, 0, 13, 0@},
6776 v4_int32 = @{0, 20657912, 11, 13@},
6777 v2_int64 = @{88725056443645952, 55834574859@},
6778 uint128 = 0x0000000d0000000b013b36f800000000
6783 To set values of such registers, you need to tell @value{GDBN} which
6784 view of the register you wish to change, as if you were assigning
6785 value to a @code{struct} member:
6788 (@value{GDBP}) set $xmm1.uint128 = 0x000000000000000000000000FFFFFFFF
6791 Normally, register values are relative to the selected stack frame
6792 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a Frame}). This means that you get the
6793 value that the register would contain if all stack frames farther in
6794 were exited and their saved registers restored. In order to see the
6795 true contents of hardware registers, you must select the innermost
6796 frame (with @samp{frame 0}).
6798 However, @value{GDBN} must deduce where registers are saved, from the machine
6799 code generated by your compiler. If some registers are not saved, or if
6800 @value{GDBN} is unable to locate the saved registers, the selected stack
6801 frame makes no difference.
6803 @node Floating Point Hardware
6804 @section Floating Point Hardware
6805 @cindex floating point
6807 Depending on the configuration, @value{GDBN} may be able to give
6808 you more information about the status of the floating point hardware.
6813 Display hardware-dependent information about the floating
6814 point unit. The exact contents and layout vary depending on the
6815 floating point chip. Currently, @samp{info float} is supported on
6816 the ARM and x86 machines.
6820 @section Vector Unit
6823 Depending on the configuration, @value{GDBN} may be able to give you
6824 more information about the status of the vector unit.
6829 Display information about the vector unit. The exact contents and
6830 layout vary depending on the hardware.
6833 @node OS Information
6834 @section Operating System Auxiliary Information
6835 @cindex OS information
6837 @value{GDBN} provides interfaces to useful OS facilities that can help
6838 you debug your program.
6840 @cindex @code{ptrace} system call
6841 @cindex @code{struct user} contents
6842 When @value{GDBN} runs on a @dfn{Posix system} (such as GNU or Unix
6843 machines), it interfaces with the inferior via the @code{ptrace}
6844 system call. The operating system creates a special sata structure,
6845 called @code{struct user}, for this interface. You can use the
6846 command @code{info udot} to display the contents of this data
6852 Display the contents of the @code{struct user} maintained by the OS
6853 kernel for the program being debugged. @value{GDBN} displays the
6854 contents of @code{struct user} as a list of hex numbers, similar to
6855 the @code{examine} command.
6858 @cindex auxiliary vector
6859 @cindex vector, auxiliary
6860 Some operating systems supply an @dfn{auxiliary vector} to programs at
6861 startup. This is akin to the arguments and environment that you
6862 specify for a program, but contains a system-dependent variety of
6863 binary values that tell system libraries important details about the
6864 hardware, operating system, and process. Each value's purpose is
6865 identified by an integer tag; the meanings are well-known but system-specific.
6866 Depending on the configuration and operating system facilities,
6867 @value{GDBN} may be able to show you this information. For remote
6868 targets, this functionality may further depend on the remote stub's
6869 support of the @samp{qXfer:auxv:read} packet, see
6870 @ref{qXfer auxiliary vector read}.
6875 Display the auxiliary vector of the inferior, which can be either a
6876 live process or a core dump file. @value{GDBN} prints each tag value
6877 numerically, and also shows names and text descriptions for recognized
6878 tags. Some values in the vector are numbers, some bit masks, and some
6879 pointers to strings or other data. @value{GDBN} displays each value in the
6880 most appropriate form for a recognized tag, and in hexadecimal for
6881 an unrecognized tag.
6885 @node Memory Region Attributes
6886 @section Memory Region Attributes
6887 @cindex memory region attributes
6889 @dfn{Memory region attributes} allow you to describe special handling
6890 required by regions of your target's memory. @value{GDBN} uses
6891 attributes to determine whether to allow certain types of memory
6892 accesses; whether to use specific width accesses; and whether to cache
6893 target memory. By default the description of memory regions is
6894 fetched from the target (if the current target supports this), but the
6895 user can override the fetched regions.
6897 Defined memory regions can be individually enabled and disabled. When a
6898 memory region is disabled, @value{GDBN} uses the default attributes when
6899 accessing memory in that region. Similarly, if no memory regions have
6900 been defined, @value{GDBN} uses the default attributes when accessing
6903 When a memory region is defined, it is given a number to identify it;
6904 to enable, disable, or remove a memory region, you specify that number.
6908 @item mem @var{lower} @var{upper} @var{attributes}@dots{}
6909 Define a memory region bounded by @var{lower} and @var{upper} with
6910 attributes @var{attributes}@dots{}, and add it to the list of regions
6911 monitored by @value{GDBN}. Note that @var{upper} == 0 is a special
6912 case: it is treated as the target's maximum memory address.
6913 (0xffff on 16 bit targets, 0xffffffff on 32 bit targets, etc.)
6916 Discard any user changes to the memory regions and use target-supplied
6917 regions, if available, or no regions if the target does not support.
6920 @item delete mem @var{nums}@dots{}
6921 Remove memory regions @var{nums}@dots{} from the list of regions
6922 monitored by @value{GDBN}.
6925 @item disable mem @var{nums}@dots{}
6926 Disable monitoring of memory regions @var{nums}@dots{}.
6927 A disabled memory region is not forgotten.
6928 It may be enabled again later.
6931 @item enable mem @var{nums}@dots{}
6932 Enable monitoring of memory regions @var{nums}@dots{}.
6936 Print a table of all defined memory regions, with the following columns
6940 @item Memory Region Number
6941 @item Enabled or Disabled.
6942 Enabled memory regions are marked with @samp{y}.
6943 Disabled memory regions are marked with @samp{n}.
6946 The address defining the inclusive lower bound of the memory region.
6949 The address defining the exclusive upper bound of the memory region.
6952 The list of attributes set for this memory region.
6957 @subsection Attributes
6959 @subsubsection Memory Access Mode
6960 The access mode attributes set whether @value{GDBN} may make read or
6961 write accesses to a memory region.
6963 While these attributes prevent @value{GDBN} from performing invalid
6964 memory accesses, they do nothing to prevent the target system, I/O DMA,
6965 etc.@: from accessing memory.
6969 Memory is read only.
6971 Memory is write only.
6973 Memory is read/write. This is the default.
6976 @subsubsection Memory Access Size
6977 The access size attribute tells @value{GDBN} to use specific sized
6978 accesses in the memory region. Often memory mapped device registers
6979 require specific sized accesses. If no access size attribute is
6980 specified, @value{GDBN} may use accesses of any size.
6984 Use 8 bit memory accesses.
6986 Use 16 bit memory accesses.
6988 Use 32 bit memory accesses.
6990 Use 64 bit memory accesses.
6993 @c @subsubsection Hardware/Software Breakpoints
6994 @c The hardware/software breakpoint attributes set whether @value{GDBN}
6995 @c will use hardware or software breakpoints for the internal breakpoints
6996 @c used by the step, next, finish, until, etc. commands.
7000 @c Always use hardware breakpoints
7001 @c @item swbreak (default)
7004 @subsubsection Data Cache
7005 The data cache attributes set whether @value{GDBN} will cache target
7006 memory. While this generally improves performance by reducing debug
7007 protocol overhead, it can lead to incorrect results because @value{GDBN}
7008 does not know about volatile variables or memory mapped device
7013 Enable @value{GDBN} to cache target memory.
7015 Disable @value{GDBN} from caching target memory. This is the default.
7018 @subsection Memory Access Checking
7019 @value{GDBN} can be instructed to refuse accesses to memory that is
7020 not explicitly described. This can be useful if accessing such
7021 regions has undesired effects for a specific target, or to provide
7022 better error checking. The following commands control this behaviour.
7025 @kindex set mem inaccessible-by-default
7026 @item set mem inaccessible-by-default [on|off]
7027 If @code{on} is specified, make @value{GDBN} treat memory not
7028 explicitly described by the memory ranges as non-existent and refuse accesses
7029 to such memory. The checks are only performed if there's at least one
7030 memory range defined. If @code{off} is specified, make @value{GDBN}
7031 treat the memory not explicitly described by the memory ranges as RAM.
7032 The default value is @code{off}.
7033 @kindex show mem inaccessible-by-default
7034 @item show mem inaccessible-by-default
7035 Show the current handling of accesses to unknown memory.
7039 @c @subsubsection Memory Write Verification
7040 @c The memory write verification attributes set whether @value{GDBN}
7041 @c will re-reads data after each write to verify the write was successful.
7045 @c @item noverify (default)
7048 @node Dump/Restore Files
7049 @section Copy Between Memory and a File
7050 @cindex dump/restore files
7051 @cindex append data to a file
7052 @cindex dump data to a file
7053 @cindex restore data from a file
7055 You can use the commands @code{dump}, @code{append}, and
7056 @code{restore} to copy data between target memory and a file. The
7057 @code{dump} and @code{append} commands write data to a file, and the
7058 @code{restore} command reads data from a file back into the inferior's
7059 memory. Files may be in binary, Motorola S-record, Intel hex, or
7060 Tektronix Hex format; however, @value{GDBN} can only append to binary
7066 @item dump @r{[}@var{format}@r{]} memory @var{filename} @var{start_addr} @var{end_addr}
7067 @itemx dump @r{[}@var{format}@r{]} value @var{filename} @var{expr}
7068 Dump the contents of memory from @var{start_addr} to @var{end_addr},
7069 or the value of @var{expr}, to @var{filename} in the given format.
7071 The @var{format} parameter may be any one of:
7078 Motorola S-record format.
7080 Tektronix Hex format.
7083 @value{GDBN} uses the same definitions of these formats as the
7084 @sc{gnu} binary utilities, like @samp{objdump} and @samp{objcopy}. If
7085 @var{format} is omitted, @value{GDBN} dumps the data in raw binary
7089 @item append @r{[}binary@r{]} memory @var{filename} @var{start_addr} @var{end_addr}
7090 @itemx append @r{[}binary@r{]} value @var{filename} @var{expr}
7091 Append the contents of memory from @var{start_addr} to @var{end_addr},
7092 or the value of @var{expr}, to the file @var{filename}, in raw binary form.
7093 (@value{GDBN} can only append data to files in raw binary form.)
7096 @item restore @var{filename} @r{[}binary@r{]} @var{bias} @var{start} @var{end}
7097 Restore the contents of file @var{filename} into memory. The
7098 @code{restore} command can automatically recognize any known @sc{bfd}
7099 file format, except for raw binary. To restore a raw binary file you
7100 must specify the optional keyword @code{binary} after the filename.
7102 If @var{bias} is non-zero, its value will be added to the addresses
7103 contained in the file. Binary files always start at address zero, so
7104 they will be restored at address @var{bias}. Other bfd files have
7105 a built-in location; they will be restored at offset @var{bias}
7108 If @var{start} and/or @var{end} are non-zero, then only data between
7109 file offset @var{start} and file offset @var{end} will be restored.
7110 These offsets are relative to the addresses in the file, before
7111 the @var{bias} argument is applied.
7115 @node Core File Generation
7116 @section How to Produce a Core File from Your Program
7117 @cindex dump core from inferior
7119 A @dfn{core file} or @dfn{core dump} is a file that records the memory
7120 image of a running process and its process status (register values
7121 etc.). Its primary use is post-mortem debugging of a program that
7122 crashed while it ran outside a debugger. A program that crashes
7123 automatically produces a core file, unless this feature is disabled by
7124 the user. @xref{Files}, for information on invoking @value{GDBN} in
7125 the post-mortem debugging mode.
7127 Occasionally, you may wish to produce a core file of the program you
7128 are debugging in order to preserve a snapshot of its state.
7129 @value{GDBN} has a special command for that.
7133 @kindex generate-core-file
7134 @item generate-core-file [@var{file}]
7135 @itemx gcore [@var{file}]
7136 Produce a core dump of the inferior process. The optional argument
7137 @var{file} specifies the file name where to put the core dump. If not
7138 specified, the file name defaults to @file{core.@var{pid}}, where
7139 @var{pid} is the inferior process ID.
7141 Note that this command is implemented only for some systems (as of
7142 this writing, @sc{gnu}/Linux, FreeBSD, Solaris, Unixware, and S390).
7145 @node Character Sets
7146 @section Character Sets
7147 @cindex character sets
7149 @cindex translating between character sets
7150 @cindex host character set
7151 @cindex target character set
7153 If the program you are debugging uses a different character set to
7154 represent characters and strings than the one @value{GDBN} uses itself,
7155 @value{GDBN} can automatically translate between the character sets for
7156 you. The character set @value{GDBN} uses we call the @dfn{host
7157 character set}; the one the inferior program uses we call the
7158 @dfn{target character set}.
7160 For example, if you are running @value{GDBN} on a @sc{gnu}/Linux system, which
7161 uses the ISO Latin 1 character set, but you are using @value{GDBN}'s
7162 remote protocol (@pxref{Remote Debugging}) to debug a program
7163 running on an IBM mainframe, which uses the @sc{ebcdic} character set,
7164 then the host character set is Latin-1, and the target character set is
7165 @sc{ebcdic}. If you give @value{GDBN} the command @code{set
7166 target-charset EBCDIC-US}, then @value{GDBN} translates between
7167 @sc{ebcdic} and Latin 1 as you print character or string values, or use
7168 character and string literals in expressions.
7170 @value{GDBN} has no way to automatically recognize which character set
7171 the inferior program uses; you must tell it, using the @code{set
7172 target-charset} command, described below.
7174 Here are the commands for controlling @value{GDBN}'s character set
7178 @item set target-charset @var{charset}
7179 @kindex set target-charset
7180 Set the current target character set to @var{charset}. We list the
7181 character set names @value{GDBN} recognizes below, but if you type
7182 @code{set target-charset} followed by @key{TAB}@key{TAB}, @value{GDBN} will
7183 list the target character sets it supports.
7187 @item set host-charset @var{charset}
7188 @kindex set host-charset
7189 Set the current host character set to @var{charset}.
7191 By default, @value{GDBN} uses a host character set appropriate to the
7192 system it is running on; you can override that default using the
7193 @code{set host-charset} command.
7195 @value{GDBN} can only use certain character sets as its host character
7196 set. We list the character set names @value{GDBN} recognizes below, and
7197 indicate which can be host character sets, but if you type
7198 @code{set target-charset} followed by @key{TAB}@key{TAB}, @value{GDBN} will
7199 list the host character sets it supports.
7201 @item set charset @var{charset}
7203 Set the current host and target character sets to @var{charset}. As
7204 above, if you type @code{set charset} followed by @key{TAB}@key{TAB},
7205 @value{GDBN} will list the name of the character sets that can be used
7206 for both host and target.
7210 @kindex show charset
7211 Show the names of the current host and target charsets.
7213 @itemx show host-charset
7214 @kindex show host-charset
7215 Show the name of the current host charset.
7217 @itemx show target-charset
7218 @kindex show target-charset
7219 Show the name of the current target charset.
7223 @value{GDBN} currently includes support for the following character
7229 @cindex ASCII character set
7230 Seven-bit U.S. @sc{ascii}. @value{GDBN} can use this as its host
7234 @cindex ISO 8859-1 character set
7235 @cindex ISO Latin 1 character set
7236 The ISO Latin 1 character set. This extends @sc{ascii} with accented
7237 characters needed for French, German, and Spanish. @value{GDBN} can use
7238 this as its host character set.
7242 @cindex EBCDIC character set
7243 @cindex IBM1047 character set
7244 Variants of the @sc{ebcdic} character set, used on some of IBM's
7245 mainframe operating systems. (@sc{gnu}/Linux on the S/390 uses U.S. @sc{ascii}.)
7246 @value{GDBN} cannot use these as its host character set.
7250 Note that these are all single-byte character sets. More work inside
7251 @value{GDBN} is needed to support multi-byte or variable-width character
7252 encodings, like the UTF-8 and UCS-2 encodings of Unicode.
7254 Here is an example of @value{GDBN}'s character set support in action.
7255 Assume that the following source code has been placed in the file
7256 @file{charset-test.c}:
7262 = @{72, 101, 108, 108, 111, 44, 32, 119,
7263 111, 114, 108, 100, 33, 10, 0@};
7264 char ibm1047_hello[]
7265 = @{200, 133, 147, 147, 150, 107, 64, 166,
7266 150, 153, 147, 132, 90, 37, 0@};
7270 printf ("Hello, world!\n");
7274 In this program, @code{ascii_hello} and @code{ibm1047_hello} are arrays
7275 containing the string @samp{Hello, world!} followed by a newline,
7276 encoded in the @sc{ascii} and @sc{ibm1047} character sets.
7278 We compile the program, and invoke the debugger on it:
7281 $ gcc -g charset-test.c -o charset-test
7282 $ gdb -nw charset-test
7283 GNU gdb 2001-12-19-cvs
7284 Copyright 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
7289 We can use the @code{show charset} command to see what character sets
7290 @value{GDBN} is currently using to interpret and display characters and
7294 (@value{GDBP}) show charset
7295 The current host and target character set is `ISO-8859-1'.
7299 For the sake of printing this manual, let's use @sc{ascii} as our
7300 initial character set:
7302 (@value{GDBP}) set charset ASCII
7303 (@value{GDBP}) show charset
7304 The current host and target character set is `ASCII'.
7308 Let's assume that @sc{ascii} is indeed the correct character set for our
7309 host system --- in other words, let's assume that if @value{GDBN} prints
7310 characters using the @sc{ascii} character set, our terminal will display
7311 them properly. Since our current target character set is also
7312 @sc{ascii}, the contents of @code{ascii_hello} print legibly:
7315 (@value{GDBP}) print ascii_hello
7316 $1 = 0x401698 "Hello, world!\n"
7317 (@value{GDBP}) print ascii_hello[0]
7322 @value{GDBN} uses the target character set for character and string
7323 literals you use in expressions:
7326 (@value{GDBP}) print '+'
7331 The @sc{ascii} character set uses the number 43 to encode the @samp{+}
7334 @value{GDBN} relies on the user to tell it which character set the
7335 target program uses. If we print @code{ibm1047_hello} while our target
7336 character set is still @sc{ascii}, we get jibberish:
7339 (@value{GDBP}) print ibm1047_hello
7340 $4 = 0x4016a8 "\310\205\223\223\226k@@\246\226\231\223\204Z%"
7341 (@value{GDBP}) print ibm1047_hello[0]
7346 If we invoke the @code{set target-charset} followed by @key{TAB}@key{TAB},
7347 @value{GDBN} tells us the character sets it supports:
7350 (@value{GDBP}) set target-charset
7351 ASCII EBCDIC-US IBM1047 ISO-8859-1
7352 (@value{GDBP}) set target-charset
7355 We can select @sc{ibm1047} as our target character set, and examine the
7356 program's strings again. Now the @sc{ascii} string is wrong, but
7357 @value{GDBN} translates the contents of @code{ibm1047_hello} from the
7358 target character set, @sc{ibm1047}, to the host character set,
7359 @sc{ascii}, and they display correctly:
7362 (@value{GDBP}) set target-charset IBM1047
7363 (@value{GDBP}) show charset
7364 The current host character set is `ASCII'.
7365 The current target character set is `IBM1047'.
7366 (@value{GDBP}) print ascii_hello
7367 $6 = 0x401698 "\110\145%%?\054\040\167?\162%\144\041\012"
7368 (@value{GDBP}) print ascii_hello[0]
7370 (@value{GDBP}) print ibm1047_hello
7371 $8 = 0x4016a8 "Hello, world!\n"
7372 (@value{GDBP}) print ibm1047_hello[0]
7377 As above, @value{GDBN} uses the target character set for character and
7378 string literals you use in expressions:
7381 (@value{GDBP}) print '+'
7386 The @sc{ibm1047} character set uses the number 78 to encode the @samp{+}
7389 @node Caching Remote Data
7390 @section Caching Data of Remote Targets
7391 @cindex caching data of remote targets
7393 @value{GDBN} can cache data exchanged between the debugger and a
7394 remote target (@pxref{Remote Debugging}). Such caching generally improves
7395 performance, because it reduces the overhead of the remote protocol by
7396 bundling memory reads and writes into large chunks. Unfortunately,
7397 @value{GDBN} does not currently know anything about volatile
7398 registers, and thus data caching will produce incorrect results when
7399 volatile registers are in use.
7402 @kindex set remotecache
7403 @item set remotecache on
7404 @itemx set remotecache off
7405 Set caching state for remote targets. When @code{ON}, use data
7406 caching. By default, this option is @code{OFF}.
7408 @kindex show remotecache
7409 @item show remotecache
7410 Show the current state of data caching for remote targets.
7414 Print the information about the data cache performance. The
7415 information displayed includes: the dcache width and depth; and for
7416 each cache line, how many times it was referenced, and its data and
7417 state (dirty, bad, ok, etc.). This command is useful for debugging
7418 the data cache operation.
7423 @chapter C Preprocessor Macros
7425 Some languages, such as C and C@t{++}, provide a way to define and invoke
7426 ``preprocessor macros'' which expand into strings of tokens.
7427 @value{GDBN} can evaluate expressions containing macro invocations, show
7428 the result of macro expansion, and show a macro's definition, including
7429 where it was defined.
7431 You may need to compile your program specially to provide @value{GDBN}
7432 with information about preprocessor macros. Most compilers do not
7433 include macros in their debugging information, even when you compile
7434 with the @option{-g} flag. @xref{Compilation}.
7436 A program may define a macro at one point, remove that definition later,
7437 and then provide a different definition after that. Thus, at different
7438 points in the program, a macro may have different definitions, or have
7439 no definition at all. If there is a current stack frame, @value{GDBN}
7440 uses the macros in scope at that frame's source code line. Otherwise,
7441 @value{GDBN} uses the macros in scope at the current listing location;
7444 At the moment, @value{GDBN} does not support the @code{##}
7445 token-splicing operator, the @code{#} stringification operator, or
7446 variable-arity macros.
7448 Whenever @value{GDBN} evaluates an expression, it always expands any
7449 macro invocations present in the expression. @value{GDBN} also provides
7450 the following commands for working with macros explicitly.
7454 @kindex macro expand
7455 @cindex macro expansion, showing the results of preprocessor
7456 @cindex preprocessor macro expansion, showing the results of
7457 @cindex expanding preprocessor macros
7458 @item macro expand @var{expression}
7459 @itemx macro exp @var{expression}
7460 Show the results of expanding all preprocessor macro invocations in
7461 @var{expression}. Since @value{GDBN} simply expands macros, but does
7462 not parse the result, @var{expression} need not be a valid expression;
7463 it can be any string of tokens.
7466 @item macro expand-once @var{expression}
7467 @itemx macro exp1 @var{expression}
7468 @cindex expand macro once
7469 @i{(This command is not yet implemented.)} Show the results of
7470 expanding those preprocessor macro invocations that appear explicitly in
7471 @var{expression}. Macro invocations appearing in that expansion are
7472 left unchanged. This command allows you to see the effect of a
7473 particular macro more clearly, without being confused by further
7474 expansions. Since @value{GDBN} simply expands macros, but does not
7475 parse the result, @var{expression} need not be a valid expression; it
7476 can be any string of tokens.
7479 @cindex macro definition, showing
7480 @cindex definition, showing a macro's
7481 @item info macro @var{macro}
7482 Show the definition of the macro named @var{macro}, and describe the
7483 source location where that definition was established.
7485 @kindex macro define
7486 @cindex user-defined macros
7487 @cindex defining macros interactively
7488 @cindex macros, user-defined
7489 @item macro define @var{macro} @var{replacement-list}
7490 @itemx macro define @var{macro}(@var{arglist}) @var{replacement-list}
7491 @i{(This command is not yet implemented.)} Introduce a definition for a
7492 preprocessor macro named @var{macro}, invocations of which are replaced
7493 by the tokens given in @var{replacement-list}. The first form of this
7494 command defines an ``object-like'' macro, which takes no arguments; the
7495 second form defines a ``function-like'' macro, which takes the arguments
7496 given in @var{arglist}.
7498 A definition introduced by this command is in scope in every expression
7499 evaluated in @value{GDBN}, until it is removed with the @command{macro
7500 undef} command, described below. The definition overrides all
7501 definitions for @var{macro} present in the program being debugged, as
7502 well as any previous user-supplied definition.
7505 @item macro undef @var{macro}
7506 @i{(This command is not yet implemented.)} Remove any user-supplied
7507 definition for the macro named @var{macro}. This command only affects
7508 definitions provided with the @command{macro define} command, described
7509 above; it cannot remove definitions present in the program being
7514 @i{(This command is not yet implemented.)} List all the macros
7515 defined using the @code{macro define} command.
7518 @cindex macros, example of debugging with
7519 Here is a transcript showing the above commands in action. First, we
7520 show our source files:
7528 #define ADD(x) (M + x)
7533 printf ("Hello, world!\n");
7535 printf ("We're so creative.\n");
7537 printf ("Goodbye, world!\n");
7544 Now, we compile the program using the @sc{gnu} C compiler, @value{NGCC}.
7545 We pass the @option{-gdwarf-2} and @option{-g3} flags to ensure the
7546 compiler includes information about preprocessor macros in the debugging
7550 $ gcc -gdwarf-2 -g3 sample.c -o sample
7554 Now, we start @value{GDBN} on our sample program:
7558 GNU gdb 2002-05-06-cvs
7559 Copyright 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
7560 GDB is free software, @dots{}
7564 We can expand macros and examine their definitions, even when the
7565 program is not running. @value{GDBN} uses the current listing position
7566 to decide which macro definitions are in scope:
7569 (@value{GDBP}) list main
7572 5 #define ADD(x) (M + x)
7577 10 printf ("Hello, world!\n");
7579 12 printf ("We're so creative.\n");
7580 (@value{GDBP}) info macro ADD
7581 Defined at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.c:5
7582 #define ADD(x) (M + x)
7583 (@value{GDBP}) info macro Q
7584 Defined at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.h:1
7585 included at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.c:2
7587 (@value{GDBP}) macro expand ADD(1)
7588 expands to: (42 + 1)
7589 (@value{GDBP}) macro expand-once ADD(1)
7590 expands to: once (M + 1)
7594 In the example above, note that @command{macro expand-once} expands only
7595 the macro invocation explicit in the original text --- the invocation of
7596 @code{ADD} --- but does not expand the invocation of the macro @code{M},
7597 which was introduced by @code{ADD}.
7599 Once the program is running, @value{GDBN} uses the macro definitions in
7600 force at the source line of the current stack frame:
7603 (@value{GDBP}) break main
7604 Breakpoint 1 at 0x8048370: file sample.c, line 10.
7606 Starting program: /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample
7608 Breakpoint 1, main () at sample.c:10
7609 10 printf ("Hello, world!\n");
7613 At line 10, the definition of the macro @code{N} at line 9 is in force:
7616 (@value{GDBP}) info macro N
7617 Defined at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.c:9
7619 (@value{GDBP}) macro expand N Q M
7621 (@value{GDBP}) print N Q M
7626 As we step over directives that remove @code{N}'s definition, and then
7627 give it a new definition, @value{GDBN} finds the definition (or lack
7628 thereof) in force at each point:
7633 12 printf ("We're so creative.\n");
7634 (@value{GDBP}) info macro N
7635 The symbol `N' has no definition as a C/C++ preprocessor macro
7636 at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.c:12
7639 14 printf ("Goodbye, world!\n");
7640 (@value{GDBP}) info macro N
7641 Defined at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.c:13
7643 (@value{GDBP}) macro expand N Q M
7644 expands to: 1729 < 42
7645 (@value{GDBP}) print N Q M
7652 @chapter Tracepoints
7653 @c This chapter is based on the documentation written by Michael
7654 @c Snyder, David Taylor, Jim Blandy, and Elena Zannoni.
7657 In some applications, it is not feasible for the debugger to interrupt
7658 the program's execution long enough for the developer to learn
7659 anything helpful about its behavior. If the program's correctness
7660 depends on its real-time behavior, delays introduced by a debugger
7661 might cause the program to change its behavior drastically, or perhaps
7662 fail, even when the code itself is correct. It is useful to be able
7663 to observe the program's behavior without interrupting it.
7665 Using @value{GDBN}'s @code{trace} and @code{collect} commands, you can
7666 specify locations in the program, called @dfn{tracepoints}, and
7667 arbitrary expressions to evaluate when those tracepoints are reached.
7668 Later, using the @code{tfind} command, you can examine the values
7669 those expressions had when the program hit the tracepoints. The
7670 expressions may also denote objects in memory---structures or arrays,
7671 for example---whose values @value{GDBN} should record; while visiting
7672 a particular tracepoint, you may inspect those objects as if they were
7673 in memory at that moment. However, because @value{GDBN} records these
7674 values without interacting with you, it can do so quickly and
7675 unobtrusively, hopefully not disturbing the program's behavior.
7677 The tracepoint facility is currently available only for remote
7678 targets. @xref{Targets}. In addition, your remote target must know
7679 how to collect trace data. This functionality is implemented in the
7680 remote stub; however, none of the stubs distributed with @value{GDBN}
7681 support tracepoints as of this writing. The format of the remote
7682 packets used to implement tracepoints are described in @ref{Tracepoint
7685 This chapter describes the tracepoint commands and features.
7689 * Analyze Collected Data::
7690 * Tracepoint Variables::
7693 @node Set Tracepoints
7694 @section Commands to Set Tracepoints
7696 Before running such a @dfn{trace experiment}, an arbitrary number of
7697 tracepoints can be set. Like a breakpoint (@pxref{Set Breaks}), a
7698 tracepoint has a number assigned to it by @value{GDBN}. Like with
7699 breakpoints, tracepoint numbers are successive integers starting from
7700 one. Many of the commands associated with tracepoints take the
7701 tracepoint number as their argument, to identify which tracepoint to
7704 For each tracepoint, you can specify, in advance, some arbitrary set
7705 of data that you want the target to collect in the trace buffer when
7706 it hits that tracepoint. The collected data can include registers,
7707 local variables, or global data. Later, you can use @value{GDBN}
7708 commands to examine the values these data had at the time the
7711 This section describes commands to set tracepoints and associated
7712 conditions and actions.
7715 * Create and Delete Tracepoints::
7716 * Enable and Disable Tracepoints::
7717 * Tracepoint Passcounts::
7718 * Tracepoint Actions::
7719 * Listing Tracepoints::
7720 * Starting and Stopping Trace Experiments::
7723 @node Create and Delete Tracepoints
7724 @subsection Create and Delete Tracepoints
7727 @cindex set tracepoint
7730 The @code{trace} command is very similar to the @code{break} command.
7731 Its argument can be a source line, a function name, or an address in
7732 the target program. @xref{Set Breaks}. The @code{trace} command
7733 defines a tracepoint, which is a point in the target program where the
7734 debugger will briefly stop, collect some data, and then allow the
7735 program to continue. Setting a tracepoint or changing its commands
7736 doesn't take effect until the next @code{tstart} command; thus, you
7737 cannot change the tracepoint attributes once a trace experiment is
7740 Here are some examples of using the @code{trace} command:
7743 (@value{GDBP}) @b{trace foo.c:121} // a source file and line number
7745 (@value{GDBP}) @b{trace +2} // 2 lines forward
7747 (@value{GDBP}) @b{trace my_function} // first source line of function
7749 (@value{GDBP}) @b{trace *my_function} // EXACT start address of function
7751 (@value{GDBP}) @b{trace *0x2117c4} // an address
7755 You can abbreviate @code{trace} as @code{tr}.
7758 @cindex last tracepoint number
7759 @cindex recent tracepoint number
7760 @cindex tracepoint number
7761 The convenience variable @code{$tpnum} records the tracepoint number
7762 of the most recently set tracepoint.
7764 @kindex delete tracepoint
7765 @cindex tracepoint deletion
7766 @item delete tracepoint @r{[}@var{num}@r{]}
7767 Permanently delete one or more tracepoints. With no argument, the
7768 default is to delete all tracepoints.
7773 (@value{GDBP}) @b{delete trace 1 2 3} // remove three tracepoints
7775 (@value{GDBP}) @b{delete trace} // remove all tracepoints
7779 You can abbreviate this command as @code{del tr}.
7782 @node Enable and Disable Tracepoints
7783 @subsection Enable and Disable Tracepoints
7786 @kindex disable tracepoint
7787 @item disable tracepoint @r{[}@var{num}@r{]}
7788 Disable tracepoint @var{num}, or all tracepoints if no argument
7789 @var{num} is given. A disabled tracepoint will have no effect during
7790 the next trace experiment, but it is not forgotten. You can re-enable
7791 a disabled tracepoint using the @code{enable tracepoint} command.
7793 @kindex enable tracepoint
7794 @item enable tracepoint @r{[}@var{num}@r{]}
7795 Enable tracepoint @var{num}, or all tracepoints. The enabled
7796 tracepoints will become effective the next time a trace experiment is
7800 @node Tracepoint Passcounts
7801 @subsection Tracepoint Passcounts
7805 @cindex tracepoint pass count
7806 @item passcount @r{[}@var{n} @r{[}@var{num}@r{]]}
7807 Set the @dfn{passcount} of a tracepoint. The passcount is a way to
7808 automatically stop a trace experiment. If a tracepoint's passcount is
7809 @var{n}, then the trace experiment will be automatically stopped on
7810 the @var{n}'th time that tracepoint is hit. If the tracepoint number
7811 @var{num} is not specified, the @code{passcount} command sets the
7812 passcount of the most recently defined tracepoint. If no passcount is
7813 given, the trace experiment will run until stopped explicitly by the
7819 (@value{GDBP}) @b{passcount 5 2} // Stop on the 5th execution of
7820 @exdent @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @code{// tracepoint 2}
7822 (@value{GDBP}) @b{passcount 12} // Stop on the 12th execution of the
7823 @exdent @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @code{// most recently defined tracepoint.}
7824 (@value{GDBP}) @b{trace foo}
7825 (@value{GDBP}) @b{pass 3}
7826 (@value{GDBP}) @b{trace bar}
7827 (@value{GDBP}) @b{pass 2}
7828 (@value{GDBP}) @b{trace baz}
7829 (@value{GDBP}) @b{pass 1} // Stop tracing when foo has been
7830 @exdent @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @code{// executed 3 times OR when bar has}
7831 @exdent @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @code{// been executed 2 times}
7832 @exdent @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @code{// OR when baz has been executed 1 time.}
7836 @node Tracepoint Actions
7837 @subsection Tracepoint Action Lists
7841 @cindex tracepoint actions
7842 @item actions @r{[}@var{num}@r{]}
7843 This command will prompt for a list of actions to be taken when the
7844 tracepoint is hit. If the tracepoint number @var{num} is not
7845 specified, this command sets the actions for the one that was most
7846 recently defined (so that you can define a tracepoint and then say
7847 @code{actions} without bothering about its number). You specify the
7848 actions themselves on the following lines, one action at a time, and
7849 terminate the actions list with a line containing just @code{end}. So
7850 far, the only defined actions are @code{collect} and
7851 @code{while-stepping}.
7853 @cindex remove actions from a tracepoint
7854 To remove all actions from a tracepoint, type @samp{actions @var{num}}
7855 and follow it immediately with @samp{end}.
7858 (@value{GDBP}) @b{collect @var{data}} // collect some data
7860 (@value{GDBP}) @b{while-stepping 5} // single-step 5 times, collect data
7862 (@value{GDBP}) @b{end} // signals the end of actions.
7865 In the following example, the action list begins with @code{collect}
7866 commands indicating the things to be collected when the tracepoint is
7867 hit. Then, in order to single-step and collect additional data
7868 following the tracepoint, a @code{while-stepping} command is used,
7869 followed by the list of things to be collected while stepping. The
7870 @code{while-stepping} command is terminated by its own separate
7871 @code{end} command. Lastly, the action list is terminated by an
7875 (@value{GDBP}) @b{trace foo}
7876 (@value{GDBP}) @b{actions}
7877 Enter actions for tracepoint 1, one per line:
7886 @kindex collect @r{(tracepoints)}
7887 @item collect @var{expr1}, @var{expr2}, @dots{}
7888 Collect values of the given expressions when the tracepoint is hit.
7889 This command accepts a comma-separated list of any valid expressions.
7890 In addition to global, static, or local variables, the following
7891 special arguments are supported:
7895 collect all registers
7898 collect all function arguments
7901 collect all local variables.
7904 You can give several consecutive @code{collect} commands, each one
7905 with a single argument, or one @code{collect} command with several
7906 arguments separated by commas: the effect is the same.
7908 The command @code{info scope} (@pxref{Symbols, info scope}) is
7909 particularly useful for figuring out what data to collect.
7911 @kindex while-stepping @r{(tracepoints)}
7912 @item while-stepping @var{n}
7913 Perform @var{n} single-step traces after the tracepoint, collecting
7914 new data at each step. The @code{while-stepping} command is
7915 followed by the list of what to collect while stepping (followed by
7916 its own @code{end} command):
7920 > collect $regs, myglobal
7926 You may abbreviate @code{while-stepping} as @code{ws} or
7930 @node Listing Tracepoints
7931 @subsection Listing Tracepoints
7934 @kindex info tracepoints
7936 @cindex information about tracepoints
7937 @item info tracepoints @r{[}@var{num}@r{]}
7938 Display information about the tracepoint @var{num}. If you don't specify
7939 a tracepoint number, displays information about all the tracepoints
7940 defined so far. For each tracepoint, the following information is
7947 whether it is enabled or disabled
7951 its passcount as given by the @code{passcount @var{n}} command
7953 its step count as given by the @code{while-stepping @var{n}} command
7955 where in the source files is the tracepoint set
7957 its action list as given by the @code{actions} command
7961 (@value{GDBP}) @b{info trace}
7962 Num Enb Address PassC StepC What
7963 1 y 0x002117c4 0 0 <gdb_asm>
7964 2 y 0x0020dc64 0 0 in g_test at g_test.c:1375
7965 3 y 0x0020b1f4 0 0 in get_data at ../foo.c:41
7970 This command can be abbreviated @code{info tp}.
7973 @node Starting and Stopping Trace Experiments
7974 @subsection Starting and Stopping Trace Experiments
7978 @cindex start a new trace experiment
7979 @cindex collected data discarded
7981 This command takes no arguments. It starts the trace experiment, and
7982 begins collecting data. This has the side effect of discarding all
7983 the data collected in the trace buffer during the previous trace
7987 @cindex stop a running trace experiment
7989 This command takes no arguments. It ends the trace experiment, and
7990 stops collecting data.
7992 @strong{Note}: a trace experiment and data collection may stop
7993 automatically if any tracepoint's passcount is reached
7994 (@pxref{Tracepoint Passcounts}), or if the trace buffer becomes full.
7997 @cindex status of trace data collection
7998 @cindex trace experiment, status of
8000 This command displays the status of the current trace data
8004 Here is an example of the commands we described so far:
8007 (@value{GDBP}) @b{trace gdb_c_test}
8008 (@value{GDBP}) @b{actions}
8009 Enter actions for tracepoint #1, one per line.
8010 > collect $regs,$locals,$args
8015 (@value{GDBP}) @b{tstart}
8016 [time passes @dots{}]
8017 (@value{GDBP}) @b{tstop}
8021 @node Analyze Collected Data
8022 @section Using the Collected Data
8024 After the tracepoint experiment ends, you use @value{GDBN} commands
8025 for examining the trace data. The basic idea is that each tracepoint
8026 collects a trace @dfn{snapshot} every time it is hit and another
8027 snapshot every time it single-steps. All these snapshots are
8028 consecutively numbered from zero and go into a buffer, and you can
8029 examine them later. The way you examine them is to @dfn{focus} on a
8030 specific trace snapshot. When the remote stub is focused on a trace
8031 snapshot, it will respond to all @value{GDBN} requests for memory and
8032 registers by reading from the buffer which belongs to that snapshot,
8033 rather than from @emph{real} memory or registers of the program being
8034 debugged. This means that @strong{all} @value{GDBN} commands
8035 (@code{print}, @code{info registers}, @code{backtrace}, etc.) will
8036 behave as if we were currently debugging the program state as it was
8037 when the tracepoint occurred. Any requests for data that are not in
8038 the buffer will fail.
8041 * tfind:: How to select a trace snapshot
8042 * tdump:: How to display all data for a snapshot
8043 * save-tracepoints:: How to save tracepoints for a future run
8047 @subsection @code{tfind @var{n}}
8050 @cindex select trace snapshot
8051 @cindex find trace snapshot
8052 The basic command for selecting a trace snapshot from the buffer is
8053 @code{tfind @var{n}}, which finds trace snapshot number @var{n},
8054 counting from zero. If no argument @var{n} is given, the next
8055 snapshot is selected.
8057 Here are the various forms of using the @code{tfind} command.
8061 Find the first snapshot in the buffer. This is a synonym for
8062 @code{tfind 0} (since 0 is the number of the first snapshot).
8065 Stop debugging trace snapshots, resume @emph{live} debugging.
8068 Same as @samp{tfind none}.
8071 No argument means find the next trace snapshot.
8074 Find the previous trace snapshot before the current one. This permits
8075 retracing earlier steps.
8077 @item tfind tracepoint @var{num}
8078 Find the next snapshot associated with tracepoint @var{num}. Search
8079 proceeds forward from the last examined trace snapshot. If no
8080 argument @var{num} is given, it means find the next snapshot collected
8081 for the same tracepoint as the current snapshot.
8083 @item tfind pc @var{addr}
8084 Find the next snapshot associated with the value @var{addr} of the
8085 program counter. Search proceeds forward from the last examined trace
8086 snapshot. If no argument @var{addr} is given, it means find the next
8087 snapshot with the same value of PC as the current snapshot.
8089 @item tfind outside @var{addr1}, @var{addr2}
8090 Find the next snapshot whose PC is outside the given range of
8093 @item tfind range @var{addr1}, @var{addr2}
8094 Find the next snapshot whose PC is between @var{addr1} and
8095 @var{addr2}. @c FIXME: Is the range inclusive or exclusive?
8097 @item tfind line @r{[}@var{file}:@r{]}@var{n}
8098 Find the next snapshot associated with the source line @var{n}. If
8099 the optional argument @var{file} is given, refer to line @var{n} in
8100 that source file. Search proceeds forward from the last examined
8101 trace snapshot. If no argument @var{n} is given, it means find the
8102 next line other than the one currently being examined; thus saying
8103 @code{tfind line} repeatedly can appear to have the same effect as
8104 stepping from line to line in a @emph{live} debugging session.
8107 The default arguments for the @code{tfind} commands are specifically
8108 designed to make it easy to scan through the trace buffer. For
8109 instance, @code{tfind} with no argument selects the next trace
8110 snapshot, and @code{tfind -} with no argument selects the previous
8111 trace snapshot. So, by giving one @code{tfind} command, and then
8112 simply hitting @key{RET} repeatedly you can examine all the trace
8113 snapshots in order. Or, by saying @code{tfind -} and then hitting
8114 @key{RET} repeatedly you can examine the snapshots in reverse order.
8115 The @code{tfind line} command with no argument selects the snapshot
8116 for the next source line executed. The @code{tfind pc} command with
8117 no argument selects the next snapshot with the same program counter
8118 (PC) as the current frame. The @code{tfind tracepoint} command with
8119 no argument selects the next trace snapshot collected by the same
8120 tracepoint as the current one.
8122 In addition to letting you scan through the trace buffer manually,
8123 these commands make it easy to construct @value{GDBN} scripts that
8124 scan through the trace buffer and print out whatever collected data
8125 you are interested in. Thus, if we want to examine the PC, FP, and SP
8126 registers from each trace frame in the buffer, we can say this:
8129 (@value{GDBP}) @b{tfind start}
8130 (@value{GDBP}) @b{while ($trace_frame != -1)}
8131 > printf "Frame %d, PC = %08X, SP = %08X, FP = %08X\n", \
8132 $trace_frame, $pc, $sp, $fp
8136 Frame 0, PC = 0020DC64, SP = 0030BF3C, FP = 0030BF44
8137 Frame 1, PC = 0020DC6C, SP = 0030BF38, FP = 0030BF44
8138 Frame 2, PC = 0020DC70, SP = 0030BF34, FP = 0030BF44
8139 Frame 3, PC = 0020DC74, SP = 0030BF30, FP = 0030BF44
8140 Frame 4, PC = 0020DC78, SP = 0030BF2C, FP = 0030BF44
8141 Frame 5, PC = 0020DC7C, SP = 0030BF28, FP = 0030BF44
8142 Frame 6, PC = 0020DC80, SP = 0030BF24, FP = 0030BF44
8143 Frame 7, PC = 0020DC84, SP = 0030BF20, FP = 0030BF44
8144 Frame 8, PC = 0020DC88, SP = 0030BF1C, FP = 0030BF44
8145 Frame 9, PC = 0020DC8E, SP = 0030BF18, FP = 0030BF44
8146 Frame 10, PC = 00203F6C, SP = 0030BE3C, FP = 0030BF14
8149 Or, if we want to examine the variable @code{X} at each source line in
8153 (@value{GDBP}) @b{tfind start}
8154 (@value{GDBP}) @b{while ($trace_frame != -1)}
8155 > printf "Frame %d, X == %d\n", $trace_frame, X
8165 @subsection @code{tdump}
8167 @cindex dump all data collected at tracepoint
8168 @cindex tracepoint data, display
8170 This command takes no arguments. It prints all the data collected at
8171 the current trace snapshot.
8174 (@value{GDBP}) @b{trace 444}
8175 (@value{GDBP}) @b{actions}
8176 Enter actions for tracepoint #2, one per line:
8177 > collect $regs, $locals, $args, gdb_long_test
8180 (@value{GDBP}) @b{tstart}
8182 (@value{GDBP}) @b{tfind line 444}
8183 #0 gdb_test (p1=0x11, p2=0x22, p3=0x33, p4=0x44, p5=0x55, p6=0x66)
8185 444 printp( "%s: arguments = 0x%X 0x%X 0x%X 0x%X 0x%X 0x%X\n", )
8187 (@value{GDBP}) @b{tdump}
8188 Data collected at tracepoint 2, trace frame 1:
8189 d0 0xc4aa0085 -995491707
8193 d4 0x71aea3d 119204413
8198 a1 0x3000668 50333288
8201 a4 0x3000698 50333336
8203 fp 0x30bf3c 0x30bf3c
8204 sp 0x30bf34 0x30bf34
8206 pc 0x20b2c8 0x20b2c8
8210 p = 0x20e5b4 "gdb-test"
8217 gdb_long_test = 17 '\021'
8222 @node save-tracepoints
8223 @subsection @code{save-tracepoints @var{filename}}
8224 @kindex save-tracepoints
8225 @cindex save tracepoints for future sessions
8227 This command saves all current tracepoint definitions together with
8228 their actions and passcounts, into a file @file{@var{filename}}
8229 suitable for use in a later debugging session. To read the saved
8230 tracepoint definitions, use the @code{source} command (@pxref{Command
8233 @node Tracepoint Variables
8234 @section Convenience Variables for Tracepoints
8235 @cindex tracepoint variables
8236 @cindex convenience variables for tracepoints
8239 @vindex $trace_frame
8240 @item (int) $trace_frame
8241 The current trace snapshot (a.k.a.@: @dfn{frame}) number, or -1 if no
8242 snapshot is selected.
8245 @item (int) $tracepoint
8246 The tracepoint for the current trace snapshot.
8249 @item (int) $trace_line
8250 The line number for the current trace snapshot.
8253 @item (char []) $trace_file
8254 The source file for the current trace snapshot.
8257 @item (char []) $trace_func
8258 The name of the function containing @code{$tracepoint}.
8261 Note: @code{$trace_file} is not suitable for use in @code{printf},
8262 use @code{output} instead.
8264 Here's a simple example of using these convenience variables for
8265 stepping through all the trace snapshots and printing some of their
8269 (@value{GDBP}) @b{tfind start}
8271 (@value{GDBP}) @b{while $trace_frame != -1}
8272 > output $trace_file
8273 > printf ", line %d (tracepoint #%d)\n", $trace_line, $tracepoint
8279 @chapter Debugging Programs That Use Overlays
8282 If your program is too large to fit completely in your target system's
8283 memory, you can sometimes use @dfn{overlays} to work around this
8284 problem. @value{GDBN} provides some support for debugging programs that
8288 * How Overlays Work:: A general explanation of overlays.
8289 * Overlay Commands:: Managing overlays in @value{GDBN}.
8290 * Automatic Overlay Debugging:: @value{GDBN} can find out which overlays are
8291 mapped by asking the inferior.
8292 * Overlay Sample Program:: A sample program using overlays.
8295 @node How Overlays Work
8296 @section How Overlays Work
8297 @cindex mapped overlays
8298 @cindex unmapped overlays
8299 @cindex load address, overlay's
8300 @cindex mapped address
8301 @cindex overlay area
8303 Suppose you have a computer whose instruction address space is only 64
8304 kilobytes long, but which has much more memory which can be accessed by
8305 other means: special instructions, segment registers, or memory
8306 management hardware, for example. Suppose further that you want to
8307 adapt a program which is larger than 64 kilobytes to run on this system.
8309 One solution is to identify modules of your program which are relatively
8310 independent, and need not call each other directly; call these modules
8311 @dfn{overlays}. Separate the overlays from the main program, and place
8312 their machine code in the larger memory. Place your main program in
8313 instruction memory, but leave at least enough space there to hold the
8314 largest overlay as well.
8316 Now, to call a function located in an overlay, you must first copy that
8317 overlay's machine code from the large memory into the space set aside
8318 for it in the instruction memory, and then jump to its entry point
8321 @c NB: In the below the mapped area's size is greater or equal to the
8322 @c size of all overlays. This is intentional to remind the developer
8323 @c that overlays don't necessarily need to be the same size.
8327 Data Instruction Larger
8328 Address Space Address Space Address Space
8329 +-----------+ +-----------+ +-----------+
8331 +-----------+ +-----------+ +-----------+<-- overlay 1
8332 | program | | main | .----| overlay 1 | load address
8333 | variables | | program | | +-----------+
8334 | and heap | | | | | |
8335 +-----------+ | | | +-----------+<-- overlay 2
8336 | | +-----------+ | | | load address
8337 +-----------+ | | | .-| overlay 2 |
8339 mapped --->+-----------+ | | +-----------+
8341 | overlay | <-' | | |
8342 | area | <---' +-----------+<-- overlay 3
8343 | | <---. | | load address
8344 +-----------+ `--| overlay 3 |
8351 @anchor{A code overlay}A code overlay
8355 The diagram (@pxref{A code overlay}) shows a system with separate data
8356 and instruction address spaces. To map an overlay, the program copies
8357 its code from the larger address space to the instruction address space.
8358 Since the overlays shown here all use the same mapped address, only one
8359 may be mapped at a time. For a system with a single address space for
8360 data and instructions, the diagram would be similar, except that the
8361 program variables and heap would share an address space with the main
8362 program and the overlay area.
8364 An overlay loaded into instruction memory and ready for use is called a
8365 @dfn{mapped} overlay; its @dfn{mapped address} is its address in the
8366 instruction memory. An overlay not present (or only partially present)
8367 in instruction memory is called @dfn{unmapped}; its @dfn{load address}
8368 is its address in the larger memory. The mapped address is also called
8369 the @dfn{virtual memory address}, or @dfn{VMA}; the load address is also
8370 called the @dfn{load memory address}, or @dfn{LMA}.
8372 Unfortunately, overlays are not a completely transparent way to adapt a
8373 program to limited instruction memory. They introduce a new set of
8374 global constraints you must keep in mind as you design your program:
8379 Before calling or returning to a function in an overlay, your program
8380 must make sure that overlay is actually mapped. Otherwise, the call or
8381 return will transfer control to the right address, but in the wrong
8382 overlay, and your program will probably crash.
8385 If the process of mapping an overlay is expensive on your system, you
8386 will need to choose your overlays carefully to minimize their effect on
8387 your program's performance.
8390 The executable file you load onto your system must contain each
8391 overlay's instructions, appearing at the overlay's load address, not its
8392 mapped address. However, each overlay's instructions must be relocated
8393 and its symbols defined as if the overlay were at its mapped address.
8394 You can use GNU linker scripts to specify different load and relocation
8395 addresses for pieces of your program; see @ref{Overlay Description,,,
8396 ld.info, Using ld: the GNU linker}.
8399 The procedure for loading executable files onto your system must be able
8400 to load their contents into the larger address space as well as the
8401 instruction and data spaces.
8405 The overlay system described above is rather simple, and could be
8406 improved in many ways:
8411 If your system has suitable bank switch registers or memory management
8412 hardware, you could use those facilities to make an overlay's load area
8413 contents simply appear at their mapped address in instruction space.
8414 This would probably be faster than copying the overlay to its mapped
8415 area in the usual way.
8418 If your overlays are small enough, you could set aside more than one
8419 overlay area, and have more than one overlay mapped at a time.
8422 You can use overlays to manage data, as well as instructions. In
8423 general, data overlays are even less transparent to your design than
8424 code overlays: whereas code overlays only require care when you call or
8425 return to functions, data overlays require care every time you access
8426 the data. Also, if you change the contents of a data overlay, you
8427 must copy its contents back out to its load address before you can copy a
8428 different data overlay into the same mapped area.
8433 @node Overlay Commands
8434 @section Overlay Commands
8436 To use @value{GDBN}'s overlay support, each overlay in your program must
8437 correspond to a separate section of the executable file. The section's
8438 virtual memory address and load memory address must be the overlay's
8439 mapped and load addresses. Identifying overlays with sections allows
8440 @value{GDBN} to determine the appropriate address of a function or
8441 variable, depending on whether the overlay is mapped or not.
8443 @value{GDBN}'s overlay commands all start with the word @code{overlay};
8444 you can abbreviate this as @code{ov} or @code{ovly}. The commands are:
8449 Disable @value{GDBN}'s overlay support. When overlay support is
8450 disabled, @value{GDBN} assumes that all functions and variables are
8451 always present at their mapped addresses. By default, @value{GDBN}'s
8452 overlay support is disabled.
8454 @item overlay manual
8455 @cindex manual overlay debugging
8456 Enable @dfn{manual} overlay debugging. In this mode, @value{GDBN}
8457 relies on you to tell it which overlays are mapped, and which are not,
8458 using the @code{overlay map-overlay} and @code{overlay unmap-overlay}
8459 commands described below.
8461 @item overlay map-overlay @var{overlay}
8462 @itemx overlay map @var{overlay}
8463 @cindex map an overlay
8464 Tell @value{GDBN} that @var{overlay} is now mapped; @var{overlay} must
8465 be the name of the object file section containing the overlay. When an
8466 overlay is mapped, @value{GDBN} assumes it can find the overlay's
8467 functions and variables at their mapped addresses. @value{GDBN} assumes
8468 that any other overlays whose mapped ranges overlap that of
8469 @var{overlay} are now unmapped.
8471 @item overlay unmap-overlay @var{overlay}
8472 @itemx overlay unmap @var{overlay}
8473 @cindex unmap an overlay
8474 Tell @value{GDBN} that @var{overlay} is no longer mapped; @var{overlay}
8475 must be the name of the object file section containing the overlay.
8476 When an overlay is unmapped, @value{GDBN} assumes it can find the
8477 overlay's functions and variables at their load addresses.
8480 Enable @dfn{automatic} overlay debugging. In this mode, @value{GDBN}
8481 consults a data structure the overlay manager maintains in the inferior
8482 to see which overlays are mapped. For details, see @ref{Automatic
8485 @item overlay load-target
8487 @cindex reloading the overlay table
8488 Re-read the overlay table from the inferior. Normally, @value{GDBN}
8489 re-reads the table @value{GDBN} automatically each time the inferior
8490 stops, so this command should only be necessary if you have changed the
8491 overlay mapping yourself using @value{GDBN}. This command is only
8492 useful when using automatic overlay debugging.
8494 @item overlay list-overlays
8496 @cindex listing mapped overlays
8497 Display a list of the overlays currently mapped, along with their mapped
8498 addresses, load addresses, and sizes.
8502 Normally, when @value{GDBN} prints a code address, it includes the name
8503 of the function the address falls in:
8506 (@value{GDBP}) print main
8507 $3 = @{int ()@} 0x11a0 <main>
8510 When overlay debugging is enabled, @value{GDBN} recognizes code in
8511 unmapped overlays, and prints the names of unmapped functions with
8512 asterisks around them. For example, if @code{foo} is a function in an
8513 unmapped overlay, @value{GDBN} prints it this way:
8516 (@value{GDBP}) overlay list
8517 No sections are mapped.
8518 (@value{GDBP}) print foo
8519 $5 = @{int (int)@} 0x100000 <*foo*>
8522 When @code{foo}'s overlay is mapped, @value{GDBN} prints the function's
8526 (@value{GDBP}) overlay list
8527 Section .ov.foo.text, loaded at 0x100000 - 0x100034,
8528 mapped at 0x1016 - 0x104a
8529 (@value{GDBP}) print foo
8530 $6 = @{int (int)@} 0x1016 <foo>
8533 When overlay debugging is enabled, @value{GDBN} can find the correct
8534 address for functions and variables in an overlay, whether or not the
8535 overlay is mapped. This allows most @value{GDBN} commands, like
8536 @code{break} and @code{disassemble}, to work normally, even on unmapped
8537 code. However, @value{GDBN}'s breakpoint support has some limitations:
8541 @cindex breakpoints in overlays
8542 @cindex overlays, setting breakpoints in
8543 You can set breakpoints in functions in unmapped overlays, as long as
8544 @value{GDBN} can write to the overlay at its load address.
8546 @value{GDBN} can not set hardware or simulator-based breakpoints in
8547 unmapped overlays. However, if you set a breakpoint at the end of your
8548 overlay manager (and tell @value{GDBN} which overlays are now mapped, if
8549 you are using manual overlay management), @value{GDBN} will re-set its
8550 breakpoints properly.
8554 @node Automatic Overlay Debugging
8555 @section Automatic Overlay Debugging
8556 @cindex automatic overlay debugging
8558 @value{GDBN} can automatically track which overlays are mapped and which
8559 are not, given some simple co-operation from the overlay manager in the
8560 inferior. If you enable automatic overlay debugging with the
8561 @code{overlay auto} command (@pxref{Overlay Commands}), @value{GDBN}
8562 looks in the inferior's memory for certain variables describing the
8563 current state of the overlays.
8565 Here are the variables your overlay manager must define to support
8566 @value{GDBN}'s automatic overlay debugging:
8570 @item @code{_ovly_table}:
8571 This variable must be an array of the following structures:
8576 /* The overlay's mapped address. */
8579 /* The size of the overlay, in bytes. */
8582 /* The overlay's load address. */
8585 /* Non-zero if the overlay is currently mapped;
8587 unsigned long mapped;
8591 @item @code{_novlys}:
8592 This variable must be a four-byte signed integer, holding the total
8593 number of elements in @code{_ovly_table}.
8597 To decide whether a particular overlay is mapped or not, @value{GDBN}
8598 looks for an entry in @w{@code{_ovly_table}} whose @code{vma} and
8599 @code{lma} members equal the VMA and LMA of the overlay's section in the
8600 executable file. When @value{GDBN} finds a matching entry, it consults
8601 the entry's @code{mapped} member to determine whether the overlay is
8604 In addition, your overlay manager may define a function called
8605 @code{_ovly_debug_event}. If this function is defined, @value{GDBN}
8606 will silently set a breakpoint there. If the overlay manager then
8607 calls this function whenever it has changed the overlay table, this
8608 will enable @value{GDBN} to accurately keep track of which overlays
8609 are in program memory, and update any breakpoints that may be set
8610 in overlays. This will allow breakpoints to work even if the
8611 overlays are kept in ROM or other non-writable memory while they
8612 are not being executed.
8614 @node Overlay Sample Program
8615 @section Overlay Sample Program
8616 @cindex overlay example program
8618 When linking a program which uses overlays, you must place the overlays
8619 at their load addresses, while relocating them to run at their mapped
8620 addresses. To do this, you must write a linker script (@pxref{Overlay
8621 Description,,, ld.info, Using ld: the GNU linker}). Unfortunately,
8622 since linker scripts are specific to a particular host system, target
8623 architecture, and target memory layout, this manual cannot provide
8624 portable sample code demonstrating @value{GDBN}'s overlay support.
8626 However, the @value{GDBN} source distribution does contain an overlaid
8627 program, with linker scripts for a few systems, as part of its test
8628 suite. The program consists of the following files from
8629 @file{gdb/testsuite/gdb.base}:
8633 The main program file.
8635 A simple overlay manager, used by @file{overlays.c}.
8640 Overlay modules, loaded and used by @file{overlays.c}.
8643 Linker scripts for linking the test program on the @code{d10v-elf}
8644 and @code{m32r-elf} targets.
8647 You can build the test program using the @code{d10v-elf} GCC
8648 cross-compiler like this:
8651 $ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c overlays.c
8652 $ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c ovlymgr.c
8653 $ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c foo.c
8654 $ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c bar.c
8655 $ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c baz.c
8656 $ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c grbx.c
8657 $ d10v-elf-gcc -g overlays.o ovlymgr.o foo.o bar.o \
8658 baz.o grbx.o -Wl,-Td10v.ld -o overlays
8661 The build process is identical for any other architecture, except that
8662 you must substitute the appropriate compiler and linker script for the
8663 target system for @code{d10v-elf-gcc} and @code{d10v.ld}.
8667 @chapter Using @value{GDBN} with Different Languages
8670 Although programming languages generally have common aspects, they are
8671 rarely expressed in the same manner. For instance, in ANSI C,
8672 dereferencing a pointer @code{p} is accomplished by @code{*p}, but in
8673 Modula-2, it is accomplished by @code{p^}. Values can also be
8674 represented (and displayed) differently. Hex numbers in C appear as
8675 @samp{0x1ae}, while in Modula-2 they appear as @samp{1AEH}.
8677 @cindex working language
8678 Language-specific information is built into @value{GDBN} for some languages,
8679 allowing you to express operations like the above in your program's
8680 native language, and allowing @value{GDBN} to output values in a manner
8681 consistent with the syntax of your program's native language. The
8682 language you use to build expressions is called the @dfn{working
8686 * Setting:: Switching between source languages
8687 * Show:: Displaying the language
8688 * Checks:: Type and range checks
8689 * Supported Languages:: Supported languages
8690 * Unsupported Languages:: Unsupported languages
8694 @section Switching Between Source Languages
8696 There are two ways to control the working language---either have @value{GDBN}
8697 set it automatically, or select it manually yourself. You can use the
8698 @code{set language} command for either purpose. On startup, @value{GDBN}
8699 defaults to setting the language automatically. The working language is
8700 used to determine how expressions you type are interpreted, how values
8703 In addition to the working language, every source file that
8704 @value{GDBN} knows about has its own working language. For some object
8705 file formats, the compiler might indicate which language a particular
8706 source file is in. However, most of the time @value{GDBN} infers the
8707 language from the name of the file. The language of a source file
8708 controls whether C@t{++} names are demangled---this way @code{backtrace} can
8709 show each frame appropriately for its own language. There is no way to
8710 set the language of a source file from within @value{GDBN}, but you can
8711 set the language associated with a filename extension. @xref{Show, ,
8712 Displaying the Language}.
8714 This is most commonly a problem when you use a program, such
8715 as @code{cfront} or @code{f2c}, that generates C but is written in
8716 another language. In that case, make the
8717 program use @code{#line} directives in its C output; that way
8718 @value{GDBN} will know the correct language of the source code of the original
8719 program, and will display that source code, not the generated C code.
8722 * Filenames:: Filename extensions and languages.
8723 * Manually:: Setting the working language manually
8724 * Automatically:: Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language
8728 @subsection List of Filename Extensions and Languages
8730 If a source file name ends in one of the following extensions, then
8731 @value{GDBN} infers that its language is the one indicated.
8752 Objective-C source file
8759 Modula-2 source file
8763 Assembler source file. This actually behaves almost like C, but
8764 @value{GDBN} does not skip over function prologues when stepping.
8767 In addition, you may set the language associated with a filename
8768 extension. @xref{Show, , Displaying the Language}.
8771 @subsection Setting the Working Language
8773 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically,
8774 expressions are interpreted the same way in your debugging session and
8777 @kindex set language
8778 If you wish, you may set the language manually. To do this, issue the
8779 command @samp{set language @var{lang}}, where @var{lang} is the name of
8781 @code{c} or @code{modula-2}.
8782 For a list of the supported languages, type @samp{set language}.
8784 Setting the language manually prevents @value{GDBN} from updating the working
8785 language automatically. This can lead to confusion if you try
8786 to debug a program when the working language is not the same as the
8787 source language, when an expression is acceptable to both
8788 languages---but means different things. For instance, if the current
8789 source file were written in C, and @value{GDBN} was parsing Modula-2, a
8797 might not have the effect you intended. In C, this means to add
8798 @code{b} and @code{c} and place the result in @code{a}. The result
8799 printed would be the value of @code{a}. In Modula-2, this means to compare
8800 @code{a} to the result of @code{b+c}, yielding a @code{BOOLEAN} value.
8803 @subsection Having @value{GDBN} Infer the Source Language
8805 To have @value{GDBN} set the working language automatically, use
8806 @samp{set language local} or @samp{set language auto}. @value{GDBN}
8807 then infers the working language. That is, when your program stops in a
8808 frame (usually by encountering a breakpoint), @value{GDBN} sets the
8809 working language to the language recorded for the function in that
8810 frame. If the language for a frame is unknown (that is, if the function
8811 or block corresponding to the frame was defined in a source file that
8812 does not have a recognized extension), the current working language is
8813 not changed, and @value{GDBN} issues a warning.
8815 This may not seem necessary for most programs, which are written
8816 entirely in one source language. However, program modules and libraries
8817 written in one source language can be used by a main program written in
8818 a different source language. Using @samp{set language auto} in this
8819 case frees you from having to set the working language manually.
8822 @section Displaying the Language
8824 The following commands help you find out which language is the
8825 working language, and also what language source files were written in.
8829 @kindex show language
8830 Display the current working language. This is the
8831 language you can use with commands such as @code{print} to
8832 build and compute expressions that may involve variables in your program.
8835 @kindex info frame@r{, show the source language}
8836 Display the source language for this frame. This language becomes the
8837 working language if you use an identifier from this frame.
8838 @xref{Frame Info, ,Information about a Frame}, to identify the other
8839 information listed here.
8842 @kindex info source@r{, show the source language}
8843 Display the source language of this source file.
8844 @xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}, to identify the other
8845 information listed here.
8848 In unusual circumstances, you may have source files with extensions
8849 not in the standard list. You can then set the extension associated
8850 with a language explicitly:
8853 @item set extension-language @var{ext} @var{language}
8854 @kindex set extension-language
8855 Tell @value{GDBN} that source files with extension @var{ext} are to be
8856 assumed as written in the source language @var{language}.
8858 @item info extensions
8859 @kindex info extensions
8860 List all the filename extensions and the associated languages.
8864 @section Type and Range Checking
8867 @emph{Warning:} In this release, the @value{GDBN} commands for type and range
8868 checking are included, but they do not yet have any effect. This
8869 section documents the intended facilities.
8871 @c FIXME remove warning when type/range code added
8873 Some languages are designed to guard you against making seemingly common
8874 errors through a series of compile- and run-time checks. These include
8875 checking the type of arguments to functions and operators, and making
8876 sure mathematical overflows are caught at run time. Checks such as
8877 these help to ensure a program's correctness once it has been compiled
8878 by eliminating type mismatches, and providing active checks for range
8879 errors when your program is running.
8881 @value{GDBN} can check for conditions like the above if you wish.
8882 Although @value{GDBN} does not check the statements in your program,
8883 it can check expressions entered directly into @value{GDBN} for
8884 evaluation via the @code{print} command, for example. As with the
8885 working language, @value{GDBN} can also decide whether or not to check
8886 automatically based on your program's source language.
8887 @xref{Supported Languages, ,Supported Languages}, for the default
8888 settings of supported languages.
8891 * Type Checking:: An overview of type checking
8892 * Range Checking:: An overview of range checking
8895 @cindex type checking
8896 @cindex checks, type
8898 @subsection An Overview of Type Checking
8900 Some languages, such as Modula-2, are strongly typed, meaning that the
8901 arguments to operators and functions have to be of the correct type,
8902 otherwise an error occurs. These checks prevent type mismatch
8903 errors from ever causing any run-time problems. For example,
8911 The second example fails because the @code{CARDINAL} 1 is not
8912 type-compatible with the @code{REAL} 2.3.
8914 For the expressions you use in @value{GDBN} commands, you can tell the
8915 @value{GDBN} type checker to skip checking;
8916 to treat any mismatches as errors and abandon the expression;
8917 or to only issue warnings when type mismatches occur,
8918 but evaluate the expression anyway. When you choose the last of
8919 these, @value{GDBN} evaluates expressions like the second example above, but
8920 also issues a warning.
8922 Even if you turn type checking off, there may be other reasons
8923 related to type that prevent @value{GDBN} from evaluating an expression.
8924 For instance, @value{GDBN} does not know how to add an @code{int} and
8925 a @code{struct foo}. These particular type errors have nothing to do
8926 with the language in use, and usually arise from expressions, such as
8927 the one described above, which make little sense to evaluate anyway.
8929 Each language defines to what degree it is strict about type. For
8930 instance, both Modula-2 and C require the arguments to arithmetical
8931 operators to be numbers. In C, enumerated types and pointers can be
8932 represented as numbers, so that they are valid arguments to mathematical
8933 operators. @xref{Supported Languages, ,Supported Languages}, for further
8934 details on specific languages.
8936 @value{GDBN} provides some additional commands for controlling the type checker:
8938 @kindex set check type
8939 @kindex show check type
8941 @item set check type auto
8942 Set type checking on or off based on the current working language.
8943 @xref{Supported Languages, ,Supported Languages}, for the default settings for
8946 @item set check type on
8947 @itemx set check type off
8948 Set type checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
8949 current working language. Issue a warning if the setting does not
8950 match the language default. If any type mismatches occur in
8951 evaluating an expression while type checking is on, @value{GDBN} prints a
8952 message and aborts evaluation of the expression.
8954 @item set check type warn
8955 Cause the type checker to issue warnings, but to always attempt to
8956 evaluate the expression. Evaluating the expression may still
8957 be impossible for other reasons. For example, @value{GDBN} cannot add
8958 numbers and structures.
8961 Show the current setting of the type checker, and whether or not @value{GDBN}
8962 is setting it automatically.
8965 @cindex range checking
8966 @cindex checks, range
8967 @node Range Checking
8968 @subsection An Overview of Range Checking
8970 In some languages (such as Modula-2), it is an error to exceed the
8971 bounds of a type; this is enforced with run-time checks. Such range
8972 checking is meant to ensure program correctness by making sure
8973 computations do not overflow, or indices on an array element access do
8974 not exceed the bounds of the array.
8976 For expressions you use in @value{GDBN} commands, you can tell
8977 @value{GDBN} to treat range errors in one of three ways: ignore them,
8978 always treat them as errors and abandon the expression, or issue
8979 warnings but evaluate the expression anyway.
8981 A range error can result from numerical overflow, from exceeding an
8982 array index bound, or when you type a constant that is not a member
8983 of any type. Some languages, however, do not treat overflows as an
8984 error. In many implementations of C, mathematical overflow causes the
8985 result to ``wrap around'' to lower values---for example, if @var{m} is
8986 the largest integer value, and @var{s} is the smallest, then
8989 @var{m} + 1 @result{} @var{s}
8992 This, too, is specific to individual languages, and in some cases
8993 specific to individual compilers or machines. @xref{Supported Languages, ,
8994 Supported Languages}, for further details on specific languages.
8996 @value{GDBN} provides some additional commands for controlling the range checker:
8998 @kindex set check range
8999 @kindex show check range
9001 @item set check range auto
9002 Set range checking on or off based on the current working language.
9003 @xref{Supported Languages, ,Supported Languages}, for the default settings for
9006 @item set check range on
9007 @itemx set check range off
9008 Set range checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
9009 current working language. A warning is issued if the setting does not
9010 match the language default. If a range error occurs and range checking is on,
9011 then a message is printed and evaluation of the expression is aborted.
9013 @item set check range warn
9014 Output messages when the @value{GDBN} range checker detects a range error,
9015 but attempt to evaluate the expression anyway. Evaluating the
9016 expression may still be impossible for other reasons, such as accessing
9017 memory that the process does not own (a typical example from many Unix
9021 Show the current setting of the range checker, and whether or not it is
9022 being set automatically by @value{GDBN}.
9025 @node Supported Languages
9026 @section Supported Languages
9028 @value{GDBN} supports C, C@t{++}, Objective-C, Fortran, Java, Pascal,
9029 assembly, Modula-2, and Ada.
9030 @c This is false ...
9031 Some @value{GDBN} features may be used in expressions regardless of the
9032 language you use: the @value{GDBN} @code{@@} and @code{::} operators,
9033 and the @samp{@{type@}addr} construct (@pxref{Expressions,
9034 ,Expressions}) can be used with the constructs of any supported
9037 The following sections detail to what degree each source language is
9038 supported by @value{GDBN}. These sections are not meant to be language
9039 tutorials or references, but serve only as a reference guide to what the
9040 @value{GDBN} expression parser accepts, and what input and output
9041 formats should look like for different languages. There are many good
9042 books written on each of these languages; please look to these for a
9043 language reference or tutorial.
9047 * Objective-C:: Objective-C
9050 * Modula-2:: Modula-2
9055 @subsection C and C@t{++}
9057 @cindex C and C@t{++}
9058 @cindex expressions in C or C@t{++}
9060 Since C and C@t{++} are so closely related, many features of @value{GDBN} apply
9061 to both languages. Whenever this is the case, we discuss those languages
9065 @cindex @code{g++}, @sc{gnu} C@t{++} compiler
9066 @cindex @sc{gnu} C@t{++}
9067 The C@t{++} debugging facilities are jointly implemented by the C@t{++}
9068 compiler and @value{GDBN}. Therefore, to debug your C@t{++} code
9069 effectively, you must compile your C@t{++} programs with a supported
9070 C@t{++} compiler, such as @sc{gnu} @code{g++}, or the HP ANSI C@t{++}
9071 compiler (@code{aCC}).
9073 For best results when using @sc{gnu} C@t{++}, use the DWARF 2 debugging
9074 format; if it doesn't work on your system, try the stabs+ debugging
9075 format. You can select those formats explicitly with the @code{g++}
9076 command-line options @option{-gdwarf-2} and @option{-gstabs+}.
9077 @xref{Debugging Options,,Options for Debugging Your Program or GCC,
9078 gcc.info, Using the @sc{gnu} Compiler Collection (GCC)}.
9081 * C Operators:: C and C@t{++} operators
9082 * C Constants:: C and C@t{++} constants
9083 * C Plus Plus Expressions:: C@t{++} expressions
9084 * C Defaults:: Default settings for C and C@t{++}
9085 * C Checks:: C and C@t{++} type and range checks
9086 * Debugging C:: @value{GDBN} and C
9087 * Debugging C Plus Plus:: @value{GDBN} features for C@t{++}
9091 @subsubsection C and C@t{++} Operators
9093 @cindex C and C@t{++} operators
9095 Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
9096 @code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are
9097 often defined on groups of types.
9099 For the purposes of C and C@t{++}, the following definitions hold:
9104 @emph{Integral types} include @code{int} with any of its storage-class
9105 specifiers; @code{char}; @code{enum}; and, for C@t{++}, @code{bool}.
9108 @emph{Floating-point types} include @code{float}, @code{double}, and
9109 @code{long double} (if supported by the target platform).
9112 @emph{Pointer types} include all types defined as @code{(@var{type} *)}.
9115 @emph{Scalar types} include all of the above.
9120 The following operators are supported. They are listed here
9121 in order of increasing precedence:
9125 The comma or sequencing operator. Expressions in a comma-separated list
9126 are evaluated from left to right, with the result of the entire
9127 expression being the last expression evaluated.
9130 Assignment. The value of an assignment expression is the value
9131 assigned. Defined on scalar types.
9134 Used in an expression of the form @w{@code{@var{a} @var{op}= @var{b}}},
9135 and translated to @w{@code{@var{a} = @var{a op b}}}.
9136 @w{@code{@var{op}=}} and @code{=} have the same precedence.
9137 @var{op} is any one of the operators @code{|}, @code{^}, @code{&},
9138 @code{<<}, @code{>>}, @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{%}.
9141 The ternary operator. @code{@var{a} ? @var{b} : @var{c}} can be thought
9142 of as: if @var{a} then @var{b} else @var{c}. @var{a} should be of an
9146 Logical @sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
9149 Logical @sc{and}. Defined on integral types.
9152 Bitwise @sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
9155 Bitwise exclusive-@sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
9158 Bitwise @sc{and}. Defined on integral types.
9161 Equality and inequality. Defined on scalar types. The value of these
9162 expressions is 0 for false and non-zero for true.
9164 @item <@r{, }>@r{, }<=@r{, }>=
9165 Less than, greater than, less than or equal, greater than or equal.
9166 Defined on scalar types. The value of these expressions is 0 for false
9167 and non-zero for true.
9170 left shift, and right shift. Defined on integral types.
9173 The @value{GDBN} ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
9176 Addition and subtraction. Defined on integral types, floating-point types and
9179 @item *@r{, }/@r{, }%
9180 Multiplication, division, and modulus. Multiplication and division are
9181 defined on integral and floating-point types. Modulus is defined on
9185 Increment and decrement. When appearing before a variable, the
9186 operation is performed before the variable is used in an expression;
9187 when appearing after it, the variable's value is used before the
9188 operation takes place.
9191 Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types. Same precedence as
9195 Address operator. Defined on variables. Same precedence as @code{++}.
9197 For debugging C@t{++}, @value{GDBN} implements a use of @samp{&} beyond what is
9198 allowed in the C@t{++} language itself: you can use @samp{&(&@var{ref})}
9199 (or, if you prefer, simply @samp{&&@var{ref}}) to examine the address
9200 where a C@t{++} reference variable (declared with @samp{&@var{ref}}) is
9204 Negative. Defined on integral and floating-point types. Same
9205 precedence as @code{++}.
9208 Logical negation. Defined on integral types. Same precedence as
9212 Bitwise complement operator. Defined on integral types. Same precedence as
9217 Structure member, and pointer-to-structure member. For convenience,
9218 @value{GDBN} regards the two as equivalent, choosing whether to dereference a
9219 pointer based on the stored type information.
9220 Defined on @code{struct} and @code{union} data.
9223 Dereferences of pointers to members.
9226 Array indexing. @code{@var{a}[@var{i}]} is defined as
9227 @code{*(@var{a}+@var{i})}. Same precedence as @code{->}.
9230 Function parameter list. Same precedence as @code{->}.
9233 C@t{++} scope resolution operator. Defined on @code{struct}, @code{union},
9234 and @code{class} types.
9237 Doubled colons also represent the @value{GDBN} scope operator
9238 (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}). Same precedence as @code{::},
9242 If an operator is redefined in the user code, @value{GDBN} usually
9243 attempts to invoke the redefined version instead of using the operator's
9247 @subsubsection C and C@t{++} Constants
9249 @cindex C and C@t{++} constants
9251 @value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of C and C@t{++} in the
9256 Integer constants are a sequence of digits. Octal constants are
9257 specified by a leading @samp{0} (i.e.@: zero), and hexadecimal constants
9258 by a leading @samp{0x} or @samp{0X}. Constants may also end with a letter
9259 @samp{l}, specifying that the constant should be treated as a
9263 Floating point constants are a sequence of digits, followed by a decimal
9264 point, followed by a sequence of digits, and optionally followed by an
9265 exponent. An exponent is of the form:
9266 @samp{@w{e@r{[[}+@r{]|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}}, where @var{nnn} is another
9267 sequence of digits. The @samp{+} is optional for positive exponents.
9268 A floating-point constant may also end with a letter @samp{f} or
9269 @samp{F}, specifying that the constant should be treated as being of
9270 the @code{float} (as opposed to the default @code{double}) type; or with
9271 a letter @samp{l} or @samp{L}, which specifies a @code{long double}
9275 Enumerated constants consist of enumerated identifiers, or their
9276 integral equivalents.
9279 Character constants are a single character surrounded by single quotes
9280 (@code{'}), or a number---the ordinal value of the corresponding character
9281 (usually its @sc{ascii} value). Within quotes, the single character may
9282 be represented by a letter or by @dfn{escape sequences}, which are of
9283 the form @samp{\@var{nnn}}, where @var{nnn} is the octal representation
9284 of the character's ordinal value; or of the form @samp{\@var{x}}, where
9285 @samp{@var{x}} is a predefined special character---for example,
9286 @samp{\n} for newline.
9289 String constants are a sequence of character constants surrounded by
9290 double quotes (@code{"}). Any valid character constant (as described
9291 above) may appear. Double quotes within the string must be preceded by
9292 a backslash, so for instance @samp{"a\"b'c"} is a string of five
9296 Pointer constants are an integral value. You can also write pointers
9297 to constants using the C operator @samp{&}.
9300 Array constants are comma-separated lists surrounded by braces @samp{@{}
9301 and @samp{@}}; for example, @samp{@{1,2,3@}} is a three-element array of
9302 integers, @samp{@{@{1,2@}, @{3,4@}, @{5,6@}@}} is a three-by-two array,
9303 and @samp{@{&"hi", &"there", &"fred"@}} is a three-element array of pointers.
9306 @node C Plus Plus Expressions
9307 @subsubsection C@t{++} Expressions
9309 @cindex expressions in C@t{++}
9310 @value{GDBN} expression handling can interpret most C@t{++} expressions.
9312 @cindex debugging C@t{++} programs
9313 @cindex C@t{++} compilers
9314 @cindex debug formats and C@t{++}
9315 @cindex @value{NGCC} and C@t{++}
9317 @emph{Warning:} @value{GDBN} can only debug C@t{++} code if you use the
9318 proper compiler and the proper debug format. Currently, @value{GDBN}
9319 works best when debugging C@t{++} code that is compiled with
9320 @value{NGCC} 2.95.3 or with @value{NGCC} 3.1 or newer, using the options
9321 @option{-gdwarf-2} or @option{-gstabs+}. DWARF 2 is preferred over
9322 stabs+. Most configurations of @value{NGCC} emit either DWARF 2 or
9323 stabs+ as their default debug format, so you usually don't need to
9324 specify a debug format explicitly. Other compilers and/or debug formats
9325 are likely to work badly or not at all when using @value{GDBN} to debug
9331 @cindex member functions
9333 Member function calls are allowed; you can use expressions like
9336 count = aml->GetOriginal(x, y)
9339 @vindex this@r{, inside C@t{++} member functions}
9340 @cindex namespace in C@t{++}
9342 While a member function is active (in the selected stack frame), your
9343 expressions have the same namespace available as the member function;
9344 that is, @value{GDBN} allows implicit references to the class instance
9345 pointer @code{this} following the same rules as C@t{++}.
9347 @cindex call overloaded functions
9348 @cindex overloaded functions, calling
9349 @cindex type conversions in C@t{++}
9351 You can call overloaded functions; @value{GDBN} resolves the function
9352 call to the right definition, with some restrictions. @value{GDBN} does not
9353 perform overload resolution involving user-defined type conversions,
9354 calls to constructors, or instantiations of templates that do not exist
9355 in the program. It also cannot handle ellipsis argument lists or
9358 It does perform integral conversions and promotions, floating-point
9359 promotions, arithmetic conversions, pointer conversions, conversions of
9360 class objects to base classes, and standard conversions such as those of
9361 functions or arrays to pointers; it requires an exact match on the
9362 number of function arguments.
9364 Overload resolution is always performed, unless you have specified
9365 @code{set overload-resolution off}. @xref{Debugging C Plus Plus,
9366 ,@value{GDBN} Features for C@t{++}}.
9368 You must specify @code{set overload-resolution off} in order to use an
9369 explicit function signature to call an overloaded function, as in
9371 p 'foo(char,int)'('x', 13)
9374 The @value{GDBN} command-completion facility can simplify this;
9375 see @ref{Completion, ,Command Completion}.
9377 @cindex reference declarations
9379 @value{GDBN} understands variables declared as C@t{++} references; you can use
9380 them in expressions just as you do in C@t{++} source---they are automatically
9383 In the parameter list shown when @value{GDBN} displays a frame, the values of
9384 reference variables are not displayed (unlike other variables); this
9385 avoids clutter, since references are often used for large structures.
9386 The @emph{address} of a reference variable is always shown, unless
9387 you have specified @samp{set print address off}.
9390 @value{GDBN} supports the C@t{++} name resolution operator @code{::}---your
9391 expressions can use it just as expressions in your program do. Since
9392 one scope may be defined in another, you can use @code{::} repeatedly if
9393 necessary, for example in an expression like
9394 @samp{@var{scope1}::@var{scope2}::@var{name}}. @value{GDBN} also allows
9395 resolving name scope by reference to source files, in both C and C@t{++}
9396 debugging (@pxref{Variables, ,Program Variables}).
9399 In addition, when used with HP's C@t{++} compiler, @value{GDBN} supports
9400 calling virtual functions correctly, printing out virtual bases of
9401 objects, calling functions in a base subobject, casting objects, and
9402 invoking user-defined operators.
9405 @subsubsection C and C@t{++} Defaults
9407 @cindex C and C@t{++} defaults
9409 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set type and range checking automatically, they
9410 both default to @code{off} whenever the working language changes to
9411 C or C@t{++}. This happens regardless of whether you or @value{GDBN}
9412 selects the working language.
9414 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, it
9415 recognizes source files whose names end with @file{.c}, @file{.C}, or
9416 @file{.cc}, etc, and when @value{GDBN} enters code compiled from one of
9417 these files, it sets the working language to C or C@t{++}.
9418 @xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} Infer the Source Language},
9419 for further details.
9421 @c Type checking is (a) primarily motivated by Modula-2, and (b)
9422 @c unimplemented. If (b) changes, it might make sense to let this node
9423 @c appear even if Mod-2 does not, but meanwhile ignore it. roland 16jul93.
9426 @subsubsection C and C@t{++} Type and Range Checks
9428 @cindex C and C@t{++} checks
9430 By default, when @value{GDBN} parses C or C@t{++} expressions, type checking
9431 is not used. However, if you turn type checking on, @value{GDBN}
9432 considers two variables type equivalent if:
9436 The two variables are structured and have the same structure, union, or
9440 The two variables have the same type name, or types that have been
9441 declared equivalent through @code{typedef}.
9444 @c leaving this out because neither J Gilmore nor R Pesch understand it.
9447 The two @code{struct}, @code{union}, or @code{enum} variables are
9448 declared in the same declaration. (Note: this may not be true for all C
9453 Range checking, if turned on, is done on mathematical operations. Array
9454 indices are not checked, since they are often used to index a pointer
9455 that is not itself an array.
9458 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} and C
9460 The @code{set print union} and @code{show print union} commands apply to
9461 the @code{union} type. When set to @samp{on}, any @code{union} that is
9462 inside a @code{struct} or @code{class} is also printed. Otherwise, it
9463 appears as @samp{@{...@}}.
9465 The @code{@@} operator aids in the debugging of dynamic arrays, formed
9466 with pointers and a memory allocation function. @xref{Expressions,
9469 @node Debugging C Plus Plus
9470 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} Features for C@t{++}
9472 @cindex commands for C@t{++}
9474 Some @value{GDBN} commands are particularly useful with C@t{++}, and some are
9475 designed specifically for use with C@t{++}. Here is a summary:
9478 @cindex break in overloaded functions
9479 @item @r{breakpoint menus}
9480 When you want a breakpoint in a function whose name is overloaded,
9481 @value{GDBN} breakpoint menus help you specify which function definition
9482 you want. @xref{Breakpoint Menus,,Breakpoint Menus}.
9484 @cindex overloading in C@t{++}
9485 @item rbreak @var{regex}
9486 Setting breakpoints using regular expressions is helpful for setting
9487 breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any special
9489 @xref{Set Breaks, ,Setting Breakpoints}.
9491 @cindex C@t{++} exception handling
9494 Debug C@t{++} exception handling using these commands. @xref{Set
9495 Catchpoints, , Setting Catchpoints}.
9498 @item ptype @var{typename}
9499 Print inheritance relationships as well as other information for type
9501 @xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}.
9503 @cindex C@t{++} symbol display
9504 @item set print demangle
9505 @itemx show print demangle
9506 @itemx set print asm-demangle
9507 @itemx show print asm-demangle
9508 Control whether C@t{++} symbols display in their source form, both when
9509 displaying code as C@t{++} source and when displaying disassemblies.
9510 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print Settings}.
9512 @item set print object
9513 @itemx show print object
9514 Choose whether to print derived (actual) or declared types of objects.
9515 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print Settings}.
9517 @item set print vtbl
9518 @itemx show print vtbl
9519 Control the format for printing virtual function tables.
9520 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print Settings}.
9521 (The @code{vtbl} commands do not work on programs compiled with the HP
9522 ANSI C@t{++} compiler (@code{aCC}).)
9524 @kindex set overload-resolution
9525 @cindex overloaded functions, overload resolution
9526 @item set overload-resolution on
9527 Enable overload resolution for C@t{++} expression evaluation. The default
9528 is on. For overloaded functions, @value{GDBN} evaluates the arguments
9529 and searches for a function whose signature matches the argument types,
9530 using the standard C@t{++} conversion rules (see @ref{C Plus Plus
9531 Expressions, ,C@t{++} Expressions}, for details).
9532 If it cannot find a match, it emits a message.
9534 @item set overload-resolution off
9535 Disable overload resolution for C@t{++} expression evaluation. For
9536 overloaded functions that are not class member functions, @value{GDBN}
9537 chooses the first function of the specified name that it finds in the
9538 symbol table, whether or not its arguments are of the correct type. For
9539 overloaded functions that are class member functions, @value{GDBN}
9540 searches for a function whose signature @emph{exactly} matches the
9543 @kindex show overload-resolution
9544 @item show overload-resolution
9545 Show the current setting of overload resolution.
9547 @item @r{Overloaded symbol names}
9548 You can specify a particular definition of an overloaded symbol, using
9549 the same notation that is used to declare such symbols in C@t{++}: type
9550 @code{@var{symbol}(@var{types})} rather than just @var{symbol}. You can
9551 also use the @value{GDBN} command-line word completion facilities to list the
9552 available choices, or to finish the type list for you.
9553 @xref{Completion,, Command Completion}, for details on how to do this.
9557 @subsection Objective-C
9560 This section provides information about some commands and command
9561 options that are useful for debugging Objective-C code. See also
9562 @ref{Symbols, info classes}, and @ref{Symbols, info selectors}, for a
9563 few more commands specific to Objective-C support.
9566 * Method Names in Commands::
9567 * The Print Command with Objective-C::
9570 @node Method Names in Commands
9571 @subsubsection Method Names in Commands
9573 The following commands have been extended to accept Objective-C method
9574 names as line specifications:
9576 @kindex clear@r{, and Objective-C}
9577 @kindex break@r{, and Objective-C}
9578 @kindex info line@r{, and Objective-C}
9579 @kindex jump@r{, and Objective-C}
9580 @kindex list@r{, and Objective-C}
9584 @item @code{info line}
9589 A fully qualified Objective-C method name is specified as
9592 -[@var{Class} @var{methodName}]
9595 where the minus sign is used to indicate an instance method and a
9596 plus sign (not shown) is used to indicate a class method. The class
9597 name @var{Class} and method name @var{methodName} are enclosed in
9598 brackets, similar to the way messages are specified in Objective-C
9599 source code. For example, to set a breakpoint at the @code{create}
9600 instance method of class @code{Fruit} in the program currently being
9604 break -[Fruit create]
9607 To list ten program lines around the @code{initialize} class method,
9611 list +[NSText initialize]
9614 In the current version of @value{GDBN}, the plus or minus sign is
9615 required. In future versions of @value{GDBN}, the plus or minus
9616 sign will be optional, but you can use it to narrow the search. It
9617 is also possible to specify just a method name:
9623 You must specify the complete method name, including any colons. If
9624 your program's source files contain more than one @code{create} method,
9625 you'll be presented with a numbered list of classes that implement that
9626 method. Indicate your choice by number, or type @samp{0} to exit if
9629 As another example, to clear a breakpoint established at the
9630 @code{makeKeyAndOrderFront:} method of the @code{NSWindow} class, enter:
9633 clear -[NSWindow makeKeyAndOrderFront:]
9636 @node The Print Command with Objective-C
9637 @subsubsection The Print Command With Objective-C
9638 @cindex Objective-C, print objects
9639 @kindex print-object
9640 @kindex po @r{(@code{print-object})}
9642 The print command has also been extended to accept methods. For example:
9645 print -[@var{object} hash]
9648 @cindex print an Objective-C object description
9649 @cindex @code{_NSPrintForDebugger}, and printing Objective-C objects
9651 will tell @value{GDBN} to send the @code{hash} message to @var{object}
9652 and print the result. Also, an additional command has been added,
9653 @code{print-object} or @code{po} for short, which is meant to print
9654 the description of an object. However, this command may only work
9655 with certain Objective-C libraries that have a particular hook
9656 function, @code{_NSPrintForDebugger}, defined.
9660 @cindex Fortran-specific support in @value{GDBN}
9662 @value{GDBN} can be used to debug programs written in Fortran, but it
9663 currently supports only the features of Fortran 77 language.
9665 @cindex trailing underscore, in Fortran symbols
9666 Some Fortran compilers (@sc{gnu} Fortran 77 and Fortran 95 compilers
9667 among them) append an underscore to the names of variables and
9668 functions. When you debug programs compiled by those compilers, you
9669 will need to refer to variables and functions with a trailing
9673 * Fortran Operators:: Fortran operators and expressions
9674 * Fortran Defaults:: Default settings for Fortran
9675 * Special Fortran Commands:: Special @value{GDBN} commands for Fortran
9678 @node Fortran Operators
9679 @subsubsection Fortran Operators and Expressions
9681 @cindex Fortran operators and expressions
9683 Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
9684 @code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on characters or other non-
9685 arithmetic types. Operators are often defined on groups of types.
9689 The exponentiation operator. It raises the first operand to the power
9693 The range operator. Normally used in the form of array(low:high) to
9694 represent a section of array.
9697 @node Fortran Defaults
9698 @subsubsection Fortran Defaults
9700 @cindex Fortran Defaults
9702 Fortran symbols are usually case-insensitive, so @value{GDBN} by
9703 default uses case-insensitive matches for Fortran symbols. You can
9704 change that with the @samp{set case-insensitive} command, see
9705 @ref{Symbols}, for the details.
9707 @node Special Fortran Commands
9708 @subsubsection Special Fortran Commands
9710 @cindex Special Fortran commands
9712 @value{GDBN} has some commands to support Fortran-specific features,
9713 such as displaying common blocks.
9716 @cindex @code{COMMON} blocks, Fortran
9718 @item info common @r{[}@var{common-name}@r{]}
9719 This command prints the values contained in the Fortran @code{COMMON}
9720 block whose name is @var{common-name}. With no argument, the names of
9721 all @code{COMMON} blocks visible at the current program location are
9728 @cindex Pascal support in @value{GDBN}, limitations
9729 Debugging Pascal programs which use sets, subranges, file variables, or
9730 nested functions does not currently work. @value{GDBN} does not support
9731 entering expressions, printing values, or similar features using Pascal
9734 The Pascal-specific command @code{set print pascal_static-members}
9735 controls whether static members of Pascal objects are displayed.
9736 @xref{Print Settings, pascal_static-members}.
9739 @subsection Modula-2
9741 @cindex Modula-2, @value{GDBN} support
9743 The extensions made to @value{GDBN} to support Modula-2 only support
9744 output from the @sc{gnu} Modula-2 compiler (which is currently being
9745 developed). Other Modula-2 compilers are not currently supported, and
9746 attempting to debug executables produced by them is most likely
9747 to give an error as @value{GDBN} reads in the executable's symbol
9750 @cindex expressions in Modula-2
9752 * M2 Operators:: Built-in operators
9753 * Built-In Func/Proc:: Built-in functions and procedures
9754 * M2 Constants:: Modula-2 constants
9755 * M2 Types:: Modula-2 types
9756 * M2 Defaults:: Default settings for Modula-2
9757 * Deviations:: Deviations from standard Modula-2
9758 * M2 Checks:: Modula-2 type and range checks
9759 * M2 Scope:: The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
9760 * GDB/M2:: @value{GDBN} and Modula-2
9764 @subsubsection Operators
9765 @cindex Modula-2 operators
9767 Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
9768 @code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are
9769 often defined on groups of types. For the purposes of Modula-2, the
9770 following definitions hold:
9775 @emph{Integral types} consist of @code{INTEGER}, @code{CARDINAL}, and
9779 @emph{Character types} consist of @code{CHAR} and its subranges.
9782 @emph{Floating-point types} consist of @code{REAL}.
9785 @emph{Pointer types} consist of anything declared as @code{POINTER TO
9789 @emph{Scalar types} consist of all of the above.
9792 @emph{Set types} consist of @code{SET} and @code{BITSET} types.
9795 @emph{Boolean types} consist of @code{BOOLEAN}.
9799 The following operators are supported, and appear in order of
9800 increasing precedence:
9804 Function argument or array index separator.
9807 Assignment. The value of @var{var} @code{:=} @var{value} is
9811 Less than, greater than on integral, floating-point, or enumerated
9815 Less than or equal to, greater than or equal to
9816 on integral, floating-point and enumerated types, or set inclusion on
9817 set types. Same precedence as @code{<}.
9819 @item =@r{, }<>@r{, }#
9820 Equality and two ways of expressing inequality, valid on scalar types.
9821 Same precedence as @code{<}. In @value{GDBN} scripts, only @code{<>} is
9822 available for inequality, since @code{#} conflicts with the script
9826 Set membership. Defined on set types and the types of their members.
9827 Same precedence as @code{<}.
9830 Boolean disjunction. Defined on boolean types.
9833 Boolean conjunction. Defined on boolean types.
9836 The @value{GDBN} ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
9839 Addition and subtraction on integral and floating-point types, or union
9840 and difference on set types.
9843 Multiplication on integral and floating-point types, or set intersection
9847 Division on floating-point types, or symmetric set difference on set
9848 types. Same precedence as @code{*}.
9851 Integer division and remainder. Defined on integral types. Same
9852 precedence as @code{*}.
9855 Negative. Defined on @code{INTEGER} and @code{REAL} data.
9858 Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types.
9861 Boolean negation. Defined on boolean types. Same precedence as
9865 @code{RECORD} field selector. Defined on @code{RECORD} data. Same
9866 precedence as @code{^}.
9869 Array indexing. Defined on @code{ARRAY} data. Same precedence as @code{^}.
9872 Procedure argument list. Defined on @code{PROCEDURE} objects. Same precedence
9876 @value{GDBN} and Modula-2 scope operators.
9880 @emph{Warning:} Set expressions and their operations are not yet supported, so @value{GDBN}
9881 treats the use of the operator @code{IN}, or the use of operators
9882 @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{=}, , @code{<>}, @code{#},
9883 @code{<=}, and @code{>=} on sets as an error.
9887 @node Built-In Func/Proc
9888 @subsubsection Built-in Functions and Procedures
9889 @cindex Modula-2 built-ins
9891 Modula-2 also makes available several built-in procedures and functions.
9892 In describing these, the following metavariables are used:
9897 represents an @code{ARRAY} variable.
9900 represents a @code{CHAR} constant or variable.
9903 represents a variable or constant of integral type.
9906 represents an identifier that belongs to a set. Generally used in the
9907 same function with the metavariable @var{s}. The type of @var{s} should
9908 be @code{SET OF @var{mtype}} (where @var{mtype} is the type of @var{m}).
9911 represents a variable or constant of integral or floating-point type.
9914 represents a variable or constant of floating-point type.
9920 represents a variable.
9923 represents a variable or constant of one of many types. See the
9924 explanation of the function for details.
9927 All Modula-2 built-in procedures also return a result, described below.
9931 Returns the absolute value of @var{n}.
9934 If @var{c} is a lower case letter, it returns its upper case
9935 equivalent, otherwise it returns its argument.
9938 Returns the character whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
9941 Decrements the value in the variable @var{v} by one. Returns the new value.
9943 @item DEC(@var{v},@var{i})
9944 Decrements the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}. Returns the
9947 @item EXCL(@var{m},@var{s})
9948 Removes the element @var{m} from the set @var{s}. Returns the new
9951 @item FLOAT(@var{i})
9952 Returns the floating point equivalent of the integer @var{i}.
9955 Returns the index of the last member of @var{a}.
9958 Increments the value in the variable @var{v} by one. Returns the new value.
9960 @item INC(@var{v},@var{i})
9961 Increments the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}. Returns the
9964 @item INCL(@var{m},@var{s})
9965 Adds the element @var{m} to the set @var{s} if it is not already
9966 there. Returns the new set.
9969 Returns the maximum value of the type @var{t}.
9972 Returns the minimum value of the type @var{t}.
9975 Returns boolean TRUE if @var{i} is an odd number.
9978 Returns the ordinal value of its argument. For example, the ordinal
9979 value of a character is its @sc{ascii} value (on machines supporting the
9980 @sc{ascii} character set). @var{x} must be of an ordered type, which include
9981 integral, character and enumerated types.
9984 Returns the size of its argument. @var{x} can be a variable or a type.
9986 @item TRUNC(@var{r})
9987 Returns the integral part of @var{r}.
9989 @item VAL(@var{t},@var{i})
9990 Returns the member of the type @var{t} whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
9994 @emph{Warning:} Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so
9995 @value{GDBN} treats the use of procedures @code{INCL} and @code{EXCL} as
9999 @cindex Modula-2 constants
10001 @subsubsection Constants
10003 @value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of Modula-2 in the following
10009 Integer constants are simply a sequence of digits. When used in an
10010 expression, a constant is interpreted to be type-compatible with the
10011 rest of the expression. Hexadecimal integers are specified by a
10012 trailing @samp{H}, and octal integers by a trailing @samp{B}.
10015 Floating point constants appear as a sequence of digits, followed by a
10016 decimal point and another sequence of digits. An optional exponent can
10017 then be specified, in the form @samp{E@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}, where
10018 @samp{@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}} is the desired exponent. All of the
10019 digits of the floating point constant must be valid decimal (base 10)
10023 Character constants consist of a single character enclosed by a pair of
10024 like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}). They may
10025 also be expressed by their ordinal value (their @sc{ascii} value, usually)
10026 followed by a @samp{C}.
10029 String constants consist of a sequence of characters enclosed by a
10030 pair of like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}).
10031 Escape sequences in the style of C are also allowed. @xref{C
10032 Constants, ,C and C@t{++} Constants}, for a brief explanation of escape
10036 Enumerated constants consist of an enumerated identifier.
10039 Boolean constants consist of the identifiers @code{TRUE} and
10043 Pointer constants consist of integral values only.
10046 Set constants are not yet supported.
10050 @subsubsection Modula-2 Types
10051 @cindex Modula-2 types
10053 Currently @value{GDBN} can print the following data types in Modula-2
10054 syntax: array types, record types, set types, pointer types, procedure
10055 types, enumerated types, subrange types and base types. You can also
10056 print the contents of variables declared using these type.
10057 This section gives a number of simple source code examples together with
10058 sample @value{GDBN} sessions.
10060 The first example contains the following section of code:
10069 and you can request @value{GDBN} to interrogate the type and value of
10070 @code{r} and @code{s}.
10073 (@value{GDBP}) print s
10075 (@value{GDBP}) ptype s
10077 (@value{GDBP}) print r
10079 (@value{GDBP}) ptype r
10084 Likewise if your source code declares @code{s} as:
10088 s: SET ['A'..'Z'] ;
10092 then you may query the type of @code{s} by:
10095 (@value{GDBP}) ptype s
10096 type = SET ['A'..'Z']
10100 Note that at present you cannot interactively manipulate set
10101 expressions using the debugger.
10103 The following example shows how you might declare an array in Modula-2
10104 and how you can interact with @value{GDBN} to print its type and contents:
10108 s: ARRAY [-10..10] OF CHAR ;
10112 (@value{GDBP}) ptype s
10113 ARRAY [-10..10] OF CHAR
10116 Note that the array handling is not yet complete and although the type
10117 is printed correctly, expression handling still assumes that all
10118 arrays have a lower bound of zero and not @code{-10} as in the example
10119 above. Unbounded arrays are also not yet recognized in @value{GDBN}.
10121 Here are some more type related Modula-2 examples:
10125 colour = (blue, red, yellow, green) ;
10126 t = [blue..yellow] ;
10134 The @value{GDBN} interaction shows how you can query the data type
10135 and value of a variable.
10138 (@value{GDBP}) print s
10140 (@value{GDBP}) ptype t
10141 type = [blue..yellow]
10145 In this example a Modula-2 array is declared and its contents
10146 displayed. Observe that the contents are written in the same way as
10147 their @code{C} counterparts.
10151 s: ARRAY [1..5] OF CARDINAL ;
10157 (@value{GDBP}) print s
10158 $1 = @{1, 0, 0, 0, 0@}
10159 (@value{GDBP}) ptype s
10160 type = ARRAY [1..5] OF CARDINAL
10163 The Modula-2 language interface to @value{GDBN} also understands
10164 pointer types as shown in this example:
10168 s: POINTER TO ARRAY [1..5] OF CARDINAL ;
10175 and you can request that @value{GDBN} describes the type of @code{s}.
10178 (@value{GDBP}) ptype s
10179 type = POINTER TO ARRAY [1..5] OF CARDINAL
10182 @value{GDBN} handles compound types as we can see in this example.
10183 Here we combine array types, record types, pointer types and subrange
10194 myarray = ARRAY myrange OF CARDINAL ;
10195 myrange = [-2..2] ;
10197 s: POINTER TO ARRAY myrange OF foo ;
10201 and you can ask @value{GDBN} to describe the type of @code{s} as shown
10205 (@value{GDBP}) ptype s
10206 type = POINTER TO ARRAY [-2..2] OF foo = RECORD
10209 f3 : ARRAY [-2..2] OF CARDINAL;
10214 @subsubsection Modula-2 Defaults
10215 @cindex Modula-2 defaults
10217 If type and range checking are set automatically by @value{GDBN}, they
10218 both default to @code{on} whenever the working language changes to
10219 Modula-2. This happens regardless of whether you or @value{GDBN}
10220 selected the working language.
10222 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, then entering
10223 code compiled from a file whose name ends with @file{.mod} sets the
10224 working language to Modula-2. @xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN}
10225 Infer the Source Language}, for further details.
10228 @subsubsection Deviations from Standard Modula-2
10229 @cindex Modula-2, deviations from
10231 A few changes have been made to make Modula-2 programs easier to debug.
10232 This is done primarily via loosening its type strictness:
10236 Unlike in standard Modula-2, pointer constants can be formed by
10237 integers. This allows you to modify pointer variables during
10238 debugging. (In standard Modula-2, the actual address contained in a
10239 pointer variable is hidden from you; it can only be modified
10240 through direct assignment to another pointer variable or expression that
10241 returned a pointer.)
10244 C escape sequences can be used in strings and characters to represent
10245 non-printable characters. @value{GDBN} prints out strings with these
10246 escape sequences embedded. Single non-printable characters are
10247 printed using the @samp{CHR(@var{nnn})} format.
10250 The assignment operator (@code{:=}) returns the value of its right-hand
10254 All built-in procedures both modify @emph{and} return their argument.
10258 @subsubsection Modula-2 Type and Range Checks
10259 @cindex Modula-2 checks
10262 @emph{Warning:} in this release, @value{GDBN} does not yet perform type or
10265 @c FIXME remove warning when type/range checks added
10267 @value{GDBN} considers two Modula-2 variables type equivalent if:
10271 They are of types that have been declared equivalent via a @code{TYPE
10272 @var{t1} = @var{t2}} statement
10275 They have been declared on the same line. (Note: This is true of the
10276 @sc{gnu} Modula-2 compiler, but it may not be true of other compilers.)
10279 As long as type checking is enabled, any attempt to combine variables
10280 whose types are not equivalent is an error.
10282 Range checking is done on all mathematical operations, assignment, array
10283 index bounds, and all built-in functions and procedures.
10286 @subsubsection The Scope Operators @code{::} and @code{.}
10288 @cindex @code{.}, Modula-2 scope operator
10289 @cindex colon, doubled as scope operator
10291 @vindex colon-colon@r{, in Modula-2}
10292 @c Info cannot handle :: but TeX can.
10295 @vindex ::@r{, in Modula-2}
10298 There are a few subtle differences between the Modula-2 scope operator
10299 (@code{.}) and the @value{GDBN} scope operator (@code{::}). The two have
10304 @var{module} . @var{id}
10305 @var{scope} :: @var{id}
10309 where @var{scope} is the name of a module or a procedure,
10310 @var{module} the name of a module, and @var{id} is any declared
10311 identifier within your program, except another module.
10313 Using the @code{::} operator makes @value{GDBN} search the scope
10314 specified by @var{scope} for the identifier @var{id}. If it is not
10315 found in the specified scope, then @value{GDBN} searches all scopes
10316 enclosing the one specified by @var{scope}.
10318 Using the @code{.} operator makes @value{GDBN} search the current scope for
10319 the identifier specified by @var{id} that was imported from the
10320 definition module specified by @var{module}. With this operator, it is
10321 an error if the identifier @var{id} was not imported from definition
10322 module @var{module}, or if @var{id} is not an identifier in
10326 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} and Modula-2
10328 Some @value{GDBN} commands have little use when debugging Modula-2 programs.
10329 Five subcommands of @code{set print} and @code{show print} apply
10330 specifically to C and C@t{++}: @samp{vtbl}, @samp{demangle},
10331 @samp{asm-demangle}, @samp{object}, and @samp{union}. The first four
10332 apply to C@t{++}, and the last to the C @code{union} type, which has no direct
10333 analogue in Modula-2.
10335 The @code{@@} operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}), while available
10336 with any language, is not useful with Modula-2. Its
10337 intent is to aid the debugging of @dfn{dynamic arrays}, which cannot be
10338 created in Modula-2 as they can in C or C@t{++}. However, because an
10339 address can be specified by an integral constant, the construct
10340 @samp{@{@var{type}@}@var{adrexp}} is still useful.
10342 @cindex @code{#} in Modula-2
10343 In @value{GDBN} scripts, the Modula-2 inequality operator @code{#} is
10344 interpreted as the beginning of a comment. Use @code{<>} instead.
10350 The extensions made to @value{GDBN} for Ada only support
10351 output from the @sc{gnu} Ada (GNAT) compiler.
10352 Other Ada compilers are not currently supported, and
10353 attempting to debug executables produced by them is most likely
10357 @cindex expressions in Ada
10359 * Ada Mode Intro:: General remarks on the Ada syntax
10360 and semantics supported by Ada mode
10362 * Omissions from Ada:: Restrictions on the Ada expression syntax.
10363 * Additions to Ada:: Extensions of the Ada expression syntax.
10364 * Stopping Before Main Program:: Debugging the program during elaboration.
10365 * Ada Glitches:: Known peculiarities of Ada mode.
10368 @node Ada Mode Intro
10369 @subsubsection Introduction
10370 @cindex Ada mode, general
10372 The Ada mode of @value{GDBN} supports a fairly large subset of Ada expression
10373 syntax, with some extensions.
10374 The philosophy behind the design of this subset is
10378 That @value{GDBN} should provide basic literals and access to operations for
10379 arithmetic, dereferencing, field selection, indexing, and subprogram calls,
10380 leaving more sophisticated computations to subprograms written into the
10381 program (which therefore may be called from @value{GDBN}).
10384 That type safety and strict adherence to Ada language restrictions
10385 are not particularly important to the @value{GDBN} user.
10388 That brevity is important to the @value{GDBN} user.
10391 Thus, for brevity, the debugger acts as if there were
10392 implicit @code{with} and @code{use} clauses in effect for all user-written
10393 packages, making it unnecessary to fully qualify most names with
10394 their packages, regardless of context. Where this causes ambiguity,
10395 @value{GDBN} asks the user's intent.
10397 The debugger will start in Ada mode if it detects an Ada main program.
10398 As for other languages, it will enter Ada mode when stopped in a program that
10399 was translated from an Ada source file.
10401 While in Ada mode, you may use `@t{--}' for comments. This is useful
10402 mostly for documenting command files. The standard @value{GDBN} comment
10403 (@samp{#}) still works at the beginning of a line in Ada mode, but not in the
10404 middle (to allow based literals).
10406 The debugger supports limited overloading. Given a subprogram call in which
10407 the function symbol has multiple definitions, it will use the number of
10408 actual parameters and some information about their types to attempt to narrow
10409 the set of definitions. It also makes very limited use of context, preferring
10410 procedures to functions in the context of the @code{call} command, and
10411 functions to procedures elsewhere.
10413 @node Omissions from Ada
10414 @subsubsection Omissions from Ada
10415 @cindex Ada, omissions from
10417 Here are the notable omissions from the subset:
10421 Only a subset of the attributes are supported:
10425 @t{'First}, @t{'Last}, and @t{'Length}
10426 on array objects (not on types and subtypes).
10429 @t{'Min} and @t{'Max}.
10432 @t{'Pos} and @t{'Val}.
10438 @t{'Range} on array objects (not subtypes), but only as the right
10439 operand of the membership (@code{in}) operator.
10442 @t{'Access}, @t{'Unchecked_Access}, and
10443 @t{'Unrestricted_Access} (a GNAT extension).
10451 @code{Characters.Latin_1} are not available and
10452 concatenation is not implemented. Thus, escape characters in strings are
10453 not currently available.
10456 Equality tests (@samp{=} and @samp{/=}) on arrays test for bitwise
10457 equality of representations. They will generally work correctly
10458 for strings and arrays whose elements have integer or enumeration types.
10459 They may not work correctly for arrays whose element
10460 types have user-defined equality, for arrays of real values
10461 (in particular, IEEE-conformant floating point, because of negative
10462 zeroes and NaNs), and for arrays whose elements contain unused bits with
10463 indeterminate values.
10466 The other component-by-component array operations (@code{and}, @code{or},
10467 @code{xor}, @code{not}, and relational tests other than equality)
10468 are not implemented.
10471 @cindex array aggregates (Ada)
10472 @cindex record aggregates (Ada)
10473 @cindex aggregates (Ada)
10474 There is limited support for array and record aggregates. They are
10475 permitted only on the right sides of assignments, as in these examples:
10478 set An_Array := (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6)
10479 set An_Array := (1, others => 0)
10480 set An_Array := (0|4 => 1, 1..3 => 2, 5 => 6)
10481 set A_2D_Array := ((1, 2, 3), (4, 5, 6), (7, 8, 9))
10482 set A_Record := (1, "Peter", True);
10483 set A_Record := (Name => "Peter", Id => 1, Alive => True)
10487 discriminant's value by assigning an aggregate has an
10488 undefined effect if that discriminant is used within the record.
10489 However, you can first modify discriminants by directly assigning to
10490 them (which normally would not be allowed in Ada), and then performing an
10491 aggregate assignment. For example, given a variable @code{A_Rec}
10492 declared to have a type such as:
10495 type Rec (Len : Small_Integer := 0) is record
10497 Vals : IntArray (1 .. Len);
10501 you can assign a value with a different size of @code{Vals} with two
10506 set A_Rec := (Id => 42, Vals => (1, 2, 3, 4))
10509 As this example also illustrates, @value{GDBN} is very loose about the usual
10510 rules concerning aggregates. You may leave out some of the
10511 components of an array or record aggregate (such as the @code{Len}
10512 component in the assignment to @code{A_Rec} above); they will retain their
10513 original values upon assignment. You may freely use dynamic values as
10514 indices in component associations. You may even use overlapping or
10515 redundant component associations, although which component values are
10516 assigned in such cases is not defined.
10519 Calls to dispatching subprograms are not implemented.
10522 The overloading algorithm is much more limited (i.e., less selective)
10523 than that of real Ada. It makes only limited use of the context in
10524 which a subexpression appears to resolve its meaning, and it is much
10525 looser in its rules for allowing type matches. As a result, some
10526 function calls will be ambiguous, and the user will be asked to choose
10527 the proper resolution.
10530 The @code{new} operator is not implemented.
10533 Entry calls are not implemented.
10536 Aside from printing, arithmetic operations on the native VAX floating-point
10537 formats are not supported.
10540 It is not possible to slice a packed array.
10543 @node Additions to Ada
10544 @subsubsection Additions to Ada
10545 @cindex Ada, deviations from
10547 As it does for other languages, @value{GDBN} makes certain generic
10548 extensions to Ada (@pxref{Expressions}):
10552 If the expression @var{E} is a variable residing in memory (typically
10553 a local variable or array element) and @var{N} is a positive integer,
10554 then @code{@var{E}@@@var{N}} displays the values of @var{E} and the
10555 @var{N}-1 adjacent variables following it in memory as an array. In
10556 Ada, this operator is generally not necessary, since its prime use is
10557 in displaying parts of an array, and slicing will usually do this in
10558 Ada. However, there are occasional uses when debugging programs in
10559 which certain debugging information has been optimized away.
10562 @code{@var{B}::@var{var}} means ``the variable named @var{var} that
10563 appears in function or file @var{B}.'' When @var{B} is a file name,
10564 you must typically surround it in single quotes.
10567 The expression @code{@{@var{type}@} @var{addr}} means ``the variable of type
10568 @var{type} that appears at address @var{addr}.''
10571 A name starting with @samp{$} is a convenience variable
10572 (@pxref{Convenience Vars}) or a machine register (@pxref{Registers}).
10575 In addition, @value{GDBN} provides a few other shortcuts and outright
10576 additions specific to Ada:
10580 The assignment statement is allowed as an expression, returning
10581 its right-hand operand as its value. Thus, you may enter
10585 print A(tmp := y + 1)
10589 The semicolon is allowed as an ``operator,'' returning as its value
10590 the value of its right-hand operand.
10591 This allows, for example,
10592 complex conditional breaks:
10596 condition 1 (report(i); k += 1; A(k) > 100)
10600 Rather than use catenation and symbolic character names to introduce special
10601 characters into strings, one may instead use a special bracket notation,
10602 which is also used to print strings. A sequence of characters of the form
10603 @samp{["@var{XX}"]} within a string or character literal denotes the
10604 (single) character whose numeric encoding is @var{XX} in hexadecimal. The
10605 sequence of characters @samp{["""]} also denotes a single quotation mark
10606 in strings. For example,
10608 "One line.["0a"]Next line.["0a"]"
10611 contains an ASCII newline character (@code{Ada.Characters.Latin_1.LF})
10615 The subtype used as a prefix for the attributes @t{'Pos}, @t{'Min}, and
10616 @t{'Max} is optional (and is ignored in any case). For example, it is valid
10624 When printing arrays, @value{GDBN} uses positional notation when the
10625 array has a lower bound of 1, and uses a modified named notation otherwise.
10626 For example, a one-dimensional array of three integers with a lower bound
10627 of 3 might print as
10634 That is, in contrast to valid Ada, only the first component has a @code{=>}
10638 You may abbreviate attributes in expressions with any unique,
10639 multi-character subsequence of
10640 their names (an exact match gets preference).
10641 For example, you may use @t{a'len}, @t{a'gth}, or @t{a'lh}
10642 in place of @t{a'length}.
10645 @cindex quoting Ada internal identifiers
10646 Since Ada is case-insensitive, the debugger normally maps identifiers you type
10647 to lower case. The GNAT compiler uses upper-case characters for
10648 some of its internal identifiers, which are normally of no interest to users.
10649 For the rare occasions when you actually have to look at them,
10650 enclose them in angle brackets to avoid the lower-case mapping.
10653 @value{GDBP} print <JMPBUF_SAVE>[0]
10657 Printing an object of class-wide type or dereferencing an
10658 access-to-class-wide value will display all the components of the object's
10659 specific type (as indicated by its run-time tag). Likewise, component
10660 selection on such a value will operate on the specific type of the
10665 @node Stopping Before Main Program
10666 @subsubsection Stopping at the Very Beginning
10668 @cindex breakpointing Ada elaboration code
10669 It is sometimes necessary to debug the program during elaboration, and
10670 before reaching the main procedure.
10671 As defined in the Ada Reference
10672 Manual, the elaboration code is invoked from a procedure called
10673 @code{adainit}. To run your program up to the beginning of
10674 elaboration, simply use the following two commands:
10675 @code{tbreak adainit} and @code{run}.
10678 @subsubsection Known Peculiarities of Ada Mode
10679 @cindex Ada, problems
10681 Besides the omissions listed previously (@pxref{Omissions from Ada}),
10682 we know of several problems with and limitations of Ada mode in
10684 some of which will be fixed with planned future releases of the debugger
10685 and the GNU Ada compiler.
10689 Currently, the debugger
10690 has insufficient information to determine whether certain pointers represent
10691 pointers to objects or the objects themselves.
10692 Thus, the user may have to tack an extra @code{.all} after an expression
10693 to get it printed properly.
10696 Static constants that the compiler chooses not to materialize as objects in
10697 storage are invisible to the debugger.
10700 Named parameter associations in function argument lists are ignored (the
10701 argument lists are treated as positional).
10704 Many useful library packages are currently invisible to the debugger.
10707 Fixed-point arithmetic, conversions, input, and output is carried out using
10708 floating-point arithmetic, and may give results that only approximate those on
10712 The type of the @t{'Address} attribute may not be @code{System.Address}.
10715 The GNAT compiler never generates the prefix @code{Standard} for any of
10716 the standard symbols defined by the Ada language. @value{GDBN} knows about
10717 this: it will strip the prefix from names when you use it, and will never
10718 look for a name you have so qualified among local symbols, nor match against
10719 symbols in other packages or subprograms. If you have
10720 defined entities anywhere in your program other than parameters and
10721 local variables whose simple names match names in @code{Standard},
10722 GNAT's lack of qualification here can cause confusion. When this happens,
10723 you can usually resolve the confusion
10724 by qualifying the problematic names with package
10725 @code{Standard} explicitly.
10728 @node Unsupported Languages
10729 @section Unsupported Languages
10731 @cindex unsupported languages
10732 @cindex minimal language
10733 In addition to the other fully-supported programming languages,
10734 @value{GDBN} also provides a pseudo-language, called @code{minimal}.
10735 It does not represent a real programming language, but provides a set
10736 of capabilities close to what the C or assembly languages provide.
10737 This should allow most simple operations to be performed while debugging
10738 an application that uses a language currently not supported by @value{GDBN}.
10740 If the language is set to @code{auto}, @value{GDBN} will automatically
10741 select this language if the current frame corresponds to an unsupported
10745 @chapter Examining the Symbol Table
10747 The commands described in this chapter allow you to inquire about the
10748 symbols (names of variables, functions and types) defined in your
10749 program. This information is inherent in the text of your program and
10750 does not change as your program executes. @value{GDBN} finds it in your
10751 program's symbol table, in the file indicated when you started @value{GDBN}
10752 (@pxref{File Options, ,Choosing Files}), or by one of the
10753 file-management commands (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to Specify Files}).
10755 @cindex symbol names
10756 @cindex names of symbols
10757 @cindex quoting names
10758 Occasionally, you may need to refer to symbols that contain unusual
10759 characters, which @value{GDBN} ordinarily treats as word delimiters. The
10760 most frequent case is in referring to static variables in other
10761 source files (@pxref{Variables,,Program Variables}). File names
10762 are recorded in object files as debugging symbols, but @value{GDBN} would
10763 ordinarily parse a typical file name, like @file{foo.c}, as the three words
10764 @samp{foo} @samp{.} @samp{c}. To allow @value{GDBN} to recognize
10765 @samp{foo.c} as a single symbol, enclose it in single quotes; for example,
10772 looks up the value of @code{x} in the scope of the file @file{foo.c}.
10775 @cindex case-insensitive symbol names
10776 @cindex case sensitivity in symbol names
10777 @kindex set case-sensitive
10778 @item set case-sensitive on
10779 @itemx set case-sensitive off
10780 @itemx set case-sensitive auto
10781 Normally, when @value{GDBN} looks up symbols, it matches their names
10782 with case sensitivity determined by the current source language.
10783 Occasionally, you may wish to control that. The command @code{set
10784 case-sensitive} lets you do that by specifying @code{on} for
10785 case-sensitive matches or @code{off} for case-insensitive ones. If
10786 you specify @code{auto}, case sensitivity is reset to the default
10787 suitable for the source language. The default is case-sensitive
10788 matches for all languages except for Fortran, for which the default is
10789 case-insensitive matches.
10791 @kindex show case-sensitive
10792 @item show case-sensitive
10793 This command shows the current setting of case sensitivity for symbols
10796 @kindex info address
10797 @cindex address of a symbol
10798 @item info address @var{symbol}
10799 Describe where the data for @var{symbol} is stored. For a register
10800 variable, this says which register it is kept in. For a non-register
10801 local variable, this prints the stack-frame offset at which the variable
10804 Note the contrast with @samp{print &@var{symbol}}, which does not work
10805 at all for a register variable, and for a stack local variable prints
10806 the exact address of the current instantiation of the variable.
10808 @kindex info symbol
10809 @cindex symbol from address
10810 @cindex closest symbol and offset for an address
10811 @item info symbol @var{addr}
10812 Print the name of a symbol which is stored at the address @var{addr}.
10813 If no symbol is stored exactly at @var{addr}, @value{GDBN} prints the
10814 nearest symbol and an offset from it:
10817 (@value{GDBP}) info symbol 0x54320
10818 _initialize_vx + 396 in section .text
10822 This is the opposite of the @code{info address} command. You can use
10823 it to find out the name of a variable or a function given its address.
10826 @item whatis [@var{arg}]
10827 Print the data type of @var{arg}, which can be either an expression or
10828 a data type. With no argument, print the data type of @code{$}, the
10829 last value in the value history. If @var{arg} is an expression, it is
10830 not actually evaluated, and any side-effecting operations (such as
10831 assignments or function calls) inside it do not take place. If
10832 @var{arg} is a type name, it may be the name of a type or typedef, or
10833 for C code it may have the form @samp{class @var{class-name}},
10834 @samp{struct @var{struct-tag}}, @samp{union @var{union-tag}} or
10835 @samp{enum @var{enum-tag}}.
10836 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
10839 @item ptype [@var{arg}]
10840 @code{ptype} accepts the same arguments as @code{whatis}, but prints a
10841 detailed description of the type, instead of just the name of the type.
10842 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
10844 For example, for this variable declaration:
10847 struct complex @{double real; double imag;@} v;
10851 the two commands give this output:
10855 (@value{GDBP}) whatis v
10856 type = struct complex
10857 (@value{GDBP}) ptype v
10858 type = struct complex @{
10866 As with @code{whatis}, using @code{ptype} without an argument refers to
10867 the type of @code{$}, the last value in the value history.
10869 @cindex incomplete type
10870 Sometimes, programs use opaque data types or incomplete specifications
10871 of complex data structure. If the debug information included in the
10872 program does not allow @value{GDBN} to display a full declaration of
10873 the data type, it will say @samp{<incomplete type>}. For example,
10874 given these declarations:
10878 struct foo *fooptr;
10882 but no definition for @code{struct foo} itself, @value{GDBN} will say:
10885 (@value{GDBP}) ptype foo
10886 $1 = <incomplete type>
10890 ``Incomplete type'' is C terminology for data types that are not
10891 completely specified.
10894 @item info types @var{regexp}
10896 Print a brief description of all types whose names match the regular
10897 expression @var{regexp} (or all types in your program, if you supply
10898 no argument). Each complete typename is matched as though it were a
10899 complete line; thus, @samp{i type value} gives information on all
10900 types in your program whose names include the string @code{value}, but
10901 @samp{i type ^value$} gives information only on types whose complete
10902 name is @code{value}.
10904 This command differs from @code{ptype} in two ways: first, like
10905 @code{whatis}, it does not print a detailed description; second, it
10906 lists all source files where a type is defined.
10909 @cindex local variables
10910 @item info scope @var{location}
10911 List all the variables local to a particular scope. This command
10912 accepts a @var{location} argument---a function name, a source line, or
10913 an address preceded by a @samp{*}, and prints all the variables local
10914 to the scope defined by that location. For example:
10917 (@value{GDBP}) @b{info scope command_line_handler}
10918 Scope for command_line_handler:
10919 Symbol rl is an argument at stack/frame offset 8, length 4.
10920 Symbol linebuffer is in static storage at address 0x150a18, length 4.
10921 Symbol linelength is in static storage at address 0x150a1c, length 4.
10922 Symbol p is a local variable in register $esi, length 4.
10923 Symbol p1 is a local variable in register $ebx, length 4.
10924 Symbol nline is a local variable in register $edx, length 4.
10925 Symbol repeat is a local variable at frame offset -8, length 4.
10929 This command is especially useful for determining what data to collect
10930 during a @dfn{trace experiment}, see @ref{Tracepoint Actions,
10933 @kindex info source
10935 Show information about the current source file---that is, the source file for
10936 the function containing the current point of execution:
10939 the name of the source file, and the directory containing it,
10941 the directory it was compiled in,
10943 its length, in lines,
10945 which programming language it is written in,
10947 whether the executable includes debugging information for that file, and
10948 if so, what format the information is in (e.g., STABS, Dwarf 2, etc.), and
10950 whether the debugging information includes information about
10951 preprocessor macros.
10955 @kindex info sources
10957 Print the names of all source files in your program for which there is
10958 debugging information, organized into two lists: files whose symbols
10959 have already been read, and files whose symbols will be read when needed.
10961 @kindex info functions
10962 @item info functions
10963 Print the names and data types of all defined functions.
10965 @item info functions @var{regexp}
10966 Print the names and data types of all defined functions
10967 whose names contain a match for regular expression @var{regexp}.
10968 Thus, @samp{info fun step} finds all functions whose names
10969 include @code{step}; @samp{info fun ^step} finds those whose names
10970 start with @code{step}. If a function name contains characters
10971 that conflict with the regular expression language (e.g.@:
10972 @samp{operator*()}), they may be quoted with a backslash.
10974 @kindex info variables
10975 @item info variables
10976 Print the names and data types of all variables that are declared
10977 outside of functions (i.e.@: excluding local variables).
10979 @item info variables @var{regexp}
10980 Print the names and data types of all variables (except for local
10981 variables) whose names contain a match for regular expression
10984 @kindex info classes
10985 @cindex Objective-C, classes and selectors
10987 @itemx info classes @var{regexp}
10988 Display all Objective-C classes in your program, or
10989 (with the @var{regexp} argument) all those matching a particular regular
10992 @kindex info selectors
10993 @item info selectors
10994 @itemx info selectors @var{regexp}
10995 Display all Objective-C selectors in your program, or
10996 (with the @var{regexp} argument) all those matching a particular regular
11000 This was never implemented.
11001 @kindex info methods
11003 @itemx info methods @var{regexp}
11004 The @code{info methods} command permits the user to examine all defined
11005 methods within C@t{++} program, or (with the @var{regexp} argument) a
11006 specific set of methods found in the various C@t{++} classes. Many
11007 C@t{++} classes provide a large number of methods. Thus, the output
11008 from the @code{ptype} command can be overwhelming and hard to use. The
11009 @code{info-methods} command filters the methods, printing only those
11010 which match the regular-expression @var{regexp}.
11013 @cindex reloading symbols
11014 Some systems allow individual object files that make up your program to
11015 be replaced without stopping and restarting your program. For example,
11016 in VxWorks you can simply recompile a defective object file and keep on
11017 running. If you are running on one of these systems, you can allow
11018 @value{GDBN} to reload the symbols for automatically relinked modules:
11021 @kindex set symbol-reloading
11022 @item set symbol-reloading on
11023 Replace symbol definitions for the corresponding source file when an
11024 object file with a particular name is seen again.
11026 @item set symbol-reloading off
11027 Do not replace symbol definitions when encountering object files of the
11028 same name more than once. This is the default state; if you are not
11029 running on a system that permits automatic relinking of modules, you
11030 should leave @code{symbol-reloading} off, since otherwise @value{GDBN}
11031 may discard symbols when linking large programs, that may contain
11032 several modules (from different directories or libraries) with the same
11035 @kindex show symbol-reloading
11036 @item show symbol-reloading
11037 Show the current @code{on} or @code{off} setting.
11040 @cindex opaque data types
11041 @kindex set opaque-type-resolution
11042 @item set opaque-type-resolution on
11043 Tell @value{GDBN} to resolve opaque types. An opaque type is a type
11044 declared as a pointer to a @code{struct}, @code{class}, or
11045 @code{union}---for example, @code{struct MyType *}---that is used in one
11046 source file although the full declaration of @code{struct MyType} is in
11047 another source file. The default is on.
11049 A change in the setting of this subcommand will not take effect until
11050 the next time symbols for a file are loaded.
11052 @item set opaque-type-resolution off
11053 Tell @value{GDBN} not to resolve opaque types. In this case, the type
11054 is printed as follows:
11056 @{<no data fields>@}
11059 @kindex show opaque-type-resolution
11060 @item show opaque-type-resolution
11061 Show whether opaque types are resolved or not.
11063 @kindex maint print symbols
11064 @cindex symbol dump
11065 @kindex maint print psymbols
11066 @cindex partial symbol dump
11067 @item maint print symbols @var{filename}
11068 @itemx maint print psymbols @var{filename}
11069 @itemx maint print msymbols @var{filename}
11070 Write a dump of debugging symbol data into the file @var{filename}.
11071 These commands are used to debug the @value{GDBN} symbol-reading code. Only
11072 symbols with debugging data are included. If you use @samp{maint print
11073 symbols}, @value{GDBN} includes all the symbols for which it has already
11074 collected full details: that is, @var{filename} reflects symbols for
11075 only those files whose symbols @value{GDBN} has read. You can use the
11076 command @code{info sources} to find out which files these are. If you
11077 use @samp{maint print psymbols} instead, the dump shows information about
11078 symbols that @value{GDBN} only knows partially---that is, symbols defined in
11079 files that @value{GDBN} has skimmed, but not yet read completely. Finally,
11080 @samp{maint print msymbols} dumps just the minimal symbol information
11081 required for each object file from which @value{GDBN} has read some symbols.
11082 @xref{Files, ,Commands to Specify Files}, for a discussion of how
11083 @value{GDBN} reads symbols (in the description of @code{symbol-file}).
11085 @kindex maint info symtabs
11086 @kindex maint info psymtabs
11087 @cindex listing @value{GDBN}'s internal symbol tables
11088 @cindex symbol tables, listing @value{GDBN}'s internal
11089 @cindex full symbol tables, listing @value{GDBN}'s internal
11090 @cindex partial symbol tables, listing @value{GDBN}'s internal
11091 @item maint info symtabs @r{[} @var{regexp} @r{]}
11092 @itemx maint info psymtabs @r{[} @var{regexp} @r{]}
11094 List the @code{struct symtab} or @code{struct partial_symtab}
11095 structures whose names match @var{regexp}. If @var{regexp} is not
11096 given, list them all. The output includes expressions which you can
11097 copy into a @value{GDBN} debugging this one to examine a particular
11098 structure in more detail. For example:
11101 (@value{GDBP}) maint info psymtabs dwarf2read
11102 @{ objfile /home/gnu/build/gdb/gdb
11103 ((struct objfile *) 0x82e69d0)
11104 @{ psymtab /home/gnu/src/gdb/dwarf2read.c
11105 ((struct partial_symtab *) 0x8474b10)
11108 text addresses 0x814d3c8 -- 0x8158074
11109 globals (* (struct partial_symbol **) 0x8507a08 @@ 9)
11110 statics (* (struct partial_symbol **) 0x40e95b78 @@ 2882)
11111 dependencies (none)
11114 (@value{GDBP}) maint info symtabs
11118 We see that there is one partial symbol table whose filename contains
11119 the string @samp{dwarf2read}, belonging to the @samp{gdb} executable;
11120 and we see that @value{GDBN} has not read in any symtabs yet at all.
11121 If we set a breakpoint on a function, that will cause @value{GDBN} to
11122 read the symtab for the compilation unit containing that function:
11125 (@value{GDBP}) break dwarf2_psymtab_to_symtab
11126 Breakpoint 1 at 0x814e5da: file /home/gnu/src/gdb/dwarf2read.c,
11128 (@value{GDBP}) maint info symtabs
11129 @{ objfile /home/gnu/build/gdb/gdb
11130 ((struct objfile *) 0x82e69d0)
11131 @{ symtab /home/gnu/src/gdb/dwarf2read.c
11132 ((struct symtab *) 0x86c1f38)
11135 blockvector ((struct blockvector *) 0x86c1bd0) (primary)
11136 debugformat DWARF 2
11145 @chapter Altering Execution
11147 Once you think you have found an error in your program, you might want to
11148 find out for certain whether correcting the apparent error would lead to
11149 correct results in the rest of the run. You can find the answer by
11150 experiment, using the @value{GDBN} features for altering execution of the
11153 For example, you can store new values into variables or memory
11154 locations, give your program a signal, restart it at a different
11155 address, or even return prematurely from a function.
11158 * Assignment:: Assignment to variables
11159 * Jumping:: Continuing at a different address
11160 * Signaling:: Giving your program a signal
11161 * Returning:: Returning from a function
11162 * Calling:: Calling your program's functions
11163 * Patching:: Patching your program
11167 @section Assignment to Variables
11170 @cindex setting variables
11171 To alter the value of a variable, evaluate an assignment expression.
11172 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}. For example,
11179 stores the value 4 into the variable @code{x}, and then prints the
11180 value of the assignment expression (which is 4).
11181 @xref{Languages, ,Using @value{GDBN} with Different Languages}, for more
11182 information on operators in supported languages.
11184 @kindex set variable
11185 @cindex variables, setting
11186 If you are not interested in seeing the value of the assignment, use the
11187 @code{set} command instead of the @code{print} command. @code{set} is
11188 really the same as @code{print} except that the expression's value is
11189 not printed and is not put in the value history (@pxref{Value History,
11190 ,Value History}). The expression is evaluated only for its effects.
11192 If the beginning of the argument string of the @code{set} command
11193 appears identical to a @code{set} subcommand, use the @code{set
11194 variable} command instead of just @code{set}. This command is identical
11195 to @code{set} except for its lack of subcommands. For example, if your
11196 program has a variable @code{width}, you get an error if you try to set
11197 a new value with just @samp{set width=13}, because @value{GDBN} has the
11198 command @code{set width}:
11201 (@value{GDBP}) whatis width
11203 (@value{GDBP}) p width
11205 (@value{GDBP}) set width=47
11206 Invalid syntax in expression.
11210 The invalid expression, of course, is @samp{=47}. In
11211 order to actually set the program's variable @code{width}, use
11214 (@value{GDBP}) set var width=47
11217 Because the @code{set} command has many subcommands that can conflict
11218 with the names of program variables, it is a good idea to use the
11219 @code{set variable} command instead of just @code{set}. For example, if
11220 your program has a variable @code{g}, you run into problems if you try
11221 to set a new value with just @samp{set g=4}, because @value{GDBN} has
11222 the command @code{set gnutarget}, abbreviated @code{set g}:
11226 (@value{GDBP}) whatis g
11230 (@value{GDBP}) set g=4
11234 The program being debugged has been started already.
11235 Start it from the beginning? (y or n) y
11236 Starting program: /home/smith/cc_progs/a.out
11237 "/home/smith/cc_progs/a.out": can't open to read symbols:
11238 Invalid bfd target.
11239 (@value{GDBP}) show g
11240 The current BFD target is "=4".
11245 The program variable @code{g} did not change, and you silently set the
11246 @code{gnutarget} to an invalid value. In order to set the variable
11250 (@value{GDBP}) set var g=4
11253 @value{GDBN} allows more implicit conversions in assignments than C; you can
11254 freely store an integer value into a pointer variable or vice versa,
11255 and you can convert any structure to any other structure that is the
11256 same length or shorter.
11257 @comment FIXME: how do structs align/pad in these conversions?
11258 @comment /doc@cygnus.com 18dec1990
11260 To store values into arbitrary places in memory, use the @samp{@{@dots{}@}}
11261 construct to generate a value of specified type at a specified address
11262 (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}). For example, @code{@{int@}0x83040} refers
11263 to memory location @code{0x83040} as an integer (which implies a certain size
11264 and representation in memory), and
11267 set @{int@}0x83040 = 4
11271 stores the value 4 into that memory location.
11274 @section Continuing at a Different Address
11276 Ordinarily, when you continue your program, you do so at the place where
11277 it stopped, with the @code{continue} command. You can instead continue at
11278 an address of your own choosing, with the following commands:
11282 @item jump @var{linespec}
11283 Resume execution at line @var{linespec}. Execution stops again
11284 immediately if there is a breakpoint there. @xref{List, ,Printing
11285 Source Lines}, for a description of the different forms of
11286 @var{linespec}. It is common practice to use the @code{tbreak} command
11287 in conjunction with @code{jump}. @xref{Set Breaks, ,Setting
11290 The @code{jump} command does not change the current stack frame, or
11291 the stack pointer, or the contents of any memory location or any
11292 register other than the program counter. If line @var{linespec} is in
11293 a different function from the one currently executing, the results may
11294 be bizarre if the two functions expect different patterns of arguments or
11295 of local variables. For this reason, the @code{jump} command requests
11296 confirmation if the specified line is not in the function currently
11297 executing. However, even bizarre results are predictable if you are
11298 well acquainted with the machine-language code of your program.
11300 @item jump *@var{address}
11301 Resume execution at the instruction at address @var{address}.
11304 @c Doesn't work on HP-UX; have to set $pcoqh and $pcoqt.
11305 On many systems, you can get much the same effect as the @code{jump}
11306 command by storing a new value into the register @code{$pc}. The
11307 difference is that this does not start your program running; it only
11308 changes the address of where it @emph{will} run when you continue. For
11316 makes the next @code{continue} command or stepping command execute at
11317 address @code{0x485}, rather than at the address where your program stopped.
11318 @xref{Continuing and Stepping, ,Continuing and Stepping}.
11320 The most common occasion to use the @code{jump} command is to back
11321 up---perhaps with more breakpoints set---over a portion of a program
11322 that has already executed, in order to examine its execution in more
11327 @section Giving your Program a Signal
11328 @cindex deliver a signal to a program
11332 @item signal @var{signal}
11333 Resume execution where your program stopped, but immediately give it the
11334 signal @var{signal}. @var{signal} can be the name or the number of a
11335 signal. For example, on many systems @code{signal 2} and @code{signal
11336 SIGINT} are both ways of sending an interrupt signal.
11338 Alternatively, if @var{signal} is zero, continue execution without
11339 giving a signal. This is useful when your program stopped on account of
11340 a signal and would ordinary see the signal when resumed with the
11341 @code{continue} command; @samp{signal 0} causes it to resume without a
11344 @code{signal} does not repeat when you press @key{RET} a second time
11345 after executing the command.
11349 Invoking the @code{signal} command is not the same as invoking the
11350 @code{kill} utility from the shell. Sending a signal with @code{kill}
11351 causes @value{GDBN} to decide what to do with the signal depending on
11352 the signal handling tables (@pxref{Signals}). The @code{signal} command
11353 passes the signal directly to your program.
11357 @section Returning from a Function
11360 @cindex returning from a function
11363 @itemx return @var{expression}
11364 You can cancel execution of a function call with the @code{return}
11365 command. If you give an
11366 @var{expression} argument, its value is used as the function's return
11370 When you use @code{return}, @value{GDBN} discards the selected stack frame
11371 (and all frames within it). You can think of this as making the
11372 discarded frame return prematurely. If you wish to specify a value to
11373 be returned, give that value as the argument to @code{return}.
11375 This pops the selected stack frame (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a
11376 Frame}), and any other frames inside of it, leaving its caller as the
11377 innermost remaining frame. That frame becomes selected. The
11378 specified value is stored in the registers used for returning values
11381 The @code{return} command does not resume execution; it leaves the
11382 program stopped in the state that would exist if the function had just
11383 returned. In contrast, the @code{finish} command (@pxref{Continuing
11384 and Stepping, ,Continuing and Stepping}) resumes execution until the
11385 selected stack frame returns naturally.
11388 @section Calling Program Functions
11391 @cindex calling functions
11392 @cindex inferior functions, calling
11393 @item print @var{expr}
11394 Evaluate the expression @var{expr} and display the resulting value.
11395 @var{expr} may include calls to functions in the program being
11399 @item call @var{expr}
11400 Evaluate the expression @var{expr} without displaying @code{void}
11403 You can use this variant of the @code{print} command if you want to
11404 execute a function from your program that does not return anything
11405 (a.k.a.@: @dfn{a void function}), but without cluttering the output
11406 with @code{void} returned values that @value{GDBN} will otherwise
11407 print. If the result is not void, it is printed and saved in the
11411 It is possible for the function you call via the @code{print} or
11412 @code{call} command to generate a signal (e.g., if there's a bug in
11413 the function, or if you passed it incorrect arguments). What happens
11414 in that case is controlled by the @code{set unwindonsignal} command.
11417 @item set unwindonsignal
11418 @kindex set unwindonsignal
11419 @cindex unwind stack in called functions
11420 @cindex call dummy stack unwinding
11421 Set unwinding of the stack if a signal is received while in a function
11422 that @value{GDBN} called in the program being debugged. If set to on,
11423 @value{GDBN} unwinds the stack it created for the call and restores
11424 the context to what it was before the call. If set to off (the
11425 default), @value{GDBN} stops in the frame where the signal was
11428 @item show unwindonsignal
11429 @kindex show unwindonsignal
11430 Show the current setting of stack unwinding in the functions called by
11434 @cindex weak alias functions
11435 Sometimes, a function you wish to call is actually a @dfn{weak alias}
11436 for another function. In such case, @value{GDBN} might not pick up
11437 the type information, including the types of the function arguments,
11438 which causes @value{GDBN} to call the inferior function incorrectly.
11439 As a result, the called function will function erroneously and may
11440 even crash. A solution to that is to use the name of the aliased
11444 @section Patching Programs
11446 @cindex patching binaries
11447 @cindex writing into executables
11448 @cindex writing into corefiles
11450 By default, @value{GDBN} opens the file containing your program's
11451 executable code (or the corefile) read-only. This prevents accidental
11452 alterations to machine code; but it also prevents you from intentionally
11453 patching your program's binary.
11455 If you'd like to be able to patch the binary, you can specify that
11456 explicitly with the @code{set write} command. For example, you might
11457 want to turn on internal debugging flags, or even to make emergency
11463 @itemx set write off
11464 If you specify @samp{set write on}, @value{GDBN} opens executable and
11465 core files for both reading and writing; if you specify @samp{set write
11466 off} (the default), @value{GDBN} opens them read-only.
11468 If you have already loaded a file, you must load it again (using the
11469 @code{exec-file} or @code{core-file} command) after changing @code{set
11470 write}, for your new setting to take effect.
11474 Display whether executable files and core files are opened for writing
11475 as well as reading.
11479 @chapter @value{GDBN} Files
11481 @value{GDBN} needs to know the file name of the program to be debugged,
11482 both in order to read its symbol table and in order to start your
11483 program. To debug a core dump of a previous run, you must also tell
11484 @value{GDBN} the name of the core dump file.
11487 * Files:: Commands to specify files
11488 * Separate Debug Files:: Debugging information in separate files
11489 * Symbol Errors:: Errors reading symbol files
11493 @section Commands to Specify Files
11495 @cindex symbol table
11496 @cindex core dump file
11498 You may want to specify executable and core dump file names. The usual
11499 way to do this is at start-up time, using the arguments to
11500 @value{GDBN}'s start-up commands (@pxref{Invocation, , Getting In and
11501 Out of @value{GDBN}}).
11503 Occasionally it is necessary to change to a different file during a
11504 @value{GDBN} session. Or you may run @value{GDBN} and forget to
11505 specify a file you want to use. Or you are debugging a remote target
11506 via @code{gdbserver} (@pxref{Server, file, Using the @code{gdbserver}
11507 Program}). In these situations the @value{GDBN} commands to specify
11508 new files are useful.
11511 @cindex executable file
11513 @item file @var{filename}
11514 Use @var{filename} as the program to be debugged. It is read for its
11515 symbols and for the contents of pure memory. It is also the program
11516 executed when you use the @code{run} command. If you do not specify a
11517 directory and the file is not found in the @value{GDBN} working directory,
11518 @value{GDBN} uses the environment variable @code{PATH} as a list of
11519 directories to search, just as the shell does when looking for a program
11520 to run. You can change the value of this variable, for both @value{GDBN}
11521 and your program, using the @code{path} command.
11523 @cindex unlinked object files
11524 @cindex patching object files
11525 You can load unlinked object @file{.o} files into @value{GDBN} using
11526 the @code{file} command. You will not be able to ``run'' an object
11527 file, but you can disassemble functions and inspect variables. Also,
11528 if the underlying BFD functionality supports it, you could use
11529 @kbd{gdb -write} to patch object files using this technique. Note
11530 that @value{GDBN} can neither interpret nor modify relocations in this
11531 case, so branches and some initialized variables will appear to go to
11532 the wrong place. But this feature is still handy from time to time.
11535 @code{file} with no argument makes @value{GDBN} discard any information it
11536 has on both executable file and the symbol table.
11539 @item exec-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
11540 Specify that the program to be run (but not the symbol table) is found
11541 in @var{filename}. @value{GDBN} searches the environment variable @code{PATH}
11542 if necessary to locate your program. Omitting @var{filename} means to
11543 discard information on the executable file.
11545 @kindex symbol-file
11546 @item symbol-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
11547 Read symbol table information from file @var{filename}. @code{PATH} is
11548 searched when necessary. Use the @code{file} command to get both symbol
11549 table and program to run from the same file.
11551 @code{symbol-file} with no argument clears out @value{GDBN} information on your
11552 program's symbol table.
11554 The @code{symbol-file} command causes @value{GDBN} to forget the contents of
11555 some breakpoints and auto-display expressions. This is because they may
11556 contain pointers to the internal data recording symbols and data types,
11557 which are part of the old symbol table data being discarded inside
11560 @code{symbol-file} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after
11563 When @value{GDBN} is configured for a particular environment, it
11564 understands debugging information in whatever format is the standard
11565 generated for that environment; you may use either a @sc{gnu} compiler, or
11566 other compilers that adhere to the local conventions.
11567 Best results are usually obtained from @sc{gnu} compilers; for example,
11568 using @code{@value{NGCC}} you can generate debugging information for
11571 For most kinds of object files, with the exception of old SVR3 systems
11572 using COFF, the @code{symbol-file} command does not normally read the
11573 symbol table in full right away. Instead, it scans the symbol table
11574 quickly to find which source files and which symbols are present. The
11575 details are read later, one source file at a time, as they are needed.
11577 The purpose of this two-stage reading strategy is to make @value{GDBN}
11578 start up faster. For the most part, it is invisible except for
11579 occasional pauses while the symbol table details for a particular source
11580 file are being read. (The @code{set verbose} command can turn these
11581 pauses into messages if desired. @xref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional
11582 Warnings and Messages}.)
11584 We have not implemented the two-stage strategy for COFF yet. When the
11585 symbol table is stored in COFF format, @code{symbol-file} reads the
11586 symbol table data in full right away. Note that ``stabs-in-COFF''
11587 still does the two-stage strategy, since the debug info is actually
11591 @cindex reading symbols immediately
11592 @cindex symbols, reading immediately
11593 @item symbol-file @var{filename} @r{[} -readnow @r{]}
11594 @itemx file @var{filename} @r{[} -readnow @r{]}
11595 You can override the @value{GDBN} two-stage strategy for reading symbol
11596 tables by using the @samp{-readnow} option with any of the commands that
11597 load symbol table information, if you want to be sure @value{GDBN} has the
11598 entire symbol table available.
11600 @c FIXME: for now no mention of directories, since this seems to be in
11601 @c flux. 13mar1992 status is that in theory GDB would look either in
11602 @c current dir or in same dir as myprog; but issues like competing
11603 @c GDB's, or clutter in system dirs, mean that in practice right now
11604 @c only current dir is used. FFish says maybe a special GDB hierarchy
11605 @c (eg rooted in val of env var GDBSYMS) could exist for mappable symbol
11609 @item core-file @r{[}@var{filename}@r{]}
11611 Specify the whereabouts of a core dump file to be used as the ``contents
11612 of memory''. Traditionally, core files contain only some parts of the
11613 address space of the process that generated them; @value{GDBN} can access the
11614 executable file itself for other parts.
11616 @code{core-file} with no argument specifies that no core file is
11619 Note that the core file is ignored when your program is actually running
11620 under @value{GDBN}. So, if you have been running your program and you
11621 wish to debug a core file instead, you must kill the subprocess in which
11622 the program is running. To do this, use the @code{kill} command
11623 (@pxref{Kill Process, ,Killing the Child Process}).
11625 @kindex add-symbol-file
11626 @cindex dynamic linking
11627 @item add-symbol-file @var{filename} @var{address}
11628 @itemx add-symbol-file @var{filename} @var{address} @r{[} -readnow @r{]}
11629 @itemx add-symbol-file @var{filename} @r{-s}@var{section} @var{address} @dots{}
11630 The @code{add-symbol-file} command reads additional symbol table
11631 information from the file @var{filename}. You would use this command
11632 when @var{filename} has been dynamically loaded (by some other means)
11633 into the program that is running. @var{address} should be the memory
11634 address at which the file has been loaded; @value{GDBN} cannot figure
11635 this out for itself. You can additionally specify an arbitrary number
11636 of @samp{@r{-s}@var{section} @var{address}} pairs, to give an explicit
11637 section name and base address for that section. You can specify any
11638 @var{address} as an expression.
11640 The symbol table of the file @var{filename} is added to the symbol table
11641 originally read with the @code{symbol-file} command. You can use the
11642 @code{add-symbol-file} command any number of times; the new symbol data
11643 thus read keeps adding to the old. To discard all old symbol data
11644 instead, use the @code{symbol-file} command without any arguments.
11646 @cindex relocatable object files, reading symbols from
11647 @cindex object files, relocatable, reading symbols from
11648 @cindex reading symbols from relocatable object files
11649 @cindex symbols, reading from relocatable object files
11650 @cindex @file{.o} files, reading symbols from
11651 Although @var{filename} is typically a shared library file, an
11652 executable file, or some other object file which has been fully
11653 relocated for loading into a process, you can also load symbolic
11654 information from relocatable @file{.o} files, as long as:
11658 the file's symbolic information refers only to linker symbols defined in
11659 that file, not to symbols defined by other object files,
11661 every section the file's symbolic information refers to has actually
11662 been loaded into the inferior, as it appears in the file, and
11664 you can determine the address at which every section was loaded, and
11665 provide these to the @code{add-symbol-file} command.
11669 Some embedded operating systems, like Sun Chorus and VxWorks, can load
11670 relocatable files into an already running program; such systems
11671 typically make the requirements above easy to meet. However, it's
11672 important to recognize that many native systems use complex link
11673 procedures (@code{.linkonce} section factoring and C@t{++} constructor table
11674 assembly, for example) that make the requirements difficult to meet. In
11675 general, one cannot assume that using @code{add-symbol-file} to read a
11676 relocatable object file's symbolic information will have the same effect
11677 as linking the relocatable object file into the program in the normal
11680 @code{add-symbol-file} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} after using it.
11682 @kindex add-symbol-file-from-memory
11683 @cindex @code{syscall DSO}
11684 @cindex load symbols from memory
11685 @item add-symbol-file-from-memory @var{address}
11686 Load symbols from the given @var{address} in a dynamically loaded
11687 object file whose image is mapped directly into the inferior's memory.
11688 For example, the Linux kernel maps a @code{syscall DSO} into each
11689 process's address space; this DSO provides kernel-specific code for
11690 some system calls. The argument can be any expression whose
11691 evaluation yields the address of the file's shared object file header.
11692 For this command to work, you must have used @code{symbol-file} or
11693 @code{exec-file} commands in advance.
11695 @kindex add-shared-symbol-files
11697 @item add-shared-symbol-files @var{library-file}
11698 @itemx assf @var{library-file}
11699 The @code{add-shared-symbol-files} command can currently be used only
11700 in the Cygwin build of @value{GDBN} on MS-Windows OS, where it is an
11701 alias for the @code{dll-symbols} command (@pxref{Cygwin Native}).
11702 @value{GDBN} automatically looks for shared libraries, however if
11703 @value{GDBN} does not find yours, you can invoke
11704 @code{add-shared-symbol-files}. It takes one argument: the shared
11705 library's file name. @code{assf} is a shorthand alias for
11706 @code{add-shared-symbol-files}.
11709 @item section @var{section} @var{addr}
11710 The @code{section} command changes the base address of the named
11711 @var{section} of the exec file to @var{addr}. This can be used if the
11712 exec file does not contain section addresses, (such as in the
11713 @code{a.out} format), or when the addresses specified in the file
11714 itself are wrong. Each section must be changed separately. The
11715 @code{info files} command, described below, lists all the sections and
11719 @kindex info target
11722 @code{info files} and @code{info target} are synonymous; both print the
11723 current target (@pxref{Targets, ,Specifying a Debugging Target}),
11724 including the names of the executable and core dump files currently in
11725 use by @value{GDBN}, and the files from which symbols were loaded. The
11726 command @code{help target} lists all possible targets rather than
11729 @kindex maint info sections
11730 @item maint info sections
11731 Another command that can give you extra information about program sections
11732 is @code{maint info sections}. In addition to the section information
11733 displayed by @code{info files}, this command displays the flags and file
11734 offset of each section in the executable and core dump files. In addition,
11735 @code{maint info sections} provides the following command options (which
11736 may be arbitrarily combined):
11740 Display sections for all loaded object files, including shared libraries.
11741 @item @var{sections}
11742 Display info only for named @var{sections}.
11743 @item @var{section-flags}
11744 Display info only for sections for which @var{section-flags} are true.
11745 The section flags that @value{GDBN} currently knows about are:
11748 Section will have space allocated in the process when loaded.
11749 Set for all sections except those containing debug information.
11751 Section will be loaded from the file into the child process memory.
11752 Set for pre-initialized code and data, clear for @code{.bss} sections.
11754 Section needs to be relocated before loading.
11756 Section cannot be modified by the child process.
11758 Section contains executable code only.
11760 Section contains data only (no executable code).
11762 Section will reside in ROM.
11764 Section contains data for constructor/destructor lists.
11766 Section is not empty.
11768 An instruction to the linker to not output the section.
11769 @item COFF_SHARED_LIBRARY
11770 A notification to the linker that the section contains
11771 COFF shared library information.
11773 Section contains common symbols.
11776 @kindex set trust-readonly-sections
11777 @cindex read-only sections
11778 @item set trust-readonly-sections on
11779 Tell @value{GDBN} that readonly sections in your object file
11780 really are read-only (i.e.@: that their contents will not change).
11781 In that case, @value{GDBN} can fetch values from these sections
11782 out of the object file, rather than from the target program.
11783 For some targets (notably embedded ones), this can be a significant
11784 enhancement to debugging performance.
11786 The default is off.
11788 @item set trust-readonly-sections off
11789 Tell @value{GDBN} not to trust readonly sections. This means that
11790 the contents of the section might change while the program is running,
11791 and must therefore be fetched from the target when needed.
11793 @item show trust-readonly-sections
11794 Show the current setting of trusting readonly sections.
11797 All file-specifying commands allow both absolute and relative file names
11798 as arguments. @value{GDBN} always converts the file name to an absolute file
11799 name and remembers it that way.
11801 @cindex shared libraries
11802 @value{GDBN} supports GNU/Linux, MS-Windows, HP-UX, SunOS, SVr4, Irix,
11803 and IBM RS/6000 AIX shared libraries.
11805 @value{GDBN} automatically loads symbol definitions from shared libraries
11806 when you use the @code{run} command, or when you examine a core file.
11807 (Before you issue the @code{run} command, @value{GDBN} does not understand
11808 references to a function in a shared library, however---unless you are
11809 debugging a core file).
11811 On HP-UX, if the program loads a library explicitly, @value{GDBN}
11812 automatically loads the symbols at the time of the @code{shl_load} call.
11814 @c FIXME: some @value{GDBN} release may permit some refs to undef
11815 @c FIXME...symbols---eg in a break cmd---assuming they are from a shared
11816 @c FIXME...lib; check this from time to time when updating manual
11818 There are times, however, when you may wish to not automatically load
11819 symbol definitions from shared libraries, such as when they are
11820 particularly large or there are many of them.
11822 To control the automatic loading of shared library symbols, use the
11826 @kindex set auto-solib-add
11827 @item set auto-solib-add @var{mode}
11828 If @var{mode} is @code{on}, symbols from all shared object libraries
11829 will be loaded automatically when the inferior begins execution, you
11830 attach to an independently started inferior, or when the dynamic linker
11831 informs @value{GDBN} that a new library has been loaded. If @var{mode}
11832 is @code{off}, symbols must be loaded manually, using the
11833 @code{sharedlibrary} command. The default value is @code{on}.
11835 @cindex memory used for symbol tables
11836 If your program uses lots of shared libraries with debug info that
11837 takes large amounts of memory, you can decrease the @value{GDBN}
11838 memory footprint by preventing it from automatically loading the
11839 symbols from shared libraries. To that end, type @kbd{set
11840 auto-solib-add off} before running the inferior, then load each
11841 library whose debug symbols you do need with @kbd{sharedlibrary
11842 @var{regexp}}, where @var{regexp} is a regular expression that matches
11843 the libraries whose symbols you want to be loaded.
11845 @kindex show auto-solib-add
11846 @item show auto-solib-add
11847 Display the current autoloading mode.
11850 @cindex load shared library
11851 To explicitly load shared library symbols, use the @code{sharedlibrary}
11855 @kindex info sharedlibrary
11858 @itemx info sharedlibrary
11859 Print the names of the shared libraries which are currently loaded.
11861 @kindex sharedlibrary
11863 @item sharedlibrary @var{regex}
11864 @itemx share @var{regex}
11865 Load shared object library symbols for files matching a
11866 Unix regular expression.
11867 As with files loaded automatically, it only loads shared libraries
11868 required by your program for a core file or after typing @code{run}. If
11869 @var{regex} is omitted all shared libraries required by your program are
11872 @item nosharedlibrary
11873 @kindex nosharedlibrary
11874 @cindex unload symbols from shared libraries
11875 Unload all shared object library symbols. This discards all symbols
11876 that have been loaded from all shared libraries. Symbols from shared
11877 libraries that were loaded by explicit user requests are not
11881 Sometimes you may wish that @value{GDBN} stops and gives you control
11882 when any of shared library events happen. Use the @code{set
11883 stop-on-solib-events} command for this:
11886 @item set stop-on-solib-events
11887 @kindex set stop-on-solib-events
11888 This command controls whether @value{GDBN} should give you control
11889 when the dynamic linker notifies it about some shared library event.
11890 The most common event of interest is loading or unloading of a new
11893 @item show stop-on-solib-events
11894 @kindex show stop-on-solib-events
11895 Show whether @value{GDBN} stops and gives you control when shared
11896 library events happen.
11899 Shared libraries are also supported in many cross or remote debugging
11900 configurations. A copy of the target's libraries need to be present on the
11901 host system; they need to be the same as the target libraries, although the
11902 copies on the target can be stripped as long as the copies on the host are
11905 @cindex where to look for shared libraries
11906 For remote debugging, you need to tell @value{GDBN} where the target
11907 libraries are, so that it can load the correct copies---otherwise, it
11908 may try to load the host's libraries. @value{GDBN} has two variables
11909 to specify the search directories for target libraries.
11912 @cindex prefix for shared library file names
11913 @cindex system root, alternate
11914 @kindex set solib-absolute-prefix
11915 @kindex set sysroot
11916 @item set sysroot @var{path}
11917 Use @var{path} as the system root for the program being debugged. Any
11918 absolute shared library paths will be prefixed with @var{path}; many
11919 runtime loaders store the absolute paths to the shared library in the
11920 target program's memory. If you use @code{set sysroot} to find shared
11921 libraries, they need to be laid out in the same way that they are on
11922 the target, with e.g.@: a @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib} hierarchy
11925 The @code{set solib-absolute-prefix} command is an alias for @code{set
11928 @cindex default system root
11929 @cindex @samp{--with-sysroot}
11930 You can set the default system root by using the configure-time
11931 @samp{--with-sysroot} option. If the system root is inside
11932 @value{GDBN}'s configured binary prefix (set with @samp{--prefix} or
11933 @samp{--exec-prefix}), then the default system root will be updated
11934 automatically if the installed @value{GDBN} is moved to a new
11937 @kindex show sysroot
11939 Display the current shared library prefix.
11941 @kindex set solib-search-path
11942 @item set solib-search-path @var{path}
11943 If this variable is set, @var{path} is a colon-separated list of
11944 directories to search for shared libraries. @samp{solib-search-path}
11945 is used after @samp{sysroot} fails to locate the library, or if the
11946 path to the library is relative instead of absolute. If you want to
11947 use @samp{solib-search-path} instead of @samp{sysroot}, be sure to set
11948 @samp{sysroot} to a nonexistent directory to prevent @value{GDBN} from
11949 finding your host's libraries. @samp{sysroot} is preferred; setting
11950 it to a nonexistent directory may interfere with automatic loading
11951 of shared library symbols.
11953 @kindex show solib-search-path
11954 @item show solib-search-path
11955 Display the current shared library search path.
11959 @node Separate Debug Files
11960 @section Debugging Information in Separate Files
11961 @cindex separate debugging information files
11962 @cindex debugging information in separate files
11963 @cindex @file{.debug} subdirectories
11964 @cindex debugging information directory, global
11965 @cindex global debugging information directory
11966 @cindex build ID, and separate debugging files
11967 @cindex @file{.build-id} directory
11969 @value{GDBN} allows you to put a program's debugging information in a
11970 file separate from the executable itself, in a way that allows
11971 @value{GDBN} to find and load the debugging information automatically.
11972 Since debugging information can be very large---sometimes larger
11973 than the executable code itself---some systems distribute debugging
11974 information for their executables in separate files, which users can
11975 install only when they need to debug a problem.
11977 @value{GDBN} supports two ways of specifying the separate debug info
11982 The executable contains a @dfn{debug link} that specifies the name of
11983 the separate debug info file. The separate debug file's name is
11984 usually @file{@var{executable}.debug}, where @var{executable} is the
11985 name of the corresponding executable file without leading directories
11986 (e.g., @file{ls.debug} for @file{/usr/bin/ls}). In addition, the
11987 debug link specifies a CRC32 checksum for the debug file, which
11988 @value{GDBN} uses to validate that the executable and the debug file
11989 came from the same build.
11992 The executable contains a @dfn{build ID}, a unique bit string that is
11993 also present in the corresponding debug info file. (This is supported
11994 only on some operating systems, notably those which use the ELF format
11995 for binary files and the @sc{gnu} Binutils.) For more details about
11996 this feature, see the description of the @option{--build-id}
11997 command-line option in @ref{Options, , Command Line Options, ld.info,
11998 The GNU Linker}. The debug info file's name is not specified
11999 explicitly by the build ID, but can be computed from the build ID, see
12003 Depending on the way the debug info file is specified, @value{GDBN}
12004 uses two different methods of looking for the debug file:
12008 For the ``debug link'' method, @value{GDBN} looks up the named file in
12009 the directory of the executable file, then in a subdirectory of that
12010 directory named @file{.debug}, and finally under the global debug
12011 directory, in a subdirectory whose name is identical to the leading
12012 directories of the executable's absolute file name.
12015 For the ``build ID'' method, @value{GDBN} looks in the
12016 @file{.build-id} subdirectory of the global debug directory for a file
12017 named @file{@var{nn}/@var{nnnnnnnn}.debug}, where @var{nn} are the
12018 first 2 hex characters of the build ID bit string, and @var{nnnnnnnn}
12019 are the rest of the bit string. (Real build ID strings are 32 or more
12020 hex characters, not 10.)
12023 So, for example, suppose you ask @value{GDBN} to debug
12024 @file{/usr/bin/ls}, which has a debug link that specifies the
12025 file @file{ls.debug}, and a build ID whose value in hex is
12026 @code{abcdef1234}. If the global debug directory is
12027 @file{/usr/lib/debug}, then @value{GDBN} will look for the following
12028 debug information files, in the indicated order:
12032 @file{/usr/lib/debug/.build-id/ab/cdef1234.debug}
12034 @file{/usr/bin/ls.debug}
12036 @file{/usr/bin/.debug/ls.debug}
12038 @file{/usr/lib/debug/usr/bin/ls.debug}.
12041 You can set the global debugging info directory's name, and view the
12042 name @value{GDBN} is currently using.
12046 @kindex set debug-file-directory
12047 @item set debug-file-directory @var{directory}
12048 Set the directory which @value{GDBN} searches for separate debugging
12049 information files to @var{directory}.
12051 @kindex show debug-file-directory
12052 @item show debug-file-directory
12053 Show the directory @value{GDBN} searches for separate debugging
12058 @cindex @code{.gnu_debuglink} sections
12059 @cindex debug link sections
12060 A debug link is a special section of the executable file named
12061 @code{.gnu_debuglink}. The section must contain:
12065 A filename, with any leading directory components removed, followed by
12068 zero to three bytes of padding, as needed to reach the next four-byte
12069 boundary within the section, and
12071 a four-byte CRC checksum, stored in the same endianness used for the
12072 executable file itself. The checksum is computed on the debugging
12073 information file's full contents by the function given below, passing
12074 zero as the @var{crc} argument.
12077 Any executable file format can carry a debug link, as long as it can
12078 contain a section named @code{.gnu_debuglink} with the contents
12081 @cindex @code{.note.gnu.build-id} sections
12082 @cindex build ID sections
12083 The build ID is a special section in the executable file (and in other
12084 ELF binary files that @value{GDBN} may consider). This section is
12085 often named @code{.note.gnu.build-id}, but that name is not mandatory.
12086 It contains unique identification for the built files---the ID remains
12087 the same across multiple builds of the same build tree. The default
12088 algorithm SHA1 produces 160 bits (40 hexadecimal characters) of the
12089 content for the build ID string. The same section with an identical
12090 value is present in the original built binary with symbols, in its
12091 stripped variant, and in the separate debugging information file.
12093 The debugging information file itself should be an ordinary
12094 executable, containing a full set of linker symbols, sections, and
12095 debugging information. The sections of the debugging information file
12096 should have the same names, addresses, and sizes as the original file,
12097 but they need not contain any data---much like a @code{.bss} section
12098 in an ordinary executable.
12100 The @sc{gnu} binary utilities (Binutils) package includes the
12101 @samp{objcopy} utility that can produce
12102 the separated executable / debugging information file pairs using the
12103 following commands:
12106 @kbd{objcopy --only-keep-debug foo foo.debug}
12111 These commands remove the debugging
12112 information from the executable file @file{foo} and place it in the file
12113 @file{foo.debug}. You can use the first, second or both methods to link the
12118 The debug link method needs the following additional command to also leave
12119 behind a debug link in @file{foo}:
12122 @kbd{objcopy --add-gnu-debuglink=foo.debug foo}
12125 Ulrich Drepper's @file{elfutils} package, starting with version 0.53, contains
12126 a version of the @code{strip} command such that the command @kbd{strip foo -f
12127 foo.debug} has the same functionality as the two @code{objcopy} commands and
12128 the @code{ln -s} command above, together.
12131 Build ID gets embedded into the main executable using @code{ld --build-id} or
12132 the @value{NGCC} counterpart @code{gcc -Wl,--build-id}. Build ID support plus
12133 compatibility fixes for debug files separation are present in @sc{gnu} binary
12134 utilities (Binutils) package since version 2.18.
12139 Since there are many different ways to compute CRC's for the debug
12140 link (different polynomials, reversals, byte ordering, etc.), the
12141 simplest way to describe the CRC used in @code{.gnu_debuglink}
12142 sections is to give the complete code for a function that computes it:
12144 @kindex gnu_debuglink_crc32
12147 gnu_debuglink_crc32 (unsigned long crc,
12148 unsigned char *buf, size_t len)
12150 static const unsigned long crc32_table[256] =
12152 0x00000000, 0x77073096, 0xee0e612c, 0x990951ba, 0x076dc419,
12153 0x706af48f, 0xe963a535, 0x9e6495a3, 0x0edb8832, 0x79dcb8a4,
12154 0xe0d5e91e, 0x97d2d988, 0x09b64c2b, 0x7eb17cbd, 0xe7b82d07,
12155 0x90bf1d91, 0x1db71064, 0x6ab020f2, 0xf3b97148, 0x84be41de,
12156 0x1adad47d, 0x6ddde4eb, 0xf4d4b551, 0x83d385c7, 0x136c9856,
12157 0x646ba8c0, 0xfd62f97a, 0x8a65c9ec, 0x14015c4f, 0x63066cd9,
12158 0xfa0f3d63, 0x8d080df5, 0x3b6e20c8, 0x4c69105e, 0xd56041e4,
12159 0xa2677172, 0x3c03e4d1, 0x4b04d447, 0xd20d85fd, 0xa50ab56b,
12160 0x35b5a8fa, 0x42b2986c, 0xdbbbc9d6, 0xacbcf940, 0x32d86ce3,
12161 0x45df5c75, 0xdcd60dcf, 0xabd13d59, 0x26d930ac, 0x51de003a,
12162 0xc8d75180, 0xbfd06116, 0x21b4f4b5, 0x56b3c423, 0xcfba9599,
12163 0xb8bda50f, 0x2802b89e, 0x5f058808, 0xc60cd9b2, 0xb10be924,
12164 0x2f6f7c87, 0x58684c11, 0xc1611dab, 0xb6662d3d, 0x76dc4190,
12165 0x01db7106, 0x98d220bc, 0xefd5102a, 0x71b18589, 0x06b6b51f,
12166 0x9fbfe4a5, 0xe8b8d433, 0x7807c9a2, 0x0f00f934, 0x9609a88e,
12167 0xe10e9818, 0x7f6a0dbb, 0x086d3d2d, 0x91646c97, 0xe6635c01,
12168 0x6b6b51f4, 0x1c6c6162, 0x856530d8, 0xf262004e, 0x6c0695ed,
12169 0x1b01a57b, 0x8208f4c1, 0xf50fc457, 0x65b0d9c6, 0x12b7e950,
12170 0x8bbeb8ea, 0xfcb9887c, 0x62dd1ddf, 0x15da2d49, 0x8cd37cf3,
12171 0xfbd44c65, 0x4db26158, 0x3ab551ce, 0xa3bc0074, 0xd4bb30e2,
12172 0x4adfa541, 0x3dd895d7, 0xa4d1c46d, 0xd3d6f4fb, 0x4369e96a,
12173 0x346ed9fc, 0xad678846, 0xda60b8d0, 0x44042d73, 0x33031de5,
12174 0xaa0a4c5f, 0xdd0d7cc9, 0x5005713c, 0x270241aa, 0xbe0b1010,
12175 0xc90c2086, 0x5768b525, 0x206f85b3, 0xb966d409, 0xce61e49f,
12176 0x5edef90e, 0x29d9c998, 0xb0d09822, 0xc7d7a8b4, 0x59b33d17,
12177 0x2eb40d81, 0xb7bd5c3b, 0xc0ba6cad, 0xedb88320, 0x9abfb3b6,
12178 0x03b6e20c, 0x74b1d29a, 0xead54739, 0x9dd277af, 0x04db2615,
12179 0x73dc1683, 0xe3630b12, 0x94643b84, 0x0d6d6a3e, 0x7a6a5aa8,
12180 0xe40ecf0b, 0x9309ff9d, 0x0a00ae27, 0x7d079eb1, 0xf00f9344,
12181 0x8708a3d2, 0x1e01f268, 0x6906c2fe, 0xf762575d, 0x806567cb,
12182 0x196c3671, 0x6e6b06e7, 0xfed41b76, 0x89d32be0, 0x10da7a5a,
12183 0x67dd4acc, 0xf9b9df6f, 0x8ebeeff9, 0x17b7be43, 0x60b08ed5,
12184 0xd6d6a3e8, 0xa1d1937e, 0x38d8c2c4, 0x4fdff252, 0xd1bb67f1,
12185 0xa6bc5767, 0x3fb506dd, 0x48b2364b, 0xd80d2bda, 0xaf0a1b4c,
12186 0x36034af6, 0x41047a60, 0xdf60efc3, 0xa867df55, 0x316e8eef,
12187 0x4669be79, 0xcb61b38c, 0xbc66831a, 0x256fd2a0, 0x5268e236,
12188 0xcc0c7795, 0xbb0b4703, 0x220216b9, 0x5505262f, 0xc5ba3bbe,
12189 0xb2bd0b28, 0x2bb45a92, 0x5cb36a04, 0xc2d7ffa7, 0xb5d0cf31,
12190 0x2cd99e8b, 0x5bdeae1d, 0x9b64c2b0, 0xec63f226, 0x756aa39c,
12191 0x026d930a, 0x9c0906a9, 0xeb0e363f, 0x72076785, 0x05005713,
12192 0x95bf4a82, 0xe2b87a14, 0x7bb12bae, 0x0cb61b38, 0x92d28e9b,
12193 0xe5d5be0d, 0x7cdcefb7, 0x0bdbdf21, 0x86d3d2d4, 0xf1d4e242,
12194 0x68ddb3f8, 0x1fda836e, 0x81be16cd, 0xf6b9265b, 0x6fb077e1,
12195 0x18b74777, 0x88085ae6, 0xff0f6a70, 0x66063bca, 0x11010b5c,
12196 0x8f659eff, 0xf862ae69, 0x616bffd3, 0x166ccf45, 0xa00ae278,
12197 0xd70dd2ee, 0x4e048354, 0x3903b3c2, 0xa7672661, 0xd06016f7,
12198 0x4969474d, 0x3e6e77db, 0xaed16a4a, 0xd9d65adc, 0x40df0b66,
12199 0x37d83bf0, 0xa9bcae53, 0xdebb9ec5, 0x47b2cf7f, 0x30b5ffe9,
12200 0xbdbdf21c, 0xcabac28a, 0x53b39330, 0x24b4a3a6, 0xbad03605,
12201 0xcdd70693, 0x54de5729, 0x23d967bf, 0xb3667a2e, 0xc4614ab8,
12202 0x5d681b02, 0x2a6f2b94, 0xb40bbe37, 0xc30c8ea1, 0x5a05df1b,
12205 unsigned char *end;
12207 crc = ~crc & 0xffffffff;
12208 for (end = buf + len; buf < end; ++buf)
12209 crc = crc32_table[(crc ^ *buf) & 0xff] ^ (crc >> 8);
12210 return ~crc & 0xffffffff;
12215 This computation does not apply to the ``build ID'' method.
12218 @node Symbol Errors
12219 @section Errors Reading Symbol Files
12221 While reading a symbol file, @value{GDBN} occasionally encounters problems,
12222 such as symbol types it does not recognize, or known bugs in compiler
12223 output. By default, @value{GDBN} does not notify you of such problems, since
12224 they are relatively common and primarily of interest to people
12225 debugging compilers. If you are interested in seeing information
12226 about ill-constructed symbol tables, you can either ask @value{GDBN} to print
12227 only one message about each such type of problem, no matter how many
12228 times the problem occurs; or you can ask @value{GDBN} to print more messages,
12229 to see how many times the problems occur, with the @code{set
12230 complaints} command (@pxref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional Warnings and
12233 The messages currently printed, and their meanings, include:
12236 @item inner block not inside outer block in @var{symbol}
12238 The symbol information shows where symbol scopes begin and end
12239 (such as at the start of a function or a block of statements). This
12240 error indicates that an inner scope block is not fully contained
12241 in its outer scope blocks.
12243 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by treating the inner block as if it had
12244 the same scope as the outer block. In the error message, @var{symbol}
12245 may be shown as ``@code{(don't know)}'' if the outer block is not a
12248 @item block at @var{address} out of order
12250 The symbol information for symbol scope blocks should occur in
12251 order of increasing addresses. This error indicates that it does not
12254 @value{GDBN} does not circumvent this problem, and has trouble
12255 locating symbols in the source file whose symbols it is reading. (You
12256 can often determine what source file is affected by specifying
12257 @code{set verbose on}. @xref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional Warnings and
12260 @item bad block start address patched
12262 The symbol information for a symbol scope block has a start address
12263 smaller than the address of the preceding source line. This is known
12264 to occur in the SunOS 4.1.1 (and earlier) C compiler.
12266 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by treating the symbol scope block as
12267 starting on the previous source line.
12269 @item bad string table offset in symbol @var{n}
12272 Symbol number @var{n} contains a pointer into the string table which is
12273 larger than the size of the string table.
12275 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by considering the symbol to have the
12276 name @code{foo}, which may cause other problems if many symbols end up
12279 @item unknown symbol type @code{0x@var{nn}}
12281 The symbol information contains new data types that @value{GDBN} does
12282 not yet know how to read. @code{0x@var{nn}} is the symbol type of the
12283 uncomprehended information, in hexadecimal.
12285 @value{GDBN} circumvents the error by ignoring this symbol information.
12286 This usually allows you to debug your program, though certain symbols
12287 are not accessible. If you encounter such a problem and feel like
12288 debugging it, you can debug @code{@value{GDBP}} with itself, breakpoint
12289 on @code{complain}, then go up to the function @code{read_dbx_symtab}
12290 and examine @code{*bufp} to see the symbol.
12292 @item stub type has NULL name
12294 @value{GDBN} could not find the full definition for a struct or class.
12296 @item const/volatile indicator missing (ok if using g++ v1.x), got@dots{}
12297 The symbol information for a C@t{++} member function is missing some
12298 information that recent versions of the compiler should have output for
12301 @item info mismatch between compiler and debugger
12303 @value{GDBN} could not parse a type specification output by the compiler.
12308 @chapter Specifying a Debugging Target
12310 @cindex debugging target
12311 A @dfn{target} is the execution environment occupied by your program.
12313 Often, @value{GDBN} runs in the same host environment as your program;
12314 in that case, the debugging target is specified as a side effect when
12315 you use the @code{file} or @code{core} commands. When you need more
12316 flexibility---for example, running @value{GDBN} on a physically separate
12317 host, or controlling a standalone system over a serial port or a
12318 realtime system over a TCP/IP connection---you can use the @code{target}
12319 command to specify one of the target types configured for @value{GDBN}
12320 (@pxref{Target Commands, ,Commands for Managing Targets}).
12322 @cindex target architecture
12323 It is possible to build @value{GDBN} for several different @dfn{target
12324 architectures}. When @value{GDBN} is built like that, you can choose
12325 one of the available architectures with the @kbd{set architecture}
12329 @kindex set architecture
12330 @kindex show architecture
12331 @item set architecture @var{arch}
12332 This command sets the current target architecture to @var{arch}. The
12333 value of @var{arch} can be @code{"auto"}, in addition to one of the
12334 supported architectures.
12336 @item show architecture
12337 Show the current target architecture.
12339 @item set processor
12341 @kindex set processor
12342 @kindex show processor
12343 These are alias commands for, respectively, @code{set architecture}
12344 and @code{show architecture}.
12348 * Active Targets:: Active targets
12349 * Target Commands:: Commands for managing targets
12350 * Byte Order:: Choosing target byte order
12353 @node Active Targets
12354 @section Active Targets
12356 @cindex stacking targets
12357 @cindex active targets
12358 @cindex multiple targets
12360 There are three classes of targets: processes, core files, and
12361 executable files. @value{GDBN} can work concurrently on up to three
12362 active targets, one in each class. This allows you to (for example)
12363 start a process and inspect its activity without abandoning your work on
12366 For example, if you execute @samp{gdb a.out}, then the executable file
12367 @code{a.out} is the only active target. If you designate a core file as
12368 well---presumably from a prior run that crashed and coredumped---then
12369 @value{GDBN} has two active targets and uses them in tandem, looking
12370 first in the corefile target, then in the executable file, to satisfy
12371 requests for memory addresses. (Typically, these two classes of target
12372 are complementary, since core files contain only a program's
12373 read-write memory---variables and so on---plus machine status, while
12374 executable files contain only the program text and initialized data.)
12376 When you type @code{run}, your executable file becomes an active process
12377 target as well. When a process target is active, all @value{GDBN}
12378 commands requesting memory addresses refer to that target; addresses in
12379 an active core file or executable file target are obscured while the
12380 process target is active.
12382 Use the @code{core-file} and @code{exec-file} commands to select a new
12383 core file or executable target (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to Specify
12384 Files}). To specify as a target a process that is already running, use
12385 the @code{attach} command (@pxref{Attach, ,Debugging an Already-running
12388 @node Target Commands
12389 @section Commands for Managing Targets
12392 @item target @var{type} @var{parameters}
12393 Connects the @value{GDBN} host environment to a target machine or
12394 process. A target is typically a protocol for talking to debugging
12395 facilities. You use the argument @var{type} to specify the type or
12396 protocol of the target machine.
12398 Further @var{parameters} are interpreted by the target protocol, but
12399 typically include things like device names or host names to connect
12400 with, process numbers, and baud rates.
12402 The @code{target} command does not repeat if you press @key{RET} again
12403 after executing the command.
12405 @kindex help target
12407 Displays the names of all targets available. To display targets
12408 currently selected, use either @code{info target} or @code{info files}
12409 (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to Specify Files}).
12411 @item help target @var{name}
12412 Describe a particular target, including any parameters necessary to
12415 @kindex set gnutarget
12416 @item set gnutarget @var{args}
12417 @value{GDBN} uses its own library BFD to read your files. @value{GDBN}
12418 knows whether it is reading an @dfn{executable},
12419 a @dfn{core}, or a @dfn{.o} file; however, you can specify the file format
12420 with the @code{set gnutarget} command. Unlike most @code{target} commands,
12421 with @code{gnutarget} the @code{target} refers to a program, not a machine.
12424 @emph{Warning:} To specify a file format with @code{set gnutarget},
12425 you must know the actual BFD name.
12429 @xref{Files, , Commands to Specify Files}.
12431 @kindex show gnutarget
12432 @item show gnutarget
12433 Use the @code{show gnutarget} command to display what file format
12434 @code{gnutarget} is set to read. If you have not set @code{gnutarget},
12435 @value{GDBN} will determine the file format for each file automatically,
12436 and @code{show gnutarget} displays @samp{The current BDF target is "auto"}.
12439 @cindex common targets
12440 Here are some common targets (available, or not, depending on the GDB
12445 @item target exec @var{program}
12446 @cindex executable file target
12447 An executable file. @samp{target exec @var{program}} is the same as
12448 @samp{exec-file @var{program}}.
12450 @item target core @var{filename}
12451 @cindex core dump file target
12452 A core dump file. @samp{target core @var{filename}} is the same as
12453 @samp{core-file @var{filename}}.
12455 @item target remote @var{medium}
12456 @cindex remote target
12457 A remote system connected to @value{GDBN} via a serial line or network
12458 connection. This command tells @value{GDBN} to use its own remote
12459 protocol over @var{medium} for debugging. @xref{Remote Debugging}.
12461 For example, if you have a board connected to @file{/dev/ttya} on the
12462 machine running @value{GDBN}, you could say:
12465 target remote /dev/ttya
12468 @code{target remote} supports the @code{load} command. This is only
12469 useful if you have some other way of getting the stub to the target
12470 system, and you can put it somewhere in memory where it won't get
12471 clobbered by the download.
12474 @cindex built-in simulator target
12475 Builtin CPU simulator. @value{GDBN} includes simulators for most architectures.
12483 works; however, you cannot assume that a specific memory map, device
12484 drivers, or even basic I/O is available, although some simulators do
12485 provide these. For info about any processor-specific simulator details,
12486 see the appropriate section in @ref{Embedded Processors, ,Embedded
12491 Some configurations may include these targets as well:
12495 @item target nrom @var{dev}
12496 @cindex NetROM ROM emulator target
12497 NetROM ROM emulator. This target only supports downloading.
12501 Different targets are available on different configurations of @value{GDBN};
12502 your configuration may have more or fewer targets.
12504 Many remote targets require you to download the executable's code once
12505 you've successfully established a connection. You may wish to control
12506 various aspects of this process.
12511 @kindex set hash@r{, for remote monitors}
12512 @cindex hash mark while downloading
12513 This command controls whether a hash mark @samp{#} is displayed while
12514 downloading a file to the remote monitor. If on, a hash mark is
12515 displayed after each S-record is successfully downloaded to the
12519 @kindex show hash@r{, for remote monitors}
12520 Show the current status of displaying the hash mark.
12522 @item set debug monitor
12523 @kindex set debug monitor
12524 @cindex display remote monitor communications
12525 Enable or disable display of communications messages between
12526 @value{GDBN} and the remote monitor.
12528 @item show debug monitor
12529 @kindex show debug monitor
12530 Show the current status of displaying communications between
12531 @value{GDBN} and the remote monitor.
12536 @kindex load @var{filename}
12537 @item load @var{filename}
12538 Depending on what remote debugging facilities are configured into
12539 @value{GDBN}, the @code{load} command may be available. Where it exists, it
12540 is meant to make @var{filename} (an executable) available for debugging
12541 on the remote system---by downloading, or dynamic linking, for example.
12542 @code{load} also records the @var{filename} symbol table in @value{GDBN}, like
12543 the @code{add-symbol-file} command.
12545 If your @value{GDBN} does not have a @code{load} command, attempting to
12546 execute it gets the error message ``@code{You can't do that when your
12547 target is @dots{}}''
12549 The file is loaded at whatever address is specified in the executable.
12550 For some object file formats, you can specify the load address when you
12551 link the program; for other formats, like a.out, the object file format
12552 specifies a fixed address.
12553 @c FIXME! This would be a good place for an xref to the GNU linker doc.
12555 Depending on the remote side capabilities, @value{GDBN} may be able to
12556 load programs into flash memory.
12558 @code{load} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after using it.
12562 @section Choosing Target Byte Order
12564 @cindex choosing target byte order
12565 @cindex target byte order
12567 Some types of processors, such as the MIPS, PowerPC, and Renesas SH,
12568 offer the ability to run either big-endian or little-endian byte
12569 orders. Usually the executable or symbol will include a bit to
12570 designate the endian-ness, and you will not need to worry about
12571 which to use. However, you may still find it useful to adjust
12572 @value{GDBN}'s idea of processor endian-ness manually.
12576 @item set endian big
12577 Instruct @value{GDBN} to assume the target is big-endian.
12579 @item set endian little
12580 Instruct @value{GDBN} to assume the target is little-endian.
12582 @item set endian auto
12583 Instruct @value{GDBN} to use the byte order associated with the
12587 Display @value{GDBN}'s current idea of the target byte order.
12591 Note that these commands merely adjust interpretation of symbolic
12592 data on the host, and that they have absolutely no effect on the
12596 @node Remote Debugging
12597 @chapter Debugging Remote Programs
12598 @cindex remote debugging
12600 If you are trying to debug a program running on a machine that cannot run
12601 @value{GDBN} in the usual way, it is often useful to use remote debugging.
12602 For example, you might use remote debugging on an operating system kernel,
12603 or on a small system which does not have a general purpose operating system
12604 powerful enough to run a full-featured debugger.
12606 Some configurations of @value{GDBN} have special serial or TCP/IP interfaces
12607 to make this work with particular debugging targets. In addition,
12608 @value{GDBN} comes with a generic serial protocol (specific to @value{GDBN},
12609 but not specific to any particular target system) which you can use if you
12610 write the remote stubs---the code that runs on the remote system to
12611 communicate with @value{GDBN}.
12613 Other remote targets may be available in your
12614 configuration of @value{GDBN}; use @code{help target} to list them.
12617 * Connecting:: Connecting to a remote target
12618 * Server:: Using the gdbserver program
12619 * Remote Configuration:: Remote configuration
12620 * Remote Stub:: Implementing a remote stub
12624 @section Connecting to a Remote Target
12626 On the @value{GDBN} host machine, you will need an unstripped copy of
12627 your program, since @value{GDBN} needs symbol and debugging information.
12628 Start up @value{GDBN} as usual, using the name of the local copy of your
12629 program as the first argument.
12631 @cindex @code{target remote}
12632 @value{GDBN} can communicate with the target over a serial line, or
12633 over an @acronym{IP} network using @acronym{TCP} or @acronym{UDP}. In
12634 each case, @value{GDBN} uses the same protocol for debugging your
12635 program; only the medium carrying the debugging packets varies. The
12636 @code{target remote} command establishes a connection to the target.
12637 Its arguments indicate which medium to use:
12641 @item target remote @var{serial-device}
12642 @cindex serial line, @code{target remote}
12643 Use @var{serial-device} to communicate with the target. For example,
12644 to use a serial line connected to the device named @file{/dev/ttyb}:
12647 target remote /dev/ttyb
12650 If you're using a serial line, you may want to give @value{GDBN} the
12651 @w{@samp{--baud}} option, or use the @code{set remotebaud} command
12652 (@pxref{Remote Configuration, set remotebaud}) before the
12653 @code{target} command.
12655 @item target remote @code{@var{host}:@var{port}}
12656 @itemx target remote @code{tcp:@var{host}:@var{port}}
12657 @cindex @acronym{TCP} port, @code{target remote}
12658 Debug using a @acronym{TCP} connection to @var{port} on @var{host}.
12659 The @var{host} may be either a host name or a numeric @acronym{IP}
12660 address; @var{port} must be a decimal number. The @var{host} could be
12661 the target machine itself, if it is directly connected to the net, or
12662 it might be a terminal server which in turn has a serial line to the
12665 For example, to connect to port 2828 on a terminal server named
12669 target remote manyfarms:2828
12672 If your remote target is actually running on the same machine as your
12673 debugger session (e.g.@: a simulator for your target running on the
12674 same host), you can omit the hostname. For example, to connect to
12675 port 1234 on your local machine:
12678 target remote :1234
12682 Note that the colon is still required here.
12684 @item target remote @code{udp:@var{host}:@var{port}}
12685 @cindex @acronym{UDP} port, @code{target remote}
12686 Debug using @acronym{UDP} packets to @var{port} on @var{host}. For example, to
12687 connect to @acronym{UDP} port 2828 on a terminal server named @code{manyfarms}:
12690 target remote udp:manyfarms:2828
12693 When using a @acronym{UDP} connection for remote debugging, you should
12694 keep in mind that the `U' stands for ``Unreliable''. @acronym{UDP}
12695 can silently drop packets on busy or unreliable networks, which will
12696 cause havoc with your debugging session.
12698 @item target remote | @var{command}
12699 @cindex pipe, @code{target remote} to
12700 Run @var{command} in the background and communicate with it using a
12701 pipe. The @var{command} is a shell command, to be parsed and expanded
12702 by the system's command shell, @code{/bin/sh}; it should expect remote
12703 protocol packets on its standard input, and send replies on its
12704 standard output. You could use this to run a stand-alone simulator
12705 that speaks the remote debugging protocol, to make net connections
12706 using programs like @code{ssh}, or for other similar tricks.
12708 If @var{command} closes its standard output (perhaps by exiting),
12709 @value{GDBN} will try to send it a @code{SIGTERM} signal. (If the
12710 program has already exited, this will have no effect.)
12714 Once the connection has been established, you can use all the usual
12715 commands to examine and change data and to step and continue the
12718 @cindex interrupting remote programs
12719 @cindex remote programs, interrupting
12720 Whenever @value{GDBN} is waiting for the remote program, if you type the
12721 interrupt character (often @kbd{Ctrl-c}), @value{GDBN} attempts to stop the
12722 program. This may or may not succeed, depending in part on the hardware
12723 and the serial drivers the remote system uses. If you type the
12724 interrupt character once again, @value{GDBN} displays this prompt:
12727 Interrupted while waiting for the program.
12728 Give up (and stop debugging it)? (y or n)
12731 If you type @kbd{y}, @value{GDBN} abandons the remote debugging session.
12732 (If you decide you want to try again later, you can use @samp{target
12733 remote} again to connect once more.) If you type @kbd{n}, @value{GDBN}
12734 goes back to waiting.
12737 @kindex detach (remote)
12739 When you have finished debugging the remote program, you can use the
12740 @code{detach} command to release it from @value{GDBN} control.
12741 Detaching from the target normally resumes its execution, but the results
12742 will depend on your particular remote stub. After the @code{detach}
12743 command, @value{GDBN} is free to connect to another target.
12747 The @code{disconnect} command behaves like @code{detach}, except that
12748 the target is generally not resumed. It will wait for @value{GDBN}
12749 (this instance or another one) to connect and continue debugging. After
12750 the @code{disconnect} command, @value{GDBN} is again free to connect to
12753 @cindex send command to remote monitor
12754 @cindex extend @value{GDBN} for remote targets
12755 @cindex add new commands for external monitor
12757 @item monitor @var{cmd}
12758 This command allows you to send arbitrary commands directly to the
12759 remote monitor. Since @value{GDBN} doesn't care about the commands it
12760 sends like this, this command is the way to extend @value{GDBN}---you
12761 can add new commands that only the external monitor will understand
12766 @section Using the @code{gdbserver} Program
12769 @cindex remote connection without stubs
12770 @code{gdbserver} is a control program for Unix-like systems, which
12771 allows you to connect your program with a remote @value{GDBN} via
12772 @code{target remote}---but without linking in the usual debugging stub.
12774 @code{gdbserver} is not a complete replacement for the debugging stubs,
12775 because it requires essentially the same operating-system facilities
12776 that @value{GDBN} itself does. In fact, a system that can run
12777 @code{gdbserver} to connect to a remote @value{GDBN} could also run
12778 @value{GDBN} locally! @code{gdbserver} is sometimes useful nevertheless,
12779 because it is a much smaller program than @value{GDBN} itself. It is
12780 also easier to port than all of @value{GDBN}, so you may be able to get
12781 started more quickly on a new system by using @code{gdbserver}.
12782 Finally, if you develop code for real-time systems, you may find that
12783 the tradeoffs involved in real-time operation make it more convenient to
12784 do as much development work as possible on another system, for example
12785 by cross-compiling. You can use @code{gdbserver} to make a similar
12786 choice for debugging.
12788 @value{GDBN} and @code{gdbserver} communicate via either a serial line
12789 or a TCP connection, using the standard @value{GDBN} remote serial
12793 @item On the target machine,
12794 you need to have a copy of the program you want to debug.
12795 @code{gdbserver} does not need your program's symbol table, so you can
12796 strip the program if necessary to save space. @value{GDBN} on the host
12797 system does all the symbol handling.
12799 To use the server, you must tell it how to communicate with @value{GDBN};
12800 the name of your program; and the arguments for your program. The usual
12804 target> gdbserver @var{comm} @var{program} [ @var{args} @dots{} ]
12807 @var{comm} is either a device name (to use a serial line) or a TCP
12808 hostname and portnumber. For example, to debug Emacs with the argument
12809 @samp{foo.txt} and communicate with @value{GDBN} over the serial port
12813 target> gdbserver /dev/com1 emacs foo.txt
12816 @code{gdbserver} waits passively for the host @value{GDBN} to communicate
12819 To use a TCP connection instead of a serial line:
12822 target> gdbserver host:2345 emacs foo.txt
12825 The only difference from the previous example is the first argument,
12826 specifying that you are communicating with the host @value{GDBN} via
12827 TCP. The @samp{host:2345} argument means that @code{gdbserver} is to
12828 expect a TCP connection from machine @samp{host} to local TCP port 2345.
12829 (Currently, the @samp{host} part is ignored.) You can choose any number
12830 you want for the port number as long as it does not conflict with any
12831 TCP ports already in use on the target system (for example, @code{23} is
12832 reserved for @code{telnet}).@footnote{If you choose a port number that
12833 conflicts with another service, @code{gdbserver} prints an error message
12834 and exits.} You must use the same port number with the host @value{GDBN}
12835 @code{target remote} command.
12837 On some targets, @code{gdbserver} can also attach to running programs.
12838 This is accomplished via the @code{--attach} argument. The syntax is:
12841 target> gdbserver @var{comm} --attach @var{pid}
12844 @var{pid} is the process ID of a currently running process. It isn't necessary
12845 to point @code{gdbserver} at a binary for the running process.
12848 @cindex attach to a program by name
12849 You can debug processes by name instead of process ID if your target has the
12850 @code{pidof} utility:
12853 target> gdbserver @var{comm} --attach `pidof @var{program}`
12856 In case more than one copy of @var{program} is running, or @var{program}
12857 has multiple threads, most versions of @code{pidof} support the
12858 @code{-s} option to only return the first process ID.
12860 @item On the host machine,
12861 first make sure you have the necessary symbol files. Load symbols for
12862 your application using the @code{file} command before you connect. Use
12863 @code{set sysroot} to locate target libraries (unless your @value{GDBN}
12864 was compiled with the correct sysroot using @code{--with-system-root}).
12866 The symbol file and target libraries must exactly match the executable
12867 and libraries on the target, with one exception: the files on the host
12868 system should not be stripped, even if the files on the target system
12869 are. Mismatched or missing files will lead to confusing results
12870 during debugging. On @sc{gnu}/Linux targets, mismatched or missing
12871 files may also prevent @code{gdbserver} from debugging multi-threaded
12874 Connect to your target (@pxref{Connecting,,Connecting to a Remote Target}).
12875 For TCP connections, you must start up @code{gdbserver} prior to using
12876 the @code{target remote} command. Otherwise you may get an error whose
12877 text depends on the host system, but which usually looks something like
12878 @samp{Connection refused}. You don't need to use the @code{load}
12879 command in @value{GDBN} when using @code{gdbserver}, since the program is
12880 already on the target.
12884 @subsection Monitor Commands for @code{gdbserver}
12885 @cindex monitor commands, for @code{gdbserver}
12887 During a @value{GDBN} session using @code{gdbserver}, you can use the
12888 @code{monitor} command to send special requests to @code{gdbserver}.
12889 Here are the available commands; they are only of interest when
12890 debugging @value{GDBN} or @code{gdbserver}.
12894 List the available monitor commands.
12896 @item monitor set debug 0
12897 @itemx monitor set debug 1
12898 Disable or enable general debugging messages.
12900 @item monitor set remote-debug 0
12901 @itemx monitor set remote-debug 1
12902 Disable or enable specific debugging messages associated with the remote
12903 protocol (@pxref{Remote Protocol}).
12907 @node Remote Configuration
12908 @section Remote Configuration
12911 @kindex show remote
12912 This section documents the configuration options available when
12913 debugging remote programs. For the options related to the File I/O
12914 extensions of the remote protocol, see @ref{system,
12915 system-call-allowed}.
12918 @item set remoteaddresssize @var{bits}
12919 @cindex address size for remote targets
12920 @cindex bits in remote address
12921 Set the maximum size of address in a memory packet to the specified
12922 number of bits. @value{GDBN} will mask off the address bits above
12923 that number, when it passes addresses to the remote target. The
12924 default value is the number of bits in the target's address.
12926 @item show remoteaddresssize
12927 Show the current value of remote address size in bits.
12929 @item set remotebaud @var{n}
12930 @cindex baud rate for remote targets
12931 Set the baud rate for the remote serial I/O to @var{n} baud. The
12932 value is used to set the speed of the serial port used for debugging
12935 @item show remotebaud
12936 Show the current speed of the remote connection.
12938 @item set remotebreak
12939 @cindex interrupt remote programs
12940 @cindex BREAK signal instead of Ctrl-C
12941 @anchor{set remotebreak}
12942 If set to on, @value{GDBN} sends a @code{BREAK} signal to the remote
12943 when you type @kbd{Ctrl-c} to interrupt the program running
12944 on the remote. If set to off, @value{GDBN} sends the @samp{Ctrl-C}
12945 character instead. The default is off, since most remote systems
12946 expect to see @samp{Ctrl-C} as the interrupt signal.
12948 @item show remotebreak
12949 Show whether @value{GDBN} sends @code{BREAK} or @samp{Ctrl-C} to
12950 interrupt the remote program.
12952 @item set remoteflow on
12953 @itemx set remoteflow off
12954 @kindex set remoteflow
12955 Enable or disable hardware flow control (@code{RTS}/@code{CTS})
12956 on the serial port used to communicate to the remote target.
12958 @item show remoteflow
12959 @kindex show remoteflow
12960 Show the current setting of hardware flow control.
12962 @item set remotelogbase @var{base}
12963 Set the base (a.k.a.@: radix) of logging serial protocol
12964 communications to @var{base}. Supported values of @var{base} are:
12965 @code{ascii}, @code{octal}, and @code{hex}. The default is
12968 @item show remotelogbase
12969 Show the current setting of the radix for logging remote serial
12972 @item set remotelogfile @var{file}
12973 @cindex record serial communications on file
12974 Record remote serial communications on the named @var{file}. The
12975 default is not to record at all.
12977 @item show remotelogfile.
12978 Show the current setting of the file name on which to record the
12979 serial communications.
12981 @item set remotetimeout @var{num}
12982 @cindex timeout for serial communications
12983 @cindex remote timeout
12984 Set the timeout limit to wait for the remote target to respond to
12985 @var{num} seconds. The default is 2 seconds.
12987 @item show remotetimeout
12988 Show the current number of seconds to wait for the remote target
12991 @cindex limit hardware breakpoints and watchpoints
12992 @cindex remote target, limit break- and watchpoints
12993 @anchor{set remote hardware-watchpoint-limit}
12994 @anchor{set remote hardware-breakpoint-limit}
12995 @item set remote hardware-watchpoint-limit @var{limit}
12996 @itemx set remote hardware-breakpoint-limit @var{limit}
12997 Restrict @value{GDBN} to using @var{limit} remote hardware breakpoint or
12998 watchpoints. A limit of -1, the default, is treated as unlimited.
13001 @cindex remote packets, enabling and disabling
13002 The @value{GDBN} remote protocol autodetects the packets supported by
13003 your debugging stub. If you need to override the autodetection, you
13004 can use these commands to enable or disable individual packets. Each
13005 packet can be set to @samp{on} (the remote target supports this
13006 packet), @samp{off} (the remote target does not support this packet),
13007 or @samp{auto} (detect remote target support for this packet). They
13008 all default to @samp{auto}. For more information about each packet,
13009 see @ref{Remote Protocol}.
13011 During normal use, you should not have to use any of these commands.
13012 If you do, that may be a bug in your remote debugging stub, or a bug
13013 in @value{GDBN}. You may want to report the problem to the
13014 @value{GDBN} developers.
13016 For each packet @var{name}, the command to enable or disable the
13017 packet is @code{set remote @var{name}-packet}. The available settings
13020 @multitable @columnfractions 0.28 0.32 0.25
13023 @tab Related Features
13025 @item @code{fetch-register}
13027 @tab @code{info registers}
13029 @item @code{set-register}
13033 @item @code{binary-download}
13035 @tab @code{load}, @code{set}
13037 @item @code{read-aux-vector}
13038 @tab @code{qXfer:auxv:read}
13039 @tab @code{info auxv}
13041 @item @code{symbol-lookup}
13042 @tab @code{qSymbol}
13043 @tab Detecting multiple threads
13045 @item @code{verbose-resume}
13047 @tab Stepping or resuming multiple threads
13049 @item @code{software-breakpoint}
13053 @item @code{hardware-breakpoint}
13057 @item @code{write-watchpoint}
13061 @item @code{read-watchpoint}
13065 @item @code{access-watchpoint}
13069 @item @code{target-features}
13070 @tab @code{qXfer:features:read}
13071 @tab @code{set architecture}
13073 @item @code{library-info}
13074 @tab @code{qXfer:libraries:read}
13075 @tab @code{info sharedlibrary}
13077 @item @code{memory-map}
13078 @tab @code{qXfer:memory-map:read}
13079 @tab @code{info mem}
13081 @item @code{read-spu-object}
13082 @tab @code{qXfer:spu:read}
13083 @tab @code{info spu}
13085 @item @code{write-spu-object}
13086 @tab @code{qXfer:spu:write}
13087 @tab @code{info spu}
13089 @item @code{get-thread-local-@*storage-address}
13090 @tab @code{qGetTLSAddr}
13091 @tab Displaying @code{__thread} variables
13093 @item @code{supported-packets}
13094 @tab @code{qSupported}
13095 @tab Remote communications parameters
13097 @item @code{pass-signals}
13098 @tab @code{QPassSignals}
13099 @tab @code{handle @var{signal}}
13104 @section Implementing a Remote Stub
13106 @cindex debugging stub, example
13107 @cindex remote stub, example
13108 @cindex stub example, remote debugging
13109 The stub files provided with @value{GDBN} implement the target side of the
13110 communication protocol, and the @value{GDBN} side is implemented in the
13111 @value{GDBN} source file @file{remote.c}. Normally, you can simply allow
13112 these subroutines to communicate, and ignore the details. (If you're
13113 implementing your own stub file, you can still ignore the details: start
13114 with one of the existing stub files. @file{sparc-stub.c} is the best
13115 organized, and therefore the easiest to read.)
13117 @cindex remote serial debugging, overview
13118 To debug a program running on another machine (the debugging
13119 @dfn{target} machine), you must first arrange for all the usual
13120 prerequisites for the program to run by itself. For example, for a C
13125 A startup routine to set up the C runtime environment; these usually
13126 have a name like @file{crt0}. The startup routine may be supplied by
13127 your hardware supplier, or you may have to write your own.
13130 A C subroutine library to support your program's
13131 subroutine calls, notably managing input and output.
13134 A way of getting your program to the other machine---for example, a
13135 download program. These are often supplied by the hardware
13136 manufacturer, but you may have to write your own from hardware
13140 The next step is to arrange for your program to use a serial port to
13141 communicate with the machine where @value{GDBN} is running (the @dfn{host}
13142 machine). In general terms, the scheme looks like this:
13146 @value{GDBN} already understands how to use this protocol; when everything
13147 else is set up, you can simply use the @samp{target remote} command
13148 (@pxref{Targets,,Specifying a Debugging Target}).
13150 @item On the target,
13151 you must link with your program a few special-purpose subroutines that
13152 implement the @value{GDBN} remote serial protocol. The file containing these
13153 subroutines is called a @dfn{debugging stub}.
13155 On certain remote targets, you can use an auxiliary program
13156 @code{gdbserver} instead of linking a stub into your program.
13157 @xref{Server,,Using the @code{gdbserver} Program}, for details.
13160 The debugging stub is specific to the architecture of the remote
13161 machine; for example, use @file{sparc-stub.c} to debug programs on
13164 @cindex remote serial stub list
13165 These working remote stubs are distributed with @value{GDBN}:
13170 @cindex @file{i386-stub.c}
13173 For Intel 386 and compatible architectures.
13176 @cindex @file{m68k-stub.c}
13177 @cindex Motorola 680x0
13179 For Motorola 680x0 architectures.
13182 @cindex @file{sh-stub.c}
13185 For Renesas SH architectures.
13188 @cindex @file{sparc-stub.c}
13190 For @sc{sparc} architectures.
13192 @item sparcl-stub.c
13193 @cindex @file{sparcl-stub.c}
13196 For Fujitsu @sc{sparclite} architectures.
13200 The @file{README} file in the @value{GDBN} distribution may list other
13201 recently added stubs.
13204 * Stub Contents:: What the stub can do for you
13205 * Bootstrapping:: What you must do for the stub
13206 * Debug Session:: Putting it all together
13209 @node Stub Contents
13210 @subsection What the Stub Can Do for You
13212 @cindex remote serial stub
13213 The debugging stub for your architecture supplies these three
13217 @item set_debug_traps
13218 @findex set_debug_traps
13219 @cindex remote serial stub, initialization
13220 This routine arranges for @code{handle_exception} to run when your
13221 program stops. You must call this subroutine explicitly near the
13222 beginning of your program.
13224 @item handle_exception
13225 @findex handle_exception
13226 @cindex remote serial stub, main routine
13227 This is the central workhorse, but your program never calls it
13228 explicitly---the setup code arranges for @code{handle_exception} to
13229 run when a trap is triggered.
13231 @code{handle_exception} takes control when your program stops during
13232 execution (for example, on a breakpoint), and mediates communications
13233 with @value{GDBN} on the host machine. This is where the communications
13234 protocol is implemented; @code{handle_exception} acts as the @value{GDBN}
13235 representative on the target machine. It begins by sending summary
13236 information on the state of your program, then continues to execute,
13237 retrieving and transmitting any information @value{GDBN} needs, until you
13238 execute a @value{GDBN} command that makes your program resume; at that point,
13239 @code{handle_exception} returns control to your own code on the target
13243 @cindex @code{breakpoint} subroutine, remote
13244 Use this auxiliary subroutine to make your program contain a
13245 breakpoint. Depending on the particular situation, this may be the only
13246 way for @value{GDBN} to get control. For instance, if your target
13247 machine has some sort of interrupt button, you won't need to call this;
13248 pressing the interrupt button transfers control to
13249 @code{handle_exception}---in effect, to @value{GDBN}. On some machines,
13250 simply receiving characters on the serial port may also trigger a trap;
13251 again, in that situation, you don't need to call @code{breakpoint} from
13252 your own program---simply running @samp{target remote} from the host
13253 @value{GDBN} session gets control.
13255 Call @code{breakpoint} if none of these is true, or if you simply want
13256 to make certain your program stops at a predetermined point for the
13257 start of your debugging session.
13260 @node Bootstrapping
13261 @subsection What You Must Do for the Stub
13263 @cindex remote stub, support routines
13264 The debugging stubs that come with @value{GDBN} are set up for a particular
13265 chip architecture, but they have no information about the rest of your
13266 debugging target machine.
13268 First of all you need to tell the stub how to communicate with the
13272 @item int getDebugChar()
13273 @findex getDebugChar
13274 Write this subroutine to read a single character from the serial port.
13275 It may be identical to @code{getchar} for your target system; a
13276 different name is used to allow you to distinguish the two if you wish.
13278 @item void putDebugChar(int)
13279 @findex putDebugChar
13280 Write this subroutine to write a single character to the serial port.
13281 It may be identical to @code{putchar} for your target system; a
13282 different name is used to allow you to distinguish the two if you wish.
13285 @cindex control C, and remote debugging
13286 @cindex interrupting remote targets
13287 If you want @value{GDBN} to be able to stop your program while it is
13288 running, you need to use an interrupt-driven serial driver, and arrange
13289 for it to stop when it receives a @code{^C} (@samp{\003}, the control-C
13290 character). That is the character which @value{GDBN} uses to tell the
13291 remote system to stop.
13293 Getting the debugging target to return the proper status to @value{GDBN}
13294 probably requires changes to the standard stub; one quick and dirty way
13295 is to just execute a breakpoint instruction (the ``dirty'' part is that
13296 @value{GDBN} reports a @code{SIGTRAP} instead of a @code{SIGINT}).
13298 Other routines you need to supply are:
13301 @item void exceptionHandler (int @var{exception_number}, void *@var{exception_address})
13302 @findex exceptionHandler
13303 Write this function to install @var{exception_address} in the exception
13304 handling tables. You need to do this because the stub does not have any
13305 way of knowing what the exception handling tables on your target system
13306 are like (for example, the processor's table might be in @sc{rom},
13307 containing entries which point to a table in @sc{ram}).
13308 @var{exception_number} is the exception number which should be changed;
13309 its meaning is architecture-dependent (for example, different numbers
13310 might represent divide by zero, misaligned access, etc). When this
13311 exception occurs, control should be transferred directly to
13312 @var{exception_address}, and the processor state (stack, registers,
13313 and so on) should be just as it is when a processor exception occurs. So if
13314 you want to use a jump instruction to reach @var{exception_address}, it
13315 should be a simple jump, not a jump to subroutine.
13317 For the 386, @var{exception_address} should be installed as an interrupt
13318 gate so that interrupts are masked while the handler runs. The gate
13319 should be at privilege level 0 (the most privileged level). The
13320 @sc{sparc} and 68k stubs are able to mask interrupts themselves without
13321 help from @code{exceptionHandler}.
13323 @item void flush_i_cache()
13324 @findex flush_i_cache
13325 On @sc{sparc} and @sc{sparclite} only, write this subroutine to flush the
13326 instruction cache, if any, on your target machine. If there is no
13327 instruction cache, this subroutine may be a no-op.
13329 On target machines that have instruction caches, @value{GDBN} requires this
13330 function to make certain that the state of your program is stable.
13334 You must also make sure this library routine is available:
13337 @item void *memset(void *, int, int)
13339 This is the standard library function @code{memset} that sets an area of
13340 memory to a known value. If you have one of the free versions of
13341 @code{libc.a}, @code{memset} can be found there; otherwise, you must
13342 either obtain it from your hardware manufacturer, or write your own.
13345 If you do not use the GNU C compiler, you may need other standard
13346 library subroutines as well; this varies from one stub to another,
13347 but in general the stubs are likely to use any of the common library
13348 subroutines which @code{@value{NGCC}} generates as inline code.
13351 @node Debug Session
13352 @subsection Putting it All Together
13354 @cindex remote serial debugging summary
13355 In summary, when your program is ready to debug, you must follow these
13360 Make sure you have defined the supporting low-level routines
13361 (@pxref{Bootstrapping,,What You Must Do for the Stub}):
13363 @code{getDebugChar}, @code{putDebugChar},
13364 @code{flush_i_cache}, @code{memset}, @code{exceptionHandler}.
13368 Insert these lines near the top of your program:
13376 For the 680x0 stub only, you need to provide a variable called
13377 @code{exceptionHook}. Normally you just use:
13380 void (*exceptionHook)() = 0;
13384 but if before calling @code{set_debug_traps}, you set it to point to a
13385 function in your program, that function is called when
13386 @code{@value{GDBN}} continues after stopping on a trap (for example, bus
13387 error). The function indicated by @code{exceptionHook} is called with
13388 one parameter: an @code{int} which is the exception number.
13391 Compile and link together: your program, the @value{GDBN} debugging stub for
13392 your target architecture, and the supporting subroutines.
13395 Make sure you have a serial connection between your target machine and
13396 the @value{GDBN} host, and identify the serial port on the host.
13399 @c The "remote" target now provides a `load' command, so we should
13400 @c document that. FIXME.
13401 Download your program to your target machine (or get it there by
13402 whatever means the manufacturer provides), and start it.
13405 Start @value{GDBN} on the host, and connect to the target
13406 (@pxref{Connecting,,Connecting to a Remote Target}).
13410 @node Configurations
13411 @chapter Configuration-Specific Information
13413 While nearly all @value{GDBN} commands are available for all native and
13414 cross versions of the debugger, there are some exceptions. This chapter
13415 describes things that are only available in certain configurations.
13417 There are three major categories of configurations: native
13418 configurations, where the host and target are the same, embedded
13419 operating system configurations, which are usually the same for several
13420 different processor architectures, and bare embedded processors, which
13421 are quite different from each other.
13426 * Embedded Processors::
13433 This section describes details specific to particular native
13438 * BSD libkvm Interface:: Debugging BSD kernel memory images
13439 * SVR4 Process Information:: SVR4 process information
13440 * DJGPP Native:: Features specific to the DJGPP port
13441 * Cygwin Native:: Features specific to the Cygwin port
13442 * Hurd Native:: Features specific to @sc{gnu} Hurd
13443 * Neutrino:: Features specific to QNX Neutrino
13449 On HP-UX systems, if you refer to a function or variable name that
13450 begins with a dollar sign, @value{GDBN} searches for a user or system
13451 name first, before it searches for a convenience variable.
13454 @node BSD libkvm Interface
13455 @subsection BSD libkvm Interface
13458 @cindex kernel memory image
13459 @cindex kernel crash dump
13461 BSD-derived systems (FreeBSD/NetBSD/OpenBSD) have a kernel memory
13462 interface that provides a uniform interface for accessing kernel virtual
13463 memory images, including live systems and crash dumps. @value{GDBN}
13464 uses this interface to allow you to debug live kernels and kernel crash
13465 dumps on many native BSD configurations. This is implemented as a
13466 special @code{kvm} debugging target. For debugging a live system, load
13467 the currently running kernel into @value{GDBN} and connect to the
13471 (@value{GDBP}) @b{target kvm}
13474 For debugging crash dumps, provide the file name of the crash dump as an
13478 (@value{GDBP}) @b{target kvm /var/crash/bsd.0}
13481 Once connected to the @code{kvm} target, the following commands are
13487 Set current context from the @dfn{Process Control Block} (PCB) address.
13490 Set current context from proc address. This command isn't available on
13491 modern FreeBSD systems.
13494 @node SVR4 Process Information
13495 @subsection SVR4 Process Information
13497 @cindex examine process image
13498 @cindex process info via @file{/proc}
13500 Many versions of SVR4 and compatible systems provide a facility called
13501 @samp{/proc} that can be used to examine the image of a running
13502 process using file-system subroutines. If @value{GDBN} is configured
13503 for an operating system with this facility, the command @code{info
13504 proc} is available to report information about the process running
13505 your program, or about any process running on your system. @code{info
13506 proc} works only on SVR4 systems that include the @code{procfs} code.
13507 This includes, as of this writing, @sc{gnu}/Linux, OSF/1 (Digital
13508 Unix), Solaris, Irix, and Unixware, but not HP-UX, for example.
13514 @itemx info proc @var{process-id}
13515 Summarize available information about any running process. If a
13516 process ID is specified by @var{process-id}, display information about
13517 that process; otherwise display information about the program being
13518 debugged. The summary includes the debugged process ID, the command
13519 line used to invoke it, its current working directory, and its
13520 executable file's absolute file name.
13522 On some systems, @var{process-id} can be of the form
13523 @samp{[@var{pid}]/@var{tid}} which specifies a certain thread ID
13524 within a process. If the optional @var{pid} part is missing, it means
13525 a thread from the process being debugged (the leading @samp{/} still
13526 needs to be present, or else @value{GDBN} will interpret the number as
13527 a process ID rather than a thread ID).
13529 @item info proc mappings
13530 @cindex memory address space mappings
13531 Report the memory address space ranges accessible in the program, with
13532 information on whether the process has read, write, or execute access
13533 rights to each range. On @sc{gnu}/Linux systems, each memory range
13534 includes the object file which is mapped to that range, instead of the
13535 memory access rights to that range.
13537 @item info proc stat
13538 @itemx info proc status
13539 @cindex process detailed status information
13540 These subcommands are specific to @sc{gnu}/Linux systems. They show
13541 the process-related information, including the user ID and group ID;
13542 how many threads are there in the process; its virtual memory usage;
13543 the signals that are pending, blocked, and ignored; its TTY; its
13544 consumption of system and user time; its stack size; its @samp{nice}
13545 value; etc. For more information, see the @samp{proc} man page
13546 (type @kbd{man 5 proc} from your shell prompt).
13548 @item info proc all
13549 Show all the information about the process described under all of the
13550 above @code{info proc} subcommands.
13553 @comment These sub-options of 'info proc' were not included when
13554 @comment procfs.c was re-written. Keep their descriptions around
13555 @comment against the day when someone finds the time to put them back in.
13556 @kindex info proc times
13557 @item info proc times
13558 Starting time, user CPU time, and system CPU time for your program and
13561 @kindex info proc id
13563 Report on the process IDs related to your program: its own process ID,
13564 the ID of its parent, the process group ID, and the session ID.
13567 @item set procfs-trace
13568 @kindex set procfs-trace
13569 @cindex @code{procfs} API calls
13570 This command enables and disables tracing of @code{procfs} API calls.
13572 @item show procfs-trace
13573 @kindex show procfs-trace
13574 Show the current state of @code{procfs} API call tracing.
13576 @item set procfs-file @var{file}
13577 @kindex set procfs-file
13578 Tell @value{GDBN} to write @code{procfs} API trace to the named
13579 @var{file}. @value{GDBN} appends the trace info to the previous
13580 contents of the file. The default is to display the trace on the
13583 @item show procfs-file
13584 @kindex show procfs-file
13585 Show the file to which @code{procfs} API trace is written.
13587 @item proc-trace-entry
13588 @itemx proc-trace-exit
13589 @itemx proc-untrace-entry
13590 @itemx proc-untrace-exit
13591 @kindex proc-trace-entry
13592 @kindex proc-trace-exit
13593 @kindex proc-untrace-entry
13594 @kindex proc-untrace-exit
13595 These commands enable and disable tracing of entries into and exits
13596 from the @code{syscall} interface.
13599 @kindex info pidlist
13600 @cindex process list, QNX Neutrino
13601 For QNX Neutrino only, this command displays the list of all the
13602 processes and all the threads within each process.
13605 @kindex info meminfo
13606 @cindex mapinfo list, QNX Neutrino
13607 For QNX Neutrino only, this command displays the list of all mapinfos.
13611 @subsection Features for Debugging @sc{djgpp} Programs
13612 @cindex @sc{djgpp} debugging
13613 @cindex native @sc{djgpp} debugging
13614 @cindex MS-DOS-specific commands
13617 @sc{djgpp} is a port of the @sc{gnu} development tools to MS-DOS and
13618 MS-Windows. @sc{djgpp} programs are 32-bit protected-mode programs
13619 that use the @dfn{DPMI} (DOS Protected-Mode Interface) API to run on
13620 top of real-mode DOS systems and their emulations.
13622 @value{GDBN} supports native debugging of @sc{djgpp} programs, and
13623 defines a few commands specific to the @sc{djgpp} port. This
13624 subsection describes those commands.
13629 This is a prefix of @sc{djgpp}-specific commands which print
13630 information about the target system and important OS structures.
13633 @cindex MS-DOS system info
13634 @cindex free memory information (MS-DOS)
13635 @item info dos sysinfo
13636 This command displays assorted information about the underlying
13637 platform: the CPU type and features, the OS version and flavor, the
13638 DPMI version, and the available conventional and DPMI memory.
13643 @cindex segment descriptor tables
13644 @cindex descriptor tables display
13646 @itemx info dos ldt
13647 @itemx info dos idt
13648 These 3 commands display entries from, respectively, Global, Local,
13649 and Interrupt Descriptor Tables (GDT, LDT, and IDT). The descriptor
13650 tables are data structures which store a descriptor for each segment
13651 that is currently in use. The segment's selector is an index into a
13652 descriptor table; the table entry for that index holds the
13653 descriptor's base address and limit, and its attributes and access
13656 A typical @sc{djgpp} program uses 3 segments: a code segment, a data
13657 segment (used for both data and the stack), and a DOS segment (which
13658 allows access to DOS/BIOS data structures and absolute addresses in
13659 conventional memory). However, the DPMI host will usually define
13660 additional segments in order to support the DPMI environment.
13662 @cindex garbled pointers
13663 These commands allow to display entries from the descriptor tables.
13664 Without an argument, all entries from the specified table are
13665 displayed. An argument, which should be an integer expression, means
13666 display a single entry whose index is given by the argument. For
13667 example, here's a convenient way to display information about the
13668 debugged program's data segment:
13671 @exdent @code{(@value{GDBP}) info dos ldt $ds}
13672 @exdent @code{0x13f: base=0x11970000 limit=0x0009ffff 32-Bit Data (Read/Write, Exp-up)}
13676 This comes in handy when you want to see whether a pointer is outside
13677 the data segment's limit (i.e.@: @dfn{garbled}).
13679 @cindex page tables display (MS-DOS)
13681 @itemx info dos pte
13682 These two commands display entries from, respectively, the Page
13683 Directory and the Page Tables. Page Directories and Page Tables are
13684 data structures which control how virtual memory addresses are mapped
13685 into physical addresses. A Page Table includes an entry for every
13686 page of memory that is mapped into the program's address space; there
13687 may be several Page Tables, each one holding up to 4096 entries. A
13688 Page Directory has up to 4096 entries, one each for every Page Table
13689 that is currently in use.
13691 Without an argument, @kbd{info dos pde} displays the entire Page
13692 Directory, and @kbd{info dos pte} displays all the entries in all of
13693 the Page Tables. An argument, an integer expression, given to the
13694 @kbd{info dos pde} command means display only that entry from the Page
13695 Directory table. An argument given to the @kbd{info dos pte} command
13696 means display entries from a single Page Table, the one pointed to by
13697 the specified entry in the Page Directory.
13699 @cindex direct memory access (DMA) on MS-DOS
13700 These commands are useful when your program uses @dfn{DMA} (Direct
13701 Memory Access), which needs physical addresses to program the DMA
13704 These commands are supported only with some DPMI servers.
13706 @cindex physical address from linear address
13707 @item info dos address-pte @var{addr}
13708 This command displays the Page Table entry for a specified linear
13709 address. The argument @var{addr} is a linear address which should
13710 already have the appropriate segment's base address added to it,
13711 because this command accepts addresses which may belong to @emph{any}
13712 segment. For example, here's how to display the Page Table entry for
13713 the page where a variable @code{i} is stored:
13716 @exdent @code{(@value{GDBP}) info dos address-pte __djgpp_base_address + (char *)&i}
13717 @exdent @code{Page Table entry for address 0x11a00d30:}
13718 @exdent @code{Base=0x02698000 Dirty Acc. Not-Cached Write-Back Usr Read-Write +0xd30}
13722 This says that @code{i} is stored at offset @code{0xd30} from the page
13723 whose physical base address is @code{0x02698000}, and shows all the
13724 attributes of that page.
13726 Note that you must cast the addresses of variables to a @code{char *},
13727 since otherwise the value of @code{__djgpp_base_address}, the base
13728 address of all variables and functions in a @sc{djgpp} program, will
13729 be added using the rules of C pointer arithmetics: if @code{i} is
13730 declared an @code{int}, @value{GDBN} will add 4 times the value of
13731 @code{__djgpp_base_address} to the address of @code{i}.
13733 Here's another example, it displays the Page Table entry for the
13737 @exdent @code{(@value{GDBP}) info dos address-pte *((unsigned *)&_go32_info_block + 3)}
13738 @exdent @code{Page Table entry for address 0x29110:}
13739 @exdent @code{Base=0x00029000 Dirty Acc. Not-Cached Write-Back Usr Read-Write +0x110}
13743 (The @code{+ 3} offset is because the transfer buffer's address is the
13744 3rd member of the @code{_go32_info_block} structure.) The output
13745 clearly shows that this DPMI server maps the addresses in conventional
13746 memory 1:1, i.e.@: the physical (@code{0x00029000} + @code{0x110}) and
13747 linear (@code{0x29110}) addresses are identical.
13749 This command is supported only with some DPMI servers.
13752 @cindex DOS serial data link, remote debugging
13753 In addition to native debugging, the DJGPP port supports remote
13754 debugging via a serial data link. The following commands are specific
13755 to remote serial debugging in the DJGPP port of @value{GDBN}.
13758 @kindex set com1base
13759 @kindex set com1irq
13760 @kindex set com2base
13761 @kindex set com2irq
13762 @kindex set com3base
13763 @kindex set com3irq
13764 @kindex set com4base
13765 @kindex set com4irq
13766 @item set com1base @var{addr}
13767 This command sets the base I/O port address of the @file{COM1} serial
13770 @item set com1irq @var{irq}
13771 This command sets the @dfn{Interrupt Request} (@code{IRQ}) line to use
13772 for the @file{COM1} serial port.
13774 There are similar commands @samp{set com2base}, @samp{set com3irq},
13775 etc.@: for setting the port address and the @code{IRQ} lines for the
13778 @kindex show com1base
13779 @kindex show com1irq
13780 @kindex show com2base
13781 @kindex show com2irq
13782 @kindex show com3base
13783 @kindex show com3irq
13784 @kindex show com4base
13785 @kindex show com4irq
13786 The related commands @samp{show com1base}, @samp{show com1irq} etc.@:
13787 display the current settings of the base address and the @code{IRQ}
13788 lines used by the COM ports.
13791 @kindex info serial
13792 @cindex DOS serial port status
13793 This command prints the status of the 4 DOS serial ports. For each
13794 port, it prints whether it's active or not, its I/O base address and
13795 IRQ number, whether it uses a 16550-style FIFO, its baudrate, and the
13796 counts of various errors encountered so far.
13800 @node Cygwin Native
13801 @subsection Features for Debugging MS Windows PE Executables
13802 @cindex MS Windows debugging
13803 @cindex native Cygwin debugging
13804 @cindex Cygwin-specific commands
13806 @value{GDBN} supports native debugging of MS Windows programs, including
13807 DLLs with and without symbolic debugging information. There are various
13808 additional Cygwin-specific commands, described in this section.
13809 Working with DLLs that have no debugging symbols is described in
13810 @ref{Non-debug DLL Symbols}.
13815 This is a prefix of MS Windows-specific commands which print
13816 information about the target system and important OS structures.
13818 @item info w32 selector
13819 This command displays information returned by
13820 the Win32 API @code{GetThreadSelectorEntry} function.
13821 It takes an optional argument that is evaluated to
13822 a long value to give the information about this given selector.
13823 Without argument, this command displays information
13824 about the six segment registers.
13828 This is a Cygwin-specific alias of @code{info shared}.
13830 @kindex dll-symbols
13832 This command loads symbols from a dll similarly to
13833 add-sym command but without the need to specify a base address.
13835 @kindex set cygwin-exceptions
13836 @cindex debugging the Cygwin DLL
13837 @cindex Cygwin DLL, debugging
13838 @item set cygwin-exceptions @var{mode}
13839 If @var{mode} is @code{on}, @value{GDBN} will break on exceptions that
13840 happen inside the Cygwin DLL. If @var{mode} is @code{off},
13841 @value{GDBN} will delay recognition of exceptions, and may ignore some
13842 exceptions which seem to be caused by internal Cygwin DLL
13843 ``bookkeeping''. This option is meant primarily for debugging the
13844 Cygwin DLL itself; the default value is @code{off} to avoid annoying
13845 @value{GDBN} users with false @code{SIGSEGV} signals.
13847 @kindex show cygwin-exceptions
13848 @item show cygwin-exceptions
13849 Displays whether @value{GDBN} will break on exceptions that happen
13850 inside the Cygwin DLL itself.
13852 @kindex set new-console
13853 @item set new-console @var{mode}
13854 If @var{mode} is @code{on} the debuggee will
13855 be started in a new console on next start.
13856 If @var{mode} is @code{off}i, the debuggee will
13857 be started in the same console as the debugger.
13859 @kindex show new-console
13860 @item show new-console
13861 Displays whether a new console is used
13862 when the debuggee is started.
13864 @kindex set new-group
13865 @item set new-group @var{mode}
13866 This boolean value controls whether the debuggee should
13867 start a new group or stay in the same group as the debugger.
13868 This affects the way the Windows OS handles
13871 @kindex show new-group
13872 @item show new-group
13873 Displays current value of new-group boolean.
13875 @kindex set debugevents
13876 @item set debugevents
13877 This boolean value adds debug output concerning kernel events related
13878 to the debuggee seen by the debugger. This includes events that
13879 signal thread and process creation and exit, DLL loading and
13880 unloading, console interrupts, and debugging messages produced by the
13881 Windows @code{OutputDebugString} API call.
13883 @kindex set debugexec
13884 @item set debugexec
13885 This boolean value adds debug output concerning execute events
13886 (such as resume thread) seen by the debugger.
13888 @kindex set debugexceptions
13889 @item set debugexceptions
13890 This boolean value adds debug output concerning exceptions in the
13891 debuggee seen by the debugger.
13893 @kindex set debugmemory
13894 @item set debugmemory
13895 This boolean value adds debug output concerning debuggee memory reads
13896 and writes by the debugger.
13900 This boolean values specifies whether the debuggee is called
13901 via a shell or directly (default value is on).
13905 Displays if the debuggee will be started with a shell.
13910 * Non-debug DLL Symbols:: Support for DLLs without debugging symbols
13913 @node Non-debug DLL Symbols
13914 @subsubsection Support for DLLs without Debugging Symbols
13915 @cindex DLLs with no debugging symbols
13916 @cindex Minimal symbols and DLLs
13918 Very often on windows, some of the DLLs that your program relies on do
13919 not include symbolic debugging information (for example,
13920 @file{kernel32.dll}). When @value{GDBN} doesn't recognize any debugging
13921 symbols in a DLL, it relies on the minimal amount of symbolic
13922 information contained in the DLL's export table. This section
13923 describes working with such symbols, known internally to @value{GDBN} as
13924 ``minimal symbols''.
13926 Note that before the debugged program has started execution, no DLLs
13927 will have been loaded. The easiest way around this problem is simply to
13928 start the program --- either by setting a breakpoint or letting the
13929 program run once to completion. It is also possible to force
13930 @value{GDBN} to load a particular DLL before starting the executable ---
13931 see the shared library information in @ref{Files}, or the
13932 @code{dll-symbols} command in @ref{Cygwin Native}. Currently,
13933 explicitly loading symbols from a DLL with no debugging information will
13934 cause the symbol names to be duplicated in @value{GDBN}'s lookup table,
13935 which may adversely affect symbol lookup performance.
13937 @subsubsection DLL Name Prefixes
13939 In keeping with the naming conventions used by the Microsoft debugging
13940 tools, DLL export symbols are made available with a prefix based on the
13941 DLL name, for instance @code{KERNEL32!CreateFileA}. The plain name is
13942 also entered into the symbol table, so @code{CreateFileA} is often
13943 sufficient. In some cases there will be name clashes within a program
13944 (particularly if the executable itself includes full debugging symbols)
13945 necessitating the use of the fully qualified name when referring to the
13946 contents of the DLL. Use single-quotes around the name to avoid the
13947 exclamation mark (``!'') being interpreted as a language operator.
13949 Note that the internal name of the DLL may be all upper-case, even
13950 though the file name of the DLL is lower-case, or vice-versa. Since
13951 symbols within @value{GDBN} are @emph{case-sensitive} this may cause
13952 some confusion. If in doubt, try the @code{info functions} and
13953 @code{info variables} commands or even @code{maint print msymbols}
13954 (@pxref{Symbols}). Here's an example:
13957 (@value{GDBP}) info function CreateFileA
13958 All functions matching regular expression "CreateFileA":
13960 Non-debugging symbols:
13961 0x77e885f4 CreateFileA
13962 0x77e885f4 KERNEL32!CreateFileA
13966 (@value{GDBP}) info function !
13967 All functions matching regular expression "!":
13969 Non-debugging symbols:
13970 0x6100114c cygwin1!__assert
13971 0x61004034 cygwin1!_dll_crt0@@0
13972 0x61004240 cygwin1!dll_crt0(per_process *)
13976 @subsubsection Working with Minimal Symbols
13978 Symbols extracted from a DLL's export table do not contain very much
13979 type information. All that @value{GDBN} can do is guess whether a symbol
13980 refers to a function or variable depending on the linker section that
13981 contains the symbol. Also note that the actual contents of the memory
13982 contained in a DLL are not available unless the program is running. This
13983 means that you cannot examine the contents of a variable or disassemble
13984 a function within a DLL without a running program.
13986 Variables are generally treated as pointers and dereferenced
13987 automatically. For this reason, it is often necessary to prefix a
13988 variable name with the address-of operator (``&'') and provide explicit
13989 type information in the command. Here's an example of the type of
13993 (@value{GDBP}) print 'cygwin1!__argv'
13998 (@value{GDBP}) x 'cygwin1!__argv'
13999 0x10021610: "\230y\""
14002 And two possible solutions:
14005 (@value{GDBP}) print ((char **)'cygwin1!__argv')[0]
14006 $2 = 0x22fd98 "/cygdrive/c/mydirectory/myprogram"
14010 (@value{GDBP}) x/2x &'cygwin1!__argv'
14011 0x610c0aa8 <cygwin1!__argv>: 0x10021608 0x00000000
14012 (@value{GDBP}) x/x 0x10021608
14013 0x10021608: 0x0022fd98
14014 (@value{GDBP}) x/s 0x0022fd98
14015 0x22fd98: "/cygdrive/c/mydirectory/myprogram"
14018 Setting a break point within a DLL is possible even before the program
14019 starts execution. However, under these circumstances, @value{GDBN} can't
14020 examine the initial instructions of the function in order to skip the
14021 function's frame set-up code. You can work around this by using ``*&''
14022 to set the breakpoint at a raw memory address:
14025 (@value{GDBP}) break *&'python22!PyOS_Readline'
14026 Breakpoint 1 at 0x1e04eff0
14029 The author of these extensions is not entirely convinced that setting a
14030 break point within a shared DLL like @file{kernel32.dll} is completely
14034 @subsection Commands Specific to @sc{gnu} Hurd Systems
14035 @cindex @sc{gnu} Hurd debugging
14037 This subsection describes @value{GDBN} commands specific to the
14038 @sc{gnu} Hurd native debugging.
14043 @kindex set signals@r{, Hurd command}
14044 @kindex set sigs@r{, Hurd command}
14045 This command toggles the state of inferior signal interception by
14046 @value{GDBN}. Mach exceptions, such as breakpoint traps, are not
14047 affected by this command. @code{sigs} is a shorthand alias for
14052 @kindex show signals@r{, Hurd command}
14053 @kindex show sigs@r{, Hurd command}
14054 Show the current state of intercepting inferior's signals.
14056 @item set signal-thread
14057 @itemx set sigthread
14058 @kindex set signal-thread
14059 @kindex set sigthread
14060 This command tells @value{GDBN} which thread is the @code{libc} signal
14061 thread. That thread is run when a signal is delivered to a running
14062 process. @code{set sigthread} is the shorthand alias of @code{set
14065 @item show signal-thread
14066 @itemx show sigthread
14067 @kindex show signal-thread
14068 @kindex show sigthread
14069 These two commands show which thread will run when the inferior is
14070 delivered a signal.
14073 @kindex set stopped@r{, Hurd command}
14074 This commands tells @value{GDBN} that the inferior process is stopped,
14075 as with the @code{SIGSTOP} signal. The stopped process can be
14076 continued by delivering a signal to it.
14079 @kindex show stopped@r{, Hurd command}
14080 This command shows whether @value{GDBN} thinks the debuggee is
14083 @item set exceptions
14084 @kindex set exceptions@r{, Hurd command}
14085 Use this command to turn off trapping of exceptions in the inferior.
14086 When exception trapping is off, neither breakpoints nor
14087 single-stepping will work. To restore the default, set exception
14090 @item show exceptions
14091 @kindex show exceptions@r{, Hurd command}
14092 Show the current state of trapping exceptions in the inferior.
14094 @item set task pause
14095 @kindex set task@r{, Hurd commands}
14096 @cindex task attributes (@sc{gnu} Hurd)
14097 @cindex pause current task (@sc{gnu} Hurd)
14098 This command toggles task suspension when @value{GDBN} has control.
14099 Setting it to on takes effect immediately, and the task is suspended
14100 whenever @value{GDBN} gets control. Setting it to off will take
14101 effect the next time the inferior is continued. If this option is set
14102 to off, you can use @code{set thread default pause on} or @code{set
14103 thread pause on} (see below) to pause individual threads.
14105 @item show task pause
14106 @kindex show task@r{, Hurd commands}
14107 Show the current state of task suspension.
14109 @item set task detach-suspend-count
14110 @cindex task suspend count
14111 @cindex detach from task, @sc{gnu} Hurd
14112 This command sets the suspend count the task will be left with when
14113 @value{GDBN} detaches from it.
14115 @item show task detach-suspend-count
14116 Show the suspend count the task will be left with when detaching.
14118 @item set task exception-port
14119 @itemx set task excp
14120 @cindex task exception port, @sc{gnu} Hurd
14121 This command sets the task exception port to which @value{GDBN} will
14122 forward exceptions. The argument should be the value of the @dfn{send
14123 rights} of the task. @code{set task excp} is a shorthand alias.
14125 @item set noninvasive
14126 @cindex noninvasive task options
14127 This command switches @value{GDBN} to a mode that is the least
14128 invasive as far as interfering with the inferior is concerned. This
14129 is the same as using @code{set task pause}, @code{set exceptions}, and
14130 @code{set signals} to values opposite to the defaults.
14132 @item info send-rights
14133 @itemx info receive-rights
14134 @itemx info port-rights
14135 @itemx info port-sets
14136 @itemx info dead-names
14139 @cindex send rights, @sc{gnu} Hurd
14140 @cindex receive rights, @sc{gnu} Hurd
14141 @cindex port rights, @sc{gnu} Hurd
14142 @cindex port sets, @sc{gnu} Hurd
14143 @cindex dead names, @sc{gnu} Hurd
14144 These commands display information about, respectively, send rights,
14145 receive rights, port rights, port sets, and dead names of a task.
14146 There are also shorthand aliases: @code{info ports} for @code{info
14147 port-rights} and @code{info psets} for @code{info port-sets}.
14149 @item set thread pause
14150 @kindex set thread@r{, Hurd command}
14151 @cindex thread properties, @sc{gnu} Hurd
14152 @cindex pause current thread (@sc{gnu} Hurd)
14153 This command toggles current thread suspension when @value{GDBN} has
14154 control. Setting it to on takes effect immediately, and the current
14155 thread is suspended whenever @value{GDBN} gets control. Setting it to
14156 off will take effect the next time the inferior is continued.
14157 Normally, this command has no effect, since when @value{GDBN} has
14158 control, the whole task is suspended. However, if you used @code{set
14159 task pause off} (see above), this command comes in handy to suspend
14160 only the current thread.
14162 @item show thread pause
14163 @kindex show thread@r{, Hurd command}
14164 This command shows the state of current thread suspension.
14166 @item set thread run
14167 This command sets whether the current thread is allowed to run.
14169 @item show thread run
14170 Show whether the current thread is allowed to run.
14172 @item set thread detach-suspend-count
14173 @cindex thread suspend count, @sc{gnu} Hurd
14174 @cindex detach from thread, @sc{gnu} Hurd
14175 This command sets the suspend count @value{GDBN} will leave on a
14176 thread when detaching. This number is relative to the suspend count
14177 found by @value{GDBN} when it notices the thread; use @code{set thread
14178 takeover-suspend-count} to force it to an absolute value.
14180 @item show thread detach-suspend-count
14181 Show the suspend count @value{GDBN} will leave on the thread when
14184 @item set thread exception-port
14185 @itemx set thread excp
14186 Set the thread exception port to which to forward exceptions. This
14187 overrides the port set by @code{set task exception-port} (see above).
14188 @code{set thread excp} is the shorthand alias.
14190 @item set thread takeover-suspend-count
14191 Normally, @value{GDBN}'s thread suspend counts are relative to the
14192 value @value{GDBN} finds when it notices each thread. This command
14193 changes the suspend counts to be absolute instead.
14195 @item set thread default
14196 @itemx show thread default
14197 @cindex thread default settings, @sc{gnu} Hurd
14198 Each of the above @code{set thread} commands has a @code{set thread
14199 default} counterpart (e.g., @code{set thread default pause}, @code{set
14200 thread default exception-port}, etc.). The @code{thread default}
14201 variety of commands sets the default thread properties for all
14202 threads; you can then change the properties of individual threads with
14203 the non-default commands.
14208 @subsection QNX Neutrino
14209 @cindex QNX Neutrino
14211 @value{GDBN} provides the following commands specific to the QNX
14215 @item set debug nto-debug
14216 @kindex set debug nto-debug
14217 When set to on, enables debugging messages specific to the QNX
14220 @item show debug nto-debug
14221 @kindex show debug nto-debug
14222 Show the current state of QNX Neutrino messages.
14227 @section Embedded Operating Systems
14229 This section describes configurations involving the debugging of
14230 embedded operating systems that are available for several different
14234 * VxWorks:: Using @value{GDBN} with VxWorks
14237 @value{GDBN} includes the ability to debug programs running on
14238 various real-time operating systems.
14241 @subsection Using @value{GDBN} with VxWorks
14247 @kindex target vxworks
14248 @item target vxworks @var{machinename}
14249 A VxWorks system, attached via TCP/IP. The argument @var{machinename}
14250 is the target system's machine name or IP address.
14254 On VxWorks, @code{load} links @var{filename} dynamically on the
14255 current target system as well as adding its symbols in @value{GDBN}.
14257 @value{GDBN} enables developers to spawn and debug tasks running on networked
14258 VxWorks targets from a Unix host. Already-running tasks spawned from
14259 the VxWorks shell can also be debugged. @value{GDBN} uses code that runs on
14260 both the Unix host and on the VxWorks target. The program
14261 @code{@value{GDBP}} is installed and executed on the Unix host. (It may be
14262 installed with the name @code{vxgdb}, to distinguish it from a
14263 @value{GDBN} for debugging programs on the host itself.)
14266 @item VxWorks-timeout @var{args}
14267 @kindex vxworks-timeout
14268 All VxWorks-based targets now support the option @code{vxworks-timeout}.
14269 This option is set by the user, and @var{args} represents the number of
14270 seconds @value{GDBN} waits for responses to rpc's. You might use this if
14271 your VxWorks target is a slow software simulator or is on the far side
14272 of a thin network line.
14275 The following information on connecting to VxWorks was current when
14276 this manual was produced; newer releases of VxWorks may use revised
14279 @findex INCLUDE_RDB
14280 To use @value{GDBN} with VxWorks, you must rebuild your VxWorks kernel
14281 to include the remote debugging interface routines in the VxWorks
14282 library @file{rdb.a}. To do this, define @code{INCLUDE_RDB} in the
14283 VxWorks configuration file @file{configAll.h} and rebuild your VxWorks
14284 kernel. The resulting kernel contains @file{rdb.a}, and spawns the
14285 source debugging task @code{tRdbTask} when VxWorks is booted. For more
14286 information on configuring and remaking VxWorks, see the manufacturer's
14288 @c VxWorks, see the @cite{VxWorks Programmer's Guide}.
14290 Once you have included @file{rdb.a} in your VxWorks system image and set
14291 your Unix execution search path to find @value{GDBN}, you are ready to
14292 run @value{GDBN}. From your Unix host, run @code{@value{GDBP}} (or
14293 @code{vxgdb}, depending on your installation).
14295 @value{GDBN} comes up showing the prompt:
14302 * VxWorks Connection:: Connecting to VxWorks
14303 * VxWorks Download:: VxWorks download
14304 * VxWorks Attach:: Running tasks
14307 @node VxWorks Connection
14308 @subsubsection Connecting to VxWorks
14310 The @value{GDBN} command @code{target} lets you connect to a VxWorks target on the
14311 network. To connect to a target whose host name is ``@code{tt}'', type:
14314 (vxgdb) target vxworks tt
14318 @value{GDBN} displays messages like these:
14321 Attaching remote machine across net...
14326 @value{GDBN} then attempts to read the symbol tables of any object modules
14327 loaded into the VxWorks target since it was last booted. @value{GDBN} locates
14328 these files by searching the directories listed in the command search
14329 path (@pxref{Environment, ,Your Program's Environment}); if it fails
14330 to find an object file, it displays a message such as:
14333 prog.o: No such file or directory.
14336 When this happens, add the appropriate directory to the search path with
14337 the @value{GDBN} command @code{path}, and execute the @code{target}
14340 @node VxWorks Download
14341 @subsubsection VxWorks Download
14343 @cindex download to VxWorks
14344 If you have connected to the VxWorks target and you want to debug an
14345 object that has not yet been loaded, you can use the @value{GDBN}
14346 @code{load} command to download a file from Unix to VxWorks
14347 incrementally. The object file given as an argument to the @code{load}
14348 command is actually opened twice: first by the VxWorks target in order
14349 to download the code, then by @value{GDBN} in order to read the symbol
14350 table. This can lead to problems if the current working directories on
14351 the two systems differ. If both systems have NFS mounted the same
14352 filesystems, you can avoid these problems by using absolute paths.
14353 Otherwise, it is simplest to set the working directory on both systems
14354 to the directory in which the object file resides, and then to reference
14355 the file by its name, without any path. For instance, a program
14356 @file{prog.o} may reside in @file{@var{vxpath}/vw/demo/rdb} in VxWorks
14357 and in @file{@var{hostpath}/vw/demo/rdb} on the host. To load this
14358 program, type this on VxWorks:
14361 -> cd "@var{vxpath}/vw/demo/rdb"
14365 Then, in @value{GDBN}, type:
14368 (vxgdb) cd @var{hostpath}/vw/demo/rdb
14369 (vxgdb) load prog.o
14372 @value{GDBN} displays a response similar to this:
14375 Reading symbol data from wherever/vw/demo/rdb/prog.o... done.
14378 You can also use the @code{load} command to reload an object module
14379 after editing and recompiling the corresponding source file. Note that
14380 this makes @value{GDBN} delete all currently-defined breakpoints,
14381 auto-displays, and convenience variables, and to clear the value
14382 history. (This is necessary in order to preserve the integrity of
14383 debugger's data structures that reference the target system's symbol
14386 @node VxWorks Attach
14387 @subsubsection Running Tasks
14389 @cindex running VxWorks tasks
14390 You can also attach to an existing task using the @code{attach} command as
14394 (vxgdb) attach @var{task}
14398 where @var{task} is the VxWorks hexadecimal task ID. The task can be running
14399 or suspended when you attach to it. Running tasks are suspended at
14400 the time of attachment.
14402 @node Embedded Processors
14403 @section Embedded Processors
14405 This section goes into details specific to particular embedded
14408 @cindex send command to simulator
14409 Whenever a specific embedded processor has a simulator, @value{GDBN}
14410 allows to send an arbitrary command to the simulator.
14413 @item sim @var{command}
14414 @kindex sim@r{, a command}
14415 Send an arbitrary @var{command} string to the simulator. Consult the
14416 documentation for the specific simulator in use for information about
14417 acceptable commands.
14423 * M32R/D:: Renesas M32R/D
14424 * M68K:: Motorola M68K
14425 * MIPS Embedded:: MIPS Embedded
14426 * OpenRISC 1000:: OpenRisc 1000
14427 * PA:: HP PA Embedded
14428 * PowerPC:: PowerPC
14429 * Sparclet:: Tsqware Sparclet
14430 * Sparclite:: Fujitsu Sparclite
14431 * Z8000:: Zilog Z8000
14434 * Super-H:: Renesas Super-H
14443 @item target rdi @var{dev}
14444 ARM Angel monitor, via RDI library interface to ADP protocol. You may
14445 use this target to communicate with both boards running the Angel
14446 monitor, or with the EmbeddedICE JTAG debug device.
14449 @item target rdp @var{dev}
14454 @value{GDBN} provides the following ARM-specific commands:
14457 @item set arm disassembler
14459 This commands selects from a list of disassembly styles. The
14460 @code{"std"} style is the standard style.
14462 @item show arm disassembler
14464 Show the current disassembly style.
14466 @item set arm apcs32
14467 @cindex ARM 32-bit mode
14468 This command toggles ARM operation mode between 32-bit and 26-bit.
14470 @item show arm apcs32
14471 Display the current usage of the ARM 32-bit mode.
14473 @item set arm fpu @var{fputype}
14474 This command sets the ARM floating-point unit (FPU) type. The
14475 argument @var{fputype} can be one of these:
14479 Determine the FPU type by querying the OS ABI.
14481 Software FPU, with mixed-endian doubles on little-endian ARM
14484 GCC-compiled FPA co-processor.
14486 Software FPU with pure-endian doubles.
14492 Show the current type of the FPU.
14495 This command forces @value{GDBN} to use the specified ABI.
14498 Show the currently used ABI.
14500 @item set debug arm
14501 Toggle whether to display ARM-specific debugging messages from the ARM
14502 target support subsystem.
14504 @item show debug arm
14505 Show whether ARM-specific debugging messages are enabled.
14508 The following commands are available when an ARM target is debugged
14509 using the RDI interface:
14512 @item rdilogfile @r{[}@var{file}@r{]}
14514 @cindex ADP (Angel Debugger Protocol) logging
14515 Set the filename for the ADP (Angel Debugger Protocol) packet log.
14516 With an argument, sets the log file to the specified @var{file}. With
14517 no argument, show the current log file name. The default log file is
14520 @item rdilogenable @r{[}@var{arg}@r{]}
14521 @kindex rdilogenable
14522 Control logging of ADP packets. With an argument of 1 or @code{"yes"}
14523 enables logging, with an argument 0 or @code{"no"} disables it. With
14524 no arguments displays the current setting. When logging is enabled,
14525 ADP packets exchanged between @value{GDBN} and the RDI target device
14526 are logged to a file.
14528 @item set rdiromatzero
14529 @kindex set rdiromatzero
14530 @cindex ROM at zero address, RDI
14531 Tell @value{GDBN} whether the target has ROM at address 0. If on,
14532 vector catching is disabled, so that zero address can be used. If off
14533 (the default), vector catching is enabled. For this command to take
14534 effect, it needs to be invoked prior to the @code{target rdi} command.
14536 @item show rdiromatzero
14537 @kindex show rdiromatzero
14538 Show the current setting of ROM at zero address.
14540 @item set rdiheartbeat
14541 @kindex set rdiheartbeat
14542 @cindex RDI heartbeat
14543 Enable or disable RDI heartbeat packets. It is not recommended to
14544 turn on this option, since it confuses ARM and EPI JTAG interface, as
14545 well as the Angel monitor.
14547 @item show rdiheartbeat
14548 @kindex show rdiheartbeat
14549 Show the setting of RDI heartbeat packets.
14554 @subsection Renesas M32R/D and M32R/SDI
14557 @kindex target m32r
14558 @item target m32r @var{dev}
14559 Renesas M32R/D ROM monitor.
14561 @kindex target m32rsdi
14562 @item target m32rsdi @var{dev}
14563 Renesas M32R SDI server, connected via parallel port to the board.
14566 The following @value{GDBN} commands are specific to the M32R monitor:
14569 @item set download-path @var{path}
14570 @kindex set download-path
14571 @cindex find downloadable @sc{srec} files (M32R)
14572 Set the default path for finding downloadable @sc{srec} files.
14574 @item show download-path
14575 @kindex show download-path
14576 Show the default path for downloadable @sc{srec} files.
14578 @item set board-address @var{addr}
14579 @kindex set board-address
14580 @cindex M32-EVA target board address
14581 Set the IP address for the M32R-EVA target board.
14583 @item show board-address
14584 @kindex show board-address
14585 Show the current IP address of the target board.
14587 @item set server-address @var{addr}
14588 @kindex set server-address
14589 @cindex download server address (M32R)
14590 Set the IP address for the download server, which is the @value{GDBN}'s
14593 @item show server-address
14594 @kindex show server-address
14595 Display the IP address of the download server.
14597 @item upload @r{[}@var{file}@r{]}
14598 @kindex upload@r{, M32R}
14599 Upload the specified @sc{srec} @var{file} via the monitor's Ethernet
14600 upload capability. If no @var{file} argument is given, the current
14601 executable file is uploaded.
14603 @item tload @r{[}@var{file}@r{]}
14604 @kindex tload@r{, M32R}
14605 Test the @code{upload} command.
14608 The following commands are available for M32R/SDI:
14613 @cindex reset SDI connection, M32R
14614 This command resets the SDI connection.
14618 This command shows the SDI connection status.
14621 @kindex debug_chaos
14622 @cindex M32R/Chaos debugging
14623 Instructs the remote that M32R/Chaos debugging is to be used.
14625 @item use_debug_dma
14626 @kindex use_debug_dma
14627 Instructs the remote to use the DEBUG_DMA method of accessing memory.
14630 @kindex use_mon_code
14631 Instructs the remote to use the MON_CODE method of accessing memory.
14634 @kindex use_ib_break
14635 Instructs the remote to set breakpoints by IB break.
14637 @item use_dbt_break
14638 @kindex use_dbt_break
14639 Instructs the remote to set breakpoints by DBT.
14645 The Motorola m68k configuration includes ColdFire support, and a
14646 target command for the following ROM monitor.
14650 @kindex target dbug
14651 @item target dbug @var{dev}
14652 dBUG ROM monitor for Motorola ColdFire.
14656 @node MIPS Embedded
14657 @subsection MIPS Embedded
14659 @cindex MIPS boards
14660 @value{GDBN} can use the MIPS remote debugging protocol to talk to a
14661 MIPS board attached to a serial line. This is available when
14662 you configure @value{GDBN} with @samp{--target=mips-idt-ecoff}.
14665 Use these @value{GDBN} commands to specify the connection to your target board:
14668 @item target mips @var{port}
14669 @kindex target mips @var{port}
14670 To run a program on the board, start up @code{@value{GDBP}} with the
14671 name of your program as the argument. To connect to the board, use the
14672 command @samp{target mips @var{port}}, where @var{port} is the name of
14673 the serial port connected to the board. If the program has not already
14674 been downloaded to the board, you may use the @code{load} command to
14675 download it. You can then use all the usual @value{GDBN} commands.
14677 For example, this sequence connects to the target board through a serial
14678 port, and loads and runs a program called @var{prog} through the
14682 host$ @value{GDBP} @var{prog}
14683 @value{GDBN} is free software and @dots{}
14684 (@value{GDBP}) target mips /dev/ttyb
14685 (@value{GDBP}) load @var{prog}
14689 @item target mips @var{hostname}:@var{portnumber}
14690 On some @value{GDBN} host configurations, you can specify a TCP
14691 connection (for instance, to a serial line managed by a terminal
14692 concentrator) instead of a serial port, using the syntax
14693 @samp{@var{hostname}:@var{portnumber}}.
14695 @item target pmon @var{port}
14696 @kindex target pmon @var{port}
14699 @item target ddb @var{port}
14700 @kindex target ddb @var{port}
14701 NEC's DDB variant of PMON for Vr4300.
14703 @item target lsi @var{port}
14704 @kindex target lsi @var{port}
14705 LSI variant of PMON.
14707 @kindex target r3900
14708 @item target r3900 @var{dev}
14709 Densan DVE-R3900 ROM monitor for Toshiba R3900 Mips.
14711 @kindex target array
14712 @item target array @var{dev}
14713 Array Tech LSI33K RAID controller board.
14719 @value{GDBN} also supports these special commands for MIPS targets:
14722 @item set mipsfpu double
14723 @itemx set mipsfpu single
14724 @itemx set mipsfpu none
14725 @itemx set mipsfpu auto
14726 @itemx show mipsfpu
14727 @kindex set mipsfpu
14728 @kindex show mipsfpu
14729 @cindex MIPS remote floating point
14730 @cindex floating point, MIPS remote
14731 If your target board does not support the MIPS floating point
14732 coprocessor, you should use the command @samp{set mipsfpu none} (if you
14733 need this, you may wish to put the command in your @value{GDBN} init
14734 file). This tells @value{GDBN} how to find the return value of
14735 functions which return floating point values. It also allows
14736 @value{GDBN} to avoid saving the floating point registers when calling
14737 functions on the board. If you are using a floating point coprocessor
14738 with only single precision floating point support, as on the @sc{r4650}
14739 processor, use the command @samp{set mipsfpu single}. The default
14740 double precision floating point coprocessor may be selected using
14741 @samp{set mipsfpu double}.
14743 In previous versions the only choices were double precision or no
14744 floating point, so @samp{set mipsfpu on} will select double precision
14745 and @samp{set mipsfpu off} will select no floating point.
14747 As usual, you can inquire about the @code{mipsfpu} variable with
14748 @samp{show mipsfpu}.
14750 @item set timeout @var{seconds}
14751 @itemx set retransmit-timeout @var{seconds}
14752 @itemx show timeout
14753 @itemx show retransmit-timeout
14754 @cindex @code{timeout}, MIPS protocol
14755 @cindex @code{retransmit-timeout}, MIPS protocol
14756 @kindex set timeout
14757 @kindex show timeout
14758 @kindex set retransmit-timeout
14759 @kindex show retransmit-timeout
14760 You can control the timeout used while waiting for a packet, in the MIPS
14761 remote protocol, with the @code{set timeout @var{seconds}} command. The
14762 default is 5 seconds. Similarly, you can control the timeout used while
14763 waiting for an acknowledgement of a packet with the @code{set
14764 retransmit-timeout @var{seconds}} command. The default is 3 seconds.
14765 You can inspect both values with @code{show timeout} and @code{show
14766 retransmit-timeout}. (These commands are @emph{only} available when
14767 @value{GDBN} is configured for @samp{--target=mips-idt-ecoff}.)
14769 The timeout set by @code{set timeout} does not apply when @value{GDBN}
14770 is waiting for your program to stop. In that case, @value{GDBN} waits
14771 forever because it has no way of knowing how long the program is going
14772 to run before stopping.
14774 @item set syn-garbage-limit @var{num}
14775 @kindex set syn-garbage-limit@r{, MIPS remote}
14776 @cindex synchronize with remote MIPS target
14777 Limit the maximum number of characters @value{GDBN} should ignore when
14778 it tries to synchronize with the remote target. The default is 10
14779 characters. Setting the limit to -1 means there's no limit.
14781 @item show syn-garbage-limit
14782 @kindex show syn-garbage-limit@r{, MIPS remote}
14783 Show the current limit on the number of characters to ignore when
14784 trying to synchronize with the remote system.
14786 @item set monitor-prompt @var{prompt}
14787 @kindex set monitor-prompt@r{, MIPS remote}
14788 @cindex remote monitor prompt
14789 Tell @value{GDBN} to expect the specified @var{prompt} string from the
14790 remote monitor. The default depends on the target:
14800 @item show monitor-prompt
14801 @kindex show monitor-prompt@r{, MIPS remote}
14802 Show the current strings @value{GDBN} expects as the prompt from the
14805 @item set monitor-warnings
14806 @kindex set monitor-warnings@r{, MIPS remote}
14807 Enable or disable monitor warnings about hardware breakpoints. This
14808 has effect only for the @code{lsi} target. When on, @value{GDBN} will
14809 display warning messages whose codes are returned by the @code{lsi}
14810 PMON monitor for breakpoint commands.
14812 @item show monitor-warnings
14813 @kindex show monitor-warnings@r{, MIPS remote}
14814 Show the current setting of printing monitor warnings.
14816 @item pmon @var{command}
14817 @kindex pmon@r{, MIPS remote}
14818 @cindex send PMON command
14819 This command allows sending an arbitrary @var{command} string to the
14820 monitor. The monitor must be in debug mode for this to work.
14823 @node OpenRISC 1000
14824 @subsection OpenRISC 1000
14825 @cindex OpenRISC 1000
14827 @cindex or1k boards
14828 See OR1k Architecture document (@uref{www.opencores.org}) for more information
14829 about platform and commands.
14833 @kindex target jtag
14834 @item target jtag jtag://@var{host}:@var{port}
14836 Connects to remote JTAG server.
14837 JTAG remote server can be either an or1ksim or JTAG server,
14838 connected via parallel port to the board.
14840 Example: @code{target jtag jtag://localhost:9999}
14843 @item or1ksim @var{command}
14844 If connected to @code{or1ksim} OpenRISC 1000 Architectural
14845 Simulator, proprietary commands can be executed.
14847 @kindex info or1k spr
14848 @item info or1k spr
14849 Displays spr groups.
14851 @item info or1k spr @var{group}
14852 @itemx info or1k spr @var{groupno}
14853 Displays register names in selected group.
14855 @item info or1k spr @var{group} @var{register}
14856 @itemx info or1k spr @var{register}
14857 @itemx info or1k spr @var{groupno} @var{registerno}
14858 @itemx info or1k spr @var{registerno}
14859 Shows information about specified spr register.
14862 @item spr @var{group} @var{register} @var{value}
14863 @itemx spr @var{register @var{value}}
14864 @itemx spr @var{groupno} @var{registerno @var{value}}
14865 @itemx spr @var{registerno @var{value}}
14866 Writes @var{value} to specified spr register.
14869 Some implementations of OpenRISC 1000 Architecture also have hardware trace.
14870 It is very similar to @value{GDBN} trace, except it does not interfere with normal
14871 program execution and is thus much faster. Hardware breakpoints/watchpoint
14872 triggers can be set using:
14875 Load effective address/data
14877 Store effective address/data
14879 Access effective address ($SEA or $LEA) or data ($SDATA/$LDATA)
14884 When triggered, it can capture low level data, like: @code{PC}, @code{LSEA},
14885 @code{LDATA}, @code{SDATA}, @code{READSPR}, @code{WRITESPR}, @code{INSTR}.
14887 @code{htrace} commands:
14888 @cindex OpenRISC 1000 htrace
14891 @item hwatch @var{conditional}
14892 Set hardware watchpoint on combination of Load/Store Effective Address(es)
14893 or Data. For example:
14895 @code{hwatch ($LEA == my_var) && ($LDATA < 50) || ($SEA == my_var) && ($SDATA >= 50)}
14897 @code{hwatch ($LEA == my_var) && ($LDATA < 50) || ($SEA == my_var) && ($SDATA >= 50)}
14901 Display information about current HW trace configuration.
14903 @item htrace trigger @var{conditional}
14904 Set starting criteria for HW trace.
14906 @item htrace qualifier @var{conditional}
14907 Set acquisition qualifier for HW trace.
14909 @item htrace stop @var{conditional}
14910 Set HW trace stopping criteria.
14912 @item htrace record [@var{data}]*
14913 Selects the data to be recorded, when qualifier is met and HW trace was
14916 @item htrace enable
14917 @itemx htrace disable
14918 Enables/disables the HW trace.
14920 @item htrace rewind [@var{filename}]
14921 Clears currently recorded trace data.
14923 If filename is specified, new trace file is made and any newly collected data
14924 will be written there.
14926 @item htrace print [@var{start} [@var{len}]]
14927 Prints trace buffer, using current record configuration.
14929 @item htrace mode continuous
14930 Set continuous trace mode.
14932 @item htrace mode suspend
14933 Set suspend trace mode.
14938 @subsection PowerPC
14941 @kindex target dink32
14942 @item target dink32 @var{dev}
14943 DINK32 ROM monitor.
14945 @kindex target ppcbug
14946 @item target ppcbug @var{dev}
14947 @kindex target ppcbug1
14948 @item target ppcbug1 @var{dev}
14949 PPCBUG ROM monitor for PowerPC.
14952 @item target sds @var{dev}
14953 SDS monitor, running on a PowerPC board (such as Motorola's ADS).
14956 @cindex SDS protocol
14957 The following commands specific to the SDS protocol are supported
14961 @item set sdstimeout @var{nsec}
14962 @kindex set sdstimeout
14963 Set the timeout for SDS protocol reads to be @var{nsec} seconds. The
14964 default is 2 seconds.
14966 @item show sdstimeout
14967 @kindex show sdstimeout
14968 Show the current value of the SDS timeout.
14970 @item sds @var{command}
14971 @kindex sds@r{, a command}
14972 Send the specified @var{command} string to the SDS monitor.
14977 @subsection HP PA Embedded
14981 @kindex target op50n
14982 @item target op50n @var{dev}
14983 OP50N monitor, running on an OKI HPPA board.
14985 @kindex target w89k
14986 @item target w89k @var{dev}
14987 W89K monitor, running on a Winbond HPPA board.
14992 @subsection Tsqware Sparclet
14996 @value{GDBN} enables developers to debug tasks running on
14997 Sparclet targets from a Unix host.
14998 @value{GDBN} uses code that runs on
14999 both the Unix host and on the Sparclet target. The program
15000 @code{@value{GDBP}} is installed and executed on the Unix host.
15003 @item remotetimeout @var{args}
15004 @kindex remotetimeout
15005 @value{GDBN} supports the option @code{remotetimeout}.
15006 This option is set by the user, and @var{args} represents the number of
15007 seconds @value{GDBN} waits for responses.
15010 @cindex compiling, on Sparclet
15011 When compiling for debugging, include the options @samp{-g} to get debug
15012 information and @samp{-Ttext} to relocate the program to where you wish to
15013 load it on the target. You may also want to add the options @samp{-n} or
15014 @samp{-N} in order to reduce the size of the sections. Example:
15017 sparclet-aout-gcc prog.c -Ttext 0x12010000 -g -o prog -N
15020 You can use @code{objdump} to verify that the addresses are what you intended:
15023 sparclet-aout-objdump --headers --syms prog
15026 @cindex running, on Sparclet
15028 your Unix execution search path to find @value{GDBN}, you are ready to
15029 run @value{GDBN}. From your Unix host, run @code{@value{GDBP}}
15030 (or @code{sparclet-aout-gdb}, depending on your installation).
15032 @value{GDBN} comes up showing the prompt:
15039 * Sparclet File:: Setting the file to debug
15040 * Sparclet Connection:: Connecting to Sparclet
15041 * Sparclet Download:: Sparclet download
15042 * Sparclet Execution:: Running and debugging
15045 @node Sparclet File
15046 @subsubsection Setting File to Debug
15048 The @value{GDBN} command @code{file} lets you choose with program to debug.
15051 (gdbslet) file prog
15055 @value{GDBN} then attempts to read the symbol table of @file{prog}.
15056 @value{GDBN} locates
15057 the file by searching the directories listed in the command search
15059 If the file was compiled with debug information (option @samp{-g}), source
15060 files will be searched as well.
15061 @value{GDBN} locates
15062 the source files by searching the directories listed in the directory search
15063 path (@pxref{Environment, ,Your Program's Environment}).
15065 to find a file, it displays a message such as:
15068 prog: No such file or directory.
15071 When this happens, add the appropriate directories to the search paths with
15072 the @value{GDBN} commands @code{path} and @code{dir}, and execute the
15073 @code{target} command again.
15075 @node Sparclet Connection
15076 @subsubsection Connecting to Sparclet
15078 The @value{GDBN} command @code{target} lets you connect to a Sparclet target.
15079 To connect to a target on serial port ``@code{ttya}'', type:
15082 (gdbslet) target sparclet /dev/ttya
15083 Remote target sparclet connected to /dev/ttya
15084 main () at ../prog.c:3
15088 @value{GDBN} displays messages like these:
15094 @node Sparclet Download
15095 @subsubsection Sparclet Download
15097 @cindex download to Sparclet
15098 Once connected to the Sparclet target,
15099 you can use the @value{GDBN}
15100 @code{load} command to download the file from the host to the target.
15101 The file name and load offset should be given as arguments to the @code{load}
15103 Since the file format is aout, the program must be loaded to the starting
15104 address. You can use @code{objdump} to find out what this value is. The load
15105 offset is an offset which is added to the VMA (virtual memory address)
15106 of each of the file's sections.
15107 For instance, if the program
15108 @file{prog} was linked to text address 0x1201000, with data at 0x12010160
15109 and bss at 0x12010170, in @value{GDBN}, type:
15112 (gdbslet) load prog 0x12010000
15113 Loading section .text, size 0xdb0 vma 0x12010000
15116 If the code is loaded at a different address then what the program was linked
15117 to, you may need to use the @code{section} and @code{add-symbol-file} commands
15118 to tell @value{GDBN} where to map the symbol table.
15120 @node Sparclet Execution
15121 @subsubsection Running and Debugging
15123 @cindex running and debugging Sparclet programs
15124 You can now begin debugging the task using @value{GDBN}'s execution control
15125 commands, @code{b}, @code{step}, @code{run}, etc. See the @value{GDBN}
15126 manual for the list of commands.
15130 Breakpoint 1 at 0x12010000: file prog.c, line 3.
15132 Starting program: prog
15133 Breakpoint 1, main (argc=1, argv=0xeffff21c) at prog.c:3
15134 3 char *symarg = 0;
15136 4 char *execarg = "hello!";
15141 @subsection Fujitsu Sparclite
15145 @kindex target sparclite
15146 @item target sparclite @var{dev}
15147 Fujitsu sparclite boards, used only for the purpose of loading.
15148 You must use an additional command to debug the program.
15149 For example: target remote @var{dev} using @value{GDBN} standard
15155 @subsection Zilog Z8000
15158 @cindex simulator, Z8000
15159 @cindex Zilog Z8000 simulator
15161 When configured for debugging Zilog Z8000 targets, @value{GDBN} includes
15164 For the Z8000 family, @samp{target sim} simulates either the Z8002 (the
15165 unsegmented variant of the Z8000 architecture) or the Z8001 (the
15166 segmented variant). The simulator recognizes which architecture is
15167 appropriate by inspecting the object code.
15170 @item target sim @var{args}
15172 @kindex target sim@r{, with Z8000}
15173 Debug programs on a simulated CPU. If the simulator supports setup
15174 options, specify them via @var{args}.
15178 After specifying this target, you can debug programs for the simulated
15179 CPU in the same style as programs for your host computer; use the
15180 @code{file} command to load a new program image, the @code{run} command
15181 to run your program, and so on.
15183 As well as making available all the usual machine registers
15184 (@pxref{Registers, ,Registers}), the Z8000 simulator provides three
15185 additional items of information as specially named registers:
15190 Counts clock-ticks in the simulator.
15193 Counts instructions run in the simulator.
15196 Execution time in 60ths of a second.
15200 You can refer to these values in @value{GDBN} expressions with the usual
15201 conventions; for example, @w{@samp{b fputc if $cycles>5000}} sets a
15202 conditional breakpoint that suspends only after at least 5000
15203 simulated clock ticks.
15206 @subsection Atmel AVR
15209 When configured for debugging the Atmel AVR, @value{GDBN} supports the
15210 following AVR-specific commands:
15213 @item info io_registers
15214 @kindex info io_registers@r{, AVR}
15215 @cindex I/O registers (Atmel AVR)
15216 This command displays information about the AVR I/O registers. For
15217 each register, @value{GDBN} prints its number and value.
15224 When configured for debugging CRIS, @value{GDBN} provides the
15225 following CRIS-specific commands:
15228 @item set cris-version @var{ver}
15229 @cindex CRIS version
15230 Set the current CRIS version to @var{ver}, either @samp{10} or @samp{32}.
15231 The CRIS version affects register names and sizes. This command is useful in
15232 case autodetection of the CRIS version fails.
15234 @item show cris-version
15235 Show the current CRIS version.
15237 @item set cris-dwarf2-cfi
15238 @cindex DWARF-2 CFI and CRIS
15239 Set the usage of DWARF-2 CFI for CRIS debugging. The default is @samp{on}.
15240 Change to @samp{off} when using @code{gcc-cris} whose version is below
15243 @item show cris-dwarf2-cfi
15244 Show the current state of using DWARF-2 CFI.
15246 @item set cris-mode @var{mode}
15248 Set the current CRIS mode to @var{mode}. It should only be changed when
15249 debugging in guru mode, in which case it should be set to
15250 @samp{guru} (the default is @samp{normal}).
15252 @item show cris-mode
15253 Show the current CRIS mode.
15257 @subsection Renesas Super-H
15260 For the Renesas Super-H processor, @value{GDBN} provides these
15265 @kindex regs@r{, Super-H}
15266 Show the values of all Super-H registers.
15270 @node Architectures
15271 @section Architectures
15273 This section describes characteristics of architectures that affect
15274 all uses of @value{GDBN} with the architecture, both native and cross.
15281 * HPPA:: HP PA architecture
15282 * SPU:: Cell Broadband Engine SPU architecture
15286 @subsection x86 Architecture-specific Issues
15289 @item set struct-convention @var{mode}
15290 @kindex set struct-convention
15291 @cindex struct return convention
15292 @cindex struct/union returned in registers
15293 Set the convention used by the inferior to return @code{struct}s and
15294 @code{union}s from functions to @var{mode}. Possible values of
15295 @var{mode} are @code{"pcc"}, @code{"reg"}, and @code{"default"} (the
15296 default). @code{"default"} or @code{"pcc"} means that @code{struct}s
15297 are returned on the stack, while @code{"reg"} means that a
15298 @code{struct} or a @code{union} whose size is 1, 2, 4, or 8 bytes will
15299 be returned in a register.
15301 @item show struct-convention
15302 @kindex show struct-convention
15303 Show the current setting of the convention to return @code{struct}s
15312 @kindex set rstack_high_address
15313 @cindex AMD 29K register stack
15314 @cindex register stack, AMD29K
15315 @item set rstack_high_address @var{address}
15316 On AMD 29000 family processors, registers are saved in a separate
15317 @dfn{register stack}. There is no way for @value{GDBN} to determine the
15318 extent of this stack. Normally, @value{GDBN} just assumes that the
15319 stack is ``large enough''. This may result in @value{GDBN} referencing
15320 memory locations that do not exist. If necessary, you can get around
15321 this problem by specifying the ending address of the register stack with
15322 the @code{set rstack_high_address} command. The argument should be an
15323 address, which you probably want to precede with @samp{0x} to specify in
15326 @kindex show rstack_high_address
15327 @item show rstack_high_address
15328 Display the current limit of the register stack, on AMD 29000 family
15336 See the following section.
15341 @cindex stack on Alpha
15342 @cindex stack on MIPS
15343 @cindex Alpha stack
15345 Alpha- and MIPS-based computers use an unusual stack frame, which
15346 sometimes requires @value{GDBN} to search backward in the object code to
15347 find the beginning of a function.
15349 @cindex response time, MIPS debugging
15350 To improve response time (especially for embedded applications, where
15351 @value{GDBN} may be restricted to a slow serial line for this search)
15352 you may want to limit the size of this search, using one of these
15356 @cindex @code{heuristic-fence-post} (Alpha, MIPS)
15357 @item set heuristic-fence-post @var{limit}
15358 Restrict @value{GDBN} to examining at most @var{limit} bytes in its
15359 search for the beginning of a function. A value of @var{0} (the
15360 default) means there is no limit. However, except for @var{0}, the
15361 larger the limit the more bytes @code{heuristic-fence-post} must search
15362 and therefore the longer it takes to run. You should only need to use
15363 this command when debugging a stripped executable.
15365 @item show heuristic-fence-post
15366 Display the current limit.
15370 These commands are available @emph{only} when @value{GDBN} is configured
15371 for debugging programs on Alpha or MIPS processors.
15373 Several MIPS-specific commands are available when debugging MIPS
15377 @item set mips abi @var{arg}
15378 @kindex set mips abi
15379 @cindex set ABI for MIPS
15380 Tell @value{GDBN} which MIPS ABI is used by the inferior. Possible
15381 values of @var{arg} are:
15385 The default ABI associated with the current binary (this is the
15396 @item show mips abi
15397 @kindex show mips abi
15398 Show the MIPS ABI used by @value{GDBN} to debug the inferior.
15401 @itemx show mipsfpu
15402 @xref{MIPS Embedded, set mipsfpu}.
15404 @item set mips mask-address @var{arg}
15405 @kindex set mips mask-address
15406 @cindex MIPS addresses, masking
15407 This command determines whether the most-significant 32 bits of 64-bit
15408 MIPS addresses are masked off. The argument @var{arg} can be
15409 @samp{on}, @samp{off}, or @samp{auto}. The latter is the default
15410 setting, which lets @value{GDBN} determine the correct value.
15412 @item show mips mask-address
15413 @kindex show mips mask-address
15414 Show whether the upper 32 bits of MIPS addresses are masked off or
15417 @item set remote-mips64-transfers-32bit-regs
15418 @kindex set remote-mips64-transfers-32bit-regs
15419 This command controls compatibility with 64-bit MIPS targets that
15420 transfer data in 32-bit quantities. If you have an old MIPS 64 target
15421 that transfers 32 bits for some registers, like @sc{sr} and @sc{fsr},
15422 and 64 bits for other registers, set this option to @samp{on}.
15424 @item show remote-mips64-transfers-32bit-regs
15425 @kindex show remote-mips64-transfers-32bit-regs
15426 Show the current setting of compatibility with older MIPS 64 targets.
15428 @item set debug mips
15429 @kindex set debug mips
15430 This command turns on and off debugging messages for the MIPS-specific
15431 target code in @value{GDBN}.
15433 @item show debug mips
15434 @kindex show debug mips
15435 Show the current setting of MIPS debugging messages.
15441 @cindex HPPA support
15443 When @value{GDBN} is debugging the HP PA architecture, it provides the
15444 following special commands:
15447 @item set debug hppa
15448 @kindex set debug hppa
15449 This command determines whether HPPA architecture-specific debugging
15450 messages are to be displayed.
15452 @item show debug hppa
15453 Show whether HPPA debugging messages are displayed.
15455 @item maint print unwind @var{address}
15456 @kindex maint print unwind@r{, HPPA}
15457 This command displays the contents of the unwind table entry at the
15458 given @var{address}.
15464 @subsection Cell Broadband Engine SPU architecture
15465 @cindex Cell Broadband Engine
15468 When @value{GDBN} is debugging the Cell Broadband Engine SPU architecture,
15469 it provides the following special commands:
15472 @item info spu event
15474 Display SPU event facility status. Shows current event mask
15475 and pending event status.
15477 @item info spu signal
15478 Display SPU signal notification facility status. Shows pending
15479 signal-control word and signal notification mode of both signal
15480 notification channels.
15482 @item info spu mailbox
15483 Display SPU mailbox facility status. Shows all pending entries,
15484 in order of processing, in each of the SPU Write Outbound,
15485 SPU Write Outbound Interrupt, and SPU Read Inbound mailboxes.
15488 Display MFC DMA status. Shows all pending commands in the MFC
15489 DMA queue. For each entry, opcode, tag, class IDs, effective
15490 and local store addresses and transfer size are shown.
15492 @item info spu proxydma
15493 Display MFC Proxy-DMA status. Shows all pending commands in the MFC
15494 Proxy-DMA queue. For each entry, opcode, tag, class IDs, effective
15495 and local store addresses and transfer size are shown.
15500 @node Controlling GDB
15501 @chapter Controlling @value{GDBN}
15503 You can alter the way @value{GDBN} interacts with you by using the
15504 @code{set} command. For commands controlling how @value{GDBN} displays
15505 data, see @ref{Print Settings, ,Print Settings}. Other settings are
15510 * Editing:: Command editing
15511 * Command History:: Command history
15512 * Screen Size:: Screen size
15513 * Numbers:: Numbers
15514 * ABI:: Configuring the current ABI
15515 * Messages/Warnings:: Optional warnings and messages
15516 * Debugging Output:: Optional messages about internal happenings
15524 @value{GDBN} indicates its readiness to read a command by printing a string
15525 called the @dfn{prompt}. This string is normally @samp{(@value{GDBP})}. You
15526 can change the prompt string with the @code{set prompt} command. For
15527 instance, when debugging @value{GDBN} with @value{GDBN}, it is useful to change
15528 the prompt in one of the @value{GDBN} sessions so that you can always tell
15529 which one you are talking to.
15531 @emph{Note:} @code{set prompt} does not add a space for you after the
15532 prompt you set. This allows you to set a prompt which ends in a space
15533 or a prompt that does not.
15537 @item set prompt @var{newprompt}
15538 Directs @value{GDBN} to use @var{newprompt} as its prompt string henceforth.
15540 @kindex show prompt
15542 Prints a line of the form: @samp{Gdb's prompt is: @var{your-prompt}}
15546 @section Command Editing
15548 @cindex command line editing
15550 @value{GDBN} reads its input commands via the @dfn{Readline} interface. This
15551 @sc{gnu} library provides consistent behavior for programs which provide a
15552 command line interface to the user. Advantages are @sc{gnu} Emacs-style
15553 or @dfn{vi}-style inline editing of commands, @code{csh}-like history
15554 substitution, and a storage and recall of command history across
15555 debugging sessions.
15557 You may control the behavior of command line editing in @value{GDBN} with the
15558 command @code{set}.
15561 @kindex set editing
15564 @itemx set editing on
15565 Enable command line editing (enabled by default).
15567 @item set editing off
15568 Disable command line editing.
15570 @kindex show editing
15572 Show whether command line editing is enabled.
15575 @xref{Command Line Editing}, for more details about the Readline
15576 interface. Users unfamiliar with @sc{gnu} Emacs or @code{vi} are
15577 encouraged to read that chapter.
15579 @node Command History
15580 @section Command History
15581 @cindex command history
15583 @value{GDBN} can keep track of the commands you type during your
15584 debugging sessions, so that you can be certain of precisely what
15585 happened. Use these commands to manage the @value{GDBN} command
15588 @value{GDBN} uses the @sc{gnu} History library, a part of the Readline
15589 package, to provide the history facility. @xref{Using History
15590 Interactively}, for the detailed description of the History library.
15592 To issue a command to @value{GDBN} without affecting certain aspects of
15593 the state which is seen by users, prefix it with @samp{server }
15594 (@pxref{Server Prefix}). This
15595 means that this command will not affect the command history, nor will it
15596 affect @value{GDBN}'s notion of which command to repeat if @key{RET} is
15597 pressed on a line by itself.
15599 @cindex @code{server}, command prefix
15600 The server prefix does not affect the recording of values into the value
15601 history; to print a value without recording it into the value history,
15602 use the @code{output} command instead of the @code{print} command.
15604 Here is the description of @value{GDBN} commands related to command
15608 @cindex history substitution
15609 @cindex history file
15610 @kindex set history filename
15611 @cindex @env{GDBHISTFILE}, environment variable
15612 @item set history filename @var{fname}
15613 Set the name of the @value{GDBN} command history file to @var{fname}.
15614 This is the file where @value{GDBN} reads an initial command history
15615 list, and where it writes the command history from this session when it
15616 exits. You can access this list through history expansion or through
15617 the history command editing characters listed below. This file defaults
15618 to the value of the environment variable @code{GDBHISTFILE}, or to
15619 @file{./.gdb_history} (@file{./_gdb_history} on MS-DOS) if this variable
15622 @cindex save command history
15623 @kindex set history save
15624 @item set history save
15625 @itemx set history save on
15626 Record command history in a file, whose name may be specified with the
15627 @code{set history filename} command. By default, this option is disabled.
15629 @item set history save off
15630 Stop recording command history in a file.
15632 @cindex history size
15633 @kindex set history size
15634 @cindex @env{HISTSIZE}, environment variable
15635 @item set history size @var{size}
15636 Set the number of commands which @value{GDBN} keeps in its history list.
15637 This defaults to the value of the environment variable
15638 @code{HISTSIZE}, or to 256 if this variable is not set.
15641 History expansion assigns special meaning to the character @kbd{!}.
15642 @xref{Event Designators}, for more details.
15644 @cindex history expansion, turn on/off
15645 Since @kbd{!} is also the logical not operator in C, history expansion
15646 is off by default. If you decide to enable history expansion with the
15647 @code{set history expansion on} command, you may sometimes need to
15648 follow @kbd{!} (when it is used as logical not, in an expression) with
15649 a space or a tab to prevent it from being expanded. The readline
15650 history facilities do not attempt substitution on the strings
15651 @kbd{!=} and @kbd{!(}, even when history expansion is enabled.
15653 The commands to control history expansion are:
15656 @item set history expansion on
15657 @itemx set history expansion
15658 @kindex set history expansion
15659 Enable history expansion. History expansion is off by default.
15661 @item set history expansion off
15662 Disable history expansion.
15665 @kindex show history
15667 @itemx show history filename
15668 @itemx show history save
15669 @itemx show history size
15670 @itemx show history expansion
15671 These commands display the state of the @value{GDBN} history parameters.
15672 @code{show history} by itself displays all four states.
15677 @kindex show commands
15678 @cindex show last commands
15679 @cindex display command history
15680 @item show commands
15681 Display the last ten commands in the command history.
15683 @item show commands @var{n}
15684 Print ten commands centered on command number @var{n}.
15686 @item show commands +
15687 Print ten commands just after the commands last printed.
15691 @section Screen Size
15692 @cindex size of screen
15693 @cindex pauses in output
15695 Certain commands to @value{GDBN} may produce large amounts of
15696 information output to the screen. To help you read all of it,
15697 @value{GDBN} pauses and asks you for input at the end of each page of
15698 output. Type @key{RET} when you want to continue the output, or @kbd{q}
15699 to discard the remaining output. Also, the screen width setting
15700 determines when to wrap lines of output. Depending on what is being
15701 printed, @value{GDBN} tries to break the line at a readable place,
15702 rather than simply letting it overflow onto the following line.
15704 Normally @value{GDBN} knows the size of the screen from the terminal
15705 driver software. For example, on Unix @value{GDBN} uses the termcap data base
15706 together with the value of the @code{TERM} environment variable and the
15707 @code{stty rows} and @code{stty cols} settings. If this is not correct,
15708 you can override it with the @code{set height} and @code{set
15715 @kindex show height
15716 @item set height @var{lpp}
15718 @itemx set width @var{cpl}
15720 These @code{set} commands specify a screen height of @var{lpp} lines and
15721 a screen width of @var{cpl} characters. The associated @code{show}
15722 commands display the current settings.
15724 If you specify a height of zero lines, @value{GDBN} does not pause during
15725 output no matter how long the output is. This is useful if output is to a
15726 file or to an editor buffer.
15728 Likewise, you can specify @samp{set width 0} to prevent @value{GDBN}
15729 from wrapping its output.
15731 @item set pagination on
15732 @itemx set pagination off
15733 @kindex set pagination
15734 Turn the output pagination on or off; the default is on. Turning
15735 pagination off is the alternative to @code{set height 0}.
15737 @item show pagination
15738 @kindex show pagination
15739 Show the current pagination mode.
15744 @cindex number representation
15745 @cindex entering numbers
15747 You can always enter numbers in octal, decimal, or hexadecimal in
15748 @value{GDBN} by the usual conventions: octal numbers begin with
15749 @samp{0}, decimal numbers end with @samp{.}, and hexadecimal numbers
15750 begin with @samp{0x}. Numbers that neither begin with @samp{0} or
15751 @samp{0x}, nor end with a @samp{.} are, by default, entered in base
15752 10; likewise, the default display for numbers---when no particular
15753 format is specified---is base 10. You can change the default base for
15754 both input and output with the commands described below.
15757 @kindex set input-radix
15758 @item set input-radix @var{base}
15759 Set the default base for numeric input. Supported choices
15760 for @var{base} are decimal 8, 10, or 16. @var{base} must itself be
15761 specified either unambiguously or using the current input radix; for
15765 set input-radix 012
15766 set input-radix 10.
15767 set input-radix 0xa
15771 sets the input base to decimal. On the other hand, @samp{set input-radix 10}
15772 leaves the input radix unchanged, no matter what it was, since
15773 @samp{10}, being without any leading or trailing signs of its base, is
15774 interpreted in the current radix. Thus, if the current radix is 16,
15775 @samp{10} is interpreted in hex, i.e.@: as 16 decimal, which doesn't
15778 @kindex set output-radix
15779 @item set output-radix @var{base}
15780 Set the default base for numeric display. Supported choices
15781 for @var{base} are decimal 8, 10, or 16. @var{base} must itself be
15782 specified either unambiguously or using the current input radix.
15784 @kindex show input-radix
15785 @item show input-radix
15786 Display the current default base for numeric input.
15788 @kindex show output-radix
15789 @item show output-radix
15790 Display the current default base for numeric display.
15792 @item set radix @r{[}@var{base}@r{]}
15796 These commands set and show the default base for both input and output
15797 of numbers. @code{set radix} sets the radix of input and output to
15798 the same base; without an argument, it resets the radix back to its
15799 default value of 10.
15804 @section Configuring the Current ABI
15806 @value{GDBN} can determine the @dfn{ABI} (Application Binary Interface) of your
15807 application automatically. However, sometimes you need to override its
15808 conclusions. Use these commands to manage @value{GDBN}'s view of the
15815 One @value{GDBN} configuration can debug binaries for multiple operating
15816 system targets, either via remote debugging or native emulation.
15817 @value{GDBN} will autodetect the @dfn{OS ABI} (Operating System ABI) in use,
15818 but you can override its conclusion using the @code{set osabi} command.
15819 One example where this is useful is in debugging of binaries which use
15820 an alternate C library (e.g.@: @sc{uClibc} for @sc{gnu}/Linux) which does
15821 not have the same identifying marks that the standard C library for your
15826 Show the OS ABI currently in use.
15829 With no argument, show the list of registered available OS ABI's.
15831 @item set osabi @var{abi}
15832 Set the current OS ABI to @var{abi}.
15835 @cindex float promotion
15837 Generally, the way that an argument of type @code{float} is passed to a
15838 function depends on whether the function is prototyped. For a prototyped
15839 (i.e.@: ANSI/ISO style) function, @code{float} arguments are passed unchanged,
15840 according to the architecture's convention for @code{float}. For unprototyped
15841 (i.e.@: K&R style) functions, @code{float} arguments are first promoted to type
15842 @code{double} and then passed.
15844 Unfortunately, some forms of debug information do not reliably indicate whether
15845 a function is prototyped. If @value{GDBN} calls a function that is not marked
15846 as prototyped, it consults @kbd{set coerce-float-to-double}.
15849 @kindex set coerce-float-to-double
15850 @item set coerce-float-to-double
15851 @itemx set coerce-float-to-double on
15852 Arguments of type @code{float} will be promoted to @code{double} when passed
15853 to an unprototyped function. This is the default setting.
15855 @item set coerce-float-to-double off
15856 Arguments of type @code{float} will be passed directly to unprototyped
15859 @kindex show coerce-float-to-double
15860 @item show coerce-float-to-double
15861 Show the current setting of promoting @code{float} to @code{double}.
15865 @kindex show cp-abi
15866 @value{GDBN} needs to know the ABI used for your program's C@t{++}
15867 objects. The correct C@t{++} ABI depends on which C@t{++} compiler was
15868 used to build your application. @value{GDBN} only fully supports
15869 programs with a single C@t{++} ABI; if your program contains code using
15870 multiple C@t{++} ABI's or if @value{GDBN} can not identify your
15871 program's ABI correctly, you can tell @value{GDBN} which ABI to use.
15872 Currently supported ABI's include ``gnu-v2'', for @code{g++} versions
15873 before 3.0, ``gnu-v3'', for @code{g++} versions 3.0 and later, and
15874 ``hpaCC'' for the HP ANSI C@t{++} compiler. Other C@t{++} compilers may
15875 use the ``gnu-v2'' or ``gnu-v3'' ABI's as well. The default setting is
15880 Show the C@t{++} ABI currently in use.
15883 With no argument, show the list of supported C@t{++} ABI's.
15885 @item set cp-abi @var{abi}
15886 @itemx set cp-abi auto
15887 Set the current C@t{++} ABI to @var{abi}, or return to automatic detection.
15890 @node Messages/Warnings
15891 @section Optional Warnings and Messages
15893 @cindex verbose operation
15894 @cindex optional warnings
15895 By default, @value{GDBN} is silent about its inner workings. If you are
15896 running on a slow machine, you may want to use the @code{set verbose}
15897 command. This makes @value{GDBN} tell you when it does a lengthy
15898 internal operation, so you will not think it has crashed.
15900 Currently, the messages controlled by @code{set verbose} are those
15901 which announce that the symbol table for a source file is being read;
15902 see @code{symbol-file} in @ref{Files, ,Commands to Specify Files}.
15905 @kindex set verbose
15906 @item set verbose on
15907 Enables @value{GDBN} output of certain informational messages.
15909 @item set verbose off
15910 Disables @value{GDBN} output of certain informational messages.
15912 @kindex show verbose
15914 Displays whether @code{set verbose} is on or off.
15917 By default, if @value{GDBN} encounters bugs in the symbol table of an
15918 object file, it is silent; but if you are debugging a compiler, you may
15919 find this information useful (@pxref{Symbol Errors, ,Errors Reading
15924 @kindex set complaints
15925 @item set complaints @var{limit}
15926 Permits @value{GDBN} to output @var{limit} complaints about each type of
15927 unusual symbols before becoming silent about the problem. Set
15928 @var{limit} to zero to suppress all complaints; set it to a large number
15929 to prevent complaints from being suppressed.
15931 @kindex show complaints
15932 @item show complaints
15933 Displays how many symbol complaints @value{GDBN} is permitted to produce.
15937 By default, @value{GDBN} is cautious, and asks what sometimes seems to be a
15938 lot of stupid questions to confirm certain commands. For example, if
15939 you try to run a program which is already running:
15943 The program being debugged has been started already.
15944 Start it from the beginning? (y or n)
15947 If you are willing to unflinchingly face the consequences of your own
15948 commands, you can disable this ``feature'':
15952 @kindex set confirm
15954 @cindex confirmation
15955 @cindex stupid questions
15956 @item set confirm off
15957 Disables confirmation requests.
15959 @item set confirm on
15960 Enables confirmation requests (the default).
15962 @kindex show confirm
15964 Displays state of confirmation requests.
15968 @cindex command tracing
15969 If you need to debug user-defined commands or sourced files you may find it
15970 useful to enable @dfn{command tracing}. In this mode each command will be
15971 printed as it is executed, prefixed with one or more @samp{+} symbols, the
15972 quantity denoting the call depth of each command.
15975 @kindex set trace-commands
15976 @cindex command scripts, debugging
15977 @item set trace-commands on
15978 Enable command tracing.
15979 @item set trace-commands off
15980 Disable command tracing.
15981 @item show trace-commands
15982 Display the current state of command tracing.
15985 @node Debugging Output
15986 @section Optional Messages about Internal Happenings
15987 @cindex optional debugging messages
15989 @value{GDBN} has commands that enable optional debugging messages from
15990 various @value{GDBN} subsystems; normally these commands are of
15991 interest to @value{GDBN} maintainers, or when reporting a bug. This
15992 section documents those commands.
15995 @kindex set exec-done-display
15996 @item set exec-done-display
15997 Turns on or off the notification of asynchronous commands'
15998 completion. When on, @value{GDBN} will print a message when an
15999 asynchronous command finishes its execution. The default is off.
16000 @kindex show exec-done-display
16001 @item show exec-done-display
16002 Displays the current setting of asynchronous command completion
16005 @cindex gdbarch debugging info
16006 @cindex architecture debugging info
16007 @item set debug arch
16008 Turns on or off display of gdbarch debugging info. The default is off
16010 @item show debug arch
16011 Displays the current state of displaying gdbarch debugging info.
16012 @item set debug aix-thread
16013 @cindex AIX threads
16014 Display debugging messages about inner workings of the AIX thread
16016 @item show debug aix-thread
16017 Show the current state of AIX thread debugging info display.
16018 @item set debug event
16019 @cindex event debugging info
16020 Turns on or off display of @value{GDBN} event debugging info. The
16022 @item show debug event
16023 Displays the current state of displaying @value{GDBN} event debugging
16025 @item set debug expression
16026 @cindex expression debugging info
16027 Turns on or off display of debugging info about @value{GDBN}
16028 expression parsing. The default is off.
16029 @item show debug expression
16030 Displays the current state of displaying debugging info about
16031 @value{GDBN} expression parsing.
16032 @item set debug frame
16033 @cindex frame debugging info
16034 Turns on or off display of @value{GDBN} frame debugging info. The
16036 @item show debug frame
16037 Displays the current state of displaying @value{GDBN} frame debugging
16039 @item set debug infrun
16040 @cindex inferior debugging info
16041 Turns on or off display of @value{GDBN} debugging info for running the inferior.
16042 The default is off. @file{infrun.c} contains GDB's runtime state machine used
16043 for implementing operations such as single-stepping the inferior.
16044 @item show debug infrun
16045 Displays the current state of @value{GDBN} inferior debugging.
16046 @item set debug lin-lwp
16047 @cindex @sc{gnu}/Linux LWP debug messages
16048 @cindex Linux lightweight processes
16049 Turns on or off debugging messages from the Linux LWP debug support.
16050 @item show debug lin-lwp
16051 Show the current state of Linux LWP debugging messages.
16052 @item set debug observer
16053 @cindex observer debugging info
16054 Turns on or off display of @value{GDBN} observer debugging. This
16055 includes info such as the notification of observable events.
16056 @item show debug observer
16057 Displays the current state of observer debugging.
16058 @item set debug overload
16059 @cindex C@t{++} overload debugging info
16060 Turns on or off display of @value{GDBN} C@t{++} overload debugging
16061 info. This includes info such as ranking of functions, etc. The default
16063 @item show debug overload
16064 Displays the current state of displaying @value{GDBN} C@t{++} overload
16066 @cindex packets, reporting on stdout
16067 @cindex serial connections, debugging
16068 @cindex debug remote protocol
16069 @cindex remote protocol debugging
16070 @cindex display remote packets
16071 @item set debug remote
16072 Turns on or off display of reports on all packets sent back and forth across
16073 the serial line to the remote machine. The info is printed on the
16074 @value{GDBN} standard output stream. The default is off.
16075 @item show debug remote
16076 Displays the state of display of remote packets.
16077 @item set debug serial
16078 Turns on or off display of @value{GDBN} serial debugging info. The
16080 @item show debug serial
16081 Displays the current state of displaying @value{GDBN} serial debugging
16083 @item set debug solib-frv
16084 @cindex FR-V shared-library debugging
16085 Turns on or off debugging messages for FR-V shared-library code.
16086 @item show debug solib-frv
16087 Display the current state of FR-V shared-library code debugging
16089 @item set debug target
16090 @cindex target debugging info
16091 Turns on or off display of @value{GDBN} target debugging info. This info
16092 includes what is going on at the target level of GDB, as it happens. The
16093 default is 0. Set it to 1 to track events, and to 2 to also track the
16094 value of large memory transfers. Changes to this flag do not take effect
16095 until the next time you connect to a target or use the @code{run} command.
16096 @item show debug target
16097 Displays the current state of displaying @value{GDBN} target debugging
16099 @item set debugvarobj
16100 @cindex variable object debugging info
16101 Turns on or off display of @value{GDBN} variable object debugging
16102 info. The default is off.
16103 @item show debugvarobj
16104 Displays the current state of displaying @value{GDBN} variable object
16106 @item set debug xml
16107 @cindex XML parser debugging
16108 Turns on or off debugging messages for built-in XML parsers.
16109 @item show debug xml
16110 Displays the current state of XML debugging messages.
16114 @chapter Canned Sequences of Commands
16116 Aside from breakpoint commands (@pxref{Break Commands, ,Breakpoint
16117 Command Lists}), @value{GDBN} provides two ways to store sequences of
16118 commands for execution as a unit: user-defined commands and command
16122 * Define:: How to define your own commands
16123 * Hooks:: Hooks for user-defined commands
16124 * Command Files:: How to write scripts of commands to be stored in a file
16125 * Output:: Commands for controlled output
16129 @section User-defined Commands
16131 @cindex user-defined command
16132 @cindex arguments, to user-defined commands
16133 A @dfn{user-defined command} is a sequence of @value{GDBN} commands to
16134 which you assign a new name as a command. This is done with the
16135 @code{define} command. User commands may accept up to 10 arguments
16136 separated by whitespace. Arguments are accessed within the user command
16137 via @code{$arg0@dots{}$arg9}. A trivial example:
16141 print $arg0 + $arg1 + $arg2
16146 To execute the command use:
16153 This defines the command @code{adder}, which prints the sum of
16154 its three arguments. Note the arguments are text substitutions, so they may
16155 reference variables, use complex expressions, or even perform inferior
16158 @cindex argument count in user-defined commands
16159 @cindex how many arguments (user-defined commands)
16160 In addition, @code{$argc} may be used to find out how many arguments have
16161 been passed. This expands to a number in the range 0@dots{}10.
16166 print $arg0 + $arg1
16169 print $arg0 + $arg1 + $arg2
16177 @item define @var{commandname}
16178 Define a command named @var{commandname}. If there is already a command
16179 by that name, you are asked to confirm that you want to redefine it.
16181 The definition of the command is made up of other @value{GDBN} command lines,
16182 which are given following the @code{define} command. The end of these
16183 commands is marked by a line containing @code{end}.
16186 @kindex end@r{ (user-defined commands)}
16187 @item document @var{commandname}
16188 Document the user-defined command @var{commandname}, so that it can be
16189 accessed by @code{help}. The command @var{commandname} must already be
16190 defined. This command reads lines of documentation just as @code{define}
16191 reads the lines of the command definition, ending with @code{end}.
16192 After the @code{document} command is finished, @code{help} on command
16193 @var{commandname} displays the documentation you have written.
16195 You may use the @code{document} command again to change the
16196 documentation of a command. Redefining the command with @code{define}
16197 does not change the documentation.
16199 @kindex dont-repeat
16200 @cindex don't repeat command
16202 Used inside a user-defined command, this tells @value{GDBN} that this
16203 command should not be repeated when the user hits @key{RET}
16204 (@pxref{Command Syntax, repeat last command}).
16206 @kindex help user-defined
16207 @item help user-defined
16208 List all user-defined commands, with the first line of the documentation
16213 @itemx show user @var{commandname}
16214 Display the @value{GDBN} commands used to define @var{commandname} (but
16215 not its documentation). If no @var{commandname} is given, display the
16216 definitions for all user-defined commands.
16218 @cindex infinite recursion in user-defined commands
16219 @kindex show max-user-call-depth
16220 @kindex set max-user-call-depth
16221 @item show max-user-call-depth
16222 @itemx set max-user-call-depth
16223 The value of @code{max-user-call-depth} controls how many recursion
16224 levels are allowed in user-defined commands before @value{GDBN} suspects an
16225 infinite recursion and aborts the command.
16228 In addition to the above commands, user-defined commands frequently
16229 use control flow commands, described in @ref{Command Files}.
16231 When user-defined commands are executed, the
16232 commands of the definition are not printed. An error in any command
16233 stops execution of the user-defined command.
16235 If used interactively, commands that would ask for confirmation proceed
16236 without asking when used inside a user-defined command. Many @value{GDBN}
16237 commands that normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the
16238 messages when used in a user-defined command.
16241 @section User-defined Command Hooks
16242 @cindex command hooks
16243 @cindex hooks, for commands
16244 @cindex hooks, pre-command
16247 You may define @dfn{hooks}, which are a special kind of user-defined
16248 command. Whenever you run the command @samp{foo}, if the user-defined
16249 command @samp{hook-foo} exists, it is executed (with no arguments)
16250 before that command.
16252 @cindex hooks, post-command
16254 A hook may also be defined which is run after the command you executed.
16255 Whenever you run the command @samp{foo}, if the user-defined command
16256 @samp{hookpost-foo} exists, it is executed (with no arguments) after
16257 that command. Post-execution hooks may exist simultaneously with
16258 pre-execution hooks, for the same command.
16260 It is valid for a hook to call the command which it hooks. If this
16261 occurs, the hook is not re-executed, thereby avoiding infinite recursion.
16263 @c It would be nice if hookpost could be passed a parameter indicating
16264 @c if the command it hooks executed properly or not. FIXME!
16266 @kindex stop@r{, a pseudo-command}
16267 In addition, a pseudo-command, @samp{stop} exists. Defining
16268 (@samp{hook-stop}) makes the associated commands execute every time
16269 execution stops in your program: before breakpoint commands are run,
16270 displays are printed, or the stack frame is printed.
16272 For example, to ignore @code{SIGALRM} signals while
16273 single-stepping, but treat them normally during normal execution,
16278 handle SIGALRM nopass
16282 handle SIGALRM pass
16285 define hook-continue
16286 handle SIGALRM pass
16290 As a further example, to hook at the beginning and end of the @code{echo}
16291 command, and to add extra text to the beginning and end of the message,
16299 define hookpost-echo
16303 (@value{GDBP}) echo Hello World
16304 <<<---Hello World--->>>
16309 You can define a hook for any single-word command in @value{GDBN}, but
16310 not for command aliases; you should define a hook for the basic command
16311 name, e.g.@: @code{backtrace} rather than @code{bt}.
16312 @c FIXME! So how does Joe User discover whether a command is an alias
16314 If an error occurs during the execution of your hook, execution of
16315 @value{GDBN} commands stops and @value{GDBN} issues a prompt
16316 (before the command that you actually typed had a chance to run).
16318 If you try to define a hook which does not match any known command, you
16319 get a warning from the @code{define} command.
16321 @node Command Files
16322 @section Command Files
16324 @cindex command files
16325 @cindex scripting commands
16326 A command file for @value{GDBN} is a text file made of lines that are
16327 @value{GDBN} commands. Comments (lines starting with @kbd{#}) may
16328 also be included. An empty line in a command file does nothing; it
16329 does not mean to repeat the last command, as it would from the
16332 You can request the execution of a command file with the @code{source}
16337 @cindex execute commands from a file
16338 @item source [@code{-v}] @var{filename}
16339 Execute the command file @var{filename}.
16342 The lines in a command file are generally executed sequentially,
16343 unless the order of execution is changed by one of the
16344 @emph{flow-control commands} described below. The commands are not
16345 printed as they are executed. An error in any command terminates
16346 execution of the command file and control is returned to the console.
16348 @value{GDBN} searches for @var{filename} in the current directory and then
16349 on the search path (specified with the @samp{directory} command).
16351 If @code{-v}, for verbose mode, is given then @value{GDBN} displays
16352 each command as it is executed. The option must be given before
16353 @var{filename}, and is interpreted as part of the filename anywhere else.
16355 Commands that would ask for confirmation if used interactively proceed
16356 without asking when used in a command file. Many @value{GDBN} commands that
16357 normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the messages
16358 when called from command files.
16360 @value{GDBN} also accepts command input from standard input. In this
16361 mode, normal output goes to standard output and error output goes to
16362 standard error. Errors in a command file supplied on standard input do
16363 not terminate execution of the command file---execution continues with
16367 gdb < cmds > log 2>&1
16370 (The syntax above will vary depending on the shell used.) This example
16371 will execute commands from the file @file{cmds}. All output and errors
16372 would be directed to @file{log}.
16374 Since commands stored on command files tend to be more general than
16375 commands typed interactively, they frequently need to deal with
16376 complicated situations, such as different or unexpected values of
16377 variables and symbols, changes in how the program being debugged is
16378 built, etc. @value{GDBN} provides a set of flow-control commands to
16379 deal with these complexities. Using these commands, you can write
16380 complex scripts that loop over data structures, execute commands
16381 conditionally, etc.
16388 This command allows to include in your script conditionally executed
16389 commands. The @code{if} command takes a single argument, which is an
16390 expression to evaluate. It is followed by a series of commands that
16391 are executed only if the expression is true (its value is nonzero).
16392 There can then optionally be an @code{else} line, followed by a series
16393 of commands that are only executed if the expression was false. The
16394 end of the list is marked by a line containing @code{end}.
16398 This command allows to write loops. Its syntax is similar to
16399 @code{if}: the command takes a single argument, which is an expression
16400 to evaluate, and must be followed by the commands to execute, one per
16401 line, terminated by an @code{end}. These commands are called the
16402 @dfn{body} of the loop. The commands in the body of @code{while} are
16403 executed repeatedly as long as the expression evaluates to true.
16407 This command exits the @code{while} loop in whose body it is included.
16408 Execution of the script continues after that @code{while}s @code{end}
16411 @kindex loop_continue
16412 @item loop_continue
16413 This command skips the execution of the rest of the body of commands
16414 in the @code{while} loop in whose body it is included. Execution
16415 branches to the beginning of the @code{while} loop, where it evaluates
16416 the controlling expression.
16418 @kindex end@r{ (if/else/while commands)}
16420 Terminate the block of commands that are the body of @code{if},
16421 @code{else}, or @code{while} flow-control commands.
16426 @section Commands for Controlled Output
16428 During the execution of a command file or a user-defined command, normal
16429 @value{GDBN} output is suppressed; the only output that appears is what is
16430 explicitly printed by the commands in the definition. This section
16431 describes three commands useful for generating exactly the output you
16436 @item echo @var{text}
16437 @c I do not consider backslash-space a standard C escape sequence
16438 @c because it is not in ANSI.
16439 Print @var{text}. Nonprinting characters can be included in
16440 @var{text} using C escape sequences, such as @samp{\n} to print a
16441 newline. @strong{No newline is printed unless you specify one.}
16442 In addition to the standard C escape sequences, a backslash followed
16443 by a space stands for a space. This is useful for displaying a
16444 string with spaces at the beginning or the end, since leading and
16445 trailing spaces are otherwise trimmed from all arguments.
16446 To print @samp{@w{ }and foo =@w{ }}, use the command
16447 @samp{echo \@w{ }and foo = \@w{ }}.
16449 A backslash at the end of @var{text} can be used, as in C, to continue
16450 the command onto subsequent lines. For example,
16453 echo This is some text\n\
16454 which is continued\n\
16455 onto several lines.\n
16458 produces the same output as
16461 echo This is some text\n
16462 echo which is continued\n
16463 echo onto several lines.\n
16467 @item output @var{expression}
16468 Print the value of @var{expression} and nothing but that value: no
16469 newlines, no @samp{$@var{nn} = }. The value is not entered in the
16470 value history either. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}, for more information
16473 @item output/@var{fmt} @var{expression}
16474 Print the value of @var{expression} in format @var{fmt}. You can use
16475 the same formats as for @code{print}. @xref{Output Formats,,Output
16476 Formats}, for more information.
16479 @item printf @var{template}, @var{expressions}@dots{}
16480 Print the values of one or more @var{expressions} under the control of
16481 the string @var{template}. To print several values, make
16482 @var{expressions} be a comma-separated list of individual expressions,
16483 which may be either numbers or pointers. Their values are printed as
16484 specified by @var{template}, exactly as a C program would do by
16485 executing the code below:
16488 printf (@var{template}, @var{expressions}@dots{});
16491 As in @code{C} @code{printf}, ordinary characters in @var{template}
16492 are printed verbatim, while @dfn{conversion specification} introduced
16493 by the @samp{%} character cause subsequent @var{expressions} to be
16494 evaluated, their values converted and formatted according to type and
16495 style information encoded in the conversion specifications, and then
16498 For example, you can print two values in hex like this:
16501 printf "foo, bar-foo = 0x%x, 0x%x\n", foo, bar-foo
16504 @code{printf} supports all the standard @code{C} conversion
16505 specifications, including the flags and modifiers between the @samp{%}
16506 character and the conversion letter, with the following exceptions:
16510 The argument-ordering modifiers, such as @samp{2$}, are not supported.
16513 The modifier @samp{*} is not supported for specifying precision or
16517 The @samp{'} flag (for separation of digits into groups according to
16518 @code{LC_NUMERIC'}) is not supported.
16521 The type modifiers @samp{hh}, @samp{j}, @samp{t}, and @samp{z} are not
16525 The conversion letter @samp{n} (as in @samp{%n}) is not supported.
16528 The conversion letters @samp{a} and @samp{A} are not supported.
16532 Note that the @samp{ll} type modifier is supported only if the
16533 underlying @code{C} implementation used to build @value{GDBN} supports
16534 the @code{long long int} type, and the @samp{L} type modifier is
16535 supported only if @code{long double} type is available.
16537 As in @code{C}, @code{printf} supports simple backslash-escape
16538 sequences, such as @code{\n}, @samp{\t}, @samp{\\}, @samp{\"},
16539 @samp{\a}, and @samp{\f}, that consist of backslash followed by a
16540 single character. Octal and hexadecimal escape sequences are not
16545 @chapter Command Interpreters
16546 @cindex command interpreters
16548 @value{GDBN} supports multiple command interpreters, and some command
16549 infrastructure to allow users or user interface writers to switch
16550 between interpreters or run commands in other interpreters.
16552 @value{GDBN} currently supports two command interpreters, the console
16553 interpreter (sometimes called the command-line interpreter or @sc{cli})
16554 and the machine interface interpreter (or @sc{gdb/mi}). This manual
16555 describes both of these interfaces in great detail.
16557 By default, @value{GDBN} will start with the console interpreter.
16558 However, the user may choose to start @value{GDBN} with another
16559 interpreter by specifying the @option{-i} or @option{--interpreter}
16560 startup options. Defined interpreters include:
16564 @cindex console interpreter
16565 The traditional console or command-line interpreter. This is the most often
16566 used interpreter with @value{GDBN}. With no interpreter specified at runtime,
16567 @value{GDBN} will use this interpreter.
16570 @cindex mi interpreter
16571 The newest @sc{gdb/mi} interface (currently @code{mi2}). Used primarily
16572 by programs wishing to use @value{GDBN} as a backend for a debugger GUI
16573 or an IDE. For more information, see @ref{GDB/MI, ,The @sc{gdb/mi}
16577 @cindex mi2 interpreter
16578 The current @sc{gdb/mi} interface.
16581 @cindex mi1 interpreter
16582 The @sc{gdb/mi} interface included in @value{GDBN} 5.1, 5.2, and 5.3.
16586 @cindex invoke another interpreter
16587 The interpreter being used by @value{GDBN} may not be dynamically
16588 switched at runtime. Although possible, this could lead to a very
16589 precarious situation. Consider an IDE using @sc{gdb/mi}. If a user
16590 enters the command "interpreter-set console" in a console view,
16591 @value{GDBN} would switch to using the console interpreter, rendering
16592 the IDE inoperable!
16594 @kindex interpreter-exec
16595 Although you may only choose a single interpreter at startup, you may execute
16596 commands in any interpreter from the current interpreter using the appropriate
16597 command. If you are running the console interpreter, simply use the
16598 @code{interpreter-exec} command:
16601 interpreter-exec mi "-data-list-register-names"
16604 @sc{gdb/mi} has a similar command, although it is only available in versions of
16605 @value{GDBN} which support @sc{gdb/mi} version 2 (or greater).
16608 @chapter @value{GDBN} Text User Interface
16610 @cindex Text User Interface
16613 * TUI Overview:: TUI overview
16614 * TUI Keys:: TUI key bindings
16615 * TUI Single Key Mode:: TUI single key mode
16616 * TUI Commands:: TUI-specific commands
16617 * TUI Configuration:: TUI configuration variables
16620 The @value{GDBN} Text User Interface (TUI) is a terminal
16621 interface which uses the @code{curses} library to show the source
16622 file, the assembly output, the program registers and @value{GDBN}
16623 commands in separate text windows. The TUI mode is supported only
16624 on platforms where a suitable version of the @code{curses} library
16627 @pindex @value{GDBTUI}
16628 The TUI mode is enabled by default when you invoke @value{GDBN} as
16629 either @samp{@value{GDBTUI}} or @samp{@value{GDBP} -tui}.
16630 You can also switch in and out of TUI mode while @value{GDBN} runs by
16631 using various TUI commands and key bindings, such as @kbd{C-x C-a}.
16632 @xref{TUI Keys, ,TUI Key Bindings}.
16635 @section TUI Overview
16637 In TUI mode, @value{GDBN} can display several text windows:
16641 This window is the @value{GDBN} command window with the @value{GDBN}
16642 prompt and the @value{GDBN} output. The @value{GDBN} input is still
16643 managed using readline.
16646 The source window shows the source file of the program. The current
16647 line and active breakpoints are displayed in this window.
16650 The assembly window shows the disassembly output of the program.
16653 This window shows the processor registers. Registers are highlighted
16654 when their values change.
16657 The source and assembly windows show the current program position
16658 by highlighting the current line and marking it with a @samp{>} marker.
16659 Breakpoints are indicated with two markers. The first marker
16660 indicates the breakpoint type:
16664 Breakpoint which was hit at least once.
16667 Breakpoint which was never hit.
16670 Hardware breakpoint which was hit at least once.
16673 Hardware breakpoint which was never hit.
16676 The second marker indicates whether the breakpoint is enabled or not:
16680 Breakpoint is enabled.
16683 Breakpoint is disabled.
16686 The source, assembly and register windows are updated when the current
16687 thread changes, when the frame changes, or when the program counter
16690 These windows are not all visible at the same time. The command
16691 window is always visible. The others can be arranged in several
16702 source and assembly,
16705 source and registers, or
16708 assembly and registers.
16711 A status line above the command window shows the following information:
16715 Indicates the current @value{GDBN} target.
16716 (@pxref{Targets, ,Specifying a Debugging Target}).
16719 Gives the current process or thread number.
16720 When no process is being debugged, this field is set to @code{No process}.
16723 Gives the current function name for the selected frame.
16724 The name is demangled if demangling is turned on (@pxref{Print Settings}).
16725 When there is no symbol corresponding to the current program counter,
16726 the string @code{??} is displayed.
16729 Indicates the current line number for the selected frame.
16730 When the current line number is not known, the string @code{??} is displayed.
16733 Indicates the current program counter address.
16737 @section TUI Key Bindings
16738 @cindex TUI key bindings
16740 The TUI installs several key bindings in the readline keymaps
16741 (@pxref{Command Line Editing}). The following key bindings
16742 are installed for both TUI mode and the @value{GDBN} standard mode.
16751 Enter or leave the TUI mode. When leaving the TUI mode,
16752 the curses window management stops and @value{GDBN} operates using
16753 its standard mode, writing on the terminal directly. When reentering
16754 the TUI mode, control is given back to the curses windows.
16755 The screen is then refreshed.
16759 Use a TUI layout with only one window. The layout will
16760 either be @samp{source} or @samp{assembly}. When the TUI mode
16761 is not active, it will switch to the TUI mode.
16763 Think of this key binding as the Emacs @kbd{C-x 1} binding.
16767 Use a TUI layout with at least two windows. When the current
16768 layout already has two windows, the next layout with two windows is used.
16769 When a new layout is chosen, one window will always be common to the
16770 previous layout and the new one.
16772 Think of it as the Emacs @kbd{C-x 2} binding.
16776 Change the active window. The TUI associates several key bindings
16777 (like scrolling and arrow keys) with the active window. This command
16778 gives the focus to the next TUI window.
16780 Think of it as the Emacs @kbd{C-x o} binding.
16784 Switch in and out of the TUI SingleKey mode that binds single
16785 keys to @value{GDBN} commands (@pxref{TUI Single Key Mode}).
16788 The following key bindings only work in the TUI mode:
16793 Scroll the active window one page up.
16797 Scroll the active window one page down.
16801 Scroll the active window one line up.
16805 Scroll the active window one line down.
16809 Scroll the active window one column left.
16813 Scroll the active window one column right.
16817 Refresh the screen.
16820 Because the arrow keys scroll the active window in the TUI mode, they
16821 are not available for their normal use by readline unless the command
16822 window has the focus. When another window is active, you must use
16823 other readline key bindings such as @kbd{C-p}, @kbd{C-n}, @kbd{C-b}
16824 and @kbd{C-f} to control the command window.
16826 @node TUI Single Key Mode
16827 @section TUI Single Key Mode
16828 @cindex TUI single key mode
16830 The TUI also provides a @dfn{SingleKey} mode, which binds several
16831 frequently used @value{GDBN} commands to single keys. Type @kbd{C-x s} to
16832 switch into this mode, where the following key bindings are used:
16835 @kindex c @r{(SingleKey TUI key)}
16839 @kindex d @r{(SingleKey TUI key)}
16843 @kindex f @r{(SingleKey TUI key)}
16847 @kindex n @r{(SingleKey TUI key)}
16851 @kindex q @r{(SingleKey TUI key)}
16853 exit the SingleKey mode.
16855 @kindex r @r{(SingleKey TUI key)}
16859 @kindex s @r{(SingleKey TUI key)}
16863 @kindex u @r{(SingleKey TUI key)}
16867 @kindex v @r{(SingleKey TUI key)}
16871 @kindex w @r{(SingleKey TUI key)}
16876 Other keys temporarily switch to the @value{GDBN} command prompt.
16877 The key that was pressed is inserted in the editing buffer so that
16878 it is possible to type most @value{GDBN} commands without interaction
16879 with the TUI SingleKey mode. Once the command is entered the TUI
16880 SingleKey mode is restored. The only way to permanently leave
16881 this mode is by typing @kbd{q} or @kbd{C-x s}.
16885 @section TUI-specific Commands
16886 @cindex TUI commands
16888 The TUI has specific commands to control the text windows.
16889 These commands are always available, even when @value{GDBN} is not in
16890 the TUI mode. When @value{GDBN} is in the standard mode, most
16891 of these commands will automatically switch to the TUI mode.
16896 List and give the size of all displayed windows.
16900 Display the next layout.
16903 Display the previous layout.
16906 Display the source window only.
16909 Display the assembly window only.
16912 Display the source and assembly window.
16915 Display the register window together with the source or assembly window.
16919 Make the next window active for scrolling.
16922 Make the previous window active for scrolling.
16925 Make the source window active for scrolling.
16928 Make the assembly window active for scrolling.
16931 Make the register window active for scrolling.
16934 Make the command window active for scrolling.
16938 Refresh the screen. This is similar to typing @kbd{C-L}.
16940 @item tui reg float
16942 Show the floating point registers in the register window.
16944 @item tui reg general
16945 Show the general registers in the register window.
16948 Show the next register group. The list of register groups as well as
16949 their order is target specific. The predefined register groups are the
16950 following: @code{general}, @code{float}, @code{system}, @code{vector},
16951 @code{all}, @code{save}, @code{restore}.
16953 @item tui reg system
16954 Show the system registers in the register window.
16958 Update the source window and the current execution point.
16960 @item winheight @var{name} +@var{count}
16961 @itemx winheight @var{name} -@var{count}
16963 Change the height of the window @var{name} by @var{count}
16964 lines. Positive counts increase the height, while negative counts
16967 @item tabset @var{nchars}
16969 Set the width of tab stops to be @var{nchars} characters.
16972 @node TUI Configuration
16973 @section TUI Configuration Variables
16974 @cindex TUI configuration variables
16976 Several configuration variables control the appearance of TUI windows.
16979 @item set tui border-kind @var{kind}
16980 @kindex set tui border-kind
16981 Select the border appearance for the source, assembly and register windows.
16982 The possible values are the following:
16985 Use a space character to draw the border.
16988 Use @sc{ascii} characters @samp{+}, @samp{-} and @samp{|} to draw the border.
16991 Use the Alternate Character Set to draw the border. The border is
16992 drawn using character line graphics if the terminal supports them.
16995 @item set tui border-mode @var{mode}
16996 @kindex set tui border-mode
16997 @itemx set tui active-border-mode @var{mode}
16998 @kindex set tui active-border-mode
16999 Select the display attributes for the borders of the inactive windows
17000 or the active window. The @var{mode} can be one of the following:
17003 Use normal attributes to display the border.
17009 Use reverse video mode.
17012 Use half bright mode.
17014 @item half-standout
17015 Use half bright and standout mode.
17018 Use extra bright or bold mode.
17020 @item bold-standout
17021 Use extra bright or bold and standout mode.
17026 @chapter Using @value{GDBN} under @sc{gnu} Emacs
17029 @cindex @sc{gnu} Emacs
17030 A special interface allows you to use @sc{gnu} Emacs to view (and
17031 edit) the source files for the program you are debugging with
17034 To use this interface, use the command @kbd{M-x gdb} in Emacs. Give the
17035 executable file you want to debug as an argument. This command starts
17036 @value{GDBN} as a subprocess of Emacs, with input and output through a newly
17037 created Emacs buffer.
17038 @c (Do not use the @code{-tui} option to run @value{GDBN} from Emacs.)
17040 Running @value{GDBN} under Emacs can be just like running @value{GDBN} normally except for two
17045 All ``terminal'' input and output goes through an Emacs buffer, called
17048 This applies both to @value{GDBN} commands and their output, and to the input
17049 and output done by the program you are debugging.
17051 This is useful because it means that you can copy the text of previous
17052 commands and input them again; you can even use parts of the output
17055 All the facilities of Emacs' Shell mode are available for interacting
17056 with your program. In particular, you can send signals the usual
17057 way---for example, @kbd{C-c C-c} for an interrupt, @kbd{C-c C-z} for a
17061 @value{GDBN} displays source code through Emacs.
17063 Each time @value{GDBN} displays a stack frame, Emacs automatically finds the
17064 source file for that frame and puts an arrow (@samp{=>}) at the
17065 left margin of the current line. Emacs uses a separate buffer for
17066 source display, and splits the screen to show both your @value{GDBN} session
17069 Explicit @value{GDBN} @code{list} or search commands still produce output as
17070 usual, but you probably have no reason to use them from Emacs.
17073 We call this @dfn{text command mode}. Emacs 22.1, and later, also uses
17074 a graphical mode, enabled by default, which provides further buffers
17075 that can control the execution and describe the state of your program.
17076 @xref{GDB Graphical Interface,,, Emacs, The @sc{gnu} Emacs Manual}.
17078 If you specify an absolute file name when prompted for the @kbd{M-x
17079 gdb} argument, then Emacs sets your current working directory to where
17080 your program resides. If you only specify the file name, then Emacs
17081 sets your current working directory to to the directory associated
17082 with the previous buffer. In this case, @value{GDBN} may find your
17083 program by searching your environment's @code{PATH} variable, but on
17084 some operating systems it might not find the source. So, although the
17085 @value{GDBN} input and output session proceeds normally, the auxiliary
17086 buffer does not display the current source and line of execution.
17088 The initial working directory of @value{GDBN} is printed on the top
17089 line of the GUD buffer and this serves as a default for the commands
17090 that specify files for @value{GDBN} to operate on. @xref{Files,
17091 ,Commands to Specify Files}.
17093 By default, @kbd{M-x gdb} calls the program called @file{gdb}. If you
17094 need to call @value{GDBN} by a different name (for example, if you
17095 keep several configurations around, with different names) you can
17096 customize the Emacs variable @code{gud-gdb-command-name} to run the
17099 In the GUD buffer, you can use these special Emacs commands in
17100 addition to the standard Shell mode commands:
17104 Describe the features of Emacs' GUD Mode.
17107 Execute to another source line, like the @value{GDBN} @code{step} command; also
17108 update the display window to show the current file and location.
17111 Execute to next source line in this function, skipping all function
17112 calls, like the @value{GDBN} @code{next} command. Then update the display window
17113 to show the current file and location.
17116 Execute one instruction, like the @value{GDBN} @code{stepi} command; update
17117 display window accordingly.
17120 Execute until exit from the selected stack frame, like the @value{GDBN}
17121 @code{finish} command.
17124 Continue execution of your program, like the @value{GDBN} @code{continue}
17128 Go up the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument
17129 (@pxref{Arguments, , Numeric Arguments, Emacs, The @sc{gnu} Emacs Manual}),
17130 like the @value{GDBN} @code{up} command.
17133 Go down the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument, like the
17134 @value{GDBN} @code{down} command.
17137 In any source file, the Emacs command @kbd{C-x @key{SPC}} (@code{gud-break})
17138 tells @value{GDBN} to set a breakpoint on the source line point is on.
17140 In text command mode, if you type @kbd{M-x speedbar}, Emacs displays a
17141 separate frame which shows a backtrace when the GUD buffer is current.
17142 Move point to any frame in the stack and type @key{RET} to make it
17143 become the current frame and display the associated source in the
17144 source buffer. Alternatively, click @kbd{Mouse-2} to make the
17145 selected frame become the current one. In graphical mode, the
17146 speedbar displays watch expressions.
17148 If you accidentally delete the source-display buffer, an easy way to get
17149 it back is to type the command @code{f} in the @value{GDBN} buffer, to
17150 request a frame display; when you run under Emacs, this recreates
17151 the source buffer if necessary to show you the context of the current
17154 The source files displayed in Emacs are in ordinary Emacs buffers
17155 which are visiting the source files in the usual way. You can edit
17156 the files with these buffers if you wish; but keep in mind that @value{GDBN}
17157 communicates with Emacs in terms of line numbers. If you add or
17158 delete lines from the text, the line numbers that @value{GDBN} knows cease
17159 to correspond properly with the code.
17161 A more detailed description of Emacs' interaction with @value{GDBN} is
17162 given in the Emacs manual (@pxref{Debuggers,,, Emacs, The @sc{gnu}
17165 @c The following dropped because Epoch is nonstandard. Reactivate
17166 @c if/when v19 does something similar. ---doc@cygnus.com 19dec1990
17168 @kindex Emacs Epoch environment
17172 Version 18 of @sc{gnu} Emacs has a built-in window system
17173 called the @code{epoch}
17174 environment. Users of this environment can use a new command,
17175 @code{inspect} which performs identically to @code{print} except that
17176 each value is printed in its own window.
17181 @chapter The @sc{gdb/mi} Interface
17183 @unnumberedsec Function and Purpose
17185 @cindex @sc{gdb/mi}, its purpose
17186 @sc{gdb/mi} is a line based machine oriented text interface to
17187 @value{GDBN} and is activated by specifying using the
17188 @option{--interpreter} command line option (@pxref{Mode Options}). It
17189 is specifically intended to support the development of systems which
17190 use the debugger as just one small component of a larger system.
17192 This chapter is a specification of the @sc{gdb/mi} interface. It is written
17193 in the form of a reference manual.
17195 Note that @sc{gdb/mi} is still under construction, so some of the
17196 features described below are incomplete and subject to change
17197 (@pxref{GDB/MI Development and Front Ends, , @sc{gdb/mi} Development and Front Ends}).
17199 @unnumberedsec Notation and Terminology
17201 @cindex notational conventions, for @sc{gdb/mi}
17202 This chapter uses the following notation:
17206 @code{|} separates two alternatives.
17209 @code{[ @var{something} ]} indicates that @var{something} is optional:
17210 it may or may not be given.
17213 @code{( @var{group} )*} means that @var{group} inside the parentheses
17214 may repeat zero or more times.
17217 @code{( @var{group} )+} means that @var{group} inside the parentheses
17218 may repeat one or more times.
17221 @code{"@var{string}"} means a literal @var{string}.
17225 @heading Dependencies
17229 * GDB/MI Command Syntax::
17230 * GDB/MI Compatibility with CLI::
17231 * GDB/MI Development and Front Ends::
17232 * GDB/MI Output Records::
17233 * GDB/MI Simple Examples::
17234 * GDB/MI Command Description Format::
17235 * GDB/MI Breakpoint Commands::
17236 * GDB/MI Program Context::
17237 * GDB/MI Thread Commands::
17238 * GDB/MI Program Execution::
17239 * GDB/MI Stack Manipulation::
17240 * GDB/MI Variable Objects::
17241 * GDB/MI Data Manipulation::
17242 * GDB/MI Tracepoint Commands::
17243 * GDB/MI Symbol Query::
17244 * GDB/MI File Commands::
17246 * GDB/MI Kod Commands::
17247 * GDB/MI Memory Overlay Commands::
17248 * GDB/MI Signal Handling Commands::
17250 * GDB/MI Target Manipulation::
17251 * GDB/MI Miscellaneous Commands::
17254 @c %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SECTION %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
17255 @node GDB/MI Command Syntax
17256 @section @sc{gdb/mi} Command Syntax
17259 * GDB/MI Input Syntax::
17260 * GDB/MI Output Syntax::
17263 @node GDB/MI Input Syntax
17264 @subsection @sc{gdb/mi} Input Syntax
17266 @cindex input syntax for @sc{gdb/mi}
17267 @cindex @sc{gdb/mi}, input syntax
17269 @item @var{command} @expansion{}
17270 @code{@var{cli-command} | @var{mi-command}}
17272 @item @var{cli-command} @expansion{}
17273 @code{[ @var{token} ] @var{cli-command} @var{nl}}, where
17274 @var{cli-command} is any existing @value{GDBN} CLI command.
17276 @item @var{mi-command} @expansion{}
17277 @code{[ @var{token} ] "-" @var{operation} ( " " @var{option} )*
17278 @code{[} " --" @code{]} ( " " @var{parameter} )* @var{nl}}
17280 @item @var{token} @expansion{}
17281 "any sequence of digits"
17283 @item @var{option} @expansion{}
17284 @code{"-" @var{parameter} [ " " @var{parameter} ]}
17286 @item @var{parameter} @expansion{}
17287 @code{@var{non-blank-sequence} | @var{c-string}}
17289 @item @var{operation} @expansion{}
17290 @emph{any of the operations described in this chapter}
17292 @item @var{non-blank-sequence} @expansion{}
17293 @emph{anything, provided it doesn't contain special characters such as
17294 "-", @var{nl}, """ and of course " "}
17296 @item @var{c-string} @expansion{}
17297 @code{""" @var{seven-bit-iso-c-string-content} """}
17299 @item @var{nl} @expansion{}
17308 The CLI commands are still handled by the @sc{mi} interpreter; their
17309 output is described below.
17312 The @code{@var{token}}, when present, is passed back when the command
17316 Some @sc{mi} commands accept optional arguments as part of the parameter
17317 list. Each option is identified by a leading @samp{-} (dash) and may be
17318 followed by an optional argument parameter. Options occur first in the
17319 parameter list and can be delimited from normal parameters using
17320 @samp{--} (this is useful when some parameters begin with a dash).
17327 We want easy access to the existing CLI syntax (for debugging).
17330 We want it to be easy to spot a @sc{mi} operation.
17333 @node GDB/MI Output Syntax
17334 @subsection @sc{gdb/mi} Output Syntax
17336 @cindex output syntax of @sc{gdb/mi}
17337 @cindex @sc{gdb/mi}, output syntax
17338 The output from @sc{gdb/mi} consists of zero or more out-of-band records
17339 followed, optionally, by a single result record. This result record
17340 is for the most recent command. The sequence of output records is
17341 terminated by @samp{(gdb)}.
17343 If an input command was prefixed with a @code{@var{token}} then the
17344 corresponding output for that command will also be prefixed by that same
17348 @item @var{output} @expansion{}
17349 @code{( @var{out-of-band-record} )* [ @var{result-record} ] "(gdb)" @var{nl}}
17351 @item @var{result-record} @expansion{}
17352 @code{ [ @var{token} ] "^" @var{result-class} ( "," @var{result} )* @var{nl}}
17354 @item @var{out-of-band-record} @expansion{}
17355 @code{@var{async-record} | @var{stream-record}}
17357 @item @var{async-record} @expansion{}
17358 @code{@var{exec-async-output} | @var{status-async-output} | @var{notify-async-output}}
17360 @item @var{exec-async-output} @expansion{}
17361 @code{[ @var{token} ] "*" @var{async-output}}
17363 @item @var{status-async-output} @expansion{}
17364 @code{[ @var{token} ] "+" @var{async-output}}
17366 @item @var{notify-async-output} @expansion{}
17367 @code{[ @var{token} ] "=" @var{async-output}}
17369 @item @var{async-output} @expansion{}
17370 @code{@var{async-class} ( "," @var{result} )* @var{nl}}
17372 @item @var{result-class} @expansion{}
17373 @code{"done" | "running" | "connected" | "error" | "exit"}
17375 @item @var{async-class} @expansion{}
17376 @code{"stopped" | @var{others}} (where @var{others} will be added
17377 depending on the needs---this is still in development).
17379 @item @var{result} @expansion{}
17380 @code{ @var{variable} "=" @var{value}}
17382 @item @var{variable} @expansion{}
17383 @code{ @var{string} }
17385 @item @var{value} @expansion{}
17386 @code{ @var{const} | @var{tuple} | @var{list} }
17388 @item @var{const} @expansion{}
17389 @code{@var{c-string}}
17391 @item @var{tuple} @expansion{}
17392 @code{ "@{@}" | "@{" @var{result} ( "," @var{result} )* "@}" }
17394 @item @var{list} @expansion{}
17395 @code{ "[]" | "[" @var{value} ( "," @var{value} )* "]" | "["
17396 @var{result} ( "," @var{result} )* "]" }
17398 @item @var{stream-record} @expansion{}
17399 @code{@var{console-stream-output} | @var{target-stream-output} | @var{log-stream-output}}
17401 @item @var{console-stream-output} @expansion{}
17402 @code{"~" @var{c-string}}
17404 @item @var{target-stream-output} @expansion{}
17405 @code{"@@" @var{c-string}}
17407 @item @var{log-stream-output} @expansion{}
17408 @code{"&" @var{c-string}}
17410 @item @var{nl} @expansion{}
17413 @item @var{token} @expansion{}
17414 @emph{any sequence of digits}.
17422 All output sequences end in a single line containing a period.
17425 The @code{@var{token}} is from the corresponding request. If an execution
17426 command is interrupted by the @samp{-exec-interrupt} command, the
17427 @var{token} associated with the @samp{*stopped} message is the one of the
17428 original execution command, not the one of the interrupt command.
17431 @cindex status output in @sc{gdb/mi}
17432 @var{status-async-output} contains on-going status information about the
17433 progress of a slow operation. It can be discarded. All status output is
17434 prefixed by @samp{+}.
17437 @cindex async output in @sc{gdb/mi}
17438 @var{exec-async-output} contains asynchronous state change on the target
17439 (stopped, started, disappeared). All async output is prefixed by
17443 @cindex notify output in @sc{gdb/mi}
17444 @var{notify-async-output} contains supplementary information that the
17445 client should handle (e.g., a new breakpoint information). All notify
17446 output is prefixed by @samp{=}.
17449 @cindex console output in @sc{gdb/mi}
17450 @var{console-stream-output} is output that should be displayed as is in the
17451 console. It is the textual response to a CLI command. All the console
17452 output is prefixed by @samp{~}.
17455 @cindex target output in @sc{gdb/mi}
17456 @var{target-stream-output} is the output produced by the target program.
17457 All the target output is prefixed by @samp{@@}.
17460 @cindex log output in @sc{gdb/mi}
17461 @var{log-stream-output} is output text coming from @value{GDBN}'s internals, for
17462 instance messages that should be displayed as part of an error log. All
17463 the log output is prefixed by @samp{&}.
17466 @cindex list output in @sc{gdb/mi}
17467 New @sc{gdb/mi} commands should only output @var{lists} containing
17473 @xref{GDB/MI Stream Records, , @sc{gdb/mi} Stream Records}, for more
17474 details about the various output records.
17476 @c %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SECTION %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
17477 @node GDB/MI Compatibility with CLI
17478 @section @sc{gdb/mi} Compatibility with CLI
17480 @cindex compatibility, @sc{gdb/mi} and CLI
17481 @cindex @sc{gdb/mi}, compatibility with CLI
17483 For the developers convenience CLI commands can be entered directly,
17484 but there may be some unexpected behaviour. For example, commands
17485 that query the user will behave as if the user replied yes, breakpoint
17486 command lists are not executed and some CLI commands, such as
17487 @code{if}, @code{when} and @code{define}, prompt for further input with
17488 @samp{>}, which is not valid MI output.
17490 This feature may be removed at some stage in the future and it is
17491 recommended that front ends use the @code{-interpreter-exec} command
17492 (@pxref{-interpreter-exec}).
17494 @c %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SECTION %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
17495 @node GDB/MI Development and Front Ends
17496 @section @sc{gdb/mi} Development and Front Ends
17497 @cindex @sc{gdb/mi} development
17499 The application which takes the MI output and presents the state of the
17500 program being debugged to the user is called a @dfn{front end}.
17502 Although @sc{gdb/mi} is still incomplete, it is currently being used
17503 by a variety of front ends to @value{GDBN}. This makes it difficult
17504 to introduce new functionality without breaking existing usage. This
17505 section tries to minimize the problems by describing how the protocol
17508 Some changes in MI need not break a carefully designed front end, and
17509 for these the MI version will remain unchanged. The following is a
17510 list of changes that may occur within one level, so front ends should
17511 parse MI output in a way that can handle them:
17515 New MI commands may be added.
17518 New fields may be added to the output of any MI command.
17521 The range of values for fields with specified values, e.g.,
17522 @code{in_scope} (@pxref{-var-update}) may be extended.
17524 @c The format of field's content e.g type prefix, may change so parse it
17525 @c at your own risk. Yes, in general?
17527 @c The order of fields may change? Shouldn't really matter but it might
17528 @c resolve inconsistencies.
17531 If the changes are likely to break front ends, the MI version level
17532 will be increased by one. This will allow the front end to parse the
17533 output according to the MI version. Apart from mi0, new versions of
17534 @value{GDBN} will not support old versions of MI and it will be the
17535 responsibility of the front end to work with the new one.
17537 @c Starting with mi3, add a new command -mi-version that prints the MI
17540 The best way to avoid unexpected changes in MI that might break your front
17541 end is to make your project known to @value{GDBN} developers and
17542 follow development on @email{gdb@@sourceware.org} and
17543 @email{gdb-patches@@sourceware.org}. There is also the mailing list
17544 @email{dmi-discuss@@lists.freestandards.org}, hosted by the Free Standards
17545 Group, which has the aim of creating a more general MI protocol
17546 called Debugger Machine Interface (DMI) that will become a standard
17547 for all debuggers, not just @value{GDBN}.
17548 @cindex mailing lists
17550 @c %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SECTION %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
17551 @node GDB/MI Output Records
17552 @section @sc{gdb/mi} Output Records
17555 * GDB/MI Result Records::
17556 * GDB/MI Stream Records::
17557 * GDB/MI Out-of-band Records::
17560 @node GDB/MI Result Records
17561 @subsection @sc{gdb/mi} Result Records
17563 @cindex result records in @sc{gdb/mi}
17564 @cindex @sc{gdb/mi}, result records
17565 In addition to a number of out-of-band notifications, the response to a
17566 @sc{gdb/mi} command includes one of the following result indications:
17570 @item "^done" [ "," @var{results} ]
17571 The synchronous operation was successful, @code{@var{results}} are the return
17576 @c Is this one correct? Should it be an out-of-band notification?
17577 The asynchronous operation was successfully started. The target is
17582 @value{GDBN} has connected to a remote target.
17584 @item "^error" "," @var{c-string}
17586 The operation failed. The @code{@var{c-string}} contains the corresponding
17591 @value{GDBN} has terminated.
17595 @node GDB/MI Stream Records
17596 @subsection @sc{gdb/mi} Stream Records
17598 @cindex @sc{gdb/mi}, stream records
17599 @cindex stream records in @sc{gdb/mi}
17600 @value{GDBN} internally maintains a number of output streams: the console, the
17601 target, and the log. The output intended for each of these streams is
17602 funneled through the @sc{gdb/mi} interface using @dfn{stream records}.
17604 Each stream record begins with a unique @dfn{prefix character} which
17605 identifies its stream (@pxref{GDB/MI Output Syntax, , @sc{gdb/mi} Output
17606 Syntax}). In addition to the prefix, each stream record contains a
17607 @code{@var{string-output}}. This is either raw text (with an implicit new
17608 line) or a quoted C string (which does not contain an implicit newline).
17611 @item "~" @var{string-output}
17612 The console output stream contains text that should be displayed in the
17613 CLI console window. It contains the textual responses to CLI commands.
17615 @item "@@" @var{string-output}
17616 The target output stream contains any textual output from the running
17617 target. This is only present when GDB's event loop is truly
17618 asynchronous, which is currently only the case for remote targets.
17620 @item "&" @var{string-output}
17621 The log stream contains debugging messages being produced by @value{GDBN}'s
17625 @node GDB/MI Out-of-band Records
17626 @subsection @sc{gdb/mi} Out-of-band Records
17628 @cindex out-of-band records in @sc{gdb/mi}
17629 @cindex @sc{gdb/mi}, out-of-band records
17630 @dfn{Out-of-band} records are used to notify the @sc{gdb/mi} client of
17631 additional changes that have occurred. Those changes can either be a
17632 consequence of @sc{gdb/mi} (e.g., a breakpoint modified) or a result of
17633 target activity (e.g., target stopped).
17635 The following is a preliminary list of possible out-of-band records.
17636 In particular, the @var{exec-async-output} records.
17639 @item *stopped,reason="@var{reason}"
17642 @var{reason} can be one of the following:
17645 @item breakpoint-hit
17646 A breakpoint was reached.
17647 @item watchpoint-trigger
17648 A watchpoint was triggered.
17649 @item read-watchpoint-trigger
17650 A read watchpoint was triggered.
17651 @item access-watchpoint-trigger
17652 An access watchpoint was triggered.
17653 @item function-finished
17654 An -exec-finish or similar CLI command was accomplished.
17655 @item location-reached
17656 An -exec-until or similar CLI command was accomplished.
17657 @item watchpoint-scope
17658 A watchpoint has gone out of scope.
17659 @item end-stepping-range
17660 An -exec-next, -exec-next-instruction, -exec-step, -exec-step-instruction or
17661 similar CLI command was accomplished.
17662 @item exited-signalled
17663 The inferior exited because of a signal.
17665 The inferior exited.
17666 @item exited-normally
17667 The inferior exited normally.
17668 @item signal-received
17669 A signal was received by the inferior.
17673 @c %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SECTION %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
17674 @node GDB/MI Simple Examples
17675 @section Simple Examples of @sc{gdb/mi} Interaction
17676 @cindex @sc{gdb/mi}, simple examples
17678 This subsection presents several simple examples of interaction using
17679 the @sc{gdb/mi} interface. In these examples, @samp{->} means that the
17680 following line is passed to @sc{gdb/mi} as input, while @samp{<-} means
17681 the output received from @sc{gdb/mi}.
17683 Note the line breaks shown in the examples are here only for
17684 readability, they don't appear in the real output.
17686 @subheading Setting a Breakpoint
17688 Setting a breakpoint generates synchronous output which contains detailed
17689 information of the breakpoint.
17692 -> -break-insert main
17693 <- ^done,bkpt=@{number="1",type="breakpoint",disp="keep",
17694 enabled="y",addr="0x08048564",func="main",file="myprog.c",
17695 fullname="/home/nickrob/myprog.c",line="68",times="0"@}
17699 @subheading Program Execution
17701 Program execution generates asynchronous records and MI gives the
17702 reason that execution stopped.
17708 <- *stopped,reason="breakpoint-hit",bkptno="1",thread-id="0",
17709 frame=@{addr="0x08048564",func="main",
17710 args=[@{name="argc",value="1"@},@{name="argv",value="0xbfc4d4d4"@}],
17711 file="myprog.c",fullname="/home/nickrob/myprog.c",line="68"@}
17716 <- *stopped,reason="exited-normally"
17720 @subheading Quitting @value{GDBN}
17722 Quitting @value{GDBN} just prints the result class @samp{^exit}.
17730 @subheading A Bad Command
17732 Here's what happens if you pass a non-existent command:
17736 <- ^error,msg="Undefined MI command: rubbish"
17741 @c %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SECTION %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
17742 @node GDB/MI Command Description Format
17743 @section @sc{gdb/mi} Command Description Format
17745 The remaining sections describe blocks of commands. Each block of
17746 commands is laid out in a fashion similar to this section.
17748 @subheading Motivation
17750 The motivation for this collection of commands.
17752 @subheading Introduction
17754 A brief introduction to this collection of commands as a whole.
17756 @subheading Commands
17758 For each command in the block, the following is described:
17760 @subsubheading Synopsis
17763 -command @var{args}@dots{}
17766 @subsubheading Result
17768 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
17770 The corresponding @value{GDBN} CLI command(s), if any.
17772 @subsubheading Example
17774 Example(s) formatted for readability. Some of the described commands have
17775 not been implemented yet and these are labeled N.A.@: (not available).
17778 @c %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SECTION %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
17779 @node GDB/MI Breakpoint Commands
17780 @section @sc{gdb/mi} Breakpoint Commands
17782 @cindex breakpoint commands for @sc{gdb/mi}
17783 @cindex @sc{gdb/mi}, breakpoint commands
17784 This section documents @sc{gdb/mi} commands for manipulating
17787 @subheading The @code{-break-after} Command
17788 @findex -break-after
17790 @subsubheading Synopsis
17793 -break-after @var{number} @var{count}
17796 The breakpoint number @var{number} is not in effect until it has been
17797 hit @var{count} times. To see how this is reflected in the output of
17798 the @samp{-break-list} command, see the description of the
17799 @samp{-break-list} command below.
17801 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
17803 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{ignore}.
17805 @subsubheading Example
17810 ^done,bkpt=@{number="1",addr="0x000100d0",file="hello.c",
17811 fullname="/home/foo/hello.c",line="5",times="0"@}
17818 ^done,BreakpointTable=@{nr_rows="1",nr_cols="6",
17819 hdr=[@{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="number",colhdr="Num"@},
17820 @{width="14",alignment="-1",col_name="type",colhdr="Type"@},
17821 @{width="4",alignment="-1",col_name="disp",colhdr="Disp"@},
17822 @{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="enabled",colhdr="Enb"@},
17823 @{width="10",alignment="-1",col_name="addr",colhdr="Address"@},
17824 @{width="40",alignment="2",col_name="what",colhdr="What"@}],
17825 body=[bkpt=@{number="1",type="breakpoint",disp="keep",enabled="y",
17826 addr="0x000100d0",func="main",file="hello.c",fullname="/home/foo/hello.c",
17827 line="5",times="0",ignore="3"@}]@}
17832 @subheading The @code{-break-catch} Command
17833 @findex -break-catch
17835 @subheading The @code{-break-commands} Command
17836 @findex -break-commands
17840 @subheading The @code{-break-condition} Command
17841 @findex -break-condition
17843 @subsubheading Synopsis
17846 -break-condition @var{number} @var{expr}
17849 Breakpoint @var{number} will stop the program only if the condition in
17850 @var{expr} is true. The condition becomes part of the
17851 @samp{-break-list} output (see the description of the @samp{-break-list}
17854 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
17856 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{condition}.
17858 @subsubheading Example
17862 -break-condition 1 1
17866 ^done,BreakpointTable=@{nr_rows="1",nr_cols="6",
17867 hdr=[@{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="number",colhdr="Num"@},
17868 @{width="14",alignment="-1",col_name="type",colhdr="Type"@},
17869 @{width="4",alignment="-1",col_name="disp",colhdr="Disp"@},
17870 @{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="enabled",colhdr="Enb"@},
17871 @{width="10",alignment="-1",col_name="addr",colhdr="Address"@},
17872 @{width="40",alignment="2",col_name="what",colhdr="What"@}],
17873 body=[bkpt=@{number="1",type="breakpoint",disp="keep",enabled="y",
17874 addr="0x000100d0",func="main",file="hello.c",fullname="/home/foo/hello.c",
17875 line="5",cond="1",times="0",ignore="3"@}]@}
17879 @subheading The @code{-break-delete} Command
17880 @findex -break-delete
17882 @subsubheading Synopsis
17885 -break-delete ( @var{breakpoint} )+
17888 Delete the breakpoint(s) whose number(s) are specified in the argument
17889 list. This is obviously reflected in the breakpoint list.
17891 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
17893 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{delete}.
17895 @subsubheading Example
17903 ^done,BreakpointTable=@{nr_rows="0",nr_cols="6",
17904 hdr=[@{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="number",colhdr="Num"@},
17905 @{width="14",alignment="-1",col_name="type",colhdr="Type"@},
17906 @{width="4",alignment="-1",col_name="disp",colhdr="Disp"@},
17907 @{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="enabled",colhdr="Enb"@},
17908 @{width="10",alignment="-1",col_name="addr",colhdr="Address"@},
17909 @{width="40",alignment="2",col_name="what",colhdr="What"@}],
17914 @subheading The @code{-break-disable} Command
17915 @findex -break-disable
17917 @subsubheading Synopsis
17920 -break-disable ( @var{breakpoint} )+
17923 Disable the named @var{breakpoint}(s). The field @samp{enabled} in the
17924 break list is now set to @samp{n} for the named @var{breakpoint}(s).
17926 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
17928 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{disable}.
17930 @subsubheading Example
17938 ^done,BreakpointTable=@{nr_rows="1",nr_cols="6",
17939 hdr=[@{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="number",colhdr="Num"@},
17940 @{width="14",alignment="-1",col_name="type",colhdr="Type"@},
17941 @{width="4",alignment="-1",col_name="disp",colhdr="Disp"@},
17942 @{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="enabled",colhdr="Enb"@},
17943 @{width="10",alignment="-1",col_name="addr",colhdr="Address"@},
17944 @{width="40",alignment="2",col_name="what",colhdr="What"@}],
17945 body=[bkpt=@{number="2",type="breakpoint",disp="keep",enabled="n",
17946 addr="0x000100d0",func="main",file="hello.c",fullname="/home/foo/hello.c",
17947 line="5",times="0"@}]@}
17951 @subheading The @code{-break-enable} Command
17952 @findex -break-enable
17954 @subsubheading Synopsis
17957 -break-enable ( @var{breakpoint} )+
17960 Enable (previously disabled) @var{breakpoint}(s).
17962 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
17964 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{enable}.
17966 @subsubheading Example
17974 ^done,BreakpointTable=@{nr_rows="1",nr_cols="6",
17975 hdr=[@{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="number",colhdr="Num"@},
17976 @{width="14",alignment="-1",col_name="type",colhdr="Type"@},
17977 @{width="4",alignment="-1",col_name="disp",colhdr="Disp"@},
17978 @{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="enabled",colhdr="Enb"@},
17979 @{width="10",alignment="-1",col_name="addr",colhdr="Address"@},
17980 @{width="40",alignment="2",col_name="what",colhdr="What"@}],
17981 body=[bkpt=@{number="2",type="breakpoint",disp="keep",enabled="y",
17982 addr="0x000100d0",func="main",file="hello.c",fullname="/home/foo/hello.c",
17983 line="5",times="0"@}]@}
17987 @subheading The @code{-break-info} Command
17988 @findex -break-info
17990 @subsubheading Synopsis
17993 -break-info @var{breakpoint}
17997 Get information about a single breakpoint.
17999 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
18001 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{info break @var{breakpoint}}.
18003 @subsubheading Example
18006 @subheading The @code{-break-insert} Command
18007 @findex -break-insert
18009 @subsubheading Synopsis
18012 -break-insert [ -t ] [ -h ] [ -r ]
18013 [ -c @var{condition} ] [ -i @var{ignore-count} ]
18014 [ -p @var{thread} ] [ @var{line} | @var{addr} ]
18018 If specified, @var{line}, can be one of:
18025 @item filename:linenum
18026 @item filename:function
18030 The possible optional parameters of this command are:
18034 Insert a temporary breakpoint.
18036 Insert a hardware breakpoint.
18037 @item -c @var{condition}
18038 Make the breakpoint conditional on @var{condition}.
18039 @item -i @var{ignore-count}
18040 Initialize the @var{ignore-count}.
18042 Insert a regular breakpoint in all the functions whose names match the
18043 given regular expression. Other flags are not applicable to regular
18047 @subsubheading Result
18049 The result is in the form:
18052 ^done,bkpt=@{number="@var{number}",type="@var{type}",disp="del"|"keep",
18053 enabled="y"|"n",addr="@var{hex}",func="@var{funcname}",file="@var{filename}",
18054 fullname="@var{full_filename}",line="@var{lineno}",[thread="@var{threadno},]
18055 times="@var{times}"@}
18059 where @var{number} is the @value{GDBN} number for this breakpoint,
18060 @var{funcname} is the name of the function where the breakpoint was
18061 inserted, @var{filename} is the name of the source file which contains
18062 this function, @var{lineno} is the source line number within that file
18063 and @var{times} the number of times that the breakpoint has been hit
18064 (always 0 for -break-insert but may be greater for -break-info or -break-list
18065 which use the same output).
18067 Note: this format is open to change.
18068 @c An out-of-band breakpoint instead of part of the result?
18070 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
18072 The corresponding @value{GDBN} commands are @samp{break}, @samp{tbreak},
18073 @samp{hbreak}, @samp{thbreak}, and @samp{rbreak}.
18075 @subsubheading Example
18080 ^done,bkpt=@{number="1",addr="0x0001072c",file="recursive2.c",
18081 fullname="/home/foo/recursive2.c,line="4",times="0"@}
18083 -break-insert -t foo
18084 ^done,bkpt=@{number="2",addr="0x00010774",file="recursive2.c",
18085 fullname="/home/foo/recursive2.c,line="11",times="0"@}
18088 ^done,BreakpointTable=@{nr_rows="2",nr_cols="6",
18089 hdr=[@{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="number",colhdr="Num"@},
18090 @{width="14",alignment="-1",col_name="type",colhdr="Type"@},
18091 @{width="4",alignment="-1",col_name="disp",colhdr="Disp"@},
18092 @{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="enabled",colhdr="Enb"@},
18093 @{width="10",alignment="-1",col_name="addr",colhdr="Address"@},
18094 @{width="40",alignment="2",col_name="what",colhdr="What"@}],
18095 body=[bkpt=@{number="1",type="breakpoint",disp="keep",enabled="y",
18096 addr="0x0001072c", func="main",file="recursive2.c",
18097 fullname="/home/foo/recursive2.c,"line="4",times="0"@},
18098 bkpt=@{number="2",type="breakpoint",disp="del",enabled="y",
18099 addr="0x00010774",func="foo",file="recursive2.c",
18100 fullname="/home/foo/recursive2.c",line="11",times="0"@}]@}
18102 -break-insert -r foo.*
18103 ~int foo(int, int);
18104 ^done,bkpt=@{number="3",addr="0x00010774",file="recursive2.c,
18105 "fullname="/home/foo/recursive2.c",line="11",times="0"@}
18109 @subheading The @code{-break-list} Command
18110 @findex -break-list
18112 @subsubheading Synopsis
18118 Displays the list of inserted breakpoints, showing the following fields:
18122 number of the breakpoint
18124 type of the breakpoint: @samp{breakpoint} or @samp{watchpoint}
18126 should the breakpoint be deleted or disabled when it is hit: @samp{keep}
18129 is the breakpoint enabled or no: @samp{y} or @samp{n}
18131 memory location at which the breakpoint is set
18133 logical location of the breakpoint, expressed by function name, file
18136 number of times the breakpoint has been hit
18139 If there are no breakpoints or watchpoints, the @code{BreakpointTable}
18140 @code{body} field is an empty list.
18142 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
18144 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{info break}.
18146 @subsubheading Example
18151 ^done,BreakpointTable=@{nr_rows="2",nr_cols="6",
18152 hdr=[@{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="number",colhdr="Num"@},
18153 @{width="14",alignment="-1",col_name="type",colhdr="Type"@},
18154 @{width="4",alignment="-1",col_name="disp",colhdr="Disp"@},
18155 @{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="enabled",colhdr="Enb"@},
18156 @{width="10",alignment="-1",col_name="addr",colhdr="Address"@},
18157 @{width="40",alignment="2",col_name="what",colhdr="What"@}],
18158 body=[bkpt=@{number="1",type="breakpoint",disp="keep",enabled="y",
18159 addr="0x000100d0",func="main",file="hello.c",line="5",times="0"@},
18160 bkpt=@{number="2",type="breakpoint",disp="keep",enabled="y",
18161 addr="0x00010114",func="foo",file="hello.c",fullname="/home/foo/hello.c",
18162 line="13",times="0"@}]@}
18166 Here's an example of the result when there are no breakpoints:
18171 ^done,BreakpointTable=@{nr_rows="0",nr_cols="6",
18172 hdr=[@{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="number",colhdr="Num"@},
18173 @{width="14",alignment="-1",col_name="type",colhdr="Type"@},
18174 @{width="4",alignment="-1",col_name="disp",colhdr="Disp"@},
18175 @{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="enabled",colhdr="Enb"@},
18176 @{width="10",alignment="-1",col_name="addr",colhdr="Address"@},
18177 @{width="40",alignment="2",col_name="what",colhdr="What"@}],
18182 @subheading The @code{-break-watch} Command
18183 @findex -break-watch
18185 @subsubheading Synopsis
18188 -break-watch [ -a | -r ]
18191 Create a watchpoint. With the @samp{-a} option it will create an
18192 @dfn{access} watchpoint, i.e., a watchpoint that triggers either on a
18193 read from or on a write to the memory location. With the @samp{-r}
18194 option, the watchpoint created is a @dfn{read} watchpoint, i.e., it will
18195 trigger only when the memory location is accessed for reading. Without
18196 either of the options, the watchpoint created is a regular watchpoint,
18197 i.e., it will trigger when the memory location is accessed for writing.
18198 @xref{Set Watchpoints, , Setting Watchpoints}.
18200 Note that @samp{-break-list} will report a single list of watchpoints and
18201 breakpoints inserted.
18203 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
18205 The corresponding @value{GDBN} commands are @samp{watch}, @samp{awatch}, and
18208 @subsubheading Example
18210 Setting a watchpoint on a variable in the @code{main} function:
18215 ^done,wpt=@{number="2",exp="x"@}
18220 *stopped,reason="watchpoint-trigger",wpt=@{number="2",exp="x"@},
18221 value=@{old="-268439212",new="55"@},
18222 frame=@{func="main",args=[],file="recursive2.c",
18223 fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="5"@}
18227 Setting a watchpoint on a variable local to a function. @value{GDBN} will stop
18228 the program execution twice: first for the variable changing value, then
18229 for the watchpoint going out of scope.
18234 ^done,wpt=@{number="5",exp="C"@}
18239 *stopped,reason="watchpoint-trigger",
18240 wpt=@{number="5",exp="C"@},value=@{old="-276895068",new="3"@},
18241 frame=@{func="callee4",args=[],
18242 file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
18243 fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="13"@}
18248 *stopped,reason="watchpoint-scope",wpnum="5",
18249 frame=@{func="callee3",args=[@{name="strarg",
18250 value="0x11940 \"A string argument.\""@}],
18251 file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
18252 fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="18"@}
18256 Listing breakpoints and watchpoints, at different points in the program
18257 execution. Note that once the watchpoint goes out of scope, it is
18263 ^done,wpt=@{number="2",exp="C"@}
18266 ^done,BreakpointTable=@{nr_rows="2",nr_cols="6",
18267 hdr=[@{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="number",colhdr="Num"@},
18268 @{width="14",alignment="-1",col_name="type",colhdr="Type"@},
18269 @{width="4",alignment="-1",col_name="disp",colhdr="Disp"@},
18270 @{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="enabled",colhdr="Enb"@},
18271 @{width="10",alignment="-1",col_name="addr",colhdr="Address"@},
18272 @{width="40",alignment="2",col_name="what",colhdr="What"@}],
18273 body=[bkpt=@{number="1",type="breakpoint",disp="keep",enabled="y",
18274 addr="0x00010734",func="callee4",
18275 file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
18276 fullname="/home/foo/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c"line="8",times="1"@},
18277 bkpt=@{number="2",type="watchpoint",disp="keep",
18278 enabled="y",addr="",what="C",times="0"@}]@}
18283 *stopped,reason="watchpoint-trigger",wpt=@{number="2",exp="C"@},
18284 value=@{old="-276895068",new="3"@},
18285 frame=@{func="callee4",args=[],
18286 file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
18287 fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="13"@}
18290 ^done,BreakpointTable=@{nr_rows="2",nr_cols="6",
18291 hdr=[@{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="number",colhdr="Num"@},
18292 @{width="14",alignment="-1",col_name="type",colhdr="Type"@},
18293 @{width="4",alignment="-1",col_name="disp",colhdr="Disp"@},
18294 @{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="enabled",colhdr="Enb"@},
18295 @{width="10",alignment="-1",col_name="addr",colhdr="Address"@},
18296 @{width="40",alignment="2",col_name="what",colhdr="What"@}],
18297 body=[bkpt=@{number="1",type="breakpoint",disp="keep",enabled="y",
18298 addr="0x00010734",func="callee4",
18299 file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
18300 fullname="/home/foo/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="8",times="1"@},
18301 bkpt=@{number="2",type="watchpoint",disp="keep",
18302 enabled="y",addr="",what="C",times="-5"@}]@}
18306 ^done,reason="watchpoint-scope",wpnum="2",
18307 frame=@{func="callee3",args=[@{name="strarg",
18308 value="0x11940 \"A string argument.\""@}],
18309 file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
18310 fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="18"@}
18313 ^done,BreakpointTable=@{nr_rows="1",nr_cols="6",
18314 hdr=[@{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="number",colhdr="Num"@},
18315 @{width="14",alignment="-1",col_name="type",colhdr="Type"@},
18316 @{width="4",alignment="-1",col_name="disp",colhdr="Disp"@},
18317 @{width="3",alignment="-1",col_name="enabled",colhdr="Enb"@},
18318 @{width="10",alignment="-1",col_name="addr",colhdr="Address"@},
18319 @{width="40",alignment="2",col_name="what",colhdr="What"@}],
18320 body=[bkpt=@{number="1",type="breakpoint",disp="keep",enabled="y",
18321 addr="0x00010734",func="callee4",
18322 file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
18323 fullname="/home/foo/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="8",
18328 @c %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SECTION %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
18329 @node GDB/MI Program Context
18330 @section @sc{gdb/mi} Program Context
18332 @subheading The @code{-exec-arguments} Command
18333 @findex -exec-arguments
18336 @subsubheading Synopsis
18339 -exec-arguments @var{args}
18342 Set the inferior program arguments, to be used in the next
18345 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
18347 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{set args}.
18349 @subsubheading Example
18352 Don't have one around.
18355 @subheading The @code{-exec-show-arguments} Command
18356 @findex -exec-show-arguments
18358 @subsubheading Synopsis
18361 -exec-show-arguments
18364 Print the arguments of the program.
18366 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
18368 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{show args}.
18370 @subsubheading Example
18374 @subheading The @code{-environment-cd} Command
18375 @findex -environment-cd
18377 @subsubheading Synopsis
18380 -environment-cd @var{pathdir}
18383 Set @value{GDBN}'s working directory.
18385 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
18387 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{cd}.
18389 @subsubheading Example
18393 -environment-cd /kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/flathead-dev/devo/gdb
18399 @subheading The @code{-environment-directory} Command
18400 @findex -environment-directory
18402 @subsubheading Synopsis
18405 -environment-directory [ -r ] [ @var{pathdir} ]+
18408 Add directories @var{pathdir} to beginning of search path for source files.
18409 If the @samp{-r} option is used, the search path is reset to the default
18410 search path. If directories @var{pathdir} are supplied in addition to the
18411 @samp{-r} option, the search path is first reset and then addition
18413 Multiple directories may be specified, separated by blanks. Specifying
18414 multiple directories in a single command
18415 results in the directories added to the beginning of the
18416 search path in the same order they were presented in the command.
18417 If blanks are needed as
18418 part of a directory name, double-quotes should be used around
18419 the name. In the command output, the path will show up separated
18420 by the system directory-separator character. The directory-separator
18421 character must not be used
18422 in any directory name.
18423 If no directories are specified, the current search path is displayed.
18425 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
18427 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{dir}.
18429 @subsubheading Example
18433 -environment-directory /kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/flathead-dev/devo/gdb
18434 ^done,source-path="/kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/flathead-dev/devo/gdb:$cdir:$cwd"
18436 -environment-directory ""
18437 ^done,source-path="/kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/flathead-dev/devo/gdb:$cdir:$cwd"
18439 -environment-directory -r /home/jjohnstn/src/gdb /usr/src
18440 ^done,source-path="/home/jjohnstn/src/gdb:/usr/src:$cdir:$cwd"
18442 -environment-directory -r
18443 ^done,source-path="$cdir:$cwd"
18448 @subheading The @code{-environment-path} Command
18449 @findex -environment-path
18451 @subsubheading Synopsis
18454 -environment-path [ -r ] [ @var{pathdir} ]+
18457 Add directories @var{pathdir} to beginning of search path for object files.
18458 If the @samp{-r} option is used, the search path is reset to the original
18459 search path that existed at gdb start-up. If directories @var{pathdir} are
18460 supplied in addition to the
18461 @samp{-r} option, the search path is first reset and then addition
18463 Multiple directories may be specified, separated by blanks. Specifying
18464 multiple directories in a single command
18465 results in the directories added to the beginning of the
18466 search path in the same order they were presented in the command.
18467 If blanks are needed as
18468 part of a directory name, double-quotes should be used around
18469 the name. In the command output, the path will show up separated
18470 by the system directory-separator character. The directory-separator
18471 character must not be used
18472 in any directory name.
18473 If no directories are specified, the current path is displayed.
18476 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
18478 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{path}.
18480 @subsubheading Example
18485 ^done,path="/usr/bin"
18487 -environment-path /kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/flathead-dev/ppc-eabi/gdb /bin
18488 ^done,path="/kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/flathead-dev/ppc-eabi/gdb:/bin:/usr/bin"
18490 -environment-path -r /usr/local/bin
18491 ^done,path="/usr/local/bin:/usr/bin"
18496 @subheading The @code{-environment-pwd} Command
18497 @findex -environment-pwd
18499 @subsubheading Synopsis
18505 Show the current working directory.
18507 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
18509 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{pwd}.
18511 @subsubheading Example
18516 ^done,cwd="/kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/flathead-dev/devo/gdb"
18520 @c %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SECTION %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
18521 @node GDB/MI Thread Commands
18522 @section @sc{gdb/mi} Thread Commands
18525 @subheading The @code{-thread-info} Command
18526 @findex -thread-info
18528 @subsubheading Synopsis
18534 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
18538 @subsubheading Example
18542 @subheading The @code{-thread-list-all-threads} Command
18543 @findex -thread-list-all-threads
18545 @subsubheading Synopsis
18548 -thread-list-all-threads
18551 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
18553 The equivalent @value{GDBN} command is @samp{info threads}.
18555 @subsubheading Example
18559 @subheading The @code{-thread-list-ids} Command
18560 @findex -thread-list-ids
18562 @subsubheading Synopsis
18568 Produces a list of the currently known @value{GDBN} thread ids. At the
18569 end of the list it also prints the total number of such threads.
18571 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
18573 Part of @samp{info threads} supplies the same information.
18575 @subsubheading Example
18577 No threads present, besides the main process:
18582 ^done,thread-ids=@{@},number-of-threads="0"
18592 ^done,thread-ids=@{thread-id="3",thread-id="2",thread-id="1"@},
18593 number-of-threads="3"
18598 @subheading The @code{-thread-select} Command
18599 @findex -thread-select
18601 @subsubheading Synopsis
18604 -thread-select @var{threadnum}
18607 Make @var{threadnum} the current thread. It prints the number of the new
18608 current thread, and the topmost frame for that thread.
18610 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
18612 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{thread}.
18614 @subsubheading Example
18621 *stopped,reason="end-stepping-range",thread-id="2",line="187",
18622 file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.threads/linux-dp.c"
18626 thread-ids=@{thread-id="3",thread-id="2",thread-id="1"@},
18627 number-of-threads="3"
18630 ^done,new-thread-id="3",
18631 frame=@{level="0",func="vprintf",
18632 args=[@{name="format",value="0x8048e9c \"%*s%c %d %c\\n\""@},
18633 @{name="arg",value="0x2"@}],file="vprintf.c",line="31"@}
18637 @c %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SECTION %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
18638 @node GDB/MI Program Execution
18639 @section @sc{gdb/mi} Program Execution
18641 These are the asynchronous commands which generate the out-of-band
18642 record @samp{*stopped}. Currently @value{GDBN} only really executes
18643 asynchronously with remote targets and this interaction is mimicked in
18646 @subheading The @code{-exec-continue} Command
18647 @findex -exec-continue
18649 @subsubheading Synopsis
18655 Resumes the execution of the inferior program until a breakpoint is
18656 encountered, or until the inferior exits.
18658 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
18660 The corresponding @value{GDBN} corresponding is @samp{continue}.
18662 @subsubheading Example
18669 *stopped,reason="breakpoint-hit",bkptno="2",frame=@{func="foo",args=[],
18670 file="hello.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/hello.c",line="13"@}
18675 @subheading The @code{-exec-finish} Command
18676 @findex -exec-finish
18678 @subsubheading Synopsis
18684 Resumes the execution of the inferior program until the current
18685 function is exited. Displays the results returned by the function.
18687 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
18689 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{finish}.
18691 @subsubheading Example
18693 Function returning @code{void}.
18700 *stopped,reason="function-finished",frame=@{func="main",args=[],
18701 file="hello.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/hello.c",line="7"@}
18705 Function returning other than @code{void}. The name of the internal
18706 @value{GDBN} variable storing the result is printed, together with the
18713 *stopped,reason="function-finished",frame=@{addr="0x000107b0",func="foo",
18714 args=[@{name="a",value="1"],@{name="b",value="9"@}@},
18715 file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"@},
18716 gdb-result-var="$1",return-value="0"
18721 @subheading The @code{-exec-interrupt} Command
18722 @findex -exec-interrupt
18724 @subsubheading Synopsis
18730 Interrupts the background execution of the target. Note how the token
18731 associated with the stop message is the one for the execution command
18732 that has been interrupted. The token for the interrupt itself only
18733 appears in the @samp{^done} output. If the user is trying to
18734 interrupt a non-running program, an error message will be printed.
18736 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
18738 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{interrupt}.
18740 @subsubheading Example
18751 111*stopped,signal-name="SIGINT",signal-meaning="Interrupt",
18752 frame=@{addr="0x00010140",func="foo",args=[],file="try.c",
18753 fullname="/home/foo/bar/try.c",line="13"@}
18758 ^error,msg="mi_cmd_exec_interrupt: Inferior not executing."
18763 @subheading The @code{-exec-next} Command
18766 @subsubheading Synopsis
18772 Resumes execution of the inferior program, stopping when the beginning
18773 of the next source line is reached.
18775 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
18777 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{next}.
18779 @subsubheading Example
18785 *stopped,reason="end-stepping-range",line="8",file="hello.c"
18790 @subheading The @code{-exec-next-instruction} Command
18791 @findex -exec-next-instruction
18793 @subsubheading Synopsis
18796 -exec-next-instruction
18799 Executes one machine instruction. If the instruction is a function
18800 call, continues until the function returns. If the program stops at an
18801 instruction in the middle of a source line, the address will be
18804 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
18806 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{nexti}.
18808 @subsubheading Example
18812 -exec-next-instruction
18816 *stopped,reason="end-stepping-range",
18817 addr="0x000100d4",line="5",file="hello.c"
18822 @subheading The @code{-exec-return} Command
18823 @findex -exec-return
18825 @subsubheading Synopsis
18831 Makes current function return immediately. Doesn't execute the inferior.
18832 Displays the new current frame.
18834 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
18836 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{return}.
18838 @subsubheading Example
18842 200-break-insert callee4
18843 200^done,bkpt=@{number="1",addr="0x00010734",
18844 file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="8"@}
18849 000*stopped,reason="breakpoint-hit",bkptno="1",
18850 frame=@{func="callee4",args=[],
18851 file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
18852 fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="8"@}
18858 111^done,frame=@{level="0",func="callee3",
18859 args=[@{name="strarg",
18860 value="0x11940 \"A string argument.\""@}],
18861 file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
18862 fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="18"@}
18867 @subheading The @code{-exec-run} Command
18870 @subsubheading Synopsis
18876 Starts execution of the inferior from the beginning. The inferior
18877 executes until either a breakpoint is encountered or the program
18878 exits. In the latter case the output will include an exit code, if
18879 the program has exited exceptionally.
18881 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
18883 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{run}.
18885 @subsubheading Examples
18890 ^done,bkpt=@{number="1",addr="0x0001072c",file="recursive2.c",line="4"@}
18895 *stopped,reason="breakpoint-hit",bkptno="1",
18896 frame=@{func="main",args=[],file="recursive2.c",
18897 fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="4"@}
18902 Program exited normally:
18910 *stopped,reason="exited-normally"
18915 Program exited exceptionally:
18923 *stopped,reason="exited",exit-code="01"
18927 Another way the program can terminate is if it receives a signal such as
18928 @code{SIGINT}. In this case, @sc{gdb/mi} displays this:
18932 *stopped,reason="exited-signalled",signal-name="SIGINT",
18933 signal-meaning="Interrupt"
18937 @c @subheading -exec-signal
18940 @subheading The @code{-exec-step} Command
18943 @subsubheading Synopsis
18949 Resumes execution of the inferior program, stopping when the beginning
18950 of the next source line is reached, if the next source line is not a
18951 function call. If it is, stop at the first instruction of the called
18954 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
18956 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{step}.
18958 @subsubheading Example
18960 Stepping into a function:
18966 *stopped,reason="end-stepping-range",
18967 frame=@{func="foo",args=[@{name="a",value="10"@},
18968 @{name="b",value="0"@}],file="recursive2.c",
18969 fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="11"@}
18979 *stopped,reason="end-stepping-range",line="14",file="recursive2.c"
18984 @subheading The @code{-exec-step-instruction} Command
18985 @findex -exec-step-instruction
18987 @subsubheading Synopsis
18990 -exec-step-instruction
18993 Resumes the inferior which executes one machine instruction. The
18994 output, once @value{GDBN} has stopped, will vary depending on whether
18995 we have stopped in the middle of a source line or not. In the former
18996 case, the address at which the program stopped will be printed as
18999 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
19001 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{stepi}.
19003 @subsubheading Example
19007 -exec-step-instruction
19011 *stopped,reason="end-stepping-range",
19012 frame=@{func="foo",args=[],file="try.c",
19013 fullname="/home/foo/bar/try.c",line="10"@}
19015 -exec-step-instruction
19019 *stopped,reason="end-stepping-range",
19020 frame=@{addr="0x000100f4",func="foo",args=[],file="try.c",
19021 fullname="/home/foo/bar/try.c",line="10"@}
19026 @subheading The @code{-exec-until} Command
19027 @findex -exec-until
19029 @subsubheading Synopsis
19032 -exec-until [ @var{location} ]
19035 Executes the inferior until the @var{location} specified in the
19036 argument is reached. If there is no argument, the inferior executes
19037 until a source line greater than the current one is reached. The
19038 reason for stopping in this case will be @samp{location-reached}.
19040 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
19042 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{until}.
19044 @subsubheading Example
19048 -exec-until recursive2.c:6
19052 *stopped,reason="location-reached",frame=@{func="main",args=[],
19053 file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="6"@}
19058 @subheading -file-clear
19059 Is this going away????
19062 @c %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SECTION %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
19063 @node GDB/MI Stack Manipulation
19064 @section @sc{gdb/mi} Stack Manipulation Commands
19067 @subheading The @code{-stack-info-frame} Command
19068 @findex -stack-info-frame
19070 @subsubheading Synopsis
19076 Get info on the selected frame.
19078 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
19080 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{info frame} or @samp{frame}
19081 (without arguments).
19083 @subsubheading Example
19088 ^done,frame=@{level="1",addr="0x0001076c",func="callee3",
19089 file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
19090 fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="17"@}
19094 @subheading The @code{-stack-info-depth} Command
19095 @findex -stack-info-depth
19097 @subsubheading Synopsis
19100 -stack-info-depth [ @var{max-depth} ]
19103 Return the depth of the stack. If the integer argument @var{max-depth}
19104 is specified, do not count beyond @var{max-depth} frames.
19106 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
19108 There's no equivalent @value{GDBN} command.
19110 @subsubheading Example
19112 For a stack with frame levels 0 through 11:
19119 -stack-info-depth 4
19122 -stack-info-depth 12
19125 -stack-info-depth 11
19128 -stack-info-depth 13
19133 @subheading The @code{-stack-list-arguments} Command
19134 @findex -stack-list-arguments
19136 @subsubheading Synopsis
19139 -stack-list-arguments @var{show-values}
19140 [ @var{low-frame} @var{high-frame} ]
19143 Display a list of the arguments for the frames between @var{low-frame}
19144 and @var{high-frame} (inclusive). If @var{low-frame} and
19145 @var{high-frame} are not provided, list the arguments for the whole
19146 call stack. If the two arguments are equal, show the single frame
19147 at the corresponding level. It is an error if @var{low-frame} is
19148 larger than the actual number of frames. On the other hand,
19149 @var{high-frame} may be larger than the actual number of frames, in
19150 which case only existing frames will be returned.
19152 The @var{show-values} argument must have a value of 0 or 1. A value of
19153 0 means that only the names of the arguments are listed, a value of 1
19154 means that both names and values of the arguments are printed.
19156 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
19158 @value{GDBN} does not have an equivalent command. @code{gdbtk} has a
19159 @samp{gdb_get_args} command which partially overlaps with the
19160 functionality of @samp{-stack-list-arguments}.
19162 @subsubheading Example
19169 frame=@{level="0",addr="0x00010734",func="callee4",
19170 file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
19171 fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="8"@},
19172 frame=@{level="1",addr="0x0001076c",func="callee3",
19173 file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
19174 fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="17"@},
19175 frame=@{level="2",addr="0x0001078c",func="callee2",
19176 file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
19177 fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="22"@},
19178 frame=@{level="3",addr="0x000107b4",func="callee1",
19179 file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
19180 fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="27"@},
19181 frame=@{level="4",addr="0x000107e0",func="main",
19182 file="../../../devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",
19183 fullname="/home/foo/bar/devo/gdb/testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line="32"@}]
19185 -stack-list-arguments 0
19188 frame=@{level="0",args=[]@},
19189 frame=@{level="1",args=[name="strarg"]@},
19190 frame=@{level="2",args=[name="intarg",name="strarg"]@},
19191 frame=@{level="3",args=[name="intarg",name="strarg",name="fltarg"]@},
19192 frame=@{level="4",args=[]@}]
19194 -stack-list-arguments 1
19197 frame=@{level="0",args=[]@},
19199 args=[@{name="strarg",value="0x11940 \"A string argument.\""@}]@},
19200 frame=@{level="2",args=[
19201 @{name="intarg",value="2"@},
19202 @{name="strarg",value="0x11940 \"A string argument.\""@}]@},
19203 @{frame=@{level="3",args=[
19204 @{name="intarg",value="2"@},
19205 @{name="strarg",value="0x11940 \"A string argument.\""@},
19206 @{name="fltarg",value="3.5"@}]@},
19207 frame=@{level="4",args=[]@}]
19209 -stack-list-arguments 0 2 2
19210 ^done,stack-args=[frame=@{level="2",args=[name="intarg",name="strarg"]@}]
19212 -stack-list-arguments 1 2 2
19213 ^done,stack-args=[frame=@{level="2",
19214 args=[@{name="intarg",value="2"@},
19215 @{name="strarg",value="0x11940 \"A string argument.\""@}]@}]
19219 @c @subheading -stack-list-exception-handlers
19222 @subheading The @code{-stack-list-frames} Command
19223 @findex -stack-list-frames
19225 @subsubheading Synopsis
19228 -stack-list-frames [ @var{low-frame} @var{high-frame} ]
19231 List the frames currently on the stack. For each frame it displays the
19236 The frame number, 0 being the topmost frame, i.e., the innermost function.
19238 The @code{$pc} value for that frame.
19242 File name of the source file where the function lives.
19244 Line number corresponding to the @code{$pc}.
19247 If invoked without arguments, this command prints a backtrace for the
19248 whole stack. If given two integer arguments, it shows the frames whose
19249 levels are between the two arguments (inclusive). If the two arguments
19250 are equal, it shows the single frame at the corresponding level. It is
19251 an error if @var{low-frame} is larger than the actual number of
19252 frames. On the other hand, @var{high-frame} may be larger than the
19253 actual number of frames, in which case only existing frames will be returned.
19255 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
19257 The corresponding @value{GDBN} commands are @samp{backtrace} and @samp{where}.
19259 @subsubheading Example
19261 Full stack backtrace:
19267 [frame=@{level="0",addr="0x0001076c",func="foo",
19268 file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="11"@},
19269 frame=@{level="1",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
19270 file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"@},
19271 frame=@{level="2",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
19272 file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"@},
19273 frame=@{level="3",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
19274 file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"@},
19275 frame=@{level="4",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
19276 file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"@},
19277 frame=@{level="5",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
19278 file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"@},
19279 frame=@{level="6",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
19280 file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"@},
19281 frame=@{level="7",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
19282 file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"@},
19283 frame=@{level="8",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
19284 file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"@},
19285 frame=@{level="9",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
19286 file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"@},
19287 frame=@{level="10",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
19288 file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"@},
19289 frame=@{level="11",addr="0x00010738",func="main",
19290 file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="4"@}]
19294 Show frames between @var{low_frame} and @var{high_frame}:
19298 -stack-list-frames 3 5
19300 [frame=@{level="3",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
19301 file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"@},
19302 frame=@{level="4",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
19303 file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"@},
19304 frame=@{level="5",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
19305 file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"@}]
19309 Show a single frame:
19313 -stack-list-frames 3 3
19315 [frame=@{level="3",addr="0x000107a4",func="foo",
19316 file="recursive2.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/recursive2.c",line="14"@}]
19321 @subheading The @code{-stack-list-locals} Command
19322 @findex -stack-list-locals
19324 @subsubheading Synopsis
19327 -stack-list-locals @var{print-values}
19330 Display the local variable names for the selected frame. If
19331 @var{print-values} is 0 or @code{--no-values}, print only the names of
19332 the variables; if it is 1 or @code{--all-values}, print also their
19333 values; and if it is 2 or @code{--simple-values}, print the name,
19334 type and value for simple data types and the name and type for arrays,
19335 structures and unions. In this last case, a frontend can immediately
19336 display the value of simple data types and create variable objects for
19337 other data types when the user wishes to explore their values in
19340 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
19342 @samp{info locals} in @value{GDBN}, @samp{gdb_get_locals} in @code{gdbtk}.
19344 @subsubheading Example
19348 -stack-list-locals 0
19349 ^done,locals=[name="A",name="B",name="C"]
19351 -stack-list-locals --all-values
19352 ^done,locals=[@{name="A",value="1"@},@{name="B",value="2"@},
19353 @{name="C",value="@{1, 2, 3@}"@}]
19354 -stack-list-locals --simple-values
19355 ^done,locals=[@{name="A",type="int",value="1"@},
19356 @{name="B",type="int",value="2"@},@{name="C",type="int [3]"@}]
19361 @subheading The @code{-stack-select-frame} Command
19362 @findex -stack-select-frame
19364 @subsubheading Synopsis
19367 -stack-select-frame @var{framenum}
19370 Change the selected frame. Select a different frame @var{framenum} on
19373 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
19375 The corresponding @value{GDBN} commands are @samp{frame}, @samp{up},
19376 @samp{down}, @samp{select-frame}, @samp{up-silent}, and @samp{down-silent}.
19378 @subsubheading Example
19382 -stack-select-frame 2
19387 @c %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SECTION %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
19388 @node GDB/MI Variable Objects
19389 @section @sc{gdb/mi} Variable Objects
19393 @subheading Motivation for Variable Objects in @sc{gdb/mi}
19395 For the implementation of a variable debugger window (locals, watched
19396 expressions, etc.), we are proposing the adaptation of the existing code
19397 used by @code{Insight}.
19399 The two main reasons for that are:
19403 It has been proven in practice (it is already on its second generation).
19406 It will shorten development time (needless to say how important it is
19410 The original interface was designed to be used by Tcl code, so it was
19411 slightly changed so it could be used through @sc{gdb/mi}. This section
19412 describes the @sc{gdb/mi} operations that will be available and gives some
19413 hints about their use.
19415 @emph{Note}: In addition to the set of operations described here, we
19416 expect the @sc{gui} implementation of a variable window to require, at
19417 least, the following operations:
19420 @item @code{-gdb-show} @code{output-radix}
19421 @item @code{-stack-list-arguments}
19422 @item @code{-stack-list-locals}
19423 @item @code{-stack-select-frame}
19428 @subheading Introduction to Variable Objects
19430 @cindex variable objects in @sc{gdb/mi}
19432 Variable objects are "object-oriented" MI interface for examining and
19433 changing values of expressions. Unlike some other MI interfaces that
19434 work with expressions, variable objects are specifically designed for
19435 simple and efficient presentation in the frontend. A variable object
19436 is identified by string name. When a variable object is created, the
19437 frontend specifies the expression for that variable object. The
19438 expression can be a simple variable, or it can be an arbitrary complex
19439 expression, and can even involve CPU registers. After creating a
19440 variable object, the frontend can invoke other variable object
19441 operations---for example to obtain or change the value of a variable
19442 object, or to change display format.
19444 Variable objects have hierarchical tree structure. Any variable object
19445 that corresponds to a composite type, such as structure in C, has
19446 a number of child variable objects, for example corresponding to each
19447 element of a structure. A child variable object can itself have
19448 children, recursively. Recursion ends when we reach
19449 leaf variable objects, which always have built-in types. Child variable
19450 objects are created only by explicit request, so if a frontend
19451 is not interested in the children of a particular variable object, no
19452 child will be created.
19454 For a leaf variable object it is possible to obtain its value as a
19455 string, or set the value from a string. String value can be also
19456 obtained for a non-leaf variable object, but it's generally a string
19457 that only indicates the type of the object, and does not list its
19458 contents. Assignment to a non-leaf variable object is not allowed.
19460 A frontend does not need to read the values of all variable objects each time
19461 the program stops. Instead, MI provides an update command that lists all
19462 variable objects whose values has changed since the last update
19463 operation. This considerably reduces the amount of data that must
19464 be transferred to the frontend. As noted above, children variable
19465 objects are created on demand, and only leaf variable objects have a
19466 real value. As result, gdb will read target memory only for leaf
19467 variables that frontend has created.
19469 The automatic update is not always desirable. For example, a frontend
19470 might want to keep a value of some expression for future reference,
19471 and never update it. For another example, fetching memory is
19472 relatively slow for embedded targets, so a frontend might want
19473 to disable automatic update for the variables that are either not
19474 visible on the screen, or ``closed''. This is possible using so
19475 called ``frozen variable objects''. Such variable objects are never
19476 implicitly updated.
19478 The following is the complete set of @sc{gdb/mi} operations defined to
19479 access this functionality:
19481 @multitable @columnfractions .4 .6
19482 @item @strong{Operation}
19483 @tab @strong{Description}
19485 @item @code{-var-create}
19486 @tab create a variable object
19487 @item @code{-var-delete}
19488 @tab delete the variable object and/or its children
19489 @item @code{-var-set-format}
19490 @tab set the display format of this variable
19491 @item @code{-var-show-format}
19492 @tab show the display format of this variable
19493 @item @code{-var-info-num-children}
19494 @tab tells how many children this object has
19495 @item @code{-var-list-children}
19496 @tab return a list of the object's children
19497 @item @code{-var-info-type}
19498 @tab show the type of this variable object
19499 @item @code{-var-info-expression}
19500 @tab print parent-relative expression that this variable object represents
19501 @item @code{-var-info-path-expression}
19502 @tab print full expression that this variable object represents
19503 @item @code{-var-show-attributes}
19504 @tab is this variable editable? does it exist here?
19505 @item @code{-var-evaluate-expression}
19506 @tab get the value of this variable
19507 @item @code{-var-assign}
19508 @tab set the value of this variable
19509 @item @code{-var-update}
19510 @tab update the variable and its children
19511 @item @code{-var-set-frozen}
19512 @tab set frozeness attribute
19515 In the next subsection we describe each operation in detail and suggest
19516 how it can be used.
19518 @subheading Description And Use of Operations on Variable Objects
19520 @subheading The @code{-var-create} Command
19521 @findex -var-create
19523 @subsubheading Synopsis
19526 -var-create @{@var{name} | "-"@}
19527 @{@var{frame-addr} | "*"@} @var{expression}
19530 This operation creates a variable object, which allows the monitoring of
19531 a variable, the result of an expression, a memory cell or a CPU
19534 The @var{name} parameter is the string by which the object can be
19535 referenced. It must be unique. If @samp{-} is specified, the varobj
19536 system will generate a string ``varNNNNNN'' automatically. It will be
19537 unique provided that one does not specify @var{name} on that format.
19538 The command fails if a duplicate name is found.
19540 The frame under which the expression should be evaluated can be
19541 specified by @var{frame-addr}. A @samp{*} indicates that the current
19542 frame should be used.
19544 @var{expression} is any expression valid on the current language set (must not
19545 begin with a @samp{*}), or one of the following:
19549 @samp{*@var{addr}}, where @var{addr} is the address of a memory cell
19552 @samp{*@var{addr}-@var{addr}} --- a memory address range (TBD)
19555 @samp{$@var{regname}} --- a CPU register name
19558 @subsubheading Result
19560 This operation returns the name, number of children and the type of the
19561 object created. Type is returned as a string as the ones generated by
19562 the @value{GDBN} CLI:
19565 name="@var{name}",numchild="N",type="@var{type}"
19569 @subheading The @code{-var-delete} Command
19570 @findex -var-delete
19572 @subsubheading Synopsis
19575 -var-delete [ -c ] @var{name}
19578 Deletes a previously created variable object and all of its children.
19579 With the @samp{-c} option, just deletes the children.
19581 Returns an error if the object @var{name} is not found.
19584 @subheading The @code{-var-set-format} Command
19585 @findex -var-set-format
19587 @subsubheading Synopsis
19590 -var-set-format @var{name} @var{format-spec}
19593 Sets the output format for the value of the object @var{name} to be
19596 The syntax for the @var{format-spec} is as follows:
19599 @var{format-spec} @expansion{}
19600 @{binary | decimal | hexadecimal | octal | natural@}
19603 The natural format is the default format choosen automatically
19604 based on the variable type (like decimal for an @code{int}, hex
19605 for pointers, etc.).
19607 For a variable with children, the format is set only on the
19608 variable itself, and the children are not affected.
19610 @subheading The @code{-var-show-format} Command
19611 @findex -var-show-format
19613 @subsubheading Synopsis
19616 -var-show-format @var{name}
19619 Returns the format used to display the value of the object @var{name}.
19622 @var{format} @expansion{}
19627 @subheading The @code{-var-info-num-children} Command
19628 @findex -var-info-num-children
19630 @subsubheading Synopsis
19633 -var-info-num-children @var{name}
19636 Returns the number of children of a variable object @var{name}:
19643 @subheading The @code{-var-list-children} Command
19644 @findex -var-list-children
19646 @subsubheading Synopsis
19649 -var-list-children [@var{print-values}] @var{name}
19651 @anchor{-var-list-children}
19653 Return a list of the children of the specified variable object and
19654 create variable objects for them, if they do not already exist. With
19655 a single argument or if @var{print-values} has a value for of 0 or
19656 @code{--no-values}, print only the names of the variables; if
19657 @var{print-values} is 1 or @code{--all-values}, also print their
19658 values; and if it is 2 or @code{--simple-values} print the name and
19659 value for simple data types and just the name for arrays, structures
19662 @subsubheading Example
19666 -var-list-children n
19667 ^done,numchild=@var{n},children=[@{name=@var{name},
19668 numchild=@var{n},type=@var{type}@},@r{(repeats N times)}]
19670 -var-list-children --all-values n
19671 ^done,numchild=@var{n},children=[@{name=@var{name},
19672 numchild=@var{n},value=@var{value},type=@var{type}@},@r{(repeats N times)}]
19676 @subheading The @code{-var-info-type} Command
19677 @findex -var-info-type
19679 @subsubheading Synopsis
19682 -var-info-type @var{name}
19685 Returns the type of the specified variable @var{name}. The type is
19686 returned as a string in the same format as it is output by the
19690 type=@var{typename}
19694 @subheading The @code{-var-info-expression} Command
19695 @findex -var-info-expression
19697 @subsubheading Synopsis
19700 -var-info-expression @var{name}
19703 Returns a string that is suitable for presenting this
19704 variable object in user interface. The string is generally
19705 not valid expression in the current language, and cannot be evaluated.
19707 For example, if @code{a} is an array, and variable object
19708 @code{A} was created for @code{a}, then we'll get this output:
19711 (gdb) -var-info-expression A.1
19712 ^done,lang="C",exp="1"
19716 Here, the values of @code{lang} can be @code{@{"C" | "C++" | "Java"@}}.
19718 Note that the output of the @code{-var-list-children} command also
19719 includes those expressions, so the @code{-var-info-expression} command
19722 @subheading The @code{-var-info-path-expression} Command
19723 @findex -var-info-path-expression
19725 @subsubheading Synopsis
19728 -var-info-path-expression @var{name}
19731 Returns an expression that can be evaluated in the current
19732 context and will yield the same value that a variable object has.
19733 Compare this with the @code{-var-info-expression} command, which
19734 result can be used only for UI presentation. Typical use of
19735 the @code{-var-info-path-expression} command is creating a
19736 watchpoint from a variable object.
19738 For example, suppose @code{C} is a C@t{++} class, derived from class
19739 @code{Base}, and that the @code{Base} class has a member called
19740 @code{m_size}. Assume a variable @code{c} is has the type of
19741 @code{C} and a variable object @code{C} was created for variable
19742 @code{c}. Then, we'll get this output:
19744 (gdb) -var-info-path-expression C.Base.public.m_size
19745 ^done,path_expr=((Base)c).m_size)
19748 @subheading The @code{-var-show-attributes} Command
19749 @findex -var-show-attributes
19751 @subsubheading Synopsis
19754 -var-show-attributes @var{name}
19757 List attributes of the specified variable object @var{name}:
19760 status=@var{attr} [ ( ,@var{attr} )* ]
19764 where @var{attr} is @code{@{ @{ editable | noneditable @} | TBD @}}.
19766 @subheading The @code{-var-evaluate-expression} Command
19767 @findex -var-evaluate-expression
19769 @subsubheading Synopsis
19772 -var-evaluate-expression @var{name}
19775 Evaluates the expression that is represented by the specified variable
19776 object and returns its value as a string. The format of the
19777 string can be changed using the @code{-var-set-format} command.
19783 Note that one must invoke @code{-var-list-children} for a variable
19784 before the value of a child variable can be evaluated.
19786 @subheading The @code{-var-assign} Command
19787 @findex -var-assign
19789 @subsubheading Synopsis
19792 -var-assign @var{name} @var{expression}
19795 Assigns the value of @var{expression} to the variable object specified
19796 by @var{name}. The object must be @samp{editable}. If the variable's
19797 value is altered by the assign, the variable will show up in any
19798 subsequent @code{-var-update} list.
19800 @subsubheading Example
19808 ^done,changelist=[@{name="var1",in_scope="true",type_changed="false"@}]
19812 @subheading The @code{-var-update} Command
19813 @findex -var-update
19815 @subsubheading Synopsis
19818 -var-update [@var{print-values}] @{@var{name} | "*"@}
19821 Reevaluate the expressions corresponding to the variable object
19822 @var{name} and all its direct and indirect children, and return the
19823 list of variable objects whose values have changed; @var{name} must
19824 be a root variable object. Here, ``changed'' means that the result of
19825 @code{-var-evaluate-expression} before and after the
19826 @code{-var-update} is different. If @samp{*} is used as the variable
19827 object names, all existing variable objects are updated, except
19828 for frozen ones (@pxref{-var-set-frozen}). The option
19829 @var{print-values} determines whether both names and values, or just
19830 names are printed. The possible values of this options are the same
19831 as for @code{-var-list-children} (@pxref{-var-list-children}). It is
19832 recommended to use the @samp{--all-values} option, to reduce the
19833 number of MI commands needed on each program stop.
19836 @subsubheading Example
19843 -var-update --all-values var1
19844 ^done,changelist=[@{name="var1",value="3",in_scope="true",
19845 type_changed="false"@}]
19849 @anchor{-var-update}
19850 The field in_scope may take three values:
19854 The variable object's current value is valid.
19857 The variable object does not currently hold a valid value but it may
19858 hold one in the future if its associated expression comes back into
19862 The variable object no longer holds a valid value.
19863 This can occur when the executable file being debugged has changed,
19864 either through recompilation or by using the @value{GDBN} @code{file}
19865 command. The front end should normally choose to delete these variable
19869 In the future new values may be added to this list so the front should
19870 be prepared for this possibility. @xref{GDB/MI Development and Front Ends, ,@sc{GDB/MI} Development and Front Ends}.
19872 @subheading The @code{-var-set-frozen} Command
19873 @findex -var-set-frozen
19874 @anchor{-var-set-frozen}
19876 @subsubheading Synopsis
19879 -var-set-frozen @var{name} @var{flag}
19882 Set the frozenness flag on the variable object @var{name}. The
19883 @var{flag} parameter should be either @samp{1} to make the variable
19884 frozen or @samp{0} to make it unfrozen. If a variable object is
19885 frozen, then neither itself, nor any of its children, are
19886 implicitly updated by @code{-var-update} of
19887 a parent variable or by @code{-var-update *}. Only
19888 @code{-var-update} of the variable itself will update its value and
19889 values of its children. After a variable object is unfrozen, it is
19890 implicitly updated by all subsequent @code{-var-update} operations.
19891 Unfreezing a variable does not update it, only subsequent
19892 @code{-var-update} does.
19894 @subsubheading Example
19898 -var-set-frozen V 1
19904 @c %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SECTION %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
19905 @node GDB/MI Data Manipulation
19906 @section @sc{gdb/mi} Data Manipulation
19908 @cindex data manipulation, in @sc{gdb/mi}
19909 @cindex @sc{gdb/mi}, data manipulation
19910 This section describes the @sc{gdb/mi} commands that manipulate data:
19911 examine memory and registers, evaluate expressions, etc.
19913 @c REMOVED FROM THE INTERFACE.
19914 @c @subheading -data-assign
19915 @c Change the value of a program variable. Plenty of side effects.
19916 @c @subsubheading GDB Command
19918 @c @subsubheading Example
19921 @subheading The @code{-data-disassemble} Command
19922 @findex -data-disassemble
19924 @subsubheading Synopsis
19928 [ -s @var{start-addr} -e @var{end-addr} ]
19929 | [ -f @var{filename} -l @var{linenum} [ -n @var{lines} ] ]
19937 @item @var{start-addr}
19938 is the beginning address (or @code{$pc})
19939 @item @var{end-addr}
19941 @item @var{filename}
19942 is the name of the file to disassemble
19943 @item @var{linenum}
19944 is the line number to disassemble around
19946 is the number of disassembly lines to be produced. If it is -1,
19947 the whole function will be disassembled, in case no @var{end-addr} is
19948 specified. If @var{end-addr} is specified as a non-zero value, and
19949 @var{lines} is lower than the number of disassembly lines between
19950 @var{start-addr} and @var{end-addr}, only @var{lines} lines are
19951 displayed; if @var{lines} is higher than the number of lines between
19952 @var{start-addr} and @var{end-addr}, only the lines up to @var{end-addr}
19955 is either 0 (meaning only disassembly) or 1 (meaning mixed source and
19959 @subsubheading Result
19961 The output for each instruction is composed of four fields:
19970 Note that whatever included in the instruction field, is not manipulated
19971 directly by @sc{gdb/mi}, i.e., it is not possible to adjust its format.
19973 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
19975 There's no direct mapping from this command to the CLI.
19977 @subsubheading Example
19979 Disassemble from the current value of @code{$pc} to @code{$pc + 20}:
19983 -data-disassemble -s $pc -e "$pc + 20" -- 0
19986 @{address="0x000107c0",func-name="main",offset="4",
19987 inst="mov 2, %o0"@},
19988 @{address="0x000107c4",func-name="main",offset="8",
19989 inst="sethi %hi(0x11800), %o2"@},
19990 @{address="0x000107c8",func-name="main",offset="12",
19991 inst="or %o2, 0x140, %o1\t! 0x11940 <_lib_version+8>"@},
19992 @{address="0x000107cc",func-name="main",offset="16",
19993 inst="sethi %hi(0x11800), %o2"@},
19994 @{address="0x000107d0",func-name="main",offset="20",
19995 inst="or %o2, 0x168, %o4\t! 0x11968 <_lib_version+48>"@}]
19999 Disassemble the whole @code{main} function. Line 32 is part of
20003 -data-disassemble -f basics.c -l 32 -- 0
20005 @{address="0x000107bc",func-name="main",offset="0",
20006 inst="save %sp, -112, %sp"@},
20007 @{address="0x000107c0",func-name="main",offset="4",
20008 inst="mov 2, %o0"@},
20009 @{address="0x000107c4",func-name="main",offset="8",
20010 inst="sethi %hi(0x11800), %o2"@},
20012 @{address="0x0001081c",func-name="main",offset="96",inst="ret "@},
20013 @{address="0x00010820",func-name="main",offset="100",inst="restore "@}]
20017 Disassemble 3 instructions from the start of @code{main}:
20021 -data-disassemble -f basics.c -l 32 -n 3 -- 0
20023 @{address="0x000107bc",func-name="main",offset="0",
20024 inst="save %sp, -112, %sp"@},
20025 @{address="0x000107c0",func-name="main",offset="4",
20026 inst="mov 2, %o0"@},
20027 @{address="0x000107c4",func-name="main",offset="8",
20028 inst="sethi %hi(0x11800), %o2"@}]
20032 Disassemble 3 instructions from the start of @code{main} in mixed mode:
20036 -data-disassemble -f basics.c -l 32 -n 3 -- 1
20038 src_and_asm_line=@{line="31",
20039 file="/kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/flathead-dev/devo/gdb/ \
20040 testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line_asm_insn=[
20041 @{address="0x000107bc",func-name="main",offset="0",
20042 inst="save %sp, -112, %sp"@}]@},
20043 src_and_asm_line=@{line="32",
20044 file="/kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/flathead-dev/devo/gdb/ \
20045 testsuite/gdb.mi/basics.c",line_asm_insn=[
20046 @{address="0x000107c0",func-name="main",offset="4",
20047 inst="mov 2, %o0"@},
20048 @{address="0x000107c4",func-name="main",offset="8",
20049 inst="sethi %hi(0x11800), %o2"@}]@}]
20054 @subheading The @code{-data-evaluate-expression} Command
20055 @findex -data-evaluate-expression
20057 @subsubheading Synopsis
20060 -data-evaluate-expression @var{expr}
20063 Evaluate @var{expr} as an expression. The expression could contain an
20064 inferior function call. The function call will execute synchronously.
20065 If the expression contains spaces, it must be enclosed in double quotes.
20067 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20069 The corresponding @value{GDBN} commands are @samp{print}, @samp{output}, and
20070 @samp{call}. In @code{gdbtk} only, there's a corresponding
20071 @samp{gdb_eval} command.
20073 @subsubheading Example
20075 In the following example, the numbers that precede the commands are the
20076 @dfn{tokens} described in @ref{GDB/MI Command Syntax, ,@sc{gdb/mi}
20077 Command Syntax}. Notice how @sc{gdb/mi} returns the same tokens in its
20081 211-data-evaluate-expression A
20084 311-data-evaluate-expression &A
20085 311^done,value="0xefffeb7c"
20087 411-data-evaluate-expression A+3
20090 511-data-evaluate-expression "A + 3"
20096 @subheading The @code{-data-list-changed-registers} Command
20097 @findex -data-list-changed-registers
20099 @subsubheading Synopsis
20102 -data-list-changed-registers
20105 Display a list of the registers that have changed.
20107 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20109 @value{GDBN} doesn't have a direct analog for this command; @code{gdbtk}
20110 has the corresponding command @samp{gdb_changed_register_list}.
20112 @subsubheading Example
20114 On a PPC MBX board:
20122 *stopped,reason="breakpoint-hit",bkptno="1",frame=@{func="main",
20123 args=[],file="try.c",fullname="/home/foo/bar/try.c",line="5"@}
20125 -data-list-changed-registers
20126 ^done,changed-registers=["0","1","2","4","5","6","7","8","9",
20127 "10","11","13","14","15","16","17","18","19","20","21","22","23",
20128 "24","25","26","27","28","30","31","64","65","66","67","69"]
20133 @subheading The @code{-data-list-register-names} Command
20134 @findex -data-list-register-names
20136 @subsubheading Synopsis
20139 -data-list-register-names [ ( @var{regno} )+ ]
20142 Show a list of register names for the current target. If no arguments
20143 are given, it shows a list of the names of all the registers. If
20144 integer numbers are given as arguments, it will print a list of the
20145 names of the registers corresponding to the arguments. To ensure
20146 consistency between a register name and its number, the output list may
20147 include empty register names.
20149 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20151 @value{GDBN} does not have a command which corresponds to
20152 @samp{-data-list-register-names}. In @code{gdbtk} there is a
20153 corresponding command @samp{gdb_regnames}.
20155 @subsubheading Example
20157 For the PPC MBX board:
20160 -data-list-register-names
20161 ^done,register-names=["r0","r1","r2","r3","r4","r5","r6","r7",
20162 "r8","r9","r10","r11","r12","r13","r14","r15","r16","r17","r18",
20163 "r19","r20","r21","r22","r23","r24","r25","r26","r27","r28","r29",
20164 "r30","r31","f0","f1","f2","f3","f4","f5","f6","f7","f8","f9",
20165 "f10","f11","f12","f13","f14","f15","f16","f17","f18","f19","f20",
20166 "f21","f22","f23","f24","f25","f26","f27","f28","f29","f30","f31",
20167 "", "pc","ps","cr","lr","ctr","xer"]
20169 -data-list-register-names 1 2 3
20170 ^done,register-names=["r1","r2","r3"]
20174 @subheading The @code{-data-list-register-values} Command
20175 @findex -data-list-register-values
20177 @subsubheading Synopsis
20180 -data-list-register-values @var{fmt} [ ( @var{regno} )*]
20183 Display the registers' contents. @var{fmt} is the format according to
20184 which the registers' contents are to be returned, followed by an optional
20185 list of numbers specifying the registers to display. A missing list of
20186 numbers indicates that the contents of all the registers must be returned.
20188 Allowed formats for @var{fmt} are:
20205 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20207 The corresponding @value{GDBN} commands are @samp{info reg}, @samp{info
20208 all-reg}, and (in @code{gdbtk}) @samp{gdb_fetch_registers}.
20210 @subsubheading Example
20212 For a PPC MBX board (note: line breaks are for readability only, they
20213 don't appear in the actual output):
20217 -data-list-register-values r 64 65
20218 ^done,register-values=[@{number="64",value="0xfe00a300"@},
20219 @{number="65",value="0x00029002"@}]
20221 -data-list-register-values x
20222 ^done,register-values=[@{number="0",value="0xfe0043c8"@},
20223 @{number="1",value="0x3fff88"@},@{number="2",value="0xfffffffe"@},
20224 @{number="3",value="0x0"@},@{number="4",value="0xa"@},
20225 @{number="5",value="0x3fff68"@},@{number="6",value="0x3fff58"@},
20226 @{number="7",value="0xfe011e98"@},@{number="8",value="0x2"@},
20227 @{number="9",value="0xfa202820"@},@{number="10",value="0xfa202808"@},
20228 @{number="11",value="0x1"@},@{number="12",value="0x0"@},
20229 @{number="13",value="0x4544"@},@{number="14",value="0xffdfffff"@},
20230 @{number="15",value="0xffffffff"@},@{number="16",value="0xfffffeff"@},
20231 @{number="17",value="0xefffffed"@},@{number="18",value="0xfffffffe"@},
20232 @{number="19",value="0xffffffff"@},@{number="20",value="0xffffffff"@},
20233 @{number="21",value="0xffffffff"@},@{number="22",value="0xfffffff7"@},
20234 @{number="23",value="0xffffffff"@},@{number="24",value="0xffffffff"@},
20235 @{number="25",value="0xffffffff"@},@{number="26",value="0xfffffffb"@},
20236 @{number="27",value="0xffffffff"@},@{number="28",value="0xf7bfffff"@},
20237 @{number="29",value="0x0"@},@{number="30",value="0xfe010000"@},
20238 @{number="31",value="0x0"@},@{number="32",value="0x0"@},
20239 @{number="33",value="0x0"@},@{number="34",value="0x0"@},
20240 @{number="35",value="0x0"@},@{number="36",value="0x0"@},
20241 @{number="37",value="0x0"@},@{number="38",value="0x0"@},
20242 @{number="39",value="0x0"@},@{number="40",value="0x0"@},
20243 @{number="41",value="0x0"@},@{number="42",value="0x0"@},
20244 @{number="43",value="0x0"@},@{number="44",value="0x0"@},
20245 @{number="45",value="0x0"@},@{number="46",value="0x0"@},
20246 @{number="47",value="0x0"@},@{number="48",value="0x0"@},
20247 @{number="49",value="0x0"@},@{number="50",value="0x0"@},
20248 @{number="51",value="0x0"@},@{number="52",value="0x0"@},
20249 @{number="53",value="0x0"@},@{number="54",value="0x0"@},
20250 @{number="55",value="0x0"@},@{number="56",value="0x0"@},
20251 @{number="57",value="0x0"@},@{number="58",value="0x0"@},
20252 @{number="59",value="0x0"@},@{number="60",value="0x0"@},
20253 @{number="61",value="0x0"@},@{number="62",value="0x0"@},
20254 @{number="63",value="0x0"@},@{number="64",value="0xfe00a300"@},
20255 @{number="65",value="0x29002"@},@{number="66",value="0x202f04b5"@},
20256 @{number="67",value="0xfe0043b0"@},@{number="68",value="0xfe00b3e4"@},
20257 @{number="69",value="0x20002b03"@}]
20262 @subheading The @code{-data-read-memory} Command
20263 @findex -data-read-memory
20265 @subsubheading Synopsis
20268 -data-read-memory [ -o @var{byte-offset} ]
20269 @var{address} @var{word-format} @var{word-size}
20270 @var{nr-rows} @var{nr-cols} [ @var{aschar} ]
20277 @item @var{address}
20278 An expression specifying the address of the first memory word to be
20279 read. Complex expressions containing embedded white space should be
20280 quoted using the C convention.
20282 @item @var{word-format}
20283 The format to be used to print the memory words. The notation is the
20284 same as for @value{GDBN}'s @code{print} command (@pxref{Output Formats,
20287 @item @var{word-size}
20288 The size of each memory word in bytes.
20290 @item @var{nr-rows}
20291 The number of rows in the output table.
20293 @item @var{nr-cols}
20294 The number of columns in the output table.
20297 If present, indicates that each row should include an @sc{ascii} dump. The
20298 value of @var{aschar} is used as a padding character when a byte is not a
20299 member of the printable @sc{ascii} character set (printable @sc{ascii}
20300 characters are those whose code is between 32 and 126, inclusively).
20302 @item @var{byte-offset}
20303 An offset to add to the @var{address} before fetching memory.
20306 This command displays memory contents as a table of @var{nr-rows} by
20307 @var{nr-cols} words, each word being @var{word-size} bytes. In total,
20308 @code{@var{nr-rows} * @var{nr-cols} * @var{word-size}} bytes are read
20309 (returned as @samp{total-bytes}). Should less than the requested number
20310 of bytes be returned by the target, the missing words are identified
20311 using @samp{N/A}. The number of bytes read from the target is returned
20312 in @samp{nr-bytes} and the starting address used to read memory in
20315 The address of the next/previous row or page is available in
20316 @samp{next-row} and @samp{prev-row}, @samp{next-page} and
20319 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20321 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{x}. @code{gdbtk} has
20322 @samp{gdb_get_mem} memory read command.
20324 @subsubheading Example
20326 Read six bytes of memory starting at @code{bytes+6} but then offset by
20327 @code{-6} bytes. Format as three rows of two columns. One byte per
20328 word. Display each word in hex.
20332 9-data-read-memory -o -6 -- bytes+6 x 1 3 2
20333 9^done,addr="0x00001390",nr-bytes="6",total-bytes="6",
20334 next-row="0x00001396",prev-row="0x0000138e",next-page="0x00001396",
20335 prev-page="0x0000138a",memory=[
20336 @{addr="0x00001390",data=["0x00","0x01"]@},
20337 @{addr="0x00001392",data=["0x02","0x03"]@},
20338 @{addr="0x00001394",data=["0x04","0x05"]@}]
20342 Read two bytes of memory starting at address @code{shorts + 64} and
20343 display as a single word formatted in decimal.
20347 5-data-read-memory shorts+64 d 2 1 1
20348 5^done,addr="0x00001510",nr-bytes="2",total-bytes="2",
20349 next-row="0x00001512",prev-row="0x0000150e",
20350 next-page="0x00001512",prev-page="0x0000150e",memory=[
20351 @{addr="0x00001510",data=["128"]@}]
20355 Read thirty two bytes of memory starting at @code{bytes+16} and format
20356 as eight rows of four columns. Include a string encoding with @samp{x}
20357 used as the non-printable character.
20361 4-data-read-memory bytes+16 x 1 8 4 x
20362 4^done,addr="0x000013a0",nr-bytes="32",total-bytes="32",
20363 next-row="0x000013c0",prev-row="0x0000139c",
20364 next-page="0x000013c0",prev-page="0x00001380",memory=[
20365 @{addr="0x000013a0",data=["0x10","0x11","0x12","0x13"],ascii="xxxx"@},
20366 @{addr="0x000013a4",data=["0x14","0x15","0x16","0x17"],ascii="xxxx"@},
20367 @{addr="0x000013a8",data=["0x18","0x19","0x1a","0x1b"],ascii="xxxx"@},
20368 @{addr="0x000013ac",data=["0x1c","0x1d","0x1e","0x1f"],ascii="xxxx"@},
20369 @{addr="0x000013b0",data=["0x20","0x21","0x22","0x23"],ascii=" !\"#"@},
20370 @{addr="0x000013b4",data=["0x24","0x25","0x26","0x27"],ascii="$%&'"@},
20371 @{addr="0x000013b8",data=["0x28","0x29","0x2a","0x2b"],ascii="()*+"@},
20372 @{addr="0x000013bc",data=["0x2c","0x2d","0x2e","0x2f"],ascii=",-./"@}]
20376 @c %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SECTION %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
20377 @node GDB/MI Tracepoint Commands
20378 @section @sc{gdb/mi} Tracepoint Commands
20380 The tracepoint commands are not yet implemented.
20382 @c @subheading -trace-actions
20384 @c @subheading -trace-delete
20386 @c @subheading -trace-disable
20388 @c @subheading -trace-dump
20390 @c @subheading -trace-enable
20392 @c @subheading -trace-exists
20394 @c @subheading -trace-find
20396 @c @subheading -trace-frame-number
20398 @c @subheading -trace-info
20400 @c @subheading -trace-insert
20402 @c @subheading -trace-list
20404 @c @subheading -trace-pass-count
20406 @c @subheading -trace-save
20408 @c @subheading -trace-start
20410 @c @subheading -trace-stop
20413 @c %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SECTION %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
20414 @node GDB/MI Symbol Query
20415 @section @sc{gdb/mi} Symbol Query Commands
20418 @subheading The @code{-symbol-info-address} Command
20419 @findex -symbol-info-address
20421 @subsubheading Synopsis
20424 -symbol-info-address @var{symbol}
20427 Describe where @var{symbol} is stored.
20429 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20431 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{info address}.
20433 @subsubheading Example
20437 @subheading The @code{-symbol-info-file} Command
20438 @findex -symbol-info-file
20440 @subsubheading Synopsis
20446 Show the file for the symbol.
20448 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20450 There's no equivalent @value{GDBN} command. @code{gdbtk} has
20451 @samp{gdb_find_file}.
20453 @subsubheading Example
20457 @subheading The @code{-symbol-info-function} Command
20458 @findex -symbol-info-function
20460 @subsubheading Synopsis
20463 -symbol-info-function
20466 Show which function the symbol lives in.
20468 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20470 @samp{gdb_get_function} in @code{gdbtk}.
20472 @subsubheading Example
20476 @subheading The @code{-symbol-info-line} Command
20477 @findex -symbol-info-line
20479 @subsubheading Synopsis
20485 Show the core addresses of the code for a source line.
20487 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20489 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{info line}.
20490 @code{gdbtk} has the @samp{gdb_get_line} and @samp{gdb_get_file} commands.
20492 @subsubheading Example
20496 @subheading The @code{-symbol-info-symbol} Command
20497 @findex -symbol-info-symbol
20499 @subsubheading Synopsis
20502 -symbol-info-symbol @var{addr}
20505 Describe what symbol is at location @var{addr}.
20507 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20509 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{info symbol}.
20511 @subsubheading Example
20515 @subheading The @code{-symbol-list-functions} Command
20516 @findex -symbol-list-functions
20518 @subsubheading Synopsis
20521 -symbol-list-functions
20524 List the functions in the executable.
20526 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20528 @samp{info functions} in @value{GDBN}, @samp{gdb_listfunc} and
20529 @samp{gdb_search} in @code{gdbtk}.
20531 @subsubheading Example
20535 @subheading The @code{-symbol-list-lines} Command
20536 @findex -symbol-list-lines
20538 @subsubheading Synopsis
20541 -symbol-list-lines @var{filename}
20544 Print the list of lines that contain code and their associated program
20545 addresses for the given source filename. The entries are sorted in
20546 ascending PC order.
20548 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20550 There is no corresponding @value{GDBN} command.
20552 @subsubheading Example
20555 -symbol-list-lines basics.c
20556 ^done,lines=[@{pc="0x08048554",line="7"@},@{pc="0x0804855a",line="8"@}]
20561 @subheading The @code{-symbol-list-types} Command
20562 @findex -symbol-list-types
20564 @subsubheading Synopsis
20570 List all the type names.
20572 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20574 The corresponding commands are @samp{info types} in @value{GDBN},
20575 @samp{gdb_search} in @code{gdbtk}.
20577 @subsubheading Example
20581 @subheading The @code{-symbol-list-variables} Command
20582 @findex -symbol-list-variables
20584 @subsubheading Synopsis
20587 -symbol-list-variables
20590 List all the global and static variable names.
20592 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20594 @samp{info variables} in @value{GDBN}, @samp{gdb_search} in @code{gdbtk}.
20596 @subsubheading Example
20600 @subheading The @code{-symbol-locate} Command
20601 @findex -symbol-locate
20603 @subsubheading Synopsis
20609 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20611 @samp{gdb_loc} in @code{gdbtk}.
20613 @subsubheading Example
20617 @subheading The @code{-symbol-type} Command
20618 @findex -symbol-type
20620 @subsubheading Synopsis
20623 -symbol-type @var{variable}
20626 Show type of @var{variable}.
20628 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20630 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{ptype}, @code{gdbtk} has
20631 @samp{gdb_obj_variable}.
20633 @subsubheading Example
20637 @c %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SECTION %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
20638 @node GDB/MI File Commands
20639 @section @sc{gdb/mi} File Commands
20641 This section describes the GDB/MI commands to specify executable file names
20642 and to read in and obtain symbol table information.
20644 @subheading The @code{-file-exec-and-symbols} Command
20645 @findex -file-exec-and-symbols
20647 @subsubheading Synopsis
20650 -file-exec-and-symbols @var{file}
20653 Specify the executable file to be debugged. This file is the one from
20654 which the symbol table is also read. If no file is specified, the
20655 command clears the executable and symbol information. If breakpoints
20656 are set when using this command with no arguments, @value{GDBN} will produce
20657 error messages. Otherwise, no output is produced, except a completion
20660 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20662 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{file}.
20664 @subsubheading Example
20668 -file-exec-and-symbols /kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/TRUNK/mbx/hello.mbx
20674 @subheading The @code{-file-exec-file} Command
20675 @findex -file-exec-file
20677 @subsubheading Synopsis
20680 -file-exec-file @var{file}
20683 Specify the executable file to be debugged. Unlike
20684 @samp{-file-exec-and-symbols}, the symbol table is @emph{not} read
20685 from this file. If used without argument, @value{GDBN} clears the information
20686 about the executable file. No output is produced, except a completion
20689 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20691 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{exec-file}.
20693 @subsubheading Example
20697 -file-exec-file /kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/TRUNK/mbx/hello.mbx
20703 @subheading The @code{-file-list-exec-sections} Command
20704 @findex -file-list-exec-sections
20706 @subsubheading Synopsis
20709 -file-list-exec-sections
20712 List the sections of the current executable file.
20714 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20716 The @value{GDBN} command @samp{info file} shows, among the rest, the same
20717 information as this command. @code{gdbtk} has a corresponding command
20718 @samp{gdb_load_info}.
20720 @subsubheading Example
20724 @subheading The @code{-file-list-exec-source-file} Command
20725 @findex -file-list-exec-source-file
20727 @subsubheading Synopsis
20730 -file-list-exec-source-file
20733 List the line number, the current source file, and the absolute path
20734 to the current source file for the current executable.
20736 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20738 The @value{GDBN} equivalent is @samp{info source}
20740 @subsubheading Example
20744 123-file-list-exec-source-file
20745 123^done,line="1",file="foo.c",fullname="/home/bar/foo.c"
20750 @subheading The @code{-file-list-exec-source-files} Command
20751 @findex -file-list-exec-source-files
20753 @subsubheading Synopsis
20756 -file-list-exec-source-files
20759 List the source files for the current executable.
20761 It will always output the filename, but only when @value{GDBN} can find
20762 the absolute file name of a source file, will it output the fullname.
20764 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20766 The @value{GDBN} equivalent is @samp{info sources}.
20767 @code{gdbtk} has an analogous command @samp{gdb_listfiles}.
20769 @subsubheading Example
20772 -file-list-exec-source-files
20774 @{file=foo.c,fullname=/home/foo.c@},
20775 @{file=/home/bar.c,fullname=/home/bar.c@},
20776 @{file=gdb_could_not_find_fullpath.c@}]
20780 @subheading The @code{-file-list-shared-libraries} Command
20781 @findex -file-list-shared-libraries
20783 @subsubheading Synopsis
20786 -file-list-shared-libraries
20789 List the shared libraries in the program.
20791 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20793 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{info shared}.
20795 @subsubheading Example
20799 @subheading The @code{-file-list-symbol-files} Command
20800 @findex -file-list-symbol-files
20802 @subsubheading Synopsis
20805 -file-list-symbol-files
20810 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20812 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{info file} (part of it).
20814 @subsubheading Example
20818 @subheading The @code{-file-symbol-file} Command
20819 @findex -file-symbol-file
20821 @subsubheading Synopsis
20824 -file-symbol-file @var{file}
20827 Read symbol table info from the specified @var{file} argument. When
20828 used without arguments, clears @value{GDBN}'s symbol table info. No output is
20829 produced, except for a completion notification.
20831 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20833 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{symbol-file}.
20835 @subsubheading Example
20839 -file-symbol-file /kwikemart/marge/ezannoni/TRUNK/mbx/hello.mbx
20845 @c %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SECTION %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
20846 @node GDB/MI Memory Overlay Commands
20847 @section @sc{gdb/mi} Memory Overlay Commands
20849 The memory overlay commands are not implemented.
20851 @c @subheading -overlay-auto
20853 @c @subheading -overlay-list-mapping-state
20855 @c @subheading -overlay-list-overlays
20857 @c @subheading -overlay-map
20859 @c @subheading -overlay-off
20861 @c @subheading -overlay-on
20863 @c @subheading -overlay-unmap
20865 @c %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SECTION %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
20866 @node GDB/MI Signal Handling Commands
20867 @section @sc{gdb/mi} Signal Handling Commands
20869 Signal handling commands are not implemented.
20871 @c @subheading -signal-handle
20873 @c @subheading -signal-list-handle-actions
20875 @c @subheading -signal-list-signal-types
20879 @c %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SECTION %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
20880 @node GDB/MI Target Manipulation
20881 @section @sc{gdb/mi} Target Manipulation Commands
20884 @subheading The @code{-target-attach} Command
20885 @findex -target-attach
20887 @subsubheading Synopsis
20890 -target-attach @var{pid} | @var{file}
20893 Attach to a process @var{pid} or a file @var{file} outside of @value{GDBN}.
20895 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20897 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{attach}.
20899 @subsubheading Example
20903 @subheading The @code{-target-compare-sections} Command
20904 @findex -target-compare-sections
20906 @subsubheading Synopsis
20909 -target-compare-sections [ @var{section} ]
20912 Compare data of section @var{section} on target to the exec file.
20913 Without the argument, all sections are compared.
20915 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20917 The @value{GDBN} equivalent is @samp{compare-sections}.
20919 @subsubheading Example
20923 @subheading The @code{-target-detach} Command
20924 @findex -target-detach
20926 @subsubheading Synopsis
20932 Detach from the remote target which normally resumes its execution.
20935 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20937 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{detach}.
20939 @subsubheading Example
20949 @subheading The @code{-target-disconnect} Command
20950 @findex -target-disconnect
20952 @subsubheading Synopsis
20958 Disconnect from the remote target. There's no output and the target is
20959 generally not resumed.
20961 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
20963 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{disconnect}.
20965 @subsubheading Example
20975 @subheading The @code{-target-download} Command
20976 @findex -target-download
20978 @subsubheading Synopsis
20984 Loads the executable onto the remote target.
20985 It prints out an update message every half second, which includes the fields:
20989 The name of the section.
20991 The size of what has been sent so far for that section.
20993 The size of the section.
20995 The total size of what was sent so far (the current and the previous sections).
20997 The size of the overall executable to download.
21001 Each message is sent as status record (@pxref{GDB/MI Output Syntax, ,
21002 @sc{gdb/mi} Output Syntax}).
21004 In addition, it prints the name and size of the sections, as they are
21005 downloaded. These messages include the following fields:
21009 The name of the section.
21011 The size of the section.
21013 The size of the overall executable to download.
21017 At the end, a summary is printed.
21019 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
21021 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{load}.
21023 @subsubheading Example
21025 Note: each status message appears on a single line. Here the messages
21026 have been broken down so that they can fit onto a page.
21031 +download,@{section=".text",section-size="6668",total-size="9880"@}
21032 +download,@{section=".text",section-sent="512",section-size="6668",
21033 total-sent="512",total-size="9880"@}
21034 +download,@{section=".text",section-sent="1024",section-size="6668",
21035 total-sent="1024",total-size="9880"@}
21036 +download,@{section=".text",section-sent="1536",section-size="6668",
21037 total-sent="1536",total-size="9880"@}
21038 +download,@{section=".text",section-sent="2048",section-size="6668",
21039 total-sent="2048",total-size="9880"@}
21040 +download,@{section=".text",section-sent="2560",section-size="6668",
21041 total-sent="2560",total-size="9880"@}
21042 +download,@{section=".text",section-sent="3072",section-size="6668",
21043 total-sent="3072",total-size="9880"@}
21044 +download,@{section=".text",section-sent="3584",section-size="6668",
21045 total-sent="3584",total-size="9880"@}
21046 +download,@{section=".text",section-sent="4096",section-size="6668",
21047 total-sent="4096",total-size="9880"@}
21048 +download,@{section=".text",section-sent="4608",section-size="6668",
21049 total-sent="4608",total-size="9880"@}
21050 +download,@{section=".text",section-sent="5120",section-size="6668",
21051 total-sent="5120",total-size="9880"@}
21052 +download,@{section=".text",section-sent="5632",section-size="6668",
21053 total-sent="5632",total-size="9880"@}
21054 +download,@{section=".text",section-sent="6144",section-size="6668",
21055 total-sent="6144",total-size="9880"@}
21056 +download,@{section=".text",section-sent="6656",section-size="6668",
21057 total-sent="6656",total-size="9880"@}
21058 +download,@{section=".init",section-size="28",total-size="9880"@}
21059 +download,@{section=".fini",section-size="28",total-size="9880"@}
21060 +download,@{section=".data",section-size="3156",total-size="9880"@}
21061 +download,@{section=".data",section-sent="512",section-size="3156",
21062 total-sent="7236",total-size="9880"@}
21063 +download,@{section=".data",section-sent="1024",section-size="3156",
21064 total-sent="7748",total-size="9880"@}
21065 +download,@{section=".data",section-sent="1536",section-size="3156",
21066 total-sent="8260",total-size="9880"@}
21067 +download,@{section=".data",section-sent="2048",section-size="3156",
21068 total-sent="8772",total-size="9880"@}
21069 +download,@{section=".data",section-sent="2560",section-size="3156",
21070 total-sent="9284",total-size="9880"@}
21071 +download,@{section=".data",section-sent="3072",section-size="3156",
21072 total-sent="9796",total-size="9880"@}
21073 ^done,address="0x10004",load-size="9880",transfer-rate="6586",
21079 @subheading The @code{-target-exec-status} Command
21080 @findex -target-exec-status
21082 @subsubheading Synopsis
21085 -target-exec-status
21088 Provide information on the state of the target (whether it is running or
21089 not, for instance).
21091 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
21093 There's no equivalent @value{GDBN} command.
21095 @subsubheading Example
21099 @subheading The @code{-target-list-available-targets} Command
21100 @findex -target-list-available-targets
21102 @subsubheading Synopsis
21105 -target-list-available-targets
21108 List the possible targets to connect to.
21110 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
21112 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{help target}.
21114 @subsubheading Example
21118 @subheading The @code{-target-list-current-targets} Command
21119 @findex -target-list-current-targets
21121 @subsubheading Synopsis
21124 -target-list-current-targets
21127 Describe the current target.
21129 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
21131 The corresponding information is printed by @samp{info file} (among
21134 @subsubheading Example
21138 @subheading The @code{-target-list-parameters} Command
21139 @findex -target-list-parameters
21141 @subsubheading Synopsis
21144 -target-list-parameters
21149 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
21153 @subsubheading Example
21157 @subheading The @code{-target-select} Command
21158 @findex -target-select
21160 @subsubheading Synopsis
21163 -target-select @var{type} @var{parameters @dots{}}
21166 Connect @value{GDBN} to the remote target. This command takes two args:
21170 The type of target, for instance @samp{async}, @samp{remote}, etc.
21171 @item @var{parameters}
21172 Device names, host names and the like. @xref{Target Commands, ,
21173 Commands for Managing Targets}, for more details.
21176 The output is a connection notification, followed by the address at
21177 which the target program is, in the following form:
21180 ^connected,addr="@var{address}",func="@var{function name}",
21181 args=[@var{arg list}]
21184 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
21186 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{target}.
21188 @subsubheading Example
21192 -target-select async /dev/ttya
21193 ^connected,addr="0xfe00a300",func="??",args=[]
21197 @c %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SECTION %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
21198 @node GDB/MI Miscellaneous Commands
21199 @section Miscellaneous @sc{gdb/mi} Commands
21201 @c @subheading -gdb-complete
21203 @subheading The @code{-gdb-exit} Command
21206 @subsubheading Synopsis
21212 Exit @value{GDBN} immediately.
21214 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
21216 Approximately corresponds to @samp{quit}.
21218 @subsubheading Example
21227 @subheading The @code{-exec-abort} Command
21228 @findex -exec-abort
21230 @subsubheading Synopsis
21236 Kill the inferior running program.
21238 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
21240 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{kill}.
21242 @subsubheading Example
21246 @subheading The @code{-gdb-set} Command
21249 @subsubheading Synopsis
21255 Set an internal @value{GDBN} variable.
21256 @c IS THIS A DOLLAR VARIABLE? OR SOMETHING LIKE ANNOTATE ?????
21258 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
21260 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{set}.
21262 @subsubheading Example
21272 @subheading The @code{-gdb-show} Command
21275 @subsubheading Synopsis
21281 Show the current value of a @value{GDBN} variable.
21283 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
21285 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{show}.
21287 @subsubheading Example
21296 @c @subheading -gdb-source
21299 @subheading The @code{-gdb-version} Command
21300 @findex -gdb-version
21302 @subsubheading Synopsis
21308 Show version information for @value{GDBN}. Used mostly in testing.
21310 @subsubheading @value{GDBN} Command
21312 The @value{GDBN} equivalent is @samp{show version}. @value{GDBN} by
21313 default shows this information when you start an interactive session.
21315 @subsubheading Example
21317 @c This example modifies the actual output from GDB to avoid overfull
21323 ~Copyright 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
21324 ~GDB is free software, covered by the GNU General Public License, and
21325 ~you are welcome to change it and/or distribute copies of it under
21326 ~ certain conditions.
21327 ~Type "show copying" to see the conditions.
21328 ~There is absolutely no warranty for GDB. Type "show warranty" for
21330 ~This GDB was configured as
21331 "--host=sparc-sun-solaris2.5.1 --target=ppc-eabi".
21336 @subheading The @code{-list-features} Command
21337 @findex -list-features
21339 Returns a list of particular features of the MI protocol that
21340 this version of gdb implements. A feature can be a command,
21341 or a new field in an output of some command, or even an
21342 important bugfix. While a frontend can sometimes detect presence
21343 of a feature at runtime, it is easier to perform detection at debugger
21346 The command returns a list of strings, with each string naming an
21347 available feature. Each returned string is just a name, it does not
21348 have any internal structure. The list of possible feature names
21354 (gdb) -list-features
21355 ^done,result=["feature1","feature2"]
21358 The current list of features is:
21362 @samp{frozen-varobjs}---indicates presence of the
21363 @code{-var-set-frozen} command, as well as possible presense of the
21364 @code{frozen} field in the output of @code{-varobj-create}.
21367 @subheading The @code{-interpreter-exec} Command
21368 @findex -interpreter-exec
21370 @subheading Synopsis
21373 -interpreter-exec @var{interpreter} @var{command}
21375 @anchor{-interpreter-exec}
21377 Execute the specified @var{command} in the given @var{interpreter}.
21379 @subheading @value{GDBN} Command
21381 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{interpreter-exec}.
21383 @subheading Example
21387 -interpreter-exec console "break main"
21388 &"During symbol reading, couldn't parse type; debugger out of date?.\n"
21389 &"During symbol reading, bad structure-type format.\n"
21390 ~"Breakpoint 1 at 0x8074fc6: file ../../src/gdb/main.c, line 743.\n"
21395 @subheading The @code{-inferior-tty-set} Command
21396 @findex -inferior-tty-set
21398 @subheading Synopsis
21401 -inferior-tty-set /dev/pts/1
21404 Set terminal for future runs of the program being debugged.
21406 @subheading @value{GDBN} Command
21408 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{set inferior-tty} /dev/pts/1.
21410 @subheading Example
21414 -inferior-tty-set /dev/pts/1
21419 @subheading The @code{-inferior-tty-show} Command
21420 @findex -inferior-tty-show
21422 @subheading Synopsis
21428 Show terminal for future runs of program being debugged.
21430 @subheading @value{GDBN} Command
21432 The corresponding @value{GDBN} command is @samp{show inferior-tty}.
21434 @subheading Example
21438 -inferior-tty-set /dev/pts/1
21442 ^done,inferior_tty_terminal="/dev/pts/1"
21446 @subheading The @code{-enable-timings} Command
21447 @findex -enable-timings
21449 @subheading Synopsis
21452 -enable-timings [yes | no]
21455 Toggle the printing of the wallclock, user and system times for an MI
21456 command as a field in its output. This command is to help frontend
21457 developers optimize the performance of their code. No argument is
21458 equivalent to @samp{yes}.
21460 @subheading @value{GDBN} Command
21464 @subheading Example
21472 ^done,bkpt=@{number="1",type="breakpoint",disp="keep",enabled="y",
21473 addr="0x080484ed",func="main",file="myprog.c",
21474 fullname="/home/nickrob/myprog.c",line="73",times="0"@},
21475 time=@{wallclock="0.05185",user="0.00800",system="0.00000"@}
21483 *stopped,reason="breakpoint-hit",bkptno="1",thread-id="0",
21484 frame=@{addr="0x080484ed",func="main",args=[@{name="argc",value="1"@},
21485 @{name="argv",value="0xbfb60364"@}],file="myprog.c",
21486 fullname="/home/nickrob/myprog.c",line="73"@}
21491 @chapter @value{GDBN} Annotations
21493 This chapter describes annotations in @value{GDBN}. Annotations were
21494 designed to interface @value{GDBN} to graphical user interfaces or other
21495 similar programs which want to interact with @value{GDBN} at a
21496 relatively high level.
21498 The annotation mechanism has largely been superseded by @sc{gdb/mi}
21502 This is Edition @value{EDITION}, @value{DATE}.
21506 * Annotations Overview:: What annotations are; the general syntax.
21507 * Server Prefix:: Issuing a command without affecting user state.
21508 * Prompting:: Annotations marking @value{GDBN}'s need for input.
21509 * Errors:: Annotations for error messages.
21510 * Invalidation:: Some annotations describe things now invalid.
21511 * Annotations for Running::
21512 Whether the program is running, how it stopped, etc.
21513 * Source Annotations:: Annotations describing source code.
21516 @node Annotations Overview
21517 @section What is an Annotation?
21518 @cindex annotations
21520 Annotations start with a newline character, two @samp{control-z}
21521 characters, and the name of the annotation. If there is no additional
21522 information associated with this annotation, the name of the annotation
21523 is followed immediately by a newline. If there is additional
21524 information, the name of the annotation is followed by a space, the
21525 additional information, and a newline. The additional information
21526 cannot contain newline characters.
21528 Any output not beginning with a newline and two @samp{control-z}
21529 characters denotes literal output from @value{GDBN}. Currently there is
21530 no need for @value{GDBN} to output a newline followed by two
21531 @samp{control-z} characters, but if there was such a need, the
21532 annotations could be extended with an @samp{escape} annotation which
21533 means those three characters as output.
21535 The annotation @var{level}, which is specified using the
21536 @option{--annotate} command line option (@pxref{Mode Options}), controls
21537 how much information @value{GDBN} prints together with its prompt,
21538 values of expressions, source lines, and other types of output. Level 0
21539 is for no annotations, level 1 is for use when @value{GDBN} is run as a
21540 subprocess of @sc{gnu} Emacs, level 3 is the maximum annotation suitable
21541 for programs that control @value{GDBN}, and level 2 annotations have
21542 been made obsolete (@pxref{Limitations, , Limitations of the Annotation
21543 Interface, annotate, GDB's Obsolete Annotations}).
21546 @kindex set annotate
21547 @item set annotate @var{level}
21548 The @value{GDBN} command @code{set annotate} sets the level of
21549 annotations to the specified @var{level}.
21551 @item show annotate
21552 @kindex show annotate
21553 Show the current annotation level.
21556 This chapter describes level 3 annotations.
21558 A simple example of starting up @value{GDBN} with annotations is:
21561 $ @kbd{gdb --annotate=3}
21563 Copyright 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
21564 GDB is free software, covered by the GNU General Public License,
21565 and you are welcome to change it and/or distribute copies of it
21566 under certain conditions.
21567 Type "show copying" to see the conditions.
21568 There is absolutely no warranty for GDB. Type "show warranty"
21570 This GDB was configured as "i386-pc-linux-gnu"
21581 Here @samp{quit} is input to @value{GDBN}; the rest is output from
21582 @value{GDBN}. The three lines beginning @samp{^Z^Z} (where @samp{^Z}
21583 denotes a @samp{control-z} character) are annotations; the rest is
21584 output from @value{GDBN}.
21586 @node Server Prefix
21587 @section The Server Prefix
21588 @cindex server prefix
21590 If you prefix a command with @samp{server } then it will not affect
21591 the command history, nor will it affect @value{GDBN}'s notion of which
21592 command to repeat if @key{RET} is pressed on a line by itself. This
21593 means that commands can be run behind a user's back by a front-end in
21594 a transparent manner.
21596 The server prefix does not affect the recording of values into the value
21597 history; to print a value without recording it into the value history,
21598 use the @code{output} command instead of the @code{print} command.
21601 @section Annotation for @value{GDBN} Input
21603 @cindex annotations for prompts
21604 When @value{GDBN} prompts for input, it annotates this fact so it is possible
21605 to know when to send output, when the output from a given command is
21608 Different kinds of input each have a different @dfn{input type}. Each
21609 input type has three annotations: a @code{pre-} annotation, which
21610 denotes the beginning of any prompt which is being output, a plain
21611 annotation, which denotes the end of the prompt, and then a @code{post-}
21612 annotation which denotes the end of any echo which may (or may not) be
21613 associated with the input. For example, the @code{prompt} input type
21614 features the following annotations:
21622 The input types are
21625 @findex pre-prompt annotation
21626 @findex prompt annotation
21627 @findex post-prompt annotation
21629 When @value{GDBN} is prompting for a command (the main @value{GDBN} prompt).
21631 @findex pre-commands annotation
21632 @findex commands annotation
21633 @findex post-commands annotation
21635 When @value{GDBN} prompts for a set of commands, like in the @code{commands}
21636 command. The annotations are repeated for each command which is input.
21638 @findex pre-overload-choice annotation
21639 @findex overload-choice annotation
21640 @findex post-overload-choice annotation
21641 @item overload-choice
21642 When @value{GDBN} wants the user to select between various overloaded functions.
21644 @findex pre-query annotation
21645 @findex query annotation
21646 @findex post-query annotation
21648 When @value{GDBN} wants the user to confirm a potentially dangerous operation.
21650 @findex pre-prompt-for-continue annotation
21651 @findex prompt-for-continue annotation
21652 @findex post-prompt-for-continue annotation
21653 @item prompt-for-continue
21654 When @value{GDBN} is asking the user to press return to continue. Note: Don't
21655 expect this to work well; instead use @code{set height 0} to disable
21656 prompting. This is because the counting of lines is buggy in the
21657 presence of annotations.
21662 @cindex annotations for errors, warnings and interrupts
21664 @findex quit annotation
21669 This annotation occurs right before @value{GDBN} responds to an interrupt.
21671 @findex error annotation
21676 This annotation occurs right before @value{GDBN} responds to an error.
21678 Quit and error annotations indicate that any annotations which @value{GDBN} was
21679 in the middle of may end abruptly. For example, if a
21680 @code{value-history-begin} annotation is followed by a @code{error}, one
21681 cannot expect to receive the matching @code{value-history-end}. One
21682 cannot expect not to receive it either, however; an error annotation
21683 does not necessarily mean that @value{GDBN} is immediately returning all the way
21686 @findex error-begin annotation
21687 A quit or error annotation may be preceded by
21693 Any output between that and the quit or error annotation is the error
21696 Warning messages are not yet annotated.
21697 @c If we want to change that, need to fix warning(), type_error(),
21698 @c range_error(), and possibly other places.
21701 @section Invalidation Notices
21703 @cindex annotations for invalidation messages
21704 The following annotations say that certain pieces of state may have
21708 @findex frames-invalid annotation
21709 @item ^Z^Zframes-invalid
21711 The frames (for example, output from the @code{backtrace} command) may
21714 @findex breakpoints-invalid annotation
21715 @item ^Z^Zbreakpoints-invalid
21717 The breakpoints may have changed. For example, the user just added or
21718 deleted a breakpoint.
21721 @node Annotations for Running
21722 @section Running the Program
21723 @cindex annotations for running programs
21725 @findex starting annotation
21726 @findex stopping annotation
21727 When the program starts executing due to a @value{GDBN} command such as
21728 @code{step} or @code{continue},
21734 is output. When the program stops,
21740 is output. Before the @code{stopped} annotation, a variety of
21741 annotations describe how the program stopped.
21744 @findex exited annotation
21745 @item ^Z^Zexited @var{exit-status}
21746 The program exited, and @var{exit-status} is the exit status (zero for
21747 successful exit, otherwise nonzero).
21749 @findex signalled annotation
21750 @findex signal-name annotation
21751 @findex signal-name-end annotation
21752 @findex signal-string annotation
21753 @findex signal-string-end annotation
21754 @item ^Z^Zsignalled
21755 The program exited with a signal. After the @code{^Z^Zsignalled}, the
21756 annotation continues:
21762 ^Z^Zsignal-name-end
21766 ^Z^Zsignal-string-end
21771 where @var{name} is the name of the signal, such as @code{SIGILL} or
21772 @code{SIGSEGV}, and @var{string} is the explanation of the signal, such
21773 as @code{Illegal Instruction} or @code{Segmentation fault}.
21774 @var{intro-text}, @var{middle-text}, and @var{end-text} are for the
21775 user's benefit and have no particular format.
21777 @findex signal annotation
21779 The syntax of this annotation is just like @code{signalled}, but @value{GDBN} is
21780 just saying that the program received the signal, not that it was
21781 terminated with it.
21783 @findex breakpoint annotation
21784 @item ^Z^Zbreakpoint @var{number}
21785 The program hit breakpoint number @var{number}.
21787 @findex watchpoint annotation
21788 @item ^Z^Zwatchpoint @var{number}
21789 The program hit watchpoint number @var{number}.
21792 @node Source Annotations
21793 @section Displaying Source
21794 @cindex annotations for source display
21796 @findex source annotation
21797 The following annotation is used instead of displaying source code:
21800 ^Z^Zsource @var{filename}:@var{line}:@var{character}:@var{middle}:@var{addr}
21803 where @var{filename} is an absolute file name indicating which source
21804 file, @var{line} is the line number within that file (where 1 is the
21805 first line in the file), @var{character} is the character position
21806 within the file (where 0 is the first character in the file) (for most
21807 debug formats this will necessarily point to the beginning of a line),
21808 @var{middle} is @samp{middle} if @var{addr} is in the middle of the
21809 line, or @samp{beg} if @var{addr} is at the beginning of the line, and
21810 @var{addr} is the address in the target program associated with the
21811 source which is being displayed. @var{addr} is in the form @samp{0x}
21812 followed by one or more lowercase hex digits (note that this does not
21813 depend on the language).
21816 @chapter Reporting Bugs in @value{GDBN}
21817 @cindex bugs in @value{GDBN}
21818 @cindex reporting bugs in @value{GDBN}
21820 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @value{GDBN} reliable.
21822 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it
21823 may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help
21824 the entire community by making the next version of @value{GDBN} work better. Bug
21825 reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @value{GDBN}.
21827 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
21828 information that enables us to fix the bug.
21831 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
21832 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
21836 @section Have You Found a Bug?
21837 @cindex bug criteria
21839 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
21842 @cindex fatal signal
21843 @cindex debugger crash
21844 @cindex crash of debugger
21846 If the debugger gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
21847 @value{GDBN} bug. Reliable debuggers never crash.
21849 @cindex error on valid input
21851 If @value{GDBN} produces an error message for valid input, that is a
21852 bug. (Note that if you're cross debugging, the problem may also be
21853 somewhere in the connection to the target.)
21855 @cindex invalid input
21857 If @value{GDBN} does not produce an error message for invalid input,
21858 that is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of
21859 ``invalid input'' might be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support
21860 for traditional practice''.
21863 If you are an experienced user of debugging tools, your suggestions
21864 for improvement of @value{GDBN} are welcome in any case.
21867 @node Bug Reporting
21868 @section How to Report Bugs
21869 @cindex bug reports
21870 @cindex @value{GDBN} bugs, reporting
21872 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products.
21873 If you obtained @value{GDBN} from a support organization, we recommend you
21874 contact that organization first.
21876 You can find contact information for many support companies and
21877 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
21879 @c should add a web page ref...
21881 In any event, we also recommend that you submit bug reports for
21882 @value{GDBN}. The preferred method is to submit them directly using
21883 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/gdb/bugs/, @value{GDBN}'s Bugs web
21884 page}. Alternatively, the @email{bug-gdb@@gnu.org, e-mail gateway} can
21887 @strong{Do not send bug reports to @samp{info-gdb}, or to
21888 @samp{help-gdb}, or to any newsgroups.} Most users of @value{GDBN} do
21889 not want to receive bug reports. Those that do have arranged to receive
21892 The mailing list @samp{bug-gdb} has a newsgroup @samp{gnu.gdb.bug} which
21893 serves as a repeater. The mailing list and the newsgroup carry exactly
21894 the same messages. Often people think of posting bug reports to the
21895 newsgroup instead of mailing them. This appears to work, but it has one
21896 problem which can be crucial: a newsgroup posting often lacks a mail
21897 path back to the sender. Thus, if we need to ask for more information,
21898 we may be unable to reach you. For this reason, it is better to send
21899 bug reports to the mailing list.
21901 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
21902 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
21903 fact or leave it out, state it!
21905 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
21906 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
21907 assume that the name of the variable you use in an example does not matter.
21908 Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a
21909 stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location where that
21910 name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were different, the contents
21911 of that location would fool the debugger into doing the right thing despite
21912 the bug. Play it safe and give a specific, complete example. That is the
21913 easiest thing for you to do, and the most helpful.
21915 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the
21916 bug. It may be that the bug has been reported previously, but neither
21917 you nor we can know that unless your bug report is complete and
21920 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
21921 bell?'' Those bug reports are useless, and we urge everyone to
21922 @emph{refuse to respond to them} except to chide the sender to report
21925 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
21929 The version of @value{GDBN}. @value{GDBN} announces it if you start
21930 with no arguments; you can also print it at any time using @code{show
21933 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
21934 the bug in the current version of @value{GDBN}.
21937 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
21941 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @value{GDBN}---e.g.@:
21942 ``@value{GCC}--2.8.1''.
21945 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile the program you are
21946 debugging---e.g.@: ``@value{GCC}--2.8.1'', or ``HP92453-01 A.10.32.03 HP
21947 C Compiler''. For @value{NGCC}, you can say @kbd{@value{GCC} --version}
21948 to get this information; for other compilers, see the documentation for
21952 The command arguments you gave the compiler to compile your example and
21953 observe the bug. For example, did you use @samp{-O}? To guarantee
21954 you will not omit something important, list them all. A copy of the
21955 Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
21957 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
21958 and then we might not encounter the bug.
21961 A complete input script, and all necessary source files, that will
21965 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
21966 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
21968 Of course, if the bug is that @value{GDBN} gets a fatal signal, then we
21969 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
21970 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
21971 a chance to make a mistake.
21973 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
21974 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
21975 copy of @value{GDBN} is out of synch, or you have encountered a bug in
21976 the C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might
21977 crash and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when
21978 ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for
21979 us. If you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able
21980 to draw any conclusion from our observations.
21983 @cindex recording a session script
21984 To collect all this information, you can use a session recording program
21985 such as @command{script}, which is available on many Unix systems.
21986 Just run your @value{GDBN} session inside @command{script} and then
21987 include the @file{typescript} file with your bug report.
21989 Another way to record a @value{GDBN} session is to run @value{GDBN}
21990 inside Emacs and then save the entire buffer to a file.
21993 If you wish to suggest changes to the @value{GDBN} source, send us context
21994 diffs. If you even discuss something in the @value{GDBN} source, refer to
21995 it by context, not by line number.
21997 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
21998 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
22002 Here are some things that are not necessary:
22006 A description of the envelope of the bug.
22008 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
22009 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
22010 changes will not affect it.
22012 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
22013 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
22014 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
22015 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
22017 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
22018 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
22019 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
22020 less time, and so on.
22022 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
22023 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
22026 A patch for the bug.
22028 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
22029 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
22030 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
22031 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
22033 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @value{GDBN} it is very hard to
22034 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
22035 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able
22036 to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
22038 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
22039 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
22040 help us to understand.
22043 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
22045 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
22046 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
22049 @c The readline documentation is distributed with the readline code
22050 @c and consists of the two following files:
22052 @c inc-hist.texinfo
22053 @c Use -I with makeinfo to point to the appropriate directory,
22054 @c environment var TEXINPUTS with TeX.
22055 @include rluser.texi
22056 @include inc-hist.texinfo
22059 @node Formatting Documentation
22060 @appendix Formatting Documentation
22062 @cindex @value{GDBN} reference card
22063 @cindex reference card
22064 The @value{GDBN} 4 release includes an already-formatted reference card, ready
22065 for printing with PostScript or Ghostscript, in the @file{gdb}
22066 subdirectory of the main source directory@footnote{In
22067 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb/refcard.ps} of the version @value{GDBVN}
22068 release.}. If you can use PostScript or Ghostscript with your printer,
22069 you can print the reference card immediately with @file{refcard.ps}.
22071 The release also includes the source for the reference card. You
22072 can format it, using @TeX{}, by typing:
22078 The @value{GDBN} reference card is designed to print in @dfn{landscape}
22079 mode on US ``letter'' size paper;
22080 that is, on a sheet 11 inches wide by 8.5 inches
22081 high. You will need to specify this form of printing as an option to
22082 your @sc{dvi} output program.
22084 @cindex documentation
22086 All the documentation for @value{GDBN} comes as part of the machine-readable
22087 distribution. The documentation is written in Texinfo format, which is
22088 a documentation system that uses a single source file to produce both
22089 on-line information and a printed manual. You can use one of the Info
22090 formatting commands to create the on-line version of the documentation
22091 and @TeX{} (or @code{texi2roff}) to typeset the printed version.
22093 @value{GDBN} includes an already formatted copy of the on-line Info
22094 version of this manual in the @file{gdb} subdirectory. The main Info
22095 file is @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb/gdb.info}, and it refers to
22096 subordinate files matching @samp{gdb.info*} in the same directory. If
22097 necessary, you can print out these files, or read them with any editor;
22098 but they are easier to read using the @code{info} subsystem in @sc{gnu}
22099 Emacs or the standalone @code{info} program, available as part of the
22100 @sc{gnu} Texinfo distribution.
22102 If you want to format these Info files yourself, you need one of the
22103 Info formatting programs, such as @code{texinfo-format-buffer} or
22106 If you have @code{makeinfo} installed, and are in the top level
22107 @value{GDBN} source directory (@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}}, in the case of
22108 version @value{GDBVN}), you can make the Info file by typing:
22115 If you want to typeset and print copies of this manual, you need @TeX{},
22116 a program to print its @sc{dvi} output files, and @file{texinfo.tex}, the
22117 Texinfo definitions file.
22119 @TeX{} is a typesetting program; it does not print files directly, but
22120 produces output files called @sc{dvi} files. To print a typeset
22121 document, you need a program to print @sc{dvi} files. If your system
22122 has @TeX{} installed, chances are it has such a program. The precise
22123 command to use depends on your system; @kbd{lpr -d} is common; another
22124 (for PostScript devices) is @kbd{dvips}. The @sc{dvi} print command may
22125 require a file name without any extension or a @samp{.dvi} extension.
22127 @TeX{} also requires a macro definitions file called
22128 @file{texinfo.tex}. This file tells @TeX{} how to typeset a document
22129 written in Texinfo format. On its own, @TeX{} cannot either read or
22130 typeset a Texinfo file. @file{texinfo.tex} is distributed with GDB
22131 and is located in the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}/texinfo}
22134 If you have @TeX{} and a @sc{dvi} printer program installed, you can
22135 typeset and print this manual. First switch to the @file{gdb}
22136 subdirectory of the main source directory (for example, to
22137 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb}) and type:
22143 Then give @file{gdb.dvi} to your @sc{dvi} printing program.
22145 @node Installing GDB
22146 @appendix Installing @value{GDBN}
22147 @cindex installation
22150 * Requirements:: Requirements for building @value{GDBN}
22151 * Running Configure:: Invoking the @value{GDBN} @file{configure} script
22152 * Separate Objdir:: Compiling @value{GDBN} in another directory
22153 * Config Names:: Specifying names for hosts and targets
22154 * Configure Options:: Summary of options for configure
22158 @section Requirements for Building @value{GDBN}
22159 @cindex building @value{GDBN}, requirements for
22161 Building @value{GDBN} requires various tools and packages to be available.
22162 Other packages will be used only if they are found.
22164 @heading Tools/Packages Necessary for Building @value{GDBN}
22166 @item ISO C90 compiler
22167 @value{GDBN} is written in ISO C90. It should be buildable with any
22168 working C90 compiler, e.g.@: GCC.
22172 @heading Tools/Packages Optional for Building @value{GDBN}
22176 @value{GDBN} can use the Expat XML parsing library. This library may be
22177 included with your operating system distribution; if it is not, you
22178 can get the latest version from @url{http://expat.sourceforge.net}.
22179 The @file{configure} script will search for this library in several
22180 standard locations; if it is installed in an unusual path, you can
22181 use the @option{--with-libexpat-prefix} option to specify its location.
22183 Expat is used for remote protocol memory maps (@pxref{Memory Map Format})
22184 and for target descriptions (@pxref{Target Descriptions}).
22188 @node Running Configure
22189 @section Invoking the @value{GDBN} @file{configure} Script
22190 @cindex configuring @value{GDBN}
22191 @value{GDBN} comes with a @file{configure} script that automates the process
22192 of preparing @value{GDBN} for installation; you can then use @code{make} to
22193 build the @code{gdb} program.
22195 @c irrelevant in info file; it's as current as the code it lives with.
22196 @footnote{If you have a more recent version of @value{GDBN} than @value{GDBVN},
22197 look at the @file{README} file in the sources; we may have improved the
22198 installation procedures since publishing this manual.}
22201 The @value{GDBN} distribution includes all the source code you need for
22202 @value{GDBN} in a single directory, whose name is usually composed by
22203 appending the version number to @samp{gdb}.
22205 For example, the @value{GDBN} version @value{GDBVN} distribution is in the
22206 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} directory. That directory contains:
22209 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/configure @r{(and supporting files)}
22210 script for configuring @value{GDBN} and all its supporting libraries
22212 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb
22213 the source specific to @value{GDBN} itself
22215 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/bfd
22216 source for the Binary File Descriptor library
22218 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/include
22219 @sc{gnu} include files
22221 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/libiberty
22222 source for the @samp{-liberty} free software library
22224 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/opcodes
22225 source for the library of opcode tables and disassemblers
22227 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/readline
22228 source for the @sc{gnu} command-line interface
22230 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/glob
22231 source for the @sc{gnu} filename pattern-matching subroutine
22233 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/mmalloc
22234 source for the @sc{gnu} memory-mapped malloc package
22237 The simplest way to configure and build @value{GDBN} is to run @file{configure}
22238 from the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory, which in
22239 this example is the @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} directory.
22241 First switch to the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory
22242 if you are not already in it; then run @file{configure}. Pass the
22243 identifier for the platform on which @value{GDBN} will run as an
22249 cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}
22250 ./configure @var{host}
22255 where @var{host} is an identifier such as @samp{sun4} or
22256 @samp{decstation}, that identifies the platform where @value{GDBN} will run.
22257 (You can often leave off @var{host}; @file{configure} tries to guess the
22258 correct value by examining your system.)
22260 Running @samp{configure @var{host}} and then running @code{make} builds the
22261 @file{bfd}, @file{readline}, @file{mmalloc}, and @file{libiberty}
22262 libraries, then @code{gdb} itself. The configured source files, and the
22263 binaries, are left in the corresponding source directories.
22266 @file{configure} is a Bourne-shell (@code{/bin/sh}) script; if your
22267 system does not recognize this automatically when you run a different
22268 shell, you may need to run @code{sh} on it explicitly:
22271 sh configure @var{host}
22274 If you run @file{configure} from a directory that contains source
22275 directories for multiple libraries or programs, such as the
22276 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} source directory for version @value{GDBVN},
22278 creates configuration files for every directory level underneath (unless
22279 you tell it not to, with the @samp{--norecursion} option).
22281 You should run the @file{configure} script from the top directory in the
22282 source tree, the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} directory. If you run
22283 @file{configure} from one of the subdirectories, you will configure only
22284 that subdirectory. That is usually not what you want. In particular,
22285 if you run the first @file{configure} from the @file{gdb} subdirectory
22286 of the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} directory, you will omit the
22287 configuration of @file{bfd}, @file{readline}, and other sibling
22288 directories of the @file{gdb} subdirectory. This leads to build errors
22289 about missing include files such as @file{bfd/bfd.h}.
22291 You can install @code{@value{GDBP}} anywhere; it has no hardwired paths.
22292 However, you should make sure that the shell on your path (named by
22293 the @samp{SHELL} environment variable) is publicly readable. Remember
22294 that @value{GDBN} uses the shell to start your program---some systems refuse to
22295 let @value{GDBN} debug child processes whose programs are not readable.
22297 @node Separate Objdir
22298 @section Compiling @value{GDBN} in Another Directory
22300 If you want to run @value{GDBN} versions for several host or target machines,
22301 you need a different @code{gdb} compiled for each combination of
22302 host and target. @file{configure} is designed to make this easy by
22303 allowing you to generate each configuration in a separate subdirectory,
22304 rather than in the source directory. If your @code{make} program
22305 handles the @samp{VPATH} feature (@sc{gnu} @code{make} does), running
22306 @code{make} in each of these directories builds the @code{gdb}
22307 program specified there.
22309 To build @code{gdb} in a separate directory, run @file{configure}
22310 with the @samp{--srcdir} option to specify where to find the source.
22311 (You also need to specify a path to find @file{configure}
22312 itself from your working directory. If the path to @file{configure}
22313 would be the same as the argument to @samp{--srcdir}, you can leave out
22314 the @samp{--srcdir} option; it is assumed.)
22316 For example, with version @value{GDBVN}, you can build @value{GDBN} in a
22317 separate directory for a Sun 4 like this:
22321 cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}
22324 ../gdb-@value{GDBVN}/configure sun4
22329 When @file{configure} builds a configuration using a remote source
22330 directory, it creates a tree for the binaries with the same structure
22331 (and using the same names) as the tree under the source directory. In
22332 the example, you'd find the Sun 4 library @file{libiberty.a} in the
22333 directory @file{gdb-sun4/libiberty}, and @value{GDBN} itself in
22334 @file{gdb-sun4/gdb}.
22336 Make sure that your path to the @file{configure} script has just one
22337 instance of @file{gdb} in it. If your path to @file{configure} looks
22338 like @file{../gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb/configure}, you are configuring only
22339 one subdirectory of @value{GDBN}, not the whole package. This leads to
22340 build errors about missing include files such as @file{bfd/bfd.h}.
22342 One popular reason to build several @value{GDBN} configurations in separate
22343 directories is to configure @value{GDBN} for cross-compiling (where
22344 @value{GDBN} runs on one machine---the @dfn{host}---while debugging
22345 programs that run on another machine---the @dfn{target}).
22346 You specify a cross-debugging target by
22347 giving the @samp{--target=@var{target}} option to @file{configure}.
22349 When you run @code{make} to build a program or library, you must run
22350 it in a configured directory---whatever directory you were in when you
22351 called @file{configure} (or one of its subdirectories).
22353 The @code{Makefile} that @file{configure} generates in each source
22354 directory also runs recursively. If you type @code{make} in a source
22355 directory such as @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} (or in a separate configured
22356 directory configured with @samp{--srcdir=@var{dirname}/gdb-@value{GDBVN}}), you
22357 will build all the required libraries, and then build GDB.
22359 When you have multiple hosts or targets configured in separate
22360 directories, you can run @code{make} on them in parallel (for example,
22361 if they are NFS-mounted on each of the hosts); they will not interfere
22365 @section Specifying Names for Hosts and Targets
22367 The specifications used for hosts and targets in the @file{configure}
22368 script are based on a three-part naming scheme, but some short predefined
22369 aliases are also supported. The full naming scheme encodes three pieces
22370 of information in the following pattern:
22373 @var{architecture}-@var{vendor}-@var{os}
22376 For example, you can use the alias @code{sun4} as a @var{host} argument,
22377 or as the value for @var{target} in a @code{--target=@var{target}}
22378 option. The equivalent full name is @samp{sparc-sun-sunos4}.
22380 The @file{configure} script accompanying @value{GDBN} does not provide
22381 any query facility to list all supported host and target names or
22382 aliases. @file{configure} calls the Bourne shell script
22383 @code{config.sub} to map abbreviations to full names; you can read the
22384 script, if you wish, or you can use it to test your guesses on
22385 abbreviations---for example:
22388 % sh config.sub i386-linux
22390 % sh config.sub alpha-linux
22391 alpha-unknown-linux-gnu
22392 % sh config.sub hp9k700
22394 % sh config.sub sun4
22395 sparc-sun-sunos4.1.1
22396 % sh config.sub sun3
22397 m68k-sun-sunos4.1.1
22398 % sh config.sub i986v
22399 Invalid configuration `i986v': machine `i986v' not recognized
22403 @code{config.sub} is also distributed in the @value{GDBN} source
22404 directory (@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}}, for version @value{GDBVN}).
22406 @node Configure Options
22407 @section @file{configure} Options
22409 Here is a summary of the @file{configure} options and arguments that
22410 are most often useful for building @value{GDBN}. @file{configure} also has
22411 several other options not listed here. @inforef{What Configure
22412 Does,,configure.info}, for a full explanation of @file{configure}.
22415 configure @r{[}--help@r{]}
22416 @r{[}--prefix=@var{dir}@r{]}
22417 @r{[}--exec-prefix=@var{dir}@r{]}
22418 @r{[}--srcdir=@var{dirname}@r{]}
22419 @r{[}--norecursion@r{]} @r{[}--rm@r{]}
22420 @r{[}--target=@var{target}@r{]}
22425 You may introduce options with a single @samp{-} rather than
22426 @samp{--} if you prefer; but you may abbreviate option names if you use
22431 Display a quick summary of how to invoke @file{configure}.
22433 @item --prefix=@var{dir}
22434 Configure the source to install programs and files under directory
22437 @item --exec-prefix=@var{dir}
22438 Configure the source to install programs under directory
22441 @c avoid splitting the warning from the explanation:
22443 @item --srcdir=@var{dirname}
22444 @strong{Warning: using this option requires @sc{gnu} @code{make}, or another
22445 @code{make} that implements the @code{VPATH} feature.}@*
22446 Use this option to make configurations in directories separate from the
22447 @value{GDBN} source directories. Among other things, you can use this to
22448 build (or maintain) several configurations simultaneously, in separate
22449 directories. @file{configure} writes configuration-specific files in
22450 the current directory, but arranges for them to use the source in the
22451 directory @var{dirname}. @file{configure} creates directories under
22452 the working directory in parallel to the source directories below
22455 @item --norecursion
22456 Configure only the directory level where @file{configure} is executed; do not
22457 propagate configuration to subdirectories.
22459 @item --target=@var{target}
22460 Configure @value{GDBN} for cross-debugging programs running on the specified
22461 @var{target}. Without this option, @value{GDBN} is configured to debug
22462 programs that run on the same machine (@var{host}) as @value{GDBN} itself.
22464 There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available targets.
22466 @item @var{host} @dots{}
22467 Configure @value{GDBN} to run on the specified @var{host}.
22469 There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available hosts.
22472 There are many other options available as well, but they are generally
22473 needed for special purposes only.
22475 @node Maintenance Commands
22476 @appendix Maintenance Commands
22477 @cindex maintenance commands
22478 @cindex internal commands
22480 In addition to commands intended for @value{GDBN} users, @value{GDBN}
22481 includes a number of commands intended for @value{GDBN} developers,
22482 that are not documented elsewhere in this manual. These commands are
22483 provided here for reference. (For commands that turn on debugging
22484 messages, see @ref{Debugging Output}.)
22487 @kindex maint agent
22488 @item maint agent @var{expression}
22489 Translate the given @var{expression} into remote agent bytecodes.
22490 This command is useful for debugging the Agent Expression mechanism
22491 (@pxref{Agent Expressions}).
22493 @kindex maint info breakpoints
22494 @item @anchor{maint info breakpoints}maint info breakpoints
22495 Using the same format as @samp{info breakpoints}, display both the
22496 breakpoints you've set explicitly, and those @value{GDBN} is using for
22497 internal purposes. Internal breakpoints are shown with negative
22498 breakpoint numbers. The type column identifies what kind of breakpoint
22503 Normal, explicitly set breakpoint.
22506 Normal, explicitly set watchpoint.
22509 Internal breakpoint, used to handle correctly stepping through
22510 @code{longjmp} calls.
22512 @item longjmp resume
22513 Internal breakpoint at the target of a @code{longjmp}.
22516 Temporary internal breakpoint used by the @value{GDBN} @code{until} command.
22519 Temporary internal breakpoint used by the @value{GDBN} @code{finish} command.
22522 Shared library events.
22526 @kindex maint check-symtabs
22527 @item maint check-symtabs
22528 Check the consistency of psymtabs and symtabs.
22530 @kindex maint cplus first_component
22531 @item maint cplus first_component @var{name}
22532 Print the first C@t{++} class/namespace component of @var{name}.
22534 @kindex maint cplus namespace
22535 @item maint cplus namespace
22536 Print the list of possible C@t{++} namespaces.
22538 @kindex maint demangle
22539 @item maint demangle @var{name}
22540 Demangle a C@t{++} or Objective-C mangled @var{name}.
22542 @kindex maint deprecate
22543 @kindex maint undeprecate
22544 @cindex deprecated commands
22545 @item maint deprecate @var{command} @r{[}@var{replacement}@r{]}
22546 @itemx maint undeprecate @var{command}
22547 Deprecate or undeprecate the named @var{command}. Deprecated commands
22548 cause @value{GDBN} to issue a warning when you use them. The optional
22549 argument @var{replacement} says which newer command should be used in
22550 favor of the deprecated one; if it is given, @value{GDBN} will mention
22551 the replacement as part of the warning.
22553 @kindex maint dump-me
22554 @item maint dump-me
22555 @cindex @code{SIGQUIT} signal, dump core of @value{GDBN}
22556 Cause a fatal signal in the debugger and force it to dump its core.
22557 This is supported only on systems which support aborting a program
22558 with the @code{SIGQUIT} signal.
22560 @kindex maint internal-error
22561 @kindex maint internal-warning
22562 @item maint internal-error @r{[}@var{message-text}@r{]}
22563 @itemx maint internal-warning @r{[}@var{message-text}@r{]}
22564 Cause @value{GDBN} to call the internal function @code{internal_error}
22565 or @code{internal_warning} and hence behave as though an internal error
22566 or internal warning has been detected. In addition to reporting the
22567 internal problem, these functions give the user the opportunity to
22568 either quit @value{GDBN} or create a core file of the current
22569 @value{GDBN} session.
22571 These commands take an optional parameter @var{message-text} that is
22572 used as the text of the error or warning message.
22574 Here's an example of using @code{internal-error}:
22577 (@value{GDBP}) @kbd{maint internal-error testing, 1, 2}
22578 @dots{}/maint.c:121: internal-error: testing, 1, 2
22579 A problem internal to GDB has been detected. Further
22580 debugging may prove unreliable.
22581 Quit this debugging session? (y or n) @kbd{n}
22582 Create a core file? (y or n) @kbd{n}
22586 @kindex maint packet
22587 @item maint packet @var{text}
22588 If @value{GDBN} is talking to an inferior via the serial protocol,
22589 then this command sends the string @var{text} to the inferior, and
22590 displays the response packet. @value{GDBN} supplies the initial
22591 @samp{$} character, the terminating @samp{#} character, and the
22594 @kindex maint print architecture
22595 @item maint print architecture @r{[}@var{file}@r{]}
22596 Print the entire architecture configuration. The optional argument
22597 @var{file} names the file where the output goes.
22599 @kindex maint print dummy-frames
22600 @item maint print dummy-frames
22601 Prints the contents of @value{GDBN}'s internal dummy-frame stack.
22604 (@value{GDBP}) @kbd{b add}
22606 (@value{GDBP}) @kbd{print add(2,3)}
22607 Breakpoint 2, add (a=2, b=3) at @dots{}
22609 The program being debugged stopped while in a function called from GDB.
22611 (@value{GDBP}) @kbd{maint print dummy-frames}
22612 0x1a57c80: pc=0x01014068 fp=0x0200bddc sp=0x0200bdd6
22613 top=0x0200bdd4 id=@{stack=0x200bddc,code=0x101405c@}
22614 call_lo=0x01014000 call_hi=0x01014001
22618 Takes an optional file parameter.
22620 @kindex maint print registers
22621 @kindex maint print raw-registers
22622 @kindex maint print cooked-registers
22623 @kindex maint print register-groups
22624 @item maint print registers @r{[}@var{file}@r{]}
22625 @itemx maint print raw-registers @r{[}@var{file}@r{]}
22626 @itemx maint print cooked-registers @r{[}@var{file}@r{]}
22627 @itemx maint print register-groups @r{[}@var{file}@r{]}
22628 Print @value{GDBN}'s internal register data structures.
22630 The command @code{maint print raw-registers} includes the contents of
22631 the raw register cache; the command @code{maint print cooked-registers}
22632 includes the (cooked) value of all registers; and the command
22633 @code{maint print register-groups} includes the groups that each
22634 register is a member of. @xref{Registers,, Registers, gdbint,
22635 @value{GDBN} Internals}.
22637 These commands take an optional parameter, a file name to which to
22638 write the information.
22640 @kindex maint print reggroups
22641 @item maint print reggroups @r{[}@var{file}@r{]}
22642 Print @value{GDBN}'s internal register group data structures. The
22643 optional argument @var{file} tells to what file to write the
22646 The register groups info looks like this:
22649 (@value{GDBP}) @kbd{maint print reggroups}
22662 This command forces @value{GDBN} to flush its internal register cache.
22664 @kindex maint print objfiles
22665 @cindex info for known object files
22666 @item maint print objfiles
22667 Print a dump of all known object files. For each object file, this
22668 command prints its name, address in memory, and all of its psymtabs
22671 @kindex maint print statistics
22672 @cindex bcache statistics
22673 @item maint print statistics
22674 This command prints, for each object file in the program, various data
22675 about that object file followed by the byte cache (@dfn{bcache})
22676 statistics for the object file. The objfile data includes the number
22677 of minimal, partial, full, and stabs symbols, the number of types
22678 defined by the objfile, the number of as yet unexpanded psym tables,
22679 the number of line tables and string tables, and the amount of memory
22680 used by the various tables. The bcache statistics include the counts,
22681 sizes, and counts of duplicates of all and unique objects, max,
22682 average, and median entry size, total memory used and its overhead and
22683 savings, and various measures of the hash table size and chain
22686 @kindex maint print target-stack
22687 @cindex target stack description
22688 @item maint print target-stack
22689 A @dfn{target} is an interface between the debugger and a particular
22690 kind of file or process. Targets can be stacked in @dfn{strata},
22691 so that more than one target can potentially respond to a request.
22692 In particular, memory accesses will walk down the stack of targets
22693 until they find a target that is interested in handling that particular
22696 This command prints a short description of each layer that was pushed on
22697 the @dfn{target stack}, starting from the top layer down to the bottom one.
22699 @kindex maint print type
22700 @cindex type chain of a data type
22701 @item maint print type @var{expr}
22702 Print the type chain for a type specified by @var{expr}. The argument
22703 can be either a type name or a symbol. If it is a symbol, the type of
22704 that symbol is described. The type chain produced by this command is
22705 a recursive definition of the data type as stored in @value{GDBN}'s
22706 data structures, including its flags and contained types.
22708 @kindex maint set dwarf2 max-cache-age
22709 @kindex maint show dwarf2 max-cache-age
22710 @item maint set dwarf2 max-cache-age
22711 @itemx maint show dwarf2 max-cache-age
22712 Control the DWARF 2 compilation unit cache.
22714 @cindex DWARF 2 compilation units cache
22715 In object files with inter-compilation-unit references, such as those
22716 produced by the GCC option @samp{-feliminate-dwarf2-dups}, the DWARF 2
22717 reader needs to frequently refer to previously read compilation units.
22718 This setting controls how long a compilation unit will remain in the
22719 cache if it is not referenced. A higher limit means that cached
22720 compilation units will be stored in memory longer, and more total
22721 memory will be used. Setting it to zero disables caching, which will
22722 slow down @value{GDBN} startup, but reduce memory consumption.
22724 @kindex maint set profile
22725 @kindex maint show profile
22726 @cindex profiling GDB
22727 @item maint set profile
22728 @itemx maint show profile
22729 Control profiling of @value{GDBN}.
22731 Profiling will be disabled until you use the @samp{maint set profile}
22732 command to enable it. When you enable profiling, the system will begin
22733 collecting timing and execution count data; when you disable profiling or
22734 exit @value{GDBN}, the results will be written to a log file. Remember that
22735 if you use profiling, @value{GDBN} will overwrite the profiling log file
22736 (often called @file{gmon.out}). If you have a record of important profiling
22737 data in a @file{gmon.out} file, be sure to move it to a safe location.
22739 Configuring with @samp{--enable-profiling} arranges for @value{GDBN} to be
22740 compiled with the @samp{-pg} compiler option.
22742 @kindex maint show-debug-regs
22743 @cindex x86 hardware debug registers
22744 @item maint show-debug-regs
22745 Control whether to show variables that mirror the x86 hardware debug
22746 registers. Use @code{ON} to enable, @code{OFF} to disable. If
22747 enabled, the debug registers values are shown when @value{GDBN} inserts or
22748 removes a hardware breakpoint or watchpoint, and when the inferior
22749 triggers a hardware-assisted breakpoint or watchpoint.
22751 @kindex maint space
22752 @cindex memory used by commands
22754 Control whether to display memory usage for each command. If set to a
22755 nonzero value, @value{GDBN} will display how much memory each command
22756 took, following the command's own output. This can also be requested
22757 by invoking @value{GDBN} with the @option{--statistics} command-line
22758 switch (@pxref{Mode Options}).
22761 @cindex time of command execution
22763 Control whether to display the execution time for each command. If
22764 set to a nonzero value, @value{GDBN} will display how much time it
22765 took to execute each command, following the command's own output.
22766 This can also be requested by invoking @value{GDBN} with the
22767 @option{--statistics} command-line switch (@pxref{Mode Options}).
22769 @kindex maint translate-address
22770 @item maint translate-address @r{[}@var{section}@r{]} @var{addr}
22771 Find the symbol stored at the location specified by the address
22772 @var{addr} and an optional section name @var{section}. If found,
22773 @value{GDBN} prints the name of the closest symbol and an offset from
22774 the symbol's location to the specified address. This is similar to
22775 the @code{info address} command (@pxref{Symbols}), except that this
22776 command also allows to find symbols in other sections.
22780 The following command is useful for non-interactive invocations of
22781 @value{GDBN}, such as in the test suite.
22784 @item set watchdog @var{nsec}
22785 @kindex set watchdog
22786 @cindex watchdog timer
22787 @cindex timeout for commands
22788 Set the maximum number of seconds @value{GDBN} will wait for the
22789 target operation to finish. If this time expires, @value{GDBN}
22790 reports and error and the command is aborted.
22792 @item show watchdog
22793 Show the current setting of the target wait timeout.
22796 @node Remote Protocol
22797 @appendix @value{GDBN} Remote Serial Protocol
22802 * Stop Reply Packets::
22803 * General Query Packets::
22804 * Register Packet Format::
22805 * Tracepoint Packets::
22808 * File-I/O Remote Protocol Extension::
22809 * Library List Format::
22810 * Memory Map Format::
22816 There may be occasions when you need to know something about the
22817 protocol---for example, if there is only one serial port to your target
22818 machine, you might want your program to do something special if it
22819 recognizes a packet meant for @value{GDBN}.
22821 In the examples below, @samp{->} and @samp{<-} are used to indicate
22822 transmitted and received data, respectively.
22824 @cindex protocol, @value{GDBN} remote serial
22825 @cindex serial protocol, @value{GDBN} remote
22826 @cindex remote serial protocol
22827 All @value{GDBN} commands and responses (other than acknowledgments) are
22828 sent as a @var{packet}. A @var{packet} is introduced with the character
22829 @samp{$}, the actual @var{packet-data}, and the terminating character
22830 @samp{#} followed by a two-digit @var{checksum}:
22833 @code{$}@var{packet-data}@code{#}@var{checksum}
22837 @cindex checksum, for @value{GDBN} remote
22839 The two-digit @var{checksum} is computed as the modulo 256 sum of all
22840 characters between the leading @samp{$} and the trailing @samp{#} (an
22841 eight bit unsigned checksum).
22843 Implementors should note that prior to @value{GDBN} 5.0 the protocol
22844 specification also included an optional two-digit @var{sequence-id}:
22847 @code{$}@var{sequence-id}@code{:}@var{packet-data}@code{#}@var{checksum}
22850 @cindex sequence-id, for @value{GDBN} remote
22852 That @var{sequence-id} was appended to the acknowledgment. @value{GDBN}
22853 has never output @var{sequence-id}s. Stubs that handle packets added
22854 since @value{GDBN} 5.0 must not accept @var{sequence-id}.
22856 @cindex acknowledgment, for @value{GDBN} remote
22857 When either the host or the target machine receives a packet, the first
22858 response expected is an acknowledgment: either @samp{+} (to indicate
22859 the package was received correctly) or @samp{-} (to request
22863 -> @code{$}@var{packet-data}@code{#}@var{checksum}
22868 The host (@value{GDBN}) sends @var{command}s, and the target (the
22869 debugging stub incorporated in your program) sends a @var{response}. In
22870 the case of step and continue @var{command}s, the response is only sent
22871 when the operation has completed (the target has again stopped).
22873 @var{packet-data} consists of a sequence of characters with the
22874 exception of @samp{#} and @samp{$} (see @samp{X} packet for additional
22877 @cindex remote protocol, field separator
22878 Fields within the packet should be separated using @samp{,} @samp{;} or
22879 @samp{:}. Except where otherwise noted all numbers are represented in
22880 @sc{hex} with leading zeros suppressed.
22882 Implementors should note that prior to @value{GDBN} 5.0, the character
22883 @samp{:} could not appear as the third character in a packet (as it
22884 would potentially conflict with the @var{sequence-id}).
22886 @cindex remote protocol, binary data
22887 @anchor{Binary Data}
22888 Binary data in most packets is encoded either as two hexadecimal
22889 digits per byte of binary data. This allowed the traditional remote
22890 protocol to work over connections which were only seven-bit clean.
22891 Some packets designed more recently assume an eight-bit clean
22892 connection, and use a more efficient encoding to send and receive
22895 The binary data representation uses @code{7d} (@sc{ascii} @samp{@}})
22896 as an escape character. Any escaped byte is transmitted as the escape
22897 character followed by the original character XORed with @code{0x20}.
22898 For example, the byte @code{0x7d} would be transmitted as the two
22899 bytes @code{0x7d 0x5d}. The bytes @code{0x23} (@sc{ascii} @samp{#}),
22900 @code{0x24} (@sc{ascii} @samp{$}), and @code{0x7d} (@sc{ascii}
22901 @samp{@}}) must always be escaped. Responses sent by the stub
22902 must also escape @code{0x2a} (@sc{ascii} @samp{*}), so that it
22903 is not interpreted as the start of a run-length encoded sequence
22906 Response @var{data} can be run-length encoded to save space. A @samp{*}
22907 means that the next character is an @sc{ascii} encoding giving a repeat count
22908 which stands for that many repetitions of the character preceding the
22909 @samp{*}. The encoding is @code{n+29}, yielding a printable character
22910 where @code{n >=3} (which is where rle starts to win). The printable
22911 characters @samp{$}, @samp{#}, @samp{+} and @samp{-} or with a numeric
22912 value greater than 126 should not be used.
22919 means the same as "0000".
22921 The error response returned for some packets includes a two character
22922 error number. That number is not well defined.
22924 @cindex empty response, for unsupported packets
22925 For any @var{command} not supported by the stub, an empty response
22926 (@samp{$#00}) should be returned. That way it is possible to extend the
22927 protocol. A newer @value{GDBN} can tell if a packet is supported based
22930 A stub is required to support the @samp{g}, @samp{G}, @samp{m}, @samp{M},
22931 @samp{c}, and @samp{s} @var{command}s. All other @var{command}s are
22937 The following table provides a complete list of all currently defined
22938 @var{command}s and their corresponding response @var{data}.
22939 @xref{File-I/O Remote Protocol Extension}, for details about the File
22940 I/O extension of the remote protocol.
22942 Each packet's description has a template showing the packet's overall
22943 syntax, followed by an explanation of the packet's meaning. We
22944 include spaces in some of the templates for clarity; these are not
22945 part of the packet's syntax. No @value{GDBN} packet uses spaces to
22946 separate its components. For example, a template like @samp{foo
22947 @var{bar} @var{baz}} describes a packet beginning with the three ASCII
22948 bytes @samp{foo}, followed by a @var{bar}, followed directly by a
22949 @var{baz}. @value{GDBN} does not transmit a space character between the
22950 @samp{foo} and the @var{bar}, or between the @var{bar} and the
22953 Note that all packet forms beginning with an upper- or lower-case
22954 letter, other than those described here, are reserved for future use.
22956 Here are the packet descriptions.
22961 @cindex @samp{!} packet
22962 Enable extended mode. In extended mode, the remote server is made
22963 persistent. The @samp{R} packet is used to restart the program being
22969 The remote target both supports and has enabled extended mode.
22973 @cindex @samp{?} packet
22974 Indicate the reason the target halted. The reply is the same as for
22978 @xref{Stop Reply Packets}, for the reply specifications.
22980 @item A @var{arglen},@var{argnum},@var{arg},@dots{}
22981 @cindex @samp{A} packet
22982 Initialized @code{argv[]} array passed into program. @var{arglen}
22983 specifies the number of bytes in the hex encoded byte stream
22984 @var{arg}. See @code{gdbserver} for more details.
22989 The arguments were set.
22995 @cindex @samp{b} packet
22996 (Don't use this packet; its behavior is not well-defined.)
22997 Change the serial line speed to @var{baud}.
22999 JTC: @emph{When does the transport layer state change? When it's
23000 received, or after the ACK is transmitted. In either case, there are
23001 problems if the command or the acknowledgment packet is dropped.}
23003 Stan: @emph{If people really wanted to add something like this, and get
23004 it working for the first time, they ought to modify ser-unix.c to send
23005 some kind of out-of-band message to a specially-setup stub and have the
23006 switch happen "in between" packets, so that from remote protocol's point
23007 of view, nothing actually happened.}
23009 @item B @var{addr},@var{mode}
23010 @cindex @samp{B} packet
23011 Set (@var{mode} is @samp{S}) or clear (@var{mode} is @samp{C}) a
23012 breakpoint at @var{addr}.
23014 Don't use this packet. Use the @samp{Z} and @samp{z} packets instead
23015 (@pxref{insert breakpoint or watchpoint packet}).
23017 @item c @r{[}@var{addr}@r{]}
23018 @cindex @samp{c} packet
23019 Continue. @var{addr} is address to resume. If @var{addr} is omitted,
23020 resume at current address.
23023 @xref{Stop Reply Packets}, for the reply specifications.
23025 @item C @var{sig}@r{[};@var{addr}@r{]}
23026 @cindex @samp{C} packet
23027 Continue with signal @var{sig} (hex signal number). If
23028 @samp{;@var{addr}} is omitted, resume at same address.
23031 @xref{Stop Reply Packets}, for the reply specifications.
23034 @cindex @samp{d} packet
23037 Don't use this packet; instead, define a general set packet
23038 (@pxref{General Query Packets}).
23041 @cindex @samp{D} packet
23042 Detach @value{GDBN} from the remote system. Sent to the remote target
23043 before @value{GDBN} disconnects via the @code{detach} command.
23053 @item F @var{RC},@var{EE},@var{CF};@var{XX}
23054 @cindex @samp{F} packet
23055 A reply from @value{GDBN} to an @samp{F} packet sent by the target.
23056 This is part of the File-I/O protocol extension. @xref{File-I/O
23057 Remote Protocol Extension}, for the specification.
23060 @anchor{read registers packet}
23061 @cindex @samp{g} packet
23062 Read general registers.
23066 @item @var{XX@dots{}}
23067 Each byte of register data is described by two hex digits. The bytes
23068 with the register are transmitted in target byte order. The size of
23069 each register and their position within the @samp{g} packet are
23070 determined by the @value{GDBN} internal gdbarch functions
23071 @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_RAW_SIZE} and @code{gdbarch_register_name}. The
23072 specification of several standard @samp{g} packets is specified below.
23077 @item G @var{XX@dots{}}
23078 @cindex @samp{G} packet
23079 Write general registers. @xref{read registers packet}, for a
23080 description of the @var{XX@dots{}} data.
23090 @item H @var{c} @var{t}
23091 @cindex @samp{H} packet
23092 Set thread for subsequent operations (@samp{m}, @samp{M}, @samp{g},
23093 @samp{G}, et.al.). @var{c} depends on the operation to be performed: it
23094 should be @samp{c} for step and continue operations, @samp{g} for other
23095 operations. The thread designator @var{t} may be @samp{-1}, meaning all
23096 the threads, a thread number, or @samp{0} which means pick any thread.
23107 @c 'H': How restrictive (or permissive) is the thread model. If a
23108 @c thread is selected and stopped, are other threads allowed
23109 @c to continue to execute? As I mentioned above, I think the
23110 @c semantics of each command when a thread is selected must be
23111 @c described. For example:
23113 @c 'g': If the stub supports threads and a specific thread is
23114 @c selected, returns the register block from that thread;
23115 @c otherwise returns current registers.
23117 @c 'G' If the stub supports threads and a specific thread is
23118 @c selected, sets the registers of the register block of
23119 @c that thread; otherwise sets current registers.
23121 @item i @r{[}@var{addr}@r{[},@var{nnn}@r{]]}
23122 @anchor{cycle step packet}
23123 @cindex @samp{i} packet
23124 Step the remote target by a single clock cycle. If @samp{,@var{nnn}} is
23125 present, cycle step @var{nnn} cycles. If @var{addr} is present, cycle
23126 step starting at that address.
23129 @cindex @samp{I} packet
23130 Signal, then cycle step. @xref{step with signal packet}. @xref{cycle
23134 @cindex @samp{k} packet
23137 FIXME: @emph{There is no description of how to operate when a specific
23138 thread context has been selected (i.e.@: does 'k' kill only that
23141 @item m @var{addr},@var{length}
23142 @cindex @samp{m} packet
23143 Read @var{length} bytes of memory starting at address @var{addr}.
23144 Note that @var{addr} may not be aligned to any particular boundary.
23146 The stub need not use any particular size or alignment when gathering
23147 data from memory for the response; even if @var{addr} is word-aligned
23148 and @var{length} is a multiple of the word size, the stub is free to
23149 use byte accesses, or not. For this reason, this packet may not be
23150 suitable for accessing memory-mapped I/O devices.
23151 @cindex alignment of remote memory accesses
23152 @cindex size of remote memory accesses
23153 @cindex memory, alignment and size of remote accesses
23157 @item @var{XX@dots{}}
23158 Memory contents; each byte is transmitted as a two-digit hexadecimal
23159 number. The reply may contain fewer bytes than requested if the
23160 server was able to read only part of the region of memory.
23165 @item M @var{addr},@var{length}:@var{XX@dots{}}
23166 @cindex @samp{M} packet
23167 Write @var{length} bytes of memory starting at address @var{addr}.
23168 @var{XX@dots{}} is the data; each byte is transmitted as a two-digit
23169 hexadecimal number.
23176 for an error (this includes the case where only part of the data was
23181 @cindex @samp{p} packet
23182 Read the value of register @var{n}; @var{n} is in hex.
23183 @xref{read registers packet}, for a description of how the returned
23184 register value is encoded.
23188 @item @var{XX@dots{}}
23189 the register's value
23193 Indicating an unrecognized @var{query}.
23196 @item P @var{n@dots{}}=@var{r@dots{}}
23197 @anchor{write register packet}
23198 @cindex @samp{P} packet
23199 Write register @var{n@dots{}} with value @var{r@dots{}}. The register
23200 number @var{n} is in hexadecimal, and @var{r@dots{}} contains two hex
23201 digits for each byte in the register (target byte order).
23211 @item q @var{name} @var{params}@dots{}
23212 @itemx Q @var{name} @var{params}@dots{}
23213 @cindex @samp{q} packet
23214 @cindex @samp{Q} packet
23215 General query (@samp{q}) and set (@samp{Q}). These packets are
23216 described fully in @ref{General Query Packets}.
23219 @cindex @samp{r} packet
23220 Reset the entire system.
23222 Don't use this packet; use the @samp{R} packet instead.
23225 @cindex @samp{R} packet
23226 Restart the program being debugged. @var{XX}, while needed, is ignored.
23227 This packet is only available in extended mode.
23229 The @samp{R} packet has no reply.
23231 @item s @r{[}@var{addr}@r{]}
23232 @cindex @samp{s} packet
23233 Single step. @var{addr} is the address at which to resume. If
23234 @var{addr} is omitted, resume at same address.
23237 @xref{Stop Reply Packets}, for the reply specifications.
23239 @item S @var{sig}@r{[};@var{addr}@r{]}
23240 @anchor{step with signal packet}
23241 @cindex @samp{S} packet
23242 Step with signal. This is analogous to the @samp{C} packet, but
23243 requests a single-step, rather than a normal resumption of execution.
23246 @xref{Stop Reply Packets}, for the reply specifications.
23248 @item t @var{addr}:@var{PP},@var{MM}
23249 @cindex @samp{t} packet
23250 Search backwards starting at address @var{addr} for a match with pattern
23251 @var{PP} and mask @var{MM}. @var{PP} and @var{MM} are 4 bytes.
23252 @var{addr} must be at least 3 digits.
23255 @cindex @samp{T} packet
23256 Find out if the thread XX is alive.
23261 thread is still alive
23267 Packets starting with @samp{v} are identified by a multi-letter name,
23268 up to the first @samp{;} or @samp{?} (or the end of the packet).
23270 @item vCont@r{[};@var{action}@r{[}:@var{tid}@r{]]}@dots{}
23271 @cindex @samp{vCont} packet
23272 Resume the inferior, specifying different actions for each thread.
23273 If an action is specified with no @var{tid}, then it is applied to any
23274 threads that don't have a specific action specified; if no default action is
23275 specified then other threads should remain stopped. Specifying multiple
23276 default actions is an error; specifying no actions is also an error.
23277 Thread IDs are specified in hexadecimal. Currently supported actions are:
23283 Continue with signal @var{sig}. @var{sig} should be two hex digits.
23287 Step with signal @var{sig}. @var{sig} should be two hex digits.
23290 The optional @var{addr} argument normally associated with these packets is
23291 not supported in @samp{vCont}.
23294 @xref{Stop Reply Packets}, for the reply specifications.
23297 @cindex @samp{vCont?} packet
23298 Request a list of actions supported by the @samp{vCont} packet.
23302 @item vCont@r{[};@var{action}@dots{}@r{]}
23303 The @samp{vCont} packet is supported. Each @var{action} is a supported
23304 command in the @samp{vCont} packet.
23306 The @samp{vCont} packet is not supported.
23309 @item vFlashErase:@var{addr},@var{length}
23310 @cindex @samp{vFlashErase} packet
23311 Direct the stub to erase @var{length} bytes of flash starting at
23312 @var{addr}. The region may enclose any number of flash blocks, but
23313 its start and end must fall on block boundaries, as indicated by the
23314 flash block size appearing in the memory map (@pxref{Memory Map
23315 Format}). @value{GDBN} groups flash memory programming operations
23316 together, and sends a @samp{vFlashDone} request after each group; the
23317 stub is allowed to delay erase operation until the @samp{vFlashDone}
23318 packet is received.
23328 @item vFlashWrite:@var{addr}:@var{XX@dots{}}
23329 @cindex @samp{vFlashWrite} packet
23330 Direct the stub to write data to flash address @var{addr}. The data
23331 is passed in binary form using the same encoding as for the @samp{X}
23332 packet (@pxref{Binary Data}). The memory ranges specified by
23333 @samp{vFlashWrite} packets preceding a @samp{vFlashDone} packet must
23334 not overlap, and must appear in order of increasing addresses
23335 (although @samp{vFlashErase} packets for higher addresses may already
23336 have been received; the ordering is guaranteed only between
23337 @samp{vFlashWrite} packets). If a packet writes to an address that was
23338 neither erased by a preceding @samp{vFlashErase} packet nor by some other
23339 target-specific method, the results are unpredictable.
23347 for vFlashWrite addressing non-flash memory
23353 @cindex @samp{vFlashDone} packet
23354 Indicate to the stub that flash programming operation is finished.
23355 The stub is permitted to delay or batch the effects of a group of
23356 @samp{vFlashErase} and @samp{vFlashWrite} packets until a
23357 @samp{vFlashDone} packet is received. The contents of the affected
23358 regions of flash memory are unpredictable until the @samp{vFlashDone}
23359 request is completed.
23361 @item X @var{addr},@var{length}:@var{XX@dots{}}
23363 @cindex @samp{X} packet
23364 Write data to memory, where the data is transmitted in binary.
23365 @var{addr} is address, @var{length} is number of bytes,
23366 @samp{@var{XX}@dots{}} is binary data (@pxref{Binary Data}).
23376 @item z @var{type},@var{addr},@var{length}
23377 @itemx Z @var{type},@var{addr},@var{length}
23378 @anchor{insert breakpoint or watchpoint packet}
23379 @cindex @samp{z} packet
23380 @cindex @samp{Z} packets
23381 Insert (@samp{Z}) or remove (@samp{z}) a @var{type} breakpoint or
23382 watchpoint starting at address @var{address} and covering the next
23383 @var{length} bytes.
23385 Each breakpoint and watchpoint packet @var{type} is documented
23388 @emph{Implementation notes: A remote target shall return an empty string
23389 for an unrecognized breakpoint or watchpoint packet @var{type}. A
23390 remote target shall support either both or neither of a given
23391 @samp{Z@var{type}@dots{}} and @samp{z@var{type}@dots{}} packet pair. To
23392 avoid potential problems with duplicate packets, the operations should
23393 be implemented in an idempotent way.}
23395 @item z0,@var{addr},@var{length}
23396 @itemx Z0,@var{addr},@var{length}
23397 @cindex @samp{z0} packet
23398 @cindex @samp{Z0} packet
23399 Insert (@samp{Z0}) or remove (@samp{z0}) a memory breakpoint at address
23400 @var{addr} of size @var{length}.
23402 A memory breakpoint is implemented by replacing the instruction at
23403 @var{addr} with a software breakpoint or trap instruction. The
23404 @var{length} is used by targets that indicates the size of the
23405 breakpoint (in bytes) that should be inserted (e.g., the @sc{arm} and
23406 @sc{mips} can insert either a 2 or 4 byte breakpoint).
23408 @emph{Implementation note: It is possible for a target to copy or move
23409 code that contains memory breakpoints (e.g., when implementing
23410 overlays). The behavior of this packet, in the presence of such a
23411 target, is not defined.}
23423 @item z1,@var{addr},@var{length}
23424 @itemx Z1,@var{addr},@var{length}
23425 @cindex @samp{z1} packet
23426 @cindex @samp{Z1} packet
23427 Insert (@samp{Z1}) or remove (@samp{z1}) a hardware breakpoint at
23428 address @var{addr} of size @var{length}.
23430 A hardware breakpoint is implemented using a mechanism that is not
23431 dependant on being able to modify the target's memory.
23433 @emph{Implementation note: A hardware breakpoint is not affected by code
23446 @item z2,@var{addr},@var{length}
23447 @itemx Z2,@var{addr},@var{length}
23448 @cindex @samp{z2} packet
23449 @cindex @samp{Z2} packet
23450 Insert (@samp{Z2}) or remove (@samp{z2}) a write watchpoint.
23462 @item z3,@var{addr},@var{length}
23463 @itemx Z3,@var{addr},@var{length}
23464 @cindex @samp{z3} packet
23465 @cindex @samp{Z3} packet
23466 Insert (@samp{Z3}) or remove (@samp{z3}) a read watchpoint.
23478 @item z4,@var{addr},@var{length}
23479 @itemx Z4,@var{addr},@var{length}
23480 @cindex @samp{z4} packet
23481 @cindex @samp{Z4} packet
23482 Insert (@samp{Z4}) or remove (@samp{z4}) an access watchpoint.
23496 @node Stop Reply Packets
23497 @section Stop Reply Packets
23498 @cindex stop reply packets
23500 The @samp{C}, @samp{c}, @samp{S}, @samp{s} and @samp{?} packets can
23501 receive any of the below as a reply. In the case of the @samp{C},
23502 @samp{c}, @samp{S} and @samp{s} packets, that reply is only returned
23503 when the target halts. In the below the exact meaning of @dfn{signal
23504 number} is defined by the header @file{include/gdb/signals.h} in the
23505 @value{GDBN} source code.
23507 As in the description of request packets, we include spaces in the
23508 reply templates for clarity; these are not part of the reply packet's
23509 syntax. No @value{GDBN} stop reply packet uses spaces to separate its
23515 The program received signal number @var{AA} (a two-digit hexadecimal
23516 number). This is equivalent to a @samp{T} response with no
23517 @var{n}:@var{r} pairs.
23519 @item T @var{AA} @var{n1}:@var{r1};@var{n2}:@var{r2};@dots{}
23520 @cindex @samp{T} packet reply
23521 The program received signal number @var{AA} (a two-digit hexadecimal
23522 number). This is equivalent to an @samp{S} response, except that the
23523 @samp{@var{n}:@var{r}} pairs can carry values of important registers
23524 and other information directly in the stop reply packet, reducing
23525 round-trip latency. Single-step and breakpoint traps are reported
23526 this way. Each @samp{@var{n}:@var{r}} pair is interpreted as follows:
23530 If @var{n} is a hexadecimal number, it is a register number, and the
23531 corresponding @var{r} gives that register's value. @var{r} is a
23532 series of bytes in target byte order, with each byte given by a
23533 two-digit hex number.
23536 If @var{n} is @samp{thread}, then @var{r} is the thread process ID, in
23540 If @var{n} is a recognized @dfn{stop reason}, it describes a more
23541 specific event that stopped the target. The currently defined stop
23542 reasons are listed below. @var{aa} should be @samp{05}, the trap
23543 signal. At most one stop reason should be present.
23546 Otherwise, @value{GDBN} should ignore this @samp{@var{n}:@var{r}} pair
23547 and go on to the next; this allows us to extend the protocol in the
23551 The currently defined stop reasons are:
23557 The packet indicates a watchpoint hit, and @var{r} is the data address, in
23560 @cindex shared library events, remote reply
23562 The packet indicates that the loaded libraries have changed.
23563 @value{GDBN} should use @samp{qXfer:libraries:read} to fetch a new
23564 list of loaded libraries. @var{r} is ignored.
23568 The process exited, and @var{AA} is the exit status. This is only
23569 applicable to certain targets.
23572 The process terminated with signal @var{AA}.
23574 @item O @var{XX}@dots{}
23575 @samp{@var{XX}@dots{}} is hex encoding of @sc{ascii} data, to be
23576 written as the program's console output. This can happen at any time
23577 while the program is running and the debugger should continue to wait
23578 for @samp{W}, @samp{T}, etc.
23580 @item F @var{call-id},@var{parameter}@dots{}
23581 @var{call-id} is the identifier which says which host system call should
23582 be called. This is just the name of the function. Translation into the
23583 correct system call is only applicable as it's defined in @value{GDBN}.
23584 @xref{File-I/O Remote Protocol Extension}, for a list of implemented
23587 @samp{@var{parameter}@dots{}} is a list of parameters as defined for
23588 this very system call.
23590 The target replies with this packet when it expects @value{GDBN} to
23591 call a host system call on behalf of the target. @value{GDBN} replies
23592 with an appropriate @samp{F} packet and keeps up waiting for the next
23593 reply packet from the target. The latest @samp{C}, @samp{c}, @samp{S}
23594 or @samp{s} action is expected to be continued. @xref{File-I/O Remote
23595 Protocol Extension}, for more details.
23599 @node General Query Packets
23600 @section General Query Packets
23601 @cindex remote query requests
23603 Packets starting with @samp{q} are @dfn{general query packets};
23604 packets starting with @samp{Q} are @dfn{general set packets}. General
23605 query and set packets are a semi-unified form for retrieving and
23606 sending information to and from the stub.
23608 The initial letter of a query or set packet is followed by a name
23609 indicating what sort of thing the packet applies to. For example,
23610 @value{GDBN} may use a @samp{qSymbol} packet to exchange symbol
23611 definitions with the stub. These packet names follow some
23616 The name must not contain commas, colons or semicolons.
23618 Most @value{GDBN} query and set packets have a leading upper case
23621 The names of custom vendor packets should use a company prefix, in
23622 lower case, followed by a period. For example, packets designed at
23623 the Acme Corporation might begin with @samp{qacme.foo} (for querying
23624 foos) or @samp{Qacme.bar} (for setting bars).
23627 The name of a query or set packet should be separated from any
23628 parameters by a @samp{:}; the parameters themselves should be
23629 separated by @samp{,} or @samp{;}. Stubs must be careful to match the
23630 full packet name, and check for a separator or the end of the packet,
23631 in case two packet names share a common prefix. New packets should not begin
23632 with @samp{qC}, @samp{qP}, or @samp{qL}@footnote{The @samp{qP} and @samp{qL}
23633 packets predate these conventions, and have arguments without any terminator
23634 for the packet name; we suspect they are in widespread use in places that
23635 are difficult to upgrade. The @samp{qC} packet has no arguments, but some
23636 existing stubs (e.g.@: RedBoot) are known to not check for the end of the
23639 Like the descriptions of the other packets, each description here
23640 has a template showing the packet's overall syntax, followed by an
23641 explanation of the packet's meaning. We include spaces in some of the
23642 templates for clarity; these are not part of the packet's syntax. No
23643 @value{GDBN} packet uses spaces to separate its components.
23645 Here are the currently defined query and set packets:
23650 @cindex current thread, remote request
23651 @cindex @samp{qC} packet
23652 Return the current thread id.
23657 Where @var{pid} is an unsigned hexadecimal process id.
23658 @item @r{(anything else)}
23659 Any other reply implies the old pid.
23662 @item qCRC:@var{addr},@var{length}
23663 @cindex CRC of memory block, remote request
23664 @cindex @samp{qCRC} packet
23665 Compute the CRC checksum of a block of memory.
23669 An error (such as memory fault)
23670 @item C @var{crc32}
23671 The specified memory region's checksum is @var{crc32}.
23675 @itemx qsThreadInfo
23676 @cindex list active threads, remote request
23677 @cindex @samp{qfThreadInfo} packet
23678 @cindex @samp{qsThreadInfo} packet
23679 Obtain a list of all active thread ids from the target (OS). Since there
23680 may be too many active threads to fit into one reply packet, this query
23681 works iteratively: it may require more than one query/reply sequence to
23682 obtain the entire list of threads. The first query of the sequence will
23683 be the @samp{qfThreadInfo} query; subsequent queries in the
23684 sequence will be the @samp{qsThreadInfo} query.
23686 NOTE: This packet replaces the @samp{qL} query (see below).
23692 @item m @var{id},@var{id}@dots{}
23693 a comma-separated list of thread ids
23695 (lower case letter @samp{L}) denotes end of list.
23698 In response to each query, the target will reply with a list of one or
23699 more thread ids, in big-endian unsigned hex, separated by commas.
23700 @value{GDBN} will respond to each reply with a request for more thread
23701 ids (using the @samp{qs} form of the query), until the target responds
23702 with @samp{l} (lower-case el, for @dfn{last}).
23704 @item qGetTLSAddr:@var{thread-id},@var{offset},@var{lm}
23705 @cindex get thread-local storage address, remote request
23706 @cindex @samp{qGetTLSAddr} packet
23707 Fetch the address associated with thread local storage specified
23708 by @var{thread-id}, @var{offset}, and @var{lm}.
23710 @var{thread-id} is the (big endian, hex encoded) thread id associated with the
23711 thread for which to fetch the TLS address.
23713 @var{offset} is the (big endian, hex encoded) offset associated with the
23714 thread local variable. (This offset is obtained from the debug
23715 information associated with the variable.)
23717 @var{lm} is the (big endian, hex encoded) OS/ABI-specific encoding of the
23718 the load module associated with the thread local storage. For example,
23719 a @sc{gnu}/Linux system will pass the link map address of the shared
23720 object associated with the thread local storage under consideration.
23721 Other operating environments may choose to represent the load module
23722 differently, so the precise meaning of this parameter will vary.
23726 @item @var{XX}@dots{}
23727 Hex encoded (big endian) bytes representing the address of the thread
23728 local storage requested.
23731 An error occurred. @var{nn} are hex digits.
23734 An empty reply indicates that @samp{qGetTLSAddr} is not supported by the stub.
23737 @item qL @var{startflag} @var{threadcount} @var{nextthread}
23738 Obtain thread information from RTOS. Where: @var{startflag} (one hex
23739 digit) is one to indicate the first query and zero to indicate a
23740 subsequent query; @var{threadcount} (two hex digits) is the maximum
23741 number of threads the response packet can contain; and @var{nextthread}
23742 (eight hex digits), for subsequent queries (@var{startflag} is zero), is
23743 returned in the response as @var{argthread}.
23745 Don't use this packet; use the @samp{qfThreadInfo} query instead (see above).
23749 @item qM @var{count} @var{done} @var{argthread} @var{thread}@dots{}
23750 Where: @var{count} (two hex digits) is the number of threads being
23751 returned; @var{done} (one hex digit) is zero to indicate more threads
23752 and one indicates no further threads; @var{argthreadid} (eight hex
23753 digits) is @var{nextthread} from the request packet; @var{thread}@dots{}
23754 is a sequence of thread IDs from the target. @var{threadid} (eight hex
23755 digits). See @code{remote.c:parse_threadlist_response()}.
23759 @cindex section offsets, remote request
23760 @cindex @samp{qOffsets} packet
23761 Get section offsets that the target used when relocating the downloaded
23766 @item Text=@var{xxx};Data=@var{yyy}@r{[};Bss=@var{zzz}@r{]}
23767 Relocate the @code{Text} section by @var{xxx} from its original address.
23768 Relocate the @code{Data} section by @var{yyy} from its original address.
23769 If the object file format provides segment information (e.g.@: @sc{elf}
23770 @samp{PT_LOAD} program headers), @value{GDBN} will relocate entire
23771 segments by the supplied offsets.
23773 @emph{Note: while a @code{Bss} offset may be included in the response,
23774 @value{GDBN} ignores this and instead applies the @code{Data} offset
23775 to the @code{Bss} section.}
23777 @item TextSeg=@var{xxx}@r{[};DataSeg=@var{yyy}@r{]}
23778 Relocate the first segment of the object file, which conventionally
23779 contains program code, to a starting address of @var{xxx}. If
23780 @samp{DataSeg} is specified, relocate the second segment, which
23781 conventionally contains modifiable data, to a starting address of
23782 @var{yyy}. @value{GDBN} will report an error if the object file
23783 does not contain segment information, or does not contain at least
23784 as many segments as mentioned in the reply. Extra segments are
23785 kept at fixed offsets relative to the last relocated segment.
23788 @item qP @var{mode} @var{threadid}
23789 @cindex thread information, remote request
23790 @cindex @samp{qP} packet
23791 Returns information on @var{threadid}. Where: @var{mode} is a hex
23792 encoded 32 bit mode; @var{threadid} is a hex encoded 64 bit thread ID.
23794 Don't use this packet; use the @samp{qThreadExtraInfo} query instead
23797 Reply: see @code{remote.c:remote_unpack_thread_info_response()}.
23799 @item QPassSignals: @var{signal} @r{[};@var{signal}@r{]}@dots{}
23800 @cindex pass signals to inferior, remote request
23801 @cindex @samp{QPassSignals} packet
23802 @anchor{QPassSignals}
23803 Each listed @var{signal} should be passed directly to the inferior process.
23804 Signals are numbered identically to continue packets and stop replies
23805 (@pxref{Stop Reply Packets}). Each @var{signal} list item should be
23806 strictly greater than the previous item. These signals do not need to stop
23807 the inferior, or be reported to @value{GDBN}. All other signals should be
23808 reported to @value{GDBN}. Multiple @samp{QPassSignals} packets do not
23809 combine; any earlier @samp{QPassSignals} list is completely replaced by the
23810 new list. This packet improves performance when using @samp{handle
23811 @var{signal} nostop noprint pass}.
23816 The request succeeded.
23819 An error occurred. @var{nn} are hex digits.
23822 An empty reply indicates that @samp{QPassSignals} is not supported by
23826 Use of this packet is controlled by the @code{set remote pass-signals}
23827 command (@pxref{Remote Configuration, set remote pass-signals}).
23828 This packet is not probed by default; the remote stub must request it,
23829 by supplying an appropriate @samp{qSupported} response (@pxref{qSupported}).
23831 @item qRcmd,@var{command}
23832 @cindex execute remote command, remote request
23833 @cindex @samp{qRcmd} packet
23834 @var{command} (hex encoded) is passed to the local interpreter for
23835 execution. Invalid commands should be reported using the output
23836 string. Before the final result packet, the target may also respond
23837 with a number of intermediate @samp{O@var{output}} console output
23838 packets. @emph{Implementors should note that providing access to a
23839 stubs's interpreter may have security implications}.
23844 A command response with no output.
23846 A command response with the hex encoded output string @var{OUTPUT}.
23848 Indicate a badly formed request.
23850 An empty reply indicates that @samp{qRcmd} is not recognized.
23853 (Note that the @code{qRcmd} packet's name is separated from the
23854 command by a @samp{,}, not a @samp{:}, contrary to the naming
23855 conventions above. Please don't use this packet as a model for new
23858 @item qSupported @r{[}:@var{gdbfeature} @r{[};@var{gdbfeature}@r{]}@dots{} @r{]}
23859 @cindex supported packets, remote query
23860 @cindex features of the remote protocol
23861 @cindex @samp{qSupported} packet
23862 @anchor{qSupported}
23863 Tell the remote stub about features supported by @value{GDBN}, and
23864 query the stub for features it supports. This packet allows
23865 @value{GDBN} and the remote stub to take advantage of each others'
23866 features. @samp{qSupported} also consolidates multiple feature probes
23867 at startup, to improve @value{GDBN} performance---a single larger
23868 packet performs better than multiple smaller probe packets on
23869 high-latency links. Some features may enable behavior which must not
23870 be on by default, e.g.@: because it would confuse older clients or
23871 stubs. Other features may describe packets which could be
23872 automatically probed for, but are not. These features must be
23873 reported before @value{GDBN} will use them. This ``default
23874 unsupported'' behavior is not appropriate for all packets, but it
23875 helps to keep the initial connection time under control with new
23876 versions of @value{GDBN} which support increasing numbers of packets.
23880 @item @var{stubfeature} @r{[};@var{stubfeature}@r{]}@dots{}
23881 The stub supports or does not support each returned @var{stubfeature},
23882 depending on the form of each @var{stubfeature} (see below for the
23885 An empty reply indicates that @samp{qSupported} is not recognized,
23886 or that no features needed to be reported to @value{GDBN}.
23889 The allowed forms for each feature (either a @var{gdbfeature} in the
23890 @samp{qSupported} packet, or a @var{stubfeature} in the response)
23894 @item @var{name}=@var{value}
23895 The remote protocol feature @var{name} is supported, and associated
23896 with the specified @var{value}. The format of @var{value} depends
23897 on the feature, but it must not include a semicolon.
23899 The remote protocol feature @var{name} is supported, and does not
23900 need an associated value.
23902 The remote protocol feature @var{name} is not supported.
23904 The remote protocol feature @var{name} may be supported, and
23905 @value{GDBN} should auto-detect support in some other way when it is
23906 needed. This form will not be used for @var{gdbfeature} notifications,
23907 but may be used for @var{stubfeature} responses.
23910 Whenever the stub receives a @samp{qSupported} request, the
23911 supplied set of @value{GDBN} features should override any previous
23912 request. This allows @value{GDBN} to put the stub in a known
23913 state, even if the stub had previously been communicating with
23914 a different version of @value{GDBN}.
23916 No values of @var{gdbfeature} (for the packet sent by @value{GDBN})
23917 are defined yet. Stubs should ignore any unknown values for
23918 @var{gdbfeature}. Any @value{GDBN} which sends a @samp{qSupported}
23919 packet supports receiving packets of unlimited length (earlier
23920 versions of @value{GDBN} may reject overly long responses). Values
23921 for @var{gdbfeature} may be defined in the future to let the stub take
23922 advantage of new features in @value{GDBN}, e.g.@: incompatible
23923 improvements in the remote protocol---support for unlimited length
23924 responses would be a @var{gdbfeature} example, if it were not implied by
23925 the @samp{qSupported} query. The stub's reply should be independent
23926 of the @var{gdbfeature} entries sent by @value{GDBN}; first @value{GDBN}
23927 describes all the features it supports, and then the stub replies with
23928 all the features it supports.
23930 Similarly, @value{GDBN} will silently ignore unrecognized stub feature
23931 responses, as long as each response uses one of the standard forms.
23933 Some features are flags. A stub which supports a flag feature
23934 should respond with a @samp{+} form response. Other features
23935 require values, and the stub should respond with an @samp{=}
23938 Each feature has a default value, which @value{GDBN} will use if
23939 @samp{qSupported} is not available or if the feature is not mentioned
23940 in the @samp{qSupported} response. The default values are fixed; a
23941 stub is free to omit any feature responses that match the defaults.
23943 Not all features can be probed, but for those which can, the probing
23944 mechanism is useful: in some cases, a stub's internal
23945 architecture may not allow the protocol layer to know some information
23946 about the underlying target in advance. This is especially common in
23947 stubs which may be configured for multiple targets.
23949 These are the currently defined stub features and their properties:
23951 @multitable @columnfractions 0.35 0.2 0.12 0.2
23952 @c NOTE: The first row should be @headitem, but we do not yet require
23953 @c a new enough version of Texinfo (4.7) to use @headitem.
23955 @tab Value Required
23959 @item @samp{PacketSize}
23964 @item @samp{qXfer:auxv:read}
23969 @item @samp{qXfer:features:read}
23974 @item @samp{qXfer:libraries:read}
23979 @item @samp{qXfer:memory-map:read}
23984 @item @samp{qXfer:spu:read}
23989 @item @samp{qXfer:spu:write}
23994 @item @samp{QPassSignals}
24001 These are the currently defined stub features, in more detail:
24004 @cindex packet size, remote protocol
24005 @item PacketSize=@var{bytes}
24006 The remote stub can accept packets up to at least @var{bytes} in
24007 length. @value{GDBN} will send packets up to this size for bulk
24008 transfers, and will never send larger packets. This is a limit on the
24009 data characters in the packet, including the frame and checksum.
24010 There is no trailing NUL byte in a remote protocol packet; if the stub
24011 stores packets in a NUL-terminated format, it should allow an extra
24012 byte in its buffer for the NUL. If this stub feature is not supported,
24013 @value{GDBN} guesses based on the size of the @samp{g} packet response.
24015 @item qXfer:auxv:read
24016 The remote stub understands the @samp{qXfer:auxv:read} packet
24017 (@pxref{qXfer auxiliary vector read}).
24019 @item qXfer:features:read
24020 The remote stub understands the @samp{qXfer:features:read} packet
24021 (@pxref{qXfer target description read}).
24023 @item qXfer:libraries:read
24024 The remote stub understands the @samp{qXfer:libraries:read} packet
24025 (@pxref{qXfer library list read}).
24027 @item qXfer:memory-map:read
24028 The remote stub understands the @samp{qXfer:memory-map:read} packet
24029 (@pxref{qXfer memory map read}).
24031 @item qXfer:spu:read
24032 The remote stub understands the @samp{qXfer:spu:read} packet
24033 (@pxref{qXfer spu read}).
24035 @item qXfer:spu:write
24036 The remote stub understands the @samp{qXfer:spu:write} packet
24037 (@pxref{qXfer spu write}).
24040 The remote stub understands the @samp{QPassSignals} packet
24041 (@pxref{QPassSignals}).
24046 @cindex symbol lookup, remote request
24047 @cindex @samp{qSymbol} packet
24048 Notify the target that @value{GDBN} is prepared to serve symbol lookup
24049 requests. Accept requests from the target for the values of symbols.
24054 The target does not need to look up any (more) symbols.
24055 @item qSymbol:@var{sym_name}
24056 The target requests the value of symbol @var{sym_name} (hex encoded).
24057 @value{GDBN} may provide the value by using the
24058 @samp{qSymbol:@var{sym_value}:@var{sym_name}} message, described
24062 @item qSymbol:@var{sym_value}:@var{sym_name}
24063 Set the value of @var{sym_name} to @var{sym_value}.
24065 @var{sym_name} (hex encoded) is the name of a symbol whose value the
24066 target has previously requested.
24068 @var{sym_value} (hex) is the value for symbol @var{sym_name}. If
24069 @value{GDBN} cannot supply a value for @var{sym_name}, then this field
24075 The target does not need to look up any (more) symbols.
24076 @item qSymbol:@var{sym_name}
24077 The target requests the value of a new symbol @var{sym_name} (hex
24078 encoded). @value{GDBN} will continue to supply the values of symbols
24079 (if available), until the target ceases to request them.
24084 @xref{Tracepoint Packets}.
24086 @item qThreadExtraInfo,@var{id}
24087 @cindex thread attributes info, remote request
24088 @cindex @samp{qThreadExtraInfo} packet
24089 Obtain a printable string description of a thread's attributes from
24090 the target OS. @var{id} is a thread-id in big-endian hex. This
24091 string may contain anything that the target OS thinks is interesting
24092 for @value{GDBN} to tell the user about the thread. The string is
24093 displayed in @value{GDBN}'s @code{info threads} display. Some
24094 examples of possible thread extra info strings are @samp{Runnable}, or
24095 @samp{Blocked on Mutex}.
24099 @item @var{XX}@dots{}
24100 Where @samp{@var{XX}@dots{}} is a hex encoding of @sc{ascii} data,
24101 comprising the printable string containing the extra information about
24102 the thread's attributes.
24105 (Note that the @code{qThreadExtraInfo} packet's name is separated from
24106 the command by a @samp{,}, not a @samp{:}, contrary to the naming
24107 conventions above. Please don't use this packet as a model for new
24115 @xref{Tracepoint Packets}.
24117 @item qXfer:@var{object}:read:@var{annex}:@var{offset},@var{length}
24118 @cindex read special object, remote request
24119 @cindex @samp{qXfer} packet
24120 @anchor{qXfer read}
24121 Read uninterpreted bytes from the target's special data area
24122 identified by the keyword @var{object}. Request @var{length} bytes
24123 starting at @var{offset} bytes into the data. The content and
24124 encoding of @var{annex} is specific to @var{object}; it can supply
24125 additional details about what data to access.
24127 Here are the specific requests of this form defined so far. All
24128 @samp{qXfer:@var{object}:read:@dots{}} requests use the same reply
24129 formats, listed below.
24132 @item qXfer:auxv:read::@var{offset},@var{length}
24133 @anchor{qXfer auxiliary vector read}
24134 Access the target's @dfn{auxiliary vector}. @xref{OS Information,
24135 auxiliary vector}. Note @var{annex} must be empty.
24137 This packet is not probed by default; the remote stub must request it,
24138 by supplying an appropriate @samp{qSupported} response (@pxref{qSupported}).
24140 @item qXfer:features:read:@var{annex}:@var{offset},@var{length}
24141 @anchor{qXfer target description read}
24142 Access the @dfn{target description}. @xref{Target Descriptions}. The
24143 annex specifies which XML document to access. The main description is
24144 always loaded from the @samp{target.xml} annex.
24146 This packet is not probed by default; the remote stub must request it,
24147 by supplying an appropriate @samp{qSupported} response (@pxref{qSupported}).
24149 @item qXfer:libraries:read:@var{annex}:@var{offset},@var{length}
24150 @anchor{qXfer library list read}
24151 Access the target's list of loaded libraries. @xref{Library List Format}.
24152 The annex part of the generic @samp{qXfer} packet must be empty
24153 (@pxref{qXfer read}).
24155 Targets which maintain a list of libraries in the program's memory do
24156 not need to implement this packet; it is designed for platforms where
24157 the operating system manages the list of loaded libraries.
24159 This packet is not probed by default; the remote stub must request it,
24160 by supplying an appropriate @samp{qSupported} response (@pxref{qSupported}).
24162 @item qXfer:memory-map:read::@var{offset},@var{length}
24163 @anchor{qXfer memory map read}
24164 Access the target's @dfn{memory-map}. @xref{Memory Map Format}. The
24165 annex part of the generic @samp{qXfer} packet must be empty
24166 (@pxref{qXfer read}).
24168 This packet is not probed by default; the remote stub must request it,
24169 by supplying an appropriate @samp{qSupported} response (@pxref{qSupported}).
24171 @item qXfer:spu:read:@var{annex}:@var{offset},@var{length}
24172 @anchor{qXfer spu read}
24173 Read contents of an @code{spufs} file on the target system. The
24174 annex specifies which file to read; it must be of the form
24175 @file{@var{id}/@var{name}}, where @var{id} specifies an SPU context ID
24176 in the target process, and @var{name} identifes the @code{spufs} file
24177 in that context to be accessed.
24179 This packet is not probed by default; the remote stub must request it,
24180 by supplying an appropriate @samp{qSupported} response (@pxref{qSupported}).
24186 Data @var{data} (@pxref{Binary Data}) has been read from the
24187 target. There may be more data at a higher address (although
24188 it is permitted to return @samp{m} even for the last valid
24189 block of data, as long as at least one byte of data was read).
24190 @var{data} may have fewer bytes than the @var{length} in the
24194 Data @var{data} (@pxref{Binary Data}) has been read from the target.
24195 There is no more data to be read. @var{data} may have fewer bytes
24196 than the @var{length} in the request.
24199 The @var{offset} in the request is at the end of the data.
24200 There is no more data to be read.
24203 The request was malformed, or @var{annex} was invalid.
24206 The offset was invalid, or there was an error encountered reading the data.
24207 @var{nn} is a hex-encoded @code{errno} value.
24210 An empty reply indicates the @var{object} string was not recognized by
24211 the stub, or that the object does not support reading.
24214 @item qXfer:@var{object}:write:@var{annex}:@var{offset}:@var{data}@dots{}
24215 @cindex write data into object, remote request
24216 Write uninterpreted bytes into the target's special data area
24217 identified by the keyword @var{object}, starting at @var{offset} bytes
24218 into the data. @var{data}@dots{} is the binary-encoded data
24219 (@pxref{Binary Data}) to be written. The content and encoding of @var{annex}
24220 is specific to @var{object}; it can supply additional details about what data
24223 Here are the specific requests of this form defined so far. All
24224 @samp{qXfer:@var{object}:write:@dots{}} requests use the same reply
24225 formats, listed below.
24228 @item qXfer:@var{spu}:write:@var{annex}:@var{offset}:@var{data}@dots{}
24229 @anchor{qXfer spu write}
24230 Write @var{data} to an @code{spufs} file on the target system. The
24231 annex specifies which file to write; it must be of the form
24232 @file{@var{id}/@var{name}}, where @var{id} specifies an SPU context ID
24233 in the target process, and @var{name} identifes the @code{spufs} file
24234 in that context to be accessed.
24236 This packet is not probed by default; the remote stub must request it,
24237 by supplying an appropriate @samp{qSupported} response (@pxref{qSupported}).
24243 @var{nn} (hex encoded) is the number of bytes written.
24244 This may be fewer bytes than supplied in the request.
24247 The request was malformed, or @var{annex} was invalid.
24250 The offset was invalid, or there was an error encountered writing the data.
24251 @var{nn} is a hex-encoded @code{errno} value.
24254 An empty reply indicates the @var{object} string was not
24255 recognized by the stub, or that the object does not support writing.
24258 @item qXfer:@var{object}:@var{operation}:@dots{}
24259 Requests of this form may be added in the future. When a stub does
24260 not recognize the @var{object} keyword, or its support for
24261 @var{object} does not recognize the @var{operation} keyword, the stub
24262 must respond with an empty packet.
24266 @node Register Packet Format
24267 @section Register Packet Format
24269 The following @code{g}/@code{G} packets have previously been defined.
24270 In the below, some thirty-two bit registers are transferred as
24271 sixty-four bits. Those registers should be zero/sign extended (which?)
24272 to fill the space allocated. Register bytes are transferred in target
24273 byte order. The two nibbles within a register byte are transferred
24274 most-significant - least-significant.
24280 All registers are transferred as thirty-two bit quantities in the order:
24281 32 general-purpose; sr; lo; hi; bad; cause; pc; 32 floating-point
24282 registers; fsr; fir; fp.
24286 All registers are transferred as sixty-four bit quantities (including
24287 thirty-two bit registers such as @code{sr}). The ordering is the same
24292 @node Tracepoint Packets
24293 @section Tracepoint Packets
24294 @cindex tracepoint packets
24295 @cindex packets, tracepoint
24297 Here we describe the packets @value{GDBN} uses to implement
24298 tracepoints (@pxref{Tracepoints}).
24302 @item QTDP:@var{n}:@var{addr}:@var{ena}:@var{step}:@var{pass}@r{[}-@r{]}
24303 Create a new tracepoint, number @var{n}, at @var{addr}. If @var{ena}
24304 is @samp{E}, then the tracepoint is enabled; if it is @samp{D}, then
24305 the tracepoint is disabled. @var{step} is the tracepoint's step
24306 count, and @var{pass} is its pass count. If the trailing @samp{-} is
24307 present, further @samp{QTDP} packets will follow to specify this
24308 tracepoint's actions.
24313 The packet was understood and carried out.
24315 The packet was not recognized.
24318 @item QTDP:-@var{n}:@var{addr}:@r{[}S@r{]}@var{action}@dots{}@r{[}-@r{]}
24319 Define actions to be taken when a tracepoint is hit. @var{n} and
24320 @var{addr} must be the same as in the initial @samp{QTDP} packet for
24321 this tracepoint. This packet may only be sent immediately after
24322 another @samp{QTDP} packet that ended with a @samp{-}. If the
24323 trailing @samp{-} is present, further @samp{QTDP} packets will follow,
24324 specifying more actions for this tracepoint.
24326 In the series of action packets for a given tracepoint, at most one
24327 can have an @samp{S} before its first @var{action}. If such a packet
24328 is sent, it and the following packets define ``while-stepping''
24329 actions. Any prior packets define ordinary actions --- that is, those
24330 taken when the tracepoint is first hit. If no action packet has an
24331 @samp{S}, then all the packets in the series specify ordinary
24332 tracepoint actions.
24334 The @samp{@var{action}@dots{}} portion of the packet is a series of
24335 actions, concatenated without separators. Each action has one of the
24341 Collect the registers whose bits are set in @var{mask}. @var{mask} is
24342 a hexadecimal number whose @var{i}'th bit is set if register number
24343 @var{i} should be collected. (The least significant bit is numbered
24344 zero.) Note that @var{mask} may be any number of digits long; it may
24345 not fit in a 32-bit word.
24347 @item M @var{basereg},@var{offset},@var{len}
24348 Collect @var{len} bytes of memory starting at the address in register
24349 number @var{basereg}, plus @var{offset}. If @var{basereg} is
24350 @samp{-1}, then the range has a fixed address: @var{offset} is the
24351 address of the lowest byte to collect. The @var{basereg},
24352 @var{offset}, and @var{len} parameters are all unsigned hexadecimal
24353 values (the @samp{-1} value for @var{basereg} is a special case).
24355 @item X @var{len},@var{expr}
24356 Evaluate @var{expr}, whose length is @var{len}, and collect memory as
24357 it directs. @var{expr} is an agent expression, as described in
24358 @ref{Agent Expressions}. Each byte of the expression is encoded as a
24359 two-digit hex number in the packet; @var{len} is the number of bytes
24360 in the expression (and thus one-half the number of hex digits in the
24365 Any number of actions may be packed together in a single @samp{QTDP}
24366 packet, as long as the packet does not exceed the maximum packet
24367 length (400 bytes, for many stubs). There may be only one @samp{R}
24368 action per tracepoint, and it must precede any @samp{M} or @samp{X}
24369 actions. Any registers referred to by @samp{M} and @samp{X} actions
24370 must be collected by a preceding @samp{R} action. (The
24371 ``while-stepping'' actions are treated as if they were attached to a
24372 separate tracepoint, as far as these restrictions are concerned.)
24377 The packet was understood and carried out.
24379 The packet was not recognized.
24382 @item QTFrame:@var{n}
24383 Select the @var{n}'th tracepoint frame from the buffer, and use the
24384 register and memory contents recorded there to answer subsequent
24385 request packets from @value{GDBN}.
24387 A successful reply from the stub indicates that the stub has found the
24388 requested frame. The response is a series of parts, concatenated
24389 without separators, describing the frame we selected. Each part has
24390 one of the following forms:
24394 The selected frame is number @var{n} in the trace frame buffer;
24395 @var{f} is a hexadecimal number. If @var{f} is @samp{-1}, then there
24396 was no frame matching the criteria in the request packet.
24399 The selected trace frame records a hit of tracepoint number @var{t};
24400 @var{t} is a hexadecimal number.
24404 @item QTFrame:pc:@var{addr}
24405 Like @samp{QTFrame:@var{n}}, but select the first tracepoint frame after the
24406 currently selected frame whose PC is @var{addr};
24407 @var{addr} is a hexadecimal number.
24409 @item QTFrame:tdp:@var{t}
24410 Like @samp{QTFrame:@var{n}}, but select the first tracepoint frame after the
24411 currently selected frame that is a hit of tracepoint @var{t}; @var{t}
24412 is a hexadecimal number.
24414 @item QTFrame:range:@var{start}:@var{end}
24415 Like @samp{QTFrame:@var{n}}, but select the first tracepoint frame after the
24416 currently selected frame whose PC is between @var{start} (inclusive)
24417 and @var{end} (exclusive); @var{start} and @var{end} are hexadecimal
24420 @item QTFrame:outside:@var{start}:@var{end}
24421 Like @samp{QTFrame:range:@var{start}:@var{end}}, but select the first
24422 frame @emph{outside} the given range of addresses.
24425 Begin the tracepoint experiment. Begin collecting data from tracepoint
24426 hits in the trace frame buffer.
24429 End the tracepoint experiment. Stop collecting trace frames.
24432 Clear the table of tracepoints, and empty the trace frame buffer.
24434 @item QTro:@var{start1},@var{end1}:@var{start2},@var{end2}:@dots{}
24435 Establish the given ranges of memory as ``transparent''. The stub
24436 will answer requests for these ranges from memory's current contents,
24437 if they were not collected as part of the tracepoint hit.
24439 @value{GDBN} uses this to mark read-only regions of memory, like those
24440 containing program code. Since these areas never change, they should
24441 still have the same contents they did when the tracepoint was hit, so
24442 there's no reason for the stub to refuse to provide their contents.
24445 Ask the stub if there is a trace experiment running right now.
24450 There is no trace experiment running.
24452 There is a trace experiment running.
24459 @section Interrupts
24460 @cindex interrupts (remote protocol)
24462 When a program on the remote target is running, @value{GDBN} may
24463 attempt to interrupt it by sending a @samp{Ctrl-C} or a @code{BREAK},
24464 control of which is specified via @value{GDBN}'s @samp{remotebreak}
24465 setting (@pxref{set remotebreak}).
24467 The precise meaning of @code{BREAK} is defined by the transport
24468 mechanism and may, in fact, be undefined. @value{GDBN} does
24469 not currently define a @code{BREAK} mechanism for any of the network
24472 @samp{Ctrl-C}, on the other hand, is defined and implemented for all
24473 transport mechanisms. It is represented by sending the single byte
24474 @code{0x03} without any of the usual packet overhead described in
24475 the Overview section (@pxref{Overview}). When a @code{0x03} byte is
24476 transmitted as part of a packet, it is considered to be packet data
24477 and does @emph{not} represent an interrupt. E.g., an @samp{X} packet
24478 (@pxref{X packet}), used for binary downloads, may include an unescaped
24479 @code{0x03} as part of its packet.
24481 Stubs are not required to recognize these interrupt mechanisms and the
24482 precise meaning associated with receipt of the interrupt is
24483 implementation defined. If the stub is successful at interrupting the
24484 running program, it is expected that it will send one of the Stop
24485 Reply Packets (@pxref{Stop Reply Packets}) to @value{GDBN} as a result
24486 of successfully stopping the program. Interrupts received while the
24487 program is stopped will be discarded.
24492 Example sequence of a target being re-started. Notice how the restart
24493 does not get any direct output:
24498 @emph{target restarts}
24501 <- @code{T001:1234123412341234}
24505 Example sequence of a target being stepped by a single instruction:
24508 -> @code{G1445@dots{}}
24513 <- @code{T001:1234123412341234}
24517 <- @code{1455@dots{}}
24521 @node File-I/O Remote Protocol Extension
24522 @section File-I/O Remote Protocol Extension
24523 @cindex File-I/O remote protocol extension
24526 * File-I/O Overview::
24527 * Protocol Basics::
24528 * The F Request Packet::
24529 * The F Reply Packet::
24530 * The Ctrl-C Message::
24532 * List of Supported Calls::
24533 * Protocol-specific Representation of Datatypes::
24535 * File-I/O Examples::
24538 @node File-I/O Overview
24539 @subsection File-I/O Overview
24540 @cindex file-i/o overview
24542 The @dfn{File I/O remote protocol extension} (short: File-I/O) allows the
24543 target to use the host's file system and console I/O to perform various
24544 system calls. System calls on the target system are translated into a
24545 remote protocol packet to the host system, which then performs the needed
24546 actions and returns a response packet to the target system.
24547 This simulates file system operations even on targets that lack file systems.
24549 The protocol is defined to be independent of both the host and target systems.
24550 It uses its own internal representation of datatypes and values. Both
24551 @value{GDBN} and the target's @value{GDBN} stub are responsible for
24552 translating the system-dependent value representations into the internal
24553 protocol representations when data is transmitted.
24555 The communication is synchronous. A system call is possible only when
24556 @value{GDBN} is waiting for a response from the @samp{C}, @samp{c}, @samp{S}
24557 or @samp{s} packets. While @value{GDBN} handles the request for a system call,
24558 the target is stopped to allow deterministic access to the target's
24559 memory. Therefore File-I/O is not interruptible by target signals. On
24560 the other hand, it is possible to interrupt File-I/O by a user interrupt
24561 (@samp{Ctrl-C}) within @value{GDBN}.
24563 The target's request to perform a host system call does not finish
24564 the latest @samp{C}, @samp{c}, @samp{S} or @samp{s} action. That means,
24565 after finishing the system call, the target returns to continuing the
24566 previous activity (continue, step). No additional continue or step
24567 request from @value{GDBN} is required.
24570 (@value{GDBP}) continue
24571 <- target requests 'system call X'
24572 target is stopped, @value{GDBN} executes system call
24573 -> @value{GDBN} returns result
24574 ... target continues, @value{GDBN} returns to wait for the target
24575 <- target hits breakpoint and sends a Txx packet
24578 The protocol only supports I/O on the console and to regular files on
24579 the host file system. Character or block special devices, pipes,
24580 named pipes, sockets or any other communication method on the host
24581 system are not supported by this protocol.
24583 @node Protocol Basics
24584 @subsection Protocol Basics
24585 @cindex protocol basics, file-i/o
24587 The File-I/O protocol uses the @code{F} packet as the request as well
24588 as reply packet. Since a File-I/O system call can only occur when
24589 @value{GDBN} is waiting for a response from the continuing or stepping target,
24590 the File-I/O request is a reply that @value{GDBN} has to expect as a result
24591 of a previous @samp{C}, @samp{c}, @samp{S} or @samp{s} packet.
24592 This @code{F} packet contains all information needed to allow @value{GDBN}
24593 to call the appropriate host system call:
24597 A unique identifier for the requested system call.
24600 All parameters to the system call. Pointers are given as addresses
24601 in the target memory address space. Pointers to strings are given as
24602 pointer/length pair. Numerical values are given as they are.
24603 Numerical control flags are given in a protocol-specific representation.
24607 At this point, @value{GDBN} has to perform the following actions.
24611 If the parameters include pointer values to data needed as input to a
24612 system call, @value{GDBN} requests this data from the target with a
24613 standard @code{m} packet request. This additional communication has to be
24614 expected by the target implementation and is handled as any other @code{m}
24618 @value{GDBN} translates all value from protocol representation to host
24619 representation as needed. Datatypes are coerced into the host types.
24622 @value{GDBN} calls the system call.
24625 It then coerces datatypes back to protocol representation.
24628 If the system call is expected to return data in buffer space specified
24629 by pointer parameters to the call, the data is transmitted to the
24630 target using a @code{M} or @code{X} packet. This packet has to be expected
24631 by the target implementation and is handled as any other @code{M} or @code{X}
24636 Eventually @value{GDBN} replies with another @code{F} packet which contains all
24637 necessary information for the target to continue. This at least contains
24644 @code{errno}, if has been changed by the system call.
24651 After having done the needed type and value coercion, the target continues
24652 the latest continue or step action.
24654 @node The F Request Packet
24655 @subsection The @code{F} Request Packet
24656 @cindex file-i/o request packet
24657 @cindex @code{F} request packet
24659 The @code{F} request packet has the following format:
24662 @item F@var{call-id},@var{parameter@dots{}}
24664 @var{call-id} is the identifier to indicate the host system call to be called.
24665 This is just the name of the function.
24667 @var{parameter@dots{}} are the parameters to the system call.
24668 Parameters are hexadecimal integer values, either the actual values in case
24669 of scalar datatypes, pointers to target buffer space in case of compound
24670 datatypes and unspecified memory areas, or pointer/length pairs in case
24671 of string parameters. These are appended to the @var{call-id} as a
24672 comma-delimited list. All values are transmitted in ASCII
24673 string representation, pointer/length pairs separated by a slash.
24679 @node The F Reply Packet
24680 @subsection The @code{F} Reply Packet
24681 @cindex file-i/o reply packet
24682 @cindex @code{F} reply packet
24684 The @code{F} reply packet has the following format:
24688 @item F@var{retcode},@var{errno},@var{Ctrl-C flag};@var{call-specific attachment}
24690 @var{retcode} is the return code of the system call as hexadecimal value.
24692 @var{errno} is the @code{errno} set by the call, in protocol-specific
24694 This parameter can be omitted if the call was successful.
24696 @var{Ctrl-C flag} is only sent if the user requested a break. In this
24697 case, @var{errno} must be sent as well, even if the call was successful.
24698 The @var{Ctrl-C flag} itself consists of the character @samp{C}:
24705 or, if the call was interrupted before the host call has been performed:
24712 assuming 4 is the protocol-specific representation of @code{EINTR}.
24717 @node The Ctrl-C Message
24718 @subsection The @samp{Ctrl-C} Message
24719 @cindex ctrl-c message, in file-i/o protocol
24721 If the @samp{Ctrl-C} flag is set in the @value{GDBN}
24722 reply packet (@pxref{The F Reply Packet}),
24723 the target should behave as if it had
24724 gotten a break message. The meaning for the target is ``system call
24725 interrupted by @code{SIGINT}''. Consequentially, the target should actually stop
24726 (as with a break message) and return to @value{GDBN} with a @code{T02}
24729 It's important for the target to know in which
24730 state the system call was interrupted. There are two possible cases:
24734 The system call hasn't been performed on the host yet.
24737 The system call on the host has been finished.
24741 These two states can be distinguished by the target by the value of the
24742 returned @code{errno}. If it's the protocol representation of @code{EINTR}, the system
24743 call hasn't been performed. This is equivalent to the @code{EINTR} handling
24744 on POSIX systems. In any other case, the target may presume that the
24745 system call has been finished --- successfully or not --- and should behave
24746 as if the break message arrived right after the system call.
24748 @value{GDBN} must behave reliably. If the system call has not been called
24749 yet, @value{GDBN} may send the @code{F} reply immediately, setting @code{EINTR} as
24750 @code{errno} in the packet. If the system call on the host has been finished
24751 before the user requests a break, the full action must be finished by
24752 @value{GDBN}. This requires sending @code{M} or @code{X} packets as necessary.
24753 The @code{F} packet may only be sent when either nothing has happened
24754 or the full action has been completed.
24757 @subsection Console I/O
24758 @cindex console i/o as part of file-i/o
24760 By default and if not explicitly closed by the target system, the file
24761 descriptors 0, 1 and 2 are connected to the @value{GDBN} console. Output
24762 on the @value{GDBN} console is handled as any other file output operation
24763 (@code{write(1, @dots{})} or @code{write(2, @dots{})}). Console input is handled
24764 by @value{GDBN} so that after the target read request from file descriptor
24765 0 all following typing is buffered until either one of the following
24770 The user types @kbd{Ctrl-c}. The behaviour is as explained above, and the
24772 system call is treated as finished.
24775 The user presses @key{RET}. This is treated as end of input with a trailing
24779 The user types @kbd{Ctrl-d}. This is treated as end of input. No trailing
24780 character (neither newline nor @samp{Ctrl-D}) is appended to the input.
24784 If the user has typed more characters than fit in the buffer given to
24785 the @code{read} call, the trailing characters are buffered in @value{GDBN} until
24786 either another @code{read(0, @dots{})} is requested by the target, or debugging
24787 is stopped at the user's request.
24790 @node List of Supported Calls
24791 @subsection List of Supported Calls
24792 @cindex list of supported file-i/o calls
24809 @unnumberedsubsubsec open
24810 @cindex open, file-i/o system call
24815 int open(const char *pathname, int flags);
24816 int open(const char *pathname, int flags, mode_t mode);
24820 @samp{Fopen,@var{pathptr}/@var{len},@var{flags},@var{mode}}
24823 @var{flags} is the bitwise @code{OR} of the following values:
24827 If the file does not exist it will be created. The host
24828 rules apply as far as file ownership and time stamps
24832 When used with @code{O_CREAT}, if the file already exists it is
24833 an error and open() fails.
24836 If the file already exists and the open mode allows
24837 writing (@code{O_RDWR} or @code{O_WRONLY} is given) it will be
24838 truncated to zero length.
24841 The file is opened in append mode.
24844 The file is opened for reading only.
24847 The file is opened for writing only.
24850 The file is opened for reading and writing.
24854 Other bits are silently ignored.
24858 @var{mode} is the bitwise @code{OR} of the following values:
24862 User has read permission.
24865 User has write permission.
24868 Group has read permission.
24871 Group has write permission.
24874 Others have read permission.
24877 Others have write permission.
24881 Other bits are silently ignored.
24884 @item Return value:
24885 @code{open} returns the new file descriptor or -1 if an error
24892 @var{pathname} already exists and @code{O_CREAT} and @code{O_EXCL} were used.
24895 @var{pathname} refers to a directory.
24898 The requested access is not allowed.
24901 @var{pathname} was too long.
24904 A directory component in @var{pathname} does not exist.
24907 @var{pathname} refers to a device, pipe, named pipe or socket.
24910 @var{pathname} refers to a file on a read-only filesystem and
24911 write access was requested.
24914 @var{pathname} is an invalid pointer value.
24917 No space on device to create the file.
24920 The process already has the maximum number of files open.
24923 The limit on the total number of files open on the system
24927 The call was interrupted by the user.
24933 @unnumberedsubsubsec close
24934 @cindex close, file-i/o system call
24943 @samp{Fclose,@var{fd}}
24945 @item Return value:
24946 @code{close} returns zero on success, or -1 if an error occurred.
24952 @var{fd} isn't a valid open file descriptor.
24955 The call was interrupted by the user.
24961 @unnumberedsubsubsec read
24962 @cindex read, file-i/o system call
24967 int read(int fd, void *buf, unsigned int count);
24971 @samp{Fread,@var{fd},@var{bufptr},@var{count}}
24973 @item Return value:
24974 On success, the number of bytes read is returned.
24975 Zero indicates end of file. If count is zero, read
24976 returns zero as well. On error, -1 is returned.
24982 @var{fd} is not a valid file descriptor or is not open for
24986 @var{bufptr} is an invalid pointer value.
24989 The call was interrupted by the user.
24995 @unnumberedsubsubsec write
24996 @cindex write, file-i/o system call
25001 int write(int fd, const void *buf, unsigned int count);
25005 @samp{Fwrite,@var{fd},@var{bufptr},@var{count}}
25007 @item Return value:
25008 On success, the number of bytes written are returned.
25009 Zero indicates nothing was written. On error, -1
25016 @var{fd} is not a valid file descriptor or is not open for
25020 @var{bufptr} is an invalid pointer value.
25023 An attempt was made to write a file that exceeds the
25024 host-specific maximum file size allowed.
25027 No space on device to write the data.
25030 The call was interrupted by the user.
25036 @unnumberedsubsubsec lseek
25037 @cindex lseek, file-i/o system call
25042 long lseek (int fd, long offset, int flag);
25046 @samp{Flseek,@var{fd},@var{offset},@var{flag}}
25048 @var{flag} is one of:
25052 The offset is set to @var{offset} bytes.
25055 The offset is set to its current location plus @var{offset}
25059 The offset is set to the size of the file plus @var{offset}
25063 @item Return value:
25064 On success, the resulting unsigned offset in bytes from
25065 the beginning of the file is returned. Otherwise, a
25066 value of -1 is returned.
25072 @var{fd} is not a valid open file descriptor.
25075 @var{fd} is associated with the @value{GDBN} console.
25078 @var{flag} is not a proper value.
25081 The call was interrupted by the user.
25087 @unnumberedsubsubsec rename
25088 @cindex rename, file-i/o system call
25093 int rename(const char *oldpath, const char *newpath);
25097 @samp{Frename,@var{oldpathptr}/@var{len},@var{newpathptr}/@var{len}}
25099 @item Return value:
25100 On success, zero is returned. On error, -1 is returned.
25106 @var{newpath} is an existing directory, but @var{oldpath} is not a
25110 @var{newpath} is a non-empty directory.
25113 @var{oldpath} or @var{newpath} is a directory that is in use by some
25117 An attempt was made to make a directory a subdirectory
25121 A component used as a directory in @var{oldpath} or new
25122 path is not a directory. Or @var{oldpath} is a directory
25123 and @var{newpath} exists but is not a directory.
25126 @var{oldpathptr} or @var{newpathptr} are invalid pointer values.
25129 No access to the file or the path of the file.
25133 @var{oldpath} or @var{newpath} was too long.
25136 A directory component in @var{oldpath} or @var{newpath} does not exist.
25139 The file is on a read-only filesystem.
25142 The device containing the file has no room for the new
25146 The call was interrupted by the user.
25152 @unnumberedsubsubsec unlink
25153 @cindex unlink, file-i/o system call
25158 int unlink(const char *pathname);
25162 @samp{Funlink,@var{pathnameptr}/@var{len}}
25164 @item Return value:
25165 On success, zero is returned. On error, -1 is returned.
25171 No access to the file or the path of the file.
25174 The system does not allow unlinking of directories.
25177 The file @var{pathname} cannot be unlinked because it's
25178 being used by another process.
25181 @var{pathnameptr} is an invalid pointer value.
25184 @var{pathname} was too long.
25187 A directory component in @var{pathname} does not exist.
25190 A component of the path is not a directory.
25193 The file is on a read-only filesystem.
25196 The call was interrupted by the user.
25202 @unnumberedsubsubsec stat/fstat
25203 @cindex fstat, file-i/o system call
25204 @cindex stat, file-i/o system call
25209 int stat(const char *pathname, struct stat *buf);
25210 int fstat(int fd, struct stat *buf);
25214 @samp{Fstat,@var{pathnameptr}/@var{len},@var{bufptr}}@*
25215 @samp{Ffstat,@var{fd},@var{bufptr}}
25217 @item Return value:
25218 On success, zero is returned. On error, -1 is returned.
25224 @var{fd} is not a valid open file.
25227 A directory component in @var{pathname} does not exist or the
25228 path is an empty string.
25231 A component of the path is not a directory.
25234 @var{pathnameptr} is an invalid pointer value.
25237 No access to the file or the path of the file.
25240 @var{pathname} was too long.
25243 The call was interrupted by the user.
25249 @unnumberedsubsubsec gettimeofday
25250 @cindex gettimeofday, file-i/o system call
25255 int gettimeofday(struct timeval *tv, void *tz);
25259 @samp{Fgettimeofday,@var{tvptr},@var{tzptr}}
25261 @item Return value:
25262 On success, 0 is returned, -1 otherwise.
25268 @var{tz} is a non-NULL pointer.
25271 @var{tvptr} and/or @var{tzptr} is an invalid pointer value.
25277 @unnumberedsubsubsec isatty
25278 @cindex isatty, file-i/o system call
25283 int isatty(int fd);
25287 @samp{Fisatty,@var{fd}}
25289 @item Return value:
25290 Returns 1 if @var{fd} refers to the @value{GDBN} console, 0 otherwise.
25296 The call was interrupted by the user.
25301 Note that the @code{isatty} call is treated as a special case: it returns
25302 1 to the target if the file descriptor is attached
25303 to the @value{GDBN} console, 0 otherwise. Implementing through system calls
25304 would require implementing @code{ioctl} and would be more complex than
25309 @unnumberedsubsubsec system
25310 @cindex system, file-i/o system call
25315 int system(const char *command);
25319 @samp{Fsystem,@var{commandptr}/@var{len}}
25321 @item Return value:
25322 If @var{len} is zero, the return value indicates whether a shell is
25323 available. A zero return value indicates a shell is not available.
25324 For non-zero @var{len}, the value returned is -1 on error and the
25325 return status of the command otherwise. Only the exit status of the
25326 command is returned, which is extracted from the host's @code{system}
25327 return value by calling @code{WEXITSTATUS(retval)}. In case
25328 @file{/bin/sh} could not be executed, 127 is returned.
25334 The call was interrupted by the user.
25339 @value{GDBN} takes over the full task of calling the necessary host calls
25340 to perform the @code{system} call. The return value of @code{system} on
25341 the host is simplified before it's returned
25342 to the target. Any termination signal information from the child process
25343 is discarded, and the return value consists
25344 entirely of the exit status of the called command.
25346 Due to security concerns, the @code{system} call is by default refused
25347 by @value{GDBN}. The user has to allow this call explicitly with the
25348 @code{set remote system-call-allowed 1} command.
25351 @item set remote system-call-allowed
25352 @kindex set remote system-call-allowed
25353 Control whether to allow the @code{system} calls in the File I/O
25354 protocol for the remote target. The default is zero (disabled).
25356 @item show remote system-call-allowed
25357 @kindex show remote system-call-allowed
25358 Show whether the @code{system} calls are allowed in the File I/O
25362 @node Protocol-specific Representation of Datatypes
25363 @subsection Protocol-specific Representation of Datatypes
25364 @cindex protocol-specific representation of datatypes, in file-i/o protocol
25367 * Integral Datatypes::
25369 * Memory Transfer::
25374 @node Integral Datatypes
25375 @unnumberedsubsubsec Integral Datatypes
25376 @cindex integral datatypes, in file-i/o protocol
25378 The integral datatypes used in the system calls are @code{int},
25379 @code{unsigned int}, @code{long}, @code{unsigned long},
25380 @code{mode_t}, and @code{time_t}.
25382 @code{int}, @code{unsigned int}, @code{mode_t} and @code{time_t} are
25383 implemented as 32 bit values in this protocol.
25385 @code{long} and @code{unsigned long} are implemented as 64 bit types.
25387 @xref{Limits}, for corresponding MIN and MAX values (similar to those
25388 in @file{limits.h}) to allow range checking on host and target.
25390 @code{time_t} datatypes are defined as seconds since the Epoch.
25392 All integral datatypes transferred as part of a memory read or write of a
25393 structured datatype e.g.@: a @code{struct stat} have to be given in big endian
25396 @node Pointer Values
25397 @unnumberedsubsubsec Pointer Values
25398 @cindex pointer values, in file-i/o protocol
25400 Pointers to target data are transmitted as they are. An exception
25401 is made for pointers to buffers for which the length isn't
25402 transmitted as part of the function call, namely strings. Strings
25403 are transmitted as a pointer/length pair, both as hex values, e.g.@:
25410 which is a pointer to data of length 18 bytes at position 0x1aaf.
25411 The length is defined as the full string length in bytes, including
25412 the trailing null byte. For example, the string @code{"hello world"}
25413 at address 0x123456 is transmitted as
25419 @node Memory Transfer
25420 @unnumberedsubsubsec Memory Transfer
25421 @cindex memory transfer, in file-i/o protocol
25423 Structured data which is transferred using a memory read or write (for
25424 example, a @code{struct stat}) is expected to be in a protocol-specific format
25425 with all scalar multibyte datatypes being big endian. Translation to
25426 this representation needs to be done both by the target before the @code{F}
25427 packet is sent, and by @value{GDBN} before
25428 it transfers memory to the target. Transferred pointers to structured
25429 data should point to the already-coerced data at any time.
25433 @unnumberedsubsubsec struct stat
25434 @cindex struct stat, in file-i/o protocol
25436 The buffer of type @code{struct stat} used by the target and @value{GDBN}
25437 is defined as follows:
25441 unsigned int st_dev; /* device */
25442 unsigned int st_ino; /* inode */
25443 mode_t st_mode; /* protection */
25444 unsigned int st_nlink; /* number of hard links */
25445 unsigned int st_uid; /* user ID of owner */
25446 unsigned int st_gid; /* group ID of owner */
25447 unsigned int st_rdev; /* device type (if inode device) */
25448 unsigned long st_size; /* total size, in bytes */
25449 unsigned long st_blksize; /* blocksize for filesystem I/O */
25450 unsigned long st_blocks; /* number of blocks allocated */
25451 time_t st_atime; /* time of last access */
25452 time_t st_mtime; /* time of last modification */
25453 time_t st_ctime; /* time of last change */
25457 The integral datatypes conform to the definitions given in the
25458 appropriate section (see @ref{Integral Datatypes}, for details) so this
25459 structure is of size 64 bytes.
25461 The values of several fields have a restricted meaning and/or
25467 A value of 0 represents a file, 1 the console.
25470 No valid meaning for the target. Transmitted unchanged.
25473 Valid mode bits are described in @ref{Constants}. Any other
25474 bits have currently no meaning for the target.
25479 No valid meaning for the target. Transmitted unchanged.
25484 These values have a host and file system dependent
25485 accuracy. Especially on Windows hosts, the file system may not
25486 support exact timing values.
25489 The target gets a @code{struct stat} of the above representation and is
25490 responsible for coercing it to the target representation before
25493 Note that due to size differences between the host, target, and protocol
25494 representations of @code{struct stat} members, these members could eventually
25495 get truncated on the target.
25497 @node struct timeval
25498 @unnumberedsubsubsec struct timeval
25499 @cindex struct timeval, in file-i/o protocol
25501 The buffer of type @code{struct timeval} used by the File-I/O protocol
25502 is defined as follows:
25506 time_t tv_sec; /* second */
25507 long tv_usec; /* microsecond */
25511 The integral datatypes conform to the definitions given in the
25512 appropriate section (see @ref{Integral Datatypes}, for details) so this
25513 structure is of size 8 bytes.
25516 @subsection Constants
25517 @cindex constants, in file-i/o protocol
25519 The following values are used for the constants inside of the
25520 protocol. @value{GDBN} and target are responsible for translating these
25521 values before and after the call as needed.
25532 @unnumberedsubsubsec Open Flags
25533 @cindex open flags, in file-i/o protocol
25535 All values are given in hexadecimal representation.
25547 @node mode_t Values
25548 @unnumberedsubsubsec mode_t Values
25549 @cindex mode_t values, in file-i/o protocol
25551 All values are given in octal representation.
25568 @unnumberedsubsubsec Errno Values
25569 @cindex errno values, in file-i/o protocol
25571 All values are given in decimal representation.
25596 @code{EUNKNOWN} is used as a fallback error value if a host system returns
25597 any error value not in the list of supported error numbers.
25600 @unnumberedsubsubsec Lseek Flags
25601 @cindex lseek flags, in file-i/o protocol
25610 @unnumberedsubsubsec Limits
25611 @cindex limits, in file-i/o protocol
25613 All values are given in decimal representation.
25616 INT_MIN -2147483648
25618 UINT_MAX 4294967295
25619 LONG_MIN -9223372036854775808
25620 LONG_MAX 9223372036854775807
25621 ULONG_MAX 18446744073709551615
25624 @node File-I/O Examples
25625 @subsection File-I/O Examples
25626 @cindex file-i/o examples
25628 Example sequence of a write call, file descriptor 3, buffer is at target
25629 address 0x1234, 6 bytes should be written:
25632 <- @code{Fwrite,3,1234,6}
25633 @emph{request memory read from target}
25636 @emph{return "6 bytes written"}
25640 Example sequence of a read call, file descriptor 3, buffer is at target
25641 address 0x1234, 6 bytes should be read:
25644 <- @code{Fread,3,1234,6}
25645 @emph{request memory write to target}
25646 -> @code{X1234,6:XXXXXX}
25647 @emph{return "6 bytes read"}
25651 Example sequence of a read call, call fails on the host due to invalid
25652 file descriptor (@code{EBADF}):
25655 <- @code{Fread,3,1234,6}
25659 Example sequence of a read call, user presses @kbd{Ctrl-c} before syscall on
25663 <- @code{Fread,3,1234,6}
25668 Example sequence of a read call, user presses @kbd{Ctrl-c} after syscall on
25672 <- @code{Fread,3,1234,6}
25673 -> @code{X1234,6:XXXXXX}
25677 @node Library List Format
25678 @section Library List Format
25679 @cindex library list format, remote protocol
25681 On some platforms, a dynamic loader (e.g.@: @file{ld.so}) runs in the
25682 same process as your application to manage libraries. In this case,
25683 @value{GDBN} can use the loader's symbol table and normal memory
25684 operations to maintain a list of shared libraries. On other
25685 platforms, the operating system manages loaded libraries.
25686 @value{GDBN} can not retrieve the list of currently loaded libraries
25687 through memory operations, so it uses the @samp{qXfer:libraries:read}
25688 packet (@pxref{qXfer library list read}) instead. The remote stub
25689 queries the target's operating system and reports which libraries
25692 The @samp{qXfer:libraries:read} packet returns an XML document which
25693 lists loaded libraries and their offsets. Each library has an
25694 associated name and one or more segment base addresses, which report
25695 where the library was loaded in memory. The segment bases are start
25696 addresses, not relocation offsets; they do not depend on the library's
25697 link-time base addresses.
25699 A simple memory map, with one loaded library relocated by a single
25700 offset, looks like this:
25704 <library name="/lib/libc.so.6">
25705 <segment address="0x10000000"/>
25710 The format of a library list is described by this DTD:
25713 <!-- library-list: Root element with versioning -->
25714 <!ELEMENT library-list (library)*>
25715 <!ATTLIST library-list version CDATA #FIXED "1.0">
25716 <!ELEMENT library (segment)*>
25717 <!ATTLIST library name CDATA #REQUIRED>
25718 <!ELEMENT segment EMPTY>
25719 <!ATTLIST segment address CDATA #REQUIRED>
25722 @node Memory Map Format
25723 @section Memory Map Format
25724 @cindex memory map format
25726 To be able to write into flash memory, @value{GDBN} needs to obtain a
25727 memory map from the target. This section describes the format of the
25730 The memory map is obtained using the @samp{qXfer:memory-map:read}
25731 (@pxref{qXfer memory map read}) packet and is an XML document that
25732 lists memory regions. The top-level structure of the document is shown below:
25735 <?xml version="1.0"?>
25736 <!DOCTYPE memory-map
25737 PUBLIC "+//IDN gnu.org//DTD GDB Memory Map V1.0//EN"
25738 "http://sourceware.org/gdb/gdb-memory-map.dtd">
25744 Each region can be either:
25749 A region of RAM starting at @var{addr} and extending for @var{length}
25753 <memory type="ram" start="@var{addr}" length="@var{length}"/>
25758 A region of read-only memory:
25761 <memory type="rom" start="@var{addr}" length="@var{length}"/>
25766 A region of flash memory, with erasure blocks @var{blocksize}
25770 <memory type="flash" start="@var{addr}" length="@var{length}">
25771 <property name="blocksize">@var{blocksize}</property>
25777 Regions must not overlap. @value{GDBN} assumes that areas of memory not covered
25778 by the memory map are RAM, and uses the ordinary @samp{M} and @samp{X}
25779 packets to write to addresses in such ranges.
25781 The formal DTD for memory map format is given below:
25784 <!-- ................................................... -->
25785 <!-- Memory Map XML DTD ................................ -->
25786 <!-- File: memory-map.dtd .............................. -->
25787 <!-- .................................... .............. -->
25788 <!-- memory-map.dtd -->
25789 <!-- memory-map: Root element with versioning -->
25790 <!ELEMENT memory-map (memory | property)>
25791 <!ATTLIST memory-map version CDATA #FIXED "1.0.0">
25792 <!ELEMENT memory (property)>
25793 <!-- memory: Specifies a memory region,
25794 and its type, or device. -->
25795 <!ATTLIST memory type CDATA #REQUIRED
25796 start CDATA #REQUIRED
25797 length CDATA #REQUIRED
25798 device CDATA #IMPLIED>
25799 <!-- property: Generic attribute tag -->
25800 <!ELEMENT property (#PCDATA | property)*>
25801 <!ATTLIST property name CDATA #REQUIRED>
25804 @include agentexpr.texi
25806 @node Target Descriptions
25807 @appendix Target Descriptions
25808 @cindex target descriptions
25810 @strong{Warning:} target descriptions are still under active development,
25811 and the contents and format may change between @value{GDBN} releases.
25812 The format is expected to stabilize in the future.
25814 One of the challenges of using @value{GDBN} to debug embedded systems
25815 is that there are so many minor variants of each processor
25816 architecture in use. It is common practice for vendors to start with
25817 a standard processor core --- ARM, PowerPC, or MIPS, for example ---
25818 and then make changes to adapt it to a particular market niche. Some
25819 architectures have hundreds of variants, available from dozens of
25820 vendors. This leads to a number of problems:
25824 With so many different customized processors, it is difficult for
25825 the @value{GDBN} maintainers to keep up with the changes.
25827 Since individual variants may have short lifetimes or limited
25828 audiences, it may not be worthwhile to carry information about every
25829 variant in the @value{GDBN} source tree.
25831 When @value{GDBN} does support the architecture of the embedded system
25832 at hand, the task of finding the correct architecture name to give the
25833 @command{set architecture} command can be error-prone.
25836 To address these problems, the @value{GDBN} remote protocol allows a
25837 target system to not only identify itself to @value{GDBN}, but to
25838 actually describe its own features. This lets @value{GDBN} support
25839 processor variants it has never seen before --- to the extent that the
25840 descriptions are accurate, and that @value{GDBN} understands them.
25842 @value{GDBN} must be compiled with Expat support to support XML target
25843 descriptions. @xref{Expat}.
25846 * Retrieving Descriptions:: How descriptions are fetched from a target.
25847 * Target Description Format:: The contents of a target description.
25848 * Predefined Target Types:: Standard types available for target
25850 * Standard Target Features:: Features @value{GDBN} knows about.
25853 @node Retrieving Descriptions
25854 @section Retrieving Descriptions
25856 Target descriptions can be read from the target automatically, or
25857 specified by the user manually. The default behavior is to read the
25858 description from the target. @value{GDBN} retrieves it via the remote
25859 protocol using @samp{qXfer} requests (@pxref{General Query Packets,
25860 qXfer}). The @var{annex} in the @samp{qXfer} packet will be
25861 @samp{target.xml}. The contents of the @samp{target.xml} annex are an
25862 XML document, of the form described in @ref{Target Description
25865 Alternatively, you can specify a file to read for the target description.
25866 If a file is set, the target will not be queried. The commands to
25867 specify a file are:
25870 @cindex set tdesc filename
25871 @item set tdesc filename @var{path}
25872 Read the target description from @var{path}.
25874 @cindex unset tdesc filename
25875 @item unset tdesc filename
25876 Do not read the XML target description from a file. @value{GDBN}
25877 will use the description supplied by the current target.
25879 @cindex show tdesc filename
25880 @item show tdesc filename
25881 Show the filename to read for a target description, if any.
25885 @node Target Description Format
25886 @section Target Description Format
25887 @cindex target descriptions, XML format
25889 A target description annex is an @uref{http://www.w3.org/XML/, XML}
25890 document which complies with the Document Type Definition provided in
25891 the @value{GDBN} sources in @file{gdb/features/gdb-target.dtd}. This
25892 means you can use generally available tools like @command{xmllint} to
25893 check that your feature descriptions are well-formed and valid.
25894 However, to help people unfamiliar with XML write descriptions for
25895 their targets, we also describe the grammar here.
25897 Target descriptions can identify the architecture of the remote target
25898 and (for some architectures) provide information about custom register
25899 sets. @value{GDBN} can use this information to autoconfigure for your
25900 target, or to warn you if you connect to an unsupported target.
25902 Here is a simple target description:
25905 <target version="1.0">
25906 <architecture>i386:x86-64</architecture>
25911 This minimal description only says that the target uses
25912 the x86-64 architecture.
25914 A target description has the following overall form, with [ ] marking
25915 optional elements and @dots{} marking repeatable elements. The elements
25916 are explained further below.
25919 <?xml version="1.0"?>
25920 <!DOCTYPE target SYSTEM "gdb-target.dtd">
25921 <target version="1.0">
25922 @r{[}@var{architecture}@r{]}
25923 @r{[}@var{feature}@dots{}@r{]}
25928 The description is generally insensitive to whitespace and line
25929 breaks, under the usual common-sense rules. The XML version
25930 declaration and document type declaration can generally be omitted
25931 (@value{GDBN} does not require them), but specifying them may be
25932 useful for XML validation tools. The @samp{version} attribute for
25933 @samp{<target>} may also be omitted, but we recommend
25934 including it; if future versions of @value{GDBN} use an incompatible
25935 revision of @file{gdb-target.dtd}, they will detect and report
25936 the version mismatch.
25938 @subsection Inclusion
25939 @cindex target descriptions, inclusion
25942 @cindex <xi:include>
25945 It can sometimes be valuable to split a target description up into
25946 several different annexes, either for organizational purposes, or to
25947 share files between different possible target descriptions. You can
25948 divide a description into multiple files by replacing any element of
25949 the target description with an inclusion directive of the form:
25952 <xi:include href="@var{document}"/>
25956 When @value{GDBN} encounters an element of this form, it will retrieve
25957 the named XML @var{document}, and replace the inclusion directive with
25958 the contents of that document. If the current description was read
25959 using @samp{qXfer}, then so will be the included document;
25960 @var{document} will be interpreted as the name of an annex. If the
25961 current description was read from a file, @value{GDBN} will look for
25962 @var{document} as a file in the same directory where it found the
25963 original description.
25965 @subsection Architecture
25966 @cindex <architecture>
25968 An @samp{<architecture>} element has this form:
25971 <architecture>@var{arch}</architecture>
25974 @var{arch} is an architecture name from the same selection
25975 accepted by @code{set architecture} (@pxref{Targets, ,Specifying a
25976 Debugging Target}).
25978 @subsection Features
25981 Each @samp{<feature>} describes some logical portion of the target
25982 system. Features are currently used to describe available CPU
25983 registers and the types of their contents. A @samp{<feature>} element
25987 <feature name="@var{name}">
25988 @r{[}@var{type}@dots{}@r{]}
25994 Each feature's name should be unique within the description. The name
25995 of a feature does not matter unless @value{GDBN} has some special
25996 knowledge of the contents of that feature; if it does, the feature
25997 should have its standard name. @xref{Standard Target Features}.
26001 Any register's value is a collection of bits which @value{GDBN} must
26002 interpret. The default interpretation is a two's complement integer,
26003 but other types can be requested by name in the register description.
26004 Some predefined types are provided by @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Predefined
26005 Target Types}), and the description can define additional composite types.
26007 Each type element must have an @samp{id} attribute, which gives
26008 a unique (within the containing @samp{<feature>}) name to the type.
26009 Types must be defined before they are used.
26012 Some targets offer vector registers, which can be treated as arrays
26013 of scalar elements. These types are written as @samp{<vector>} elements,
26014 specifying the array element type, @var{type}, and the number of elements,
26018 <vector id="@var{id}" type="@var{type}" count="@var{count}"/>
26022 If a register's value is usefully viewed in multiple ways, define it
26023 with a union type containing the useful representations. The
26024 @samp{<union>} element contains one or more @samp{<field>} elements,
26025 each of which has a @var{name} and a @var{type}:
26028 <union id="@var{id}">
26029 <field name="@var{name}" type="@var{type}"/>
26034 @subsection Registers
26037 Each register is represented as an element with this form:
26040 <reg name="@var{name}"
26041 bitsize="@var{size}"
26042 @r{[}regnum="@var{num}"@r{]}
26043 @r{[}save-restore="@var{save-restore}"@r{]}
26044 @r{[}type="@var{type}"@r{]}
26045 @r{[}group="@var{group}"@r{]}/>
26049 The components are as follows:
26054 The register's name; it must be unique within the target description.
26057 The register's size, in bits.
26060 The register's number. If omitted, a register's number is one greater
26061 than that of the previous register (either in the current feature or in
26062 a preceeding feature); the first register in the target description
26063 defaults to zero. This register number is used to read or write
26064 the register; e.g.@: it is used in the remote @code{p} and @code{P}
26065 packets, and registers appear in the @code{g} and @code{G} packets
26066 in order of increasing register number.
26069 Whether the register should be preserved across inferior function
26070 calls; this must be either @code{yes} or @code{no}. The default is
26071 @code{yes}, which is appropriate for most registers except for
26072 some system control registers; this is not related to the target's
26076 The type of the register. @var{type} may be a predefined type, a type
26077 defined in the current feature, or one of the special types @code{int}
26078 and @code{float}. @code{int} is an integer type of the correct size
26079 for @var{bitsize}, and @code{float} is a floating point type (in the
26080 architecture's normal floating point format) of the correct size for
26081 @var{bitsize}. The default is @code{int}.
26084 The register group to which this register belongs. @var{group} must
26085 be either @code{general}, @code{float}, or @code{vector}. If no
26086 @var{group} is specified, @value{GDBN} will not display the register
26087 in @code{info registers}.
26091 @node Predefined Target Types
26092 @section Predefined Target Types
26093 @cindex target descriptions, predefined types
26095 Type definitions in the self-description can build up composite types
26096 from basic building blocks, but can not define fundamental types. Instead,
26097 standard identifiers are provided by @value{GDBN} for the fundamental
26098 types. The currently supported types are:
26106 Signed integer types holding the specified number of bits.
26112 Unsigned integer types holding the specified number of bits.
26116 Pointers to unspecified code and data. The program counter and
26117 any dedicated return address register may be marked as code
26118 pointers; printing a code pointer converts it into a symbolic
26119 address. The stack pointer and any dedicated address registers
26120 may be marked as data pointers.
26123 Single precision IEEE floating point.
26126 Double precision IEEE floating point.
26129 The 12-byte extended precision format used by ARM FPA registers.
26133 @node Standard Target Features
26134 @section Standard Target Features
26135 @cindex target descriptions, standard features
26137 A target description must contain either no registers or all the
26138 target's registers. If the description contains no registers, then
26139 @value{GDBN} will assume a default register layout, selected based on
26140 the architecture. If the description contains any registers, the
26141 default layout will not be used; the standard registers must be
26142 described in the target description, in such a way that @value{GDBN}
26143 can recognize them.
26145 This is accomplished by giving specific names to feature elements
26146 which contain standard registers. @value{GDBN} will look for features
26147 with those names and verify that they contain the expected registers;
26148 if any known feature is missing required registers, or if any required
26149 feature is missing, @value{GDBN} will reject the target
26150 description. You can add additional registers to any of the
26151 standard features --- @value{GDBN} will display them just as if
26152 they were added to an unrecognized feature.
26154 This section lists the known features and their expected contents.
26155 Sample XML documents for these features are included in the
26156 @value{GDBN} source tree, in the directory @file{gdb/features}.
26158 Names recognized by @value{GDBN} should include the name of the
26159 company or organization which selected the name, and the overall
26160 architecture to which the feature applies; so e.g.@: the feature
26161 containing ARM core registers is named @samp{org.gnu.gdb.arm.core}.
26163 The names of registers are not case sensitive for the purpose
26164 of recognizing standard features, but @value{GDBN} will only display
26165 registers using the capitalization used in the description.
26174 @subsection ARM Features
26175 @cindex target descriptions, ARM features
26177 The @samp{org.gnu.gdb.arm.core} feature is required for ARM targets.
26178 It should contain registers @samp{r0} through @samp{r13}, @samp{sp},
26179 @samp{lr}, @samp{pc}, and @samp{cpsr}.
26181 The @samp{org.gnu.gdb.arm.fpa} feature is optional. If present, it
26182 should contain registers @samp{f0} through @samp{f7} and @samp{fps}.
26184 The @samp{org.gnu.gdb.xscale.iwmmxt} feature is optional. If present,
26185 it should contain at least registers @samp{wR0} through @samp{wR15} and
26186 @samp{wCGR0} through @samp{wCGR3}. The @samp{wCID}, @samp{wCon},
26187 @samp{wCSSF}, and @samp{wCASF} registers are optional.
26189 @subsection MIPS Features
26190 @cindex target descriptions, MIPS features
26192 The @samp{org.gnu.gdb.mips.cpu} feature is required for MIPS targets.
26193 It should contain registers @samp{r0} through @samp{r31}, @samp{lo},
26194 @samp{hi}, and @samp{pc}. They may be 32-bit or 64-bit depending
26197 The @samp{org.gnu.gdb.mips.cp0} feature is also required. It should
26198 contain at least the @samp{status}, @samp{badvaddr}, and @samp{cause}
26199 registers. They may be 32-bit or 64-bit depending on the target.
26201 The @samp{org.gnu.gdb.mips.fpu} feature is currently required, though
26202 it may be optional in a future version of @value{GDBN}. It should
26203 contain registers @samp{f0} through @samp{f31}, @samp{fcsr}, and
26204 @samp{fir}. They may be 32-bit or 64-bit depending on the target.
26206 The @samp{org.gnu.gdb.mips.linux} feature is optional. It should
26207 contain a single register, @samp{restart}, which is used by the
26208 Linux kernel to control restartable syscalls.
26210 @node M68K Features
26211 @subsection M68K Features
26212 @cindex target descriptions, M68K features
26215 @item @samp{org.gnu.gdb.m68k.core}
26216 @itemx @samp{org.gnu.gdb.coldfire.core}
26217 @itemx @samp{org.gnu.gdb.fido.core}
26218 One of those features must be always present.
26219 The feature that is present determines which flavor of m86k is
26220 used. The feature that is present should contain registers
26221 @samp{d0} through @samp{d7}, @samp{a0} through @samp{a5}, @samp{fp},
26222 @samp{sp}, @samp{ps} and @samp{pc}.
26224 @item @samp{org.gnu.gdb.coldfire.fp}
26225 This feature is optional. If present, it should contain registers
26226 @samp{fp0} through @samp{fp7}, @samp{fpcontrol}, @samp{fpstatus} and
26242 % I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
26244 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
26245 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
26246 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
26247 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
26248 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
26249 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/},}
26250 \centerline{{\bf\fontname\tenbf}, and}
26251 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
26252 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
26254 % Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 1991.